Order Number: MGCS041001C0 H21

Digital Imaging Systems

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020 DP-3530/4530/6030

[ Version 5.1 ]

WARNING
Thisserviceinformationisdesignedforexperiencedrepairtechniciansonlyandisnotintendedforusebythegeneralpublic. Itdoesnotcontainwarningsorcautionstoadvisenon-technicalindividualsofpotentialdangersinattemptingtoserviceaproduct. Productspoweredbyelectricityshouldbeservicedorrepairedonlybyexperiencedprofessionaltechnicians.Anyattempttoservice orrepairtheproductorproductsdealtwithinthisserviceinformationbyanyoneelsecouldresultinseriousinjuryordeath.

2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. Published in Japan.

This Product Uses Lead (Pb) Free Solder Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs).
Information regarding Lead-Free (PbF) solder: Distinction of PbF PCB: PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a mark following the PCB part numbers in a label on the PCB. Caution: Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder; typically the melting point is 50 - 70 F (30 - 40 C) higher. Please use a soldering iron with temperature control and adjust it to 700 20 F (370 10 C). Exercise care while using higher temperature soldering irons, do not heat the PCB for too long to prevent solder splash or damage to the PCB. Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100 F/600 C). ECO SOLDER M705 (available from Senju Metal Industry Co., Ltd.: URL: http://www.senju-m.co.jp) is recommended when repairing PbF PCBs.

The contents of this Service Manual and the Specifications are subject to change without notice. Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. reserves the right to make improvements in the product design without reservation and without notice. Published in Japan.

Important Notice
PleasereadthisnoticecompletelyBEFOREinstallingany optionalaccessories.Asfailuretoproperlyinstalltheadditional boardorconnectorwiththepowerON(onlythefrontpower switchOff)coulddamagethecopier'sSPCorSCboard. Pleasefollowtheinstructionsbelow: 1. ItisessentialthatyouturnOFFpowertotheMainPower Switchlocatedintherearofthecopier. 2. ItisessentialthatyouunplugtheMainACPowerCordfrom thewalloutlet. 3. Pleasecarefullyreadtheinstallationinstructionsandfollow eachstep.

Note 1: TheMainPowerSwitchlocationmaydifferslightlydependingonthemodel. Note 2: O=PowerOFF,l=PowerON

Note: If the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine. 1. TurnthePowerSwitchontheLeftSideofthemachinetotheOFFpositionfirst. 2. Waitapproximately10secondswhilethemachinewritestheclosingstatusontotheHardDisk DriveUnit. 3. TurntheMainPowerSwitchontheBackofthemachinetotheOFFposition. (Thisinterruptsallthepowertothemachine,butdoesnotdisconnectthemainline.) 4. UnplugtheACPowerCordtoshutthepowerOffcompletely.
* Thespecificationsaresubjecttochangewithoutnotice.PanasonicCommunicationsCo.,Ltd.reserves therighttomakeimprovementsintheproductdesignwithoutreservationandwithoutnotice.

<Beispiel: DP-6530/4530/6030>

Hinweis:

Precautions
For Your Safety
To prevent severe injury and loss of life, read this section carefully before servicing the Panasonic machine to ensure proper and safe operation of your machine. Please ensure that the machine is installed near a wall outlet and is easily accessible. This section explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual.

WARNING: Denotes a potential hazard that could result in serious injury or death. CAUTION: Denotes hazards that could result in minor injury or damage to the machine.

This section also explains the Warnings and Cautions used in the machine and/or this manual. These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must not be performed. These symbols are used to alert operators to a specific operating procedure that must be emphasized in order to operate the machine safely.

WARNING Power and Ground Connection Cautions

Ensure that the plug connection is free of dust. In a damp environment, a contaminated connector can draw a significant amount of current that can generate heat and eventually cause fire if left unattended over an extended period of time. Always use the power cord provided with your machine. When an extension power cord is required, always use a properly rated cord. 120 V/15 A or AC 220 - 240V/10 A If you use a cord with an unspecified current rating, the machine or plug may emit smoke or become hot to the touch. Do not attempt to repair, pull, bend, chafe or otherwise damage the power cord. Do not place a heavy object on the cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks. Never touch a power cord with wet hands. Danger of electric shock exists. If the power cord is damaged or insulated wires are exposed, contact the authorized Panasonic dealer for a replacement. Using a damaged cord can cause fire or electric shocks. Stop operation immediately if your machine emits smoke, excessive heat, unusual noise, or abnormal smell, or if water is spilt onto the machine. These conditions can cause fire. Immediately switch Off and unplug the machine, and contact the authorized Panasonic . dealer. Do not disconnect or reconnect the machine while the power switch is in the On position. Disconnecting a live connector can cause arcing, consequently deforming the plug and cause fire. When disconnecting the machine, grasp the plug instead of the cord. Pulling on a cord forcibly can damage it and cause fire or electric shock. When the machine is not used over an extended period of time, switch it Off and unplug it. If an unused machine is left connected to a power source for a long period, degraded insulation can cause electric shocks, current leakage or fire. Be sure to switch Off and unplug the machine before accessing the interior of the machine for cleaning, maintenance or fault clearance. Access to a live machine's interior can cause electric shock.

Once a month, unplug the machine and check the power cord for the following. If you notice any unusual condition, contact the authorized Panasonic . dealer The power cord is plugged firmly into the receptacle. The plug is not excessively heated, rusted, or bent. The plug and receptacle are free of dust. The cord is not cracked or frayed.

Operating Safeguards
Do not touch areas where these caution labels are attached to, the surface may be very hot and may cause severe burns. Do not place any liquid container such as a vase or coffee cup on the machine. Spilt water can cause fire or shock hazard. Do not place any metal parts such as staples or clips on the machine. If metal and flammable parts get into the machine, they can short-circuit internal components, and cause fire or electric shocks. If debris (metal or liquid) gets into the machine, switch Off and unplug the machine immediately. Operating a debris-contaminated machine can cause fire or electric shock. Do not try to alter the machine configuration or modify any parts. An unauthorized modification can cause smoke or fire.

Consumable Safeguards
Never dispose of toner, toner cartridge or a waste toner container into an open flame. Toner remaining in the cartridge can cause an explosion, burns and/or injuries. Keep button batteries/stamp out of the reach of children. If a button battery/stamp is swallowed accidentally, get medical treatment immediately.

CAUTION Installation and Relocation Cautions

Do not place the machine near heaters or volatile, flammable, or combustible materials such as curtains that may catch fire. Do not place the machine in a hot, humid, dusty or poorly ventilated environment. Prolonged exposure to these adverse conditions can cause fire or electric shocks. Place the machine on a level and sturdy surface that can with stand. If tilted, the machine may tip-over and cause injuries.
When relocating the machine, remove the toner and/or developer, and pack the machine with proper packing materials for shipping.

When moving the machine, be sure to unplug the power cord from the outlet. If the machine is moved with the power cord attached, it can cause damage to the cord which could result in fire or electric shock.

CAUTION Operating Safeguards

Do not place a magnet near the safety switch of the machine. A magnet can activate the machine accidentally, resulting in injuries. Do not use a highly flammable spray or solvent near the machine. It can cause fire. When copying a thick document, do not use excessive force to press it against the scanning glass. The glass may break and cause injuries. Never touch a labelled area found on or near the heat roller. You can get burnt. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, do not try to remove it yourself to avoid injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down. Do not use conductive paper, e.g. folding paper, carbon paper and coated paper. When a paper jam occurs, they can cause a short circuit and fire. Do not place any heavy object on the machine. An off-balance machine can tip-over or the heavy object can fall, causing damage and/or injuries. Keep the room ventilated when using the machine for an extended period of time to minimize the ozone density in the air. When copying with the document cover open, do not look directly at the exposure lamp. Direct eye exposure can cause eye fatigue or eye injury. Pull out paper trays slowly to prevent injuries. When removing jammed paper, make sure that no pieces of torn paper are left in the machine. A piece of paper remaining in the machine can cause fire. If a sheet of paper is wrapped around the heat roller, or when clearing a jammed paper that is difficult or impossible to see, do not try to remove it by yourself. Doing so can cause injuries or burns. Switch Off the machine immediately, and wait until it cools down.

Consumable Safeguards
Never heat the drum cartridge, or scratch its surface. A heated or scratched drum can be hazardous to your health. Do not mix new and old batteries together, as they can burst or leak, causing a fire or injuries. Be sure to use the specified type of batteries . only. Ensure that batteries are installed with correct polarity. Incorrectly installed batteries can burst or leak, resulting in spillage or injuries.

Others
When clearing a paper jam or other fault, follow the appropriate procedure given in this manual. The machine has a built-in circuit for protection against lightning-induced surge current. If lightning strikes in your neighborhood, switch Off the machine. Disconnect the power cord from the machine and reconnect only when the lightning has stopped. If you notice flickering or distorted images or noises on your audio-visual units, your machine may be causing radio interference. Switch it Off and if the interference disappears, the machine is the cause of the radio interference. Perform the following procedure until the interference is corrected. Move the machine and the TV and/or radio away from each other. Reposition or reorient the machine and the TV and/or radio. Unplug the machine, TV and/or radio, and replug them into outlets operating on different circuits. Reorient the TV and/or radio antennas and cables until the interference stops. For an outdoor antenna, ask your local electrician for support. Use a coaxial cable antenna.

memo

Table of Contents
Specifications Table .............................. 11
1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. 1.6. 1.7. 1.8. 1.9. Copy Function.........................................11 Fax, Printer, Network Scanner and Internet Fax Functions ............................19 System Combination...............................28 Options and Supplies List .......................29 External View..........................................31 Control Panel ..........................................34 Fans and Motors.....................................35 Sensors...................................................36 Clutches and Switches ...........................37 6.4. 6.5.

System Description ............................. 265

6.1. 6.2. 6.3. Copy Process ....................................... 265 Precautions with Consumables ............ 266 New Digital Image Control Qualitative Reasoning Based Adaptive Controller (New Digital QUANTUM) ..................... 268 Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) ..................................... 270 Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations ....................................... 272

Installation............................................ 281
7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. Precautions During Set Up................... 281 Unpacking ............................................ 283 Installation Procedure .......................... 284 Adjustment ........................................... 289

1.10. PC Boards ..............................................37

Disassembly Instructions ..................... 38

2.1. 2.2. 2.3. General Disassembly..............................38 Disassembly Instructions ........................39 Screw Identification Template...............115

Options and Supplies.......................... 290

8.1. Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX Option Installation (For DP-3530/4530/6030) .................... 290 Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX Option Installation (For DP-3520/4520/6020) .................... 294 Service Notes for "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation (For DP-3510/4510/6010) .................... 298 Installing the Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX (DA-GC601) (Not Available in the USA/Canada) ...... 302 Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC602) ........... 303 Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC601) ........... 305 Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC600) .......................... 307 Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-MC602) ......................................... 309 Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-MC601) ......................................... 311

Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points ........................................ 121

3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. Preventive Maintenance .......................121 Required Tools .....................................123 Preventive Maintenance Points ............124 Preventive Maintenance Check List .....126 Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter .......128 Updating the Firmware .........................130 Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order).................................141 Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side .......................145 QUANTUM Control in F8-14.................146

8.2.

8.3.

8.4.

8.5. 8.6. 8.7. 8.8.

3.10. Calibrating the LCD ..............................148

Troubleshooting .................................. 149

4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. 4.7. 4.8. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart ..........149 Improper LCD Display ..........................150 Printed Copy Quality Problems.............151 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface .......167 Error Codes (For Copier) ......................175 Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)......................................190 Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile).........196 Troubleshooting (For Printer)................203

8.9.

8.10. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC600) .................. 313 8.11. Installing the Network Scanner Module (DA-NS600) ............................. 315 8.12. Installing the Network Scanner Module for DDS (DA-NS601) ............... 316 8.13. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail Module (DA-NF600) ............................. 318

Service Modes ...................................... 205

5.1. 5.2. Service Modes (For Copier)..................205 Service Modes (For Facsimile) .............236

Table of Contents
8.14. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600)............................... 322 8.15. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) ........................................... 331 8.16. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)........................................... 337 8.17. Installing the DD Server Software (DA-WS20)........................................... 338 8.18. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600) .............................. 339 8.19. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16/64/128 MB (DA-SM16B/64B/28B).......................... 340 8.20. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048) ........................... 341 8.21. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS603) / Console 2 (DA-DS604) ........................ 342 8.22. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS601) / Console 2 (DA-DS602) ........................ 345 8.23. Installing the 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-MA301) ......................................... 348 8.24. Installing the Letter / Legal Size Adapter for 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-TK31)............................................ 351 8.25. Installing the Exit Tray (DA-XT600) ..... 356 8.26. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600).......................................... 359 8.27. Installing the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605) ............................ 370 8.28. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP31)............................................ 383 8.29. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330).......................................... 387 8.30. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A).......................... 393 8.31. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41)............................................ 402 8.32. Installing the Power Supply for Finisher (DA-PW600)...................... 410 8.33. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (DZTY000128).................. 412 8.34. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater (DZTQ000041)..................................... 414 8.35. Replacing the OPC Drum .................... 422 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. 9.6. 9.7. 9.8. 9.9. Network Layer ...................................... 431 Transport Layer .................................... 435 Upper Layer.......................................... 437 SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)............ 442 ITU T.37 and RFC2305 ........................ 443 Communication Protocols .................... 449 POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3) ........... 452

9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC .................. 455 9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP) ............. 456 9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature ................. 457 9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature ................... 460 9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature.................. 464 9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature............................... 464 9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature............................... 466 9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature............................... 468

Schematic Diagram ............................. 469

10.1. General Circuit Diagram....................... 469

Finisher Options .................................. 471

11.1. DA-FS600, DA-FS605, DA-SP31......... 471 11.2. DA-FS330............................................. 673 11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41............................ 711

General Network Information ............. 425

9.1. 9.2. Network Protocol.................................. 425 Layer Functions and Technology .......................................... 427

10

1 Specifications Table
1.1. Copy Function
Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Basic Specifications 1 Type 2 Platen 3 Original Position 4 Recording Paper Path 5 Face Up / Face Down 6 Drum 7 Copy Process 8 Developing Process 9 Toner Recycle 10 Fusing System 11 Max Original Size 12 Paper Size 1st Paper Tray (1,550 Sheet Paper Tray) Paper Tray

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

Console Fixed Left Center Face Down Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) Dry Electrostatic System Magnetic Dual Component Development System No Heat & Pressure Ledger (11 x 17 in) / A3 (297 x 420 mm) LTR A4 A4 LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS) A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4 (FLS) A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, B5-R No Less than Less than 30 sec. 180 sec. Less than 5.8 sec. Less than 4.5 sec. Less than 3.5 sec. For USA and Canada For EU For Other Destinations For USA and Canada For EU For Other Destinations For USA and Canada For EU For Other Destinations 68 F (20 C) From Platen/ Letter/ A4 Portrait/ 1st Paper Tray. Period between Start Key is pressed and Paper ejected.

Sheet Bypass Sheet Bypass Envelope 13 Warm-up Time

14 First Copy Time 15 Copy Speed Ledger / A3 Legal / B4, FLS Letter-R A4-R LTR / A4 16 Zoom Enlargement Reduction Zoom

20 cpm 23 cpm 28 cpm 27 cpm 35 cpm

27 cpm 31 cpm 37 cpm 36 cpm 45 cpm

34 cpm 39 cpm 49 cpm 48 cpm 60 cpm

Selected Original size / Copy size Selected Original size / Copy size 25 - 400%

1% Step

Ver. 5.1

11

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items 17 Maximum Tray Capacities Paper Tray Capacity Auto Size Setting Low Level Warning Sheet Bypass Capacity Auto Size Setting Paper Capacity (Std. Configuration) Max. Paper Capacity 18 Acceptable Paper Weight Paper Tray Sheet Bypass 19 Inverting ADF (i-ADF) Duplex Type Original Set Scanning Method

Description DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/ 3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030 Front loading universal Paper Tray 1,550 sheets x 1 550 sheets x 1 Yes (2nd Tray only) Empty only 50 sheets Yes 2,150 sheets 6,250 sheets 16-24 lb / 60-90 g/m2 15-35 lb / 55-133 g/m2 Yes (Standard) Yes (Standard) Face Up Sheet Through

Remarks

USA and Canada LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2) Other Destinations A4 : 80 g/m2

Option

For USA, Canada and EU For Other Destinations

USA and Canada LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2) Capacity (Original) 70 sheets (LTR / A4) Other Destinations A4 : 80 g/m2 Available for single side scanning only. From 30 to 70 degrees.

SADF Mode 20 21 Free Stop Multi Copy Range Gradation Text Text / Photo Photo Resolution Standard Sorting Memory Size Standard Page Memory Size Exit Tray Capacity Color Dimensions (W x D x H)

Yes Yes 1-999 sets 2 steps 2 step error diffusion 256 steps 600 dpi 32 MB 20 MB 250 sheets No 23.6 x 29.6 x 29.0 in (600 x 753 x 736 mm) 23.6 x 29.6 x 35.4 in (600 x 753 x 900 mm)

22 23 24 25 26 27

Scanning and Printing.

For Printing.

H: Up to Platen Glass. H: Up to i-ADF.

Ver. 5.1

12

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items 28 Occupancy Area (W x D)

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

29 Weight Options 1 Paper Feed System 550 sheets x1 (3rd) Paper Feed Module Paper Size Detection Low Level Paper Warning Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight 550 sheets x 2 (3rd/4th) Paper Feed Module Paper Size Detection Low Level Paper Warning Dimensions (W x D x H) Weight 3000 sheets Paper Feed Module Paper Size Detection Low Level Paper Warning Dimensions (W x D x H)

47.2 x 29.6 in (1,200 x 753 mm) 251 lb 258 lb 258 lb (114 kg) (117 kg) (117 kg) 283 lb 290 lb 290 lb (128.5 kg) (131.5 kg) (131.5 kg)

Includes Bypass Paper Tray. Main Unit only, without i-ADF. Main Unit with i-ADF.

Yes Manual (Control Panel) Empty only 23.6 x 28.7 x 11.4 in (600 x 730 x 290 mm) 63.5 lb (28.8 kg) Yes Manual (Control Panel) Empty only 23.6 x 28.7 x 11.4 in (600 x 730 x 290 mm) 66.1 lb (30.0 kg) Letter : 3,000 sheets Letter-R : 2,500 sheets Legal : 1,500 sheets Manual (Control Panel) Empty only 11.6 x 17.5 x 19.9 in (295 x 445 x 505 mm) 17.4 x 17.5 x 19.9 in (442 x 445 x 505 mm) 27.1 lb (12.3 kg) 37.0 lb (16.8 kg) 6,250 sheets Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes -

<DA-DS601> USA and Canada LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2) Other Destinations A4 : 80 g/m2 <DA-DS602> USA and Canada LTR : 20 lb (75 g/m2) Other Destinations A4 : 80 g/m2 <DA-MA301> LTR / LGL : 20 lb (75 g/m2)

With LTR-R / LGL Size Adapter (DA-TK31) With LTR-R / LGL Size Adapter (DA-TK31) DA-FS355A DA-FS330 DA-FS600 DA-FS605

Weight Max. Paper Capacity 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher 2-Bin Finisher 2-Bin Finisher 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Counter Key Counter Capability

2 3 4 5 6

7 Dehumidifier

Supplied as service part. Part Number: DZTQ000041

Ver. 5.1

13

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items 8 Electronic Sorting Board Optional Image Memory 1 (16 MB) Optional Image Memory 2 (64 MB) Optional Image Memory 3 (128 MB) Features 1 Automatic Features Auto Magnification Selection Auto Paper Selection Auto Density Control Auto Paper Tray Selection Auto Start Energy Saver Mode Standby Mode Energy Saver Mode Sleep Mode

Description DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/ 3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030 Standard (32 MB) Yes Yes Yes

Remarks CODEC + 32 MB memory

Only one of three available types can be installed.

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (20W) Turns Off the Heater Power. NW Function available For USA, Canada and EU With Finisher Power Supply NW Function not available For Other Destinations Without Finisher Power Supply NW Function not available Requires the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) option. Copier function Reservation while Power On Initializing

Yes (4W) Auto Off Mode Yes (3W)

Remote Diagnostic Machine Stops while Out of Toner 2 Additional Features Low Level Paper Warning Photo Mode Original Detection Release Edit / Effects Book Mode Edge Mode Margin Mode X-Y Zoom Page Numbering Inverse Mode (Negative / Positive) 14

Yes Yes Empty only Yes Yes

256-step (Gray Scale) Manually overriden when using the Original Size keys.

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

25 - 400% Available only when using the ADF.

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Centering Mode Mirror Mode Others (Inverting ADF & ADU) 2-Page Copy Mode 2 in 1 4 in 1 6 in 1 8 in 1 Booklet Mode Duplex Copy 12 21 22 Book2 Book Format Facing Pages Image Rotation (90 degrees) Electronic Sorting Rotation Sorting Insertion Job Cover Mode Page Insertion Mode OHP Interleave Mode Presentation Mode Department Counter i-ADF Multi Size Feed SADF Mode Original Counter Job Memory Job Time Display Concurrent Copy Tandem Copy Mode Remote Copy Mode Scan Once Print Many Mode Job Complete Notice Trial Copy Mode Weekly Timer User Mode Interrupt

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 Yes No

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

LDR LTR x 2 (A3 A4 x 2, B4 B5 x 2)

Copy from 4 single-sided pages to 1 booklet mode sheet.

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Non-copy / Copy 300 Departments LDR and LTR, LGL and LTR-R, A3 and A4, B4 and B5, A4-R and A5

Yes Yes No Yes (5) No Yes (12) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 15

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Electronic Counter Digital Sky Shot Mode Check / Slip Mode 3 Control Panel Display Status Lamp Key Original Size Copy Size Keypad Clear Stop Start Energy Saver Function Interrupt Reset One-Touch Key Mode Change LCD Main Indication Message Language (Default) Original Size / Image Indication Paper Size / Image Indication Paper Tray Selection Selected Paper Tray Status Original Mode Selection Copy Density Selection Setting Confirmation Zoom Magnification Function Classification Number of Copies SADF / Multi Size Feed Mode Error Code Finishing Warning Indicators Add Toner

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 Yes Yes Yes

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

Wide Touch Panel LCD Yes GREEN : Scanning / Printing RED : Alarm / Warning

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Copier / Printer / NW Scanner / Fax and Internet Fax Mode change. For USA and Canada For EU and Other Destinations

English (American) Specified Language Yes (with Image) Yes (with Image) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Text / Text-Photo / Photo

Ver. 5.1

16

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Toner Waste Container Full Add Paper (No Paper) Add Paper (Under 50 Sheets) Paper Jam Indication Paper Jam Location Service Alert Call User Error Machine Error History of Jam Errors 4 Main Unit Total Counter Max. Weight of Documents on the Platen Glass ADF with Document Guide Clip Pocket Operating Instructions Pocket Warning / Caution Label 5 Optical System Original Detection Method Scanning Method Dehumidifier Mechanical Multi Copy Mode 6 Process System Type Toner Developer Life Drum Life Toner Waste Container Dehumidifier Manual Add Toner Efficiency 1 Productivity Warm-Up Time from Standby ADF Productivity (LTR / A4) Inverting ADF

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes (Standard) 11 lb (5 kg) Yes Yes No

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

Mechanical Counter

Specified Language Reflective Photo Sensor Type 600 dpi CCD Yes No Separate OPC Unit and Developer Unit Type 24K 35K 240K 240K 240K Yes Yes Supplied as a Service Part Part Number: DZTQ000041

LTR / A4 Supplied as a Service Part Part Number: DZTQ000041 Manually adds toner to the developer (up to TDC threshold)

Approx. 30 sec.

Approx. 180 sec. 100%

68 F (20 C) Throughput

Ver. 5.1

17

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items ADU Copy Productivity (LTR / A4) Transport Method 12 1 copy 5 copies 10 copies PM Cycle 1 PM Cycle Major PM Minor PM (Cleaning) Packing Configuration 1 Packing Dimension (W x D x H)

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks When ejecting to Outer Tray

Stackless 45% 75% 90%

Throughput

120K -

120K -

240K 120K

2 Packing Weight 3 Accessories OPC Unit Developer Toner Toner Waste Container Outer Tray Operating Instructions Power Supply 1 Power Requirement 2 Power Consumption Ambient Conditions 1 Temperature 2 Relative Humidity 3 Safety 4 Energy Saver 5 EMI 6 Lead Free Solder (PbF)

28.5 x 34.3 x 42.9 in (725 x 870 x 1090 mm) 302 lb 309 lb (137 kg) (140 kg) 298 lb 304 lb (135 kg) (138 kg) Yes No No Yes Option Yes Yes 99 - 138 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz Single phase 180 - 264 VAC, 47 - 63 Hz Single phase Less than 1500 W 50 - 80 F (10 - 30 C) 30 - 80% UL1950 / CSA C22.2 No.950 EN60950

For USA and Canada For EU and Other Destinations

For USA and Canada For EU and Other Destinations

100 VAC Power Supply 220 VAC Power Supply

For USA and Canada For EU and Other Destinations

Energy Star Compliant Class A computing device in FCC Rules For USA and Canada Part 15 Refer to the Part Manual for This Product uses Lead Free (PbF) PCBs details

Ver. 5.1

18

MAR 2005

1.2.
1.2.1.

Fax, Printer, Network Scanner and Internet Fax Functions

Fax Function
Items DP-3510/ 3520/3530 Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 DP-6010/ 6020/6030

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

Main Specifications 1 Compatibility 2 PSTN Line Port 3 Leased Line Port 4 V.24 Line Port 5 Modem Speed 6 Coding Scheme 7 ECM 8 Short Protocol 9 Transmission Speed

G3 Yes No No 33.6 - 2.4 kbps JBIG / MMR / MR / MH Yes Yes (B, D) Approx. 3 sec. Transmission Std. 8 x 3.85 Fine 8 x 7.7 S-Fine 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi Reception Std. 8 x 3.85 Fine 8 x 7.7 S-Fine 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi CCD (i-ADF / Platen) Vertical 1.0 sec. 1.0 sec. 2.0 sec. 2.0 sec. Std. Fine S-Fine Horizontal 0.7 sec. 0.7 sec. 1.4 sec.

ITU-T Std. & Non-Std. (PCC) 1-Line Only

Conforms to ITU-T ITU-T Image No. 1 (A4, Std. Resolution)

10

Communication Resolution (pels/mm x lines/mm)

Scanner Mechanism 1 Scanning Device 2 Scanning Speed Resolution Std: 8 x 3.85 (pels/mm x lines/mm) Fine: 8 x 7.7 (pels/mm x lines/mm) S-Fine: 16 x 15.4 (pels/mm x lines/mm) 600dpi: 600 x 600 Scanning Resolution (pel/mm x lines/mm) Document Size (Max.) Effective Scanning Width A3 size TX / RX Reduction XMT

A4, Scanned in Vertical or Horizontal Direction

4 5 6 7

1.4 sec. 8 x 3.85 8 x 7.7 8 x 15.4 16 x 15.4 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi ADF: Ledger / A3 LDR (11.5 in) / A3 (292 mm) Yes Yes

Conforms to ITU-T A3 A3 to B4 / A3 to A4 / B4 to A4

Ver. 5.1

19

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items 8 ADF Capacity 9 Collation Stack Printer Mechanism 1 Recording Method 2 Recording Speed 3 Recording Resolution Fax

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 70 sheets Yes

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks Face-Up, feed from top page Face Down

LP 35 ppm 45 ppm 60 ppm (A4 (A4 (A4 Horizontal) Horizontal) Horizontal) 600 x 600 dpi 406 x 391 dpi

Invoice : Not supported. Ledger size is transmitted as A3 size for N. American 4 Recording Paper Size Ledger / Legal / Letter / A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 models. If A3 is received, approx. 1" of image on both edges are not printed on Ledger size paper. 5 Effective Printing Width 11.4 in (289 mm) Conforms to ITU-T A3 2,150 sheets 6 Recording Paper Capacity Optional max. 6,250 sheets 7 Collation Stack Yes Face Down 8 Consumables Toner Bottle, OPC Drum and Staples Fax Memory DP-3530/4530/6030: 3 MB (180 pages) Flash ROM, ITU-T Image No.1 1 Standard Memory DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020: (A4, Std. Resolution) 2 MB (120 pages) Expansion Flash Memory 4 MB 2 Optional Memory Card 8 MB Dual Operation 1 Multi Task Operation Yes 2 Direct XMT Reserve Yes 3 Memory XMT Reserve Yes Number of Memory Job 4 Yes (Max. 50 files) Files Dialing/Telephone Features Plus an additional 800 stations available to select from, when 1 Address Book Dialing 200 Stations the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is installed. Full Number Dialing Yes Max. 70 stations 2 (Buffered Dialing) Address Book Directory 3 Yes Search Dialing 200 Address Book + 70 Full 4 Total Auto Dialers 270 Stations Number Dialing 5 Program Dials 12 6 Max. Tel Number Digits 36

Ver. 5.1

20

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Max. Station Name Characters Direct Dialing 8 (Monitor Dialing) 9 Automatic Redialing 10 Manual Redialing 11 Line Monitor Speaker 12 Chain Dialing (Hybrid Dial) 13 Pulse / Tone Dialing 14 Pulse to Tone Change 15 Flash Key 16 Handset Transmission Features 1 Direct Transmission 2 Memory Transmission Quick Memory 3 Transmission Multi-Station Transmission 4 (Sequential Broadcasting) Direct Deferred 5 Transmission 6 Deferred Transmission Deferred Multi-Station 7 Transmission Priority Direct 8 Transmission Priority Memory 9 Transmission 10 Batch Transmission 90 Degree Rotation 11 Transmission 12 Cover Sheet 13 Confidential Mail Box 14 Multi-Copy Transmission 7 15 Memory Back-Up 16 Duplex Scanning Reception Features 1 Substitute Reception 2 Fixed Reduction

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 15 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

Voice mode

Available for Line-1 only In Monitor Dialing mode only 10 pps / DTMF

Page Retransmission

Max. 270 Stations ADF Deferred Transmission Max. 50 Timers

Priority ADF Transmission

Real Time (up to 5 Files)

20 Mailboxes FAX : Back-up with Flash Memory. Copy / Printer : No Back-up with D-RAM With Inverting ADF (i-ADF)

3 Auto Reduction

Yes

LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment LTR/A4/LGL: 70 - 100% (in 1% Steps), Top & Left Alignment

Ver. 5.1

21

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items 4 Overlap Printing 5 Receive to Memory Distinctive Ring Detector 6 (DRD) 90 Degree Rotation 7 Reception 8 Duplex Printing Polling 1 Polling 2 Turnaround Polling 3 Multi-Station Polling 4 Deferred Polling Deferred Multi-Station 5 Polling 6 Direct Polling Tx 7 Memory Polling Tx 8 Preset Polling Password Temporary Polling 9 Password 10 Continuous Polling Convenience 1 Panel Display 2 Voice Contact 3 Edit File Mode 4 Incomplete File Save 5 Automatic Cover Sheet Certainty 1 Verification Stamp 2 Header / Total Page Print 3 Transaction Journal 4 Comm. Journal 5 Last Ind. XMT Journal List Printouts 1 One-Touch List 2 ABBR. No. List 3 Program List 4 Address Book Search List 5 Fax Parameter List 6 File List 7 Ind. XMT Journal 8 Journal

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks Page End Approx. 0.51 in (13 mm)

Max. 270 Stations Max. 50 Timers Max. 50 Timers / 270 Stations 1 File

Wide Touch Panel Display No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

With View Mode With View Mode

200 Transactions / with View Mode With Image Data

Auto Dialer List With View Mode Last 200 Transactions

Ver. 5.1

22

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Identifications 1 Logo 2 Multiple Logo 3 Character ID 4 Numeric ID Special Communications 1 Password XMT / RCV 2 Selective Reception 3 Relay XMT Request 4 Relay XMT Center 5 Confidential XMT / Polling 6 Confidential Center 7 Mailbox XMT / Polling 8 Mailbox Center 9 File XMT 10 Fax Forward 11 Sub-address XMT 12 Sub-address RCV 13 OMR-XMT Standards 1 PSTN Others 1 Fax Access Code 2 PIN Code Access 3 Intelligent Redial (AI) 4 Department Code 5 Power Saver Mode 6 Self Diagnostic Function Remote Diagnostic 7 Function 8 Check & Call Function 9 V.24 / Encryption Interface

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530 Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes No

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

25 Characters 16 Characters 20 Digits

TSI Check

Received File Transfer (Only with Internet Fax Option) T. Routing

FCC Part 68: 1997 / Industry Canada No. CS-03: Issue 8 1996 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

For USA and Canada only 4 Files 300 Departmental Codes

Ver. 5.1

23

MAR 2005

1.2.2.

Printer Function

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Interface 1 Centronics Parallel I/F 2 LAN (Network) 3 USB Port 4 IEEE-1394 Printer Function 1 Printing Size 2 3 4 5 Bypass Stapling Printing Resolution (dpi) Interface

Description DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/ 3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030 Centronics Parallel Interface Ethernet 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX No No

Remarks

IEEE-1284 Compliant

6 OS 7 GDI 8 PDL (PCL6) 9 PDL (PS3) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Duplex Printing Collation Stack Status Monitor (Local) Network Printing Network Status Monitor Smoothing Applicable PC Multi-Task Operation Printing while Fax-XMT from Memory Printing while Fax-RCV into Memory Fax-XMT from Memory while Printing Fax-RCV into Memory while Printing Output to separate tray for 18 Printing, Fax, Copy 19 Font 20 Security Print

Ledger, Legal, Letter, Invoice, A3, A4, A4-R, A5, A5-R, B4 Yes Yes 600 x 600 Selectable, 600 dpi Printer Centronics Parallel Interface/Ethernet Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP Yes Requires Optional PCL6 Yes Emulation Kit Requires Optional PS / PCL6 Yes Emulation Kit Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes IBM PC, AT or Compatible Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Requires Optional PCL6 or PS / PCL6 Emulation Kit Requires Optional HDD Unit Max. 100 Boxes

Ver. 5.1

24

MAR 2005

1.2.3.

Network Scanner Function

Description DP-4510/ 4520/4530

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Interface 1 Centronics Parallel I/F 2 LAN (Network) 3 USB Port 4 IEEE-1394 Network Scanning Function 1 Scanning Device 2 Halftone 3 Max. Document Size 4 Scanning Resolution (dpi)

DP-3510/ 3520/3530

DP-6010/ 6020/6030

Remarks

No Ethernet 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX No No CCD (i-ADF / Platen) 256 Halftone Shades A3, Ledger 600 x 600 300 x 300 150 x 150 Win 98 / Me / Win NT 4.0 / Win 2000 / XP Yes Mult-page TIFF / PDF

IEEE-1284 Compliant

Firewire

With Error Diffusion Selectable, 600 dpi Optical Scanner

5 OS 6 2-Sided Scanning 7 File Format

8 Completion Notice

Yes

With i-ADF. PDF format is available for DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/ 6020/6030 only. Auto Pop-up on the PC Screen (requires Network Status Monitor - installed with PDMS Software)

9 Protocol

TCP/IP, Non-Std

Ver. 5.1

25

MAR 2005

1.2.4.

Internet Fax Function

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items Main Specifications Communication 1 Protocols 2 Max. Modem Speed 3 Coding Scheme

Description DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/ 3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030 TCP / IP NA MH / MMR / JBIG SMTP / MIME

Remarks

4 File Format

TIFF / PDF

5 Line Interface Scanner Mechanism 1 Max. Document Size 2 Effective Scanning Width Scanning Resolution (pel/mm x lines/mm)

RJ-45 (Ethernet) Ledger, A3 11.4 in (289 mm) Std 203 x 98 (8 x 3.85) Fine 203 x 196 (8 x 7.7) S-Fine 203 x 391 (8 x 15.4) 406 x 391 (16 x 15.4) 600dpi 600 x 600 dpi 600 dpi 11.4 in (289 mm)

PDF format is available for DP-3520/ 3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 only. Selectable (PDF format can be used for Scan-to-Email when sending to a PC. However, since current Internet Fax standards do not support this file format, it cannot be used for sending to another Internet Fax machine) Ethernet LAN

LAN: 600 dpi, 16 x 15.4 Scanning Resolution is available with Parameter setting

Printer Mechanism 1 Printing Resolution Effective Recording 2 Width Transmission Features 1 Multi-Task Operation 2 Memory Transmission Sequential Multi-Station 3 Transmission 4 Simultaneous MultiStation Transmission

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Simultaneous operation of G3 Fax and LAN is available

Max. 270 Stations (200 Address Book + 70 Full Number Dialing)

5 Sender Selection G3 / Email Mixed 6 Broadcasting 7 Deferred Transmission 8 Fax Forward 9 Sub-address RCV

Received File Transfer, only with Internet FAX Option Inbound Routing, only with Internet FAX Option

Ver. 5.1

26

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Items 10 Mail Header Email Header Print Selection Subject Line LAN Features Internet Fax 1 Communication 2 Internet Mail Reception Internet Fax Server 3 Features Internet Fax Relay XMT Email Relay MXT Received Fax / Email Forward PC to FAX Transmission Inbound Routing Address Book Registration from PC I-Fax Parameters Registration via Email Internet Delivery Confirmation Network Scanning Network Printing LPR / LPD GDI PDL 8 DHCP Client 9 LDAP 10 TIFF Viewer Certainty Comm. Journal 1 (w / Image) ID 1 Email Address

Description DP-3510/ DP-4510/ DP-6010/ 3520/3530 4520/4530 6020/6030 Yes Random Entry Yes Yes

Remarks

All or From / To / Subject only

A3 Communication is available with Parameter setting

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Internet Fax Internet Fax G3FAX PC Internet Fax G3FAX Local print available Requires Panafax Desktop Software Using Sub-Address Local print available Via Email

4 5 6 7

With MDN 600 dpi 600 dpi Requires Optional PCL6 or PS Emulation Kit Lightweight Directory Access Protocol Selectable, PDMS / TIFF Viewer Email from RCV side to Panasonic Internet FAX's only

Ver. 5.1

27

MAR 2005

1.3.

System Combination

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Inverting ADF (i-ADF) ADF PC Board

Scanner Unit

Document Sensor and Motor

Panel
(PNL PC Board)

Main PC Board (SC PC Board)

PCL6 Emulation Option PS/PCL6 Emulation Option Network Scanner Option

Fax Communication Option

Printer

MJR

Parallel Port Interface 10/100 Ethernet Interface

KEY Counter Harness Option

Automatic Duplex Unit

Internet Fax Option

Dehumidifier Heater Option

Electronic Sorting Board

Expansion Flash Memory Card 4 or 8MB

Image Memory 16, 64, 128MB Either Option

Hard Disk Option

SPC PC Board 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher 2-Bin Finisher 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher or Exit Tray (Outer)

DRV PC Board

1,550 Sheet Paper Tray

3000 Sheet Paper Tray 550 Sheet Paper Tray

550 Sheet x 1 Paper Tray

550 Sheet x 2 Paper Tray

Standard Configuration Option

Ver. 5.1

28

MAR 2005

1.4.

Options and Supplies List

Option Number DA-PC600 DA-MC600 DA-PC601 DA-MC601 DA-PC602

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Options Option Name Printer Controller Module for PCL6 Multi Page Description Language Controller Module for PS/PCL6 Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/ SPX Multi Page Description Language Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/ SPX Multi Page Description Language Controller Module for PS/PCL6-IPX/SPX Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX Document Distribution System Network Scanner Module Internet Fax / E-Mail Module Fax Communication Board Hard Disk Drive Unit Expansion Board Image Memory (16 MB) Image Memory (64 MB) Image Memory (128 MB) Expansion Flash Memory Card, 4 MB Expansion Flash Memory Card, 8 MB DD Server Software Accounting Software Stand Stand (Short) System Console 1 (Tray x 1) System Console 2 (Tray x 2) System Console 1 (Tray x 1) System Console 2 (Tray x 2) 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT) Letter-R / Legal Size Adapter for LCT (DA-MA301) Exit Tray (Outer) 2-Bin Finisher 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Punch Unit for DA-FS600/605 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Punch Unit for DA-FS355A 2-Bin Finisher Power Supply for Finisher Key Counter Harness Kit Dehumidifier Heater Remark For DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010 For DP-3520 / 4520 / 6020 (For USA and Canada, can also be used for DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010 without IPX/ SPX) For DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030 DA-MC602 DA-GC601 DA-WR10 DA-NS600 DA-NF600 DA-FG600 DA-HD60 DA-EM600 DA-SM16B DA-SM64B DA-SM28B UE-410047 UE-410048 DA-WS20 DA-WA10 DA-D351 DA-D352 DA-DS601 DA-DS602 DA-DS603 DA-DS604 DA-MA301 DA-TK31 DA-XT600 DA-FS600 DA-FS605 DA-SP31 DA-FS355A DA-SP41 DA-FS330 DA-PW600 DZTY000128 DZTQ000041 For DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 For Network Scanning Internet Fax / Email Communication G3 Fax Communication F-ROM Board (8 MB) For Electronic Sorting Additional Page Memory for Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) For DD Server Function For Accounting Function For USA and Canada only For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 For DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030 3,000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray For USA and Canada

For DP-4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030 For DP-3510/ 3520/3530/4510/4520/4530 For DP-3510 / 3520 / 3530 For Other than USA, Canada and Euro Destinations Supplied as a Service Part

Ver. 5.1

29

MAR 2005

Note: PCL6 is a Page Description Language of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PS/PS3 is a Page Description Language of the Adobe Systems Company. Supplies Part Name Toner Part Number DQ-TU24D DQ-TU35D DQ-TU241G DQ-TU351G FQ-SS32 DQ-SS35 Staple Cartridge FQ-SS50 FQ-SS66 OPC Drum Developer DQ-H240D DQ-Z241D

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks 24K for DP-3510/4510 35K for DP-6010 24K for DP-3520/3530/4520/4530 35K for DP-6020/6030 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS330 Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS355/ 355A Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch) Staple Cartridge Refills (3) for DA-FS600 / 605

Note: The Part Number(s) may differ for other than USA and Canada destinations. Please ask your sales company for details.

Ver. 5.1

30

MAR 2005

1.5.

External View

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Standard Configuration
29.8 in (758 mm)
(For USA only)
Product complies with DHHS Rules 21 CFR Subchapter J in effect at date of manufacture.

Top View

Manufacturer's name and address Factory ID

12.7 in (322 mm)

23.6 in (600 mm)

10.4 in (265 mm)

Left View

Front View

Right View

Rear View

CAUTION

THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM BATTERY. DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY REPLACED. REPLACE ONLY WITH THE SAME OR EQUIVALENT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF YOUR LOCAL SOLID WASTE OFFICIALS.

2. With Optional System Console Configuration

35.4 in (900 mm)

Ver. 5.1

31

10.6 in (269 mm)

MAR 2005

46.0 in (1169 mm)

35.4 in (900 mm)

3. Space Requirements With Options

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Copier + Exit Tray

3.9 in (100 mm) 29.8"(758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 23.6"(600 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

12.7 in (322 mm)

10.4 in (265 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

54.6 in (1387 mm)

Copier + Finisher
11.8 in (300 mm) 29.5 in (750 mm) 29.8 in (758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 23.6 in (600 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm) 10.4 in (265 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

83.3 in (2115 mm)

Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT

11.8 in (300 mm) 29.5 in (750 mm) 29.8 in (758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 11.4 in (290 mm) 11 in (280 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

23.6 in (600 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm) 19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

95.3 in (2420 mm)

Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT + (LT-R_LGL Adapter)

11.8 in (300 mm) 29.5 in (750 mm) 29.8 in (758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 23.6 in (600 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 17.3 in (440 mm)11 in (280 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm) 19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

101.2 in (2570 mm)

Ver. 5.1

32

MAR 2005

1.5.1.
1

Serial Number Contents

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The contents of the 11-digit Serial Number is as follows:

9 10 11

Sequential Production Number 5-Digit Sequential Production Number 00001 ~ 99999 = 1 ~ 99,999 units A0001 ~ Y9999 = 100,000 ~ 329,976 units (Letters I and O are skipped)

Model Number and Destination Code (Main Unit) 3-Digit number or alphanumeric representation (Except Letters I and O) For Example:
2QC = DP-3510-PU 2KM = DP-4510-PU 2KN = DP-6010-PU 3LR = DP-3520-PU 3LS = DP-4520-PU 3LT = DP-6020-PU 3ZH = DP-3530-PU 3ZJ = DP-4530-PU 3ZK = DP-6030-PU

Production Facility

Production Year Starting with Year 2001, the last 2-digits of the year is represented as: A ~ T A B C D E F G H I J : : : : : : : : : : 01 (2001) 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 (2010) K L M N O P Q R S T : : : : : : : : : : 11 (2011) 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 (2020)

Production Month A B C D E F : : : : : : January February March April May June G H I J K L : : : : : : July August September October November December

Ver. 5.1

33

MAR 2005

1.6.

Control Panel

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DP-3510/3420/451/4520/6010/6020

DP-3530/4530/6030

DP-6030

PRINTDATA

STATUS

ACTIVE

Ver. 5.1

34

MAR 2005

1.7.

Fans and Motors

ADF Paper Feed Motor ADF Feed Motor Cooling Fan3 Cooling Fan2 Cooling Fan1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Scanning Motor Corona Wire Cleaning Motor Ozone Fan Dust Fan Hopper Motor

Inverting Motor

Main Motor Drum Motor Suction Fan

Cooling Fan Lift Motor (Tray 1) Drive Motor Lift Motor (Tray 2) Lift Motor (Tray 3) Lift Motor (Tray 4)

Ver. 5.1

35

MAR 2005

1.8.

Sensors
ADF Exit Sensor ADF Original Sensor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

ADF Original Width Sensor1 ADF Original Width Sensor2 ADF Original Length Sensor1 ADF Original Length Sensor2 Platen Cover (ADF) Angle Sensor Platen Cover (ADF) Open Sensor Cleaning Sensor (Start) Cleaning Sensor (End) Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor TDC Sensor Toner Sensor Sheet Bypass Size Sensor Sheet Bypass NP Sensor Registration Sensor Right Cover Open Sensor Timing Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 1) NP Sensor (Tray 1) Paper Path Sensor (Tray 1) Intermediate Roller Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 2) NP Sensor (Tray 2) Paper Path Sensor (Tray 2) System Console Paper Path Sensor Size Sensor Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 3) NP Sensor (Tray 3) Paper Path Sensor (Tray 3) Upper Limit Sensor (Tray 4) NP Sensor (Tray 4) Paper Path Sensor (Tray 4) Release Cover Open Sensor

ADF Cover Open Sensor ADF Registration Sensor1 ADF Registration Sensor3 ADF Registration Sensor2 Home Position Sensor ADF Paper Pass Sensor Paper Size Sensor Exit Sensor Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor Inverting Exit Sensor Interlock Sensor Inverting Paper Sensor ADU Paper Feed Sensor ADU Intermediate Sensor ADU Exit Sensor Lower Exit Cover Sensor Inverting Paper Path Sensor Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor Toner Waste Container Full Detection Sensor Paper Remaining Sensor (Tray 1) Paper Remaining Sensor (Tray 2) Paper Remaining Sensor (Tray 3) Paper Remaining Sensor (Tray 4)

Ver. 5.1

36

MAR 2005

1.9.

Clutches and Switches

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

ADF Inverting Roller Clutch2 ADF Inverting Roller Clutch1 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch ADF Registration Roller Clutch1 ADF Registration Roller Clutch2 ADF Exit Roller Clutch ADF Inverting Roller Solenoid Paper Exit Transportation Roller Solenoid Fuser Cleaning Web Roller Solenoid Paper Exit Solenoid Interlock Switch Power Switch Front Door Switch Main Power Switch ADU Paper Feed Roller Clutch

ADF Pinch Solenoid Separator Solenoid ADU Registration Clutch Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Sheet Bypass) Pickup Roller Solenoid (Sheet Bypass) Intermediate Roller Clutch ADU Exit Roller Clutch Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 1) Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray 1) Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 2) Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray2) Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 3) Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray 3) Pickup Roller Solenoid (Tray 4) Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Tray 4) Intermediate Roller Clutch

1.10. PC Boards
Inverter PCB ADF PCB CCD PCB Inverter PCB MJR PCB PNL2 PCB DCB PCB DRV PCB PNL1 PCB PNL2 PCB Centronics I/F SC PCB FXB PCB LED PCB (DP-45xx/60xx only) SPC PCB LVPS for Finisher RLB PCB

LVPS ACD PCB NFL PCB

APF PCB

Ver. 5.1

37

MAR 2005

2 Disassembly Instructions
2.1. General Disassembly

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Pertinent Disassembly Instruction sections are shown below.

i-ADF 2.2.3. Control Panel Unit 2.2.5. Paper Exit Transportation 2.2.15. Fuser Unit 2.2.11. ADU 2.2.9. Bias Charge Unit 2.2.10. Drum Unit 2.2.8. Developer Unit 2.2.7. Scanner Unit 2.2.4. LSU 2.2.12. Sheet Bypass Unit 2.2.14. Drive Unit 2.2.17. Paper Feed Module 2.2.13. 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT) 2.2.19. Hopper Unit 2.2.6. System Console 2.2.18.

Filters 2.2.1.

Toner Waste Container 2.2.2.

PC Boards 2.2.16.

Ver. 5.1

38

MAR 2005

2.2.
2.2.1.

Disassembly Instructions
Filters

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Turn the Power Switches to the OFF position. (2) Disconnect the AC Power Cord (4911). (3) Open the Right Cover. (4) Remove 3 Screws (H8). (5) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (117).

(6) Remove the Ozone Filter 1 (4204).

(7) Remove the Dust Filter Cover (4217).

(8) Remove the Dust Filter (4218).

Ver. 5.1

39

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 Cover (106).

(10) Remove the Ozone Filter 2 (107).

<Following steps (11)~(15) are not applied for USA and Canada> (11) Remove 9 Screws (H8). (12) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (110).

(13) Remove the Ozone Filter 4 (4226).

Ver. 5.1

40

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(14) Remove 2 Screws (21). (15) Pull the Rear Frame 2 (3910) and remove the Ozone Filter 4 (4226). Note: To prevent Rear Frame 2 from warping, do not pull hard on it.

Ver. 5.1

41

MAR 2005

2.2.2.

Toner Waste Container

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Right Cover. (2) Remove 3 Screws (H8). (3) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (117).

(4) Remove the Toner Waste Container (4108).

Ver. 5.1

42

MAR 2005

2.2.3.

Inverting-Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF) Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly. (2) Clean the Exit Roller (814).

(3) Open the ADF Cover.

(4) Clean the Pickup Roller (511), Paper Feed Roller (508), Separation Roller (610) and Registration Roller 1 (817) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(5) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).

Ver. 5.1

43

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(6) Remove the Paper Feed Roller Shaft (505) Assembly in the arrow direction.

(7) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (508).

(8) Move the Pickup Bracket. (9) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H7).

(10) Remove the Pickup Roller Shaft (510). (11) Remove the Pickup Roller (511).

Ver. 5.1

44

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Remove 3 Screws (J9). (13) Remove the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 1 (601).

(14) Remove the Separation Roller Assembly.

(15) Remove the Snap Ring (H6).

Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the Snap Ring is installed properly as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

45

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(16) Remove the Separation Roller Shaft (607). (17) Remove the Separation Roller (610). Note: When reassembling the Separation Roller, make sure that the Yellow Tooler's Die on the side of the roller is positioned as illustrated (facing the Front Frame).

(18) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide 2 Assembly. (19) Clean the Inverting Roller (809) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(20) Open the ADF Unit. (21) Remove 2 Screws (H5). (22) Remove the ADF Front Cover (418). (23) Close the ADF Unit.

Note: Release 3 Latch Hooks to remove the ADF Front Cover.

Ver. 5.1

46

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(24) Remove 1 Screw (J2). (25) Loosen 3 Screws (H8). (26) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly. (27) Remove the ADF Rear Cover (627).

(28) Remove 1 Screw (21). (29) Remove the Front ADF Cover Bracket (529).

(30) Release the ADF Cover Arm (624). (31) Remove the ADF Cover (502) Assembly.

Note: When reinstalling the ADF Cover Assembly, make sure that the Vibration Guide Sheet 1 and 2 are reinstalled properly as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

47

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(32) Remove 1 Screw (21). (33) Remove the Registration Guide 2 (721).

(34) Clean the Registration Roller 2 (818).

(35) Remove the Snap Ring (G6). (36) Remove the D8 Bearing (822).

(37) Remove 2 Snap Rings (G6). (38) Remove the Clutch 1 (801). (39) Remove the D8 Bearing (822).

Ver. 5.1

48

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(40) Remove the Registration Roller 2 (818).

(41) Remove 2 Registration Guide Sheets 1 (1119) and 2 Registration Guide Sheets 2 (1120). Caution: Do not remove the 3 indicated Screws.

Note: When reinstalling the Registration Guide Sheet 1 and 2, make sure that the Sheets are placed on the marks as illustrated.

Mark

Adhesive Double Coated Tape

Registration Guide Sheet

Ver. 5.1

49

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(42) Open the Lower Opening and Shutting Guide Assembly. (43) Lift up the Original Tray Assembly. (44) Nudge the Inverting Guide Assembly towards the right side to open it.

(45) Remove 2 Screws (21). (46) Remove the Inverting Guide Assembly.

(47) Remove 2 Screws (21). (48) Remove the Lower Exit Guide (716).

(49) Clean the Transport Roller (816).

Ver. 5.1

50

MAR 2005

2.2.4. 2.2.4.1.

Scanner Unit Scanner Lamp, CCD Assembly

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Move the Scanning Lamp to the position where it can be replaced. (See Sect. 5.1.7. F8-00.) (2) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (3) Remove the Right Platen Cover (112).

(4) Remove the Glass Assembly (120).

(5) Remove 2 Lamp Holding Plates (1204). (6) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

(7) Remove 2 Screws (21).

Ver. 5.1

51

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<Turn the Inverter PC Board Case upside down> (8) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Inverter PC Board (1209).

(9) Remove 2 Screws (F10). (10) Remove the Inverter PC Board (1209).

(11) Remove the Scanning Lamp (1228).

Note: Ensure that the Scanning Lamp Harness is reinstalled properly as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

52

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Remove 5 Screws (21). (13) Remove the CCD Cover (1213).

(14) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the CCD PC Board (CN850 and CN851).

Important: Before proceeding, make a note of the position of the alignment pointer. If the CCD is not reinstalled at the same position, it will affect the copy quality.

(15) Remove 2 Screws (1M). (16) Remove the CCD Unit (1234).

Ver. 5.1

53

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(17) Remove 2 Screws (20). (18) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the Sensors. (19) Remove 2 Multi Beam Sensors (1309).

(20) Remove 1 Screw (20). (21) Disconnect the Harness on the Sensor. (22) Remove the Multi Beam Sensor (1309).

(23) Clean the Mirror 1 (1202) and Mirror 2 (1214).

Ver. 5.1

54

MAR 2005

2.2.4.2.

Scanning Motor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove 9 Screws (H8). (2) Remove the Rear Upper Cover (110).

(3) Remove 2 Screws (21). (4) Remove the Harness Clamp 2 (3501).

(5) Disconnect the ADF Harness.

(6) Open the ADF Unit. (7) Remove 2 Screws (P4). (8) Remove the ADF Unit.

Ver. 5.1

55

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (10) Remove the Left Platen Cover (111). (11) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (12) Remove the Right Platen Cover (112).

(13) Remove 2 Screws (N6). (14) Remove 4 Screws (H8). (15) Remove the Rear Platen Cover (113).

(16) Disconnect the Harness. (17) Remove 2 Screws (1M). (18) Remove the Scanning Motor (1325).

Ver. 5.1

56

MAR 2005

2.2.5.

Control Panel Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover.

(2) Swing the Hopper Unit in the direction of the arrow as illustrated.

(3) Remove the Battery Holder.

(4) Remove 7 Screws (21). (5) Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover (101).

Ver. 5.1

57

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(6) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.

(7) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board (CN220, CN221, CN222 and CN224). (8) Remove 1 Screw (21).

(9) Disconnect 4 Harnesses on the PNL1 PC Board (CN223, CN225, CN229 and CN230).

(10) Remove 4 Screws (F10). (11) Remove the PNL1 PC Board (8503).

Ver. 5.1

58

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Disconnect the Harness on the PNL2 PC Board (CN251). (13) Remove 7 Screws (F10). (14) Remove the PNL2 PC Board (323).

(15) Disconnect the Harness on the INV PC Board (CN2). (16) Remove 2 Screws (F10). (17) Remove the INV PC Board (329).

(18) Remove 2 Screws (F10). (19) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper Control Panel Cover (322).

(20) Remove 1 Screw (F10). (21) Remove the PNL4 PC Board (314).

Ver. 5.1

59

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(22) Remove 4 Screws (F10). (23) Remove the PNL3 PC Board (313).

(24) Remove 2 Screws (H4). (25) Remove 2 Screws (H4). (26) Remove the LCD Module (328).

(27) Remove the Touch Panel (327). Note: Reinstall the Battery Holder after reassembling the Lower Control Panel Cover.

Ver. 5.1

60

MAR 2005

2.2.6.

Hopper Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (3) Rotate the Toner Bottle counter-clockwise and remove it.

(4) Clean any toner residue from the Lower Hopper Cover (1411).

(5) Remove 1 Screw (21). (6) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Motor Cover (1413).

(7) Disconnect the Harness on the Hopper Motor.

Ver. 5.1

61

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) Remove 2 Screws (21). (9) Remove the Hopper Motor (1414).

Ver. 5.1

62

MAR 2005

2.2.7.

Developer Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (3) Remove 1 Screw (J9). (4) Remove the Connector Cover (3930).

(5) Disconnect the Harness. (6) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out and turn it clockwise. (7) Remove the Developer Unit (1632). (8) Remove the Developer Exchange Knob (1405).

(9) Remove the old Splash Prevention Sheet (1602).

Note: When attaching the new Sheet, make sure that it is aligned on the left side edge as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

63

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(10) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper Developer Cover (1601).

<Removing the old Developer and Toner> (11) Install the Developer Exchange Knob (1405). (12) Turn the Developer Unit upside down over a suitable container and dump the used Developer and Toner by rotating the Knob.

(13) Remove the Duct Cover (1620).

(14) Clean the Duct Cover (1620) with a soft cloth, saturated with water.

Ver. 5.1

64

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(15) Clean the Developer Unit (1632) with a dry soft cloth.

Caution: Clean the Developer and Toner residue from the encircled areas thoroughly as shown in the illustrations. If not properly cleaned, problems related to static charge may occur. If E3-13 occurs, clean contamination on the Bias Terminal.

Ver. 5.1

65

MAR 2005

2.2.8.

Drum Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (3) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out and turn it clockwise. (4) Turn the Lifting Lever (2327) counter-clockwise. (5) Loosen 1 Screw and remove the Drum Unit.

Note: When handling the Drum Unit, hold by the Handle as illustrated. Caution: Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare hands.

(6) Remove 1 Screw (21). (7) Remove the Corona Unit (1851). (See steps (20 ~ 23), for cleaning instructions) Caution: The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

(8) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Frame Cover (1805).

Ver. 5.1

66

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9) Remove 4 Screws (21). (10) Remove the Front Fixation Plate (1822).

(11) Turn the Front Drum Bushing (1820) counter-clockwise and remove it.

(12) Remove 4 Screws (21). (13) Remove the Rear Fixation Plate (1844).

(14) Turn the Rear Drum Bushing (1842) clockwise and remove it.

Ver. 5.1

67

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(15) Remove the OPC Drum (1811).

(16) Remove the Blade Pressure Spring (1807).

(17) Remove 1 Screw (20). (18) Remove the Cleaning Blade (1847) Assembly.

Note: When reinstalling the Cleaning Blade Assembly, make sure that the Hooks are properly attached.

Ver. 5.1

68

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(19) Release 4 Latch Hooks and remove the Front and Rear Cleaning Felt (1849, 1848) Assemblies. <Cleaning the Density Sensor> (20) Clean the Density Sensor (CDS PC Board) (1846) with a dry cloth.

(21) Remove 1 Screw (L9).

(22) Turn the Corona Unit upside down. (23) Push-in the Grid Base (1910) to unlatch and remove the Corona Grid (1919).

(24) Clean the Corona Grid (1919) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol

Ver. 5.1

69

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(25) Remove the Front and Rear Block Sheets (1911 and 1920).

(26) Remove the Corona Wire (1915) and the Tension Spring (1914).

(27) Remove the Cleaning Base 3 (1918).

(28) Clean the Corona Case (1906) with a soft cloth or a cotton swab, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

Ver. 5.1

70

MAR 2005

2.2.9.

Auto Duplex Unit (ADU)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (3) Turn the Lifting Lever (2327) counter-clockwise.

(4) Pull the ADU Unit out.

(5) Clean the Exit Rollers A and B and C (2520, 2521, 2522).

(6) Remove 1 Screw (F10). (7) Remove the Intermediate Paper Guide (2404).

Ver. 5.1

71

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) Clean the Intermediate Roller (2403).

(9) Clean the Registration Roller (2430).

(10) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray. (11) Remove 1 Screw (25). (12) Remove the Right Lock Plate (3810).

(13) Remove 1 Screw (21). (14) Remove the Left Lock Plate (3812).

Ver. 5.1

72

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(15) Remove the ADU Unit (2351).

(16) Remove 1 Screw (24). (17) Remove the Lifting Lever (2327). (18) Remove 1 Screw (23). (19) Remove the Registration Release Knob (2328). (20) Remove 3 Screws (21). (21) Remove the Inner Cover (2332).

(22) Remove 2 Registration Guide Springs (2409) and 2 Front Registration Springs (2413). (23) Remove the Upper Registration Guide (2402).

(24) Disconnect the Harness. (25) Remove 1 Screw (23). (26) Remove the Clutch (2602). Note: Ensure the wire terminal is secured on the gear frame to prevent shorting of the clutch harness.

Ver. 5.1

73

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(27) Remove the Registration Gear (2344). (28) Remove 2 Snap Rings (K9).

(29) Remove the 2 Bearings (822). (30) Remove 2 Screws (F10).

(31) Remove 2 E-Rings (J7). (32) Remove the Intermediate Roller Gear (2621). (33) Remove 2 Bearings (2603). (34) Remove 2 Screws (F10).

(35) Open the Under Registration Guide (2416). (36) Disconnect the Harness. (37) Remove the Under Registration Guide (2416).

Ver. 5.1

74

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(38) Remove the Registration Roller (2430). (39) Remove the Intermediate Roller (2403).

Ver. 5.1

75

MAR 2005

2.2.10. Corona Unit 2

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (3) Pull out the ADU Unit. (See Sect. 2.2.9.) (4) Remove the Corona Unit 2 (2352).

(5) Remove the Front and Rear Block Sheets (2307, 2303).

(6) Remove the Tension Spring (2339). (7) Remove the Corona Wire 1 (2335). (8) Remove the Tension Spring (1914). (9) Remove the Corona Wire 2 (2334).

(10) Remove 1 Screw (F10). (11) Release the Harness from the Clamp.

Ver. 5.1

76

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Disconnect the Harness. (13) Pull out the LED PC Board (2343).

(14) Remove the LED Knob (2319).

Ver. 5.1

77

MAR 2005

2.2.11.

Fuser Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (3) Open the Upper Exit Cover.

(4) Push the Release Lever (8136) down in order to free the Exit Guide 7 (8126).

(5) Remove 2 Screws (N3). (6) Remove the Fuser Cover (121).

(7a) Disconnect 4 Harnesses. (For DP-4510/4520/ 4530/6010/6020/6030) (7b) Disconnect 5 Harnesses. (For DP-3510/3520/ 3530) (8) Remove 1 Screw (25). (9) Remove the Fuser Unit (2035).

Ver. 5.1

78

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(10) Release the Harnesses from Hooks.

(11) Remove 1 Screw (L6). (12) Remove the Solenoid (2012) Assembly.

(13) Remove 1 Screw (K2). (14) Remove the Solenoid (2012).

(15) Remove 2 Screws (K1). (16) Remove the Cleaning Web Unit.

Ver. 5.1

79

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(17) Remove 1 Screw (21). (18) Remove the Rear Cleaning Web Frame (2002).

(19) Remove the Cleaning Web Roller (2007) (Red). (20) Remove the Cleaning Web (2003) (White). Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the Cleaning Web is spread out.

(21) Remove 1 Screw (25). (22) Remove the Ground Plate 3 (2214). (23) Remove 1 Screw (K1). (24) Remove the Lower Paper Exit Guide (2213).

(25) Remove 2 Lower Separator Springs (2210). (26) Remove 4 Lower Separators (2228).

Ver. 5.1

80

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<For DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030> Follow steps (27) ~ (32) below. [For DP-3510/4510/6010, skip to steps (33) ~ (36)] (27) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H6). (28) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).

(29) Remove 2 Screws (36). (30) Remove the Upper Separator Bracket (2120).

(31) Remove 5 Tension Springs (2219). (32) Remove 5 Upper Separators (2227).

<For DP-3510/4510/6010> Follow steps (33) ~ (36) below. (33) Remove 2 Screws (25). (34) Remove the Upper Paper Exit Guide (2223).

Ver. 5.1

81

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(35) Remove 5 Tension Springs (2219). (36) Remove 5 Upper Separators (2227).

(37) Remove 1 Screws (36). (38) Remove 1 Screw (K2). (39) Remove the Rear Fuser Cover (2031).

(40) Remove 2 Screws (16).

(41) Remove 2 Fuser Lamps (2027, 2028). Note: 1. Do not touch the glass portion of the Fuser Lamps with bare hands. Grease from finger prints will shorten its life cycle, use isopropyl alcohol to clean finger prints. 2. When reinstalling, install the longer harness toward the rear side.

Ver. 5.1

82

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(42) Release the Harness from Hooks. (43) Remove 1 Screw (16). (44) Loosen 1 Screw inside of the Jam Release Knob by turning clockwise. (45) Remove the Jam Release Knob (2022). Note: The Jam Release Knob and Screw are assembled.

(46) Remove 1 Screw (K2). (47) Remove the Front Fuser Cover (2021).

(48) Remove 2 Screws (K1). (49) Remove 1 Screw (21). (50) Remove 1 Screw (K2). (51) Remove the Thermostat Base (2034).

(52) Remove 1 Screw (K3). (53) Remove the Thermistor Assembly (2019).

Ver. 5.1

83

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(54) Remove 1 Screw (B2). (55) Remove the Upper Front Guide (2102). (56) Remove 2 Screws (36). (57) Remove the Lower Front Guide (2113).

(58) Remove 2 Screws (K4). (59) Remove 1 Screw (K2). (60) Remove the Upper Fuser Bracket (2115).

(61) Remove the Fuser Roller (2105).

(62) Remove the Fuser Roller Gear (2108), 2 Fuser Roller Bearings (2107) and 2 Insulation Bushings (2106). Note: Before removing, note the position and/or direction of the Gear, Bearings and the Bushings for proper reinstallation.

Ver. 5.1

84

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(63) Remove the Pressure Roller (2205).

(64) Remove 2 Pressure Roller Bearings (2204). Note: Before removing, note the position and/or direction of the Pressure Roller Bearings for proper reinstallation.

Ver. 5.1

85

MAR 2005

2.2.12. LSU

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Sheet Bypass. (2) Open the Right Cover. (3) Remove 2 Screws (21). (4) Remove the LSU Cover (115).

(5) Remove the Right Platen Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.4.) (6) Remove 2 Screws (20). (7) Remove the LSU Shield Bracket (4009).

(8) Disconnect 3 Harnesses. (9) Remove the Glass Assembly (120). (See Sect. 2.2.4.)

Important: Before proceeding, make a note of the position of the alignment pointer. If the LSU is not reinstalled at the same position, it will affect the scanning quality.

Ver. 5.1

86

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(10) Remove 3 Screws (L1).

(11) Remove the LSU (4030).

(12) Turn the LSU upside down. (13) Clean the LSU Glass with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

Ver. 5.1

87

MAR 2005

2.2.13. Paper Feed Module

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Right Cover (2908). (2) Clean the Intermediate Rollers (3005, 3010) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol.

(3) Remove 1 Screw (J4).

(4) Remove the Right Cover (2908). (5) Push the Pin and remove the Right Cover (2908).

(6) Pull out the 1st and 2nd Paper Trays. (7) Disconnect the Harness. (8) Remove 1 Screw (J4).

Ver. 5.1

88

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9) Remove the 1st Paper Feed Module.

(10) Remove 1 Screw (21). (11) Remove the Front Feed Guide (3122).

(12) Remove the Bushing 2 (208) and One Way Clutch (3205).

(13) Lift the Reverse Roller (3219) Assembly and remove the Feed Roller (3204).

Ver. 5.1

89

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(14) Remove the Snap Ring (H7). (15) Remove the Pickup Roller (3211).

Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the Latches and the Notches are aligned as illustrated.

(16) Remove the Snap Ring (H6). (17) Remove the Reverse Roller (3219).

Note: When reinstalling, make sure that the Gears are aligned and that the Snap Ring is reinstalled properly as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

90

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(18) Disconnect the Harness. (19) Remove 1 Screw (J4).

(20) Remove the 2nd Paper Feed Module. Note: Follow the instructions for steps (10)~(17) of the 1st Paper Feed Module.

(21) Remove the Snap Ring (G6). (22) Remove the 3 Intermediate Roller (3005, 3010) Assemblies.

(23) Remove the Bearing (2603). (24) Remove the E-RIng (K5). (25) Remove the Coupling Roller (3001).

Ver. 5.1

91

MAR 2005

2.2.14. Sheet Bypass Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the LSU Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.12.) (2) Clean the Front and Rear Pickup Rollers (4603, 4611).

(3) Pull out the ADU (2351). (See Sect. 2.2.9.) Note: Ref. No. 2351 does not include all individual parts. (4) Remove 1 Screw (25). (5) Remove the Sheet Bypass.

(6) Remove 2 Screws (25). (7) Remove the Upper Sheet Bypass Guide (4605).

(8) Remove 2 Snap Rings (H6). (9) Remove 2 Stoppers (4601). (10) Remove 2 Spacers (4602). (11) Remove the Front Pickup Roller (4611) (White) and the Rear Pickup Roller (4603) (Black).

Ver. 5.1

92

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Remove 4 Screws (25). (13) Remove the Feed Cover (4638) Assembly.

(14) Remove the Snap Ring (H6). (15) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (4608).

(16) Remove the Feed Roller (4612).

Ver. 5.1

93

MAR 2005

2.2.15. Paper Exit Transportation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Lower Exit Cover (8011). (2) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (3) Remove the Exit Cover 3 (8003).

(4) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (5) Open the Paper Exit Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.11.) (6) Remove 4 Screws (25). (7) Remove the Plate Assembly.

(8) Clean the Pressure Roller (8311) and Exit Roller 3 (8312) with a soft cloth, saturated with isopropyl alcohol. Note: Ensure that the Front Cover and the Paper Exit Cover are opened before reinstalling the Plate Assembly back into the machine.

Ver. 5.1

94

MAR 2005

2.2.16. PC Boards

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Rear Upper Plate. (See Sect. 2.2.4.2.) (2) Disconnect All Harnesses on the DRV PC Board.

(3) Remove 7 Screws (21). (4) Remove the DRV PC Board (8601).

(5) Remove 4 Screws (21). (6) Remove the SC Cover Bracket (3303).

(7) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board.

Ver. 5.1

95

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) Remove 6 Screws (21). (9) Remove the SC PC Board (8401).

(10) Remove 2 Screws. (11) Remove the PRT PC Board (8402).

(12) Remove 5 Screws (H8). (13) Remove 1 Screw (M5). (14) Remove the Rear Lower Cover (108).

(15) Remove the Toner Waste Container. (See Sect. 2.2.2.) (16) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SPC PC Board.

Ver. 5.1

96

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(17) Remove 5 Screws (21). (18) Remove the SPC PC Board (8501).

(19) Remove 3 Screws (21). (20) Remove NFL PC Board (8603) Assembly.

(21) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the NFL PC Board (CN132 and CN133).

(22) Remove 2 Screws (21). (23) Remove 1 Screw (F10). (24) Remove the Finisher Bracket (3508).

Ver. 5.1

97

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(25) Remove 4 Screws (21). (26) Remove the Paper Exit Motor (8127) Assembly.

(27) Disconnect 3 Harnesses.

(28) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (29) Pull out 1st Paper Tray. (30) Remove 2 Screws (21). (31) Remove the LVPS Cover (203).

(32) Remove 1 Screw (21). (33) Pull out the LVPS Assembly.

Ver. 5.1

98

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(34) Disconnect the All Harnesses on the DC PC Board (CN141, CN142, CN143, CN144 and CN145). (35) Remove 2 Screws (21). (36) Remove the DC PC Board (8701).

(37) Remove 7 Screws (21). (38) Remove the Heat Sink (3311).

(39) Remove 6 Screws (21). (40) Remove the LVPS (8702).

(41) Disconnect 3 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board (CN101, CN105 and CN106). (42) Remove 2 Screws (21).

Ver. 5.1

99

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(43) Pull out the ACD PC Board (8704) Assembly. (44) Disconnect the Harness on the ACD PC Board (CN102).

(45) Disconnect 2 Harnesses on the ACD PC Board (CN103 and CN104). (46) Remove 6 Screws (21). (47) Remove the ACD PC Board (8704).

Ver. 5.1

100

MAR 2005

2.2.17. Drive Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Toner Waste Container. (See Sect. 2.2.2.) (2) Remove the Rear Upper Plate. (See Sect. 2.2.4.2.) (3) Remove the Rear Lower Plate and SC Cover Bracket. (See Sect. 2.2.16.) (4) Disconnect All Harnesses on the SC PC Board. (See Sect. 2.2.16.) (5) Loosen 5 Screws (21). (6) Remove the SC Bracket (3306). (7) Release the Harnesses from 2 Clamps.

(8) Loosen 2 Screws (21). (9) Remove the SC Support Bracket (3305).

(10) Disconnect the Harness.

Ver. 5.1

101

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(11) Remove 2 Screws (21). (12) Remove the Fan (4219) Assembly.

(13) Remove 2 Screws (20). (14) Remove the Fan (4221) Assembly.

(15) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (16) Remove the Rear Cover (9301).

(17) Remove 4 Screws (21). (18) Remove the Rear Frame 2 (3910).

Ver. 5.1

102

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(19) Open the Front Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (20) Move the Hopper Unit. (See Sect. 2.2.5.) (21) Pull out the ADU (2351) and Drum Unit (1852). Note: Ref. No. 2351 and 1852 do not include all individual parts.

(22) Remove the Fuser Cover. (See Sect. 2.2.11.) (23) Remove 1 Screw (24). (24) Pull out Fuser Unit (2035).

(25) Remove 1 Screw (L1). (26) Remove the Flange Cap (2701). (27) Remove the Fly Wheel (2702).

(28) Remove the Drum Drive Gear (2703).

Ver. 5.1

103

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(29) Remove the Pin (2743).

(30) Remove 2 Screws (21). (31) Move the Harness Bracket (3525).

(32) Disconnect the Harness on the Toner Waste Sensor. (33) Disconnect the Harness on the HVPS (CN101).

(34) Lift up the Toner Waste Pipe 2 (4111).

Ver. 5.1

104

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(35) Remove 3 Screws (21). (36) Remove the HVPS Bracket (3611).

(37) Remove 5 Screws (21). (38) Remove the HVPS (8705).

(39) Remove 1 Screw (21). (40) Remove the Belt Cover (2824).

(41) Release the F Belt (2820).

Ver. 5.1

105

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(42) Disconnect 2 Harnesses. (43) Remove 3 Screws (21). (44) Remove the Fan Assembly.

(45) Disconnect 8 Harnesses. (46) Release the Harnesses from 7 Clamps.

(47) Remove 13 Screws (25). (48) Remove the Drive Unit.

(49) Remove E-Ring (L2).

Ver. 5.1

106

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(50) Remove the Drum Drive Shaft (2704).

(51) Remove 4 E-Rings (J7 and K5), 2 Snap Rings (G6), 2 Pins (2840) and 6 Gears (2806 x 2, 2808, 2833, 2834 and 2835).

(52) Remove 11 Screws (21). (53) Remove the Drum Drive Plate (2709).

(54) Remove 3 Screws (21). (55) Remove the Drum Motor (2708).

Ver. 5.1

107

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(56) Disconnect the Harness and release it from the Clamp. (57) Remove 2 Screws (M3). (58) Remove the DC Brower (4220).

Ver. 5.1

108

MAR 2005

2.2.18. System Console 2.2.18.1. 3rd/4th Paper Feed Module

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Release Cover (9324). (2) Clean the Intermediate Roller (3010).

(3) Remove 1 Screw (H8). (4) Remove the Right Side Rear Cover (9319)

(5) Remove 1 Screw (J4).

(6) Push the Right Cover Shaft (2914) and remove Release Cover (9324).

Ver. 5.1

109

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7) Disconnect the Harness.

(8) Remove 1 Screw (J4). (9) Remove 3rd Paper Feed Module. Note: Follow the instructions for steps (10)~(17) of the 1st Paper Feed Module. (10) Remove the 4th Paper Feed Module, by following the steps for the 3rd Paper Feed Module. (11) Remove 2 Intermediate Rollers (3010), by following the steps for the ones in the Main Unit.

Ver. 5.1

110

MAR 2005

2.2.18.2. Drive Motor, Lift Motor 2, CST PC Board

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove 2 Screws (H8). (2) Remove the Rear Cover (9301).

(3) Disconnect the Harness on the System Console Drive Motor. (4) Remove 4 Screws (J4). (5) Remove 1 Screw (21). (6) Remove the Drive Motor (9410).

(7) Release the Harness from 2 Clamps. (8) Disconnect the Harness on the CST PC Board (CN602).

(9) Remove 4 Screws (J4). (10) Remove the Timing Belt (9401) and the Motor Bracket (9426) Assembly.

Ver. 5.1

111

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(11) Disconnect 2 Harnesses. (12) Remove 6 Screws (21). (13) Remove 2 Lift Motor 2 (4023) Assemblies.

(14) Release the Harness from the Clamp. (15) Remove 2 Screws (5M). (16) Remove the Lift Motor 2 (4023)

(17) Disconnect all Harnesses on the CST PC Board. (18) Remove 1 Screw (21).

(19) Release 5 Locking Supports (9419) on the CST PC Board. (20) Remove the APF PC Board (8707).

Ver. 5.1

112

MAR 2005

2.2.19. 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove 2 Screws (21). (2) Remove the Front Guide (9142).

(3) Clean the Feed Roller (9129).

(4) Remove the Snap Ring (H6). (5) Remove the Feed Roller (9129).

(6) Remove 4 Screws (J2). (7) Remove the Top Cover (8801).

Ver. 5.1

113

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) Remove the Snap Ring (H6). (9) Remove the Guide Bracket (9112). (10) Remove the Pickup Roller (9107).

(11) Remove 3 Screws (J3). (12) Remove the Reinforcement Bracket (9101).

(13) Remove the Paper Feed Roller (9111).

(14) Disconnect All Harnesses on the LCT PC Board. (15) Remove 1 Screw (21). (16) Release 5 Card Spacers (8903) on the LCT PC Board. (17) Remove the LCT PC Board (8408).

Ver. 5.1

114

MAR 2005

2.3.

Screw Identification Template

Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ref. No.

Part No. XYN3+J8FJ

Figure

Remark Screw
Screw (See Note)

16 19 20 21 23 24 25 35 36 51 6A 6L 1M 3F 3P

XYN3+J8

XTB3+8JFJ
XTB3+8J

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB3+8FFJ
XTB3+8F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB3+6FFJ
XTB3+6F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN3+F8FJ
XYN3+F8

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN4+F8FJ
XYN4+F8

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB4+8FFJ
XTB4+8F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN4+F6FJ
XYN4+F6

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN3+F6FJ
XYN3+F6

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB4+10FFJ
XTB4+10F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB3+12GFJ
XTB3+12G

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTW3+8SFJ
DZPB000014

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB4+6FFJ
XTB4+6F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN3+F5FJ
XYN3+F5

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTW+6SFJ
DZPB000028

Screw
Screw (See Note)

Ver. 5.1

115

MAR 2005

Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ref. No.

Part No. XYN3+F4FJ

XYN3+F4

Figure

Remark Screw
Screw (See Note)

5M B2 C8 F9 F10 G6 G7 H4 H5 H6 H7 H9 J2 J3 J4

XYC3+FF8FJ
DZPB000006

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTW3+8SFJ-TP
XTW3+8SFC

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYC3+FG10FJ
XTN3+10G

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB3+8GFJ
XTB3+8G

Screw
Screw (See Note)

FFPFJ0039B XYA3+EF6FJ
XYA3+EF6

Snap Ring Screw

Screw (See Note)

XTB26+8JFJ
XTB26+8J

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB4+10GFN

Silver Screw

FFPFJ0033B

Snap Ring

FFPFJ0041B FFPFA01632
FFPFA01631

Snap Ring Shoulder Screw

Shoulder Screw (See Note)

XTT4+8HFN XTB4+10GFJ
XTB4+10G

Silver Screw Screw

Screw (See Note)

XTB4+8HFJ
XTB4+8H

Screw
Screw (See Note)

Ver. 5.1

116

MAR 2005

Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ref. No.

Part No. XTB3+10GFJ

XTB3+10G

Figure

Remark Screw
Screw (See Note)

J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 L1

XUC3VM

E-Ring

XUC4VM XUC7VM XTB3+6GFJ

XTB3+6G

E-Ring

E-Ring Screw
Screw (See Note)

FFPFA01071
FFPFA0107B

Black Shoulder Screw

Black Shoulder Screw (See Note)

XSN3+W8FJ-TP
XSN3+W8FC

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTW3+12QFJ
XTW3+12Q

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN4+F16FJ
XYN4+F16

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XUC5VM

E-Ring

XUC6VM FFPFA01761
FFPFA0176

E-Ring Shoulder Screw

Shoulder Screw (See Note)

FFPFA01771
FFPFA0177

Shoulder Screw
Shoulder Screw (See Note)

FFPFJ0043B XYN4+F12FJ
XYN4+F12

Snap Ring Screw

Screw (See Note)

Ver. 5.1

117

MAR 2005

Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ref. No.

Part No. XUC9VM XYN26+F6FJ

Figure

Remark E-Ring Screw

Screw (See Note)

L2

L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L9 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 N1 N2

XYN26+F6

XTN4+34GFJ
XTN4+34G

Screw
Screw (See Note)

FFPFA01461
FFPFA0146

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYC3+FG8FJ
XYC3+FG8

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XUC2VM XTB3+4FFJ
XTB3+4F

E-Ring Screw
Screw (See Note)

NS010416 XYA3+FF6FJ
XYA3+FF6

Screw Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTW4+12LFJ
XTW4+12L

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTW3+8GFJ
XTW3+8G

Screw
Screw (See Note)

XTB26+6H

Screw

XTB3+8GFN XSB2+6FJ
XSB2+6

Silver Screw Screw

Screw (See Note)

XTB4+6HFJ
XTB4+6H

Screw
Screw (See Note)

Ver. 5.1

118

MAR 2005

Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ref. No.

Part No. XTB4+10FFJ

Figure

Remark Screw
Screw (See Note)

N3 N4

XTB4+10F

XTN3+12FFJB
XTN3+12FFUBC

Blue Screw
Blue Screw (See Note)

N5

XTN5+10FFJ
XTN5+10F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

N6

FFPFA01611
FFPFA0161

Shoulder Screw
Shoulder Screw (See Note)

N7

FFPFA01591
FFPFA0159

Screw
Screw (See Note)

N8

FFPFA01471
FFPFA0147

Screw
Screw (See Note)

N9

FFPFA00861
FFPFA0086B

Shoulder Screw
Shoulder Screw (See Note)

P1

XTB3+6FFJ-RP
B3X6TTS-RP

Screw
Screw (See Note)

P2

XTB3+12FFJ XTB3+12F

Screw
Screw (See Note)

P3

XTW3+8LFJ
XTW3+8L

Screw
Screw (See Note)

P4

PF2217P319A

Screw

P5

XTN3+8G XSN2+5FJ
XSN2+5

Screw Screw
Screw (See Note)

P6

P7

FFPFA0152 XTW3+8PFJ
XTW3+8P

Screw Screw
Screw (See Note)

P8

Ver. 5.1

119

MAR 2005

Note: For DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020 only

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ref. No.

Part No. XTW4+10PFJ

XTW4+10P

Figure

Remark Screw
Screw (See Note)

P9 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 R1 R8 S6 Y18

XYA4+FF10 XSB3+12FJ
XSB3+12

Screw Screw
Screw (See Note)

XSB26+4FJ
XSB2.6+4

Screw
Screw (See Note)

FFPFA0068B

Shoulder Screw

XTT4+8HFN DZPA000098
DZPA000076

Screw Shoulder Screw

Screw (See Note)

XTW3+8F
XTB4+7FFJ-RP
B4X7TTS-RP

Screw Screw
Screw (See Note)

XYN4+C6BN

Screw

DZPA000086

Silver Screw

XTB3+4GFN

Screw

Ver. 5.1

120

MAR 2005

3 Maintenance, Adjustments and Check Points

3.1. Preventive Maintenance

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Preventive maintenance is performed at specific intervals and consists of machine cleaning and parts replacement. It is essential to perform these service activities properly and at the specified intervals for customer satisfaction. The purpose of this service is to maintain machine performance and image quality. - You should prepare the necessary PM kits, replacement parts, and tools for cleaning beforehand. - After completing the preventive maintenance service, you should discard the used parts and packaging, in accordance with local regulations and clean the surrounding area. - Before servicing the equipment disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet. - Before using solvents such as IPA (Isopropyl alcohol), put on rubber gloves and eye protection. 1 Timing - Perform the preventive maintenance service in accordance with the chart of preventive maintenance areas listed in the service manual. Cleaning of Rollers - Rollers should be cleaned with water and cloth. - Use of IPA (Isopropyl alcohol) should be used sparingly. Precautions for Disassembly and Adjustment CAUTION! Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet before disassembling the machine. After taking the unit apart, do not attempt to operate the machine. When operating the machine with covers removed, be careful to avoid clothing being caught by moving components. While electricity is applied, the connectors of any PC Board must not be connected or disconnected. Use of a vacuum cleaner for the cleaning of the TDC sensor could cause electrostatic damage, therefore, use a blower brush or cotton swab for the cleaning of these parts. Before vacuuming the developer unit remove the TDC sensor. - When handling the drum, the precautions listed in section 3.3. should be followed. - Make sure to use the correct screw sizes. - Use toothed lock washers for the installation of ground wires to ensure electrical continuity. - To re-assemble, reverse the sequence of disassembly, unless otherwise specified. - Blown fuses should only be replaced with fuses of the same specified rating.

Ver. 5.1

121

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Precautions for Handling Lasers The laser optical system employed by this photocopier is completely sealed by a protective housing and an external cover. Therefore, the laser beam will not stray or leak during photocopier operation. However, when servicing the photocopier, take the following precautions: 1. Do not insert into the path of the laser, any screwdrivers or other tools that have high reflectance properties. 2. Before servicing the photocopier, take off any watches, rings, or other metallic objects that you may be wearing. (This is to avoid the danger of the laser entering the eye by reflecting off the metallic objects being worn.) Since the laser beam cannot be seen with the naked eye, please follow the above precautions for maximum safety.

Ver. 5.1

122

MAR 2005

3.2.

Required Tools

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Tools 1 Soft Cloth 2 Isopropyl Alcohol 3 Phillips Screwdriver (#2) 4 Stubby Phillips Screwdriver (#2)

5 6

Slotted Screwdriver (3/32 in) Tweezer

No. Tools 7 Pliers 8 Cotton Swab 9 Brush KS-660 - Conductive Grease 10 (Available from Shin-Etsu Silicones of America, Inc. URL: http://www.shinetsusilicones.com) Molykote EM-50L Grease 11 (Available from Dow Corning, URL: http://www.dowcorning.com)

3.2.1.
No. 1

Preventive Maintenance Method

Part Description Memory Data Important Action Check Comments 1. Print the RAM DATA for reference and as a pre-caution. 2. After completing the task(s), print and compare the RAM DATA with the previously printed one. 1. Clean the Rollers and Separation Rubber with Isopropyl Alcohol when required. 1. Clean the Scanning Glass or White Seal Guide with Isopropyl Alcohol when required. 1. Remove any foreign obstacles. 2. Clean the Rollers with Isopropyl Alcohol when required. 1. Do not touch the surface of the Mirrors with your hands. Clean any dirt or fingerprints with a soft cloth, saturated with Isopropyl Alcohol. 1. Check the Harnesses. 2. Check the Connectors. 3. Check the Screws. If required, replace consumable parts. 1. Check and grease the required Gears and Shafts. 1. Check the belts for looseness or abrasion. 2. Adjust the Idle Pulley.

2 3 4 5

Auto Document Feeder (ADF) Scanner Unit Transmitter Unit Mirrors

Check & Clean Check & Clean Check & Clean Check & Clean Check

Inspection Items

7 8

Gears, Rollers Shafts Check & Grease Timing Belts Check & Clean

Ver. 5.1

123

MAR 2005

3.3.

Preventive Maintenance Points

7 6 5 11 12 3

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

23 22 8 9 10 24 19 2120 26 17 55 A 47 46 45 44 43 56 42 25 2 41 51 50 48 49 59 57 58 51 48 50 49 51 48 50 16 18 1 B 4 52 54 53

49 51 50 49 48

Ver. 5.1

124

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

31 35 36 34 27 32 29 30 33

28

37

38 39 40

DETAIL A
13

14

15

DETAIL B

Ver. 5.1

125

MAR 2005

3.4.

Preventive Maintenance Check List

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Mechanical Parts Main Unit Ozone Filter 1 Ozone Filter 2 Ozone Filter 4 Dust Filter i-ADF Unit Pickup Roller Paper Feed Roller Separation Roller Registration Roller 1 Registration Roller 2 Transport Roller Inverting Roller Exit Roller Hopper Unit Toner Bottle Holder Toner Bottle Support Lower Hopper Cover Developer Unit Developer Splash Prevention Sheet Duct Cover Drum Unit OPC Drum Cleaning Blade Front Cleaning Felt Rear Cleaning Felt Corona Wire (DP-3510/3520/ 3530/4510/4520/ 4530) Corona Wire (DP-6010/6020/ 6030) Corona Case Corona Grid Toner Waste Container Density Sensor (CDS PC Board)

Ref. No.

Cleaning Cycle Method (Sheet) 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 480K 480K 480K 240K Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Wet Cloth Wet Cloth Wet Cloth Wet Cloth -

Replacement/Adjustment Cycle Procedure (Sheet) 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K *4 720K 240K *4 240K 240K 240K 120K Refer to Sect 2.2.7.

Ref. Counter

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

4204 107 4226 4218 511 508 610 817 818 816 809 814 1402 1407 1411 1602 1620 1811 1847 1849 1848

Refer to Sect 2.2.1.

F7-02 Total Count

Refer to Sect 2.2.3.

F7-02 ADF PM Count

Refer to Sect 2.2.6.

F7-02 Total Count

F7-02 Process Unit Count

22

1915

240K

Refer to Sect 2.2.8.

F7-02 OPC Drum Count

23 24 25 26

1906 1919 4108 1846

240K 240K 240K

Wet Cloth Wet Cloth Dry Cloth

480K 480K 240K *4 -

Ver. 5.1

126

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Mechanical Parts

Ref. No.

Cleaning Cycle Method (Sheet) 240K 240K Wet Cloth Wet Cloth -

Replacement/Adjustment Cycle Procedure (Sheet) 480K 480K 480K 240K 240K *5 1,200K 240K 720K 480K 240K 1,200K

Ref. Counter

27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37

38

39

40

41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51

Fuser Unit Upper Separator 2227 Lower Separator 2228 Thermistor Assembly 2019 Fuser Lamp 2027, 2028 Cleaning Web 2003 Cleaning Web Roller 2007 Fuser Roller 2105 Fuser Roller Bearing 2107 Fuser Roller Gear 2108 Insulation Bushing 2106 Lower Front Guide 2113 Pressure Roller Assembly (DP-4510/4520/ 2205 4530/6010/6020/ 6030) Pressure Roller (DP-3510/3520/ 2232 3530) Pressure Roller Bearing (DP-3510/ 2233 3520/3530) Automatic Duplex Unit Intermediate Roller 2403 Exit Roller 2520, 2521, 2522 Registration Roller 2430 Registration Roller 2331, 2603 Bearing Transfer Frame 2310 Corona Wire 1 2335 Corona Wire 2 2334 Paper Feed Module Paper Feed Roller 3204 Reverse Roller 3219 Pickup Roller 3211 Intermediate Roller 3005, 3010 4608 4612 4603, 4611

Refer to Sect 2.2.11.

F7-02 Fuser Web Count

480K

Refer to Sect 2.2.11.

F7-02 Fuser Web Count

480K

480K

120K 120K 120K 120K 240K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K 120K

Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol

1,200K 1,200K 480K 240K 240K 240K 240K 240K 1,200K 240K 240K 240K Refer to Sect 2.2.10. F7-03 1st/2nd/ 3rd/4th Paper Tray Count F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count F7-02 Total Count Refer to Sect 2.2.9. F7-03 2-Sided Count

Refer to Sect 2.2.13.

Sheet Bypass 52 Paper Feed Roller 53 Feed Roller 54 Pickup Roller

Refer to Sect 2.2.14.

Paper Exit Transportation 55 Exit Roller 2 8120 56 Exit Roller 3 8312

Refer to Sect 2.2.15.

Ver. 5.1

127

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Mechanical Parts

Ref. No.

Cleaning Cycle Method (Sheet) 120K 120K 120K Alcohol Alcohol Alcohol

Replacement/Adjustment Cycle Procedure (Sheet) 240K 240K 240K Refer to Sect 2.2.19.

Ref. Counter F7-03 LCT Tray Count

3000-Sheet Large Capacity Tray 57 Paper Feed Roller 9111 58 Feed Roller 9129 59 Pickup Roller 9107

Note: 1. Wet Cloth represents a soft cloth saturated with water. 2. The Maintenance Cycle is based on the Counter Information for each individual module. To verify the counter information, print the Total Counter List using the Service Mode: F7 - Electronic counter - 00 (List print). 3. Cleaning, Replacement and Adjustment Cycle (Sheet) are based on using Panasonic's recommended standard paper and supplies. These cycles may vary with the kind of paper used and/or ambient conditions. 4. The value is determined under the following test conditions. Four continuous prints per job using 6% image coverage of LT/A4 size. 5. 240K or 1 year whichever occurs first.

3.5.

Resetting the P/M (Preventive Maintenance) Counter

When the machine reaches the preset P/M Cycle, it will show Call for P/M or Replace The Toner Waste Container on the LCD Display. The PM Counter can be reset by following the procedures below.

3.5.1.

Call for P/M (Default: 120K (DP-35xx/45xx), 240K (DP-60xx))

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4. 2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-70 (PM cycle) and change to the desired value. 4. Press FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.2.

Call for P/M Fuser Web (Default: 240K)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4. 2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-73 (Fuser web) PM cycle and change to the desired value. 4. Press FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

3.5.3.

Call for P/M ADF (Default: Not shown)

1. Perform the P/M (Preventive Maintenance). Refer to Section 3.3 and 3.4. 2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 3. Enter the Copy Service Mode F5-87 (ADF) PM cycle and change to the desired value. 4. Press FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

Ver. 5.1

128

MAR 2005

3.5.4.

U14 Replace The Toner Waste Container

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

A. Blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators Upon detecting that the Toner Waste Container is full, the machine will complete the current job, and stop operating. A blinking Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators will appear on the display. To continue using the machine temporarily while waiting for the Service Technician, press "FUNCTION" and "2" keys simultaneously (up to 5,000 copies max.). B. Steady Maintenance and Toner Waste Container Indicators Upon reaching the 5,000 copies, the machine stops and will not allow further operation until the Toner Waste Container is replaced. Replace the Toner Waste Container. Refer to Section 2.2.2.

Ver. 5.1

129

MAR 2005

3.6.

Updating the Firmware

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Quickest and Most Reliable Way of Updating the Firmware is to use the Network Firmware Program Tool (FUP) using Ethernet LAN Port and a Crossover Cable. The network FUP Tool version must be 3.XX or higher, and it can be found on the CD included with PCL or PS/PCL options. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions and Service Notes for Option Instalation (8.1, 8.2.) for the details.

3.6.1.

Firmware Configuration

A. Hardware Configuration This machine is controlled by three (3) CPUs which are located on the System Control (SC) PC Board, the Panel Control (PNL) PC Board and the Scanner Printer Control (SPC) PC Board.

SC PC Board
On Board PC Ethernet Port PC Parallel Port Slot 1 CPU F-ROM 4 MB

Standard Configuration (A) (1) Program 4 MB

With PCL Option Configuration (B) (2) Program 4 MB

With PS Option Configuration (D) (5) Program 4 MB

FRM8 PCB 8 MB

(C) 8MB (3) Program (a) 4 MB (4) Font 4 MB (b)

(E) 8MB (6) Program (a) 4 MB (7) Program 4 MB (b)

Flash Memory Card 4 MB or 8 MB

Slot 2

FRM8 PCB 8 MB

PNL PC Board F-ROM CPU 4 MB Panel Control Program (Display & Key In) Bitmap Data Font Data

SPC PC Board F-ROM CPU 512 KB

Scanner Control Program Printer Control Program

B. SC PC Board Firmware The standard onboard Program Memory (F-ROM) mounted on the SC PCB is 4 MB. Two (2) Optional Expansion 8 MB Program Memory (FRM8 PCB) can be installed into SLOT 1 and SLOT 2. The Firmware to be written into the 4 MB onboard, the 8 MB of SLOT 1 / SLOT 2 depend upon the configuration of the Standard, PCL or PS Options. (1) Standard The Standard Program is only written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (A). (2) For PCL Option The PCL Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code
Ver. 5.1

130

MAR 2005

(B). The PCL Control Program (3) and PCL Font data (4) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1. The Firmware (3) and (4) are assigned as ROM Code (C). When using 8 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB Program (C) can be written at once. Using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (C) must be divided by 2 Programs for Program 4 MB (3) and Font 4 MB (4). (3) For PS Option The PS Control Program must be written into the 4 MB onboard, which is assigned as ROM Code (D). The PS Control Program (6) and (7) are written into the 8 MB in the SLOT 1. Both Firmwares (6) and (7) are assigned as ROM Code (E). When using 4 MB Flash Memory Card, the 8 MB program (E) must be divided onto 2 cards, one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (6) and one 4 MB card for the PS Control Program (7). C. Panel (PNL) PC Board Firmware The 4 MB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the PNL PCB as a standard. The Programs for Key Scan, Display Control, Energy Save Control, Bitmap Data and Font Data are saved in this Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

D. SPC PC Board Firmware The 512 KB Program Memory (F-ROM) is mounted on the SPC PCB as a standard. The Programs for Scanner Control and Printer Control are saved in the Board. The Firmware is transferred as Serial Data from SC PCB. E. Firmware Updating Ports Three (3) types of Ports are available for updating the firmware. (1) Ethernet LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Reliable Way) The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Local Area Network (LAN). Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details. (2) Parallel Port (Back up) The machine's Firmware can be updated from a PC via Parallel Port. The Master Firmware Card can also be created from a PC via Parallel Port. Refer to the Firmware Update Operation Instructions, Caution (8.1.) and Service Notes (8.2.) for the details. (3) Flash Memory Card The machine's Firmware can be updated using the Master Firmware Card. The Master Firmware Card can be created by copying the Firmware from an existing machine's SC PCB using a 4 MB or 8 MB Flash Memory Card. It is required 5 Flash Memory Cards to update the SC, PNL and SPC PCBs.

Ver. 5.1

131

MAR 2005

3.6.2.

Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN. 1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio". Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the Network Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe or DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Print the F5/F6 Parameters List (Copier Service Mode F9-03-00). Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password. Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.).

Ver. 5.1

132

MAR 2005

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder \ PNL \ SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx \ SC_STD \ DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-SFMBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxV2xxxxx \ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx \ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxV3xxxxx \ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx \ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx_xx \ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PCL \SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx_xx \ SC_PS \SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx_xx \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxV4xxxxx

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

\ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note: 1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions. 2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location. 5) After the Firmeware Update is completed, enter the F5 & F6 Parameters according to the lists printed in step (3) above.

Ver. 5.1

133

MAR 2005

3.6.3.

Updating the Firmware using a PC via the Parallel Port

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Before starting, print the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) Lists. 2. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit (not the side of the unit) to the OFF (O) position. 3. Connect the machine to the PC with a Parallel Printer Cable. 4. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON (I) position. 5. Install the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard software to the PC. (Refer to the Firmware Update Tool Operating Instructions) 6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-01 (Update from parallel port). Now the machine is ready to accept programming firmware code from the PC. 7. Start the Panasonic Firmware Program using the Wizard. 8. The firmware is copied into the machine. 9. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby. 10. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-06-00 (Parameter initialize). 11. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit (not the side of the unit) to the OFF (O) position. 12. Disconnect the Parallel Printer Cable from the machine. 13. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON (I) position. 14. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default.

3.6.4.

Updating the Firmware using the Master Firmware Card

1. Before starting, print the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) Lists. 2. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit (not the side of the unit) to the OFF (O) position. 3. Install the appropriate Master Firmware Card into the machine. 4. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON (I) position. 5. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 6. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-07-00 (Update from master card). 7. The firmware is copied into the machine. 8. After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby. 9. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-06-00 (Parameter initialize). 10. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit (not the side of the unit) to the OFF (O) position. 11. Remove the Master Firmware Card from the machine. 12. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the unit to the ON (I) position. 13. Reprogram the F5 & F6 Parameters (Copier) according to the lists printed in Step 1 above if the settings are other than factory default. Note: After the update is completed, the machine reboots itself and returns to standby mode. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated. Confirm that the update was successfully completed by checking the Firmware Version with F9 Parameters F9-02-xx. Caution: If the unit does not boot up properly in step 8, refer to 3.6.8. (Firmware Emergency Recovery)

Ver. 5.1

134

MAR 2005

3.6.5.

Creating a Master Firmware Card

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

A. Utilizing the Firmware Update Kit 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe or DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Programming Master Firmware Card 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. (See 3.6.7.) 2. Insert the Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine. 3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 5. Perform the Update Program Card Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card). Repeat the above steps if there are additional master firmware cards to be programmed. B. Copying the Firmware from an Existing Machine using a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. (See 3.6.7.) 2. Install a Flash Memory Card (4 MB or 8 MB) into the machine. 3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 5. Perform the Copy Service Mode F9-08 (Program Backup). 6. The firmware is copied into the Flash Memory Card. 7. After the backup is completed, press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby. 8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. (See 3.6.7.) 9. Remove the Master Firmware Card that you just created from the machine.

Ver. 5.1

135

MAR 2005

10. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the ON position. 11. Use this Master Firmware Card to update the firmware on other machines.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3.6.6.

Erasing the Master Firmware Card

1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. (See 3.6.7.) 2. Install the Master Firmware Card into the machine. 3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back and the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 5. Perform the Service Mode F9-09 (Update Program Card). 6. After the Flash Memory Card is erased, machine prompts "Update Program Card?". Press "NO". 7. Press "STOP" first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby. 8. Turn the Power Switch on the left side and the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position. (See 3.6.7.) 9. Remove the blank Flash Memory Card from the machine. 10. Repeat from Step 2 above if you are erasing another Master Firmware Card.

3.6.7.

Notice after installing the HDD option

After the Hard Disc Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disc Scan Function from being performed (similar to when the power is abruptly interrupted to the PC), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turing OFF the Power Switches on the machine. 1. Turn the Power Switch on the left side of the machine to the OFF position first. 2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disc Drive Unit. 3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the back of the machine to the OFF position.

Ver. 5.1

136

MAR 2005

3.6.8.

Firmware Emergency Recovery

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The easiest method to recover the firmware in an Emergency Recovery routine is to either use the Local Firmware Update Tool software by selecting the Independent File method, or using the Master Firmware Flash Card method (3 Flash Cards required). Whichever method you select, it is easier to restore the machine's firmware to the Standard (AAV) Type first as it only requires 3 files to bring the machine to initial working condition. (Install the files in this order: SC, SPC and PNL). After recovering, if optional PCL or PS/PCL firmware is required, use the Network Firmware Update Tool or the Local Firmware Update Tool to update the firmware to the required level. If the unit does not boot up properly, follow the steps below: 1. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit). - Before proceeding to the next step, you must prepare either the Local Firmware Update Tool or create the Master Firmware Flash Cards (read the appropriate sections first). - If using the Master Firmware Card, insert the Master Firmware Flash Cards in the unit. 2. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button. 3. When the green lamp on the front panel turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button. - If using the Master Firmware Card, the unit will start updating the Firmware code files automatically. The unit is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port or Master Firmware Card. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

Ver. 5.1

137

MAR 2005

3.6.9.

Firmware Version

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DP-3510/4510/6010
SC : DP-SFDM A A V1xxxx (a) PU (AU)
Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is divided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E, F : Optional Model Number

PNL

SFDM PNL A A V1xxxx (a) PU (AU) Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is devided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E, F : Optional Panel Model Number

SPC

SFDM SPC

A A V2xxxx Firmware Version (V2xxxx) AA: Fixed Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E, F : Optional Model Number

Ver. 5.1

138

MAR 2005

DP-3520/4520/6020
SC : SFD M MK2 A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is divided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian etc. Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E : Optional Model Number

PNL

MMK2

PNL A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU) Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is devided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish,German, French & Italian etc. Firmware Type A : Standard Panel Model Number

SPC

SFDM SPC

A A V3xxxx Firmware Version (V3xxxx) AA: Fixed Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E, F : Optional Model Number

Ver. 5.1

139

MAR 2005

DP-3530/4530/6030
SC : SFD M25R A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is divided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish & Portuguese b : English, French & Spanish g : German, French & Italian etc. Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E : Optional Model Number

PNL

M25R

PNL A A Vxxxxx (a) PU (AU) Destination Code (Fax) AU : USA/Canada AB : UK Destination Code (Copier) PU : USA/Canada PB : UK Division Soft (When it is devided into (a) and (b)) Firmware Version (V1xxxx) Language Code A : A-English, C-French & Spanish B : A-English, Spanish,German, French & Italian etc. Firmware Type A : Standard Panel Model Number

SPC

SFDM SPC

A A V4xxxx Firmware Version (V4xxxx) AA: Fixed Firmware Type A : Standard B, C, D, E, F : Optional Model Number

Ver. 5.1

140

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1

3.7.

When the following items are replaced or cleaned, perform adjustments in the correct order.
Adjustment No. Work Part Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Installation Main Cleaning Optics Drum Unit Toner Density Sensor Replace Exposure Lamp Platen Glass OPC Drum Developer OPC Drum & Developer Corona Unit Drum Unit Toner Density Sensor TDC Sensor LSU SC PC Board 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 3 2 Optics Clean Toner Toner Drum Density Density TDC Adj. Unit Sensor F8-09 Sensor Clean Adj. Clean F8-14 1 2 Image Copy PWM LSU Density Quality Adj. Adj. Adj. F6-49 F6-39/52 (Note 5) Check /50/51 (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3, 4) 3 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 2 1 4 2 5 1 2 2 2 3 1 3 2 5 3 6 2 3 3 3 4 2 Replace Developer Input F5/F6 Parameter

Copy Quality Adjustment Procedure (Order)

Remark

1 1 1 2 2 1 3 3 4

141
MAR 2005

1 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Copy Quality Adjustment related to the Copier Service Mode F6 Codes.

Add on the QUANTUM Compensation Digital QUANTUM ON/OFF Digital QUANTUM: ON Digital QUANTUM: OFF F6-17 Grid Yes --F6-18 Laser Yes --F6-19 Bias Yes --Auto Adjustment by Digital QUANTUM (Read Only) F6-80 Laser Yes --F6-82 Grid Yes --Manual Adjustment (Digital QUANTUM OFF) F6-95 Laser --Yes F6-96 Grid --Yes F6-97 Bias --Yes

2. F6-28, 29 should not be adjusted in the field. (Must be set to "0")

Note: 1. Copy Quality Check 1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters). 3) Press "29 QUANTUM Black Density". 4) Press "INPUT" button and enter a number (0 1 or 1 0). 5) Press "OK" button twice. 6) Wait approximately 30 seconds. 7) The Machine starts QUANTUM Control automatically.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2. PWM Adjustment 1) It is recommended to make continuous copies (50 ~ 300 copies, depending on the machine model) to stabilize the Bias Voltage of the Developer. DP-35xx : 250 ~ 300 copies DP-45xx : 150 ~ 200 copies DP-60xx : 50 ~ 100 copies 2) Ensure that Ledger / A3 Size Paper is loaded in one of the Trays, and pull out the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 3) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 4) Press the "8" and "START" keys to enter the F8 Mode (Service Adjustment). 5) Press "17 LSU PWM Pattern 1" to print the Test Pattern. 6) Observe the position of the uppermost visible gray patch. Sample: 4 gray patches are visible in the illustration, the value of the uppermost patch position is "+2" in our example.

(-5)

(0) +2

(+5)

In our sample, 4 patches are visible.

Test Pattern

7) Press the "OK" button. 8) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters). 142

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

9) Press "52 LSU Unit PWM Adjust 1". 10) Press "INPUT" button and enter the value of the gray patch, as established in Step (6). 11) Press "OK" button 2 times. 12) Perform the Service Modes F8-18 and F6-39 in the same manner as steps (4) ~ (10) above.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3. Toner Density Adjustment 1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2) Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode. 3) Set the exposure to the center position. Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode. 4) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10). a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible. b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A

Not visible (Not visible or hardly visible) Clearly visible

. . . . . . . .. .

. . . . .. 1 . . . .
2 3

5) Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode. 6) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters). 7) Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density). 8) Press the "INPUT" button. 9) Enter the new content. 10) Enter a 2-digit value. Note: The "RESET" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value. (+) : Lighter side (-) : Darker side 11) Press "OK" button twice. 12) Enter F2 Mode. 13) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment. Note: Repeat steps (3) to (10) until proper density is attained. F6-49 : Text Mode F6-51 : Photo Mode 14) Press "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

Ver. 5.1

143

MAR 2005

4. Contrast Adjusting 1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2) Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode. 3) Set the exposure to the center position. Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode. 4) Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10). a. Gray scale "1" should not be visible. b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Not visible (Not visible or hardly visible) Clearly visible

. . . . . . . .. .

. . . . .. 1 . . . .
2 3

5) Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode. 6) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters). 7) Enter F6-55 Mode (T/P Mode Contrast). 8) Press the "INPUT" button. 9) Enter the new content. 10) Enter a 3-digit value. Note: The "RESET" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value. (+) : Lighter side (-) : Darker side 11) Press "OK" button twice. 12) Enter F2 Mode. 13) Make a copy to confirm the adjustment. Note: Repeat steps (3) to (10) until proper density is attained. F6-54 : Text Mode F6-61 : Photo Mode 14) Press "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. 5. LSU Adjustment Refer to 3.8.

Ver. 5.1

144

MAR 2005

3.8.

Adjusting the Printer Registration, LSU Image Side to Side

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When installing the System Console option or replacing the LSU, the following LSU Image Side to Side adjustment must be performed. The Printer registration is adjusted at the factory. If copy image is abnormal, adjust it by the following procedure.

3.8.1.

Printer Registration

1. Insert Ledger or A3 size paper into the 2nd tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1). 4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure below. 5. Perform the Service Mode F6-04 to adjust the gap to be 5 mm. 6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (-) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (+) value. 7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.
<Figure> Two lines are printed on the top (Lead edge). For Ledger or A3, place as Portrait. For Letter or A4, place as Landscape. 5 mm Top (Lead edge) Two lines are printed

5 mm

5 mm

Two lines are printed

3.8.2.

LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the Tray

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 3. Perform the Service Mode F1-03 (Print Test Pattern 1). 4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above. 5. Perform the Service Modes F6-10 to F6-15, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm. 6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value. 7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.

3.8.3.

LSU Image Side to Side Adjustment for the ADU

1. Insert paper into the 1st tray and change the tray setting to the appropriate paper size. Empty or pull out all the remaining trays (including the bypass tray) to disable them. 2. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 3. Perform the Service Mode F1-06 (Print Test Pattern 4). 4. Check the gap of the print pattern from the paper edge, refer to the Figure above. 5. Perform the Service Mode F6-16, to adjust the gap to be 5 mm. 145

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

6. If the gap is less than 5 mm, input a (+) value. If more than 5 mm, input a (-) value. 7. Press "STOP" key first and then press "FUNCTION" + "CLEAR" keys simultaneously to return to standby.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3.9.

QUANTUM Control in F8-14

To stabilize the initial print quality, the contents of the F8-14 function was changed beginning from June '02 production. (Starting with Serial No. FBG2Kxxxxxx)
1. Description of the Change

F8-14 Contents Current

Toner Density Sensor Output Gain Adj.
Ready

Go to Image Quality Adj.

F8-14 Contents New

Toner Density Sensor Output Gain Adj. Self-Adjusting (QUANTUM) 1min
Ready

Go to Image Quality Adj.

2. Field Installation Procedure * For New machines, use the following procedures at installation. * For Machines already set up, use the following procedures during PM 1. Make sure that the LAN cable is disconnected before performing F8-09 2. Make sure that paper is set in any paper tray before performing F8-09 3. After performing F8-14, please use the additional procedure manually for all machines which were produced from Feb '02 to May '02 production. (Serial No. range . from BBG2Kxxxxxx to EBG2Kxxxxxx)
Additional Procedure
Proceed to F8-14
Ready

Turn Power Switch OFF/ON

Ready

Wait approx. 90 sec.

Self-Adjusting (QUANTUM) 1 min

Ready

Go to Image Quality Adj.

3. QUANTUM Control Timing Refer to the following Table. .

Ver. 5.1

146

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

QUANTUM Control Timing

QUANTUM works in Copy, Print or Fax mode.
No
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Trigger
When F8-09 is performed At 200, 400, 600, 800 and 1000 prints after F8-09 was performed Every 1000 prints from 1001 prints after F8-09 was performed When the F6-28 value is changed When the F6-29 value is changed When the F6-39 value is changed When the F6-52 value is changed When the Power Switch is turned ON At 100 prints after the Power Switch was turned ON

QUANTUM Start Timing

After performing F8-09 Upon reaching the specified number of prints *2 Upon reaching the specified number of prints *2 Upon returning to F6 initial display Upon returning to F6 initial display Upon returning to F6 initial display Upon returning to F6 initial display Wait approximately After the Power Switch is turned 30 - 90 sec for the On QUANTUM to start *1 Upon reaching the specified number of prints *2 After cancelling the Auto off mode When reaching the counters *2 After reaching the specified number of prints Upon reaching the specified number of prints *2 Upon reaching the specified number of prints *2 After F8-14 is performed

10 When the Auto Off mode is cancelled 11 At 100 prints after the Auto Off mode was cancelled 12 6 hours after the previous QUANTUM 13 At 100 prints after the 6 hours lapse from the previous QUANTUM 14 At 100 prints after canceling U13 15 When F8-14 is performed

<Note> *1) Start timing of QUANTUM: - QUANTUM starts when the machine is ready (It will not work during copy/print/fax operation) - The start of QUANTUM may change depending on machine status *2) Any print value numbers shown above, refers to the Total Counter

Ver. 5.1

147

MAR 2005

3.10. Calibrating the LCD

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) position and leave the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine in the ON (I) position. 2. Ensure that the F-ROM Card with Firmware Update is not installed in the machine. If the Card is installed in the machine, remove it. 3. Press and hold the ENERGY SAVER and FUNCTION keys down simultaneously, then turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the ON (I) position and continue holding the keys for approximately 30 seconds until the Display becomes stable. The LCD Display starts blinking and shows a + on the upper left edge of the display. Note: If you do not hold the "ENERGY SAVER" and "FUNCTION" keys down long enogh, the Display may go OFF. 4. Press the + on the upper left edge of the display, press the + on the lower right edge and press the + on the center of the display. Then the display goes to stand-by. Caution: Prevent any damage to the LCD Display by not pressing with Sharp Edged Objects such as a Ball Point Pen, etc. 5. Reboot the machine by cycling the power. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF (O) then ON (I) position.

Ver. 5.1

148

MAR 2005

4 Troubleshooting
4.1. Initial Troubleshooting Flowchart
START

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Plug the Power Cord in and turn the Power Switches ON.

Does the unit power up normally? Yes

No Does the LCD display the function correctly? Yes No Troubleshoot Improper LCD Display

Troubleshoot any 3-digit CODE displayed

Does the unit produce normal copies? Yes

No Does the original document No feed through correctly? Yes Troubleshoot the Document Feeder Does the recording paper No exit the unit? Yes

Check for recording paper path problems.

Troubleshoot communication problems (transmission, reception, dialing, polling, information codes, or diagnostic codes.)

Troubleshoot printed copy quality problems

Ver. 5.1

149

MAR 2005

4.2.

Improper LCD Display

START

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Check connectors: CN52 (SC PCB) and CN220 (PNL1 PCB).

Is LED/LCD displayed? No Does CN52, pin 3 on the SC PCB measure +5 VDC? No Replace the SC PCB. No

Yes

Does the display appear normal? Yes No

Yes

Replace the LCD Module. Replace the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit. Is the trouble resolved? Yes

No

Replace the Touch Panel.

Is the trouble resolved? Yes END

END

Ver. 5.1

150

MAR 2005

4.3.
4.3.1.

Printed Copy Quality Problems

Black Copy

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Is the PS normal? Yes

No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the PS. 2. Check the contacts between PS and Developer Unit. 3. Replace the PS. No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SPC PCB. 2. Replace the SPC PCB.

Is the SPC PCB normal? Yes

END

Ver. 5.1

151

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.2.

Blank Copy
Paper Travel START Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes No

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Charge Unit? No

Yes 1. Clean the Charge Wire with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the Charge Unit.

Is the PS normal? Yes

No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the PS. 2. Check the Spring Connector and voltage on the PS. 3. Replace the PS. Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the LSU.

Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No

Is the SPC PCB normal? Yes

No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the SPC PCB. 2. Replace the SPC PCB.

END

Ver. 5.1

152

MAR 2005

4.3.3.

Vertical White Lines

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Beam path? No

Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the LSU.

Are there any foreign particles Yes or stains in the Corona Unit? No

1. Clean the Corona Wire with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the Corona Unit.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

No Clean or replace the rollers.

END

Ver. 5.1

153

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.4.

Ghost Images

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

AAA A
START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit? No

Yes 1. Clean the Corona Wire with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the Corona Unit. No Clean or replace the rollers.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

END

Ver. 5.1

154

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.5.

Vertical Dark Lines

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the OPC/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit? No

Yes 1. Clean the Corona Wire with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the Corona Unit. No Replace the LSU.

Is the LSU normal? Yes

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

No Clean or replace the rollers.

END

Ver. 5.1

155

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.6.

Horizontal Dark Lines

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the OPC/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Corona Unit? No

Yes 1. Clean the Corona Wire with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the Corona Unit.

Is the LSU normal? Yes

No Replace the LSU.

Is the HVPS normal? Yes

No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the HVPS. 2. Check the Spring Connector and voltage on the HVPS. 3. Replace the HVPS.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

No Clean or replace the rollers.

END

Ver. 5.1

156

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.7.

Dark Background

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Is the LSU normal? Yes

No Replace the LSU.

Is the PS normal? Yes

No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the PS. 2. Check the Spring Connector and voltages on the PS. 3. Replace the PS. No Clean or replace the rollers.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

END

Ver. 5.1

157

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.8.

Light Print

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? No

Yes Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the paper. No * Reset the Developer Unit as shown in the Illustration below. Replace the OPC/Developer Unit.

Is the OPC/Developer Unit operational? Yes

Are there any foreign particles or stains blocking the Laser Unit path? No

Yes 1. Remove the particles from the laser beam path or clean the stains. 2. Replace the LSU.

Is the HVPS normal? Yes

No 1. Check all connectors and voltages on the HVPS. 2. Replace the HVPS. No Clean or replace the rollers.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

END

(1) Pull the Developer Release Lever (3823) out and turn it clockwise, then turn it counter-clockwise to reset. (2) Ensure that the Developer unit is installed properly by checking 2 Guide Pins are in the right side of the oval holes.

Ver. 5.1

158

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.9.

Horizontal White Lines

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

No Check the Scanner mechanism.

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the Charge Unit? No

Yes 1. Clean the Charge Wire with a soft, dry cloth. 2. Replace the Charge Unit. No

Is the PS normal? Yes

1. Check all connectors and voltages on the PS. 2. Replace the PS. No Clean or replace the rollers.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

END

Ver. 5.1

159

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.10. Improper Fusing (Printed image does not bond to the paper)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

P
START Is the recording paper damp? No Yes Replace the recording paper. Is the Fuser Unit normal? Yes No Replace the Fuser Unit. (See Note)

END

Note: Replace the entire Fuser Unit when the Thermostat and/or the Thermistor turn into an open-circuit.

Ver. 5.1

160

MAR 2005

4.3.11.

Voids in Solid Areas

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the recording paper.

Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational? Yes

No Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes

No Clean or replace the rollers.

END

4.3.12. Black Dots

Paper Travel

P
START Is the OPC Drum/Developer Unit operational? Yes No Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces clean? Yes No

Replace the OPC Drum/Developer Unit.

Clean or replace the rollers.

END

Ver. 5.1

161

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.13. Recording Paper Creases

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Is the recording paper damp? No

Yes Replace the recording paper.

Are there any foreign particles or stains in the paper path? No

Yes Remove any obstructions and / or clean the paper path.

Is the recording paper skewing? No

Yes Ensure the paper is set correctly in the Paper Tray and that the Paper Guides are properly adjusted.

Are the Fuser and Pressure Roller surfaces soiled or are there any foreign particles or stains in the Fuser Unit? No

Yes 1. Remove any foreign particles and / or clean the stains. 2. Clean or replace the rollers. 3. Replace the Fuser Unit.

END

Ver. 5.1

162

Paper Travel

MAR 2005

4.3.14. Poor Printed Copy Quality

START No

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode or Fax Service Mode 3 normal? Yes

1. Replace the SPC PCB. 2. Replace the LSU. 3. Replace the HVPS. 4. Replace the Developer Unit.

Make a local copy.

Is the printed copy correct? Yes

No Check the connections of CN850/851 on the CCD PCB, CN 55/56 on the SC PCB, the Scanning Lamp.

Perform a receiving test with the reference fax unit.

Is the received copy correct? Yes

No 1. Check CN390 on the FXB PCB. 2. Check CN22/25 on MJR PCB. 3. Check the Telephone Line Cord. 4. Replace the FXB PCB.

Is a poor copy printed only when receiving from a specific transmitter? Yes The transmitting machine may be defective.

No Telephone line quality is poor.

END

Ver. 5.1

163

MAR 2005

4.3.15. Document Skewing

START

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Mode Copy le Samp

Is the Test Pattern printout in Copier F1 Mode normal?

No

Check the Scanner mechanism.

Yes No

Is the LSU normal? Yes

Check or replace LSU.

END

Ver. 5.1

164

MAR 2005

4.3.16. Abnormal Printing

START

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Is the recording paper loaded in the Paper Tray properly? Yes

No 1. Adjust the Paper Width Guide. 2. Adjust the Paper Length Guide.

Is the recording paper size and thickness within specification? Yes

No Replace with correct paper.

Is the Panasonic Toner being used? Yes

No Replace with the Panasonic Toner.

Are all switches and sensors operating properly? Yes

No Adjust, clean or replace.

Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the receiver unit? No

Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the receiver unit. No 1. Check all rollers, gears, drive clutches and springs. 2. Adjust or replace any defective parts.

Do the rollers rotate properly? Yes

Is the receiving mechanism operating correctly? Yes

No Adjust or replace any defective parts.

END

Ver. 5.1

165

MAR 2005

4.3.17. Scanned Copy Quality Problems

START

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Is the Xenon Lamp abnormal? No

Yes Replace the Xenon Lamp.

Are there any foreign particles or paper pieces in the scanning area? No

Yes Remove the foreign particles or paper pieces from the scanning area.

Is the scanning area dirty? No

Yes 1. Clean the Scanning Glass. 2. Clean Mirrors 1 and 2. Yes Clean the rollers.

Are the Transmitting Rollers dirty? No

Yes Is the Scanner Block abnormal? No 1. Check CN (SC PCB). 2. Check CN (CCD PCB). 3. Replace the CCD Assembly. 4. Replace the SC PCB.

END

Ver. 5.1

166

MAR 2005

4.4.
4.4.1.

Troubleshooting the LAN Interface

Checking Network Configuration
START Print the current Internet Parameters List Ask the customer for the Pre-Installation Information form filled out by the Network Administrator. Verify this information with the Internet Parameters List that you just printed. Are the Internet Parameters entered correctly into the unit? Yes Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: ipconfig /all Does the displayed Network configuration, match the following settings of the unit Internet Parameters ? Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask: Yes From the DOS Prompt, enter the following command-line utility: "route print" Does the current routing table for the Gateway match ? Yes Does the Default Gateway respond to the "ping IP" command ? Yes Does the DNS Server respond to the "ping IP" command ? Yes Does the unit respond to the "ping host name" command ? Yes Does the unit respond to the "telnet" command ? Yes Ask the Network Administrator to verify the POP/SMTP account and system status.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No Re-enter the Internet Parameters correctly.

No Ask the Network Administrator to verify the proper information.

No Ask the Network Administrator to correct the routing table on that Gateway. No Check the power switch, cables and the current settings of unit. No Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status. No Ask the Network Administrator to check the Default Gateway and system status. No Replace the SC and/or LANB PCB

Ver. 5.1

167

MAR 2005

4.4.2.

Testing the TCP/IP Network

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

It is beyond the scope of this Service Manual to cover Networking in detail, there are many excellent manuals on this subject, but we hope the information in this section will aid with your troubleshooting efforts. In most cases, the Network Administrator will be able to provide you with needed information or assistance. When encountering Network problems during an onsite service call or during the installation stage, try to isolate the steps that are not being completed so that you can quickly locate the components that don't work. It is best to organize your troubleshooting efforts by understanding what should be happening, then you can trace the path and see where the problem is occurring. In our case, we use TCP/IP for transportation of data from one system to another, which involves a whole series of events occurring throughout a number of different layers. As with all networking, TCP/IP works better when its plugged in, therefore, start your troubleshooting by checking the Physical Connectivity first, the cable(s). In our examples, we'll use several simple tools readily available in the DOS command-line utility for troubleshooting. There are many other utilities available for checking more detailed information, some are Free of charge, others are available for a nominal fee. 1. System Diagram Model Ask the customer to provide you with the Pre-Installation Information form, that was filled out by the Network Administrator. A description or system diagram for the unit, including its physical address, email server and DNS server is required.
Network Configuration Domain Name: labo.pcc.com

Network D PC Client [210.232.71.18] js2.labo.pcc.com SMTP/POP DNS Server Server sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] WAN

sv1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.1]

Network A [192.168.3.0]

[192.168.3.254] Router (R1) [192.168.1.253] Network B [192.168.1.0] PC Client [192.168.1.4] ec5.labo.pcc.com

"ping"

Hub PC Client [192.168.3.4] ec4.labo.pcc.com Panasonic Device [192.168.3.5] ef1.labo.pcc.com PC Client [192.168.4.1] fmrt7.labo.pcc.com

Network C [192.168.4.0]

Ver. 5.1

168

MAR 2005

2. Checking Current Configuration Print the current unit Internet Parameters configuration. Locate a PC connected to the same Subnet Mask as the unit, then from the DOS Prompt, type the following command-line utility: "ipconfig /all" for Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Verify that the displayed Network configuration on the PC, matches the following Internet Parameter settings of the unit: Default Gateway IP Address: DNS Server IP Address: Subnet Mask: (whether it is valid) For Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / NT / XP The following example shows the output after you type "ipconfig /all" at a command prompt:
C:\>ipconfig /all Windows NT IP Configuration Host Name DNS Servers Node Type NetBIOS Scope ID IP Routing Enabled. WINS Proxy Enabled NetBIOS Resolution Uses DNS Ethernet adapter IBMFE1 Description Physical Address DHCP Enabled IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Primary WINS Server : ec4.labo.pcc.com : 192.168.1.1 : Hybrid : : No : No : No : : IBM 100/10 EtherJet PCI Adapter : 00-04-AC-EE-9C-E8 : No : 192.168.3.4 : 255.255.255.0 : 192.168.3.254 : 192.168.3.18

From the above examples, you know the Network configuration for the specified Subnet Mask is as follows: IP Address: 192.168.3.4; Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0; Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address): 192.168.3.254; DNS Server: 192.168.1.1 and the Domain Name: labo.pcc.com (obtained from the Host Name). 3. Using "PING" to Test Physical Connectivity The Packet Internet Groper (PING) is a command-line tool included with every Microsoft TCP/IP client (any DOS or Windows client with the TCP/IP protocol installed). PING is a simple utility that is used to send a test packet to a specified IP Address or Hostname, then, if everything is working properly, the packet is echoed back (returned). Sample command-line PINGing and parameters are shown below. There are several available options that can be specified with the PING command. However, for our examples, we will use two options (-n and -w) which are commonly used when the response from the destination location is too long. -n count : -w timeout : The number of echo requests that the command should send. The default is four. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.

Ver. 5.1

169

MAR 2005

PINGing the Unit

C:\WINDOWS>ping ef1.labo.pcc.com

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Pinging ef1.labo.pcc.com [192.168.3.5] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.5: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

PINGing the Default Gateway (Default Router IP Address)

C:\WINDOWS>ping 192.168.3.254 Pinging 192.168.3.254 with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.3.254: bytes=32 time=4ms TTL=253

PINGing the SMTP/POP Server

C:\WINDOWS>ping sv2.labo.pcc.com Pinging sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253 Reply from 192.168.1.2: bytes=32 time=5ms TTL=253

If for some reason, the physical connection is missing, the echo reply will not be received from the destination and the following output is displayed:
C:\WINDOWS>ping fmrt7.labo.pcc.com Pinging fmrt7.labo.pcc.com [192.168.4.1] with 32 bytes of data: Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Request timed out. Ping statistics for 192.168.4.1: Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 0, Lost = 4 (100% loss), Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds: Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms

Ver. 5.1

170

MAR 2005

If the physical destination is far and it's connected by WAN (Wide Area Network), the PING option command default value must be changed to compensate for the expected delayed response. e.g. -n 10 -w 2000 : :

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The number of echo requests that the command should send. Specifies the period PING will wait for the reply before deciding that the host is not responding.
C:\WINDOWS>ping js2.labo.pcc.com -n 10 -w 2000 Pinging js2.labo.pcc.com [210.232.71.18] with 32 bytes of data: Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=810ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=455ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=645ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=677ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=703ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252 Reply from 210.232.71.18: bytes=32 time=633ms TTL=252

4. Tracing a Packet Route Another useful command-line utility is TRACERT, which is used to verify the route a packet takes to reach its destination. The result shows each router crossed and how long it took to get through each particular router to reach the specified destination. The time it takes to get through a particular router is calculated three times and displayed for each router hop along with the IP Address of each router crossed. If a FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) is available, it will be displayed as well. This utility is useful for two diagnostic purposes: a. To detect whether a particular router is malfunctioning along a known path. For example, if you know that packets on a network always go through London to get from New York to Berlin, but the communication is failing. A TRACERT to the Berlin address shows all the hops up to the point where the router in London should respond. If it does not respond, the time values are shown with an asterisk (*), indicating the packet timed out. b. To determine whether a router is slow and needs to be upgraded or additional routers should be installed on the network. You can determine this by simply comparing the time it takes for a packet to get through a particular router. If its return time is significantly higher than the other routers, it should be upgraded. To use this utility, from the DOS command-line, type: tracert <IP Address or Hostname> Tracing the Route to SMTP/POP Server
C:\WINDOWS>tracert sv2.labo.pcc.com Tracing route to sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2] over a maximum of 30 hops: 1 2 4 ms 4 ms 2 ms 5 ms 2 ms 192.168.3.254 5 ms sv2.labo.pcc.com [192.168.1.2]

Trace complete.

Ver. 5.1

171

MAR 2005

5. Managing Network Route Tables In the simplest case a router connects two network segments. In this model, the system used to join the two segments needs to know only about these segments. The routing table for router R1 in this case is simple; the following table shows its key routes: Network Address 192.168.3.0 192.168.1.0 Netmask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 Gateway 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253 Interface 192.168.3.254 192.168.1.253

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When the Unit at 192.168.3.5 attempts to communicate with the Unit at 192.168.1.x, IP performs the ANDing process to find two things: The local network ID is 192.168.3.0, and the destination network ID is not. This means, that the destination host is not on the local network. IP, is responsible to find a route to the remote network, and therefore, it consults the routing table. Here, the local host normally determines that the next step in the route is the Default Gateway, and sends the packet to router R1. The router R1, receives the packet. After determining that the packet is for another host and not the router itself, it checks the routing table. It finds the route to 192.168.1.0 and sends the packet through the interface to the Unit at 192.168.1.x, which receives the packet. This is a simple route that took only a single hop. When another network is added as the number of hosts grows, it gets complicated, and the systems on the most distant networks cannot communicate. When the router receives a packet in this case, it cannot find a route to the remote network. It then discards the packet and a message indicating "destination host unreachable" is sent to the originator. Here, is where the ROUTE command-line utility is useful when dealing with more than two networks, and is used by Administrators to statically manage a route table by adding, deleting, changing and clearing the route table. It has a number of options that are used to manipulate the routing tables, some are shown below: MASK If this switch is present, the next parameter is interpreted as the netmask parameter. Netmask If included, specifies a sub-net mask value to be associated with this route entry. If not specified, it defaults to 255.255.255.255. Gateway Specifies the gateway. METRIC Specifies the metric / cost for the destination. All symbolic names used for the destination are looked up in the network database file NETWORKS. The symbolic names for the gateway are looked up the host name database file HOSTS.

Ver. 5.1

172

MAR 2005

When the packet does not reach the specified destination even when the physical connection is properly made, check the registered persistent routes on the same subnet as the Unit by typing "route print" in the DOS command-line. The output display is shown below:
C:\WINDOWS>route print Active Routes: Network Address 0.0.0.0 127.0.0.0 192.168.3.0 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Netmask 0.0.0.0 255.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.255 255.255.255.255 224.0.0.0 255.255.255.255 Gateway Address 192.168.3.254 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 Interface 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 127.0.0.1 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 192.168.3.2 Metric 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

6. Host Name Query on DNS Server Windows XP/2000/NT 4.0 also has a tool that enables you to test DNS to verify that it is working properly. This utility is not available on Windows 98/Me. From the DOS command-line, type "NSLOOKUP" to display the following output:
C:\>nslookup Default Server: sv1.labo.pcc.com Address: 192.168.1.1

NS (Name Server) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t NS <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t NS labo.pcc.com. [sv1.labo.pcc.com.] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com

MX (Mail Exchange) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t MX <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t MX labo.pcc.com [sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. MX

10 sv2.labo.pcc.com

A (Address) Record in Domain From the DOS command-line, type "Is -t A <Domain Name>" to display the following output:
> ls -t A labo.pcc.com [sv1.labo.pcc.com] labo.pcc.com. NS server = sv1.labo.pcc.com sv1 A 192.168.1.1 sv2 A 192.168.1.2 ec5 A 192.168.1.4 A 192.168.3.4 ec4 A 192.168.3.5 ef1

(To leave from this menu, type "exit" on the command-line.)

Ver. 5.1

173

MAR 2005

7. Testing Unit Using the TELNET Command TELNET is a terminal emulation protocol. TELNET enables PCs and workstations to function as dumb terminals in sessions with hosts on internet works. From Windows 98/Me/2000/NT/XP, use the TELNET to test the communication of TCP/IP and SMTP Protocol manually to the Unit. This method eliminates the SMTP Server.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

For better understanding, type "telnet" in the DOS Command-line to bring up the Telnet screen. Then, click on the Terminal menu and on Preferences, check the "Local Echo" and "Block Cursor" radio dials and click on the OK button. Click on the Connect menu, then click on Remote System. Enter "25" in the "Port:" field and click on Connect button. For example,
C:\WINDOWS>telnet telnet to ef1.labo.pcc.com[192.168.3.5] 220 ef1.labo.pcc.com DP18xx V.xx helo 250 Hello mail from:test 250 Sender OK rcpt to:fax@labo.pcc.com 250 Receipient OK data 354 Email, end with "CRLF . CR LF" [Press the Enter Key] Panasonic Internet Fax test test [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] [Press the Enter Key] 250 OK, Mail accept quit 221 Closing transaction channel

Ver. 5.1

174

MAR 2005

4.5.

Error Codes (For Copier)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The self-diagnostic functions detect troubles in the important components of the copier. When any trouble occurs, the copier stops.

4.5.1.

User Error Codes (U Code)

Note: Uxx and a message will appear on the Panel Display. User Error Codes (U Code) Table Item Check Points Key Counter 1. Card Key is not installed. 2. Key Counter Harness is disconnected. 3. Department Code is not assigned. Close Front Cover 1. Front Cover is open. 2. Front Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Front Cover Sensor is defective 4. LVPS connector is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. Close Finisher 1. Finisher is open. 2. Paper is in the output bin. 3. Stapler is empty. 4. LVPS connector is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. Close Right Cover 1. Right Cover is open. 2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Right Cover Sensor is defective. 4. LVPS connector is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. Close Right Cover Lower 1. Right Cover is open. (System Console) 2. Right Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Right Cover Sensor is defective. 4. LVPS connector is disconnected. 5. LVPS is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. Close Left Cover 1. Left Cover is open. 2. Left Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Left Cover Sensor is defective. Close Finisher Staple Cover 1. Close Finisher Staple Cover. / Upper Cover 2. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Finisher Staple Cover Sensor is defective. Add Toner 1. Toner Bottle is incorrectly installed. 2. Low Toner. 3. Toner Sensor is disconnected. 4. Toner Sensor is defective. 5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 6. SPC PCB is defective.

Code U0

U1

U4

U6

U7

U9

U12

U13

Ver. 5.1

175

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code U14 U15

U16 U18 U20

U21

U30

U31

U32

U33 U34

U35

U90

User Error Codes (U Code) Table Item Check Points Replace Toner Waste 1. Toner Waste Container is full. Container (See Sect. 3.5.4.) No Toner Waste Container 1. Toner Waste Container is not installed. 2. Toner Waste Container Sensor is disconnected. 3. Toner Waste Container Sensor is defective. No Developer Unit 1. Developer Unit is not installed. Total Copy Limit Over 1. Department Copy Counter is full. Close ADF Cover 1. ADF Cover is open. 2. ADF is not installed correctly. 3. ADF Cover Sensor is disconnected. 4. ADF Cover Sensor is defective. 5. LVPS connector is disconnected. 6. LVPS is defective. Close ADF 1. ADF and ADF Cover are open. 2. ADF Sensor is disconnected. 3. ADF Sensor is defective. Close Punch Cover 1. Punch Cover is open. 2. Punch Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Punch Cover Sensor is defective. Remove Paper in Saddle 1. Paper Jam in the Saddle Unit. Unit 2. Paper Sensor is disconnected. 3. Paper Sensor is defective. Close Saddle Unit Cover 1. Saddle Unit Cover is open. 2. Saddle Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Saddle Cover Sensor is defective. No Saddle Staple Unit 1. Staple Unit is not installed properly. Close Saddle Unit Front 1. Saddle Unit Front Cover is open. Cover 2. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Saddle Front Cover Sensor is defective. Close Saddle Unit Exit 1. Saddle Unit Exit Cover is open. Cover 2. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is disconnected. 3. Saddle Exit Cover Sensor is defective. Replace Battery 1. Internal battery requires replacement.

Ver. 5.1

176

MAR 2005

4.5.2.

Jam Error Codes (J Code)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DA-FS330

DA-FS355A

DA-FS600

DA-FS605

J F D C B

H H I

H I

Misfeed Indication on the Touch Panel Display

G E
Section A B C D E F G H I J Jam Location 3rd/4th Paper Feed Unit Paper Transport Area ADU Area Developing Area Paper Inverting Unit ADU Area LCT Area Finisher Saddle Finisher i-ADF

J Code Log View Mode (DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030) The 5 most recent J Codes can be displayed on the Panel Display by pressing Function and 3 keys in Standby mode.

Note: If the machine is jammed, follow the procedure below. 1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position. (If Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first. After wating approximately 10 seconds, turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position.) 2. Remove the Jammed paper. 3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. 4. Press the Function and 3 keys.

Ver. 5.1

177

MAR 2005

 Jam Sensor Location of Printer

Exit Sensor Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Inverting Exit Sensor

Registration Sensor

Timing Sensor

Inverting Paper Sensor ADU Entrance Sensor ADU Intermediate Sensor ADU Exit Sensor

Paper Path Sensor

1st Paper Path Sensor Intermediate Roller Sensor

2nd Paper Path Sensor Inverting Paper Path Sensor System Console Paper Path Sensor 3rd Paper Path Sensor

4th Paper Path Sensor

Jam Sensor Location of i-ADF

ADF Registration Sensor 1 ADF Registration Sensor 3

ADF Registration Sensor 2

ADF Selection Sensor

ADF Exit Sensor

Ver. 5.1

178

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code J00 J01 J02 J03 J04 J06 J07 J08 J09 J11 J12 J13 J14 J16 J17 J18 J19 J21 J22 J23 J24 J26 J27 J28 J29 J30 J31

Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table Contents Section The Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C paper starts feeding. (Sheet Bypass) The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after B the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (1st Feeder Unit) The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after B the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (2nd Feeder Unit) The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after A the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (3rd Feeder Unit) The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after A the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (4th Feeder Unit) The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after G the Paper Feed Roller starts rotating. (LCT Feeder Unit) The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the paper B starts feeding from 1st Feeder Unit. The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper A, B Feed Roller starts rotating in the 2nd/3rd/4th Feeder Unit. The Timing Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Paper B, G Feed Roller starts rotating in the LCT Unit. The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B Paper Path Sensor is activated. The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B Paper Path Sensor is activated. The 3rd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the A Paper Path Sensor is activated. The 4th Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the A Paper Path Sensor is activated. The LCT Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the B, G Paper Path Sensor is activated. The Timing Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Paper Path B, C Sensor is activated. The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the Timing B, C Sensor is activated. The Registration Sensor does not detect within a predetermined time after the ADU C, F Sensor is activated. The 1st Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time during B initialization. The 2nd Paper Path Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time during B initialization. The 3rd Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. A The 4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. A The LCT Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. B, G The Timing Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. B The Intermediate Roller Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. B The 3rd/4th Paper Path Sensor detects paper at the time during initialization. A, B The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C is activated. (Sheet Bypass) The Registration Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after the Sensor C is activated. (Except Sheet Bypass) 179

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table Code Contents Section J33 The Registration Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. C J40 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time C, D after the Registration Sensor is activated. J41 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor does not go off within a predetermined time after C, D the Sensor is activated. J42 The Fuser Unit Paper Exit Sensor detects paper during non-printing mode. C, D J43 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Fuser C, D Unit Paper Exit Sensor is activated. J44 The Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time. C, D J45 The Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time, during nonC, D printing mode. J50 The Inverting Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the C, D Inverting Roller starts turning. J51 The Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the Inverting C, D Exit Sensor is activated. J52 The Inverting Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after the C, D Inverting Exit Sensor is activated. J53 The Inverting Paper Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, C, D, E during non-printing mode. J54 The Inverting Paper Path Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, E during non-printing mode. J55 The Inverting Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time, during C, D non-printing mode. H J60 1. The Finisher Registration Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after Exit Sensor is activated. 2. The Finisher Registration Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after Finisher Registration Sensor is activated. 3. The Finisher Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after Finisher Registration Sensor is activated. 4. The Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper within a predetermined time after Finisher Exit Sensor is activated. 5. The Finisher Registration Sensor or the Finisher Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper. 6. The next paper was detected while the current paper is still in the Finisher. 7. The Finisher Door was opened while the paper is passing through the Finisher. J61 The stapler is not activated correctly. H J62 The Paper is Jammed in the Inverter. H J63 1. The Paper Path Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time in the I Saddle. 2. The Paper Path Sensor keeps detecting paper in the Saddle. 3. Either one of the above Sensors keeps detecting paper in the Saddle during non-printing mode. 4. The Saddle Door was opened while the paper is passing through the Finisher. J64 The Puncher is not activated correctly. H J70-79 (See the following table below) J80 The Automatic Duplex Unit (ADU) Entrance Sensor does not detect paper within a D, E, F predetermined time. J81 The ADU Intermediate Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time F after ADU Entrance Sensor is activated.

Ver. 5.1

180

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Jam Error Codes (J Code) Table Code Contents Section J82 The ADU Exit Sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after ADU F Middle Sensor is activated. J83 The ADU Entrance Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F lapsed. J84 The ADU Intermediate Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F lapsed. J85 The ADU Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed. F J86 The ADU Entran0ce Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F lapsed, during non-printing mode. J87 The ADU Intermediate Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has F lapsed, during non-printing mode. J88 The ADU Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper after a predetermined time has lapsed, F during non-printing mode. J89 One of the ADU Sensors detects paper during non-printing mode. F J91 A Paper Tray is pulled out when feeding a paper. A, B J92-94 (See the following table below) J97 After passing the Registration Sensor (Roller), the Paper does not clear the sensor C, D within a predetermined time period. J98 The VRDY Signal is not ON after a predetermined time has lapsed. C, B J99 No VSNC Signal within a predetermined time after VRDY Signal is activated. C <J70~79, 92, 93 and 94 Codes> DP-3520/ DP-3510/ 3530/4520/ 4510/6010 Contents Section 4530/6020/ 6030 J70 J70 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 does not detect paper within a J predetermined time in the ADF. J71 J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detectiong paper after a J predetermined time in the ADF. J72 J70 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a J predetermined time after the ADF Registration Sensor 1 is activated. 2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is activated. J73 J71 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the J ADF Registration Sensor 1 is deactivated. 2. The ADF Registration Sensor 2 keeps detecting paper after the ADF Registration Sensor 3 is deactivated. J74 J71 The ADF Exit Sensor does not detect paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided J Scanning. J75 J71 The ADF Exit Sensor keeps detecting paper during 1-Sided / 2-Sided J Scanning. J76 J71 The ADF Selection Sensor does not detect paper during 2-Sided J Scanning. J77 J71 The ADF Registration Sensor 3 keeps detecting paper during the J Back Page Scanning.

Ver. 5.1

181

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DP-3520/ DP-3510/ 3530/4520/ 4510/6010 4530/6020/ 6030 J78 J71

Contents 1. The ADF Registration Sensor 3 does not detect paper after the Face Page is scanned, during 2-Sided Scanning. 2. The ADF Selection Sensor keeps detecting paper during 2-Sided Scanning. The ADF Registration Sensor 1 keeps detecting paper in the ADF. The paper is not detected. The paper remained in the ADF. The ADF does not go off after the predetermined time.

Section J

J79 J92 J93 J94

J70 J70 J70 J71 J71

J J J J

4.5.3.

Mechanical Error Codes (E Code)

E1: Optical Unit Error

Code Function E1- 01 Abnormal Platen Glass scanning

E1- 20 Laser Unit horizontal synchronization 1

E1- 21 Laser Unit horizontal synchronization 2

E1- 22 Polygon Motor synchronization

E1- 31 Scanning Lamp (does not turn On)

Check Points 1. Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected. 2. Home Position Sensor is defective. 3. Scanner Motor connector is disconnected. 4. Scanner Motor is defective. 5. Scanning Mechanism is defective. 6. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 7. DRV PCB is defective. 8. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 9. SPC PCB is defective. 10. LVPS is defective. 1. LSU connector is disconnected. 2. LSU is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SPC PCB is defective. 1. LSU connector is disconnected. 2. LSU is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SPC PCB is defective. 1. Polygon Motor connector is disconnected. 2. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 3. Polygon Motor is defective. 4. LVPS is defective. 5. DRV PCB is defective. 1. Scanning Lamp connector is disconnected. 2. Scanning Lamp is defective. 3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 4. DRV PCB is defective. 5. SC PCB is defective. (Check F4 Chip Fuse)

Ver. 5.1

182

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

E2: Lift DC Motor Error Code Function E2- 01 Lift Motor rotation (1st Paper Tray) E2- 02 Lift Motor rotation (2nd Paper Tray) E2- 03 Lift Motor rotation (3rd Paper Tray) E2- 04 Lift Motor rotation (4th Paper Tray) Check Points 1. Level Sensor connector is disconnected. 2. Level Sensor is defective. 3. Lift Mechanism is defective. 4. Lift Motor connector is disconnected. 5. Lift Motor is defective. 6. LVPS connector is disconnected. 7. LVPS is defective. 8. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 9. SPC PCB is defective. 10. APF PCB connector is disconnected. 11. APF PCB is defective. 12. Paper Feed Module connector is disconnected. 1. LCT connector is disconnected. 2. Upper Limit Sensor connector is disconnected. 3. Upper Limit Sensor is defective. 4. Lift Mechanism is defective. 5. Lift Motor connector is disconnected. 6. Lift Motor is defective. 7. Lower Limit Sensor connector is disconnected. 8. Lower Limit Sensor is defective. 9. LCT PCB connector is disconnected. 10. LCT PCB is defective. 11. LVPS connector is disconnected. 12. LVPS is defective. 13. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 14. SPC PCB is defective. 1. System Console Cable is disconnected. 2. Drive Mechanism is defective. 3. Drive Motor connector is disconnected. 4. Drive Motor is defective. 5. APF PCB connector is disconnected. 6. APF PCB is defective. 7. LVPS connector is disconnected. 8. LVPS is defective. 9. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 10. SPC PCB is defective.

E2- 06 LCT ascending operation (UP) E2- 07 LCT descending operation (DOWN)

E2- 10 System Console Drive Motor rotation

E3: Development System Error Code Function Check Points E3- 01 Toner Bottle Motor rotation 1. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor connector is disconnected. 2. Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor is defective. 3. Toner Bottle Motor connector is disconnected. 4. Toner Bottle Motor is defective. 5. Toner Bottle Motor Drive Mechanism is defective. 6. Toner Bottle is installed incorrectly. 7. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 8. SPC PCB is defective.

Ver. 5.1

183

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code E3- 03

E3- 10 E3- 11 E3- 12 E3- 13

E3- 20

E3- 21

E3- 23

E3- 24

E3: Development System Error Function Check Points Toner Density Sensor gain 1. Sensor connector is disconnected. 2. Sensor is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SPC PCB is defective. High Voltage Power Supply 1. HVPS connector is disconnected. leak (1) - Grid Charge Voltage 2. HVPS is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. High Voltage Power Supply 4. SPC PCB is defective. leak (2) - Separation Voltage 5. Corona Wire is abnormal. (Check for: contamination High Voltage Power Supply with foreign particles, broken, not installed in the leak (3) - Transfer Current proper position or the tension is loose) High Voltage Power Supply 1. HVPS connector is disconnected. leak (4) - Developer AC Bias 2. HVPS is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SPC PCB is defective. 5. Developer Unit Bias Terminal is contaminated with Toner. Main Motor rotation 1. Drive Mechanism is defective. 2. Main Motor connector is disconnected. 3. Main Motor is defective. 4. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 5. DRV PCB is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. 8. LVPS is defective. Dust Collection Fan Motor 1. Dust Collection Fan connector is disconnected. rotation 2. Dust Collection Fan is defective. 3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 4. DRV PCB is defective. 5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 6. SPC PCB is defective. 7. LVPS is defective. Suction Fan rotation 1. Suction Fan connector is disconnected. 2. Suction Fan is defective. 3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 4. DRV PCB is defective. 5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 6. SPC PCB is defective. 7. LVPS is defective. Ozone Fan 2 rotation 1. Ozone Fan 2 connector is disconnected. 2. Ozone Fan 2 is defective. 3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 4. DRV PCB is defective. 5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 6. SPC PCB is defective. 7. LVPS is defective.

Ver. 5.1

184

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code E3- 25

E3- 40

E3- 51

E3- 60

E3: Development System Error Function Check Points Drum Motor rotation 1. Drum Drive Gear is defective. 2. Drum Drive Mechanism is defective. 3. Drum Unit is defective. 4. Drum Motor connector is disconnected. 5. Drum Motor is defective. 6. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 7. DRV PCB is defective. 8. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 9. SPC PCB is defective. 10. LVPS is defective. Copy Density Sensor output 1. Sensor connector is disconnected. adjustment 2. Sensor is defective. 3. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SPC PCB is defective. Corona Wire cleaning 1. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 connector is disconnected. 2. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 is defective. 3. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 connector is disconnected. 4. Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 is defective. 5. Cleaner Motor Drive Mechanism is defective. 6. Corona Mechanism is defective. 7. Cleaner Motor connector is disconnected. 8. Cleaner Motor is defective. 9. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 10. DRV PCB is defective. 11. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 12. SPC PCB is defective. 13. LVPS is defective. Toner Waste collection 1. Toner Waste pipe is clogged up. 2. Toner Waste Mechanism is defective. (Refer to Flow Chart below) 3. Lock Detect Sensor connector is disconnected. 4. Lock Detect Sensor is defective. 5. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 6. DRV PCB is defective. 7. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 8. SPC PCB is defective.

Ver. 5.1

185

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

START

Make a Copy. Does E3-60 Error still occur?

Yes

Check the "Check Points" again.

No

Does CN764-6 on DRV PCB measure +5 VDC? Yes

No

Make the Lock Detect Sensor OFF. (Refer to Procedure below)

END
(1) Remove the Drum Unit. (See Sect 2.2.8.) (2) Turn the Toner Waste Screw Gear towards the Arrow direction until you hear a click.

E4: Fuser Unit Error Code Function E4- 01 Fuser Warm-up Temperature Check Points 1. Fuser Thermistor is dirty. 2. Thermistor position is incorrect. 3. Fuser temperature is low. (Adjust F6-31) 4. Thermistor is defective. 5. Fuser Lamp connector is disconnected. 6. Fuser Thermostat is defective. 7. Fuser Lamp is defective. 8. HTC PCB connector is disconnected. 9. HTC PCB is defective. 1. Paper Jam in Fuser Unit. 2. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is disconnected. 3. Paper Exit Sensor 1 or 2 is defective. 4. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 5. DRV PCB is defective. 6. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 7. SPC PCB is defective. 1. Exhaust Fan connector is disconnected. 2. Exhaust Fan is defective. 3. LVPS connector is disconnected. 4. LVPS is defective. 5. LPC PCB is defective.

E4- 02 Paper Jam

E4- 10 Exhaust Fan Motor (1) rotation E4- 11 Exhaust Fan Motor (2) rotation E4- 12 Exhaust Fan Motor (3) rotation

Ver. 5.1

186

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

E5: System Error Code Function E5- 01 Vp (+24V, printer) E5- 05 Vp (+24V, scanner) E5- 11 Printer Engine Communication abnormal E5- 12 Scanner Engine Communication abnormal E5- 17 Scanner synchronization E5- 19 Scanner Line synchronization E5- 22 Finisher communication Check Points 1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 2. SPC PCB is defective. 1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 2. SPC PCB is defective. 3. SC PCB connector is disconnected. 4. SC PCB is defective.

E5- 40 Sort Memory Abnormal

E5- 42 Total Counter connection

E5- 60 Power Supply Cooling Fan Motor rotation

1. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 2. SPC PCB is defective. 3. IPC PCB is disconnected. 4. IPC PCB is defective. 5. Finisher Interface Cable is disconnected. 6. OP LVPS connector is disconnected. 7. OP LVPS is defective. 8. DC PCB connector is disconnected. 9. Finisher is defective. 1. Sort Memory defective. 2. SC PCB connector is disconnected. 3. SC PCB defective. 1. Total Counter connector is disconnected. 2. Total Counter is defective. 3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 4. DRV PCB is defective. 1. Cooling Fan connector is disconnected. 2. Cooling Fan is defective. 3. DRV PCB connector is disconnected. 4. DRV PCB is defective. 5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 6. SPC PCB is defective. 7. LVPS is defective.

Ver. 5.1

187

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

E7: Optional Unit Error Code E7- 20 E7- 21 E7- 22 E7- 23 E7- 24 E7- 25 E7- 26 E7- 27 E7- 28 E7- 29 E7- 40 E7- 41 E7- 42 E7- 43 E7- 44 E7- 45 E7- 46 E7- 47 E7- 48 E7- 49 E7- 50 E7- 51 E7- 52 E7- 53 E7- 54 E7- 55 E7- 56 E7- 57 E7- 58 E7- 90 Function Check Points Finisher Paper Transport Motor See Sect. 11 Finisher Options. Finisher Paper Exit Motor Finisher Damper Motor Finisher Staple Motor Finisher Staple Sift Motor Finisher Paper Height Sensor Finisher Backup RAM Data Finisher Tray Lift Motor Finisher Punch Motor Finisher Punch Shift Motor Finisher Saddle-Stitch Communication Finisher Saddle Positioning Plate Motor Finisher Saddle Folding Motor Finisher Saddle Guide Motor Finisher Saddle Alignment Motor Finisher Saddle Rear Staple Motor Finisher Saddle Front Staple Motor Finisher Saddle Push Motor Finisher Swing Motor Finisher Sensor Connector Finisher Micro Switch Finisher Delivery Motor See Sect. 11 Finisher Options. For DA-FS355/355A, DA-SP41 only. Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher Saddle Folding Sensor Finisher Punch Communication Finisher Punch Power Supply Finisher Punch Registration Sensor Finisher Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration) Finisher Punch Sensor (Waste Full)) Hardware Key Abnormal 1. Incorrect Hardware Key is installed. 2. Hardware Key is defective.

Note: These error codes will appear only when the optional accessories are installed. Refer to the appropriate Optional Unit Service Manual.

Ver. 5.1

188

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

E13: Out of Toner Code Function E13 Toner Sensor Check Points 1. Toner Bottle is not installed correctly. 2. Out of Toner. 3. Toner Sensor is disconnected. 4. Toner Sensor is defective. 5. SPC PCB connector is disconnected. 6. SPC PCB is defective.

Ver. 5.1

189

MAR 2005

4.6.

Information Codes Table (For Facsimile)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code 012 030

Mode RCV XMT

031

XMT COPY

061 200 212 301 331 400

RCV XMT RCV XMT RCV XMT XMT

Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause C, D The length of the received Transmitter Document Jam. document is over 2 m. B Read Point Sensor does not Document is not set properly. activate within 10 seconds after Defective Read Point Sensor. the document starts feeding. C Transmitting document was longer The document may jam. than 2,000 mm (or 78.7 in). Defective Read Point Sensor. (Super Fine: 1,000 mm (or 39.4 in), 600 dpi: 430 mm (or 16.2 in)) A ADF Door is open. Cover is not firmly closed. Connectors are not firmly connected. C Decoding process is not Defective FXB PCB. completed at the end of phase C. A-E Interface error occurred between Modem is defective. (FXB PCB) the CPU and modem. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB) System fault. Software problem occurred. (SC PCB) C B 8-minutes timer error. (Germany only) T1 timer (355 sec) elapsed without detecting 300 bps signal.

401

XMT

402

XMT

403

RCV (Polling)

404

XMT

Wrong number is dialed and the START button is pushed. Telephone line is disconnected while dialing. FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB is defective. Receiver is defective. (It may only be transmitting CED) DCN was returned from receiver Your machine's ID Number is not while transmitter is waiting for CFR programmed. or FTT. Possible incompatibility or incorrect Password (Password Reception, Selective Receive). Mailbox is full. DCN was returned from receiver Receiver working in non-CCITT mode while transmitter is waiting for only. (Possible incompatibility) NSF/DIS. Transmitter had no polling "POLLED=ON" (polling XMT ready) is function. not set at the transmitter. Document to be transmitted is not placed at the transmitter. Transmitter sent NSS (or DCS) Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR followed by TCF three times, but PCB, etc.) the receiver did not respond. (CFR FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. or FTT is usually returned) Receiver disconnects line during first NSS (or DCS) is transmitted.

Ver. 5.1

190

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code 405

Mode XMT

406

RCV (Password Comm.) XMT

407

408

XMT

409

XMT

410

RCV

411

RCV (Polling)

412

G3 RX

414

RCV (Polling)

415

XMT (Polling) RCV

416

417

RCV

Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause B Transmitter received FTT after it Line quality is poor. (TCF is damaged transmitted TCF at 2400 bps. due to line noise) Received RTN after Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR communicating at 2400 bps. PCB, etc.) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. B XMT-Password mismatched. RCV- XMT, RCV password does not match. Password mismatched. Selective Last 4 digits of TSI does not match with RCV incomplete. the last 4 digits of Auto Dial telephone number. D Transmitter received no response Receiver is defective. (No paper, paper after it transmitted post message, jamming, etc.) such as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc...or Receiver ceased receiving because of received DCN. excessive error. (Line quality is poor) FXB PCB (Modem) or MJR PCB is defective. D Transmitter received RTN after it Receiver receives data with error. (Line transmitted EOP, MPS, or EOM. quality is poor) Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR PCB, etc.) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. D Transmitter receives PIN after it Receiver receives data with error due to transmitted a post message, such poor line quality, and receiving operator as EOP, MPS, EOM, etc. requests voice contact. Receiver is defective. (Modem, MJR PCB, etc.) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. D Received DCN while waiting for Interface or line is faulty. post command. (EOP, MPS, EOM, Transmitter is defective. etc.) B Received DCN after transmitting Transmitter is not ready for polling NSC. communication. Password does not match between transmitter and receiver. B, D No response within 12 seconds in Transmitter is defective. NSS/DCS/MPS wait state. (After FXB PCB is defective. transmitting FTT) B No response received after Password does not match between transmitting 3rd NSC. transmitter and receiver. Transmitter is defective. (No original, document jam, etc.) B Remote side attempted to receive Inform the remote side that your message from your machine in machine does not have the polling polling communication. transmission feature. D Receiver did not detect post Transmitter is defective. command, such as EOP, MPS, Line quality is poor. (RTC signal is EOM, etc. distorted due to line noise) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. C Receiver returned RTN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to post message. excessive errors in received data) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.

Ver. 5.1

191

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code 418

Mode RCV

420

RCV

421 422 427

RCV XMT

G3 RCV 433 XMT RCV 434 XMT or RCV

Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause C Receiver transmitted PIN in Line quality is poor. (There are response to PRI-Q from excessive errors in received data) transmitter. (Transmitting operator FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. requests voice contact) B T1 timer (35 sec.) elapsed without There is wrong incoming call. detecting 300 bps signal. (Non-facsimile communication) Transmitter is defective. FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. B Busy Tone is detected after Remote station disconnected the line. sending NSF Signal. Wrong number is dialed. B Content of NSF (or DIS) or NSC There is an incompatibility. (or DTC) was invalid. B DCN received to NSF/CSI/DIS The interface is incompatible. transmitted. B, D T.30 Protocol abnormal. Defective remote station. B CD (response from Modem) did not turn OFF within 180 sec. after receiver detected FLAG signal. DCN received after transmitting FTT. Received relay transfer request or confidential document to distribute to an end receiving station or all confidential mailboxes are used. Remote unit does not have Relayed XMT or Confidential Comm. capability. Failed training in Phase C. Remote unit is defective. FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. Transmitter is defective or incompatible. Line quality is poor.

436 456

G3 RX RCV

C B

457 RELAY XMT CONF. XMT/ POLL 459 RCV

490

RCV

494

RCV

495

XMT RCV

496 501 502

XMT XMT/ RCV(V.34) XMT/ RCV(V.34)

Transmitter is defective. Line quality is poor. (EOL is damaged due to line noise) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. C During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. current. C CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB is defective. ON. B Incompatible Modem on the Remote unit. B, C, D During reception, CD turned OFF Line is disconnected. or continued ON for long time. Transmitter is defective. During communication, lost loop - FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. current.

Sum of error lines exceeded the limit (Function Parameter No. 70) of 64 lines. Interval between two EOLs was more than 10 sec. when receiver received message data.

Line quality is poor. (Training signal is distorted due to line noise) FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective. Line quality is poor. FXB PCB or MJR PCB is defective.

Ver. 5.1

192

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code 503 504 505 540 541 542 543 544 550 554 555 570

Mode XMT/ RCV(V.34) RCV/V.34 (Polling) XMT/V.34 (Polling) XMT ECM XMT ECM XMT ECM XMT ECM XMT ECM RCV ECM RCV ECM RCV ECM RCV

Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause B, C, D CS of modem is not able to turn FXB PCB is defective. ON during training. Line is disconnected. B Polling is rejected from the remote No polling original is set. station. B Polling XMT is rejected. No polling original is set. B D D D D C D D B No response after transmitting 3rd CTC or DCN received. No response after transmitting 3rd EOR or received DCN. No response to the 3rd RR transmitted or received DCN. T5 timer (60 sec.) elapsed without MCF. Stopped Transmission after EOR Transmission. Timer between frames in phase C has elapsed. Transmitted ERR after receiving EOR. Transmitted PIN after receiving EOR. Password or machine code did not match during remote diagnostic communication. Remote unit did not have the remote diagnostic function. Sub-address transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 49 (NSF bit 155) OFF. Sub-address Password transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 50 (NSF bit 156) OFF. Sub-address SEP (for Polling) transmission to a unit that has their DIS bit 47 (NSF bit 130) OFF. ADF Door was opened during ADF transmission. No original was in the ADF. (Builtin dialer engaged) Redial count over. Incompatible interface. Line is faulty. MJR PCB abnormal. Remote unit is abnormal. Remote unit is abnormal. Line is faulty. MJR PCB abnormal. Defective remote station. Faulty line. Faulty line and Operator Call requested by RX side.

571 580

XMT XMT

B B

Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function. Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function. Sub-address transmission to a unit that has no Sub-address function.

581

XMT

582

XMT

601 623

XMT XMT A

630 XMT or RCV (Polling)

Operator removed the original from the ADF after dialing was completed. Original was not set properly in the ADF. No dial tone detected. Sensor dial tone is not detected. (Country dependent) Busy tone is detected. (Country dependent) T1 timer (355 sec) elapsed without a signal from the receiver.

631

XMT

"STOP" key was pressed during Auto Dialing.

Ver. 5.1

193

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code 634

Mode XMT

638

XMT

700 711

XMT RCV RCV

712

XMT

714

XMT RCV XMT

715

716

XMT

717 718

XMT XMT

719

RCV

720 721 722

POP POP RCV

725

XMT POP

Fax Information Codes Phase Description of Problem Cause Redial count over with no response or busy tone was not detected. Note: U.S.A. and Canadian models will redial only once if a busy tone is not detected. Power turned Off with applicable Power switched off. data in memory or during Power failure occurred. communication. PSTN Communication terminated by LAN Operator pressing the "STOP" key. LAN Incorrect LDAP settings. LDAP Server Name, LDAP Login Name, LDAP Password and/or LDAP Search Base are incorrect. LAN Unknown email address replied Mail Server received an incorrect email from the Mail Server. address. (Dependent on Server's Mail application) LAN LAN Interface error. The 10Base-T/100Base-TX cable is not Cannot logon to the LAN. connected. An unexpected LAN problem occurred. LAN TCP/IP connection timed out. Incorrect IP Address is set. Verify the IP Address, Default Router IP Address, SMTP Server IP Address. LAN Cannot logon to the LAN. Incorrect SMTP Server IP Address is set. No email application is activated on the Mail Server. LAN Incomplete SMTP Protocol Mail Servers hard disk may be full. transmission. Mail Server is defective. LAN Page Memory Overflow occurred Check the document size and while receiving printing data. The resolution. paper size selected within your Ask originator to re-send in a supported application to print is larger than size and resolution. the paper size loaded in the paper tray(s). LAN Received data via LAN is in a Ask the originator to re-send with a format that is not supported. supported file attachment: * In a TIFF-F format. * Image data conforming to A4/Letter size. LAN Unable to connect to the POP Incorrect POP Server address is set. Server. POP Server is down. LAN Unable to login to the POP Server. Incorrect User Name or Password is set. LAN Failed to obtain the Network DHCP is not available. Parameters (such as: IP Address, (Contact the Network Administrator.) Subnet Mask, Default Gateway IP Address, etc.) from the DHCP server. LAN DNS Server connection timed out. Incorrect DNS Server address is set. DNS Server is down. 194

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code 726 727

Mode XMT POP XMT

Phase LAN LAN

728

XMT

LAN

729

XMT

LAN

730

RCV

LAN

731

RCV

LAN

741 XMT, Polling PSTN

800

Relay Comm.

PSTN

Conf. XMT Conf. Polling Relay Comm. 815 Conf. RCV 816 Conf. Polled 825 870

814

PSTN

Fax Information Codes Description of Problem Cause Received an error response from Incorrect POP Server address is set. the DNS Server. Incorrect SMTP Server address is set. Received an Error or No Remote Internet Fax Errors: Busy or Response from the Remote Job Number Overflow for Relay XMT. Internet Fax. (SMTP Direct XMT) (Retry is possible) Remote Internet Fax Errors: Memory Overflow or No Power. (Retry is not possible) Failed to authenticate (SMTP SMTP AUTHENTICATION, User Name AUTHENTICATION) when and/or Password are incorrect. connecting with the SMTP server. (Contact the Network Administrator.) Unable to program the Internet Verify that the Fax Parameter #158 is parameters or the autodialer via set to Valid. Email from a PC. Dialer full while Relayed Dial buffer for manual number dialing Transmission Request was (70 stations) are being used. received. Unable to dial Deleted the registered station name before dialing with Timer Controlled Communications, etc. The machine was requested to relay a document but has no Relay Hub capability. The remote station does not have Relay XMT nor Confidential Communication capability.

741 879

880 884 961 962

PSTN Mailbox is full. PSTN The received Polling Password did not match. Conf. RCV PSTN Parameter settings of the remote Conf. Polled station are not properly set. MEM XMT PSTN If applicable sub-address is not Multi-Copy LAN registered in the phone book of the receiver side when using subaddressing function. XMT, Polling PSTN Memory overflow occurred while storing documents into memory. Memory PSTN Memory overflow occurred during RCV substitute memory reception. LAN Memory overflow. Mail Server sent a reset command while downloading the data to the machine. File Access Error. File Access Error. RCV LAN Memory file access error. XMT PSTN Memory file access error. LAN Memory file access error.

Receiver side does not have correct sub-address in their phone book.

Memory overflow on the Fax side. Memory overflow on the Fax side. Mail server aborted the download (Busy with other higher priority jobs).

SC PCB is defective. SC PCB is defective. SC PCB is defective.

Ver. 5.1

195

MAR 2005

4.7.

Diagnostic Codes (For Facsimile)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The 13-digit Diagnostic Code is provided for the service engineer to analyze how the communication was performed. The code is recorded on the Journal. Journal Example
************* -JOURNAL- ************************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 09:39********
NO. COMM. PAGES 01 OK 001 FILE DURATION X/R 129 00:00'42 XMT IDENTIFICATION 123 456 789 DATE MMM-dd TIME 01:55
1st digit

DIAGNOSTIC C8649003C0000
13th digit

- PANASONIC MACHINE

****************************** - PANASONIC MACHINE- ***** -12345678901234567890- *******

1st Digit: Manufacturer Code -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Manufacturer Code Casio Canon Sanyo Sharp Tamura Toshiba NEC Oki Hitachi Xerox Fujitsu Matsushita Mitsubishi Murata Ricoh

Ver. 5.1

196

MAR 2005

2nd Digit -: Not used/defined

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ID (TSI, CSI, CIG) RTN DCN Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received Received

STOP Button Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed Pressed

3rd Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Paper Width A4 A4 A4 A4 B4 B4 B4 B4 A4 B4 A3 A3 A3 A3 A3

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Resolution (dpi) S-Fine 400 x 400 300 x 300 S-Fine 400 x 400 300 x 300 600 x 600 600 x 600 600 x 600 S-Fine 400 x 400 300 x 300

Ver. 5.1

197

MAR 2005

4th Digit -: Not used/defined

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 5th Digit -: Not used/defined

Scanning Rate 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line 20 ms/line 5 ms/line 10 ms/line 40 ms/line 0 ms/line

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Resolution Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Std Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine Fine

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Memory/ Deferred Comm. Dialing/RCV Non-Memory Manual Non-Memory Communication Used Manual Non-Memory Communication Auto Dialing Non-Memory Used Auto Dialing Non-Memory Auto RCV Non-Memory Used Auto RCV Non-Memory Remote RCV Non-Memory Used Remote RCV Non-Memory Manual Memory Communication Used Manual Memory Communication Auto Dialing Memory Used Auto Dialing Memory Auto RCV Memory Used Auto RCV Memory Remote RCV Memory Used Remote RCV Memory 198

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

6th Digit -: Not used/defined

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 7th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Confidential Relayed Comm. Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Polling Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes XMT/RCV RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT RCV RCV XMT XMT Selective Comm. Off Off Off Off On On On On Off Off Off Off On On On On Password Comm. Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On On On On On On On On

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Sub-Address Comm. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Turnaround Polling Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ver. 5.1

199

MAR 2005

8th Digit -: Not used/defined

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Advanced Comm. Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer Report XMT Check & Call Memory Transfer -

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Cover Sheet XMT Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

9th Digit -: Not used/defined Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Standard/ NonStandard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard Non-Standard

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Short Protocol B D B D

Ver. 5.1

200

MAR 2005

10th Digit -: Not used/defined

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 11th Digit -: Not used/defined

Coding MH MR MMR JBIG MH MR MMR JBIG -

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition ECM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Symbol Rate (V.34) 2400 sr 2800 sr 3000 sr 3200 sr 3429 sr V.34 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Ver. 5.1

201

MAR 2005

12th Digit -: Not used/defined

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 13th Digit -: Not used/defined

Modem Speed 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps TC 7200 bps TC 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps -

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition Modem Speed (V.34) 2400 bps 4800 bps 7200 bps 9600 bps 12000 bps 14400 bps 16800 bps 19200 bps 21600 bps 24000 bps 26400 bps 28800 bps 31200 bps 33600 bps -

Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F

Fax Diagnostic Codes Definition

Ver. 5.1

202

MAR 2005

4.8.
4.8.1.

Troubleshooting (For Printer)

Checking the Basics

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This section explains how to solve problems including error messages or unexpected printing results. If the Printing System is not printing or working as expected, and if you are not sure what to do, start your troubleshooting by checking the basics below: Ensure that the Ethernet LAN (10Base-T / 100Base-TX) Cable is connected properly Ensure that the Internet Parameters are correct Ensure that the Unit is turned On Ensure that the Paper is set properly in the Unit No error message is displayed on the Unit Try printing a test page from the printer driver properties dialog box

4.8.2.

Document Does Not Print Properly

Problem Possible Solution(s) Check and specify the paper size and orientation settings in the printer driver to coincide with the application. Check if the specified paper is loaded in the Panasonic Device. Increase the Page Margins in the application. The Panasonic Device requires minimum margins of inches (5 mm) on all sides. Check if the selected font is installed in the PC. Check if the selected font is being replaced with a proper printer font in the Font Substitution Table of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box. Select Always use True Type fonts from the Font tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box. Select an outline font instead of a bit map font. Select 600 dpi resolution. Select 600 dpi resolution. Check if the Panasonic Printing System (PCL) printer driver is selected. Insufficient Printer Page Memory in the Panasonic Device, install an Expansion D-RAM Card or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Quality tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box. Select the Spool settings "Start printing after first page is spooled " from the Details tab of the Printer Driver Properties dialog box. Select 300 dpi resolution.

Character is not printing in the correct positions or the characters near the edges of the page are missing. The font type is incorrect

The character is not smooth. Fine line print cannot be obtained. Poor photograph print quality. Different character or symbol from the document is printed. The printer does not print anything or prints irregular images from the middle of the 1st page. Printing is exceedingly slow.

Ver. 5.1

203

MAR 2005

4.8.3.

Error Message Appears on the PC

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Error Message Network Print DLL Error.

Possible Solution(s) Check if the Panasonic Device is turned "On" and the 10Base-T/ 100Base-TX cable is properly connected. Printer Properties may be incorrectly configured. (i.e. Printer Port) The Panasonic Device may be processing someones print job, please wait and try again later. The Panasonic Device is either Transmitting or Receiving an email. Verify and specify the paper size or orientation to coincide with the application and the printer driver settings.

Network Port is Busy.

Cannot print because an error is found in the current printer setting.

4.8.4.

Error Message Appears on the Unit

Error Message Possible Solution(s) The available Sort Memory in the Panasonic Device may not be enough. Either install an optional Sort Memory or change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box. The print settings may not be matched for the system. Change the printing settings in the Printer Driver Properties dialog box. i.e. Multi-sized printing. Change the resolution to 300 dpi in the Printer Driver properties dialog box.

Cannot complete print job Image memory overflow

Cannot complete Confirm print condition

Cannot print System error

4.8.5.

System Error (CD Drive Related Error During Installation)

Problem Possible Solution(s) Insert the CD into the drive and click Retry.

Cannot read the drive.

Ver. 5.1

204

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5 Service Modes
5.1. Service Modes (For Copier)
These Service Modes are provided to assist the technician in checking for abnormalities in the copier and a means of making adjustments to the Input/Output of major components. Caution: The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance and in compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed. Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become inoperable.

5.1.1.

Service Mode Procedure

1. To select the Service Mode The Service Mode is selected when "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" keys and "3" key on the keypad are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display. 2. To exit the Service Mode The Service Mode is reset when the "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.1.2.

Copier Service Mode Functions

Service Modes (For Copier)

Service Mode F1 Self Test

Item 00 CCD Test 01 LCD/LED Test 02 Page Memory Test 03 Print Test Pattern 1 04 Print Test Pattern 2 05 Print Test Pattern 3 06 Print Test Pattern 4

Function This test is used for checking the CCD. This test is used for checking the LCD and LEDs. This test is used for checking the Page Memory. Prints the pattern for setting the Paper position alignment. Prints the Slant pattern for setting the Paper position alignment. Prints the Grid pattern for setting the Paper position alignment. Prints the pattern for setting the Duplex Paper position alignment. One sheet is copied when the Start key is pressed. Multi copies are made when the Start key is pressed. The functioning of Input / Output items (selected item numbers) is checked. Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be changed. Various function settings (selected by code numbers) can be adjusted. Electronic Counters for Maintenance Perform pseudo-operation of an item (selected by code numbers) Fax Function Parameters

F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9

Single Copy Test Continuous Copy Test Input / Output Status Test Function Parameters Adjust Parameters Electronic Counters Service Adjustment Unit Maintenance

Ver. 5.1

205

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F5 / F6 Information List (Sample)

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01 F5-00 F5-01 F5-02 F5-03 F5-04 F5-05 F5-06 F5-07 F5-08 F5-09 F5-10 F5-11 F5-12 F5-13 F5-14 F5-15 F5-16 F5-17 F5-18 F5-19 Country version Frequency desired . . . . . LSU startup speed LSU off timer . . . . . . . . . . Language default . . . . . Fuser lamp control . . . . . . . . . . Printer fan extension . . . . . Paper size tray1(cop.) Paper size tray2(cop.) Paper size tray3(sys1) Paper size tray4(sys2) Paper size L(LCT) . . . . . USA/CAN 60Hz Full 5 Sec. F5-50 F5-51 F5-52 F5-53 F5-54 F5-55 F5-56 F5-57 F5-58 F5-59 F5-60 F5-61 F5-62 F5-63 F5-64 F5-65 F5-66 F5-67 F5-68 F5-69 Auto contrast adjust. Multi size rotation Auto orig.size detect. 2-sided auto shift Margin reduction Margin value default Edge value default Book value default Ope.toner waste alarm Ope.add toner alarm Auto Tray selection Original lead edge viod . . . . . U13 clear . . . . . . . . . . Interleaving default Page insertion default Cover mode default Reduce N in 1 space Yes No No No No 10mm 5mm 20mm Stop Yes Off Any keys

off

None LETTER Auto INVOICE None LETTER

Blank Blank F,Blank No

F5-20 ADF F5-21 Finisher F5-22 System console

Auto Auto Auto

F5-70 PM cycle F5-71 . . . . . F5-72 Disable at web PM

Continue

**********-F5/F6 INFORMATION LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.02

F6-00 F6-01 F6-02 F6-03 F6-04 F6-05 F6-06 F6-07 F6-08 F6-09 F6-10 F6-11 F6-12 F6-13 F6-14 F6-15 F6-16 F6-17 F6-18 F6-19 F6-20 F6-21 F6-22 Adjust 100% read(s/s) Adjust 100% read(l/t) 100% selection Original registration Printer registration Main motor speed Polygon motor speed Registration void Trail edge read timing Trail edge print timing 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 -6 F6-50 F6-51 F6-52 F6-53 F6-54 F6-55 F6-56 F6-57 F6-58 F6-59 F6-60 F6-61 F6-62 F6-63 F6-64 F6-65 F6-66 F6-67 F6-68 F6-69 F6-70 F6-71 F6-72 T/P mode image density P mode image density LSU unit PWM adjust 1 CCD read position adj. T mode contrast T/P mode contrast P mode contrast Detouch DC Vol 1-sided Detouch AC Vol 1-sided Detouch DC Vol 2-sided 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Ver. 5.1

206

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Machine Setup Information List (Sample)

**********- MACHINE SETUP INFORMATION -****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01
1.MACHINE INFORMATION MACHINE NAME MAC ADDRESS SERIAL NUMBER 2.FIRMWARE VERSION SC SC BOOT PNL SPC FINISHER FAX MODEM PDL FONT1 SC2 3.MEMORY CAPACITY PAGE MEMORY SORT MEMORY FAX MEMRY 4.OPTION DOCUMENT FEEDER (iADF) 3rd PAPER FEED MODULE 4th PAPER FEED MODULE LCT FINISHER PUNCH UNIT FAX BOARD NETWORK SCANNER PCL PRINTER PS PRINTER IPX/SPX EMAIL DDS HDD 5.ERROR LOG TOTAL PRINT COUNT

: DP-6030 : 080023006FA1 : : : : : : : : : BAV001xxPU M30 AAT00001PU 60cpm T40000 0702 CAV00001b CAV00008aPU

: 32 MB : 32 MB : 3 MB

: : : : : : : : : : : : : :

Yes Yes Yes Yes FS605 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

: 2082

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:11 J27 XX-00000008 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 11:31 J41 XX-00000140 (See Remarks) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Remarks: XX-00000140

Page Count 00 : Printer Error 02 : Scanner Error

Ver. 5.1

207

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F7 Total Counter List (Sample)

**********-F7 TOTAL COUNTER LIST-****** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy *** TIME12:01 *** P.01 F7-01 Key operator ID code F7-02 Maintenance count Total count PM Count Scanner PM Count ADF Count OPC Drum count Process unit count ADF PM count Fuser web count Developer count Corona cleaning count Ave. print/drum rise up Total opc rotation time Ave. sec/drum rise up F7-03 Paper feed count Sheet bypass count 1st Paper tray count 2nd Paper tray count 3rd Paper tray count 4th Paper tray count LCT tray count 2-sided count A4(LT)count A4R(LTR) count A3(LDG) count B4(LGL) count F7-04 Scanner count ADF count ADF read count Scanner count Scanner read count : 0000

: : : : : : : : : : : : :

295 295 61 26 295 295 50 295 295 295 0 0 0

: : : : : : : : : : :

147 90 0 0 0 0 28 284 73 19 0

: : : :

26 26 61 18

Ver. 5.1

208

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.1.3.

F4 Mode: Input/Output Status Test

Set the machine to service mode and press "4" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Enter the number to activate the test then press "START" key. Press "STOP" key to cancel the test. When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. 1. Input Check F4 Mode (Input Check) Message Display No. Function Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 000 Paper Path Sensor Paper is detected. 0 Intermediate Roller Sensor Paper is detected. 0 Fuser Unit Paper Exit Paper is detected. 0 Sensor Inverting Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0 Timing Sensor Paper is detected. 0 Registration Sensor Paper is detected. 0 001 Size Sensor 3 Sensor is activated. 1 (Sheet Bypass) Size Sensor 2 Sensor is activated. 1 (Sheet Bypass, Inside) Size Sensor 1 Sensor is activated. 1 (Sheet Bypass, Outside) NP Sensor Paper is detected. 1 (Sheet Bypass) ADU Exit Sensor Paper is detected. 0 ADU Intermediate Sensor Paper is detected. 0 ADU Paper Feed Sensor Paper is detected. 0

Remarks

Ver. 5.1

209

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Function

002 Upper Limit Sensor (2nd Paper Tray) NP Sensor (2nd Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 3 (2nd Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 2 (2nd Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 1 (2nd Paper Tray) Size Sensor 3 (2nd Paper Tray) Size Sensor 2 (2nd Paper Tray) Size Sensor 1 (2nd Paper Tray) 003 Toner Bottle Home Position Sensor Paper Path Sensor (1st Paper Tray) Upper Limit Sensor (1st Paper Tray) NP Sensor (1st Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 3 (1st Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 2 (1st Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 1 (1st Paper Tray) Paper Path Sensor (2nd Paper Tray) 004 Right Cover Open/Close Sensor High Voltage Leak Detection (Bias) High Voltage Leak Detection (Separation Corona) High Voltage Leak Detection (Transfer Corona) High Voltage Leak Detection (Charge Corona) Developer Unit Detecting Sensor

F4 Mode (Input Check) Message Display Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Upper Limit is detected. 1 Paper is not detected. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Home position is detected. Paper is detected. Upper Limit is detected. Paper is not detected. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Paper is detected. Cover is open. Normal. 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Remarks

Normal.

Normal.

Normal.

Developer Unit is not detected.

Ver. 5.1

210

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Function

005 Charge Corona Cleaning End Detect Sensor Charge Corona Cleaning Home position Sensor Inverting Cover Sensor Paper Exit Sensor Inverting Paper Sensor Inverting Sensor 006 Dust Fan Lock Signal Toner Waste Container Full Detection Sensor 007 Exhaust Fan 2 Lock Signal Exhaust Fan 1 Lock Signal Toner Waste Container Detection Sensor Suction Fan Lock Signal 008 Power Supply Fan Lock Signal Ozone Fan 2 Lock Signal Exhaust Fan 3 Lock Signal 009 Cover Open/Close Sensor (System Console) Paper Path Sensor (4th Paper Tray) Upper Limit Sensor (4th Paper Tray) NP Sensor (4th Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 3 (4th Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 2 (4th Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 1 (4th Paper Tray) Drive Motor Stop Signal (System Console)

F4 Mode (Input Check) Message Display Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Cleaner is not detected. 0 Cleaner is detected. Cover is open. Paper is detected. Paper is detected. Paper is detected. Normal. Toner Waste Container is full. Normal. Normal. Toner Waste Container is detected. Normal. Normal. Normal. Normal. Cover is open. Paper is detected. Upper Limit is detected. Paper is not detected. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Drive Motor is stopped. 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1

Remarks

Ver. 5.1

211

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Function

010 Paper Path Sensor (3rd Paper Tray) Upper Limit Sensor (3rd Paper Tray) NP Sensor (3rd Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 3 (3rd Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 2 (3rd Paper Tray) Paper Remaining Sensor 1 (3rd Paper Tray) System Console Detection Sensor 011 Upper Limit Sensor (LCT) NP Sensor (LCT) Attach / Un-attach Sensor LCT Tray Lower Limit LCT Door Open Detection Sensor LCT Detection Sensor Paper Path Sensor (LCT) 012 Paper Remaining Sensor 3 (LCT) Paper Remaining Sensor 2 (LCT) Paper Remaining Sensor 1 (LCT) 013 Upper Paper Path Sensor Paper Tray Sensor Front Stapler Home Position Sensor Rear Stapler Home Position Sensor Lower Paper Path Sensor Middle Paper Path Sensor 014 Paper Path Cover Switch Paper Entry Cover Sensor Front Cover Sensor Exit Cover Sensor Front Cover Switch Paper Entry Cover Switch Front Stapler Sensor Rear Stapler Sensor

F4 Mode (Input Check) Message Display Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Paper is detected. 1 Upper Limit is detected. Paper is not detected. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. System Console is connected. Upper Limit is detected. Paper is not detected. LCT is detached. Lower Limit is detected. Door is closed. LCT is detected. Paper is detected. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Paper is detected. Paper is detected. Home position is detected. Home position is detected. Paper is detected. Paper is detected. Cover is open. Cover is open. Cover is open. Cover is open. Cover is open. Cover is open. Stapler is empty. Stapler is empty. 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0

Remarks

2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605) Only.

2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605) Only.

Ver. 5.1

212

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.

Function

015 Stapler Home Position Sensor Entrance Paper Path Sensor Buffer Paper Path Sensor Exit Paper Path Sensor Buffer Entrance Sensor 016 Stapler Tray Sensor 2nd Tray Sensor 1st Tray Sensor Stapler Sensor Stapler Cartridge Sensor Stapler Unit Sensor 017 Punch Upper Cover Sensor Punch Front Cover Sensor Punch Move Home Position Sensor Punch Home Position Sensor Punch Unit Sensor 018 Rocking Guide Open Sensor Shutter Open Sensor Tray Unit Home Position Sensor Collation Home Position Sensor Stapler Home Position Sensor Push Switch 2 Push Switch 3 019 Rocking Guide Close Sensor Shutter Close Sensor Front Door Sensor Tray Danger Area Sensor Upper Limit Detection Sensor Saddle Unit Sensor Front Door Open Sensor Joint Detect Sensor

F4 Mode (Input Check) Message Display Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Home position is 1 detected. Paper is detected. 0 Paper is detected. 0 Paper is detected. 0 Paper is detected. 0 Paper is detected. 0 Paper is detected. 0 Paper is detected. 0 Stapler is detected. 1 Stapler Cartridge is 0 detected. Stapler Unit is detected. 0 Cover is open. 1 Cover is open. Home position is detected. Home position is detected. Punch Unit is detected. Guide is open. Shutter is open. Home position is detected. Home position is detected. Home position is detected. Switch is ON. Switch is ON. Guide is closed. Shutter is closed. Front Door is open. Tray Danger Area Upper Limit Saddle Unit is detected. Front Door is open. Finisher Unit is detected. 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1

Remarks

2-Bin Finisher (FS600), 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605) and 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS355A).

Ver. 5.1

213

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. 020

021

022029 030 ADF B1 Sensor ADF B2 Sensor ADF B3 Sensor ADF Inverting Sensor ADF Paper Exit Detection Sensor ADF Cover Open Detection Sensor ADF Detection Sensor 031 ADF Original Sensor ADF Original Width Sensor 1 ADF Original Width Sensor 2 ADF Original Length Sensor 1 ADF Original Length Sensor 2 032- Not Used 039

F4 Mode (Input Check) Message Display Function Condition 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Size Sensor B Original detected on the 1 B position. Size Sensor A Original detected on the 1 A position. Size Sensor Z Original detected on the 1 Z position. Size Sensor Y Original detected on the 1 Y position. Size Sensor X Original detected on the 1 X position. ADF/Platen Cover Angle ADF/Platen Cover is 1 Sensor open more than 30 angle. ADF/Platen Cover Open ADF/Platen Cover is 1 Sensor open. Home Position Sensor Home position is 1 detected. +24V Line Error Detecting +24V Line is OFF. 1 Signal Not Used Original is detected. Original is detected. Original is detected. Original is detected. Original is detected. Cover is open. ADF is not detected. Original is detected. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. Sensor is activated. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Remarks
B A

Platen
Z Y X

Front Side

Ver. 5.1

214

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2. Output Check Press the "START" key to start and press the "STOP" key to reset. F4 Mode (Output Check) Function

No. 040- Not Used 049 050 Main Motor

Item

Remark

051 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In Forward Direction 052 Toner Bottle Motor Rotation In Reverse Direction 053 Suction Fan / Dust Fan

Activate the Main Motor after pressing Start key. When CN719-3 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the forward direction. When CN719-6 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the reverse direction. When CN758-11 is 24V, Suction Fan rotates. When CN758-6 is 24V, Dust Fan rotates. When CN758-5 is 24V, Ozone Fan 2 rotates. When CN757-5 is 24V, Exhaust Fan 1 rotates. When CN759-5 is 24V, Exhaust Fan 2 rotates. When CN759-6 is 24V, Exhaust Fan 3 rotates. When CN758-12 is 24V, Power Supply Fan rotates. When CN764-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates. When CN764-4 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN716-6 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN768-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, counter operates. When CN768-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, counter operates.

054 Not Used 055 Ozone Fan 2 056 Exhaust Fan 1/2/3

057 Power Supply Fan 058 Not Used 059 Separator Solenoid 060 Mg Roller Clutch 061 Registration Clutch 062 Total Counter 063 Key Counter 064 Not Used 065 Paper Feed Roller Clutch (1st Paper Tray) 066 Paper Feed Solenoid (1st Paper Tray) 067 Lift Motor (1st Paper Tray) 068 Intermediate Roller Clutch 069 Not Used

1 minute 100 ms For DP-3530/4530/6030 only

When CN712-2 signal level changes 1 minute to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN712-4 signal level changes 2 seconds to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates. When CN713-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the ascending direction. When CN714-4 signal level changes 1 minute to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.

Ver. 5.1

215

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 070 Paper Feed Roller Clutch (2nd Paper Tray) 071 Paper Feed Solenoid (2nd Paper Tray) 072 Lift Motor (2nd Paper Tray) 073- Not Used 074 075 Paper Feed Roller Clutch (3rd Paper Tray) 076 Paper Feed Solenoid (3rd Paper Tray) 077 Lift Motor (3rd Paper Tray) 078 Clutch (System Console) 079 Drive Motor (System Console) 080 Paper Feed Roller Clutch (4th Paper Tray) 081 Paper Feed Solenoid (4th Paper Tray) 082 Lift Motor (4th Paper Tray) 083- Not Used 084 085 Paper Feed Roller Clutch (Sheet Bypass) 086 Paper Feed Solenoid (Sheet Bypass) 087- Not Used 090 091 Paper Feed Solenoid (LCT) 092 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Up)

F4 Mode (Output Check) Function Remark When CN710-2 signal level changes 1 minute to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN710-4 signal level changes 2 seconds to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates. When CN711-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the ascending direction.

When CN607-3 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN607-4 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates. When CN603-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the ascending direction. When CN608-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN602-8 signal level changes to 0V from +5V, motor rotates. When CN608-3 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN608-4 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates. When CN604-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, motor rotates in the ascending direction.

1 minute 2 seconds

1 minute

1 minute 2 seconds

When CN714-6 signal level changes 1 minute to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. When CN718-2 signal level changes 2 seconds to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates.

093 LCT Paper Tray Lift (Down)

094 Paper Feed Motor (LCT) 095- Not Used 099 100 ADU Paper Exit Clutch

When CN554-2 signal level changes 2 seconds to 0V from +24V, solenoid operates. Motor rotates in the ascending direction. (together with upper limit control) Motor rotates in the descending direction. (together with lower limit control) Motor rotates.

When CN714-2 signal level changes 1 minute to 0V from +24V, clutch operates.

Ver. 5.1

216

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 101 ADU Paper Feed Clutch 102 Inverting Motor Rotating In Forward Direction 103 Inverting Motor Rotating In Reverse Direction 104 Paper Guide Solenoid ON

105 Paper Guide Solenoid OFF

106 Roller Solenoid ON

107 Roller Solenoid OFF

108 Saddle Paper Feed Unit Test 109 Tray Elevator Unit Test 1 110 Tray Elevator Unit Test 2 111 Paper Feed Unit Test 112 Paper Exit Unit Test

113 Collation Unit Test 114 Stapler Unit Test 115 Stapler Unit Move Test

116 Rocking Unit Test 117 Shutter Unit Open Test 118 Not Used 119 Shutter Unit Close Test

F4 Mode (Output Check) Function Remark When CN716-4 signal level changes 1 minute to 0V from +24V, clutch operates. Inverting motor rotates in the forward direction. Inverting motor rotates in the reverse direction. When CN763-10 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch turns ON for Straight Paper Exit. When CN763-12 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch turns OFF for Inverting Paper Exit. When CN763-7 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch turns ON for the Inverting Roller OFF. When CN763-9 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch turns OFF for the Inverting Roller ON. Feed Motor turns ON. 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605) Only. Tray moves to Upward direction. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600), 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Tray moves to Home Position. Finisher (FS605) and 2-Bin Finisher (FS330). Feed Motor turns ON. Feed Motor turns ON. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600), 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605) and 1-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS355A). Collation Plates turns ON. Stapler turns ON. Stapler Unit moves. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600) and 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605). Guide turns ON. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600), 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Shutter unit is opened. Finisher (FS605) and 2-Bin Finisher (FS330). Shutter unit is closed. 2-Bin Finisher (FS600) and 2-Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (FS605).

120 Lamp

When CN756-8 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Lamp operates for 4 seconds.

121- Not Used 159 160 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating (67% of rotating speed)

ADF paper feed motor rotates at 67% of rotating speed.

Ver. 5.1

217

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 161 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating (100% of rotating speed) 162 ADF Paper Feed Motor Rotating (400% of rotating speed) 163 ADF Transport Motor Rotating (67% of rotating speed) 164 ADF Transport Motor Rotating (100% of rotating speed) 165 ADF Transport Motor Rotating (400% of rotating speed) 166 ADF Paper Feed Roller Clutch

167 ADF Registration Roller 1 Clutch

168 ADF Registration Roller 2 Clutch

169 ADF Inverting Roller 1 Clutch

170 ADF Inverting Roller 2 Clutch

171 ADF Speed Down Clutch

172 ADF Solenoid

173 ADF Inverting Solenoid

174 ADF Pinch Roller Solenoid

175 ADF Stamp Solenoid

F4 Mode (Output Check) Function ADF paper feed motor rotates at 100% of rotating speed. ADF paper feed motor rotates at 400% of rotating speed. ADF transport motor rotates at 67% of rotating speed. ADF transport motor rotates at 100% of rotating speed. ADF transport motor rotates at 400% of rotating speed. When CN655-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds. When CN656-4 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds. When CN656-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds. When CN659-6 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds. When CN659-7 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds. When CN659-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, clutch operates for 3 seconds. When CN660-7 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 200ms. When CN660-5 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 200ms. When CN660-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 1 second. When CN658-2 signal level changes to 0V from +24V, Solenoid operates for 1 second.

Remark

Ver. 5.1

218

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.1.4.

F5 Mode: Function Parameters (For Copier)

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "5" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons. Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button. When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s).

No. Item 00 Country Version

01

Frequency Desired

F5 Mode Function 0 : Japan 1 : USA/CAN 2 : Europe 3 : Other 0 : Auto 1 : 50 Hz 2 : 60Hz 0 : Low 1 : Full 1 : 5 sec. 2 : 10 sec. 3 : 15 sec. 4 : 20 sec. 6 : 30 sec. 8 : 40 sec. 10 : 50 sec. 12 : 60 sec.

Default Setting Country Dependent

2 (for USA / Canada) 1 (for Europe) 1 3

02 03 04

Not Used LSU Startup Speed LSU Off Timer

05- Not Used 06

Ver. 5.1

219

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 07 Language Default

08 09

Batch Printing Mode (From March 2004 MP) Fuser Lamp Control

F5 Mode Function 0 : English (American) 1 : French 3 : German 4 : Swedish 5 : Italian 6 : Dutch 7 : Portugal 8 : Spanish 9 : Norway 10 : Danish 11 : Finnish 13 : English 17 : Polish 18 : Hungary 19 : Japanese 20 : Czech 21 : Greek 0 : Off 1 : On 0 : Off 1 : Auto 0 : None 2 : 2 min 5 : 5 min 0 : Off 1 : On 0 : None 3 : A4 5 : B5 13 : LETTER 0 : None 1 : A3 2 : B4 3 : A4 4 : A4R 5 : B5 6 : B5R 7 : A5 9 : 8 x 13 10 : 8.5 x 13 11 : LEDGER 12 : LEGAL 13 : LETTER 14 : LETTER R 16 : INVOICE 17 : Auto

Default Setting 0 (for USA / Canada) 13 (for Europe)

1 0 (for USA / Canada) 1 (for Europe) 5

10-11 Not Used 12 Printer Fan Extension

13 14

Paper Out Red Indicator Paper Size Tray 1 (Copier)

1 13 (for USA / Canada) 3 (for Europe) 17

15

Paper Size Tray 2 (Copier)

Ver. 5.1

220

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 16 Paper Size Tray 3 (Sys1)

17 18

Paper Size Tray 4 (Sys2) Paper Size L (LCT)

F5 Mode Function 0 : None 1 : A3 2 : B4 3 : A4 4 : A4R 5 : B5 6 : B5R 7 : A5 9 : 8 x 13 10 : 8.5 x 13 11 : LEDGER 12 : LEGAL 13 : LETTER 14 : LETTER R 15 : INVOICE Same as F5-16 3 : A4 5 : B5 12 : LEGAL 13 : LETTER 14 : LETTER R 0 : No 1 : Auto 0 : No 1 : Auto 0 : No 1 : Auto 0 : No 1 : Auto 0 : No 1 : Low 2 : Medium 3 : High 0 : Off 1 : On 0 : No 1 : Auto 0 : Upper 1 : Bottom same as F5-27 same as F5-27

Default Setting 0

Same as F5-16 13 (for USA / Canada) 3 (for Europe)

19 20 21 22 23 24

Not Used ADF Finisher System Console LCT QUANTUM TDC Adj. Level

1 1 1 1 1 (From July)

25 26 27

Digital QUANTUM 2-Sided Unit

1 1 0 1 1

Output Bin Copy (For DA-FS600/605 only) 28 Output Bin Printer (For DA-FS600/605 only) 29 Output Bin FAX/EMAIL (For DA-FS600/605 only) 30- Not Used 31 32 SADF Mode 33 34 Not Used Multi Size Feed Default

0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : Off 1 : On 221

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 35 Not Used 36 Display DD key 37 Corona Wire Cleaning

F5 Mode Function 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : 1000 1 : 3000 2 : 10000 3:0 0 : No 1 : 1 to 2 2 : 2 to 2 3 : B to 2 0 : Landscape 1 : Portrait 2 : Center 0 : No 1 : LDR 2 : LDR/ LGL (for USA / Canada) 0 : No 1 : A3 2 : A3, B4 (for Other Destinations) 0 : At feed 1 : At exit 0 : No 1 : Key Cnt. 2 : DEPT 3 : Card Same as F5-41 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : Yes 1 : No 0 : 2 hole 1 : 3 hole 2 : 4 hole 0 : No 1 : Mid 2 : Large 0 : No 1 : Mid 2 : Large 0 : Tip dist 1 : Histgram 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : No 1 : Yes

Default Setting 0 (for USA / Canada) 1 (for Europe) 2

38

2-Sided Mode Default

39

Staple Position Setting

40

Double Count

41 42

Count Up Timing KEY/DEPT. Counter

1 0

43 44 45 46

Key Counter Timing Insert Paper Count Dept. Code Re-entry Again Hole Punch Type

0 0 0 1 (for USA / Canada) 2 (for Europe) 1

47

TH Sensor (Tr. DT)

48

TH Sensor (DEV)

49 50 51 52

Auto Contrast Algorithm Auto Contrast Adjust. Dept. Counter (COPY) Dept. Counter (FAX)

0 1 1 0

Ver. 5.1

222

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 53 2-Sided Auto Shift 54 55 Margin Reduction Margin Value Default

F5 Mode Function 0 : No 1 : Auto sft 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 : 5 mm 1 : 10 mm 2 : 15 mm 3 : 20 mm 0 : 5 mm 1 : 10 mm 2 : 15 mm 3 : 20 mm 0 : 15 mm 1 : 20 mm 2 : 25 mm 3 : 30 mm 0 : Stop 1:3K 2:5K 3:8K 4 : 10 K 0 : Stop 1 : Continue 0 : No 1 : Yes 0 0 1

Default Setting

56

Edge Value Default

57

Book Value Default

58

Toner Waste Container Full Alarm

59 60

Add Toner Alarm Auto Tray Selection

0 1

61- Not Used 62 63 U13 Clear 64 65 66 67 68 Dept. Counter (SCANNER) Dept. Counter (PRINTER) Interleaving Default Page Insertion Default Cover Mode Default

69

Reduce N in 1 Space

0 : Any keys 1 : Func + 1 0 : Yes 1 : No 0 : Yes 1 : No 0 : Blank 1 : Copy 0 : Blank 1 : Copy 0 : F, Blank 1 : F, Copy 2 : FB, Blank 3 : FB, Copy 0 : No 1 : Yes

0 0 0 0 0 0

Ver. 5.1

223

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 70 PM (Preventive Maintenance) Cycle

F5 Mode Function 0 : No 1 : 1.5 K 2 : 2.5 K 3: 5K 4 : 10 K 5 : 15 K 6 : 20 K 7 : 30 K 8 : 40 K 9 : 60 K 10 : 80 K 11 : 90 K 12 : 120 K 13 : 150 K (DP-60xx) 14 : 200 K (DP-60xx) 15 : 240 K (DP-60xx) 0 : Continue 1 : Stop 0 : 120 K 1 : 240 K 0 : 1/10 1 : 1/20 2 : 1/30

Default Setting 12 (DP-35xx/45xx) 15 (DP-60xx)

71 72 73 74

Not Used Disable At Web PM PM (Fuser Web) Fuser Web Feeding

1 1 1

75- Not Used 76 77 Text Error Diffusion 78 79 80 A4/LTR Size Select Not Used Paper Size Priority

0 : Errordif 1 : Multilvl 0 : No 1 : Yes 1 : A3 2 : B4 3 : A4 4 : A4R 5 : B5 6 : B5R 8 : A5 9 : 8 x 13 10 : 8.5 x 13 11 : LEDGER 12 : LEGAL 13 : LETTER 14 : LETTER R 15 : INVOICE 0 : B4 1 : 8 x 13 2 : 8.5 x 13 0 : Off 1 : M1, On 2 : M2, On 3 : M1, M2, On 224

0 0

13 (for USA / Canada) 3 (for Europe)

81

B4/FLS Size Selection

82

Manual Skyshot Mode

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Item 83 Digital Skyshot Mode

F5 Mode Function 0 : No 1 : Freeshp 2 : Parallel 0:L>S>C>B 1 : C >S > L > B 2:L>C>S>B 0 : None 1 : Yes 0 : No 3 : 120 K 4 : 240 K 0 : Auto 1 : 10 Half 2 : 10 Full 3 : 100 Half 4 : 100 Full 0 : Off 1 : Soft 2 : Loud Set the default size for Manual Skyshot Mode, M1 and M2. 1

Default Setting

84

Paper Tray Priority

85 86 87

Side Void Setting (ADF) Not Used PM Cycle (ADF)

88 89

Not Used LAN Speed/Duplex

90

Beep Sound In Touch Panel

91 92 9394 95

M1, Size M2, Size Not Used Paper Size (FA) (Factory use only)

70 x 160 95 x 220

96

Bypass Detection (Factory use only)

97

Bp tray B4/FLS/LGL (FA) (Factory use only)

98

Tray2 Detection (Factory use only) Tray2 B4/FLS/LGL (FA) (Factory use only)

99

0 : Japan 1 : USA/CAN 2 : Europe 3 : Other 0 : Japan 1 : USA/CAN 2 : Europe 3 : Other 0 : B4 1 : 8 x 13 2 : 8.5 x 13 3 : LEGAL 0 : Japan 1 : USA/CAN 2 : Europe 0 : B4 1 : 8 x 13 2 : 8.5 x 13 3 : LEGAL

1 (for USA / Canada) 2 (for Europe)

1 (for USA / Canada) 2 (for Europe)

3 (for USA / Canada) 0 (for Europe)

1 (for USA / Canada) 2 (for Europe) 3 (for USA / Canada) 0 (for Europe)

Ver. 5.1

225

MAR 2005

5.1.5.

F6 Mode: Adjust Parameters (For Copier)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "6" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons. Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button. When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Reboot the machine after setting the parameter(s) to activate the setting(s). Note: The Factory Setting is different in each model. F6 Mode No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 Item Adjust 100% read (s/s) Adjust read mag. (l/t) 100% selection Original registration Printer registration Main motor speed Polygon motor speed Registration void Trail edge read timing Trail edge print timing Side adjust (Bypass) Side adjust (Tray 1) Side adjust (Tray 2) Side adjust (Tray 3) Remarks Setting Range -9 - +9 0.1%

Adjustment of ratio for vertical position when scan is made. Adjustment of ratio for parallel position when -9 - +9 0.1% scan is made. Adjustment from 99.1% to 100.9% -9 - +9 0.1% Adjustment of platen original registration -30 - +30 detection timing. 0.2mm Delay time is adjusted from registration roller -50 - +50 clutch ON. 0.5mm Adjustment of Main Motor speed. -10 - +10 0.1% Adjustment Polygon Motor speed. -99 - +99 0.1% Registration void should be adjusted. 0 - +99 0.5mm Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - 0 0.5mm Adjustment of trail edge void. -9 - +15 0.5mm Adjustment of LSU side-side (Sheet Bypass). -8 - +7 0.5mm Adjustment of LSU side-side (1st Tray). -8 - +7 0.5mm Adjustment of LSU side-side (2nd Tray). -8 - +7 0.5mm Adjustment of LSU side-side (3rd Tray). -8 - +7 0.5mm

Ver. 5.1

226

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F6 Mode No. 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Item Side adjust (Tray 4) Side adjust (LCT) Side adjust (ADU) Grid standard voltage Laser standard power Bias standard vol.DC Print Contrast Adjust Remarks Adjustment of LSU side-side (4th Tray). Adjustment of LSU side-side (LCT). Adjustment of LSU side-side (ADU). Adjustment of Grid standard voltage. Laser power compensation adjustment. Adjustment of bias standard voltage. Halftone adjustment, Print density for Photo Mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Adjustment of toner density sensor gain voltage. QUANTUM parameter 1 QUANTUM parameter 2 AC Bias standard voltage adjustment Bias duty ratio adjustment Adjustment of toner supply starting judgement voltage level. AC Bias frequency adjustment Adjustment of standard white density level. (Should not be adjusted in the field, and must be set to "0") Adjustment of standard black density level. (Should not be adjusted in the field, and must be set to "0") Laser power compensation adjustment in 2 value mode. Adjustment of fuser temperature. Temperature compensation for edges Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 1 Adjustment of threshold level. Adjustment of judgement standard voltage. Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. Adjustment of transfer corona current. Setting Range -8 - +7 0.5mm -8 - +7 0.5mm -8 - +7 0.5mm -92 - +61 3.27V -56 - +25 -77 - 76 3.92V -7 - +7

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

TDC gain voltage (Factory use only) (Factory use only) Bias standard vol. AC (Factory use only) Bias Duty Ratio (Factory use only) TDC judgment level Bias Frequency (Factory use only) Quantum white density

-86 - +40 0.033V

-10 - +10 20V -5 - +5 1% -26 - +26 19.5mV -2 - +2 1KHz -99 - +99

29

Quantum black density

-99 - +99

30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Laser power adj. 2 level Fuser temperature Fuser temperature. edge TDC max. read only TDC min. read only TDC ave. read only Paper Loop (Tray1, cop) Toner Save Mode level adjust ID standard voltage LSU unit PWM adjust 2 T corona current 1sided

-56 - +25 -15 - +15 0.833C -15 - +15 0.833C Read only Read only Read only -99 - +99 -255 - +255 -35 - +35 -99 - +99 -10 - +10 5.22uA

Ver. 5.1

227

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F6 Mode No. 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Item Paper Loop (Bypass) Paper Loop (Tray 2, cop) Paper loop (2-sided) Laser duty adj. FAX Paper feeding. LCT Laser duty adj. PRINTER T corona current 2-sided QUANTUM TDC adjust T mode image density Remarks Individual Fine Adjustment for Sheet Bypass Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 2 Adjustment for the length of the loop formed before the copier timing roller. Adjustment of LCT paper feed. Adjustment of transfer corona current. Adjustment of QUANTUM TDC Image density adjustment for Text mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Image density adjustment for Text/ Photo mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Image density adjustment for Photo mode. (-) : Darker. (+) : Lighter. Adjustment of PWM value of LSU. Adjustment of CCD read position. Setting Range -99 - +99 -99 - +99 -99 - +99 -99 - +99 -50 - +50 -99 - +99 -10 - +10 5.22uA -3 - +3 -99 - +99

50

T/P mode image density

-99 - +99

51

P mode image density

-99 - +99

52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69

LSU unit PWM adjust 1 CCD read position adj. T mode contrast T/P mode contrast P mode contrast Sep. DC Volt. 1-Sided Sep. AC Volt. 1-Sided Sep. DC Volt. 2-Sided Sep. AC Volt. 2-Sided Continuous print TDC TDC gain voltage adjust Lead edge read point Side edge read point Bk density reference Bk density output ADF image density Paper Loop (Tray 3, SYS) Stamp position adjust

Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 1 sided copy. Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 1 sided copy. Compensation of Detach DC voltage for 2 sided copy. Compensation of Detach AC voltage for 2 sided copy. Adjustment of toner density sensor gain voltage.

Reference voltage for Toner Density Sensor. Compensate value for Toner Density Sensor output. Compensation of ADF image density. Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 3 Adjustment of verification stamp position.

-99 - +99 -42 - +44 0.2mm -127 - +127 -127 - +127 -127 - +127 -20 - +30 10V -6 - +8 100V -20 - +30 10V -6 - +8 100V 0 - +8 -10 - +10 0.033V 0 - +9 0.5mm 0 - +9 0.5mm -127 - +127 -127 - +127 -99 - +99 -99 - +99 -50 - +50 0.3mm

Ver. 5.1

228

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F6 Mode No. Item Remarks Adjustment of read timing. Adjustment of read timing. Adjustment of read timing. Individual Fine Adjustment for Tray 4 Adjustment of Scanning Sharpness by digital image processing for Text /Photo Copy Mode. Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Set by Digital QUANTUM (QUARC) control Value of Temperature sensor. Value of Humidity sensor. Adjustment of ADF reverse stop position. Adjustment of ADF exit stop position Adjustment of ADF pick up for 1-sided. Adjustment of ADF pick up for 2-sided. Adjustment of ADF horizontal image read start position. Adjustment of original detection timing. Adjustment of trail edge detection timing. Adjustment of magnification for 1-sided. Adjustment of magnification for 2-sided. Adjustment of LSU Laser Power. (QUANTUM is OFF) Adjustment of Charge Voltage. (QUANTUM is OFF) Adjustment of Bias Voltage. (QUANTUM is OFF) Individual Fine Adjustment for LCT. Initialize F5/F6 parameter settings. Setting Range -2 - +2 0 - +3 0 - +3 -99 - +99 -2 - +2 -56 - +25 -77 - +76 3.92V -92 - +61 3.27V 0 - 255 0 - 255 -99 - +99 0.3mm -99 - +99 0.3mm -99 - +99 0.3mm -99 - +99 0.3mm -99 - +99 0.05mm -99 - +99 0.3mm -127 - 127 0.3mm -9 - +9 0.1% -9 - +9 0.1% -56 - +25 -95 - +61 3.27V -77 - +76 3.92V -99 - +99

70-74 Not Used 75 Adj. read AD enable (Factory use only) 76 Adj. read LSI sampling (Factory use only) 77 Adj. read LVDS clock (Factory use only) 78 Paper Loop (Tray4, SYS) 79 MTF (Modulation Transfer Function) adjustment 80 QUANTUM Exposure Volt. 81 QUANTUM Bias Volt.DC 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 QUANTUM Charge Voltage Temperature sensor Value Humidity sensor value (Factory use only) ADF reverse stop position ADF exhaust stop position ADF feed regist. 1-sided ADF feed regist. 2-sided ADF read position Main scan Original read edge ADF Original trail ADF ADF 100% image. 1-sided ADF 100% image. 2-sided Exposure Voltage Charge Voltage Bias Volt.DC Paper Loop (LCT) F5/F6 initialization

Ver. 5.1

229

MAR 2005

5.1.6.

F7 Mode: Electronic Counter

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "7" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons. Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button. When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F7 Mode Service Item Mode F7 Electronic 00 List Print Counters 01 Key Operator ID Code 02 Maintenance 00 Total Count Count 01 PM Count 02 Scanner PM Count 03 ADF Count 04 Not Used 05 OPC Drum Count 06 Process Unit Count 07 ADF PM Count Remarks Key Operators identification code for access to the counter mode. Total count for all copies / prints. Preventive Maintenance count. PM count for scanner readings. PM count of originals fed through the ADF. PM count of recording paper fed through the OPC Drum. PM count of recording paper fed through the Process Unit. PM count of recording paper fed through the Automatic Duplex Unit. PM Count for Fuser Web. PM Count for Developer. Count for Corona Cleaner.

08 Fuser Web Count 09 Developer Count 10 Corona Cleaning Count 11 Avg. Print/Drum Rise Average Print Count for OPC Drum. Up 12 Total OPC Rotation Rotation Time for OPC Drum. Time 13 Avg. Min / Drum Rise Average Rotation Time for OPC Drum. Up

Ver. 5.1

230

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F7 Mode Service Item Remarks Mode F7 Electronic 03 Paper Feed 00 Sheet Bypass Count Total count of paper fed from the sheet Counters Count bypass. 01 1st Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 1st paper tray. 02 2nd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 2nd paper tray. 03 3rd Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 3rd paper tray. 04 4th Paper Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the 4th paper tray. 05 LCT Tray Count Total count of paper fed from the LCT. 06 2-sided Count Total count of 2-sided Print. 07 A4 / Letter Count Total count of A4 / Letter Print. 08 A4-R / Letter-R Count Total count of A4-R / Letter-R Print. 09 A3 / Ledger Count Total count of A3 / Ledger Print. 10 B4 / Legal Count Total count of B4 / Legal Print. 04 Scanner 00 ADF Count Total count of originals fed through the Count ADF. 01 ADF Read Count Total count of originals scanned through the ADF. 02 Scanner Count Total count of scanning operations. 03 Scanner Read Count Total count of scanner readings. 05 Copy Count 00 Copy Print Count Total count of copies printed. 01 Copy Scan Count Total count of copies scanned. 06 PC Count 00 PC Print Count Total count printed from PC. 01 PC Scan Count Total count scanned to PC. 07 Fax Count 00 Fax Transmit Count Total count of Fax transmitted. 01 Fax Receive Count Total count of Fax received. 02 Fax Print Count Total count of Fax printed. 08 Clear All Counts All counters are cleared.

Ver. 5.1

231

MAR 2005

5.1.7.

F8 Mode: Service Adjustment

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "8" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons. Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button. When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F8 Mode No. 00 Item Exposure Lamp replacement Remarks When replacing the exposure lamp. Procedure: a) Press the Start key to move the exposure lamp to the position (approx. 250 mm from the optics home position) where it can be replaced. b) To return the optical system to the home position, press the CLEAR key.* a) Each time the arrow button is pressed, the machine errors or paper jam codes stored in memory are displayed, beginning with the oldest code. Note: Only the 30 most recent codes are displayed. a) Press the Reset key. A Message "Error code can be cleared with the Start key" is displayed on the LCD.* b) Press the Start key. Lock operation for Scanner Unit. Adjustment operation of Toner Density. Adjustment operation of Drum Charge. Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor. Adjustment operation of Black Density sensor gain. Print out the QUANTUM Test Pattern. Print out the Test Pattern 1. Print out the Test Pattern 2.

01-05 Not Used 06 Error Log Print/View

07

Error Log Clear

08 09 10 11-12 13 14 15 16 17 18

(Factory use only) Toner Density adjustment Drum Charge adjustment Not Used (Factory use only) Black Density gain QUANTUM Pattern Not Used LSU PWM Pattern 1 (Factory use only) LSU PWM Pattern 2 (Factory use only)

Ver. 5.1

232

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F8 Mode No. 19 Item Move mirror to lock Remarks a) Press the Start key to move the mirror unit to the locked position for transporting the copier. b) When the mirror unit is locked, the machine will not accept any numerical key input. Note: The locking operation is automatically reset when the Power switch is turned ON again. Adjustment of TDC sensor. Print out the Test Pattern 3. Print out the Test Pattern 4.

TDC sensor output adj. Not Used LSU PWM Pattern 3 (Factory use only) 23 LSU PWM Pattern 4 (Factory use only) 24-46 Not Used 47 ADF continuous test 48 Platen cont. Test 49-54 Not Used

20 21 22

Press START key to begin. Press START key to begin.

Ver. 5.1

233

MAR 2005

5.1.8.

F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Set the machine to Service Mode and press "9" key on the Keypad. Press the "START" key. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons. Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button. When the "C (CLEAR)" key is touched, the selected code input will not be accepted. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

F9 Mode Service Item Mode F9 Unit 00 Fax Service Mode Maintenance 01 Service Alert Tel # 02 Firmware Version 00 SC 01 SC boot 02 PNL 03 SPC 04 Finisher 05 FAX Modem 06 Not Used 07 SC2 00 F5/F6 Parameters Remarks Displays the contact number when a machine malfunction occurs. Displays the firmware version for SC. Displays the firmware version for SC Boot. Displays the firmware version for PNL. Displays the firmware version for SPC. Displays the firmware version for finisher. Displays the firmware version for FAX option 1.

Displays the firmware version for Slot 1. 03 Print Prints the memory contents of the F5 Device Info. and F6 modes. 01 Machine Information Prints the machine setup information list. 02 System Addr. Info. Prints the system memory setting. 03 RAM Addr. Info. Prints the RAM data dump list. 04 RAM Edit 00 Relative Address Setting of Relative address. Mode 01 Real Address Setting of Real address. 05 Serial Number Registration of Serial Number for Maintenance. Clears by Shipment Set.

Ver. 5.1

234

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

F9 Mode Service Item Mode F9 Unit 06 RAM 00 Parameter Initialize Maintenance Initialize Remarks Resets the Fax and Function parameters to default values. Note: Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory. Clears All Jobs, All Preset Data, Parameter Initialize & Resets the Counters (Fax). Clears the LBP fuser error. Updates the firmware in the machine with the Master Firmware Card. Updates the firmware in the machine with the Parallel Port. Onboard F-ROM 4MB Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 8MB Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a) Slot 1 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b) Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 8MB Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (a) Slot 2 FRM8 PCB 4MB (b) Creates a Master Firmware Card using the Firmware Update Kit. A 4MB or 8MB Flash Memory Card will be required depending upon the model. Configuration for Program copy.

01 All Job Clear 02 Not Used 03 Shipment Set

04 LBP Fuser Reset 05 Dept. Counter Clear 07 Firmware 00 Update from master Update card 01 Update from parallel port 08 Program 00 Main Backup 01 Option 1 all (Refer to 02 Option 1 a Sect. 3.6.) 03 Option 1 b 04 Option 2 all 05 Option 2 a 06 Option 2 b 09 Update Program Card

10 Program Copy

11 12 13 14

00 From card to slot 1 01 From card to slot 2 02 From slot 1 to card 03 From slot 1 to slot 2 04 From slot 2 to card 05 From slot 2 to slot 1 Parameter Backup Parameter Restore Page Memory Size Sort Memory Size

Backup the Parameter. Restore the Parameter. Displays the page memory size (MB). Displays the sort memory size (MB).

Ver. 5.1

235

MAR 2005

5.2.

Service Modes (For Facsimile)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Caution: The factory default parameters are preset (country dependent) for optimum performance and in compliance with the local telecommunication regulations/standards, and do not need to be changed. Changing some of these parameters may cause the unit to be no longer compliant or become inoperable.

5.2.1.

Fax Service Mode Procedure

1. To select the Service Mode The Service Mode is selected when "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" keys and "3" key on the keypad are simultaneously pressed, then F1 will appear in the display. Press "9" and "START" keys to enter F9 Mode: Unit Maintenance. Select "00 FAX Service Mode" on the Touch Panel display to enter Facsimile Service Mode. 2. To exit the Service Mode The Service Mode is reset when the "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys are pressed simultaneously.

5.2.2.

FAX Service Mode Table

The following service modes are provided to assist you in setting operational functions of the unit and determining the condition of the unit. No. Service Mode 00 Not Used 01 Function Parameter Setting 02 03 RAM Edit Mode Print Parameter List / Report Description Allows changes to the function parameters (the home position, etc.). Factory use only. Prints the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and Toner Order Form. Generates various binary, tonal and DTMF signals, by the modem. Initialize RAM and restore the default value of the function parameters. Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. Allows input of information for Service Alert Report, Maintenance Alert Report and Toner Order Form. Used for Firmware Update, Firmware Backup, Parameter Restore, Parameter Backup, Transferring Firmware from the PC to the Flash Card and Sending a Received File during a fatal printer error.

04 05 06

Modem Tests Not Used RAM Initialize

07 08 09

Not Used Check & Call System Maintenance

Ver. 5.1

236

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.3.

Fax Service Mode 1 (Function Parameter Setting)

Use the following procedure to change the function parameters. Select the "01 Function Param. Setting" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. If you wish to select another code number, scroll the menu with the arrow buttons. Select the desired function on the Touch Panel display and touch the "OK" button. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

No. 000

001

002

003

004

Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function MON/TEL DIAL 1 = Monitor Selects whether the machine starts to TX 2 = TEL/DIAL automatically during On-Hook dialing. Monitor : Start to TX after pressing START TEL/DIAL : Start to TX automatically ALARM STATUS 1 = OFF Selects the No Paper or No Toner alarm status. 2 = Timer (6 sec.) OFF : Alarm is disabled. 3 = Constant Timer : Alarm will shut off after 6 seconds. Constant : Alarm will not stop until "STOP" is pressed or the error is cleared/ corrected. STOP COMM. 1 = Off Selects whether the machine prompts to print the JRNL 2 = On COMM. Journal when the printout condition is set to INC and STOP is pressed during communication. CONTINUOUS 1 = Off Selects whether the Continuous Polling feature is POLL 2 = Stn (Tx only) enabled. 3 = Hub (Rx only) Stn : Place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen, then press the assigned Program Key to store or add the documents into a polled file. (See Note 1) Hub : When the polling command is initiated, the machine will continuously poll originals from the remote stations until it is interrupted by pressing "STOP". NUMERIC ID 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts and allows to SET 2 = On (accepts) set or change the Numeric ID.

Ver. 5.1

237

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. 005

006 007 008

009 010

011

Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function Sets the Destination Code after installing the Fax DESTINATION 000 : Austria Communication Board (DA-FG600). CODE 001 : U.K. 002 : Canada Note: 003 : Denmark 004 : Taiwan It is not necessary to set the parameter for the 005 : Finland following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware 006 : Germany is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware. 007 : Netherlands PB : UK 008 : Italy PF : France 009 : Spanish PG : Switzerland 010 : Hong Kong PK : China 011 : Australia PM : Germany 012 : Switzerland PT : Taiwan 013 : Norway PU : USA 015 : Portuguese PEU : UK 016 : Ireland 017 : Belgium 018 : Sweden 019 : Turkey 020 : U.S.A. 021 : France 022 : New Zealand 025 : Japan 030 : Czech 031 : Russia 032 : Greece 033 : Hungary 034 : Indonesia 035 : South Korea 038 : Malaysia 039 : China 045 : Thailand 048 : South Africa 049 : Singapore 050 : Universal ID DISPLAY 1 = Number (Numeric ID) Selects the priority of displaying the ID. 2 = Chara (Character ID) JRNL COLUMN 1 = Station Selects the contents of the ID to display on the 2 = RCVD ID Journal. MONITOR 1 = Off Selects whether the Monitor is ON/OFF for 2 = On monitoring fax signals. (FOR SERVICE USE ONLY) DC LOOP 1 = Off (Normal) Selects a false Off Hook state for back to back 2 = On (Off Hook) communication test. TX LEVEL 00 = 0 dBm Selects the TX signal output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. (Refer to Chapter 4.3.) 15 = -15 dBm RX LEVEL 1 = -43 dBm Selects the receiving sensitivity of -33/-38/-43/-48 2 = -38 dBm dBm. 3 = -33 dBm 4 = -48 dBm

Ver. 5.1

238

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Parameter 012 DTMF LEVEL

013 G3 RX EQL

014 G3 TX EQL

Function Parameter Table Selections Function 00 = 0 dBm Selects the DTMF output level, 0 to -15 dBm in 1 ~ dBm steps. 15 = -15 dBm 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 reception mode, 2 = 4dB 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8dB 4 = 12dB 1 = 0dB Selects the cable equalizer for G3 transmission 2 = 4dB mode, 0dB, 4dB, 8dB or 12dB. 3 = 8dB 4 = 12dB

015 Not Used ~ 016 017 TX START

018 RX START

019 ITU-T V.34

1 = 2400 bps 2 = 4800 bps 3 = 7200 bps 4 = 9600 bps 5 = TC7200 6 = TC9600 7 = 12000 bps 8 = 14400 bps 1 = 2400 bps 2 = 4800 bps 3 = 7200 bps 4 = 9600 bps 5 = TC7200 6 = TC9600 7 = 12000 bps 8 = 14400 bps 1 = Off 2 = On 3 = Select 1 = Off (Invalid) 2 = On (Valid) 1 = Off (without EP Tone) 2 = On (with EP Tone)

Selects the transmission modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 32. Selects the reception modem start speed, 14400/ 12000/TC9600/TC7200/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps. Note: This parameter is applicable only when communicating with regular G3 machines. When communicating with Super G3 (V.34) machines, use Parameter No. 33. Selects whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off, On or Select. Select: Select whether the ITU-T V.34 is Off or On, when entering Phone Book Dialing Numbers or Manual Number Dialing. Select the ECM mode. Selects whether to add the echo protect tone on V.29 mode. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) On : Add Off : Do not add Selects the time interval between the receiving signal and the transmitting signal. Selects the TCF check interval Long/Short Selects the CED frequency 2100/1080 Hz Selects the communication start-up condition (XMT and Polling). (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.)

020 ITU-T ECM 021 EP TONE

022 SIGNAL INTERVAL

1 = 100 ms 2 = 200 ms 3 = 500 ms 023 TCF CHECK 1 = Normal (Short) 2 = Long 024 CED 1 = 1080 Hz (non ITU-T) FREQUENCY 2 = 2100 Hz 025 COMM. START- 1 = First UP 2 = Second

Ver. 5.1

239

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. 026 027 028

029 030

031 032 033 034

035

036 037

038 039

040

041

042 043

044

Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function NON1 = Off (Invalid) Selects own mode (Panafax mode). STANDARD 2 = On (Valid) SHORT 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. PROTOCOL B 2 = On (Valid) SHORT 1 = Off (Invalid) Selects the short protocol mode. When activated, it PROTOCOL D 2 = On (Valid) allows the machine to automatically store the modem speed for each Auto Dial Number. REMOTE 1 = Off (will not accept) Selects whether the machine accepts Remote DIAGNOSTICS 2 = On (accepts) Diagnostics from the service station. CED & 300 BPS 1 = 75 ms Selects the pause interval between the CED and the 2 = 1 sec 300 bps signal. (Used when Echo Suppression is disabled.) RTC = EOLx12 1 = Off (EOLx6) Selects the RTC signal, EOLx6 or EOLx12. 2 = On (EOLx12) V34 TX START 2400-33600bps Selects the transmission modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. V34 RX START 2400-33600bps Selects the receiving modem start speed for V.34 communication, 33600-2400 bps. V34 TX 2400-3429sr Selects the transmission symbol rate for V.34, 3429/ SYMBOL RATE 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. V34 RX 2400-3429sr Selects receiving symbol rate for V.34, 3429/3429/ SYMBOL RATE 3200/3000/2800/2400 sr. Press V or /\ to select the symbol rate. Not Used PROTOCOL 1 = Off (not displayed) Selects whether to display the modem speed during DISPLAY 2 = On (displayed) communication. (Press the Job Status Key to display) Not Used FLASH TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash ~ key. 100 = 1000 ms FLASH TIME 5 = 50 ms Selects the pause interval before activating the Flash (PSTN) ~ key. 100 = 1000 ms (For Germany, Austria and Czech) PAUSE TIME 1 = 1 sec. Selects the pause interval from 1 sec. ~ 10 sec. for ~ dialing through a switchboard or for international 10 = 10 sec. calls. Not Used REDIAL 0 = no waiting Selects the redial interval from 0 to 15 minutes in 1 INTERVAL ~ minute steps. 15 = 15 minutes REDIAL COUNT 0 = no redial Selects the redial count from 0 to 15 times in 1 step ~ intervals. 15 = 15 times Note: In order to comply with the requirements TBR21 in the EC countries, do not select 15 times. 0 ~ 9 (For Australia Only) 1 = 1 ring ~ 9 = 9 rings Selects the ring detection count from 1 to 9 rings in 1 ring step intervals.

045 RING DETECT COUNT

Ver. 5.1

240

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Function Parameter Table No. Parameter Selections Function 046 ON-HOOK TIME 0 = 0 sec. Selects the on-hook time between sequential ~ communication calls in 1 second step intervals. 90 = 90 sec. 047 RESPONSE 1 = 1 sec. Selects the waiting interval for the response after WAIT ~ completing the dialing. 90 = 90 sec. 20 ~ 150 sec. (For France Only) 048 Not Used ~ 049 050 RING DETECT MODE 051 Not Used 052 PULSE RATE 053 Not Used ~ 054 055 BUSY TONE CHECK 056 DIAL TONE CHECK (Except for USA and Canada) 057 DC LOOP CHECK (Except for USA and Canada) 058 COMM.JRNL +IMAGE 059 CONFIDENTIAL RCV REPORT 060 VERSION

1 = Normal 2 = Rough

Selects the quality of ringer detection. Use if the line signal is out of regulation, set to "Rough" so that the unit may detect the ringing signals. Selects the dial pulse rate 10/20 pps.

1 = 10 pps 2 = 20 pps

1 = Off 2 = On 1 = Off 2 = On

Selects whether to detect the Busy Tone. Selects whether to detect Dial Tone before dialing the telephone number.

1 = Off 2 = On

Selects whether the unit checks the DC Loop during communication.

1 = Off (without image) 2 = On (with image) 1 = Off (does not print out) 2 = On (prints out) Indicates the Host software version. 061 TX/RX//PRT/ 1 = Fax Transmit Count CPY COUNTER 2 = Fax Receive Count 3 = Total Count 4 = Copy Print Count 062 PRINT 1 = Off COUNTER 2 = On 063 Not Used ~ 067

Selects whether the machine prints the COMM. Journal with image. Selects whether the machine prints the Confidential RCV Report.

Displays the transmitted, received, total printed and copied document count.

Selects whether to print in the Fax Parameter List, the counter information that is displayed in the Function Parameter No. 61.

Ver. 5.1

241

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. 068

069

070

071

072

073 074 075

076

077

078 ~ 079 080 ORIGINAL LEAD EDGE ADF 081 ORIGINAL TRAIL ADF

Function Parameter Table Parameter Selections Function NYSE FAX 1 = Off Selects whether the machine will forward the FORWARD 2 = On incoming and outgoing faxes to a specified station. (USA and Note: Once this parameter is activated, Fax Forwarding Canada Only) via Fax Parameter 054 is automatically disabled, an Access Code of "0000" is automatically assigned and Fax Parameter 038 has a new setting added called "NYSE". NYSE LOCAL 1 = INC Selects the printing condition for the incoming faxes PRINT 2 = ON (Always) after FAX Forwarding. (USA and INC. : Prints only if FAX Forwarding fails. Canada Only) ON : Always prints. LINE ERROR 1 = 128 lines 1. Selects the line disconnect condition during 2 = 256 lines reception. If the number of line errors exceed this 3 = 512 lines setting, the unit will disconnect the line. 4 = 1024 lines 2. Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 5 = 2048 lines PIN. 6 = Off (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "LINES") (will not disconnect line) (See Note 1) TOTAL ERROR 1 = 5% Selects the transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/ 2 = 10% PIN. 3 = 15% (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) 4 = 20% (See Note 2) CONTINUOUS 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the continuous total error criteria of Off/3/6 or ERROR 2 = 3 lines/STD 12 lines in Standard mode. If continuous total error 3 = 6 lines/STD exceeds this setting, the unit will transmit RTN/PIN. 4 = 12 lines/STD (Available if No.73 Error Detect is set to "RATE".) ERROR 1 = Lines Selects the error detect condition Lines/Rate. DETECT 2 = Rate RTN RECEIVE 1 = Disconnect Selects whether to disconnect the phone line or 2 = Continue continue when "RTN" is received. CODING 1 = MH (MH only) Selects the coding scheme. 2 = MR (MH or MR) 3 = MMR (MH or MR or MMR) 4 = JBIG BATCH TX 1 = Off Selects whether the batch transmission is available. (USA and 2 = On Canada Only) RX JAM 1 = Off (unlimited) Selects the maximum length of a received LENGTH 2=2m document that can be printed. Not Used

082 JAM LENGTH

-99 ~ +99 -127 ~ +127 1=1m 2=2m

Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor ON position and the scanning start position. Adjusts the distance between the scanning sensor OFF position and the scanning end position. Selects the maximum length of the original that can be scanned. 242

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Parameter 083 Not Used 084 LINE AS NO PAPER 085 Not Used 086 REDUCTION FINE 087 DARKER LEVEL 088 NORMAL LEVEL 089 LIGHTER LEVEL 090 Not Used ~ 091 092 SMOOTHING

Function Parameter Table Selections 1 = Ring (ring) 2 = Busy (keep line busy)

Function

Selects whether to ring or send a busy tone to the remote station when the recording paper runs out or the unit cannot receive because of any trouble. Selects whether the resolution is preset to Fine, when sending with reduction B4A4. Selects the contrast level. 0 15 Lightest Darkest

1 = Off 2 = On 0 = Lightest Contrast ~ 15 = Darkest Contrast

1 = Off 2 = On

Selects whether the smoothing function is available.

093 Not Used ~ 101 102 ORIGINAL -30 REGISTRATION ~ +30 103 TRAIL EDGE -9 READ TIMING ~ 0 104 Not Used ~ 109 110 MAC ADDRESS 111 Not Used 112 INSERT EMAIL 1 = Off TXT 2 = On

Adjustment of original registration detection timing.

Adjustment of trail edge void.

Indicates the MAC Address. Selects whether the Text Template (email message) is programmable and added on all email sent in the message body above the top line of text. (Up to 40 characters Programmed in the User Parameters.) Note: After enabling this feature, aside from entering the text in the User Parameters, it also has to be activated in each Auto Dial Number before it will take effect. It does not work for Direct Dialed Numbers.

113 Not Used ~ 114 115 TIME ZONE

1 = Scroll 2 = Direct

Selects the setting method for Time Zone. Scroll : Allows using "Scroll Keys" to scroll through the Time Zone Table. Direct : Allows you to input the Time Zone directly, (*) key to be used as a switch between +/-.

Ver. 5.1

243

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Parameter 116 OVERWRITE WARNING 117 Not Used ~ 121 122 LDAP

Function Parameter Table Selections Function 1 = Yes Selects whether the Overwrite Warning is included 2 = No on the Internet FAX Result Receipt when programming the Auto Dialer via email.

1 = Off 2 = On

When LDAP is used, specialize characters may be displayed as different characters. Available from May production.

123 Not Used ~ 174 175 FAX/EMAIL Default 176 Not Used ~ 199

0 = Address Book 1 = Mode Set

Selects the FAX/EMAIL Default.

Note 1: Continuous Polling (Station Mode) This feature allows you to store or add documents into a polled file in memory. To enable the Continuous Polling feature set Function Parameter No. 003 to "2:Station". The last Program Key will be assigned with the "Store 4 Poll" Key name automatically and cannot be changed. To prepare the document(s) to be polled, simply place the document(s) on the ADF or Platen and then press the Program Key to store or add the document(s) into a polled file. (Note: If a regular polled file is stored in memory, the Program Key for Continuous Polling will not be accepted.) Note 2: Function Parameter No. 070 (Line Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN Setting 3:512 4:1024 0-127 0-255 128-255 256-511 256-511 512-1023

1:128 0-31 32-63 64-127

2:256 0-63 64-127 128-255

5:2048 0-511 512-1023 1024-2047

6:Off Always -

Note 3: Function Parameter No. 071 (Total Error)-Transmit condition of RTP/PIP or RTN/PIN Signal MCF/PIP RTP/PIP RTN/PIN Setting 2:10% 3:15% 0-4 0-7 5-9 8-14 1015-

1:5% 0-2 3-4 5-

4:20% 0-9 10-19 20-

Note 4: The default setting of parameters depends on the countrys specifications or regulations. Print the Function Parameter List to confirm the default settings.

Ver. 5.1

244

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.4.

Fax Service Mode 3 (Printout of Lists, Reports and Test Results)

From this Service Mode you can print the Function Parameter List, Page Memory Test, Printer Report, All Document File, Protocol Trace and the Toner Order Form.

5.2.4.1.

Function Parameter List

A list of all Function Parameters can be printed by the following procedure. Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "01 Function Parameter List" on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES button to print Function Parameter List. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Ver. 5.1

245

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Function Parameter List (Sample)

************* -FUNCTION PARAMETER- ************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:07 ***P.01 000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 MON/TEL DIAL:[Monitor] Monitor ALARM STATUS:[Timer] Timer STOP COMM.JRNL:[On] On CONTINUOS POLL:[Off] Off NUMERIC ID SET:[On] On DESTINATION CODE:[999]999 IDDISPLAY:[Chara] Chara JNL COLUMN:[Station] Station MONITOR:[Off] Off DC LOOP:[Off] Off TX LEVEL:[-9dBm] -9dBm RX LEVEL:[-43dBm] -43dBm DTMF LEVEL:[-5dBm] -5dBm G3 RX EQL:[0dB] 0dB G3 TX EQL:[0dB] 0dB ----------------TX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps RX START:[14400bps ] 14400bps ITU-T V.34:[On] On ITU-T ECM:[On] On EP TONE:[Off] Off SIG. INTERVAL:[500ms] 500ms TCF CHECK:[Normal] Normal CED FREQ.:[2100Hz] 2100Hz COMM. START-UP:[1'st] 1'st NON-STANDARD:[On] On SHORT PROTOCOL B:[On] On SHORT PROTOCOL D:[On] On REMOTE DIAG.:[On] On CED & 300bps:[75ms] 75ms RTC=EQL x 12:[Off] Off V34TX START:[33600bps] 33600bps V34RX START:[33600bps] 33600bps V34 TX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr V34 RX SR:[3429sr] 3429sr --------PROTOCOL DISPLAY:[Off] Off --------FLASH TIME:[500] 500ms --------PAUSE TIME:[3sec] 3sec --------REDIAL INTERVAL:[3min] 3min REDIAL COUNT:[5] 5 RING DET. COUNT:[2] 2 ON-HOOK TIME:[5sec] 5sec RESPONSE WAIT:[55sec] 55sec ----------------050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 RING DET MODE:[Normal] Normal ---------PULSE RATE:[10pps] 10pps ------------------BUSY TONE CHECK:[On] On ------------------COMM. JRNL +IMAGE:[On] On CONF.RCV REPORT:[On] On VERSION: AAV11502AU TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000080/000168/000003/000000 PRINT COUNTER:[Off] Off ---------------------------------------------NYSE FAX FORWARD:[Off] Off NYSE LOCAL PRINT:[Inc] Inc LINE ERROR:[128] 128 TOTAL ERROR:[ 10] 10 CONTI. ERROR:[Off] Off ERROR DETECT:[Rate] Rate RTN RECEIVE:[Discon] Discon CODING:[JBIG] JBIG BATCH TX:[On] On RX JAM LENGTH:[2 m] 2 m ------------------DOC TOP FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm DOC END FEED:[0.0mm] 0.0mm JAM LENGTH:[ 2 m] 2 m ---------LINE AS NOPAPER:[Ring] Ring ---------REDUCTION FINE:[On] On DARKER LEVEL:[2] 2 NORMAL LEVEL:[8] 8 LIGHTER LEVEL:[4] 4 ------------------SMOOTHING:[On] On ----------------------------------------------------------------

Note:The power must be reset for the new parameter settings to take effect. -PANASONIC DP-6030******************************** -PANASONIC DP-6030 - ****** -12345678901234567890- ***********

Note: 1. The contents of the Function Parameter List may vary depending on the countrys regulations. 2. * mark will be shown on the left side of number when setting was changed from default.

Ver. 5.1

246

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.4.2.

Page Memory Test

A test pattern prints out for checking the page memory (IC120 and IC121 on the SC PCB) and printer mechanism using the following procedure. Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "03 Page Memory Test" on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES" button to print a test pattern. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

SC BOOT PNL SPC FINISHER FAX MODEM PDL FONT1 SC2

: : : : : : :

M30 AAT00001PU 60cpm T40000 0702 CAV00001b CAV00008aPU

TX/RX/PRT/CPY:000123/000456/000789/000333 MEMORY SIZE: (2MB) MAC ADDRESS: 08002300AB5F SHIPMENT SET

Ver. 5.1

247

MAR 2005

5.2.4.3.

Printer Report

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

All printer errors are logged on the Printer Report which can be printed by the following procedure. Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "04 Printer Report" on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES" button to print a Printer Report. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

**************-PRINTER REPORT-********************* DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 19:02******** LAST PRINT ERROR CUSTOMER ID FIRMWARE VERSION SC SC BOOT PNL SPC TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER : MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 : 1234567890123456 00-00000016

: : : : : : : :

BAV00008PU M30 AAT00001PU 60cpm T40000 000475 000398 000083 000016

NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT NO.DATE & TIME ERROR CODE RRROR COUNT -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01.MMM-dd-yyyy 15:38 J00 00-00000016 02.MMM-dd-yyyy 10:48 J02 00-00000016 --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

-PANASONIC ***** DP-6030 *******************-PANAFAX

-*******-12345678901234567890-**************

Ver. 5.1

248

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.4.4.

All Document Files

Print the document files from the Flash Memory. Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "05 All Document Files" on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES" button to print All Document Files. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Ver. 5.1

249

MAR 2005

5.2.4.5.

Protocol Trace

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Print a Protocol Trace Report for the previous communication. Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "06 Protocol Trace" on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES" button to print a Protocol Trace Report. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

*************** PROTOCOL LOG. REPORT ****************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 16:56 *******

STATUS MODE SPEED REMOTE CAPA. LOCAL CAPA.

: : : : :

OK ECM-TX (STANDARD) 9600bps 0MS/L DIS 00 CE B9 C4 80 12 TSI 2B 20 20 20 38 37 2B 2B 2B 2B 39 38 36 36 35 34 37 38 38 30 DCS 00 C6 F8 44

COMMAND LOG. REMOTE : NSF CSI DIS CFR LOCAL : TSI DCS PIX PPS-EOP -----------------------------------------------------------------REMOTE : MCF LOCAL : DCN -PANASONIC ****************************-PANASONIC DP-6010-*************-12345678901234567890-***************

Ver. 5.1

250

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.4.6.

Toner Order Form

The Toner Order Form can be printed out manually by the following procedure. Select the "03 Print Param. List/Report" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "07 Toner Order Form" on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES" button to print a Toner Order Form. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

Ver. 5.1

251

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

************************************* > TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM < *************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer Panasonic Corp. (2) by Phone: by Fax: 1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address ========================= Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Phone No.: Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) Toner Bottle No.:

Attention: Phone No.: P.O. No.(if required):

(6)

Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ Print your name and title Signature & Date

Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) (2) Dealer Name (3) Toner Order Tel # (4) Toner Order Fax # (5) Customer ID (6) Toner Bottle No. The toner supply in your machine is running low Up to 25 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) DQ-TU24D : DP-3510/4510 DQ-TU241G : DP-3520/3530/4520/4530 DQ-TU35D : DP-6010 DQ-TU351G : DP-6020/6030 The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model and the Destination. 252

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.5. 5.2.5.1.

Fax Service Mode 4 (Modem Test) Binary Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "01 Binary Signal" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Binary Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signals V21 300bps V27ter 2400bps V27ter 4800bps V29 7200bps V29 9600bps V17 TC7200bps V17 TC9600bps V33 12000bps V33 14400bps

Ver. 5.1

253

MAR 2005

5.2.5.2.

Tonal Signal

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This Service Mode is used to check the tonal signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "02 Tonal Signal" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Tonal Signal Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Signals 462 Hz 1080 Hz 1100 Hz 1300 Hz 1650 Hz 1850 Hz 2100 Hz

Ver. 5.1

254

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.5.3.

DTMF Signal

This Service Mode is used to check the DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signal output. The DTMF signal can be generated using the following procedure. Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "03 DTM Single Tone" or "DTMF Dual Tone" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. DTMF Single Tone Table Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 * # DTMF Signal Tones 697 Hz 770 Hz 852 Hz 941 Hz 1209 Hz 1336 Hz 1477 Hz 1633 Hz DTMF Dual Tones 941 Hz + 1336 Hz 697 Hz + 1209 Hz 697 Hz + 1336 Hz 697 Hz + 1477 Hz 770 Hz + 1209 Hz 770 Hz + 1336 Hz 770 Hz + 1477 Hz 852 Hz + 1209 Hz 852 Hz + 1336 Hz 852 Hz + 1477 Hz 941 Hz + 1209 Hz 941 Hz + 1477 Hz

DTMF Dual Tone Table

Ver. 5.1

255

MAR 2005

5.2.5.4.

Binary Signal (V.34)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This Service Mode is used to check the binary signal output. Signals can be output to the line using the following procedure. (V.34) Select the "04 MODEM Tests" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "05 V34 MODEM" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired parameter on the Touch Panel display and touch the "CLOSE" button. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. Binary Signal Table Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Signals V34 2400 sr 2400 bps V34 2400 sr 4800 bps V34 2400 sr 7200 bps V34 2400 sr 9600 bps V34 2400 sr 12000 bps V34 2400 sr 14400 bps V34 2400 sr 16800 bps V34 2400 sr 19200 bps V34 2400 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 4800 bps V34 2800 sr 7200 bps V34 2800 sr 9600 bps V34 2800 sr 12000 bps V34 2800 sr 14400 bps V34 2800 sr 16800 bps V34 2800 sr 19200 bps V34 2800 sr 21600 bps V34 2800 sr 24000 bps V34 2800 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 4800 bps V34 3000 sr 7200 bps Number 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 Signals V34 3000 sr 9600 bps V34 3000 sr 12000 bps V34 3000 sr 14400 bps V34 3000 sr 16800 bps V34 3000 sr 19200 bps V34 3000 sr 21600 bps V34 3000 sr 24000 bps V34 3000 sr 26400 bps V34 3000 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 4800 bps V34 3200 sr 7200 bps V34 3200 sr 9600 bps V34 3200 sr 12000 bps V34 3200 sr 14400 bps V34 3200 sr 16800 bps V34 3200 sr 19200 bps V34 3200 sr 21600 bps V34 3200 sr 24000 bps V34 3200 sr 26400 bps V34 3200 sr 28800 bps V34 3200 sr 31200 bps Number 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 Signals V34 3429 sr 4800 bps V34 3429 sr 7200 bps V34 3429 sr 9600 bps V34 3429 sr 12000 bps V34 3000 sr 19200 bps V34 3429 sr 16800 bps V34 3429 sr 19200 bps V34 3429 sr 21600 bps V34 3429 sr 24000 bps V34 3429 sr 26400 bps V34 3429 sr 28800 bps V34 3429 sr 31200 bps V34 3429 sr 33600 bps ANSam CM JM INFO0c & TONEB INFO0c & TONEA PPh & AC & ALT

Ver. 5.1

256

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.6.

Fax Service Mode 6 (RAM Initialization)

Initializes RAM and restores the Function Parameters to their default values. Note: This operation should be performed when the unit is first installed. Select the "06 RAM initialize" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. Touch the "YES" button to initialize RAM. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. RAM Initialization Table No. 01 Initialize Mode Parameter Initialize Description Restores the Fax and Function Parameters to default values. Note: Turn the Power Switch to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. Clears the Journal contents. Clears the One-touch, ABBR Numbers and Phone Books. Clears the Program keys. Clears the Logo, ID, Polling Password. Clears the Printer Error Log. Deletes all setting information, except parameter number 80 and 81, then set default values. Deletes all information in the Flash Memory. Clears all Jobs stored in Flash Memory.

02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

Journal Clear Auto Dial Clear Program Dial Clear LOGO/ID/PSWD Clear LBP Error Log Clear Shipment Set Flash Memory Clear All Job Clear

Ver. 5.1

257

MAR 2005

5.2.7. 5.2.7.1.

FAX Service Mode 8 (Check & Call) Overview

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This feature enables the Authorized Servicing Dealers to manage and improve the machine maintenance to their customers by alerting them of equipment problems. It also can be used as a Supply Sales Tool by alerting the Dealer that the unit is running Low on Toner. The function overview is as follows: 1. The machines printer error information is stored in the Printer Report. 2. The printer report can be manually printed when required. 3. When printer errors occurs, the unit can automatically transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. 4. When the unit detects Low Toner or PM counter reached the maintenance timing, it can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Select the "08 Check & Call" on the Touch Panel display. Select the desired code number on the Touch Panel display. (i.e. 01 Service Alert Fax #, input the telephone No. or for an email address, press the "FAX/EMAIL" Mode key and input the email address.) Touch the "OK" button. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode.

5.2.7.2.

Printer Reports

Conditions under which a report can be printed or transmitted 1. Manual Print The Printer Report can be printed by Service Mode 3. (See Sect. 5.2.4.3.) 2. Automatic Transmission/Printout a. Service Alert Report When the unit detects an Emergency Printer Error, the unit will immediately transmit the Service Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. However, the unit will not transmit the Service Alert Report if it finds the same error within the same date in the error log. b. Maintenance Alert Report When the unit detects Low Toner, the unit can automatically transmit the Maintenance Alert Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Refer to the Error Code Table. Note: To activate the transmission of the Maintenance Alert Report, register both numbers 01 Service Alert Fax # & 02 Maint Alert Fax #. c. Call Counter Report (DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030) When the printer counter reaches the pre-set number, the unit can automatically transmit the Call Counter Report to the pre-registered telephone number or email address. Note: The Service and Maintenance Alert Reports are managed in the same manner as the normal memory transmission (Retry, Incomplete, File List, Display while it is transmitting, Journal).

Ver. 5.1

258

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Error Code Ex-xx E13 Jxx Uxx U13

Log O O O O

Tx Remarks Report S Refer to the Mechanical Error Code (E Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.3.) Out of Toner. Refer to the Jam Error Code (J Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.2.) Refer to the User Error Code (U Code) Table. (Sect. 4.5.1.) M Low Toner.

Note: TX (Transmission) Report: S = Service Alert Report, M = Maintenance Alert Report

Ver. 5.1

259

MAR 2005

5.2.7.3.

SERVICE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ******** **************************** > SERVICE ALERT REPORT < **************************** LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 : 01234567890 : ABC COMPANY : BAV00008PU : AAT00001PU : 6-cpm T40000 CURRENT : 13 : 13 : 9 : 1 : 13 : 13 : 1 : 240986 : 13 : 13 : 1.00 : 0.03 : 0.01 : : : : : : 0 3 10 0 0 0 PM CYCLE 240000 (------) (------) ----------(------) CURRENT 0 3 10 0 0 1 1 9 9 3 4 0 6 0 0 0 00-00000013

(5) SERIAL NUMBER (1) CUSTOMER ID (2) FIRMWARE VERSION SC PNL SPC
(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
F7-02 Total Count PM COUNT Scanner PM Count ADF Count OPC Drum Count Process Unit Count ADF PM Count Fuser Web Count Developer Count Corona Cleaning Count Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up Total OPC Rotation Time Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count 1st Paper Tray Count 2nd Paper Tray Count 3rd Paper Tray Count 4th Paper Tray Count LCT Tray Count

2-Sided Count A4/LETTER Count A4-R/LETTER-R Count A3/LEDGER Count B4/LEGAL Count F7-04 ADF Count ADF Read Count Scanner Count Scanner Read Count F7-05 Copy Print Count Copy Scan Count F7-06 PC Print Count PC Scan Count F7-07 FAX Transmit Count FAX Receive Count FAX Print Count

: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

(4) PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 | 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 | | | | | | | | | | | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC ***** DP-6030 *********************** -CHARACTER ID -

- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

Explanation of Contents (1) Customer ID (2) Firmware Version (3) Counter Information (4) Print Error (5) Serial Number Last 30 records (Latest on top) DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only

Ver. 5.1

260

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.7.4.

MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT FORMAT

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 12:00 ******** **************************** > MAINTENANCE ALERT REPORT < ****************************

LAST PRINT ERROR : MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER (1)

(5) SERIAL NUMBER

CUSTOMER ID

: 01234567890 : ABC COMPANY (2)

(3) FIRMWARE VERSION SC : BAV00008PU PNL : AAT00001PU SPC : 6-cpm T40000

TRANSMIT COUNTER RECEIVE COUNTER COPY COUNTER PRINT COUNTER : : : : 000244 000082 000000 000000

(4)

-LOGO PANASONIC ************************************ -CHARACTER ID

- ***** -31415926535897932384-***********

Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) (2) Customer ID (3) Firmware Version (4) Transmission / Reception / Copy / Print Counters (5) Serial Number DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only MACHINE IS RUNNING OUT OF TONER Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code)

Ver. 5.1

261

MAR 2005

5.2.7.5.

TONER ORDER FORM

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

************************************* > TONER BOTTLE ORDER FORM < *************************************

**** The toner supply in your machine is running low **** (1) To order a replacement Bottle from your Authorized Dealer Panasonic Corp. (2) by Phone: by Fax: 1 201 111 5555 (3) 1 201 111 4444 (4)

Thank you for your order.

Customer Name and Address ========================= Ship to: Bill to:

Attention: Phone No.: Customer ID: ABC COMPANY (5) Toner Bottle No.:

Attention: Phone No.: P.O. No.(if required):

(6)

Serial No.:

Quantity Required:

/ Print your name and title Signature & Date

Explanation of Contents (1) Low Toner Message (Fixed) (2) Dealer Name (3) Toner Order Tel # (4) Toner Order Fax # (5) Customer ID (6) Toner Bottle No. The toner supply in your machine is running low Up to 25 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 36 digits Up to 16 characters (User Identification Code) DQ-TU24D : DP-3510/4510 DQ-TU241G : DP-3520/3530/4520/4530 DQ-TU35D : DP-6010 DQ-TU351G : DP-6020/6030 The order number(s) may differ depending on the Model and the Destination.

Ver. 5.1

262

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5.2.7.6.

CALL COUNTER REPORT (DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030)

*************************************************** DATE MMM-dd-yyyy ***** TIME 03:47 ******** ***************************************************************** > SCHEDULED REPORT - CALL COUNTER HAS REACHED PRE-SET VALUE < ***************************************************************** LAST PRINT ERROR : MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013

(5) SERIAL NUMBER

: 01234567890 : ABC COMPANY : BAV00008PU : AAT00001PU : 60cpm T400000 CURRENT : 13 : 13 : 9 : 1 : 13 : 13 : 1 : 240986 : 13 : 13 : 1.00 : 0.03 : 0.01 : : : : : : : 0 3 10 0 0 0 14000 PM CYCLE 240000 (------) (------) ----------(------) CURRENT 0 3 10 0 0 1 1 9 9 3 4 0 6 0 0 0

(1) CUSTOMER ID (2) FIRMWARE VERSION SC PNL SPC

(3) COUNTER INFORMATION:
F7-02 Total Count PM COUNT Scanner PM Count ADF Count OPC Drum Count Process Unit Count ADF PM Count Fuser Web Count Developer Count Corona Cleaning Count Avg. Print/Drum Rise Up Total OPC Rotation Time Avg. Sec/Drum Rise Up F7-03 Sheet Bypass Count 1st Paper Tray Count 2nd Paper Tray Count 3rd Paper Tray Count 4th Paper Tray Count LCT Tray Count

2-Sided Count A4/LETTER Count A4-R/LETTER-R Count A3/LEDGER Count B4/LEGAL Count F7-04 ADF Count ADF Read Count Scanner Count Scanner Read Count F7-05 Copy Print Count Copy Scan Count F7-06 PC Print Count PC Scan Count F7-07 FAX Transmit Count FAX Receive Count FAX Print Count

: : : : : : : : : : : : : : : :

(4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value

PRINT ERROR:

NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT | NO. DATE & TIME ERROR CODE ERROR COUNT ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------01 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:07 E04-01 00-00000013 | 02 MMM-dd-yyyy 20:04 E04-01 00-00000013 | | | | | | | | | | | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LOGO PANASONIC ***** DP-6030 *********************** -CHARACTER ID -

- ***** -31415926535897932384-*********

Explanation of Contents (1) Customer ID (2) Firmware Version (3) Counter Information (4) Call Counter Pre-Set Value (5) Serial Number DP-3520/3530/4520/4530/6020/6030 Only

Ver. 5.1

263

MAR 2005

5.2.8. 5.2.8.1.

Service Mode 9 (System Maintenance) Overview

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This Service Mode is used to maintain the machine. Use the following procedure for System Maintenance. Select the "09 System maintenance" on the Touch Panel display. Select the "01 Send RCVD File". The display changes to the Fax Mode. Select the desired Fax number. Press "START" key to send the Fax. After the transmission, the machine returns to the Stand-by Mode. Note: If the File is NOT in the machine, it is not functioned. Touch the "OK" button 3 times. Press "FUNCTION" and "C (CLEAR)" keys simultaneously to exit the service mode. System Maintenance Table No. Maintenance Mode 01 SEND RCV'D FILE Description Transfers documents from memory to another fax machine during a fatal printer error.

Ver. 5.1

264

MAR 2005

6 System Description
6.1. Copy Process
(-DC)
Charger Discharge Lamp

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Laser Exposure Cleaning Developer

Photo Electric Conversion

Original

Toner

(AC) Separation Transfer (+DC)

Fusing ADU

Exit

Paper Feed

Primary Charge:
Charge Corona Drum Aluminum Layer

Image Exposure:
Illumination

Developing:
Latent Charge Image Doctor Blade Gap = 0.6~ 0.7 mm Toner

Drum Surface Approximately-750V DC Transfer/Separation

Latent Image

Latent Charge Image

Magnetic Image

Roller

Bias: -550 V Fusing:

Heat Roller Fuser Lamp Cleaning Blade Paper

Cleaning:

Drum

Paper Separation Charge (AC) Transfer Charge (+DC)

Pressure Roller

Discharge Lamp:
Discharge Lamp

Ver. 5.1

265

MAR 2005

6.2.

Precautions with Consumables

(1) Photoreceptor Drum Do not touch the surface (with your hands or anything else). Stand the drum with the drum gear facing upward during storage. - Be careful not to smear the surface with saliva, water, oil, etc. - Do not store in places where the temperature is high. - Do not store it in strong light (such as direct sunlight or on the window). - Do not expose it to chemical gas or vapor.

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

- Do not store the drum unit with the photoreceptor drum installed without covering it with clean paper. (2) Toner Developer

1) Do not mix different types of toner and developer. - The machines are designed to use exclusive toner and developer for specific models. Be careful not to use toner and developer from other models. 2) Do not mix foreign materials. Be careful not to contaminate toner and developer with foreign materials. If you spill toner or developer on a table or floor when adding toner or developer in the developer unit, discard what was spilled. Such supplies may damage the drum as well as cause other image problems. 3) Do not place into other containers. Toner and developer must not be placed into other containers, as some containers may change the characteristics of the supplies. Vinyl chloride potentially changes the characteristics of supplies due to migrating plasticizers. 4) Precautions during storage and transportation - Toner and developer additives are sensitive to temperature and humidity (high temperature or humidity in particular). - Store toner and developer in a dark and cool location (lower than 95 F/35 C) and out of direct sunlight. - Be careful not to expose toner and developer to rain or direct sunlight during transportation. When delivered by truck the temperature inside must not exceed 104 F/40 C. (Under the sun in summer, the inside temperature can typically be 140 F/60 C or higher in a closed vehicle compartment.) - In cold climate, store in a low humidity environment condition. Do not store supplies near heaters.

Ver. 5.1

266

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5) Safety and hygiene Due to its properties, Toner can be easily wind blown. Toner on skin does not cause any health risk. However inhalation is undesirable even if the powder is simply dust. Therefore, be careful not to inhale toner. - Handle the toner carefully when changing cartridges. Developer should also be handled carefully when poured into the developer unit. If you inhale toner by mistake, rinse your mouth out with water. Toner on the skin should be washed off with soapy water. - Toner stuck on clothing must be removed while in a dry state with a vacuum cleaner, brush or by beating, then by washing with soapy water. Wiping off with benzine, alcohol, or thinner is not recommended as it may partially melt the components of toner resulting in a stain and spot. - Toner spills must be removed with a vacuum cleaner, and then wiped with a cloth which has been dampened with a neutral detergent. - If exposed to flames toner and developer will burn. Keep these supplies away from open flames. - Any used consumable (photoreceptor, developer and toner) should be recycled. - Wear rubber gloves, eye protection etc. before handling any solvents such as IPA.

Ver. 5.1

267

MAR 2005

6.3.

New Digital Image Control Qualitative Reasoning Based Adaptive Controller (New Digital QUANTUM)

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

To improve the copy quality, a new Toner Density Controller (New Digital QUANTUM System) was developed. The most important aim was to stabilize the Toner Density under various office environments. As a result, the current QUANTUM System was improved with additional Sensors, Parameters and Software. The following diagram illustrates this New System.

Printer with the New QUANTUM System

New Digital QUANTUM

Laser Power

Laser Unit
Grid Voltage (1) (Feedback of QUANTUM)

Grid Voltage Drum White Black

Image Density Sensors
Bias Voltage Separation Voltage

Toner Density Control

Timer/ Counter (2)(3)(4)

Toner Density Output

Transfer Current

Electronic Pattern

Halftone

Black

Transfer Image Control

Humidity (5) Temperature (5)

Humidity Sensor Temperature Sensor

Control Point High Density 1.3

Image Density (ID)

Ideal Curve

Middle Density

0.35

Printer Density Data

255

Ver. 5.1

268

MAR 2005

The newly controlled features and intervals are as follows.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Grid Voltage Feedback for Image Density Control QUANTUM uses the Copy Density information, interpreted by the Image Density Sensors, to control the Grid Voltage (1) [600 - 900 V] along with the Toner Density (0.9%) and conveys it to the Toner Density Controller as a feedback signal. 2. Long Run Operation Compensation Under Long Run Operation Environment, the Toner Density is also controlled with the Long Run Operation Compensation Parameter activated by the Timer / Counter (2) every 1k-sheet interval. 3. Developer Compensation The Toner Density is also controlled with Developer Compensation Parameter activated by the Timer / Counter (3) when reaching the 150k, 180k and 210k-sheet count. 4. Initialization The Developer Parameter is initialized by the Timer / Counter (4) when the machine is non operational for over one hour. 5. Humidity and Temperature Compensation Humidity and Temperature factors are also compensated with the Sensors (5) and the TDC Controller Compensation Software by stabilizing the Toner Density under the various High Temperature and High Humidity environments.

Ver. 5.1

269

MAR 2005

6.4.

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

The i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) automatically feeds documents into the unit, one original at a time. When duplex mode is selected, this feature enables two-sided faxing or copying of the original(s). Its main features are: 1. Place originals Face-Up 2. Correct Order Stacking (Collation Mode) 3. Paper Feed Mechanism with Pre-Feed Roller The following is the ADF / i-ADF Mechanical operation description.

6.4.1.

Automatic Document Feeder Operation

1. Initialization The ADF begins its operation by turning on the Feed Motor for a specified time, lowering the Pickup Roller to re-set the Original Stopper to its standby position. 2. Original Setting and Size Sensors Place the original(s) face up on the ADF until the leading edge stops against the Original Stopper (513). Adjust the Original Guides (403, 406) to center the original on the ADF. The Original Stopper (513) prevents originals from skewing and multiple feeding. The Original Detection Sensor (401) detects the presence of documents on the ADF when the original(s) actuate Original Sensor Actuator (521) on the ADF Cover. The two Sensors mounted on the SNS PC Board which is installed in the Original Tray are actuated by the Original Guides (403, 406), their position determines the original's width and the Original Length Sensor 1 (401) and Length Sensor 2 (401) detect the length of the original. 3. Feeding and Separation When the Start button is pressed, the ADF Motor 1 (925) starts to rotate and drive the Pickup Roller (511). The 1st original is fed into the Paper Feed Roller (508) and the Separation Roller (610) with the Torque Limiter Assembly preventing multiple feeding. 4. Transmission and Ejection The original is fed into the Registration Roller 1 (817) and when the original actuates the Registration Sensor 2 (401), the Paper Feed Roller (508) stops rotating. The Registration Sensor 2 (401) detects the scanning position and the Registration Roller 2 (818) and Transport Roller (816) transport the original while scanning. The Stamp Head (724) stamps an [X] mark on the front of the original after the document is successfully transmitted or stored. It consists of the Stamp Head (724) and Stamp Solenoid (726). The Exit Roller (814) feeds and ejects the original out of the ADF. If there are additional originals on the ADF, the next one is fed into the feeder. 5. Final Operation After ejecting the last original from the ADF, the Clutch reverses the direction of rotation raising the Original Stopper (513) to its standby position.

6.4.2.

i-ADF Operation

The i-ADF automatically inverts 2-sided original(s) for faxing or copying of the second side. This feature enables your machine to perform duplex faxing or copying. An i-ADF (Inverting Automatic Document Feeder) functions like the ADF with the main exception being the original eject path after scanning. The following is the description of the main differences. 1. Switching from the ADF Mode to the i-ADF Mode After passing through the Read Point, the path of the original is switched over by the Selection Guide 1 (815), to the Exit Roller (814) or to the Inverting Roller (809). For single-sided scanning, the Selection

Ver. 5.1

270

MAR 2005

Guide 1 (815) is rotated clockwise by the Selection Solenoid (621) guiding the original to the Exit Roller (814). For double-side scanning, the Selection Guide 1 (815) is rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection Solenoid (621) guiding the original to the Inverting Roller (809). The Selection Guide 1 (815) moves only once, in the direction according to whether a single or double-side scanning is selected (Copier or Fax) before the Start button is pressed. It will remain in this position until a different operation is performed (i.e. if the last operation was 2-sided scanning, a single-side scanning is performed).

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2. Scanning the Front and the Back Side of an Original The scanning of the Front and Back side of a 2-sided original is accomplished by means of the Selection Guide 1 (815) and Selection Guide 2 (713). After the Front side of the original is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1 (815), through the Selection Guide 2 (713) that was rotated counter-clockwise by the Selection Solenoid (621) and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809) and upper Pinch Rollers (626) into the Sub Tray. The original is carried for a specified period of time after the trailing edge of the original triggers the Selection Sensor (401) and stops within 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. Then, the Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (615) and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817) and proceeds to scan the Back side of the original. 3. Eject by Reverse Rotation After the Back is scanned, the original is transported through the Selection Guide 1 (815), through the Selection Guide 2 (713) and is carried beyond the Inverting Roller (809) and lower Pinch Rollers (626), into the Sub Tray (416), again stopping 10 to 20 mm from exiting the rollers. The Selection Guide 2 (713) is rotated clockwise by the Pinch Roller Solenoid Assembly (621) and the reverse rotation of the ADF Motor 1 (925) pulls the original back around the Registration Roller 1 (817), however, this time the original is routed to the Exit Roller (814) and exits into the ADF Base. 4. Sub Tray The Inverting ADF system includes a Sub Tray (416), which supports the originals during the ejection mode of the double-side scanning operation.
(A3) 420 mm r) m (Ledge 431.8 m 2) (A5) 210 mm (INVOICE) m 215.9 m m (FLS1.

Inverting Automatic Document Feeder (i-ADF)

Separation Roller Original Tray

(B5-R)

(A4-R)

Original Guide

Registration Sensor 1 Registration Sensor 3 Registration Roller 1

Original Detection Sensor Inverting Guide Sheet

Anti Drive Registration Roller (Pinch Roller)

Anti Drive Exit Roller (Pinch Roller) Inverting Roller Anti Drive Exit Roller (Pinch Roller) Exit Roller Sub Tray

Anti Drive Registration Roller 2 (Pinch Roller)

Exit Sensor Read Point Selection Guide 1

Selection Guide 2

Registration Roller 2 Registration Sensor 2

Anti Drive Transport Roller (Pinch Roller) Transport Roller Selection Sensor

Ver. 5.1

271

257 mm

Separation Roller

Paper Feed Roller Original Stopper Pick Up Roller

297 mm

330.2 m

364 mm

(B4)

MAR 2005

6.5.

Glossary of Electrical Abbreviations

Signal Name +12V +24V +24VD +24VM +24VO1 +24VO2 +24VS +3.3V +5V +5VD +5VL +5VP ACL ACLD ACLRLB ACN ACND ACNRLB ACSW ADCLK ADFRRSN1 ADUCRRSN ADUINSN ADURRSN ADXSN AFDIN AFDOUT AFENB AFLD AFLTH AMMCLK APMCLK ARRCNT ARRSN2 ARST ARVCL1 ARVCL2 ATA0 ATA1 ATA2 ATAINT ATCS0 ATCS1 ATD0 Function +12 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +24 VDC Power Supply +3.3 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Power Supply +5 VDC Power Supply AC Power Supply AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW) AC Power Supply AC Power Supply AC Power Supply (Though Front Door SW) AC Power Supply Fuser Relay FIFO Clock Registration Sensor 1 Signal ADU Intermediate Sensor Signal ADU Sensor Signal ADU Registration Sensor Signal Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal FIFO Data Out FIFO Data In FIFO Enable FIFO Load FIFO Latch ADF Main Motor Clock ADF Paper Feed Motor Clock Registration Roller Clutch Control Signal Registration Sensor 2 Signal System Reset Signal Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal Inverting Clutch 2 Control Signal HDD Address Bus HDD Address Bus HDD Address Bus HDD Interrupt Signal Primary HDD Select Signal Secondary HDD Select Signal HDD Data Bus

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

Ver. 5.1

272

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Signal Name ATD1 ATD10 ATD11 ATD12 ATD13 ATD14 ATD15 ATD2 ATD3 ATD4 ATD5 ATD6 ATD7 ATD8 ATD9 ATDASP ATDMAACK ATDMAREQ ATIO16 ATIORD ATIORDY ATIOWR ATRST BLKCLP BMA BMAB BMB BMBB BPSN CDSN1 CDSN2 CHPSN1 CHPSN2 CLIPIN CLMM1 CLMM2 CPPSN1 CPPSN2 CRRSN1 CSEL CT DDFL DDFM DFCLK DFDIN DFENB DFLD

Function HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus HDD Data Bus Device Active Signal DMA ACK Signal DMA Request Signal HDD 16 bits Transfer Control Signal HDD Data Read Signal HDD Data Ready Signal HDD Data Write Signal Reset Signal AFE Black Level Clamp Switch Signal Toner Bottle Motor A Clock Toner Bottle Motor AB Clock Toner Bottle Motor B Clock Toner Bottle Motor BB Clock Toner Bottle Position Sensor Signal Density Sensor 1 Signal Density Sensor 2 Signal Cleaner Home Position Sensor 1 Signal Cleaner Home Position Sensor 2 Signal AFE Sample Hold Clamp Signal Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal Corona Wire Cleaner Motor Control Signal Paper Path Sensor 1 Signal Paper Path Sensor 2 Signal Paper Path Sensor Signal Cable Select Signal Total Counter Dust Fan Lock Detection Signal Dust Fan Control Signal Driver FIFO Load Driver FIFO Data In Driver FIFO Enable Driver FIFO Clock 273

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

Signal Name DFLTH DFOUT DFRST DMBRAKE DMCLK DMCLK DMLD DMPS DOSN DXCL1 DXSLCNT1 DXSLCNT2 DXSN ELPCNT EXDOSN2 EXFL1 EXFL2 EXFL3 EXFM1 EXFM2 EXFM3 EXSN FULP1 FULP2 FULP3 GND GOPSW1 GREFCNT HEATL HFCL HFSOL HPESN HPSN HSSN1 HSSN2 HSSN3 HSYNC HUMSN HVBACCLK HVBACCNT HVBDCCNT HVCNT HVDACCNT HVDDCCNT HVLKB HVLKC HVLKD

Function Driver FIFO Latch Driver FIFO Data Out Driver FIFO Data Reset OPC Drum Motor Brake Drum Motor Clock OPC Drum Motor Clock OPC Drum Motor Lock Detection Signal OPC Drum Motor Start/Stop Door Open Sensor Detection Signal ADU Clutch 1 Control Signal Inverting Solenoid Control 1 Signal Inverting Solenoid Control 2 Signal Inverting Path Sensor Detection Signal Discharge Lamp Paper Exit Door Sensor Detection Signal Exit Fan 1 Lock Detection Signal Exit Fan 2 Lock Detection Signal Exit Fan 3 Lock Detection Signal Exit Fan 1 Control Signal Exit Fan 2 Control Signal Exit Fan 3 Control Signal Paper Exit Sensor Detection Signal AC Power Supply AC Power Supply AC Power Supply Ground Developer Missing Detection Grid Reference PWM AC Power Supply Sheet Bypass Clutch Control Signal Sheet Bypass Solenoid Control Signal Sheet Bypass Sensor Detection Signal Scanner Home Position Sensor Signal Sheet Bypass Sensor 1 Signal Sheet Bypass Sensor 2 Signal Sheet Bypass Sensor 3 Signal Horizontal Synchronous Signal Temp Humidity Sensor Signal Bias AC Clock Bias AC ON/OFF%% PWM Bias DC ON/OFF%% PWM Charge Corona ON/OFF%% PWM Separation AC ON/OFF%% PWM Separation DC ON/OFF%% PWM Bias Leak Detection High Voltage Leak Detection Separation Leak Detection 274

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Signal Name HVLKT HVTCNT IICSCL IICSDA IPRXD IPTXD KCS KCT KCTCNT KYE L1 (R) L2 (T) LAZENB LAZERA LAZERB LAZREF LBSN1 LBSN1 LBSN2 LCCFDIN LCDOSN LCLUM1 LCLUM2 LCMA LCMAB LCMB LCMBB LCRRSN LCSDSN LCSOL LLBSN LLUM LMA LMAB LMB LMBB LMCLK LOPSN LPCNT LPCNT LPESN LPESN LPEWSN1 LPEWSN2 LPEWSN3 LPFCL LPFCL

Function Bias Transfer Leak Detection Bias Transfer ON/OFF%% PWM IIC Transmission Clock IIC Transmission Signal Finisher IPC Reception Finisher IPC Transmission Counter Detect Signal Key Counter Card Counter Connector Key Line Signal Line Signal Laser Enable Laser Compulsion Lighting A Laser Compulsion Lighting B Laser Reference Upper Limit Sensor Signal Upper Limit Sensor-1 Upper Limit Sensor-2 LCC FIFO Data In Door Open Sensor Detection Signal Lift Motor Control Signal 1 Lift Motor Control Signal 2 Motor A Signal Motor AB Signal Motor B Signal Motor BB Signal Paper Path Sensor Signal Set Sensor Signal Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal Upper Limit Sensor Signal 1st Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal Scan Motor A Signal Scan Motor AB Signal Scan Motor B Signal Scan Motor BB Signal Scanner Motor Clock Connection Detect Sensor Signal Scanner Lamp Control Clock Scanner Lamp Control Signal Paper Sensor Detection Signal Paper Sensor-1 Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal Paper Remaining Sensor 2 Signal Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Signal Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal ADU Clutch 2 Control Signal 275

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

Signal Name LPPSN LPUSOL LUM1 LUM1-1 LUM1-2 LUM2-1 LUM2-2 MAGCL MMA MMAB MMB MMBB MMCLK MMFR MMLD MMPS N.C. nACK nADFSES nATT nAUTFD nCTON nDUACK nDUPRNT nERROR nFAXRST nGARST nHKOF nLD1 nLD2 nLPOW1 nLPOW2 nPACK nPCIRING nPNLRST nPRDY nPRGDWN nPRST nPVSYNC nSACK nSELIN nSENTIM nSLPKY nSREQ nSTROB nSTRX nSTTX

Function Paper Path Sensor Signal Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal 2nd Tray Lift Up Motor Control Signal +24 VDC Power Supply LUM1 Control Signal +24 VDC Power Supply LUM2 Control Signal Magnetic Roller Clutch Control Signal ADF Main Motor A Signal ADF Main Motor AB Signal ADF Main Motor B Signal ADF Main Motor BB Signal Main Motor Clock Main Motor CW/CCW Main Motor Lock Detection Signal Main Motor Start/Stop Not Used ACK Signal ADF Document Detect Attention Signal Auto Feed Signal Ring Detection Signal ADU Printer ACK Signal ADU Print Request Signal Error Signal FAX Board Reset Signal CCD PCB Reset Signal External Phone Off-Hook Detection Signal Laser 1 Control Signal (-) Laser 2 Control Signal (-) Not Used Not Used Printer ACK Signal FAX Wake Up Signal Panel Reset Signal Printer Ready Signal F-ROM Rewrite SPC Reset Signal</p>0: Reset Print Registration Scan ACK Signal Select Input Signal Scanner LSYNC Signal Sleep Key Scanner Request Signal Strobe Signal Sorter Reception (-) Sorter Transmission Signal (-) 276

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Signal Name nSYNC nVRDY nVREQ OE OPSN OQFCLK OQFDIN OQFDOUT OQFENB OQFLD OQFLTH OQMCLK OQMCLK OQMCT OQMLK OQRRCL ORGSN ORGSN ORSIZ1 ORSIZ2 ORSIZ3 ORSIZ4 ORSIZ5 OZFL2 OZFM2 P12CNT PASN pBDA pBDB pBUSY PCCL pCMLD PCRSN PCSN PCSSOL1 PCSSOL2 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 PD8 PDIAG pERROR PESN1

Function Horizontal Synchronous Signal VSYNC Reset Signal Print ACK Request Signal AFE Digital Data Bus Enable ADF Cover Open Detection Signal OQ FIFO Clock OQ FIFO Data In OQ FIFO Data Out OQ FIFO Enable OQ FIFO Load OQ FIFO Latch OQ Motor FIFO Clock Drive Motor Clock Drive Motor Control Drive Motor Lock Signal Registration Clutch Control Signal Original Sensor Signal Original Sensor Detection Signal Original Size Sensor Signal 0 Original Size Sensor Signal 1 Original Size Sensor Signal 2 Original Size Sensor Signal 3 Original Size Sensor Signal 4 Ozone Fan Lock Detection Signal Ozone Fan Control Signal Exit Fan Control Signal Platen Cover Open Sensor Signal Print BDA Signal Print BDB Signal Busy Signal Intermediate Clutch Control Signal Line Switching Relay Drive Signal Intermediate Sensor Detection Signal Platen Cover Angle Sensor Signal Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal Paper Tray Solenoid Control Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Data Signal Diagnostic Bus Signal No Paper Signal Paper Sensor Detection Signal 277

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

Signal Name PESN1 PESN2 PEWSSN1 PEWSSN2 PEWSSN3 PFCL1 PFCL1 PFCL2 PFCLCNT PFOSN1 PFOSN2 PFSIZSN1 PFSIZSN2 PFSIZSN3 PGND pINIT pLD1 pLD2 PMA PMAB PMB PMBB PMCLK PMCNT PMLOCK PNLDO1 PNLSCLK1 POWSW pPRXD PPSOLCNT pPTXD PR1SN pSELECT pSPKOT pSTRX pSTTX PTG PTL PUSOL1 PUSOL1 PUSOL2 PVCNT PWFL PWFM QDOSN RR1CLCNT RR2CLCNT

Function Paper Sensor-1 Paper Sensor-2 Paper Remaining Sensor 1 Signal Paper Remaining Sensor 2 Signal Paper Remaining Sensor 3 Signal Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal Paper Feed Clutch-1 Control Signal Paper Feed Clutch-2 Control Signal Paper Feed Clutch Control Signal Paper Exit Sensor 1 Detection Signal Paper Exit Sensor 2 Detection Signal Paper Size Sensor 1 Signal Paper Size Sensor 2 Signal Paper Size Sensor 3 Signal Ground Initiation Laser 1 Control Signal (+) Laser 2 Control Signal (+) Paper Feed Motor A Signal Paper Feed Motor AB Signal Paper Feed Motor B Signal Paper Feed Motor BB Signal Polygon Motor Clock Polygon Motor Control Signal Polygon Motor Lock Signal Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Data Panel F-ROM Rewrite Serial Clock POW SW Reception Data Signal Pinch Solenoid Control Signal Transmission Data Signal Registration Sensor 1 Signal Paper Select Signal Line Signal%% Dial Tone Sorter Reception Signal (+) Sorter Transmission Signal (+) CCD Shift GATE Signal Pre Transfer Lamp Paper Feed Solenoid Control Signal Paper Feed Solenoid-1 Control Signal Paper Feed Solenoid-2 Control Signal Printer 24V Control PS Fan Lock Detection Signal PS Fan Control Signal Door Open Sensor Detection Signal Registration Roller 1 Clutch Control Signal Registration Roller 2 Clutch Control Signal 278

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Signal Name RR2SN RR3SN RRCL RRSN RVCLK RVEXSN RVJAMSN RVMA RVMAB RVMB RVMBB RVSN RVSSOL1 RVSSOL2 SB1CLCNT SB2CLCNT SCFL SCFM SDCLCNT SEPSOL SH A SH B SIZE1SN SIZE2SN SIZE3SN SIZE4SN SPCRXD SPCTXD SPPSN SSA1 SSA2 SSA3 STRVP STSLCNT SVCNT TDREF TDSNIN TED TENPSN TFBOXSN TFSN THI1 THI2 TMGSN TRBLSW1 VCDS Vcnt

Function Registration Sensor 2 Signal Registration Sensor 3 Signal Registration Clutch Control Signal Registration Sensor Signal Inverting Motor Clock Inverting Exit Sensor Detection Signal Inverting JAM Sensor Detection Signal Inverting Motor A Signal Inverting Motor AB Signal Inverting Motor B Signal Inverting Motor BB Signal Inverting Sensor Detection Signal Inverting Solenoid Control Signal Inverting Solenoid Control Signal Inverting Clutch 1 Control Signal Inverting Clutch 2 Control Signal Suction Fan Lock Detection Signal Suction Fan Control Signal Slow Down Clutch Control Signal Separation Solenoid Control Signal Sample Hold Signal A Sample Hold Signal B Original Size Sensor 1 Detection Signal Original Size Sensor 2 Detection Signal Original Size Sensor 3 Detection Signal Original Size Sensor 4 Detection Signal SPC Reception Data Signal SPC Transmission Data Signal System Paper Path Sensor Signal Fuser Lamp 1 Control Signal Fuser Lamp 2 Control Signal Fuser Lamp 3 Control Signal Control Signal Stamp Solenoid Control Signal Scanner 24V Control Toner Density Sensor Reference Toner Density Sensor Signal Toner Detect Sensor Signal Temp Humidity Sensor Signal Toner Waste Container Sensor Detection Signal Toner Waste Sensor Signal Fuser Thermistor 1 Fuser Thermistor 2 Timing Sensor Detection Signal Toner Waste Collect Signal Density Sensor ON Inverter Control Signal 279

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/4510/6010 DP-3520/4520/6020

Signal Name VTED WEBSOL ZCIN ZNSN1a ZNSN1b ZNSN1c ZNSN2a ZNSN2b ZNSN2c ZNSNa ZNSNb ZNSNc

Function Toner Detect Sensor ON Web Solenoid Control Signal Zero Cross Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Upper) Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Upper) Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Upper) Paper Remaining Sensor a Signal (Lower) Paper Remaining Sensor b Signal (Lower) Paper Remaining Sensor c Signal (Lower) Paper Remaining Sensor a Paper Remaining Sensor b Paper Remaining Sensor c

Ver. 5.1

280

MAR 2005

7 Installation
7.1. Precautions During Set Up

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Before you begin the installation, read these entire instructions. You must locate an appropriate site (firm and leveled surface) for the installation. Reading this section assists you with the decision making process. Machine performance and the copy quality is subject to and dependant on environmental conditions. To maintain good performance, quality, and safe operation, observe the following precautions: 1. For safe operation and to avoid trouble, do not install the system under the following conditions: High temperature, high humidity, low temperature or low humidity Sudden changes in temperature or humidity Exposed to direct sunlight Dusty environment Poorly ventilated location Exposed to chemical gases (such as ammonia gas) Exposed to strong vibration Exposed to direct air current (ex. Air conditioner vent) 2. The weight of the machine (options not included) is as follows: DP-3510/3520/3530 : 283 lb (128.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed DP-4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030 : 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed 3. The maximum power consumption is 1.5 kW. Depending on the product destination, the wall outlet must be rated for 120 VAC or 220-240 VAC accordingly. It must also be protected for at least 15 amps for 120 VAC, or 10 amps for 220-240 VAC. If you are in doubt about a power source, ensure that a qualified electrician checks the outlet. Do not connect any other devices to the wall outlet designated for this machine. (Do not use an extension cord) 4. Make sure the outlet is properly grounded. (Do not ground to gas or water pipe) 5. This machine has ventilation openings on the side and rear, which must remain unobstructed for safe operation. The machine should be located at least 3.9 inches (100 mm) from the wall. Obstructing the ventilation openings could present a fire hazard. Using the space requirements shown on page 2, ensures that the machine has the ventilation it requires and that you have the space needed for replacing the supplies.

Ver. 5.1

281

MAR 2005

Space Requirements With Options

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Copier + Exit Tray

3.9 in (100 mm) 29.8"(758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 23.6"(600 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

12.7 in (322 mm)

10.4 in (265 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

54.6 in (1387 mm)

Copier + Finisher
11.8 in (300 mm) 29.5 in (750 mm) 29.8 in (758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 23.6 in (600 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm) 10.4 in (265 mm)

19.9 in (505 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

83.3 in (2115 mm)

Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT

11.8 in (300 mm) 29.5 in (750 mm) 29.8 in (758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 11.4 in (290 mm) 11 in (280 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

23.6 in (600 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm) 19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

95.3 in (2420 mm)

Copier + Finisher + 3000-Sheet LCT + (LT-R_LGL Adapter)

11.8 in (300 mm) 29.5 in (750 mm) 29.8 in (758 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 23.6 in (600 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm) 17.3 in (440 mm)11 in (280 mm)

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm) 19.9 in (505 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

101.2 in (2570 mm)

Ver. 5.1

282

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

7.2.

Unpacking

Visually check the condition and contents of the the packing for completeness or any shipping damage before installation. Remove all tapes used to secure the Scanner, Fuser and Process Units during shipment. Caution: Depending on your machine's model, it may weight approximately up to 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine. Contents List No. 1 2 3 4 5 Qty. 1 1 1 --1 Description Main Unit Operating Instructions Panasonic-DMS CD AC Power Cord Installation Instructions Part No. ----See Note See Note See Note DZSM000566 DZSM000750 PJQRC0043Z Remarks

Includes Operating Instructions For DP-3510/4510/6010 For DP-3520/4520/6020 For DP-3530/4530/6030

Note: 1.The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

5 2 3

Ver. 5.1

283

MAR 2005

7.3.

Installation Procedure

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. Refer to each individual Installation Instructions when installing Stands or other Optional Kits. 2. The following machine illustrations, depicts a DP-6030 with a standard configuration. 3. The scanner is held in place by a Shipping Blue Screw to prevent damage during transit. Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the scanner. 4. The machine is shipped from the factory with the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum locked in the opened position to avoid the possibility of damaging the Pressure Rollers / OPC Drum. Do Not turn the Power Switches ON before unlocking the Pressure Roller / OPC Drum.

7.3.1.

Installation Procedure
(1) Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the Handles upward then pullout to lock them in place. Note: To release the Handles, lift the Release Latch upwards and push the Handles toward the machine.

Release Latch

(2) Lift and place the machine on a suitable Stand / Console, aligning with 3 Guide-Pins. Stand (USA/Canada only) DA-D351 / D352 : DP-3510/3520/3530/ 4510/4520/4530/6010/ 6020/6030 System Console DA-DS601 / DS602 : DP-3510/3520/4510/ 4520/6010/6020 DA-DS603 / DS604 : DP-3530/4530/6030 (3) Remove Tape. (4) Remove 1 Blue Screw to unlock the Scanner.
(3)

(4)

Ver. 5.1

284

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Tape the Blue Screw removed in step (4) into the 2nd Paper Tray as illustrated.

(6) Open the Front Cover. (7) Swing the Hopper open (180).

(8) Remove the Protective Tape from the Battery.

(9) To unlock the Pressure Roller, turn the screw with a Straight Edge Screwdriver clockwise until you hear a click.

Ver. 5.1

285

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(10)

(10) Pullout and remove the OPC Shipping Metal Bracket to unlock the OPC Drum.

(11)

(11) Store the OPC Shipping Metal Bracket removed in step (10) into the 2nd Paper Tray as illustrated.

(12) Remove 1 Screw. (13) Remove the Developer Harness Cover (Clear) and disconnect the Harness. (14) Turn the Release Lever Clockwise (90). (15) Remove the Developer Unit.
(14) (15) (13) (12)

(16)

(16) Release 3 Latch Hooks and remove the Upper Developer Cover. (17) Shake the bottle of developer thoroughly (approx. 30 seconds). (18) Pour the appropriate developer evenly into the developer unit. Make sure to empty the bottle. (19) Reinstall the Upper Developer Cover. Note: When reinstalling, ensure that 3 Latch Hooks are hooked correctly. (20) Reinstall the Developer Unit. (21) Reconnect the Harness, reinstall the Developer Harness Cover and turn the Release Lever counter-clockwise.

Ver. 5.1

286

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Toner Bottle

Hopper

(22) Shake a new Toner Bottle 10 to 15 times to loosen the contents. (23) Remove the Cap from the Toner Bottle. (24) Insert the Toner Bottle into the Hopper Unit. Align the Key of the Toner Bottle with the Key Alignment Channel of the hopper unit. Insert the Bottle as far as it will go and turn the Toner Bottle clockwise until it locks in place. (Arrows on the Bottle and the Hopper are aligned) (25) Swing the Toner Bottle / Hopper closed (180). (26) Close the Front Cover. (27) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. Note: Perform the following adjustments after the machine has warmed up and displays:

Ready To Copy Set Originals

<For Other Destinations (not USA and Canada), follow the steps (28) ~ (34) below> (28) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit Cover.

(28) (30) (32)

(31)

(29) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (30) Remove 1 Screw to free the Upper Exit Cover Stopper. (31) Install the Stop Plate and secure it with 1 Screw as illustrated. (32) Install the Stop Plate 2 and secure it with 1 Screw as illustrated. (33) Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper with 1 Screw (removed in step (29) above). (34) Close the Upper Exit Cover.

Ver. 5.1

287

MAR 2005

7.3.2.

Toner Density Control (TDC) Adjustment

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2. Press the "8" key to enter the F8 Mode. 3. Press the "START" key. 4. Press the "0, "9" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code "09". 5. Press the "START" key to begin the Automatic TDC sensor gain adjustment. Note: Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops (approximately 7 minutes). Then, wait for approximately 30 sec. again for QUANTUM to start automatically. Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the QUANTUM adjustment cycle stops (approximately 1-2 minutes). Refer to the Sequence Chart below.

7.3.3.

Black Density Sensor Output Gain Adjustment

1. Press the "1", "4" and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F8 Mode code "14". 2. Press the "START" key for Automatic Black density sensor output gain adjustment. Note: Do not touch any keys or turn the Power Switch Off until the adjustment cycle stops. Refer to the Sequence Chart below. 3. Press the "STOP" key. 4. Press the "6" key to enter the F6 Mode. 5. Write the contents of F6-21, 26 and 65 on the memory sheet (included inside the 2nd Paper Tray). 6. Press the "STOP" key. 7. Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.
F8-09 (Installation & Developer Replace) TDC Adjust 7 min Wait 30 sec Automatically QUANTUM 1-2 min F8-14 (Installation & OPC Replace) Gain Adjust 30 sec-1 min Wait 30 sec Automatically QUANTUM 1-2 min

7.3.4.

Set the Date and Time

1. Press the "FUNCTION" key. 2. Touch the button. (DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020) : "GENERAL FUNCTIONS" button (DP-3530/4530/6030) : "GENERAL SETTINGS" button 3. Select the "04 Key Operator Mode". 4. "Input Identification Code" (default is 0000). 5. Touch the "OK" button. 6. Touch the button to advance to: (DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020) : 05/08 Display Screen of General Settings (DP-3530/4530/6030) : 05/09 Display Screen of General Settings 7. Select the "20 Date Time Setting". 8. Touch the "CHANGE" button to input the new Date and Time. (MM/dd/yyyy hh:mm) [24-hour format]. 9. After setting the new information, touch "OK" button on the Display Panel. 10. Press the "RESET" key, to exit the General Functions mode.

Ver. 5.1

288

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

7.4.
7.4.1.

Adjustment
Exposure (Standard Adjustment)

Before making any adjustments, confirm that the following contents (F6-17, 18 and 19) are set to "0". DO NOT adjust these codes in the field. F6-17 : Standard Grid Voltage F6-18 : Standard Laser Power F6-19 : Std Bias DC Voltage 1. Press the "FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2. Press the "2" and the "START" keys to enter the F2 Mode. 3. Set the exposure to the center position. Set the machine to TEXT / PHOTO Mode. 4. Make a copy of Test Chart 53/54 with gray scale (P/N FQ-SJ1011) and verify the density as shown below. If it is within specification, skip to step (10). a. Gray scale "A" should not be visible. b. Gray scale "2" should be clearly visible.
A

Not visible (Not visible or hardly visible) Clearly visible

. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 1 . . .
2 3

5. Press the "RESET" key to exit the F2 Mode. 6. Press the "6" key to enter the F6 Mode. 7. Enter F6-50 Mode (T/P Mode Image Density). 8. Press the "INPUT" button. 9. Enter the new content. 10. Enter a 2-digit value. Note: The "RESET" key is used to enter a "-" (negative) value. (+) : Lighter side (-) : Darker side 11. Press "OK" button twice. 12. Enter F2 Mode. 13. Make a copy to confirm the adjustment. Note: Repeat steps (3) to (10) until proper density is attained. F6-49 : Text Mode F6-51 : Photo Mode 14. Press "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

Ver. 5.1

289

MAR 2005

8 Options and Supplies

8.1.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX Option Installation (For DP-3530/4530/6030)

To use PCL-IPX/SPX (DA-PC602) or PS-IPX/SPX (DA-MC602) option individually or in combination with other options, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options. Note: The DA-EM600 must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the Postscript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as fax, added. Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option. The firmware for SC, SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table. Firmware Version Table (For DP-3530/4530/6030)
Standard Firmware (SC = Type A) SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx M25R_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx Not Required PCL Firmware (SC = Type B) SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx Required PostScript Firmware (SC = Type D) SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx Required

SC
PNL SPC Slot 1 FROM PCB

Ver. 5.1

290

MAR 2005

Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method) The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN. 1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio". Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password. Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.). 4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder \ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx \ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PCL \ SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PS \ SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAAV4xxxxx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Ver. 5.1

291

MAR 2005

Note: 1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions. 2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location. 2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method) If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port. 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel Port. If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below: a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.). b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button. c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port. Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

292

MAR 2005

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3530_4530_6030_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder Firmware File \ SC_STD \ SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RAxVxxxxx-xx.bin \ SC_PCL \ SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RBxVxxxxx_xx.bin SFD_M25RCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin SFD_M25RCxVxxxxxb.bin \ SC_PS \ SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx-xx SFD_M25RDxVxxxxx_xx.bin SFD_M25RExVxxxxxa_xx.bin SFD_M25RExVxxxxxb.bin \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAAV4xxxxx SFDM_SPCAAV4xxxxx.bin \ PNL \ M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx M25R_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note: 1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update. 2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

Ver. 5.1

293

MAR 2005

8.2.

Service Notes "Firmware Update" for PCL-IPX/SPX or PS-IPX/SPX Option Installation (For DP-3520/4520/6020)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

To use PCL-IPX/SPX (DA-PC601) or PS-IPX/SPX (DA-MC601) option individually or in combination with other options, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options. Note: The DA-EM600 must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the Postscript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as fax, added. Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option. The firmware for SC, SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table. Firmware Version Table
Standard Firmware (SC = Type A) SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx Not Required PCL Firmware (SC = Type B) SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx-xx Required PostScript Firmware (SC = Type D) SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx Required

SC
PNL SPC Slot 1 FROM PCB

Ver. 5.1

294

MAR 2005

Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method) The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN. 1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio". Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password. Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.). 4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder \ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx \ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PCL \ SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx Transferring Order 1 2 2 2 3

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Ver. 5.1

295

MAR 2005

Note: 1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions. 2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location. 2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method) If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port. 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel Port. If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below: a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.). b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button. c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port. Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

296

MAR 2005

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3520_4520_6020_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder \ SC_STD \ SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxxxx \ SC_PCL \ SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxxxx Firmware File SFDM_MK2AxVxxxxx-xx.bin Transferring Order 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-1 1-2 1-3 2 3

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

SFDM_MK2BxVxxxxx_xx.bin SFDM_MK2CxVxxxxxa_xx.bin SFDM_MK2CxVxxxxxb.bin \ SC_PS \ SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_MK2DxVxxxxx_xx.bin SFDM_MK2ExVxxxxxa_xx.bin SFDM_MK2ExVxxxxxb.bin \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin \ PNL \ MMK2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx MMk2_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note: 1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update. 2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

Ver. 5.1

297

MAR 2005

8.3.

Service Notes for "Firmware Update" for PCL or PS Option Installation (For DP-3510/4510/6010)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

To use PCL (DA-PC600/601) or PS (DA-MC600/601) option individually or in combination with other options, changing to Type B or Type D SC firmware is required. The required firmware is on the CD included with the options. Note: The DA-EM600 must be installed for the printer controllers above to function. The only time a DA-EM600 is needed is if you are installing the Postscript (PS) or PCL option. There will never be a need for 2 of these, even if there are other options, such as fax, added. Before proceeding, it is important to determine the Final Configuration of your machine in order to correctly identify the required firmware from the table below. Carefully read and follow the Installation Instructions for the appropriate option. The firmware for SC, SPC and PNL must be updated in this sequence as a set. Please update the firmware with the latest version as a set by referring to the following table. Firmware Version Table
Standard Firmware (SC = Type A) SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxx-xx DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxx Not Required PCL Firmware (SC = Type B) DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx Required PostScript Firmware (SC = Type D) DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx Required

PNL

SC
SPC Slot 1 FROM PCB

Ver. 5.1

298

MAR 2005

Main Unit Firmware Code Updating Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Updating through a LAN Port (The Quickest and Most Easiest Method) The firmware code can be easily updated when the main unit is connected to a LAN. The Network Firmware Update Tool can also be used by connecting to the machine using a crossover cable, if the unit is not connected to a LAN. 1) Install the Network Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Network Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Network Firmware Update Tool. The installation password is "workio". Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\NwFirmup OI.pdf (Refer to the NW Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Make sure the unit's Key Operator Password is the same as the tool's password. Make sure the unit is in an idle state (e.g. not making copies, not printing, etc.). 4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Network Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Folders in the C:\Program Files\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder \ PNL \ SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx \ SC_STD \ DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx \ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx Transferring Order 1 2 2 2 3

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Sub File Folders are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Ver. 5.1

299

MAR 2005

Note: 1. Manual mode must be used, when updating the designated version of the firmware or changing the type of the firmware. Please refer to the Section 2.2, "Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool, File Selection Tab" of the Operating Instructions. 2. While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. If the firmware update fails and the unit does not boot up, the Network Firmware Update Tool will not be able to transfer the firmware code. If this occurs, please refer to the next section "Updating through the Parallel Port" and use the Local Firmware Update Tool to recover the unit. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location. 2. Updating through the Parallel Port (Alternate Method) If the device is not connected to the LAN, upgrade the firmware code using the Parallel Port. 1) Install the Local Firmware Update Tool to your PC The option CD-ROM or the Panasonic Document Management System CD-ROM includes the Local Firmware Update Tool and the Main Unit Firmware Code are located in the Option CD-ROM only. Please refer to the following Operating Instructions to install the Local Firmware Update Tool. Operating Instructions: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\FIRMUP OI.pdf (Refer to the Local Firmware Update Tool OI on the CD) Setup: \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe 2) Preparing the Firmware Code Double click the appropriate Destination Shortcut Batch File and copy the Firmware Code File on the CD ROM to the Firmware Data Folder in your PC. Note that the files in the Archive will be extracted automatically into the designated folder when the Archived file (.exe) is Double-clicked. Example: From: Destination Shortcut Batch File: D:(CD-ROM Drive) \ xFirmware \ USA.bat Firmware Code File: DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx.exe To: Firmware Data Folder: C:\ Panasonic \ Panasonic-FUP \ Data 3) Preparing the Main Unit for the Firmware Upgrade Enter into Test Mode F9-07-01 to enable the unit to accept the programming code from the Parallel Port. If the unit does not boot up, follow the procedure below: a. Turn the power Off (use the power switch on the back of the unit, not the side of the unit.). b. Turn the power On while holding the [ENERGY SAVER] button. c. When the unit's front panel green lamp turns On, release the [ENERGY SAVER] button, it is now ready to accept the firmware code from the Parallel Port. Connect the Parallel Cable between the Unit and PC. Repeat the above steps if there are additional firmware code files to be updated.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

300

MAR 2005

4) Upgrading the Main Unit's Firmware Code Start the Local Firmware Update Tool and select the following Firmware Code Parent File Folder in the C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data folder, and select the Firmware Code Type then follow the display instructions to upgrade the Main Unit's Firmware Codes. You must process each firmware file separately in this manner and sequence.
Parent Firmware File Folder \ DP-3510_4510_6010_xx_xxxxxx Sub Firmware File Folder \ PNL \ SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx \ SC_STD \ DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx \ SC_PCL \ DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx-xx Firmware File SFDM_PNLAxVxxxxxx-xx.bin DP-SFDMAxVxxxxx-xx.bin DP-SFDMBxVxxxxx_xx.bin DP-SFDMCxVxxxxxa_xx.bin DP-SFDMCxVxxxxxb.bin DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx_xx.bin DP-SFDMExVxxxxxa_xx.bin DP-SFDMExVxxxxxb.bin SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx.bin Transferring Order 1 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-1 2-2 2-3 3

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

\ SC_PS \ DP-SFDMDxVxxxxx-xx

\ SPC \ SFDM_SPCAxVxxxxxx

When you select the Parent Folder, the following Firmware Type window appears. Proper Firmware Files are selected automatically by selecting the Firmware Type. The transferring order is set up automatically.

Note: 1. Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update. 2.While updating the firmware code, the display may become garbled, however, it will return to normal upon completion of the firmware update. 3. Please refer to the service manual for additional details. 4. The suffix "_xx" for the Folder Name or File Name may not exist depending on the destination location.

Ver. 5.1

301

MAR 2005

8.4.
8.4.1.
Qty. 1 1

Installing the Printer Controller Module for GDI-IPX/SPX (DA-GC601) (Not Available in the USA/Canada)
Contents
Description Hardware Key Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZSM000751 Remarks GDI KEY

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.4.2.

Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Install the Printer Driver and NetWare SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

302

MAR 2005

8.5.
8.5.1.
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC602)

Contents
Description Hardware Key Software CD License Agreement Installation Instructions Part No. ----See Note --------PJQRC0036Z Remarks PCL KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.5.2.

Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

303

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes". (7) Install the PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(3)

Note: 1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX. 2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3530/4530/6030, it cannot be used for DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020. Please use the DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/ 6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.

Ver. 5.1

304

MAR 2005

8.6.
8.6.1.
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-PC601)

Contents
Description Hardware Key Software CD License Agreement Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZRQ000288 or DZRQ000289 DZSH000112 DZSH000113 DZSM000752 Remarks PCL KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.6.2.

Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

305

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes". (7) Install the PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(3)

Note: 1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX. 2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3520/4520/6020, it cannot be used for DP-3510/4510/6010. Please use the DP-3510/4510/6010 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.

Ver. 5.1

306

MAR 2005

8.7.
8.7.1.
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PCL6 (DA-PC600)

Contents
Description Hardware Key Software CD License Agreement Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZRQ000059 or DZRQ000062 DZSH000112 DZSH000113 DZSM000508

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks PCL KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.7.2.

Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

307

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PCL Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes". (7) Install the PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

308

MAR 2005

8.8.
8.8.1.

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-MC602)

Contents
Description Hardware Key Software CD Adobe Postscript 3 Label License Agreement License Agreement (For Adobe PostScript Driver) Installation Instructions Part No. ----See Note --------------------PJQRC0037Z

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Remarks PS KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.8.2.

Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

309

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes". (7) Install the PS/PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard. (8) Attach the Adobe Postscript 3 Label to the Front Cover as illustrated.

(3)

Note: 1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX. 2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3530/4530/6030, it cannot be used for DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/6020. Please use the DP-3510/3520/4510/4520/6010/ 6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.

Ver. 5.1

310

MAR 2005

8.9.
8.9.1.

Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6-IPX/SPX (DA-MC601)

Contents
Description Hardware Key Software CD Adobe Postscript 3 Label License Agreement License Agreement (For Adobe PostScript Driver) Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZRQ000292 or DZRQ000293 DZNK004647 DZSH000112 DZSH000113 --------DZSM000753

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Remarks PS KEY Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.9.2.

Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

311

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes". (7) Install the PS/PCL6 Printer Driver and NetWare SetupWizard into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard. (8) Attach the Adobe Postscript 3 Label to the Front Cover as illustrated.

(3)

Note: 1. For USA and Canada only, this option can also be used for DP-3510/4510/6010 without IPX/SPX. 2. The Firmware included on the CD-ROM with this option is intended for DP-3520/4520/6020, it cannot be used for DP-3510/4510/6010. Please use the DP-3510/4510/6010 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the Web.

Ver. 5.1

312

MAR 2005

8.10. Installing the Printer Controller Module for PS / PCL6 (DA-MC600)

8.10.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Hardware Key Software CD Adobe Postscript 3 Label License Agreement License Agreement (For Adobe PostScript Driver) Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZRQ000123 or DZRQ000124 DZNK004647 DZSH000112 DZSH000113 --------DZSM000564 Remarks PS KEY

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.10.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600) is installed into Slot 1 on the SC PC Board first. Refer to the Installation Instruction of the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600). 2. Install the Hardware Key by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1) Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

313

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit to the PS/PCL Option firmware. Refer to the "Service Notes". (7) Install the PS/PCL6 Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard. (8) Attach the Adobe Postscript 3 Label to the Front Cover as illustrated.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

314

MAR 2005

8.11. Installing the Network Scanner Module (DA-NS600)

8.11.1. Contents
Description Hardware Key Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZSM000754

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Qty. 1 1

Remarks NWS KEY This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.11.2.

Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Install the Panasonic-DMS Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

315

MAR 2005

8.12. Installing the Network Scanner Module for DDS (DA-NS601)

8.12.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 Description Hardware Key Installation Instructions Part No. ----DZSM000782

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks DDS KEY This document

Note: 1. This option is intended to be used with the Document Distribution System (DA-WR10) for DP-3520/4520/6020. 2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.12.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

KEY

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Install the Document Distribution System software (DA-WR10) into the PC by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

316

MAR 2005

Note: 1. The Network Scanner (DA-NS600) cannot be installed together with this option. If the Network Scanner (DA-NS600) is already installed, remove it first. 2. If the Firmware version installed on the machine is SC:SFDM_MK2AxV30700, PNL:MMK2_PNLAxV30000, SPC:SFDM_SPCAxV30100 or older, it must be updated for this option by referring to the Service Notes. Please use the DP-3520/4520/6020 firmware provided separately by the local Sales Company or Download it from the technical support Web site.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

317

MAR 2005

8.13. Installing the Internet Fax / E-Mail Module (DA-NF600)

8.13.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 Description Hardware Key Operating Instructions (For Facsimile and Internet Fax) Installation Instructions Part No. ----See Note DZSM000755

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks IFX KEY

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.13.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

318

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3) Install the Hardware Key into one of the three available connectors (CN67, CN68 or CN69) on the SC PC Board. Note: The connectors are keyed, to prevent damage to the SC PC Board, install the Hardware Key as illustrated. Do not force the Hardware Key into the connector if facing the wrong way. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (6) Update the firmware of the unit. Refer to the "Service Notes. (7) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the steps below. a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. b) Press the 9 and START keys to enter the F9 Mode c) Press 00 FAX Service Mode d) Press 06 RAM Initialize e) Press "01 Parameter Initialize" and the "Yes" button f) Press the "STOP" key g) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. h) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. (8) Install the Internet Fax/Email Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

KEY

(3)

Ver. 5.1

319

MAR 2005

Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<Changing from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book> An additional 800 stations (1,000 total) are available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is installed. If you wish to use the 1,000 Fax Address Book, please follow the steps below to change the address book setting of the machine. Caution: The registered address book data will be deleted when the address book setting is changed. If your machine already has registered stations in the Fax Address Book, please make a backup first before changing the address book setting. Before changing the Fax Address Book setting, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data using the Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software. After executing the setting change, reenter the printed Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000 station Address Book file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and Printer) Changing the Fax Address Book Setting Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below. a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance). c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode" d) Press "06 RAM Initialize" e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit will return to stand-by. <Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE). Note: 1. The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address Book. When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-35xx/ 45xx/60xx. - The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book. - The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book. 2. The model module of the Address Book Editor (NAE) can be confirmed by the following method. a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities and select Network Device Locator. b) The Network Device Locator screen is displayed, DO NOT select any device and in the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. c) The Network Address Book Editor screen displays; click "Cancel" if the Start UP screen also appears. d) Select "Help" -> "Supported Models..." from the main menu to open the Supported Models List. e) Confirm whether your machine is listed. If it is not listed, click "Update" to access the web site and download the latest model module and then install it.

Ver. 5.1

320

MAR 2005

Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data 1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows: a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities. b) Click on Network Device Locator. c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device. d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book. f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station). g) Then click the OK button. 2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described above. 3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station). 4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.) 5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

321

MAR 2005

8.14. Installing the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600)

8.14.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 Description FXB PC Board MJR PC Board Assembly MJR Harness Speaker Assembly Speaker Harness 2 (Extension) SDRM Bracket Stamp Assembly Stamp Solenoid Telephone Line Cable Type Approval Label Line Label Screw (Short) Screw (Long) Part No. See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks Important: Read Note 4 below, before installing this PCB.

Operating Instructions (For Facsimile) See Note Installation Instructions PJQRC0044Z

This document

Note: 1. If also installing the Program Expansion Board (DA-EM600), it must be installed first. 2. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 3. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.14.2. Installation
Install the Hardware by following the steps below. CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

Ver. 5.1

322

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3) Remove 9 Screws. (4) Remove the Upper Rear Cover.

(8)

(9)

(10)

(7)

(5) Open the Front Door. (6) Open the Left Cover. (7) Remove 3 Silver Screws. (8) Remove the Left Rear Cover. (9) Remove the upper protective tab on the Left Rear Cover for the LINE connection. If installing an External Telephone, remove the Lower protective tab as well. (10) Attach the Line Label to the Left Rear Cover as illustrated. (11) Remove 2 Protective Films.

(11)

(12)

(12) Route the Speaker Harness through the speaker hole in the frame and install the Speaker Assembly. (13) Secure with 2 Screws (Short). (14) Connect the Speaker Harness 2 (Extension) to the Speaker Harness.

(13)

Ver. 5.1

323

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(15) Connect one end of the MJR Harness and Speaker Harness 2 to the MJR PC Board Assembly Connectors (CN22 and CN25).

(16) (17)

(16) Install the MJR PC Board Assembly from the rear of the machine by inserting the Hooks into the slots on the frame. (17) Secure the MJR PC Board Assembly with 5 Screws (Short).

(18) Remove 1 Screw from the SC PC Board. (19) Install the SDRAM Bracket into the machine and secure it with 1 Screw removed in Step (18).

(19)

(18)

(20) Route the Harnesses and pass through the frame in the rear of the unit as illustrated. (21) Secure the Harnesses to the 2 Harness Clamps. (22) Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp.
(22)

(20) (21)

Ver. 5.1

324

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<If you already installed HDD Unit Option, follow the step below, otherwise, skip to Step (24)>
(23)

(23) Secure the Harness to the 1 Harness Clamp.

(24)

(26)

(24) Plug the G3 Fax PC Board (FXB) into the SC PC Board with on Board Connector. (25) Secure the G3 Fax PC Board with 3 Screws (Short). (26) Connect the Harness to 3 Connectors on the FXB PC Board (CN391, CN392 and CN393). (27) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers.

(25)
(28) Open the ADF Cover. (29) Lift the Lower Opening and Shutting guide 2 Assembly. (30) Lift the Original Tray Assembly. (31) Lower the Inverting Guide 4 Assembly.
(30)

(28) (29)

(31)

(32)

(33)

(32) Remove 2 Screws. (33) Remove the Inverting Guide 3 Assembly.

Ver. 5.1

325

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(34)

(35)

(34) Remove 2 Screws. (35) Remove the Lower Exit Guide.

(36)

(36) Connect the Stamp Harness to Stamp Solenoid. (37) Secure the Stamp Solenoid with 1 Screw (Long).

(37)

(39)

(38)

(38) Reinstall the Lower Exit Guide removed in Step (35). (39) Install the Stamp Assembly. (40) Reinstall the all parts removed in above steps and close the ADF Covers.

(41) Attach the TA Label (specified destination) to the Lower Rear Cover as illustrated.

TA Label

Ver. 5.1

326

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

LINE

(42) Connect one end of the Telephone Line Cable to the LINE Jack on the left side of the machine, and the other to the RJ-11C Jack on the wall. (43) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(44) It is not necessary to set the parameter for the Note: For other destinations, set the Function Parameter following suffix (Destinations). The Fax Firmware #005 (Destination Code). is automatically loaded with the Host Firmware. 000 : Austria PB : UK 001 : U.K. PF : France 002 : Canada PG : Switzerland 003 : Denmark PK : China 004 : Taiwan PM : Germany 005 : Finland PT : Taiwan 006 : Germany PU : USA 007 : Netherlands PEU : UK 008 : Italy 009 : Spanish 010 : Hong Kong 011 : Australia 012 : Switzerland 013 : Norway 015 : Portuguese 016 : Ireland 017 : Belgium 018 : Sweden 019 : Turkey 020 : U.S.A. 021 : France 022 : New Zealand 025 : Japan 030 : Czech 031 : Russia 032 : Greece 033 : Hungary 034 : Indonesia 035 : South Korea 038 : Malaysia 039 : China 045 : Thailand 048 : South Africa 049 : Singapore 050 : Universal

Ver. 5.1

327

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(45) Execute Parameter Initialize by following the steps below. a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. b) Press the 9 and START keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance). c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode". d) Press "06 RAM Initialize". e) Press "01 Parameter Initialize" and the "Yes" button. f) Press the "STOP" key. g) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR). keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. h) Turn the Power Switch on the Left side of the machine to the OFF and back to the ON position to enable the parameter settings. (46) Verify the position of the stamp on the document. If it is not within the desired location at the bottom of the document, you can adjust its position by following the steps below. a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. b) Press the "6" and "START" keys to enter the F6 Mode (Adjust Parameters). c) Press "69 Stamp position adjust". d) Press "INPUT" button and enter a number (-50 to 50). Note: A positive number moves the stamp position closer to the trail edge of the document, conversely, a negative number moves it in the opposite direction. To change the current sign to either +/-, press the "RESET" key. (Default setting = 0; 0.3 mm/step) e) Press "OK" button twice. f) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR). keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode.

Ver. 5.1

328

MAR 2005

Perform the following steps if the Optional Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is also installed.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<Changing from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book> An additional 800 stations (1,000 total) are available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is installed. If you wish to use the 1,000 Fax Address Book, please follow the steps below to change the address book setting of the machine. Caution: The registered address book data will be deleted when the address book setting is changed. If your machine already has registered stations in the Fax Address Book, please make a backup first before changing the address book setting. Before changing the Fax Address Book setting, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data using the Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software. After executing the setting change, reenter the printed Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000 station Address Book file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and Printer) Changing the Fax Address Book Setting Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below. a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance). c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode" d) Press "06 RAM Initialize" e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit will return to stand-by. <Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE). Note: 1. The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address Book. When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-35xx/ 45xx/60xx. - The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book. - The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book. 2. The model module of the Address Book Editor (NAE) can be confirmed by the following method. a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities and select Network Device Locator. b) The Network Device Locator screen is displayed, DO NOT select any device and in the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. c) The Network Address Book Editor screen displays; click "Cancel" if the Start UP screen also appears. d) Select "Help" -> "Supported Models..." from the main menu to open the Supported Models List. e) Confirm whether your machine is listed. If it is not listed, click "Update" to access the web site and download the latest model module and then install it.

Ver. 5.1

329

MAR 2005

Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data 1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows: a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities. b) Click on Network Device Locator. c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device. d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book. f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station). g) Then click the OK button. 2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described above. 3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station). 4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.) 5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

330

MAR 2005

8.15. Installing the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60)

8.15.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 5 1 Description Hard Disk Drive (HDD) DC PCB Assembly HDD Bracket HDD2 Harness HD Harness DC12 Harness Clamp Silver Screw (Short) Screw (Long) Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note DZHP007347 DZJE001046 DZFP001109 DZFP001293 DZFP001184 DZJK000077 See Note See Note DZSM000552

Remarks

Power Supply Cable Flat Cable 3 Connectors

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.15.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

(3) (4)

(3) Remove 15 Silver Screws. (4) Remove the Upper Rear Cover and Lower Rear Cover.

Ver. 5.1

331

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Remove 4 Screws. (6) Remove the Frame.

(5) (6)

(7) Open the Right Cover. (8) Remove 3 Silver Screws. (9) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(7) (9) (8)

(10) Remove the Toner Waste Container.

(10)

HDD

Key

UL Tape (Black) To SC PCB Shield

Note: Connect the HD Harness to the HDD as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

332

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) (11)

(13)

(11) Install the HDD into the HDD Bracket. (12) Secure the HDD Bracket with 4 Silver Screws (Short). (13) Connect one end of the HDD2 Harness and HD Harness to the HDD.

Key (11) (12)

(14)

(15)

(14) Install the HDD Assembly. (15) Secure the HDD Assembly with 2 Screws (Long). Note: Route the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply Cable) through the cutout in the frame and secure it with the Harness Clamp as illustrated.

UL Tape (Black)

(16) Connect the HD Harness to CN59 on the SC PC Board as illustrated. (17) Remove the Screw from the frame, and secure the HD Harness Clamp with this Screw as illustrated. Note: Ensure that the clamp is around the shielded portion of the Harness, and not around the UL Tape (Black). (18) Install the DC PCB Assembly. Note: If the Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) is installed, disconnect the CN392 Harness on the FX PCB. Route the Harness over the DC PCB Bracket and secure it with the Clamp. Reconnect the Harness to CN392 on the FX PCB. (19) Secure the DC PCB Assembly with 3 Screws (Long). (20) Connect the HDD2 Harness (Power Supply Cable) to CN143 on the DCB PC Board.

(16)

(17)

(20) (18) (19)

Ver. 5.1

333

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(21)

(21) Connect the DC12 Harness to CN141 and CN142 on the DC PC Board. (22) Secure the DC12 Harness with 4 Clamps.
(22)

(22)

(23)

(23) Connect the DC12 Harness to the LVPS. (24) Reinstall the Toner Waste Container. (25) Reinstall all Covers. (26) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (27) Update the firmware of the unit. Refer to the "Service Notes".

CAUTION! After the Hard Disk Drive Unit is installed, to prevent a Disk Scan Function from being performed (similar to Windows OS when the power is abruptly interrupted), it is important to follow the step sequence below when turning OFF the Power Switches on the machine. 1. Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the OFF position first. 2. Wait approximately 10 seconds while the machine writes the closing status onto the Hard Disk Drive Unit. 3. Turn the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position. (This interrupts all the power to the machine) 4. Unplug the AC Power Cord.

Ver. 5.1

334

MAR 2005

Perform the following steps if the Optional Fax Communication Board (DA-FG600) or the Internet Fax/E-Mail Module (DA-NF600) is also installed

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<Changing from 200 to 1,000 Station Address Book> An additional 800 stations (1,000 total) are available when the optional Hard Disk Drive (DA-HD60) is installed. If you wish to use the 1,000 Fax Address Book, please follow the steps below to change the address book setting of the machine. Caution: The registered address book data will be deleted when the address book setting is changed. If your machine already has registered stations in the Fax Address Book, please make a backup first before changing the address book setting. Before changing the Fax Address Book setting, printout the Address Book information or copy the Data using the Address Book Editor in the Panasonic-DMS software. After executing the setting change, reenter the printed Address Book information or copy and paste the Data from the 200 to the 1,000 station Address Book file. (See the Operating Instructions for Document Management System and Printer) Changing the Fax Address Book Setting Execute the Auto Dial Clear and activate the 1,000 station Address Book by following the steps below. a) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. b) Press the "9" and "START" keys to enter the F9 Mode (Unit Maintenance). c) Press "00 FAX Service Mode" d) Press "06 RAM Initialize" e) Press "03 Auto Dial Clear" and the "Yes" button for "Initialize?". Then press "Yes" button for "Address Book 1,000 stations?". Wait approximately 2 minutes while unit displays "In Progress", then the unit will return to stand-by. <Using Network Address Book Editor to Transfer the Address Book Data> The registered data in the 200 Station Address Book can be easily copied and transferred (copy and paste) to the 1,000 Station Address Book by using the Network Address Book Editor (NAE). Note: 1. The size and configuration of the transferred data, varies according to the 200 or 1,000 Fax Address Book. When installing the Panasonic-DMS, 2 Address Book Editor modules are installed for the DP-35xx/ 45xx/60xx. - The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" is used for the standard 200 Fax Address Book. - The "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)" is used for the 1,000 Fax Address Book. 2. The model module of the Address Book Editor (NAE) can be confirmed by the following method. a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities and select Network Device Locator. b) The Network Device Locator screen is displayed, DO NOT select any device and in the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. c) The Network Address Book Editor screen displays; click "Cancel" if the Start UP screen also appears. d) Select "Help" -> "Supported Models..." from the main menu to open the Supported Models List. e) Confirm whether your machine is listed. If it is not listed, click "Update" to access the web site and download the latest model module and then install it.

Ver. 5.1

335

MAR 2005

Using the Network Address Book Editor to Copy and Paste the Address Book Data 1. An appropriate Address Book Editor module is automatically selected depending on which style of Fax Address Book is activated on the DP-35xx/45xx/60xx. Retrieve the 200 station, Fax Address Book data from the unit as follows: a) Click on START\Programs\Panasonic\Panasonic Document Management System\Network MFP Utilities. b) Click on Network Device Locator. c) In the Network Device Locator screen, select your desired device. d) In the menu bar, click on Tools and in the drop down menu on Address Book Editor. e) The Network Address Book Editor "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx" screen appears, under the Address Book Editor directory, click on Fax Address Book. f) When the 200 station Fax Address Book file is displayed, save the data file by clicking on File\Save As... and type the file name of your choice (i.e. 200 Station). g) Then click the OK button. 2. Change the Address Book of the unit from 200 to 1,000 stations, using the Service Mode described above. 3. Retrieve the 1,000 Fax Address Book (empty) data again from the unit using the same method as above. When the Address Book Editor appears this time, it will show "DP-35xx/45xx/60xx (Fax1000)". Save the data file as above, except change to another name (i.e. 1,000 Station). 4. Open the 200 Fax data file of step 1 and the 1,000 Fax data file of step 3. Copy the 200 Fax data and paste it into the 1,000 Fax data file, add additional desired names to the file, then save it again. (Refer to Help.) 5. Transfer the edited 1,000 Fax data file to the unit, by clicking on Transfer and Write in the menu bar. Close the Network Address Book Editor application after the transfer is successfully completed.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

336

MAR 2005

8.16. Installing the Accounting Software (DA-WA10)

8.16.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 Description Accounting Software CD Installation Instructions Part No. See Note DZSM000741

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks Includes Operating Instructions This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.16.2. Installation
1. Before installing this option, make sure the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60) is installed into the machine first. Refer to the Installation Instructions for the Hard Disk Drive Unit (DA-HD60). 2. Install the Accounting Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard. 3. Set the Key/Dept. Counter function by following the steps below. 1) Press the "FUNCTION", "ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and "3" keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2) Press the "5" key to enter the F5 Service Mode (Function Parameters). 3) Press the "START" key. 4) Press the "4", "2", and then "START" keys sequentially to enter the F5-42 "KEY/DEPT Counter". 5) Select the "DEPT.", and then "OK" buttons to activate the Key/Dept. Counter function. 6) Press the "STOP" key. Note: The factory default setting for the Key Operator ID Code is "0000", to ensure security it is recommended to change this code Follow the steps below to change the Key Operator ID Code: While in the Service Mode, press "7" to enter the F7 Service Mode. Press the "START" key. Select "01 Key Operator ID Code". Select "CHANGE" button, and then input a new 4-digit ID Code. Select "OK" button to set it and "OK" again to exit F7 Service Mode. 7) Press the "FUNCTION" and "C" (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. 4. Set the Key/Dept. Code by following the steps below. 1) Press the "FUNCTION" key, "General Settings", "04 Key Operator Mode" and input the 4 Digit Code to enter the Key Operator Mode. 2) Select "14 Dept. Counter Mode" and set the Dept. Counter Codes (up to 300). 3) Press the "STOP" key to return to the stand-by mode.

Ver. 5.1

337

MAR 2005

8.17. Installing the DD Server Software (DA-WS20)

8.17.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 Description DD Server Software CD License Agreement DD Server Operating Instructions Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note DZSH000112 DZSH000113 DZSD001791 DZSM000574

Remarks Includes Operating Instructions For USA and Canada only For Other Destinations This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.17.2. Installation
Install the DD Software into the PC with the Operating Instructions by following the prompts of the Installation Wizard.

Ver. 5.1

338

MAR 2005

8.18. Installing the Expansion F-ROM Board (DA-EM600)

8.18.1. Contents
Qty. 1 2 1 Description Expansion F-ROM Board PC Board Support Installation Instructions Part No. DZEC102137 NH-7 DZSM000756

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.18.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

(3)

(3) Install 2 PC Board Supporters for the Slot 1 on the SC PC Board. (4) Install the Program Expansion Board into Slot 1 (CN62) on the SC PC Board and secure with the Supporters. Note: The Program Extension F-ROM Board must always be installed into Slot 1 (CN62) for the PCL or PCL/PS Printer Option to function. (5) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (6) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(3)

(4)

Ver. 5.1

339

MAR 2005

8.19. Installing the Sorting Image Memory 16/64/128 MB (DA-SM16B/64B/28B)

8.19.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 Description Image Memory Installation Instructions Part No. DZEC102306 DZEC101919 DZEC102307 DZSM000757

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks 16 MB 64 MB 128 MB This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.19.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Loosen 5 Screws. (2) Remove the Rear Plate as illustrated.
(1)

(2)

(1)

Main Power SW

(3) Insert the SDRM PC Board into the Socket on the SC PC Board as illustrated. Note: Make sure to insert the SDRM PC Board at a 20 - 30 angle into the memory socket, and then lock it down. (4) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, close and secure the Rear Plate and reinstall remaining Covers. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

340

MAR 2005

8.20. Installing the Expansion Flash Memory Card 4/8 MB (UE-410047/410048)

8.20.1. Contents
Qty. 1 Description Image Memory Part No. UE-410047 UE-410048 Remarks 4 MB 8 MB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.20.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Remove 1 Silver Screw. (2) Remove the Flash Memory Cover.

(3) Insert the Expansion Flash Memory Card as illustrated.

(4) Reinstall the Right Rear Cover. (5) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Ver. 5.1

341

MAR 2005

8.21. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS603) / Console 2 (DA-DS604)

8.21.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 Description System Console Screw (M3 x 6) Installation Instructions Part No. See Note See Note PJQRC0045Z Remarks Included inside the Paper Tray. This document

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.21.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the Handles upward then pullout to lock them in place. Note: To release the handles, lift the release latch upwards and push the handles toward the machine.

Release Latch

(2) Lift and place the machine on the System Console (DA-DS603/DS604) aligning with 3 Guide-Pins. Caution: The machine weights approximately 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

(3) Secure with 1 Screw on the left.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

342

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4)

(4) Pull out the 3rd Tray Rear. (5) Secure with 2 Large Screws attached in the System Console as illustrated.

(5)

<Replace Gear for Adjusting the Speed> The factory setting is for DP-3530 / 4530. If you are installing onto DP-6030, adjust the speed by following the steps below. (1) Remove 2 Silver Screws. (2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.
(2) (1)

(3) Remove 2 Snap-Rings.

(3)

(Plastic Washers)

(4) Remove the Belt, 2 Gears and 2 Plastic Washers. (5) Turn both Gears over and reinstall 2 Gears, 2 Plastic Washers and the Belt. Note: When reinstalling the gears, mount the Plastic Washers onto the gears first before inserting them into the shaft. (6) Make sure the Gear Combination to Match the Speed. (7) Reinstall the Lower Rear Cover.

DP-6030: 6 Ribs outside

Ver. 5.1

343

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(Plastic Washers)

Note: The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for DP-3530 / 4530 as default setting.

DP-3530 / 4530: 3 Ribs outside

Note: After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2 Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler behind the right front caster for more stability.

(8)

(8) Connect the System Console Cable to the Machine. Note: Refer to the 3000-Sheet Tray Installation Instructions if it is installed. (9) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

8.21.3. Side-to-Side Adjustment of the LSU Image

1. Press the "FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2. Press the 6 key to enter the F6 Mode. 3. Press the START key. 4. Press the 1, 3 and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F6 Mode code 13 for the Side-to-Side adjustment of the 3rd Tray (-8 to 7). 5. Press the 1, 4 and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F6 Mode code 14 for the Side-to-Side adjustment of the 4th Tray (-8 to 7). 6. Press the STOP key. 7. Press the FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. 8. Make a copy to verify your adjustment, repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required.

Ver. 5.1

344

MAR 2005

8.22. Installing the System Console 1 (DA-DS601) / Console 2 (DA-DS602)

8.22.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 Description System Console Screw (M3 x 6) Installation Instructions Part No. See Note XTB3+6F DZSM000509 Remarks Included inside the Paper Tray. This document

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.22.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Open the 4 Handle Covers and swing the Handles upward then pullout to lock them in place. Note: To release the handles, lift the release latch upwards and push the handles toward the machine.

Release Latch

(2) Lift and place the machine on the System Console (DA-DS601/DS602) aligning with 3 Guide-Pins. Caution: The machine weights approximately 290 lb (131.5 kg) with the i-ADF pre-installed. To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the machine.

(3) Secure with 1 Screw (XTB3+6F) on the left.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

345

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4)

(4) Pull out the 3rd Tray Rear. (5) Secure with 2 Large Screws attached in the System Console as illustrated.

(5)

<Replace Gear for Adjusting the Speed> The factory setting is for DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 / 4520. If you are installing onto DP-6010 / 6020, adjust the speed by following the steps below. (1) Remove 2 Silver Screws. (2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.

(2) (1)

(3) Remove 2 Snap-Rings.

(3)

(Plastic Washers)

(4) Remove the Belt, 2 Gears and 2 Plastic Washers. (5) Turn both Gears over and reinstall 2 Gears, 2 Plastic Washers and the Belt. Note: When reinstalling the gears, mount the Plastic Washers onto the gears first before inserting them into the shaft. (6) Make sure the Gear Combination to Match the Speed. (7) Reinstall the Lower Rear Cover.

DP-6010 / 6020: 6 Ribs outside

Ver. 5.1

346

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(Plastic Washers)

Note: The Gear Combination Shown on the Left is for DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 / 4520 as default setting.

DP-3510 / 3520 / 4510 / 4520: 3 Ribs outside

Note: After the machine is installed, be sure to lock the 2 Casters in front. If necessary, adjust the Leveler behind the right front caster for more stability.

(8)

(8) Connect the System Console Cable to the Machine. Note: Refer to the 3000-Sheet Tray Installation Instructions if it is installed. (9) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

8.22.3. Side-to-Side Adjustment of the LSU Image

1. Press the "FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2. Press the 6 key to enter the F6 Mode. 3. Press the START key. 4. Press the 1, 3 and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F6 Mode code 13 for the Side-to-Side adjustment of the 3rd Tray (-8 to 7). 5. Press the 1, 4 and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F6 Mode code 14 for the Side-to-Side adjustment of the 4th Tray (-8 to 7). 6. Press the STOP key. 7. Press the FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. 8. Make a copy to verify your adjustment, repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required.

Ver. 5.1

347

MAR 2005

8.23. Installing the 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-MA301)

8.23.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1 Description 3000-Sheet Tray (LCT) Paper Guide Rail Assy Harnes Clamp Screw (M4 x 10) Silver Screw (M4 x 10) Screw (M4 x 8) Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note DZJF000543 DZJA001049 PLWS4 See Note See Note See Note DZSM000488

Remarks

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.23.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Remove the Protective Cover by releasing 3 Latch Hooks.
(1)

(2) Break off 4 protective tabs with the Phillips type Screw Driver on the Right Upper and Bottom Covers.

Ver. 5.1

348

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3)

(3) Install the Paper Guide. (4) Secure the Paper Guide with 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 10).

(4)

(6)

(5) Install the Rail Assembly. (6) Secure the Rail Assembly with 2 Screws (M4 x 10).

(5)

(7) Install the LCT on the Rail Assembly. Note: Make sure 2 Latches fit into 2 Guide Pins of the Rail Assembly in Front and Rear. (8) Secure the LCT with 2 Screws (M4 x 8) in Front and Rear.

(8)

(9) Adjust the LCT level with 2 Adjusters. Note: Make sure the gaps A and B are the same.

(9) A B

(9)

(9)

Ver. 5.1

349

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(11)

(13) (14) (12)

(10) Connect the LCT Cable to the machine. (11) Connect the System Console Cable to the LCT. (12) Install the Harness Clamp (PLWS4) on the Rear Cover. (13) Secure the System Console Cable with the Harness Clamp. (14) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position. (15) Make a copy and verify that the Image is centered. If the Image is not centered, proceed to step (16) and perform the Side to Side adjustment. (16) Loosen 2 screws and adjust the Rail Assembly to the front and rear accordingly as illustrated. When finished, verify the image and repeat the adjustment if necessary.

(16)

(16)

8.23.3. Side-to-Side Adjustment of the LSU Image

1. Press the "FUNCTION, ORIGINAL SIZE (LEDGER/A3)" and 3 keys simultaneously in that order to enter the Service Mode. 2. Press the 6 key to enter the F6 Mode. 3. Press the START key. 4. Press the 1, 5 and "START" keys sequentially to enter the F6 Mode code 15 for the Side-to-Side adjustment of the LCT (-8 to 7). 5. Press the STOP key. 6. Press the FUNCTION and C (CLEAR) keys simultaneously to exit the Service Mode. 7. Make a copy to verify your adjustment, repeat the steps above if further adjustment is required.

Ver. 5.1

350

MAR 2005

8.24. Installing the Letter / Legal Size Adapter for 3000-Sheet Tray (DA-TK31)
8.24.1. Contents
Qty. 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 17 1 Description Paper Guide Rear Guide Plate B Front Guide Plate B Upper Support Plate Lower Support Plate Paper Table Door (Large) Paper Size Label, Legal Paper Size Label, Letter-R Screw (M3 x 6) Installation Instructions Part No. DZJA001020 DZJA001116 DZJA001117 DZJA001118 DZJA001119 DZJA001120 DZJE000988 DZNK004085 DZNK004084 See Note DZSM000489 Remarks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.24.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. Note: Make sure that the Paper Table is at the bottom Position.
(1) (2) (1)

(1) Remove 4 Screws. (2) Remove the Top Cover. (3) Remove 4 Screws. (4) Remove the Front Cover.

(3)

(4)

(3)

(5)

(6)

(5) Remove 1 Screw. (6) Remove the Door (Small).

Ver. 5.1

351

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7)

Door Lock Lever

(7) Remove the Door Lock Lever by lifting the Latch. (8) Install the Door Lock Lever onto the Door (Large).

Latch

(9)

(9) Remove 2 Screws. (10) Remove Front and Rear Guide Plate A.

(10)

(12)

(11) Install the Lower Support Plate. (12) Secure with 4 Screws.

(11)

(14)

(13) Install the Guide Plate A onto the Paper Guides on both side as illustrated. (14) Secure the Guide Plate A with 2 Screws.

(13) Paper Guide

Ver. 5.1

352

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

B4

A4

Legal (16) (16)

Letter

(15) Reinstall Front and Rear Guide Plate A into the desired paper size slot. (16) Secure the Plates with 2 Screws. Note: Insert the Paper Guide into the lower desired paper size slot of the Base Unit first, then hook to the upper slot in the Mechanical Assembly.

(15)

(15) Legal B4 Letter A4 <3> <1> <2> (17)

(17) Install the Legal Tray. (18) Secure the Paper Table with 3 Screws as illustrated.

(19)

(19) Install the Front and Rear Guide Plate B. (20) Secure the Guide Plates B with 2 Screws.

(20) (19)

(20)

Ver. 5.1

353

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(22)

(22)

(21) Install the Upper Support Plate by sliding it on the Guide Screw holes as illustrated. (22) Secure the Plates with 4 Screws.

(21)

(22)

(24)

(23)

(23) Install the Door (Large) onto the Mounting Pins. (24) Secure with 1 Screw.

(25) Place a sheet of paper and close the Door (Large). (26) Turn the Power Switches On. (27) After the Tray comes up, turn the Power Switches Off.

(28) Remove 1 Screw. (29) Remove the Sensor Assy from the Letter Position.

(29) (28)

Ver. 5.1

354

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<For Letter-R Setting> (30) Reinstall the Sensor Assy at the Letter-R position. (31) Secure with 1 Screw.

(30) (31) (34) Legal (33) Letter-R

<For Legal Setting> (32) Open the Door (Large). (33) Remove the Harness from the bottom Clamp. (34) Reinstall the Sensor Assy at the Legal position. (35) Secure with 1 Screw.

(35)

Letter

(36)

(36) Reinstall the Top Cover. (37) Reinstall the Front Cover. (38) Attach the Paper Size Label as illustrated. Note: See Installation Instructions of the LCT for adjusting LCT label. (39) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

(38) (37)

Ver. 5.1

355

MAR 2005

8.25. Installing the Exit Tray (DA-XT600)

8.25.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 Description Exit Tray Assembly Exit Roller E Assembly Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black) Stop Plate Stop Plate 2 Screw E-Ring Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. DZHP006490 DZHP007040 DZLF000639 DZJL000333 DZJL000334 See Note See Note DZSM000558

Remarks For USA and Canada only For USA and Canada only (DP-35xx)

For USA and Canada only (DP-35xx) This document

8.25.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
(3)

Note: For USA and Canada, follow the steps below. For Other Destinations, skip to the step (14). (1) Open the Front Door. (2) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (3) Remove 3 Screws. (4) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.

(2)

(4)

(5)

(5)

(5) Remove 2 Screws. (6) Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly.

(6)

Ver. 5.1

356

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7) Remove 2 Screws. (8) Remove the Exit Roller U Assembly.

(7) (7)

(8)

(9)

Note: For DP-35xx, follow the Steps below. For DP-45xx/60xx, skip to step (11). (9) Remove the E-Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1 (White). (10) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black) and E-Ring included with this kit.

(10) (11)

(11)

(11) Install the Exit Roller E Assembly included with this kit and secure it with 2 Screws. (12) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly. (13) Close the Upper Exit Cover.

(14) Install the Exit Tray Assembly to the Upper Exit Cover.

(14)

Ver. 5.1

357

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(16)

(18)

(17)

(15) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (16) Remove 1 Screw to free the Upper Exit Cover Stopper. (17) Install the Stop Plate and secure it with 1 Screw as illustrated. (18) Install the Stop Plate 2 and secure it with 1 Screw as illustrated. (19) Secure the Upper Exit Cover Stopper with 1 Screw (removed in step (16) above). (20) Close the Upper Exit Cover. (21) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Ver. 5.1

358

MAR 2005

8.26. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600)

8.26.1. Contents
Qty. 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 4 2 4 2 1 1 1 Description 2 Bin Finisher Tray Inlet Guide Latch Plate Harness Cover (Longer) Harness Cover (Shorter) Base Plate Face Plate Button Guide Rail Connecting Plate Exit Roller U Assembly Screw (M4 x 8) Black Screw (M4 x 6) Screw (M4 x 25) Silver Screw (M4 x 12) Silver Screw (M3 x 10) IPC PC Board Label Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note 4G1-0772-000 4F1-2122-000 4G1-5204-000 4A1-8442-000 4A1-3703-000 4B1-0933-000 4A1-8441-000 4G1-5202-000 4B1-0934-000 DZHP007141 See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note 4G1-5215-000 DZNK004315 DZSM000568

Remarks

Except for USA and Canada

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual. 3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600), read these entire instructions.

Ver. 5.1

359

MAR 2005

8.26.2. Installation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
3.9" (100mm) 3.9" (100mm)

1. Selecting the Site Make sure that there will be adequate space for the work (i.e., removal of paper). Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the same floor surface as its host machine (i.e., at the same height, slope).

57.6 " (1463 mm)

3.9" (100mm)

83.3 " (2115 mm)

3.9" (100mm)

2. Removing the Packaging Materials

(1)

Note: The Machine is protected during shipment with Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock. When the site has been selected, move the Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves only in a straight line. (1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package. Caution: Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can cause deformation of the Rail Mount. (2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and stand it on the floor. (Be sure to work in a group of two.)

Ver. 5.1

360

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3) Remove the Pads from the Top Cover. (4) Lift the Front Caster slightly, and remove the Pad. Repeat the same procedure and lift the Rear Caster slightly and remove the Pad. Caution: The Finisher is equipped with Casters, and tends to roll easily. Be sure to work in a group of two, and exercise caution not to drop the finisher or getting hurt. Moreover, be sure to pay attention when shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail Base. (5) Open the Covers and remove all tapes and packing materials. (6) Close the Covers. Caution: The removed Tapes and Packaging Material will be required when transporting the Machine for relocation or repairs; it is a good idea to store them for future use. 3. Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher Assembly Caution: Before connecting the Finisher to its Host Machine, mount the Trays and other parts to the Finisher first. (1) Install 2 Trays to the Finisher. Starting with the bottom Tray, and then install the upper Tray next. (2) As shown, fit the bosses on the Tray into the holes in the Horizontal Frames, and lower it. Be sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray, leaving no gap.

Tag

Tray

Ver. 5.1

361

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3) Secure the bottom of the Tray (both sides) using the 2 Black Screws (M4x6) that were included with the finisher.

(3)

(4) Mount the upper Tray in the same way.

(5) Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor Connector found in the left bottom corner of each Tray.

Sensor Cable

(6) Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit. Starting with the bottom Harness Cover (Shorter). Note: Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole and snap it into place.

Harness Cover

Ver. 5.1

362

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

4. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation (1) Loosen the 2 Screws and remove the SPC Cover. (2) Remove the Toner Waste Container. (Refer to Section 2.2.2. the Service Manual)

(1)

(3)

(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC Board, Connector CN727. (4) Reinstall the SPC Cover and Toner Waste Container. Note: Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated.

(7)

Note: The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for USA and Canada. (5) Open the Front Door. (6) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (7) Remove 3 Screws. (8) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.

(6)

(8)

(9)

(9)

(9) Remove 2 Screws. (10) Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly.

(10)

Ver. 5.1

363

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(11)

(11) Remove 2 Screws. (12) Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly.

(11)

(12)

(13)

(13)

(13) Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2 Screws. (14) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly. (15) Close the Upper Exit Cover.

(18)

(18)

(16) (16)

(17)

(16) Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12) first and tighten them 1/2 way. (17) Place the Latch Plate on top of these Silver Screws (M4 x 12). (18) Install the upper 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12), and then tighten all the 4 screws. Note: If the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) is also being installed, before continuing to the next step, install the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) first. (19) Install the Inlet Guide. (20) Secure it with 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10).

(19) (20)

(20)

Ver. 5.1

364

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(21) Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine as illustrated. (22) Secure it with 3 Screws (M4 x 8).

(22) (21) (22) (23)

(23) Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws.

(24) Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs.

(25) Install the Base Plate. (26) Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws (M4 x 25).

(26) (25)

Ver. 5.1

365

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5. Connecting to the Host Machine (1) Bring the Finisher closer to its Host Machine so that the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher and the Delivery Assembly of the Host Machine match in height; then, connect the two with care. If the connection is correct, the Guide Pin of the Latch Plate will fit, and there will be no gap between the two. If there is a gap either at the front or the rear, adjust the height position of the Finisher. Caution: Be sure to install both Finisher and the Host Machine on a flat floor surface. A difference in height can lead to faulty movement of paper. (2) As illustrated, install the Face Plate Button in the round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher. However, do NOT install it if you are also installing the Punch Unit.

Face Plate Button

(5)

(3) Install the Connecting Plate. (4) Install these 2 Screws (M4 x 8) first. (5) Install these remaining 2 Screws (M4 x 8). Note: Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally on the Floor.

(4)

(5) (3)

(6) Connect the Finisher and its Host Machine with the Interface Cable.

(6)

Ver. 5.1

366

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<Punch Unit is NOT installed> Alignment Lines

6. Adjusting the Height / Slope Caution: The floor of the site can at times cause a difference in height between the Finisher and the Host Machine or cause the Finisher to tilt, requiring adjustment. If this is the case, adjust the difference/slope as follows; if installation of a Punch Unit is planned, see its Installation Procedure. (1) Check the height and the slope of the Finisher and its Host Machine; if adjustment is needed, be sure to correct the height before adjusting the slope. (2) If there is a difference in Height between the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher and the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine: Align the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine. (3) Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters. Note: Make sure the Gaps A and B are the same. (4) Attach the Label as illustrated.

(4) B

<Punch Unit is installed> Alignment Lines

(4) B

(5) Open the Finisher Front Cover, and remove the Screw used to hold the Wrench in place from behind the Front Cover; then, detach the Wrench.

Wrench

Screw

Ver. 5.1

367

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7)

(6) Disconnect the Finisher from its Host Machine. (7) Remove 2 Screws, and open the Lower Front Cover.

(7)

(8)

(8) Remove the Screws and then, detach each Foot Cover.

(8)

(8)

(8)

Adjusting Bolt

(9) To correct the height, loosen the Fixing Screws (Black) on the Front and Rear Casters on the pickup side of the Finisher. (10) To increase the height of the Finisher, turn the Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated; turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.)

Fixing Screws (Black)

Ver. 5.1

368

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Adjusting Bolt

Fixing Screws (Black)

(11) To decrease the height of the Finisher, turn the Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise as illustrated; turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.) (12) To correct any slope, loosen the fixing Screw (Black) on both Front and Rear Casters on the delivery side of the Finisher. (13) To decrease the gap between the Finisher and the Host Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolt clockwise. Turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.) (14) To increase the gap between the Finisher and the Host Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise; turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.) (15) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine, and check to see that the difference in height and the slope are within the indicated tolerances; otherwise, make the adjustments once again. (16) When done, disconnect the Finisher from the Host Machine, and tighten the fixing Screws (Black) on the Casters. (17) To prevent loosening of the Adjusting Bolts during relocation of the Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolts about 90 in the direction of the arrow; be sure not to over-tighten them, as such can lead to displacement. (18) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Adjusting Bolt

90

Ver. 5.1

369

MAR 2005

8.27. Installing the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605)

8.27.1. Contents
Qty. 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 4 2 4 2 1 1 1 Description 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Tray Inlet Guide Latch Plate Harness Cover (Longer) Harness Cover (Shorter) Base Plate Face Plate Button Guide Rail Connecting Plate Exit Roller U Assembly Screw (M4 x 8) Black Screw (M4 x 6) Screw (M4 x 25) Silver Screw (M4 x 12) Silver Screw (M3 x 10) IPC PC Board Label Installation Instructions Part No. See Note 4G1-0772-000 4F1-2122-000 4G1-5204-000 4A1-8442-000 4A1-3703-000 4B1-0933-000 4A1-8441-000 4G1-5202-000 4B1-0934-000 DZHP007141 See Note See Note See Note See Note See Note 4G1-5215-000 DZNK004315 DZSM000569

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

Except for USA and Canada

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual. 3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605), read these entire instructions.

Ver. 5.1

370

MAR 2005

8.27.2. Installation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
3.9" (100mm) 3.9" (100mm)

1. Selecting the Site Make sure that there will be adequate space for the work (i.e., removal of paper). Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the same floor surface as its host machine (i.e., at the same height, slope).

57.6 " (1463 mm)

3.9" (100mm)

83.3 " (2115 mm)

3.9" (100mm)

2. Removing the Packaging Material

(1)

Note: The Machine is protected during shipment with Tapes and Spacers against vibration and shock. When the site has been selected, move the Machine to the appropriate site, and remove all Packaging Materials as illustrated below. Although the Finisher is equipped with Casters, it moves only in a straight line. (1) Take the Accessory Box out of the Package. Caution: Do not remove the 4 Styrofoam Pads attached to the Finisher. The absence of these Pads can cause deformation of the Rail Mount. (2) Without removing the Pads, lift the Finisher, and stand it on the floor. (Be sure to work in a group of two.)

Ver. 5.1

371

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3) Remove the Pads from the Top Cover. (4) Lift the Front Caster slightly, and remove the Pad. Repeat the same procedure and lift the Rear Caster slightly and remove the Pad. Caution: The Finisher is equipped with Casters, and tends to roll easily. Be sure to work in a group of two, and exercise caution not to drop the finisher or getting hurt. Moreover, be sure to pay attention when shifting the Finisher to avoid deforming the Rail Base. (5) Open the Covers and remove all tapes and packing materials. (6) Close the Covers. Caution: The removed Tapes and Packaging Material will be required when transporting the Machine for relocation or repairs; it is a good idea to store them for future use. 3. Removing the Folding Roller Releasing Plate (1) Remove the 4 Screws, and detach the Right Lower Cover.

Tag

(1) Right Lower Cover (1)

Screw

Releasing Plate (Front)

(2) Remove the shipping screw, and detach the releasing plate (front).

Ver. 5.1

372

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Releasing Plate (Rear) Screw

(3) Remove the shipping screw, and detach the releasing plate (rear). Caution: It is a good idea to store the removed Releasing Plate and the shipping screws for future use. (4) Reinstall the Right Lower Cover.

Front Lower Cover

4. Removing the Stitcher Fixing Member (1) Open the Front Lower Cover.

Saddle Stitch Assembly

(2) Pullout the Stitcher Assembly.

Fixing Member

Screw

(3) Remove 1 Screw, and remove the Fixing Member from the Right Side. Caution: It is good idea to store the removed screws and Fixing Member for future use. (4) Slide the Stitcher Assembly back in. (5) Close the Front Lower Cover.

Ver. 5.1

373

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Tray

5. Preparing for the Installation of the Finisher Assembly Caution: Before connecting the Finisher to its Host Machine, mount the Trays and other parts to the Finisher first. (1) Install 2 Trays to the Finisher. Starting with the bottom Tray, and then install the upper Tray next. (2) As shown, fit the bosses on the Tray into the holes in the Horizontal Frames, and lower it. Be sure that the bosses on both sides of the Tray slide into the holes in the Vertical Tray, leaving no gap.

(3) Secure the bottom of the Tray (both sides) using the 2 Black Screws (M4x6) that were included with the finisher.

(3)

(4) Mount the upper Tray in the same way.

Ver. 5.1

374

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Connect the Sensor Cable to the Sensor Connector found in the left bottom corner of each Tray.

Sensor Cable

(6) Mount the Harness Covers to each Tray Unit. Starting with the bottom Harness Cover (Shorter). Note: Insert the bottom Hook into the top hole and snap it into place.

Harness Cover

6. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation (1) Loosen the 2 Screws and remove the SPC Cover. (2) Remove the Toner Waste Container. (Refer to Section 2.2.2. the Service Manual)

(1)

(3)

(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto SPC PC Board, Connector CN727. (4) Reinstall the SPC Cover and Toner Waste Container. Note: Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

375

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7)

Note: The following steps (5)~(15) are not applicable for USA and Canada. (5) Open the Front Door. (6) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (7) Remove 3 Screws. (8) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.

(6)

(8)

(9)

(9)

(9) Remove 2 Screws. (10) Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly.

(10)

(11)

(11) Remove 2 Screws. (12) Remove the Exit Roller E Assembly.

(11)

(12)

(13)

(13)

(13) Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2 Screws. (14) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly. (15) Close the Upper Exit Cover.

Ver. 5.1

376

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(18)

(18)

(16) (16)

(17)

(16) Insert the bottom 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12) first and tighten them 1/2 way. (17) Place the Latch Plate on top of these Silver Screws (M4 x 12). (18) Install the upper 2 Silver Screws (M4 x 12), and then tighten all the 4 screws. Note: If the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) is also being installed, before continuing to the next step, install the Punch Unit (DA-SP31) first. (19) Install the Inlet Guide. (20) Secure it with 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10).

(19) (20)

(20)

(21) Install the Guide Rail to the back of the machine as illustrated. (22) Secure it with 3 Screws (M4 x 8).

(22) (21) (22) (23)

(23) Remove 2 Black Shipping Screws.

Ver. 5.1

377

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(24) Break off the bottom 2 Protective Tabs.

(25) Install the Base Plate. (26) Secure the Base Plate with 2 Screws (M4 x 25).

(26) (25)

7. Connecting to the Host Machine (1) Bring the Finisher closer to its Host Machine so that the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher and the Delivery Assembly of the Host Machine match in height; then, connect the two with care. If the connection is correct, the Guide Pin of the Latch Plate will fit, and there will be no gap between the two. If there is a gap either at the front or the rear, adjust the height position of the Finisher. Caution: Be sure to install both Finisher and the Host Machine on a flat floor surface. A difference in height can lead to faulty movement of paper. (2) As illustrated, install the Face Plate Button in the round hole of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher. However, do NOT install it if you are also installing the Punch Unit.

Face Plate Button

Ver. 5.1

378

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5)

(3) Install the Connecting Plate. (4) Install these 2 Screws (M4 x 8) first. (5) Install these remaining 2 Screws (M4 x 8). Note: Make sure that the Guide Rail is kept horizontally on the Floor.

(4)

(5) (3)

(6) Connect the Finisher and its Host Machine with the Interface Cable.

(6)

Ver. 5.1

379

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

<Punch Unit is NOT installed> Alignment Lines

8. Adjusting the Height / Slope Caution: The floor of the site can at times cause a difference in height between the Finisher and the Host Machine or cause the Finisher to tilt, requiring adjustment. If this is the case, adjust the difference/slope as follows; if installation of a Punch Unit is planned, see its Installation Procedure. (1) Check the height and the slope of the Finisher and its Host Machine; if adjustment is needed, be sure to correct the height before adjusting the slope. (2) If there is a difference in Height between the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher and the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine: Align the upper surface of the Right Guide Assembly of the Finisher to the Alignment Lines on the Left Platen Cover of the Host Machine. (3) Adjust the Finisher level with 4 Adjusters. Note: Make sure the Gaps A and B are the same. (4) Attach the Label as illustrated.

(4) B

<Punch Unit is installed> Alignment Lines

(4) B

(5) Open the Finisher Front Cover, and remove the Screw used to hold the Wrench in place from behind the Front Cover; then, detach the Wrench.

Wrench

Screw

Ver. 5.1

380

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(6) Disconnect the Finisher from its Host Machine and remove the Screws; then, detach each Foot Cover.
(6)

(6) (6)

(7) Remove 2 Screws, and remove the Lower Rear Cover.

(7) (7)

(8) Open the Lower Front Cover.

(8)

Adjusting Bolt

(9) To correct the height, loosen the Fixing Screws (Black) on the Front and Rear Casters on the pickup side of the Finisher. (10) To increase the height of the Finisher, turn the Adjusting Bolt clockwise as illustrated; turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.)

Fixing Screws (Black)

Ver. 5.1

381

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Adjusting Bolt

Fixing Screws (Black)

(11) To decrease the height of the Finisher, turn the Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise as illustrated; turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.) (12) To correct any slope, loosen the fixing Screw (Black) on both Front and Rear Casters on the delivery side of the Finisher. (13) To decrease the gap between the Finisher and the Host Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolt clockwise. Turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.) (14) To increase the gap between the Finisher and the Host Machine, turn the Adjusting Bolt counter-clockwise; turn the Adjusting Bolt as required. (Perform this for both Front and Rear Casters.) (15) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine, and check to see that the difference in height and the slope are within the indicated tolerances; otherwise, make the adjustments once again. (16) When done, disconnect the Finisher from the Host Machine, and tighten the fixing Screws (Black) on the Casters. (17) To prevent loosening of the adjusting bolts during relocation of the machine, turn the adjusting bolts about 90 in the direction of the arrow; be sure not to over-tighten them, as such can lead to displacement. (18) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Adjusting Bolt

90

9. Adjusting the Position for Saddle Stitcher After installing the Finisher, perform the Saddle Stitcher Operation for each paper size. If paper is not stitched in the middle, follow the procedure below. (1) Adjust the Fold position with the User preset mode. (Refer to the Operating Instructions for copier.) (2) Perform the Saddle Stitcher Operation once again for each paper size. Make sure that the paper is stitched in the middle. If not, repeat the procedures again.

Ver. 5.1

382

MAR 2005

8.28. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP31)

8.28.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 Description Punch Unit Punch Lower Cover Punch Relay Harness Upper Cover Guide Guide Plate (Long) Jam Removal Instructions Label Shoulder Screw (Silver) Stepped Mounting Screw (Silver) Black Screw (M4 x 6) Silver Screw (M4 x 12) Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note 4A1-8409-000 FF3-4067-000 4A1-8408-000 4B1-0949-000 FB5-5924-000 See Note See Note See Note See Note DZSM000567

Remarks

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.28.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation

(1)

(1) Remove the bottom 3 Screws, and remove Guide Plate (Short).

Guide Plate (Short)

Ver. 5.1

383

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(2)

(2) Install the Guide Plate (Long) and secure it with 3 Screws.

Guide Plate (Long)

Removing the Punch Fixing Plate

Punch Fixing Plate

(1) Remove the 2 Screws from the Punch Fixing Plates found on the Punch Unit; then, detach the Punch Fixing Plates (both front and rear). Note: It is a good idea to store the removed Punch Fixing Plate and shipping Screws for future use.

(1)

Connecting to the Finisher (1) Make sure that the copier is unplugged and Finisher is disconnected. (2) Install the Stepped Mounting Screws as illustrated.

Stepped Mounting Screws

Finisher Side Connector Cover 2 Connector Cover 1

(3) Remove the 4 Screws as illustrated, and detach the Connector Cover 1 and Connector Cover 2.

(3)

(3)

Ver. 5.1

384

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Driver PCB

J3

J4 Punch Relay Harness

(4) Securely connect one end of the Punch Relay Harness to J3 and J4 of the Punch Driver PC Board. Note: Loose connections can result in malfunction. If the Punch Unit malfunctions after installation, try disconnecting and then re-connecting the Connector.

(5) Hook the Punch Unit on the Mounting Screw which was installed in step (2).

(6) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher in place using Shoulder Screws as illustrated.

Shoulder Screws

Punch Lower Cover

(7) Secure the Punch Lower Cover to the Finisher as illustrated with 1 Silver Screw (M4 x 12) at the top and 1 Black Screw (M4 x 6) at the bottom.

(7) Silver M4 x 12 (7) Black M4 x 6

Ver. 5.1

385

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

J21

J23

(8) Firmly connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness to Connector J21 and J23 on the Finisher Controller PC Board. Note: Loose connections can result in malfunction. If the Punch Unit malfunctions after installation, try disconnecting and re-connecting the Connector.

Finisher Controller PCB

Punch Relay Harness

Connector Cover 1

(9) Install the Connector Cover 1 you removed previously to the Rear Cover of the Finisher. Note: The Connector Cover 2 removed from the Rear Cover of the Finisher will no longer be needed when the Punch Unit is installed; nevertheless, it may be a good idea to store it for future use. 1. Secure the Connector Cover 1 with 2 Screws. 2. Open the Punch Unit. (10) Jam Removal Instructions Label has already been installed on the Punch Unit. If other language is required, please attach the required language sticker on it.

(9) Upper Cover

Jam Removal Instructions Label

Upper Cover

Upper Cover Guide (11)

(11) Install the Upper Cover Grip as illustrated with 1 Silver Screw (M4 x 12). Note: If the Face Plate Button was installed to the Finisher's Right Guide, the Guide Pin of the Upper Cover Guide will not slide into the Right Guide when the Upper Cover is closed. Be sure to remove the Face Plate Button if it was installed. (12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Note: See the Finisher's Installation Instructions for adjusting the height. If the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS600) or the 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS605) is being installed at the same time as the Punch Unit and you were asked to follow these instructions first before continuing with the Finisher installation. Return to the step of the Finisher installation where you stopped and proceed installing the Finisher.

Ver. 5.1

386

MAR 2005

8.29. Installing the 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330)

8.29.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 6 1 Description 2 Bin Finisher Upper Tray Guide Bar Lower Tray Stand Front Cover Rear Cover Front Magnet Catch Plate Rear Magnet Catch Plate Switch Bracket Locking Clamp Exit Roller U Assembly Screw (M4 x 8) Screw (M4 x 10) Screw (M4 x 30) Screw (M3 x 10) Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note GP01-3415 GH03-3103 GP01-3403 DZJA001230 DZJE001064 DZJE001065 DZJA001226 DZJA001227 DZJA001225 GS01-6503 DZHP007718 See Note See Note See Note See Note DZSM000570

Remarks Assembled

Except for USA and Canada

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual. 3. Before you begin the installation of your 2 Bin Finisher (DA-FS330), read these entire instructions.

8.29.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
3.9 in (100 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

1. Selecting the Installation Site Make sure that there will be adequate space for the work (i.e. removal of paper, etc.). Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the same floor surface as its host machine (i.e. at the same height, slope, etc.).

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

63.0 in (1600 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

Ver. 5.1

387

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2. Unpacking Note: This finisher is protected with packing materials such as tapes and spacers against vibration and shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to remove them before using the finisher. Caution: The finisher weights approximately 35 lb (16 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the finisher. Move the finisher next to the left side of the machine and remove the packing materials using the following procedure. (1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of the package. (2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher, Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing materials. Note: The removed tapes and packing materials will be needed when transporting the finisher for relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them away for future use.
(3)

3. Preparing the Host Machine for Installation Note: For USA and Canada, skip to step (15). (1) Open the Front Door. (2) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (3) Remove 3 Screws. (4) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.

(2)

(4)
(5) (5)

If the Exit Guide 3 Assembly has the Rollers (7), follow steps (5) ~ (7) to remove. [If not, skip to step (8)] (5) Remove 2 Stopper Plates. (6) Remove 2 Shafts. (7) Remove 2 Rollers.

(7)

(6) (6) (7)

Ver. 5.1

388

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8)

(8)

(8) Remove 2 Screws. (9) Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly.

(9)

(10)

(10) Remove 2 Screws. (11) Remove and replace the Exit Roller E Assembly with the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(10)

(11)

(12)

(12)

(12) Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2 Screws. (13) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly. (14) Close the Upper Exit Cover.

(18) (20) (15) (19) (17) (16)

(15) Place the Front Magnet Catch Plate. (16) Insert the lower 1 Screw (M3 x 10) and tighten it 1/2 way. (17) Install the upper 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and then tighten both screws. (18) Place the Rear Magnet Catch Plate. (19) Insert the lower 1 Screw (M3 x 10) and tighten it 1/2 way. (20) Install the upper 1 Screw (M3 x 10), and then tighten both screws.

Ver. 5.1

389

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(21) Secure the Switch Bracket with 2 Screws (M3 x 10). Note: Adjustment of the Bracket position is performed at the end of the installation (See step 8 - 3).

(21)

(23)

(22) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips type Screw Driver as illustrated. (23) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper.

(22)

4. Attaching to the Host Machine Caution: Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can result in improper paper feed. (1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting holes on the side panel of the Host Machine. (2) Secure the Stand with 2 Screws (M4 x 30). (3) Slide the Rails of the Stand to the left as illustrated. (4) Place the Finisher on the Rails.
Finisher

(3)

(1) (2) (3) (2)

Rail

Ver. 5.1

390

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Hook the Bosses of the Finisher to the Rails as illustrated and secure the Finisher with 2 Screws (one on each side) (M4 x 8).
Finisher

(6) Install the Front and Rear Covers as illustrated. (7) Secure the Covers with 2 Screws (M4 x 10).
(7) (6)

(7)

(6) Upper Tray

(8) Install the Upper and Lower Trays.

Finisher

Lower Tray

(11) (10)

(9) Install the Locking Clamp. (10) Place the Interface Cable into the Locking Clamp and connect it to the Host Machine. (11) Slide the Finisher towards the Host Machine. Note: Ensure that the Magnet Catch Plates are aligned with the Magnets of the Finisher.

(9)

Ver. 5.1

391

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

5. Height and Perpendicular Position Adjustment (1) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the perpendicular position of the Finisher to the machine. (Gaps A and B should be identical) (2) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

A B

6. Punch Hole Position Adjustment Before proceeding with this adjustment, make sure that the Copiers side to side registration is adjusted properly. (1) Loosen the 2 Screws of the Finisher. (2) Adjust it to the front or rear accordingly. Note: Verify that the punch holes are center aligned by folding a test copy in half. If the holes are not center aligned, repeat the steps above. (3) Loosen 2 Screws and adjust the Switch Bracket position so that it center aligns into the rear cutout (between A and B).

(1) (2)

(3)

Ver. 5.1

392

MAR 2005

8.30. Installing the 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A)

8.30.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 6 4 2 1 2 1 1 Description 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher Stapler Delivery Tray Stand Exit Roller U Assembly Exit Roller Gear 1 (White) E-Ring Latch Plate Screw (M4 x 7) Silver Screw (M3 x 10) Silver Screw (M4 x 30) IPC PC Board Spacer Label Installation Instructions Part No. See Note PF4117K226A PF4117K225A PF4117K604A DZHP007718 FFPMF1069 See Note PF4117K101A See Note See Note See Note PF4117P003 PF4117K254 DZNK004315 DZSM000759

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

Except for USA and Canada Except for USA and Canada Used for DP-45xx

Used for DP-45xx This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual. 3. Before you begin the installation of your 1 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher (DA-FS355A), read these entire instructions.

8.30.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
3.9 in (100 mm) 3.9 in (100 mm)

1. Selecting the Installation Site Make sure that there will be adequate space for the work (i.e. removal of paper, etc.). Make sure also that the Finisher will be placed on the same floor surface as its host machine (i.e. at the same height, slope, etc.).

57.6 in (1463 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

74.2 in (1885 mm)

3.9 in (100 mm)

Ver. 5.1

393

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2. Unpacking Note: This finisher is protected with packing materials such as tapes and spacers against vibration and shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to remove them before using the finisher. Caution: The finisher weights approximately 60 lb (27 kg). To prevent injuries, use the appropriate number of personnel and the proper equipment to lift or move the finisher. Move the finisher next to the left side of the machine and remove the packing materials using the following procedure. (1) Take the Stapler, Finisher, and accessories out of the package. (2) Remove the tapes securing the Stapler, Finisher, Accessory Cover, etc. along with the packing materials. Note: The removed tapes and packing materials will be needed when transporting the finisher for relocation or repair; it is a good idea to store them away for future use. 3. Preparing the Host Machine for Finisher Installation (1) Loosen the 2 Screws and remove the SPC Cover. (2) Remove the Toner Waste Container. (Refer to Section 2.2.2. in the Service Manual)

(1) (3)

(3) Install the Finisher IPC PC Board onto the SPC PC Board, connector CN727. (4) Reinstall the SPC Cover and the Toner Waste Container. Note: Gently and securely insert the IPC PC Board as illustrated.

Ver. 5.1

394

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) (6)

Note: For DP-35xx, skip to step (21). For DP-45xx, follow the Steps below. (5) Open the Front Cover. (6) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side.

(8)

(7) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (8) Push the Release Lever down in order to free the Exit Guide 7.

(7)

(9)

(9) Remove 2 Screws. (10) Remove the Fuser Cover.

(9) (10)

(11)

(11) Disconnect the 4 Harnesses. (12) Remove 1 Screw. (13) Remove the Fuser Unit.

(13) (11) (12)

Ver. 5.1

395

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fuser Unit (Front View)

(14) Loosen 1 Screw as illustrated. (15) Install the Spacer. (16) Secure 1 Screw loosened in the step (14).

(14) (16) (15)

Fuser Unit (Rear View)

(17) (19)

(17) Loosen 1 Screw as illustrated. (18) Install the Spacer. (19) Secure 1 Screw loosened in the step (17). (20) Reinstall the Fuser Unit and all remaining parts.

(18)

(23)

Note: For USA and Canada, skip to step (36). (21) Open the Front Cover. (22) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (23) Remove 3 Screws. (24) Remove the Exit Guide 3 Assembly.

(22)

(24)
(25) (25)

If the Exit Guide 3 Assembly has the Rollers (27), follow steps (25) ~ (27) to remove. [If not, skip to step (28)] (25) Remove 2 Stopper Plates. (26) Remove 2 Shafts. (27) Remove 2 Rollers.

(27)

(26) (26) (27)

Ver. 5.1

396

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(28)

(28)

(28) Remove 2 Screws. (29) Remove the Exit Guide 1 Assembly.

(29)

(30)

(30) Remove 2 Screws. (31) Remove and replace the Exit Roller E Assembly with the Exit Roller U Assembly.
(30)

(31)

(30)

Note: For DP-35xx, skip to step (34). For DP-45xx, follow the Steps below. (32) Remove the E-Ring and Exit Roller Gear 1 (Black). (33) Install the Exit Roller Gear 1 (White) and E-Ring included with this kit.

(29)

(34)

(34)

(34) Secure the Exit Roller U Assembly with 2 Screws. (35) Reinstall the Exit Guide 1 Assembly and Exit Guide 3 Assembly. (36) Close the Upper Exit Cover.

Ver. 5.1

397

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(39)

(37)

(38)

(39) (37)

(37) Insert the lower 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10) first into the 3rd Holes from top and tighten them 1/2 way. (38) Place the Latch Plate on top of these Silver Screws (M3 x 10). (39) Install the upper 2 Silver Screws (M3 x 10), and then tighten all 4 Screws. Note: Before connecting the Finisher to its Host Machine, be sure to attach the Latch Plate to the Host Machine. (40) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Phillips type Screw Driver as illustrated. (41) Remove the 2 Protective Tabs using a Nipper.

(*) (41)

(40)

4. Attaching to the Host Machine Caution: Be sure install both the Finisher and Host Machine on a level floor. A stepped or slanted floor can result in improper paper feed. (1) Fit the hooks of the Stand into the mounting holes on the side panel of the Host Machine, then secure the Stand with Silver Screws (M4 x 30). (2) Slide the Slider of the Stand outward, loosen the Screws securing the Bracket, then secure the Slider.

(1)

Slider

Bracket

Screw

Ver. 5.1

398

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher

(3) Place the Finisher on the Slider of the Stand, and loosely secure it with 2 Screws (M4 x 6).

Slider

Screws

Finisher No Gap

Caution: When mounting the Finisher in place, be sure to insert the lower tabs of the Finisher into the holes on top of the Slider. Ensure that there is no gap between the Finisher and the Stand. The gap would indicate the Finisher is overlapping. Remove and mount the Finisher correctly.

Stand

Finisher

(4) Align the positioning lines of the Finisher and the Stand by moving the Finisher back and forth, and tighten 2 Screws when they are aligned.

Screws

Positioning Line

Ver. 5.1

399

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher

(5) Place the Bracket in its original position, then secure it with Screws. Slide the Finisher toward the Host Machine and connect it to the Host Machine. (6) Attach the Label as illustrated.

(6) Bracket

Screw

Finisher

(7) Attach the Delivery Tray with Screws (M4 x 6) as illustrated.

Screws Delivery Tray Screws Front Cover

(8) Open the Front Cover of the Finisher, then insert the Stapler along the Guide Rails.

Stapler

(9) Close the Front Cover of the Finisher. (10) Connect the Finisher to the Host Machine with the Interface Cable. Caution: Before connecting the Interface Cable, make sure to turn OFF the Host Machine and unplug the AC Power Cord from the wall outlet to avoid shock hazards.

(10)

Ver. 5.1

400

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Adjuster Adjuster

(11) Turn the Adjusters to adjust the height or the perpendicular position of the Finisher to the machine. (Gaps A and B should be identical). (12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

A B

Ver. 5.1

401

MAR 2005

8.31. Installing the Punch Unit (DA-SP41)

8.31.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Punch Unit Punch Relay Harness (Orange) Punch Relay Harness (Violet) Jam Removal Label Punch Dust Label Screw (M4 x 6) Installation Instructions

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Part No. See Note YA1020K374B YA1020K375A YA1020P828A YA1020P208A See Note DZSM000572

Remarks

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.31.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. 1. Removing the Packing Material Note: This machine is protected with packing material such as tape and spacers against vibration and shocks caused during transportation. Be sure to remove them before using the machine. (1) Take the Punch Unit and accessories out of the package. (2) Remove the tape securing the Covers and Front Door.
Front Door Screw

2. Making Preparations for Installing the Finisher Side (1) Turn off the Host Machine and disconnect the Interface Cable of the Finisher from the Host Machine. (2) Release the Latch of the Finisher, and move the Finisher outward from the host machine. (3) Open the Front Door. Holding the tab with your fingers, remove the Jam Clear Dial. (4) Remove the 2 Screws.

Jam Release Dial Tab

Screw

Ver. 5.1

402

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Latch Release Lever

Front Cover

(5) Raise the lugs under the Latch Release Lever and remove the Latch Release Lever. (6) Remove the 3 Screws, open the Jam Access Door and detach the Front Cover. (7) Close the Jam Access Door.

Screws Jam Access Cover

Screw

(8) Remove the 2 Screws on the paper supply side of the Finisher.

Rear Cover

Screws

(9) Remove one screw on the paper ejection side of the Finisher to detach the Rear Cover.

Rear Cover

Screw

Ver. 5.1

403

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Upper-Right Cover Assembly

(10) Remove the 2 Screws at the front of the Finisher.

Screws

Upper-Right Cover

(11) Remove the 2 Screws on the back of the Finisher to detach the Upper-Right Cover Assembly.

Screws

Upper-Right Cover

3. Attaching to the Finisher (1) Open the lugs of the removed Upper-Right Cover Assembly outward to remove the UpperRight Cover.

Lug

Ver. 5.1

404

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(2) Place the Punch Unit on the paper supply section of the Finisher as shown below.
Punch Base Cover

Latch

Positioning Pin

(3) Secure the Punch Unit to the Finisher with the 2 Original Screws (White, M4 X 6) and 1 Enclosed Screw (Screw with Threaded Washer Held, M4 x 6).

Screw

Screw with Threaded Star Washer Screw

Ver. 5.1

405

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Upper-Right Cover

(4) Open the Upper Cover, fit the lugs of the UpperRight Cover in the square holes in the Punch Unit to attach the Upper-Right Cover to the Punch Unit. (5) Close the Upper Cover.
Punch Unit

Upper Cover

Screws

(6) Secure the Upper-Right Cover to the Finisher with the Original 2 Screws (White, M4 x 6).

Upper-Right Cover

Upper-Right Cover

(7) Paste the jam removal instruction label written in your language in the Label Frame on the UpperRight Cover.

Jam Access Label

Punch Dust Label

Ver. 5.1

406

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Controller Circuit Board

(8) Connect one end of the Punch Relay Harness (Orange) to J1004 on the Punch Controller Circuit Board and connect one end of the Punch Relay Harness (Violet) to J1003 on same circuit board.

J1003 Punch Relay Harness (Violet)

J1004 Punch Relay Harness (Orange)

Punch Relay Harness (Orange)

(9) Connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness (Orange) to CN14 on the Finisher Controller Circuit Board and connect the other end of the Punch Relay Harness (Violet) to CN12 on the same Circuit Board.
CN14

CN12

Punch Relay Harness (Violet) Finisher Controller Circuit Board

Ver. 5.1

407

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(10) Place the Punch Relay Harnesses into a Harness Clamps and Harness Guides.

Punch Relay Harness (Violet) Punch Relay Harness (Orange) Harness Clamp

Finisher Controller Circuit Board

Harness Guide

(11) Attach the Front Cover, Latch Release Lever, Jam Clear Dial, and Rear Cover. Note: When attaching the Front Cover, attach it as the Side Guide is set inside the Front Cover. See the figure left. If the Front Cover is attached with the Side Guide being set outside, up and down operation of Ejection Tray may malfunction.

Side Guide Front Cover

(12) Loosen the 2 Screws securing the Finisher and Finisher Frame.

Screws

Ver. 5.1

408

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher

Host Machine

Latch Plate

(13) Slowly move the Finisher close to the Host Machine and adjust the Finisher back and forth so that the notch of the Latch Plate aligns with the protrusion of the Punch Base Cover. (14) Attach the Finisher to the Host Machine and connect the Interface Cable of the Finisher to the Host Machine. (15) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Align Punch Base Cover

Ver. 5.1

409

MAR 2005

8.32. Installing the Power Supply for Finisher (DA-PW600)

8.32.1. Contents
Qty. 1 1 1 1 Description Power Supply for Finisher LVSC Harness Screw Installation Instructions Part No. See Note DZFP001286 XTB3+6F DZSM000561

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

This document

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.32.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Open the Front Cover. (2) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side.

(3) Pull out 1st Paper Tray. (4) Remove 2 Screws. (5) Remove the LVPS Cover.

(5)

(4)

(3)

(6) Remove the LVCS Harness.

(6)

Ver. 5.1

410

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9)

(7)

(8) (11)

(7) Release the 2 Harnesses from the Harness Clamp. Secure the 2 Harnesses without turn. (8) Insert the Power Supply for Finisher to the Main Machine. (9) Connect 2 Harnesses to CN65 and CN66 on the Power Supply for Finisher. (10) Disconnect the Dummy Connector. (11) Connect the LVSC Harness and the LVPS Harness.

(10)

(13)

(12)

(12) Secure the Power Supply for Finisher with 1 Screw. (13) Secure the Harness to the Harness Clamp. (14) Reinstall the LVPS Cover. (15) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Ver. 5.1

411

MAR 2005

8.33. Installing the Key Counter Harness Kit (DZTY000128)

8.33.1. Contents
Note: The Key Counter is sold separately. Qty. 1 1 2 1 Description Harness, KCTU Cover, Connector Screw (M4 x 10) Installation Instructions Part No. DZFP001387 DZMC000783 See Note DZSM000609

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

This document

8.33.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation. (1) Remove 9 Silver Screws. (2) Remove the Upper Rear Cover.

(3) Open the Right Cover. (4) Remove 3 Silver Screws. (5) Remove the Right Rear Cover.
(3)

(4)

(6)

(6) Route the KCTU Harness through the hole in the Frame as illustrated. (7) Secure the KCTU Harness to the 2 Harness Clamps.

(7)

Ver. 5.1

412

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) Secure the KCTU Harness to the 4 Harness Clamps.

(9) Connect the KCTU Harness to CN765 on the DRV PC Board.

(9)

(10)

(10) Remove the Protective Tab on the Right Rear Cover. (11) Reinstall the Right Rear Cover and Upper Rear Cover. (12) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Note: As a safety measure, if the Key Counter is not being installed, cover up the aperture with the Connector Cover and secure it with 2 Screws.

Note: After the Key Counter installation, ensure that the harness and the connector are not exposed.

Ver. 5.1

413

MAR 2005

8.34. Installing the Dehumidifier Heater (DZTQ000041)

8.34.1. Contents
Qty. 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 10 1 Description Heater Heater Assembly Heater Switch Assembly Connector Holder Bracket RLB PC Board RLB Harness DHT Harness DF2 Harness Heater SW Label Screw Installation Instructions Part No. FFPXK43H00 DZHP008182 DZHP008195 DZJE001048 DZEC102536 DZFP001118 DZFP001188 DZFP001393 DZNK004269 XTB3+6F DZSM000563

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(Supplied as a Service Part)

Remarks

4 Connectors 3 Connectors (Long) 3 Connectors (Short)

Note: 1. The part number may differ depending on the Destination. 2. Refer to the Parts List in the Parts Manual.

8.34.2. Installation
CAUTION! Turn the Power Switch on the Left Side and the Main Power Switch on the Back of the machine to the OFF position, and then unplug the AC Power Cord before beginning installation.
(3) (2) (5) (2) (5) (5) (7) (12) (10) (13) (7) (6) (4)

(1) Open the ADF Unit. (2) Remove 2 Screws. (3) Remove the Left Platen Cover. (4) Remove the Glass Assembly. (5) Remove 3 Screws. (6) Remove the Left Side Rear Cover. (7) Remove 3 Screws. (8) Open the Front Cover. (9) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (10) Remove the Left Side Front Cover. (11) Swing the Hopper Unit to the right side. (12) Remove 2 Screws. (13) Remove the Fuser Cover.

Ver. 5.1

414

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(17) (18)

(14) Pull out the 1st Paper Tray. (15) Remove 2 Screws. (16) Remove the LVPS Cover. (17) Turn the Lifting Lever counter-clockwise. (18) Pull the ADU Unit out.

(16)

(15)

(14)

(20)

(19) Remove 2 Screws. (20) Disconnect the Cooling Fan 1 Harness and remove the Interlock Cover. (21) Disconnect the HT Harness.

(19) (21)

(24) (23) (22)

(22)

(22) Remove 7 Screws. (23) Remove the Lower Control Panel Cover. (24) Turn the Control Panel Unit upside down.

(22)

(25)

(25)

(25) Secure the DF2 Harness to the existing 2 Harness Clamps. Note: Route the right side of the harness over the center bracket as illustrated. (26) Connect the DF2 Harness to DHT Harness.

(26)

Ver. 5.1

415

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(27) Insert the right side of the DF2 Harness into the Connector Holder Bracket. (28) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with 1 Screw.
(28) (27)

(Right Side)

(29) (31)

(29) Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness. (30) Carefully move the Scanner towards the center to give you access to the screw hole. (31) Secure the Heater with 1 Screw.

(33) (32)

(32) Insert the left side of the DF2 Harness into the Connector Holder Bracket. Note: Observe the direction of the bracket in the illustration, before inserting the connector. (33) Secure the Connector Holder Bracket with 1 Screw.

(Left Side)

(34) (36) (35)

(34) Connect the Heater to DF2 Harness. (35) Secure the Heater with 1 Screw. (36) Secure the Harness with 1 Harness Clamp.

Ver. 5.1

416

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(37)

(37) Secure the DF2 Harness with 4 Harness Clamps.

(38)

(38) Secure the DHT Harness with 5 Harness Clamps.

(39) Secure the DHT Harness with 4 Harness Clamps. (40) Route the DHT Harness through the hole in the frame as illustrated.

(39) (40)

(41) (42) (43) (44)

(41) Open the Lower Exit Cover. (42) Remove 1 Screw. (43) Remove 1 Snap Ring. (44) Remove the Lower Exit Cover.

Ver. 5.1

417

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(45) Remove 2 Screws. (46) Remove the Exit Cover 3.

(46)

(45)

(48)

<If the System Console option is installed, perform steps (45) ~ (46) below> (47) Remove 3 Screws. (48) Remove the Left Cover.

(47)

(50)
Inverting Paper Sensor

(49)

(49) Remove 4 Screws. (50) Open the Upper Exit Cover. (51) Remove the Paper Exit Assembly. Note: Exercise care not to damage the Inverting Paper Sensor. (52) Close the Upper Exit Cover.
(49) (51)

(53) Remove 5 Screws. (54) Remove the Exit Guide.

(54)

(53) (53)

(55) Remove 2 Screws. (56) Partially slide out the EL Bracket Assembly.

(56) (55)

Ver. 5.1

418

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(59)

(60) (57) (58)

(57) Install the RLB PC Board. (58) Secure the RLB PC Board with 4 Screws. (59) Connect the RLB Harness to the RLB PC Board (CN171 and CN172). (60) Connect the DHT Harness to the RLB PC Board (CN173).

(60) (58)

(61) Slide the EL Bracket Assembly into the machine. (62) Secure the EL Bracket Assembly with 2 Screws.

(61) (62)

(64)

(63)

(63) Secure the RLB Harness with 4 Harness Clamps. (64) Route the RLB Harness through the hole in the frame as illustrated.

(65) Remove 6 Screws. (66) Remove the Lower Rear Cover.

(65)

<If the System Console option is installed, perform steps (61) ~ (62) below> (67) Remove 2 Screws. (68) Remove the Rear Cover of System Console.

(66) (65) (68) (67)

Ver. 5.1

419

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(70)

(69) Remove 3 Screws. (70) Remove the NFL PC Board Assembly.

(69)

(69)

(71) Connect the RLB Harness to CN134 on NFL PC Board.

Used for Japanese models only.

(71)

(72)

(72) With the 1st Paper Tray pulled out, install the Heater Assembly as illustrated. (73) Secure the Heater Assembly with 1 Screw. (74) Connect the Heater Assembly to DHT Harness.

(73) (74)

(75) Connect the Harness to Heater Switch Assembly.

(75)

Ver. 5.1

420

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(78)

(76) Install the Heater Switch Assembly. (77) Secure the Heater Switch Assembly with 1 Screw. (78) Secure the Harness with 2 Harness Clamps.

(78)

(76)

(77)

(79)

(81) (80)

(79) Remove 1 Screw. (80) Remove the Blind Plate. (81) Affix the Heater SW Label as illustrated. (82) Proceed with the installation of other options. If finished, reassemble the machine and reinstall all Covers. (83) Plug the AC Power Cord into the wall outlet and turn the Main Power Switch on the Back and the Power Switch on the Left Side of the machine to the ON position.

Ver. 5.1

421

MAR 2005

8.35. Replacing the OPC Drum

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Cover. (2) Move the Hopper Unit.

(3) Turn the Developer Unit Lever clockwise (90). (4) Turn the ADU Lever counter-clockwise (90).

(5) Loosen 1 Screw. (6) Remove the Drum Unit

Note: When handling the Drum Unit, hold the Handle.

Ver. 5.1

422

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7) Remove 1 Screw. Remove the Bias Charge Unit.

(8) Release 2 Latch Hooks and remove the Frame Cover. Note: When reinstalling, make sure that 2 Hooks are fixed properly.

(9) Remove the 4 Screws. (10) Remove the Front Fixation Plate.

(11) Turn the Front Support Metal counter-clockwise and remove it. Caution: The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

Ver. 5.1

423

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Remove the 4 Screws. (13) Remove the Rear Fixation Plate.

(14) Turn the Rear Support Metal clockwise and remove it.

(15) Remove the OPC Drum. (16) Install New OPC Drum by reverse steps. Caution: Exercise caution not to scratch the surface of the OPC Drum (Green), and not to touch it with bare hands. Caution: The OPC Drum is sensitive to light. To prevent optical exposure problems, do not expose the OPC Drum to direct sunlight or bright light (even if it is a 1000-Lux fluorescent lamp).

Ver. 5.1

424

MAR 2005

9 General Network Information

9.1.
9.1.1.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Network Protocol
OSI Reference Mode

Having a model in mind helps you understand how the pieces of the network puzzle fit together. The most commonly used model is the Open System Interconnection (OSI) reference model. The OSI model, first released in 1984 by the International Standards Organization (ISO), provides a useful structure for defining and describing the various processes underlying networking communications. The OSI model organizes communication protocols into seven layers. Layer 1, the Physical (Hardware) layer, consists of protocols that deal with how data is transferred across the transmission media. At the opposite end, Layer 7, the Application layer, interfaces the network services with the applications (software) in use on the computer. The five layers in between, Data Link, Network, Transport, Session and Presentation - perform intermediate communication tasks. In essence the OSI model is a framework that describes how a function from one computer is transmitted to another computer on the network.

Layer

Name

Function

Protocol SMB SMTP FTP DNS HTTP Telnet etc...

TDI

Application

Presentation
NetBIOS, Windows, Sockets, etc...

Session

Transport

TCP, UDP

Network

IP, IPX, etc...

TCP/IP IPX/SPX Net BEUI Apple Talk IP Address etc... etc... Ethernet Token Ring FDDI ATM etc... RS-232C, X21...

ODI Driver, NDIS Driver

Datalink

PPP...
NIC SW Hub Repeater Hub

Router

MAC Address

Physical

OSI Reference Model and Network Terms

Ver. 5.1

425

MAR 2005

9.1.2.

Protocol

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

One reason for the popularity of TCP/IP is that no one vendor owns it, unlike the IPX/SPX, DNA, SNA or Apple Talk protocol suites, all of which are controlled by specific companies. TCP/IP evolved in response to input from a wide variety of industry sources. Consequently, it is the most open of the protocol suites and is supported by the widest variety of vendors. One huge advantage of using TCP/IP is that, it is required for communication over the Internet, thus the Internet can be used as a communication backbone. TCP/IP was originally designed by ARPANET (Advanced Research Project Agency) in 1969 for the UNIX operating system. In early 1980, UNIX 4.2 BSD version was released. For more detailed information, an RFC (Request for Comment) document is available from the IETF (Internet Engineering Task Force) on the Internet at http://www.ietf.org/. The Internet protocols do no map cleanly to the OSI reference model. The model for the Internet protocol suite has four layers. From the illustration below, you can see the approximate relationship of the layers.

Layer 7 6 5 4

OSI Reference Model TCP/IP Base Function Application This layer embraces functions of the OSI Application Session, Presentation and Application Presentation layers. Protocols at this layer provide Session network services. Compares to OSI Transport layer. Transport Transport Enables peer communication between hosts on the internetwork. Network Internet Corresponds roughly to the OSI Network layer. Protocols move data between devices on networks. Corresponds to the bottom two layers of Data Link Network the OSI model. This correspondence Interface enables the TCP/IP protocols to coexist with existing Data Link and Physical layer Physical standards. This layer is concerned with all aspects of transmitting and receiving data on the network. Comparison of the TCP/IP layers to the OSI model

9.1.3.

Cable

For the network transmission media at the Physical layer on the OSI reference model, there are several cable categories available. Category 5, 8 wire Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable is commonly used. Shielded Twisted Pair cables are also available. The Impedance for the STP / UTP Ethernet cable is 100 . Category 3 is also used for the 10Base-T Ethernet. Category 1 2 3 4 5 Purpose Voice grade telephone line ISDN 10Base-T Token Ring (4M) Token Ring (16M) 100Base-TX, ATM (155M)

Ver. 5.1

426

MAR 2005

9.2.
9.2.1.

Layer Functions and Technology

MAC (Media Access Control)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The MAC address is burnt into each network card for establishing addresses for nodes on the network. These addresses are hexadecimal in nature and are unique for each card. The First three bytes from the left end identify the manufacturers code that must be approved by IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers). The Remaining three bytes on the right half should be kept in a unique manner. For Ethernet connections, multiple stations share the topology, therefore, the identification packet from each station should be unique.

XXXXXX XXXXXX
Unique value Manufacturer ID PCC : 080023
9.2.2. Network Control

CSMA/CD (Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection) If a node is trying to make a link to the network, transmission from another station is prohibited and halted until the data transfer is completed and the link is off. CSMA/CD and Token Passing are typical techniques used to control the connection. The General sequence is as follows: Wait for the next available timing to send, Send out a frame, Perform collision sensing simultaneously, Retry to send the same frame up to 16 times if necessary. (Sequence goes by a binary exponential back-off algorithm to avoid periodical incident) 802.3 (Ethernet) Frame Format

Least significant bit Most significant bit Pre-amble Destination MAC address Source MAC address Data type Data FCS 8 byte 6 byte 6 byte 2 byte 46 1500 byte 4 byte
Destination MAC address: 6 byte (uni-cast or broadcast) If all "1" on 6 byte (FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF) means broadcast frame, it is detected by an applicable node, it must be passed to the upper layer. Also, if the destination MAC address is not matched with that node, the frame is discarded at that node immediately. Token Passing Token passing utilizes a frame called a token, which circulates around the network. A computer that needs to transmit must wait until it receives the token, at which time the computer is permitted to transmit. When the computer is done transmitting, it passes the token frame to the next station on the network. The first station that is powered up on a token-ring network automatically becomes the active monitor station. Its responsibility is to announce itself to the next active downstream station as the active monitor station and request that station to announce itself to its next active downstream station. After each station announces itself to its next active downstream neighbor, the announcing station becomes the nearest active upstream neighbor (NAUN) to the downstream station. After each station becomes aware of its NAUN, the beaconing process continues every seven seconds.

Ver. 5.1

427

MAR 2005

A computer in the ring captures the token, if it has data to transmit, it holds the token and transmits a data frame. This data frame is passed to each computer in the ring, which checks whether it is the intended recipient of the frame. When the frame reaches the destination address, the destination PC copies the frame to a receive buffer, updates the frame status field of the data frame and puts the frame back on the ring.When the computer that originally sent the frame receives it back from the ring, it acknowledges a successful transmission, takes the frame off the ring, and places the token back on the ring. Token Frame indicates that the network is available for transmission. Data Frame indicates that the network is busy processing a transmission. Token Frame Format

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Least significant bit Most significant bit Start De-limiter (SFD) P P P S M R R R End De-limiter (ED) 1 byte 1 byte P: priority S: Status 0 = Token Frame 1 = Data Frame R: Reserved
Data Frame Format

Most significant bit Access Frame SFD 1 byte Control control 1 byte 1 byte Data: Max 4429 byte (4M) Max 17779 (16M)

Destination Source Data MAC MAC 6 or 2 byte 6 or 2 byte

Least significant bit FCS ED Frame 4 byte 1 byte Status 1 byte

There are several different bit types assigned for Frame Status. For example, 1 and 5 bit indicates that the token has been read, 2 and 6 bit indicates that the frame has been copied by another station. Thus, we can confirm whether the Data Frame was delivered.

Ver. 5.1

428

MAR 2005

9.2.3.

Ethernet

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ethernet is a very popular local area network architecture based on the CSMA/CD access method. The original ethernet specification was the basis for the IEEE 802.3 specifications. Typically, ethernet networks can use a bus physical topology, although, many varieties of ethernet such as 10Base-T uses a star physical topology and a bus logical topology. (Microsoft uses the term "star bus topology" to describe 10Base-T)

10Base-5

Speed (bps) Topology Cable Type 10M Bus Yellow cable Star Star

Max Length 500 m (1640 ft)

10Base-T 10M 100Base-TX 100M

Twisted Pair (Cat. 3, 4, 5) 100 m (328 ft) Twisted Pair (Cat. 5) 200 m (656 ft)

802.3 (CSMA/CD) Network Type

Max length (x 100m) 10 Logical speed (Mbps) 10 BASE BASE 5 BASE : baseband (digital) BROAD: broadband (analog) T TP Twisted Pair

hyphen "-" means type of cable no "-" means max length Ethernet Configuration

Ver. 5.1

429

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1 2 3 6

TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-)

1 2 3 6

1 2 3 6

TX (+) TX (-) RX (+) RX (-)

1 2 3 6

Straight Cable

Crossed Cable

Ethernet Cable Pin Configuration

All eight pins on the Ethernet cable are normally wired in this configuration accordingly. The Electrical level follows the Manchester code configuration.

"1"

"0" 0V

-2.05 V
Out of balance in electrical levels indicates that a collision is occurring in a certain area. To avoid from further malfunctions, terminating the physical end is required for coaxial cables. If a collision is detected, transmission is stopped and a maximum of 4.8 usec. of JAM packet is sent. The node that receives the JAM packet, discards the applicable received data. The maximum timing for collision detection is called slot time, normally set to 49.9 usec. The interval of 9.6 usec to 10 usec after the end of transmission frame is reserved for non-transmission period. There are several merits to Ethernet wiring, the physical connection is easy and flexible for future expansion due to the star topology.

9.2.4.

Repeater

The main purpose of a repeater is to extend the maximum range for the network cabling. They operate at the OSI Physical layer, and do not filter or interpret the signal - they merely repeat (regenerate) the signal, passing all network traffic in all directions. They perform signal amplitude, delete errors and reschedule the timing. Repeaters also follow the 5-4-3 rule, where no more than 5 network segments connected by 4 repeaters, with no more than 3 of the segments being populated. Active Hubs function in part as repeaters (amplify and regenerate network signals), they occasionally are called multiport repeaters.

9.2.5.

NIC (Network Interface Card)

NIC is an acronym for Network Interface Card, which plugs into a computer and adapts the network interface to the appropriate standard. ISA, PCI, and PCMCIA cards are all examples of NICs.

Ver. 5.1

430

MAR 2005

9.3.
9.3.1.

Network Layer
IP Address

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

An IP address is a set of four numbers, or octets, that can range in value between 0 and 255. Each octet is separated by a period (i.e. 192.168.31.1). All devices on a network that runs the TCP/IP protocol suite need a unique IP address. Most machines use a Domain Name, which are easier for people to remember. The IP addresses are actually broken down into three distinct classes, knows as class A, class B and class C addresses. Class A IP addresses contain a number between 1 and 127 before the first dot. In class A address, this first octet represents the network address, and the last three octets represent the node or host number. Class B IP addresses can range in value from 128 to 191 for the first octet, but it is the first two octets that make up the network address, and the last two octets that make up the host ID. Class C IP addresses can range in value from 192 to 223 for the first octet, and the first three octets make up the host ID. There are class D and E addresses as well. For these addresses, the first octet is a number greater than 223. These addresses are not currently available to be used and are reserved for other purposes. Class A : First octet reserved for the network address Class B : First two octets reserved for the network address Class C : First three octets reserved for the network address

Class A 0 Class B 1 0 Class C 1 1 0 Network address represented as

Private networks that do not connect to the Internet (operate internally) allow additional flexibility with IP addresses. Three classifications are available as shown below: Class A : 10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 Class B : 172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255 Class C : 192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255

Ver. 5.1

431

MAR 2005

9.3.2.

Subnet Mask
IP 192.168.32.1 Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

A subnet mask defines how sub-segments of a network are treated.

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 192 168 32 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 255 255 0 255 IP Subnet Mask

Network Address 192.168.32.0

1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Network Address Configuration

Global IP Address 190.0.0.0 255.255.0.0

190.0.3.1 255.255.255.0 Router 190.0.2.1 255.255.255.0

190.0.3.2 255.255.255.0

190.0.3.3 255.255.255.0

Third Floor

190.0.2.2 255.255.255.0

190.0.2.3 255.255.255.0

Second Floor

Note Upper: IP address Lower: Subnet mask

190.0.1.1 255.255.255.0

190.0.1.2 255.255.255.0

190.0.1.3 255.255.255.0

Ground Floor

Class B Subnet Outline

For network management purposes, special IP addresses are assigned. 1. Host address is set to all 0 2. Host address is set to all 1 Reserved for IP broadcasting to all subnet stations. 3. All 4 octets are set to all 1 IP broadcast of 255.255.255.255 can be passed over the router when the network address is specified. Normally, this is used for DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) network. 4. All 4 octets are set to all 0 Reserved for default route for non-destination address 5. Most significant bit starting with 127 Reserved for loop back address

Ver. 5.1

432

MAR 2005

9.3.3.

Internet Protocol

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The IP (Internet Protocol) operating at the OSI Network layer, is a connectionless protocol that provides datagram service, and IP packets are most commonly referred to as IP data grams. It performs the following typical functions: 1. Identifies the IP address 2. Packet disassembly and reassembly of the IP datagram 3. Routing of the IP address

4 byte Version
Internet Header Length

Type Of Service Flags Protocol Source Address Destination Address Option + Padding (size varies) Data

Total Length Fragment Offset Header Checksum

ID Time To Live

IP Datagram
Terms Version Internet Header Length Type Of Service ID Flags Fragment Offset Time To Live Protocol Header Checksum Source Address Destination Address Option Padding Currently version 4 IP Header field length Service priority requested by IP Datagram (3 bits are reserved for precedence) Identification frame number for upper layer communication Packet disassembly information Offset from most significant bit Decrement the counter until 0 every time packet pass over the router Upper layer protocol identification number. ie TCP (06h), UDP (11h) Checksum is used for error checking on the header data Senders IP Address Destinations IP Address When implemented Fill bit field to add up to 32 bit Detail

Ver. 5.1

433

MAR 2005

9.3.4.

Router

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Routers, operating at the OSI Network layer, organize the large network in terms of logical network segments. Each network segment is assigned an address so that every packet has both a destination network address and a destination device address. Routers are more intelligent than bridges. Not only do routers build tables of network locations, but they also use algorithms to determine the most efficient path for sending a packet to any given network by identifying its header information. These are the typical functions: 1. Routing This controls the traffic according to a specified routing table. 2. Packet Filtering This performs the access and security control for specified routing.

access-list permit tcp 192.168.32.0 0.0.0.255 192.168.33.1 0.0.0.0 eq 23 192.168.32/24 192.168.33/24 Router B

PC-A 192.168.32.1/24 OK

PC-B 192.168.32.2/24 OK

PC-C 192.168.33.1/24

PC-D 192.168.33.2/24

permission denied permission denied Packet Filtering Sample

3. Address Conversion NAT (Network Address Translator), This performs conversion of a single global IP Address from/to single private IP Address. 4. IP Masquerade: This performs a conversion of single global IP Address from/to multiple private IP Address. At the same time the port number is automatically assigned. Occasionally, the conversion creates a bottleneck in the network overhead. For a typical solution, PIX (Private address Internet address exchange) is available from Cisco, which is a well-known manufacturer. 5. Designated Reply These are reply that keep a connection alive by responding with a signal periodically. Watch Dog in IPX/SPX, TCP/IP in TCP, and Net BT (NetBIOS on TCP/IP) in Windows NT are all well known techniques to keep a live connection.

Ver. 5.1

434

MAR 2005

9.4.
9.4.1.

Transport Layer
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is an internetwork connection-oriented protocol that corresponds to the OSI Transport layer. TCP provides full-duplex, end-to-end connections. When the end-to-end communication acknowledgement is not required, the UDP (User Datagram Protocol) can be substituted for the TCP at the Transport (host-to-host) level. TCP and UDP operate at the same layer. The UDP is a connectionless oriented protocol.

IP Datagram TCP segment IP Header (20 byte) TCP Header (20 byte) Application Data (vary)

TCP Segment in IP Datagram

Source Port (2 byte) Destination Port (2 byte) Sequence Number (4 byte) Acknowledgment Number (4 byte)
Header Length (4 bit) Reserved (6 bit) Control Flag (6 bit)

Checksum (2 byte) Option Data (Segment)

Window (6 byte) Urgent Pointer (2 byte) PAD

TCP Segment Outline

TCP Header Monitoring Sample

Ver. 5.1

435

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Client

SYN, Se

quential

No.=453

8970

Increments No. sequentially

538971 K No.=4 C 000 A , K C A 1919424 .= o N l a quenti SYN, Se

ACK, AC K No.=191 9724001

Server

Panasonic Device TCP 3 Handshake General Flowchart

The client generates random sequential numbers initially and sends them to the server. The initial sequential numbers are synchronized with the clock and increments the counter every 4 msec. The Server responds with an acknowledgement that increments the initial sequential number by one. The ACK bit number is also changed to a "1" value. The "SYN" can have and identical "ACK" response for each packet, thus, the server and the client can establish a connection.

Ver. 5.1

436

MAR 2005

9.5.
9.5.1.

Upper Layer
DNS (Domain Name System)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The DNS (Domain Name System) protocol provides host name and IP address resolution as a service to client applications. DNS servers enable humans to use logical node names, utilizing a fully qualified domain name structure, to access network resources. Domain Names are comprised of 2 or more parts, separated by dots. The part on the left is the most specific, and the part on the right is the most general. A given device may have more than one Domain Name but a given Domain Name points to only one device. For example, the Domain Names below: Panasonic.com Mail.panasonic.com ifax.panasonic.com can all refer to the same device, but each domain name can refer to no more than one device. Usually, all of the devices on a given network will have the same right-hand portion of their Domain Names (i.e. panasonic.com in the examples above). It is also possible for a Domain Name to exist but not be connected to an actual device. This is often done so that a group or business can have an Internet email address without having to establish a real Internet site. In these cases, some real Internet machine must handle the email on behalf of the listed Domain Name. Specification for this name system follows this basic guideline. The name must be separated by dots and must start with ASCII code. Only Alpha numeric and hyphen are available. Up to 63 characters maximum, separated by dots. Up to 255 characters maximum, including all dots. Capital letters and small letters are not identical. (Case Sensitive.)

DNS Server (root) 3 2 1 5 4 6 7 DNS Server (co.jp) DNS Server (jp)

Panasonic Device

10 8 DNS Server (panasonic.com)

DNS Server Mail Server mlsv.panafax.co.jp (panafax.co.jp) domain

DNS Name Resolution Sample

The advantage of using a DNS server over a host lookup table, for host name resolution, is to avoid the need for a single centralized clearinghouse for all names. The authority for this information can be delegated to different organizations on the network responsible for it. There are at least 10 Root DNS servers installed all over the world.

Ver. 5.1

437

MAR 2005

The Name resolution flow is shown in the illustration above and follows the sequence below: 1. Query the local DNS Server. 2. Query the root DNS Server because the domain belongs to a destination outside of the company. 3. The Com root DNS Server sends the query to the jp root DNS Server. 4. The procedure repeats until a final name resolution is available. 5. The panafax.co.jp server responds with an IP address for the query name. 6. Finally, the name resolution is completed and the destination IP address is determined.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

All DNS servers makes an effort to resolve the query name with an IP address, however, a response is not always sent out every time. Once a name resolution is completed, the information from the DNS Server IP address table is kept in cache memory at each DNS server in accordance with a minimum TTL (Time To Live) of SOA (Start Of Authority) record. There are two types of Name Servers, Primary and Secondary Name Server.

9.5.2.

Primary Name Server

A primary server has the original copy of a zone file. Any changes made to the zone file are made to the copy on the primary server. When a primary server receives a query about a host name in its own zone, it retrieves the host resolution locally from its own zone files.

9.5.3.

Secondary Name Server

A secondary server gets a copy of zone files from another server. This zone file is a read-only copy of the original file from the primary server. Any changes made to the zone file are made at the primary server, then the changes are copied down to the secondary server through a zone transfer. Multiple secondary servers in a domain improves performance.

Ver. 5.1

438

MAR 2005

9.5.4.

SOA (Start of Authority) Record

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Each database file starts with a Start of Authority (SOA) record for the file. This record specifies the zone's primary server, the server that maintains the read/write copy of the file. The syntax of this record is as follows: IN SOA <source host><contact email><serial No.><refresh time><retry time><expiration time><TTL> An example of the syntax is shown below:
; ; File: db.127.0.0 file ; Purpose: This file establishes the identity of this DNS. ; SOA stands for 'start of authority' and sets the ; default parameters for information this DNS is ; authorized for: ; @ IN SOA nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 951213 ; serial number 43200 ; refresh every 12 hours ; retry after 2 hours 7200 1209600 ; expire after 2 weeks 172800) ; default ttl is 2 days ; IN NS nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. 1 IN PTR localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ;

SOA Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file

The "@" symbol in this example indicates the local server; "IN" indicates an Internet record. The FQDN for the name server NWR18 must end in a period. Note that the email address for the administrator must have a period instead of the "@" symbol. Also, if the SOA record is on more than one line, an open parenthesis must end the first line, and a close parenthesis must end the last line. The following list explains the other parameters: * Source host: The name of the host that has the read/write copy of the zone file. * Contact email: The Internet email address of the person who maintains this file. This address must be expressed with a period instead of the "@" that is usually found in email addresses (i.e. hostmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp instead of hostmaster@rdmg.pcc.co.jp). * Serial number: A version number for the zone file. This number should be changed each time the zone file changes, it changes automatically if you use DNS Manager to change the zone file. * Refresh time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before checking the master server for changes to the database file. If the file has changed, the secondary server requests a zone transfer. * Retry time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server waits before trying again if a zone transfer fails. * Expiration time: The time, in seconds, that a secondary server keeps trying to transfer a zone. After the expiration time passes, the old zone information is deleted. * TTL: The time, in seconds, that a server can cache resource records from this database file. The TTL is sent as part of the response for any queries that are answered from this database file. An individual resource record can have a TT: that overrides this value.

Ver. 5.1

439

MAR 2005

9.5.5.

A (Address) Record

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The A (Address) Record, lists the addresses for a given machine. The name field is the machines name and the address is the network address. There should be one A record for each address on the machine.

; BIND version named 4.9.5-Rel+-Monday-dd-Month-yy ; BIND version GregSchueman-LarryKahn-VirajBais ; zone ' rdmg.pcc.co.jp' last serial 720 ; from 133.185.245.7 at Sun Mmm dd:11:35 yyyy $ORIGIN pcc.co.jp. rdmg IN SOA nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. postmaster.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ( 721 10800 3600 604800 86400 ) IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp. IN MX 10 mlsv2.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. $ORIGIN rdmg.pcc.co.jp. ifax-gz03 IN A 172.21.94.216 qmc-cco1 IN A 133.185.254.212 ifaxos01 IN A 172.21.97.26 ifpdyna IN A 202.244.202.29

A Record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db zone.info" file

9.5.6.

PTR (Pointer) Record

Pointer records are the reverse-lookup file entries that enable IP addresses to be resolved to host names. DNS is used to resolve host names to IP addresses, so the opposite process is called reverse lookup. They specify the IP address in reverse order (like a DNS name, with the most specific information first) and then corresponding host name. The files are named according to the class of network, but with the octets in reverse order. The syntax for a PTR record is shown below: <ip reverse domain name> IN PTR <host name>

1 ;

IN NS IN PTR

nwr42.rdmg.pcc.co.jp. localhost.rdmg.pcc.co.jp.

PTR record (Bind 4.9.5 for NT) in "db.127.0.0" file.

9.5.7. CNAME (Canonical Name) Record

The CNAME (or canonical name) record is an alias (nickname), enabling you to specify more than one name for each IP address. The syntax of a CNAME is shown below: <alias name> CNAME <host name> Using CNAME records, you can combine an FTP and a Web server on the same host. Nicknames are useful when a well-known host changes its name. In this case, its usually a good idea to have a CNAME record so people still using the old name, will get to the right place.

Ver. 5.1

440

MAR 2005

9.5.8.

NS (Name Server) Record

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Name Server record specifies the other name servers for a domain. The syntax for a name server record is shown below: <domain> IN NS <nameserver host> An example of a name server record follows below: @ IN NS nwmgr.pcc.co.jp The "@" symbol indicates the local domain. The server "nwmgr" in the domain "pcc.co.jp" is the name server.

9.5.9.

MX (Mail Exchange) Record

The Mail Exchange (MX) record specifies the name of the host that processes mail for this domain. If you list multiple mail servers, you can set a preference number (value) that specifies the order in which the mail server should be used. Note that lower values indicate higher precedence, and that mailers are supposed to randomize same-value MX hosts so as to distribute the load evenly if values are equal. If the first preferred mail server does not respond, the second one is contacted, and so on. If you want a host to receive its own mail, you should create an MX record for your host's name, pointing at your host's name. The syntax of this record is shown below: <domain> IN MX <preference> <mailserver host> For a more detail, please refer to RFC974 document at URL http://www.ietf.org/.

9.5.10. Reverse Lookup

This is a special domain for allowing address to name mapping. As Internet host addresses do not fall within domain boundaries, this special domain was formed to allow inverse mapping. The IN-ADDR.ARPA domain has four labels preceding it. These labels correspond to the 4 octets of an Internet address. All four octets must be specified even if an octet contains zero. The Internet address 128.32.0.4 is located in the domain 4.0.32.128.IN-ADDR.ARPA. This reversal of the address is awkward to read but allows for the natural grouping of hosts in a network.

9.5.11.

Forwarding

A Slave Server is a server that always forwards queries it cannot satisfy from its cache, to a fixed list of forwarding servers instead of interacting with the name servers for the root and other domains. The queries to the forwarding servers are recursive queries. There may be one or more forwarding servers, and they are tried in turn until the list is exhausted. A Slave and forwarder configuration is typically used when you do not wish all the servers at a given site to interact with the rest of the Internet servers. A typical scenario would involve a number of workstations and a departmental timesharing machine with Internet access. The workstations might be administratively prohibited from having Internet access. To give the workstations the appearance of access to the Internet domain system, the workstations could be Slave servers to the timesharing machine, which would forward the queries and interact with other name servers to resolve the query before returning the answer. An added benefit of using the forwarding feature is that the central machine develops a much more complete cache of information that all the workstations can take advantage of. The use of Slave mode and forwarding is discussed further under the description of the named bootfile commands. There is no prohibition against declaring a server to be a slave even though it has primary and/or secondary zones as well; the effect will still be that anything in the local server's cache or zones will be answered, and anything else will be forwarded using the forwarders list. For more detail, please refer to published book (i.e. DNS and BIND etc) provided from O' Reilly & Associates, Inc. 441

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

9.6.

SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The objective of Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the senderSMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands. Once the transmission channel is established, the SMTP-sender sends a MAIL command indicating the sender of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail it responds with an OK reply. The SMTP-sender then sends a RCPT command identifying a recipient of the mail. If the SMTP-receiver can accept mail for that recipient it responds with an OK reply, if not, it responds with a reply rejecting that recipient (but not the whole mail transaction). The SMTP-sender and SMTP-receiver may negotiate several recipients. When the recipients have been negotiated the SMTP-sender sends the mail data, terminating with a special sequence. If the SMTP-receiver successfully processes the mail data it responds with an OK reply. The dialog is purposely lock-step, one-at-a-time. For more detail, please refer to the URL http:// www.imc. org/rfc821

Internet SMTP Server

PC

DNS Server SMTP

POP Server POP 3

PC

Internet Mail Sending and Receiving

9.6.1.

Mail Header Sample

Received: from nwr35 by labo.pcc.com (8.9.3/3.7W-RDMG) with SMTP id PAA09157 for <freeport@labo.pcc.com>; Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST) Date: Sun, dd Mmm yyyy 15:04:48 +0900 (JST) Message-Id: <199908200604.PAA09157@mlsv2.labo.pcc.com> Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic From: "Panasonic" <ifax98-us@labo.pcc.com> Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX To: freeport@labo.pcc.com Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+" X-UIDL: 8f32e4b1d691fdfc28daa812d913f572

Delivery route Message ID

Content-Type

Ver. 5.1

442

MAR 2005

9.7.
9.7.1.

ITU T.37 and RFC2305

Mode of Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Unit conforms to the ITU T.37 standards and RFC2305. This Internet store and forward facsimile uses approved IETF protocols for posting, relaying and delivery of documents. It requires no changes to Internet standards or to ITU Facsimile Recommendations. Store and forward facsimiles may operate in one of two modes. Communicating in the Simple Mode as defined below provides inter operability. All terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of reception must be able to receive in Simple Mode. It is recommended that terminals conforming to this recommendation and capable of transmitting should, as a minimum, be capable of transmitting in Simple Mode. Simple Mode supports the transfer of image data. Capability exchange and confirmation of receipt are not required for Simple Mode but may be provided using optional email functions outside the scope of this recommendation.

9.7.2.

Implementation Requirements for T.37 Simple Mode Table

Sender Send data as a single MIME multi-page TIFF Profile S file Provide notice in case of local transmission problem Provide a return address of an Internet email receiver which is MIME compliant Include Message-ID Use Base 64 encoding for image data Use other TIFF Profiles if it has prior knowledge that such profiles are supported by the receiver Provide notice on receipt of DSN or other notifications Receiver Be MIME compliant except that it is not required to offer to place MIME attachment in a file and may print a received file rather than display Be capable of processing multiple MIME TIFF Profile S image files within a single message Provide notice in case of reception or processing problems Use other TIFF Profiles

Required Strongly Recommended Optional

Required

Optional

Ver. 5.1

443

MAR 2005

Offramp Gateway (when implemented)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Required

Strongly Recommended Optional

Be SMTP compliant Provide delivery failure notification Be able to process PSTN/FAX email address Comply with the relevant ITU Recommendations relating to facsimile transmission Attempt to relay authorized email to the corresponding G3 facsimile terminals Ensure DSN for delivery failure notification Use DSN for delivery failure notification Use an approved mailbox access protocol when serving multiple users Translate image data into a format acceptable by the receiving G3 facsimile terminal Use a mailbox access protocol when serving a single mail recipient

9.7.3.

Definitions and Abbreviations

IETF RFC MIME POP3 SMTP DSN MDN TIFF IFD Offramp gateway Mailstore Notice Internet Engineering Task Force Request For Comment Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions Post Office Protocol version 3 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Delivery Status Notification Message Disposition Notification Tagged Image File Format TIFF Image File Directory Equipment capable of receiving email and relaying to one or more G3/ G4 facsimile terminals Equipment capable of receiving email and storing it for retrievals by receiver Provision of status information to the originator or recipient in a manner to be determined by the device RFC reference http://www.imc.org/ietf-fax/ File Format for Internet Fax Tag Image File Format (TIFF) Image/TIFF MIME Sub-type Registration Minimal PSTN address format in Internet Mail Minimal FAX address format in Internet Mail A simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail Tag Image File Format (TIFF)-F Profile for Facsimile RFC2301 RFC2302 RFC2303 RFC2304 RFC2305 RFC2306

Ver. 5.1

444

MAR 2005

9.7.4.

File Format for Internet Fax

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Sending Internet Fax devices must be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile) [RFC2301], which is also compatible with the specification for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in [RFC2306]. Receiving Internet Fax devices MUST be able to read minimum set TIFF files. The Following tree diagram shows the relationship among profiles and between profiles and coding methods.

S (MH) B/W J (JBIG) F (MMR, MR) Color C (JPEG) L (JPEG) M (MRC)

MRC: Mixed Raster Content

A profile is based on a collection of ITU-T facsimile coding methods. Class S F J C L M Color B/W B/W B/W Color Color Color Coding Method MH MMR, MR JBIG JPEG (lossy) JPEG (lossless, grayscale) Mixed Raster Content Remarks Internet Fax minimal set Internet Fax full mode Internet Fax mixed mode Color minimal set One bit per color, palletized color image, continuous tone color and grayscale images Multiple coders and resolution within a page

Ver. 5.1

445

MAR 2005

9.7.5.

Minimal Set

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The minimum interchange set of TIFF fields that must be supported by all implementations in order to assure that some form of an image, albeit black-and-white, can be interchanged. The table below summarizes the TIFF fields that comprise the minimal interchange set for black-and-white facsimile. The Baseline and Extenuation fields and fields values must be supported by all implementations. Baseline Fields Bits Per Sample Compression Fill Order Image Width Image Length New Sub File Type Page Number Photometric Interpretation Resolution Unit Rows Per Strip Samples Per Pixel Strip Byte Counts Strip Offsets X Resolution Y Resolution Extensions Fields T4 Options Values 1 3:1 dimension MH coding set T4 Options = 0 or 4 Least significant bit first 1728 (A-4) N: total number of scan lines in image 2: Bit 1 identifies single page of a multi-page document N, m: page number n followed by total page count m 0: pixel value 1 means black 2: inch Number of scan lines per strip = Image length, with one strip 1 Number of byte in TIFF strip Offsets from beginnings of file to single TIFF strip 204, 200 (pixels/inch) 98, 196, 100, 200 (pixels/inch) 0: MH coding, EOLs not byte aligned; 4: MH coding, EOLs byte aligned

9.7.6.

Addressing

A simple method of encoding PSTN addresses in the local-part of Internet email addresses, along with an extension mechanism to allow encoding of additional standard attributes needed for email gateway to PSTN-based services.

(1) Offramp

FAX= +12125551212@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector FAX= +3940 / T33S=183 @ faxworld.org Sub address Selector Global-phone Service selector VOICE = +3940183@ panafax.com Global-phone Service selector

Domain

(2) Sub address

Domain

(3) Others

Domain

Ver. 5.1

446

MAR 2005

Note: For RFC2305, a PSTN address in an email address should follow the above style. The key words MUST, MUST NOT, REQUIRED, SHALL, SHALL NOT, SHOULD, SHOULD NOT, RECOMMENDED, MAY, and OPTIONAL in this document are to be interpreted as described in RFC 2119. URL http://www.imc.org/rfc2119

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. MUST This word, or the terms REQUIRED or SHALL, means that the definition is an absolute requirement of the specification. 2. MUST NOT This phrase, or the phrase SHALL NOT, means that the definition is an absolute prohibition of the specification. 3. SHOULD These words, or the adjective RECOMMENDED, means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances to ignore a particular item, but the full implications must be understood and carefully weighed before choosing a different course. 4. SHOULD NOT This phrase, or the phrase NOT RECOMMENDED means that there may exist valid reasons in particular circumstances when the particular behavior is acceptable or even useful, but the full implications should be understood and the case carefully weighed before implementing any behavior described with this label.

9.7.7.

Coding Example of a TIFF Header, IFD and Image Data

Header Value Offset IFD (Page 0) Long Values Image Data (Page 0) Value Offset IFD (Page 1) Long Values Image Data (Page 1) IFD (Page 2) File Structure First IFD Offset Next IFD Offset Strip Offset

Next IFD Offset Strip Offset

Ver. 5.1

447

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Message Header Contents

9.7.8.

Delivery Failure

In the event of relay failure, the sending relay must generate a failure message, which should be in the format of a DSN.

9.7.9.

Image File Format

The Sending Internet Fax devices MUST be able to write minimum set TIFF files, according to the rules for creating minimum set TIFF files defined in TIFF for Facsimile (the S profile), which is also compatible with the specifications for the minimum subset of TIFF-F in F Profile for Facsimile, RFC 2306. The Receiving Internet Fax devices must be able to read minimum set TIFF files.

Ver. 5.1

448

MAR 2005

9.8.

Communication Protocols

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The set of conventions necessary to achieve facsimile-compatible service covers basic data transport, document data formats, message (document) addressing, delivery confirmation, and message security. Protocol supported by the your Panasonic Device is as follows:

SMTP Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device (ef1.labo.pcc.com) TCP 3 Way Handshake & Opening Session [5 minutes] SMTP Server (sv2.labo.pcc.com)

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25) 220 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service ready HELO sv2.labo.pcc.com

SMTP Command

250 ef1.labo.pcc.com MAIL FROM: <xxx@sv2.labo.pcc.com> [5 minutes] 250 OK RCPT TO: <yyy@sv2.labo.pcc.com> [5 minutes] 250 OK DATA [2 minutes] 250 Start mail out; end with <CR/LF> . <CR/LF> DATA BLOCK 1

DATA BLOCK

[3 minutes] [3 minutes]

DATA BLOCK 2 DATA BLOCK n CR/LF . CR/LF

[10 minutes]

250 OK QUIT 221 sv2.labo.pcc.com Service closing transmission channel Closing TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 25)

According to RFC1123, there are two approaches for time-outs in the sender-SMTP: 1. limit the time for each SMTP command separately, or 2. limit the time for the entire SMTP dialogue for a single mail message. A sender-SMTP SHOULD use option (a), per-command timeouts.Timeouts SHOULD be easily reconfigurable, preferably without recompiling the SMTP code. The value of timer [ ] shown above are recommended by RFC1123.

Closing

Ver. 5.1

449

MAR 2005

9.8.1.

Opening and Closing

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

At the time the transmission channel is opened there is an exchange of commands to ensure that the hosts are communicating with the hosts they think they are. The following two commands are used in the transmission channel for opening and closing: HELO:<SP> <domain> <CRLF> QUIT:<CRLF> In the HELO command, the host sending the command identifies itself; the command may be interpreted as saying, Hello, I am <domain>.

9.8.2.

Mail (MAIL)

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more mailboxes.

9.8.3.

RECIPIENT (RCPT)

This command is used to identify an individual recipient of the mail data; multiple recipients are specified by multiple uses of this command.

9.8.4.

Data (DATA)

The receiver treats the lines following the command as mail data from the sender. This command causes the mail data from this command to be appended to the mail data buffer. The mail data may contain any of the 128 ASCII character codes. The mail data is terminated by a line containing only a period, that is the character sequence <CRLF>.<CRLF>. This is the end of mail data indication.

9.8.5.

Send

This command is used to initiate a mail transaction in which the mail data is delivered to one or more terminals. This command is successful if the message is delivered to a terminal.

9.8.6.

Reset (RSET)

This command specifies that the current mail transaction is to be aborted. Any stored sender, recipients, and mail data must be discarded, and all buffers and state tables cleared. The receiver must send an OK reply.

9.8.7.

Verify (VRFY)

This command asks the receiver to confirm that the argument identifies a user. If it is a user name, the full name of the user (if known) and the fully specified mailbox are returned.

9.8.8.

Quit (QUIT)

This command specifies that the receiver must send an OK reply, and then close the transmission channel.

9.8.9.

Reply Codes from SMTP Server

SMTP is independent of the particular transmission subsystem and requires only a reliable ordered data stream channel. The SMTP design is based on the following model of communication: as the result of a user mail request, the sender-SMTP establishes a two-way transmission channel to a receiver-SMTP. The receiver-SMTP may be either the ultimate destination or an intermediate. SMTP commands are generated by the sender-SMTP and sent to the receiver-SMTP. SMTP replies are sent from the receiver-SMTP to the sender-SMTP in response to the commands.

Ver. 5.1

450

MAR 2005

9.8.10.
211 220 221 250 251 354 421 450 451 452 500 501 502 503 504 550 551 552 553 554

NUMERIC ORDER LIST OF REPLY CODES

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

System status or system help reply <domain> Service ready <domain> Service closing transmission channel Requested mail action okay# completed User not local; will forward to <forward-path> Start mail input; end with <CRLF>.<CRLF> <domain> Service not available: closing transmission channel [This may be a reply to any command if the service knows it must shut down] Requested mail action not taken: mailbox unavailable [E.g.# mailbox busy] Requested action aborted: local error in processing Requested action not taken: insufficient system storage Syntax error# command unrecognized [This may include errors such as command line too long] Syntax error in parameters or arguments Command not implemented Bad sequence of commands Command parameter not implemented Requested action not taken: mailbox unavailable [E.g.# mailbox not found# no access] User not local; please try <forward-path> Requested mail action aborted: exceeded storage allocation Requested action not taken: mailbox name not allowed [E.g.# mailbox syntax incorrect] Transaction failed

Ver. 5.1

451

MAR 2005

9.9.
9.9.1.

POP (Post Office Protocol Version 3)

Introduction

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

On certain types of smaller nodes in the Internet it is often impractical to maintain a message transport system (MTS). For example, a workstation may not have sufficient resources (cycles, disk space) in order to permit a SMTP server and associated local mail delivery system to be kept resident and continuously running. Similarly, it may be expensive (or impossible) to keep a personal computer interconnected to an IP-style network for long amounts of time. The Post Office Protocol - Version 3 (POP3) is intended to permit a workstation to dynamically access a mail drop on a server host in a useful fashion. Usually, this means that the POP3 protocol is used to allow a workstation to retrieve mail that the server is holding for it. For more detail, please refer to URL of http:// www.imc.org/rfc1939

9.9.2.

Basic Operation

Initially, the server host starts the POP3 service by listening on TCP Port No. 110. When a client host wishes to make use of the service, it establishes a TCP connection with the server host. When the connection is established, the POP3 server sends a greeting. The client and POP3 server then exchange commands and responses (respectively) until the connection is closed or aborted. Commands in the POP3 consist of a case-insensitive keyword, possibly followed by one or more arguments. All commands are terminated by a CRLF pair. Keywords and arguments consist of printable ASCII characters. Keywords and arguments are each separated by a single SPACE character. Keywords are three or four characters long. Each argument may be up to 40 characters long. Responses in the POP3 consist of a status indicator and a keyword possibly followed by additional information. All responses are terminated by a CRLF pair. Responses may be up to 512 characters long, including the terminating CRLF. There are currently two status indicators: positive ("+OK") and negative ("ERR"). Servers MUST send the "+OK" and "-ERR" in upper case. Responses to certain commands are multi-line. In these cases, which are clearly indicated below, after sending the first line of the response and a CRLF, any additional lines are sent, each terminated by a CRLF pair. When all lines of the response have been sent, a final line is sent, consisting of a termination octet (decimal code 046, ".") and a CRLF pair. If any line of the multi-line response begins with the termination octet, the line is "byte-stuffed" by pre-pending the termination octet to that line of the response. Hence a multi-line response is terminated with the five octets "CRLF.CRLF". When examining a multi-line response, the client checks to see if the line begins with the termination octet. If so and if octets other than CRLF follow, the first octet of the line (the termination octet) is stripped away. If so and if CRLF immediately follows the termination character, then the response from the POP server is ended and the line containing ".CRLF" is not considered part of the multi-line response. A POP3 session progresses through a number of states during its lifetime. Once the TCP connection has been opened and the POP3 @server has sent the greeting, the session enters the AUTHORIZATION state. In this state, the client must identify itself to the POP3 server. Once the client has successfully done this, the server @acquires resources associated with the clients mail drop, and the session enters the TRANSACTION state. In this state, the client requests actions on the part of the POP3 server. When the client has issued the QUIT command, the session enters the UPDATE state. In this state, the POP3 server releases any resources acquired during @the TRANSACTION state and says goodbye. The TCP connection is then closed. A server MUST @respond to an unrecognized, unimplemented, or @syntactically invalid command by responding with a negative status @indicator. A server MUST respond to a command issued when the session is in an incorrect state by responding with a negative status indicator. There is no general method for a client to distinguish between a server which does not implement an optional command and a server which is unwilling or unable to process the command.

Ver. 5.1

452

MAR 2005

A POP3 server MAY have an inactivity auto logout timer. Such a timer MUST be of at least 10 minutes duration. The receipt of any command from the client during that interval should suffice to reset the auto logout timer. When the timer expires, the session does NOT enter the UPDATE state--the server should close the TCP connection without removing any messages or sending any response to the client.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

9.9.3.

POP3 Command Summary

Minimal POP3 Commands: USER name PASS string QUIT STAT LIST [msg] RETR [msg] DELE [msg] NOOP RSET QUIT Optional POP3 Commands: APOP name digest TOP [msg] UIDL [msg] POP3 Replies: +OK -ERR Note: With the exception of the STAT, LIST, and UIDL commands, the reply given by the POP3 server to any command is significant only to "+OK" and "-ERR". The client may ignore any text occurring after this reply. valid in AUTHORIZATION state valid in the TRANSACTION state valid in AUTHORIZATION state

valid in the TRANSACTION state

From:

To:

Sample of a POP3 Protocol Log

Ver. 5.1

453

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

POP 3 Command & Reply Procedure

your Panasonic Device (ef1.labo.pcc.com) TCP 3 way handshake & Opening Session POP 3 Server (sv2.labo.pcc.com)

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <1896.697170952@labo.pcc.com> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055 PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). STAT +OK 2 126040 QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off. Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

AUTHORIZATION

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

TCP 3 way handshake & Opening Session

Opening TCP Connection (TCP Port No. 110) +OK POP Server ready <1898.697170952@labo.pcc.com> USER s50055 +OK Password required for s50055

AUTHORIZATION

PASS !xxxx +OK s50055 has 2 messages (126040 octets). TOP 1 1 +OK 69762 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 1 +OK 69752 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) DELE 1 +OK Message 1 has been deleted. TOP 2 1 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA PETR 2 +OK 1 56288 octets Text DATA Text DATA Text DATA :end with .(period) DELE 2 +OK Message 2 has been deleted. QUIT +OK POP Server at sv2 signing off.

TRANSACTION

UPDATE

Closing TCP Connection (Port No. 110)

Ver. 5.1

454

MAR 2005

9.10. Troubleshooting from a PC

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Troubleshooting is an art of seeking out the cause of a problem and eliminating the problem by managing of eliminating the cause. No matter what the problem is on your network, the OSI Reference Model serves as an excellent reference tool to help you locate the area of trouble. One of the simplest tools available, is the DOS command-line prompt from your Windows PC. Listed below are the most often used command-line prompts that you can use at the customer's network PC. Some commands are available as an option for checking with more detail. Command Sample Ping Ping 192.168.1.30 Purpose Checking for physical connection between your PC and the target destination (192.168.1.30) Ipconfig /all Checking for current network configuration (Host Name, DNS server, IP address, Subnet Mask, Default Gateway, MAC address, WINS etc) For Windows 95/98/Me, please type winipcfg instead of Ipconfig/all Tracert 192.168.2.245 Checking for the datagram route between your PC and the target destination (192.168.2.245) Netstat Netstat -nr Active connection list Active route for your subnet. All special assigned IP addresses are also shown Net view Checking for the current file sharing Host Name Nslookup Checking for the DNS server IP address. This command is available for Windows NT only.

Ipconfig /all

Tracert

Netstat

Net view Nslookup

Note: Before taking corrective action, you must check the physical connections or wiring first.

Ver. 5.1

455

MAR 2005

9.11. Verifying the Configuration and Mail Account Type (SMTP or POP)
START

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Is the LAN connected to an ISP No No DHCP Client? Is static IP address available ? Yes Is G3 Gateway function being used ? Yes No Yes Is POP account available ? No No No Yes No

Yes Is this a Dialup connection ? Yes Not supported Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? No Yes Is POP account available ? Not supported

Is there a MX and A Record entry for your Panasonic Device in the DNS table ? Yes Set network parameters for POP receiving Set network parameters for SMTP receiving If not ready Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

Yes

Not supported Set network parameters for POP receiving and set G3 Gateway parameters for your Panasonic Device If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account. Check the host name by using the DOS command-line "ping" and "nslookup".

If not ready Ask the Network Administrator to setup a new POP account.

Important Notice: The customer who supposed to operate G3 Gateway function for Panasonic models, the total Network Security such as Anti Spam Mail protection must be aware how the system performs sufficient security levels as designed. So you may ask Security Policy Manager to allow relay message by changing configuration of Massage Transfer Agent like Sendmail. Otherwise the system will deny any relay operation.

Ver. 5.1

456

MAR 2005

9.12. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) - Extended Feature

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration options. The Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) provides configuration parameters to Internet hosts. The Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a UDP/IP-based protocol which allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP. DHCP consists of two components: a protocol for delivering host-specific configuration parameters from a DHCP server to a host and a mechanism for allocation of network addresses to hosts. DHCP supports three mechanisms for IP address allocation. In "automatic allocation", DHCP assigns a permanent IP address to a client. In "dynamic allocation", DHCP assigns an IP address to a client for a limited period of time (or until the client explicitly relinquishes the address). In "manual allocation", a client's IP address is assigned by the network administrator, and DHCP is used simply to convey the assigned address to the client. A particular network will use one or more of these mechanisms, depending on the policies of the network administrator. "DHCP client" A DHCP client is an Internet host using DHCP to obtain configuration parameters such as a network address. "DHCP server" A DHCP server is an Internet host that returns configuration parameters to DHCP clients. Table 1 describes a DHCP message and its purpose of use. Message Use DHCPDISCOVER Client broadcast to locate available servers. DHCPOFFER Server to client in response to DHCPDISCOVER with offer of configuration parameters. DHCPREQUEST Client message to servers either (a) requesting offered parameters from one server and implicitly declining offers from all others, (b) confirming correctness of previously allocated address after, e.g., system reboot, or (c) extending the lease on a particular network address. DHCPACK Server to client with configuration parameters, including committed network address. DHCPNAK Server to client indicating client's notion of network address is incorrect (e.g., client has moved to new subnet) or client's lease as expired DHCPDECLINE Client to server indicating network address and in use. DHCPRELEASE Client to server indicating network address and canceling remaining lease. DHCPINFORM Client to server, asking only for local configuration parameters; client already has externally configured network address. Table 1: DHCP messages and purpose of use

Ver. 5.1

457

MAR 2005

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Server (not selected)

Client

Server (selected)

Begins initialization Determines configuration DHCPDISCOVER DHCPDISCOVER Determines configuration

DHCPOFFER DHCPOFFER Collects replies Selects configuration DHCPREQUEST DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK Initialization complete Commits configuration

Graceful shutdown DHCPRELEASE Discards lease

Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when allocating a new network address

Following figure shows the timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address.

Server

Client
Begins initialization

Server

Locates configuration

DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK

DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK

Locates configuration

Initialization complete Subsequent DHCPACKS ignored Timeline diagram of messages exchanged between DHCP client and servers when reusing a previously allocated network address

Ver. 5.1

458

MAR 2005

Several options have been defined so far. One particular option - the "DHCP message type" option - must be included in every DHCP message. This option defines the "type" of the DHCP message. Additional options may be allowed, required, or not allowed, depending on the DHCP message type.
INITIALIZATION

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

INITIALIZE/ REBOOT

DHCPNAK/ Restart

DHCPACK (not accepted)/ Send DHCPDECLINE DHCPNAK/ Discard offer

-/Send DHCPDISCOVER DHCPNAK, Lease expired/ Halt network

-/Send DHCPREQUES

SELECTING
DHCPOFFER/ Collect replies

REBOOTING

Select offer/ send DHCPREQUEST

REQUESTING
DHCPOFFER/ Discard DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2

REBINDING

DHCPNAK/ Halt network

DHCPACK/ Record lease, set timers T1, T2

DHCPACK/ Record lease, set /timers T1,T2

BOUND
T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server T1 expires/ Send DHCPREQUEST to leasing server

T2 expires/ Broadcast DHCPREQUEST DHCPACK/ Record lease, set timers T1, T2

RENEWING

The client maintains two times, T1 and T2, that specify the times at which the client tries to extend its lease on its network address. T1 is the time at which the client enters the RENEWING state and attempts to contact the server that originally issued the client's network address. T2 is the time at which the client enters the REBINDING state and attempts to contact any server. T1 MUST be earlier than T2, which, in turn, MUST be earlier than the time at which the client's lease will expire. To avoid the need for synchronized clocks, T1 and T2 are expressed in options as relative times.

State-transition diagram for DHCP clients

More detailed information, please refer to RFC2131 document available from following URL. http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.

Ver. 5.1

459

MAR 2005

9.13. Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) - Extended Feature

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The confirmation of delivery and processing are extensions to "Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305]. These are designed to be interoperable with the existing base of mail transfer agents (MTAs) and mail user agents (MUAs), and take advantage of existing standards for advanced functionality such as positive delivery confirmation and disposition notification. The following two features are combined. (1) Delivery confirmation (required) (2) Additional document features (optional) In Internet Mail, the operations of Delivery (to the mailbox) and Disposition (to paper or a screen) may be separated in time (due to store and forwarding of messages) and location (due to separation of delivery agent (MTA) and user agent (MUA)). The confirmations of these two operations are supplied by two different standards-track mechanisms: Delivery Status Notifications (DSN) [RFC1891, RFC1894] and Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) [RFC2298], respectively. Your Panasonic device supports MDN. Delivery Status Notification (DSN) A DSN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions: failed delivery, delayed delivery, successful delivery, or the gatewaying of a message into an environment that may not support DSNs. Panasonic Iternet FAX does not request DSN while sending.

fail
SMTP Server

DSN

SMTP Server

N returned to sender by Reporting MTAs (Message Transfer Agent) if fail of delivery is occurre

Message Disposition Notifications (MDN) A MDN can be used to notify the sender of a message of any of several conditions that may occur after successful delivery, such as display of the message contents, printing of the message, deletion (without display) of the message, or the recipient's refusal to provide MDNs.

SMTP Server

SMTP Server

MDN

Recipient notifies that the message contents have been displayed

The MDNs are expected to serve several purposes such as allow mail user agents (Outlook Express) to keep track of the disposition of messages sent, by associating returned MDNs with earlier message transmissions.

Ver. 5.1

460

MAR 2005

For example, you may configure the MDN parameter from Options menu of Outlook Express.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

, HAGKAIJ

JEBO

Additional Document Capabilities Section 4 of "A Simple Mode of Facsimile Using Internet Mail" [RFC2305] allows sending only the minimum subset of TIFF for Facsimile "unless the sender has prior knowledge of other TIFF fields or values supported by the recipient." A recipient may support any or all (or any combination) of the TIFF profiles defined in RFC 2301, in addition to profile S. As a consequence, a sender may use those additional TIFF profiles when sending to a recipient with the corresponding capabilities.
MDN Response
Read Receipt Capabilities

(1) MDN Request

Internet FAX

(3)

SMTP Server

SMTP Server

(2)

Internet FAX

Additional Document Capabilities Exchanging

(1) Request If the sender (Internet FAX) desires processing confirmation, the sender must request Message Disposition Notification when sending the message itself. Sender provides the Disposition-Notification-To field on address using the following formula.

Ver. 5.1

461

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MDN Request Sample

Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:20:00 -0500 Message-Id: <200202060018.12345@core.mega.edu> From: "Panasonic Internet FAX" <fax@core.mega.edu> Subject: IMAGE from Internet FAX To: fax@huge.com Disposition-Notification-To: <fax@core.mega.edu> Content-Type: multipart/mixed; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

(2) Recipient's MDN Response Recipient (Internet FAX) starts printing process when the message is received properly. If the Disposition-Notification-To field is contained in message, recipient generates MDN capability response after successful delivery and sends to the address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field as convey. However, the envelope-from (Return-Path: address) of original sender does not match with address indicated on Disposition-Notification-To field, and then no MDN response is sent.
MDN Response Sample
Mime-Version: 1.0 X-Mailer: Internet FAX, Panasonic Content-Transfer-Encoding: 7bit Date: Wed, dd Mmm yyyy 15:42:00 -0500 Message-Id: <20020206154203470001.BE948.fax@huge.com> From: <fax@huge.com> Subject: Read Receipt:IMAGE from Internet FAX To: fax@core.mega.edu In-Reply-To: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com> References: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com> Content-Type: multipart/report; report-type=disposition-notification; boundary="+-+-+-Panasonic-+-+-+"

MESSAGE HEADER

BODY TEXT

**********

Read Receipt

**********

This message was opened by 'fax@huge.com' dd Mmm yyyy 15:42 ******************************************

ATTACHED FILE

Final-Recipient: rfc822;fax@huge.com Original-Message-ID: <5.0.2.5.2.20020206153721.00c44448@huge.com> Disposition: automatic-action/MDN-sent-automatically; dispatched Media-Accept-Features: (& (type="image/tiff") (color=Binary) (image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) (MRC-mode=0) (ua-media=stationery) (paper-size=[A4,B4,letter,legal]) (image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) (| (& (dpi=200) (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) (& (dpi=204) (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196,204/391]) ) (& (dpi=408) (dpi-xyratio=408/391) ) ) )

Ver. 5.1

462

MAR 2005

(3) Processing Confirmation The processing confirmation provided by recipient is received and take specific services for expected several conditions respectively. This is unit independent issue. To see more detailed information, please refer to RFC2532 document.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

463

MAR 2005

9.14. Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) - Extended Feature

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The protocol is designed to provide access to directories supporting the X.500 models, while not incurring the resource requirements of the X.500 Directory Access Protocol (DAP). This protocol is specifically targeted at management applications and browser applications that provide read/write interactive access to directories. When used with a directory supporting the X.500 protocols, it is intended to be a complement to the X.500 DAP. X.500 is an overall model for Directory Services in the OSI world. The model encompasses the overall namespace and the protocol for querying and updating it. A major part of X.500 is that it defines a global directory structure. It is essentially a directory web in much the same way that http & html are used to define & implement the global hypertext web. Anyone with an X.500 or LDAP client may peruse the global directory just as they can use a web browser to peruse the global Web. From the "Start" menu of Windows client PC, you can search for people on the Internet, using of server at directory services.

9.15. Lightweight Challenge-response Mechanism POP (APOP) - Extended Feature

The base POP3 specification (POP3) also contains a lightweight challenge-response mechanism called APOP. APOP is associated with most of the risks associated with such protocols: in particular, it requires that both the client and server machines have access to the shared secret in clear text form. ChallengeResponse Authentication Mechanism (CRAM) offers a method for avoiding such clear text storage while retaining the algorithmic simplicity of APOP in using only MD5. Normally, each POP3 session starts with a USER/PASS exchange. This results in a server/user-id specific password being sent in the clear on the network. For intermittent use of POP3, this may not introduce a sizable risk. However, many POP3 client implementations connect to the POP3 server on a regular basis to check for new mail. Further the interval of session initiation may be on the order of five minutes. Hence, the risk of password capture is greatly enhanced. An alternate method of authentication is required which provides for both origin authentication and replay protection, but which does not involve sending a password in the clear over the network. The APOP command provides this functionality. A POP3 server which implements the APOP command will include a timestamp in its banner greeting. For example, on a UNIX implementation in which a separate UNIX process is used for each instance of a POP3 server, the syntax of the timestamp might be: <process-ID.clock@hostname> where "process-ID" is the decimal value of the process's PID, clock is the decimal value of the system clock, and hostname is the fully-qualified domain-name corresponding to the host where the POP3 server is running.

Ver. 5.1

464

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Client
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 110) Challenge Response <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp> Digest parameter, Challenge + PASSWD <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp>PASSWD

Server

+OK POP3 server ready <1896.697170952@svr.pcc.co.jp> APOP USER c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb +OK maildrop has 1 message (369 octets) Possible Responses: +OK -ERR permission denied

Produces a 16 octet digest value of c4c9334bac560ecc979e58001b3e22fb

STAT +OK 1 Continue to follow the POP3 procedure

APOP overview

The POP3 client makes note of this timestamp, and then issues the APOP command. The "name'' parameter has identical semantics to the "name" parameter of the USER command. The "digest" parameter is calculated by applying the MD5 algorithm to a string consisting of the timestamp (including anglebrackets) followed by a shared secret. This shared secret is a string known only to the POP3 client and server. Great care should be taken to prevent unauthorized disclosure of the secret, as knowledge of the secret will allow any entity to successfully masquerade as the named user. The "digest" parameter itself is a 16-octet value which is sent in hexadecimal format, using lower-case ASCII characters. When the POP3 server receives the APOP command, it verifies the digest provided. If the digest is correct, the POP3 server issues a positive response, and the POP3 session enters the TRANSACTION state. Otherwise, a negative response is issued and the POP3 session remains in the AUTHORIZATION state. Note that as the length of the shared secret increases, so does the difficulty of deriving it.

Ver. 5.1

465

MAR 2005

9.16. SMTP Service Extension for Authentication (SMTP Auth) - Extended Feature

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

SMTP is widely deployed and high-quality implementations have proven to be very robust. However, the Internet community now considers some services to be important that SMTP AUTH is an SMTP service extension (ESMTP) whereby an SMTP client may indicate an authentication mechanism to the server, perform an authentication protocol exchange, and optionally negotiate a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. This extension is a profile of the Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL). To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions.

Client
Establish TCP connection (TCP port No. 25) 220 smtp.example.com ESMTP server ready EHLO jgm.example.com 250-smtp.example.com 250 AUTH LOGIN DIGEST-MD5 CRAM-MD5 AUTH CRAM-MD5 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndA ZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4=

Server

ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ== 235 Authentication successful Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

SMTP AUTH overview

The AUTH command indicates an authentication mechanism to the server. If the server supports the requested authentication mechanism, it performs an authentication protocol exchange to authenticate and identify the user. Optionally, it also negotiates a security layer for subsequent protocol interactions. If the requested authentication mechanism is not supported, the server rejects the AUTH command with a 504 reply.
Challenge Response 334 PENCeUxFREJoU0NnbmhNWitOMjNGNndAZWx3b29kLmlubm9zb2Z0LmNvbT4= Produces a Challenge BASE64 decoded string

<CByLEDBhSCgnhMZ+N23F6w@elwood.innosoft> Genrates Digest parameter Challenge + PASSWD with HMAC (keyed-Hashing for Message USER Authentication Code) roduces a 16 octet digest value of: 9e95aee09c40af2b84a0c2b3bbae786e Fred BASE64 encoded string ZnJlZCA5ZTk1YWVlMDljNDBhZjJiODRhMGMyYjNiYmFlNzg2ZQ==

The authentication protocol exchange consists of a series of server challenges and client answers that are specific to the authentication mechanism. A server challenge, otherwise known as a ready response, is a 334 reply with the text part containing a BASE64 encoded string. The client answer consists of a line

Ver. 5.1

466

MAR 2005

containing a BASE64 encoded string. If the client wishes to cancel an authentication exchange, it issues a line with a single "*". If the server receives such an answer, it must reject the AUTH command by sending a 501 reply. If the server cannot BASE64 decode the argument, it rejects the AUTH command with a 501 reply. If the server rejects the authentication data, it should reject the AUTH command with a 535 reply unless a more specific error code, such as one listed in Error Codes below, is appropriate. Should the client successfully complete the authentication exchange, the SMTP server issues a 235 reply. The service name specified by this protocol's profile of SASL is "smtp". Error Codes The following error codes may be used to indicate various conditions as described. 432: A password transition is needed This response to the AUTH command indicates that the user needs to transition to the selected Authentication mechanism. This is typically done by authenticating once using the plain authentication mechanism. 538: Encryption required for requested authentication mechanism This response to the AUTH command indicates that the selected authentication mechanism may only be used when the underlying SMTP connection is encrypted. 454: Temporary authentication failure

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This response to the AUTH command indicates that the authentication failed due to a temporary server failure. 530: Authentication required This response may be returned by any command other than AUTH, EHLO, HELO, NOOP, RSET, or QUIT. It indicates that server policy requires authentication in order to perform the requested action.

Ver. 5.1

467

MAR 2005

9.17. Direct Internet Fax XMT - Extended Feature

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Direct Internet Fax XMT uses Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) to transfer mail reliably and efficiently. An important feature of SMTP is its capability to transport mail across networks, usually referred to as SMTP mail relay by employing SMTP server. Direct Internet Fax XMT allows you to transmit documents to another Internet Fax directly without using an SMTP Server. For this feature to work reliably, configure the IP Address to remain unchanged (static), ask the Network Administrator to reserve the IP Address. The Subnet Mask and Gateway must be configured as well. The Domain Name of the machine and other record information must be properly registered on the DNS Server. For the Direct Internet Fax XMT to function properly, the DHCP Parameter No. 22 setting must be disabled in the General Settings (For Key Operator). Furthermore, in common cases only email and web service from the Internet are permitted into the corporate intranet, and corporate network administrators are extremely unwilling to open the firewall for other, incoming services, since each opened path represents additional, potential security threats. This makes Direct Internet Fax XMT attractive because it can operate throughout the organization's Intranet. Several new service extensions were assigned. (1) The EHLO keyword value associated with this extension is "CONNEG" (2) A parameter using the keyword "CONNEG" is added to the RCPT-TO command
Sender
Establish TCP connection 220 EHLO 250 Response of CONNEG MAIL FROM:<pcc@panasonic.com> 250 RCPT TO:<june@panasonic.com> CONNEG 250 Capacity Exchange Continue to follow the SMTP procedure

Recipient
TCP Port No. 25

Checks for Capability

Capability contents sample 250-<june@panasonic.com> recipient ok 250-(&(image-file-structure=TIFF-minimal) 250- (MRC-mode=0) 250- (color=Binary) 250- (|(&(dpi=204) 250- (dpi-xyratio=[204/98,204/196]) ) 250- (&(dpi=200) 250- (dpi-xyratio=[200/100,1]) ) 250- (&(dpi=400) 250- (dpi-xyratio=1) ) ) 250- (|(image-coding=[MH,MR,MMR]) 250- (&(imagecoding=JBIG) 250- (image-coding-constraint=JBIG-T85) 250- (JBIG-stripe-size=128) ) ) 250- (size-x<=2150/254) 250- (paper-size=[letter,A4,B4]) ) 250 (ua-media=stationery) )

Request for Capability

Direct Internet Fax XMT Overview

Ver. 5.1

468

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

10 Schematic Diagram
10.1. General Circuit Diagram
*4: For DP-4510/4520/6010/6020 *1 : Factory use only *2 : Depending on the spec. of each destination *5: For DP-3510/3520 only *6: Not Used *3 : Japan spec. only
7 8 9 10 11 12 1 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 18 GND AMMCLK APMCLK ARVCL1 ARVCL2 ARRCNT ARRSN2 ADXSN ADFRRSN1 ARST ADFSN AFDOUT AFENB AFLTH AFCLK AFLD AFDIN GND

CNADF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 17 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 1 3 4 AFDOUT AFENB AFLTH AFCLK AFLD AFDIN 24VO1 24VO1 PGND PGND +5V +5V +5VP ORGSN GND GND G6 GND AMMCLK APMCLK ARVCL1 ARVCL2 ARRCNT ARRSN2 ADXSN ADFRRSN1 ARST

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 1

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

DFDOUT

RVEXSN

PFOSN1

P12CNT

MMCLK

DMCLK

DFENB

SVCNT

PVCNT

LMCLK

RVCLK

DFRST

DFCLK

LPCNT

DFLTH

DFDIN

PGND

PGND 24VM 24VM

2 3 1 2 3

GND +5V HPSN

10 11 12 13

+5V +5V

+5V

CN714

ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR 3

SCANNER HOME POSITON SENSOR

DFLD

GND +24V

GND

GND

GND

GND ORSIZ5

8 9

L
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3

+24VM

CN704

ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR 2

1 2 3

6 7

CN705

PAPER FEED C CLUTCH PAPER FEED S SOLENOID PAPER PATH SENSOR UPPER LIMIT SENSOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 24VO1 24VO1 PGND PGND +5V +5V 5VP ORGSN GND

1 CT 2

1 2

+24VM LPFCL

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 +24VM

L
D3

1 2 1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6

+24VM PFCL1 +24VM PUSOL1 +5V

CN661

4 5

4 5

20

ORIGINAL SIZE SENSOR 1

2 3

CN650

1 2 3

ORSIZ1 ORSIZ2 ORSIZ3 +5V GND ORSIZ4 +5V

CN728 (TEST) *1
8P

CN706
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CN701
D11

SPC
PAPER FEED PAPER FEED CLUTCH SOLENOID
1 2 DXCL2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 5 3 1 6 4 8 7 1 2 3 4 5 1

PMA 24VO1 PMAB PMB 24VO1 PMBB MMA 24VO1 MMAB MMB 24VO1 MMBB

11 9 7 5 3 1 11 9 7 5 3 1

CN729 (TEST) *1
7P

PM

PAPER FEED MOTOR

D3 2

CT

10 11

12 13 14

15

16

17 18 19

14 1

20

1 2 3

4 5 6 7 8

CT
1 2 3 5 7 9 6 8 10 4

GND

CN710

CN712

CNMM1

CN760

to ADF

CN717

+5V 1 2 3 1 2 3 HSSN2

CN753

CN721

CT

GND +5V HSSN1

6 7 8 9 10

CT

GND +5V LPEWSN2

CT C
1 2 3 1 2 3

CN662

SHEET BYPASS SENSOR 2 SHEET BYPASS SENSOR 1

PAPER SENSOR 1 PAPER SENSOR 2 PAPER SENSOR 3

LPEWSN1

REGIST- PAPER L RATION SENSOR 1 CLUTCH

to DRV

PGND

CT C

L CLUTCH

CN659

SHEET BYPASS SENSOR 3

1 2 CT 3

1 2 3

+5V HSSN3 GND

CN766
2 3

CN752

CT

*4
1 24VM

PAPER SENSOR

1 2

CT

4 LPUSOL +5V 5 +5V 6 7 LCRRSN LLBSN 8 GND 9 GNG 10 +5V 11 LPESN 12 GND 13 14 +5V

ADU L S CLUTCH +24VM 1 L INTERMEDIATE PAPER PCCL CT C CLUTCH PATH 2 +24VM SENSOR 1 L SHEET CT HFCL C BYPASS 2 UPPER CLUTCH LIMIT SENSOR D3 ZH +24VM
CT

1 2 3 1 2 3

CN651

1 2 3 CT

CT

GND

CN762

4 5 6 7 8

2 3 4 5 6

CN720

CN61

LAN I/F

CNMM2

24VO2

PGND

CN713

3 2 1

MMCLK MMFR MMLD

8 9 10

+5V

PGND

CT

24VO2

MM

5 4

GND +5V

5 6 7

1 3 2 1

CHPSN2 +5V

CN754

CT

21 22 23 24

GND

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

CT

21 22

1 2 3 4 5 6

MMPS

CLEANER POSITON SENSOR 2

1ST PAPER TRAY SENSORS

+24VM

1 2 CT 3 1 2 CT 3

ADU INTERMEDIATE SENSOR REGISTRATION SENSOR

2ND PAPER TRAY SENSORS

SIZE SENSOR 1 SIZE SENSOR 2 SIZE SENSOR 3
3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1
1 2 3 4 5 6

TDREF TDSNIN GND GND

1 2 3 4 5 6

10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN658

MAIN DRIVE MOTOR

10 9 8

1 2 3 4

1 2 3

CLMM2 GND GND CHPSN1

M
CT
3 2

CN716

24VM 24VM PGND PGND

*5

CLMM1

D3
1 2 1

CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR CLEANER POSITON SENSOR 1

CT

18 19 20

GND +5V LPEWSN3

8 9 10

1 1 PTL 2 11 +24VM 1 2 DXCL1 12 2 +24VM 1 3 RRCL 2 13 +5V 4 +5V 14 ADUINSN 5 ADURRSN 15 GND 6 GND 16 +5V 7 +5V 17 ADUCRRSN 8 18 9 19 10 20 RRSN GND GND

PTL *4
ADU

PAPER SENSOR

+5V CRRSN1 7 LBSN1 8 GND 9 CT GND 10 +5V 11 PESN1 +5V 12 CT GND 13 14

MM

ADF MAIN MOTOR

1 2 3 4

6 7 8 9

24VO1 SDCLCNT 24VO1 SB1CLCNT 24VO1 SB2CLCNT 24VO1 STSLCNT GND EXSN +5V 24VO1 PPSOLCNT 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 2 1

CT

C C C

L L

SLOW DOWN CLUTCH INVERTING CLUTCH 1 INVERTING CLUTCH 2 STAMP (Included w/ G3 Fax Option)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CT

ADU SENSOR ADU REGISTRATION SENSOR

PAPER SENSOR 2 PAPER SENSOR 3

1 PEWSSN1 2 GND 3 CT +5V 1 PEWSSN2 2 GND CT 3 +5V 1 PEWSSN3 2 GND CT 3

P18FX
1 2 3 4 GND CDSN2 VCDS CDSN1 GOPSW1 +24VM

CT

16 17 18 19 20

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

DENSITY SENSOR

CT

GND PFSIZSN1 +5V GND PFSIZSN2 +5V

TONER DENSITY SENSOR

G5

28

CT

EXIT SENSOR L PINCH SOLENOID

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

ADF SIZE SENSORS

SIZE SENSOR1
3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1 GND SIZE1SN +5V GND SIZE2SN +5V GND SIZE3SN +5V GND SIZE4SN +5V 24VO1 PFCLCNT

8P

D11

CN761

CN709

CN660

(DP-6010/6020 Only)
1 2 3 4

M
1ST TRAY LIFT UP MOTOR

LLUM

1 2

2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4

1 2

S
D3

GND +5V +5V GND nSELIN

PR CON

2 3

2 4

11

CNDM1

CN211

CN724

4 5

36

ACND

ACLD

CN64

DRV

CN102

THE PARTS WITH ! MARK ON THIS SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM INCORPORATE SPECIAL FEATURES IMPORTANT FOR SAFETY WHEN SERVICING IT IS ESSENTIAL THAT ONLY MANUFACTURE'S SPECIFIED PARTS BE USED FOR THE CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN THE PARTS WITH ! MARK OF THE SCHEMATIC.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

8 7

PRDY VRDY PACK ATT DUACK BD_A BD_B VREQ SACK PVSYNC DUPRNT SENTIM SREQ PRST PRGDWN GND

CN290

1 2 3 4

CN142
PH

CN134

CN133

CN104

2 3 4 5 6 7

SEPSOL 24VM MAGCL

S C

CN171

1 2 1 CT 2 TRBLSW1 GND GND

24VM

SEPARATION SOLENOID

CN132

CN101
3 2 1 ACL ACN 1 2 3

CN108

ACN

2 2 3

L L MAGNETIC
ROLLER CLUTCH
1

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE

GND

+5V

CN53

CN702

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

CN764

OHTN

OHTL

OHTN

OHTL

INLET

8 9 10 11 12 13

TONER WASTE COLLECT COIL

CN105
2 3 1

THI
1

CN726

1 2

1 2

CNGSW

CN172
2

CN173
1 2

AC DRIVER
1 2 3

2 1

THI2 THI1 ACSW +24V +5V SSA1 SSA2 SSA3 ZCIN GND

5 6 7 8

SH_A SH_B LAZERA LAZERB

4 5 6

nLD1 pLD2 nLD2

4 5 6

1 2

10 9 8

CN131

CN723

15 +5V 5 GND 8 GND 10 12V 13

CN106

CNHT6

TFSN +5V GND TFBOXSN

HEATL

FULP3

FULP1

N E L N E L

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

CNHT2

CNHT1

CNHTC

3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1

TONER WASTE SENSOR

TONER WASTE CONTAINER SENSOR

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 1

9 LAZREF 9 LAZENB 10 10 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 +24VM PGND 1 2

CN227 *3

CN143
4 3 2 1

THERMISTOR

6 7 8

1 2

CN231 *6

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

CN550
4 3 2 1

1 2 3

For LCT or APF

CN230

HDD
CNSHD1

T3 T1 T2 Thermo 1 T5

CNHT3

CN103

CN1

CN3

1 2 3

1 2 3

2 3 4 5

CN141

ACL ACN

CN5

1 2 3 4 5

GND GND +24V +24V +3.3V

F
HDD 40P

CNOM
1

LVS1
!
CN2
8 7 1 2 3 4 GND GND 1 2 3 4

PHN
2 3 4 5 24V nLPOW1 +5VD +5VP nLPOW2 +5V GND GND GND GND GND +3.3V +3.3V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 +24V +5VP +5V GND GND PNLRD PNLSD nPNLRST nLPOW2 nSLPKYE nLPOW1 nFCBRST PNLSCLK PNLLDO nPCIRING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

CNHT5

CNHT4

F Lamp3

CN60
PCI 62 *2

CN59

F Lamp1

PNL1

LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 1

Thermo 2

CN4
6 5 4 3 2 1 +5VP GND +5VP +5VP +5VP GND

DC
CN143 CN145
1 2 3 4

CN228 *1

15 +5V 16

PMLOCK 3 PMCNT 4 PMCLK 5

20 21 22 23 24

F1b

CSS I/F *1

CN66 *1

F1a

CNDCC

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PGND PGND

+24V

DRHT

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

7 6

3 2

CN51

CN755 *3

1 2 3 4

SW2

Drawing Name General Circuit Diagram

LPHT2 LPHT1

CN144
+5VP 1 +5V 2 +5V 3 +5V 4 +5V 5 GND 6 GND 7 GND 8 GND 9 GND 10

CN52

CN142

CN220

2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5

+5VD

F2a

24VD

5 79 80 6

+24V

CN80
1 2 79 80

4 5

10

+24V

GND GND

Power Cord

F2b

CNSCC CN142 CN141 CN767

2 1

CN390

CN750 CN756
17 8 7 6 5 4 3 18 15 GND 14 GND 13 12 11 10 16 9 LMBB 24VS LPCNT PGND LMAB LMB +5V PASN PCSN +5V 24VS

CN751

FXB
CN392
1 3 1 2

!
CN393
1 6 7 2 AGND 4 5

D11
2 1 24VS LMA

CN758
10 9 PWFM 12 SCFM 11 PWFL 10 SCFL 9 PGND 8 PGND 7 DDFM 6 OZFM2 5 DDFL 4 OZFL2 3 PGND 2 PGND 1 +5V GND DOSN

CN768
14 13 12 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 ELPCNT 24VM WEBSOL CT 24VM 24VM +5V

CN759
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 EXDOSN2 11 GND 10 +5V 9 PFOSN1 1 1 EXFM3 EXFM2 EXFL3 EXFL2 PGND PGND GND

CN765
1 2 3 4 5 6 PGND KCTCNT

CN757
2 3 4 5 6 EXFM1 EXFL1

nADFSES GND

1 2

CN391
3 nCTON nHKOF pCNLD

CN221

CNKCT 24VM

KCT GND

KCS

CT

!
7

CCD
CN851
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 nSLSYNCB 13 14 15

+5Vp

+24V

GND

3 4 5 6

INVERTER

DP-3510/3520/3530 4510/4520/4530 6010/6020/6030

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

nGACLK

pGACLK

BLKCLP nRESET

pMCLK

nMCLK

pSCLK

nSCLK

SDI nSEN1

CNSPC

AGND

AGND +3.3V

nSHD

Model

CN20

CN22

CN21

G5

PS SUCTION FAN FAN

DUST OZONE FAN FAN

WEB TOTAL SOLENOID COUNTER

pSHD

+3.3V

pTX2 nTX2

pTX1

nTX1

pTX0

nTX0

+12V

GND

+5V

+5V

ITG

OE

FAN3 FAN2

FAN1

AGND

nSEN2

CLPIN

(Option)

GND pTXCLK nTXCLK

MJR

4 3 2 1

pSPKOT

GND

3 1

1 2

SCAN MOTOR

FM FM FM FM

DOOR SENSOR
L

PAPER PAPER EXIT EXIT DOOR SENSOR SENSOR

FM FM

Key Counter

FM
1 2

20

ELP

CN22

CN25

EXP LAMP

ADF OPEN SENSOR

ADF ANGLE SENSOR

CT

1 3

1 2

3 1

2 1

CN850

7 8

CN223
1 2 3 4 14 15 16 17

CN226 *1

L2

L1

+5V

13 14 15

CN224
1 2 3 +24V GND Vcnt

CN225
1 2 Y1 3 X1 4 Y2

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

10

11

12

13

HARDWARE KEY I/F

D11-8

D11-8

D11-8

14 15

FRM SLOT 1

FRM SLOT 2

CN63 *3

FROM CARD

SORT MEM

CN62

CN64

CN65

CN67

CN68

CN69

!
1

SPKR

LINE

TEL

G3 FAX (Option)

LCD

2 3

*2

Ver. 5.1

469

CN2

SC

CN1

INV

X2

CN56

CN55

20

3 4

5 6

Touch Panel

PNL3

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 2 1 2 3 4

CN229

CN280

CN250

BLACK

CNHD1

WHITE

HDD (Option)

14

CN725

PNL2

CNTH

CN222

4 +24V 3 GND 1 2 5

CNDCC

CN141

CN552

CT

CT

12 11

HSYNC

4 5

pLD1

CN57

(Option)

NFL

CN66

CN551

ACLRLB

ACD

GND

LSU

RLB

LVS2
(Option)

ACNRLB

LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 2 (Option, except N.A.)

2 3 4

2 3 4

GND 1 2 +5VL GND

SW3
1 2 1 2 +3.3V GND 1 2 3 POWSW

CN251

ACL

CNLVC
1 1

+5VD

GND

ACL

SPCTXD

CN65

11 GND GND 12

D3

1 2 2 CT 3 3

SYSTEM CONSOLE SENSOR

REGISTRATION SENSOR 3

ADF

10 nAUTFD 6 nERROR 12 7 14 pSELECT 8 16 nINIT 9 18 pERROR 20 10 GND 22 11 pBUSY 12 24 nACK 13 26 GND 1 1 GND 3 2 PD8 3 5 PD7 7 4 PD6 9 5 PD5 11 6 PD4 7 13 PD3 15 8 PD2 17 9 PD1 19 10 GND 21 11 nSTROB 23 12 GND 25 13 GND 27 14

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

PGND PGND GND +5V DMPS DMCLK DMBRAKE DMLD

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

RVMB 24VM RVMBB RVSSOL1 24VM RVSSOL2 PCSSOL1 24VM PCSSOL2 GND 1 2 3 1 2 3

RM
S L

CN707
1 2

CN727 (IPC)
1

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

HVPS

10

10 GND 9 +5V 8 7 OQFDIN 6 LCCFDIN 5 OQFLD 4 OQFCLK 3 OQFLTH 2 OQFENB 1 OQFDOUT

CN711

3 4

BMB BMAB +24VM BMA TED VTED GND +5V BPSN GND

4 3 2 1 2 3

D11 2ND TRAY LIFT UP MOTOR

HVBDCCNT HVBACCNT HVLKB HVTCNT HVLKT HVDACCNT HVDDCCNT HVLKD

CN656

OQMCLK

BM
TONER BOTTLE MOTOR TONER DETECT SENSOR
1 2 3

CNHV

OPC DRUM MOTOR

10

24VM

12

RVMAB

INVERTING MOTOR
INVERTING SOLENOID PAPER TRAY SOLENOID
G2 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

28P BMBB +24VM 6 5

HVLKC GREFCNT HVBACCLK

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 3 4 5 6

CN652

24VM

RVMA 24VM

ADU SENSORS

1 2

+24VM PGND HVCNT

1 2

HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY

28

5 6 CT

CN708 CN719

7 GND 8 PFSIZSN3 +5V 9 10 +24VM LUM1

SIZE SENSOR2 SIZE SENSOR3 SIZE SENSOR4 PAPER FEED CLUTCH

DXSLCNT1 24VO1 DXSLCNT2 24VO1

1 2 3

INVERTING SOLENOID REGISTRATION CLUTCH 2 REGISTRATION CLUTCH 1

nSTRX 8 pSTRX 9 10 GND nSTTX 11 pSTTX 12 IPRXD 2 GND 3 IPTXD 4 GND 7

Centronics I/F

DM
CN58

5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

M
4 3 2 1

1 2

1 RR2CLCNT CT 2 24VO1 1 RR1CLCNT CT 2

C C

L L

CN763

12 13

CNB
CT
3 2 1 3

CNA

CN210

IICSCL GND GND GND GND SPCRXD

CN703

CN54

CN654

2A

3 4 5 6 7

3 4 5 6 7

2B

1A

1B

CT

2 1 3 2 1

INVERTING SENSOR INVERTING JAM SENSOR

SW4
(Option)
CNN
1 2

Dehumidifier Heater (Option)

G1

G4

GND

G3

3 2 1

TMGSN

2 1

CNDCC

SWN1

SWN2

SWL1

SWL2

23 +5V +5V 24

CNL

CT

SHEET BYPASS SOLENOID

ACN

4 QDOSN 5 GND GND 6 +5V 7 +5V 8 PCRSN 9 10 SPPSN

4 5 6 1 2

CN715

CT

1 2 3

1 2

DOOR OPEN SENSOR INTERMEDIATE SENSOR

INVERTING SENSOR REGISTRATION SENSOR 2

3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1 3 2 CT 1

DXSN +5V GND RR2SN +5V GND RR3SN +5V

CN653

CN718

IICSDA

GND 14 PFOSN2 15 RVEXSN 16 +5V 17 +5V 18 GND 19 GND 20 RVSN 21 22 RVJAMSN

PRINTER

PAPER EXIT SENSOR 2 INVERTING

SYSTEM CONSOLE CONNECTOR (Option)

FINISHER CONNECTOR (Option)

6 5 1 PGND STRVP

CT

TONER BOTTLE POSITION SENSOR

HUMSN +5V

3 2 1

CN657

D3 1

CN722

TEMP HUMIDITY SENSOR

CN655

8 7

TENPSN GND

CT
3 2 1 CT

1 2
GND

DOOR SENSOR

OPSN +5V

1 2 3

CN211

2 CT 1 EXIT SENSOR

SW1 CNSW1

SHEET BYPASS SENSOR

GND 3 CT HPESN 2 +5V 1 HFSOL L +24VM 2

5 4 3

5 4

1 2

+5V +5V

D11
1 2
1 2 CT 3 3

TIMING SENSOR

ADF SENSORS

GND
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 G6

CT
3 2 1 3 2 1

GND

1 2 3 4 5 6

RR1SN +5V GND ORGSN 5VP

REGISTRATION SENSOR 1 ORIGINAL SENSOR

D3

1 2 CT 3

CT
PNL GND G5

9 11

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

memo

Ver. 5.1

470

MAR 2005

11 Finisher Options
11.1. DA-FS600, DA-FS605, DA-SP31
11.1.1. Introduction 11.1.1.1. Features

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Large Tray Capacity. Normally, the Finisher holds a stack of sheets 5.78" (147 mm) in height in its two bins (small-size paper: equivalent to 1000 sheets) / 2.91" (74 mm) in height (large-size paper: equivalent to 500 sheets) 2. Handles Wide Variety of Paper Thickness. The Finisher is capable of handling papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2). 3. Job Offset Function. The Finisher has a job offset function for sorting non-stapled stacks of copies. 4. Four Types of Auto Stapling. The Finisher offers a choice of four stapling modes (1-point stapling at rear, diagonal stapling in front, diagonal stapling at rear, and 2-point stapling). 5. Buffer Roller. The use of a buffer roller enables the finisher to accept copies without interruption from the Copier even during stapling or offset operation. 6. Saddle Stitch Function. The Finisher can staple along the center of paper and fold it in two (up to 15 sheets). 7. Punch Function (Option). The Punch Unit enables the Finisher to punch the binder sheets before they are ejected. (The Punch Unit is capable of handling plain papers between 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2). The Punch Unit cannot handle special papers, postcards, transparencies, etc.)

Ver. 5.1

471

MAR 2005

11.1.1.2. DA-600, DA-FS605 and DA-SP31 Specifications

1. Finisher Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Item Description Stacking Method Trays 1 and 2: by lifting tray Stacking Face-down Orientation Face-up A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R Stacking Size LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS Paper Weight 17 - 35.5 lb (64 - 133 g/m2) Bins Trays 1 and 2 Modes Non-Sort : Trays 1 and 2 Sort : Trays 1 and 2 Staple : Trays 1 and 2 Stacking Non staple sort Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 57.8 in (147 mm) high (1000 sheets)*2 Capacity Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 2.91 in (74 mm) high (500 sheets) Staple sort Small-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 4.33 in (110 mm) high/30 sets (750 sheets)*2 Large-size*1 Tray 1 and 2: 2.91 in (74 mm) high/30 sets (500 sheets) Size Mixing Size mixing : 1.73 in (44 mm) or less (300 sheets)*4 Stapling : 0.86 in (22 mm) or less (150 sheets/30 sets)*4 Stacking Mixing Face-down / Face-up Notes: *1: *2: *3: *4: Sizes are approximate when using blank 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper. Misalignment may occur if more than 750 of small-size sheets are stacked. The accuracy of the stack height is 7 mm. Matching is not guaranteed. Description

Item Stapling Stapling Position Stapling Capacity

By rotating cam See Fig. 1-001. Small-size 50 sheets Equivalent of 21 lb (80 g/m2) paper Including two sheets of thick stock (covers). Large-size 30 sheets Staple Supply Special staple cartridge (5000 staples) Replacement FQ-SS66 : For DA-FS605 (Saddle Stitch) Staples FQ-SS50 : For DA-FS600 / 605 Staple Detection Provided Manual Stapling Not available Stapling Size 1-point diagonal Front A3, B4, A4, A4-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R stapling Rear A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5 1-point Rear A4-R, LTR-R, LGL 2-point A3, B4, A4, LDR, LTR, B5 Paper Detection Provided Control Panel Not available Display Not available

Ver. 5.1

472

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Item Dimensions

Description 669 (744.5) x 661 x 1050 mm (W (with Punch Unit attached) x D x H; including saddle stitch unit) Weight 2 Bin Finisher : 76 lb / 34.5 kg 2 Bin Saddle-Stitch Finisher : 115.7 lb / 52.5 kg Punch Unit (option) : 11.7 lb / 5.3 kg Power Supply Supplied by the copier machine (24 VDC) Maximum Power 170 W or less Consumption Reference: The term small-size stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, INV-R, while the term large-size stands for A3, B4, A4-R, LTR-R, LDR, LGL, FLS, B5-R. Stapling Position (Finisher Unit)
1- Point Stapling (Rear) 1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Front) 1- Point Diagonal Stapling; Rear)

30

30

4.42 mm

Specified Paper width -62 mm

4.42 mm

Specified Paper width -6 2 mm

2- Point Stapling

A3 and A4

B4 and B5

LDR and LTR

52mm

52mm

82.74 mm 202.74 mm

62.74 mm 182.74 mm

52mm

73.74 mm 193.74 mm

Fig. 1-001

Ver. 5.1

473

4.42 mm

52 mm

MAR 2005

2. Saddle Stitch Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Item Description Stacking Method Center binding (double folding) Folding Position See Fig. 1-002 Paper Size A3, B4, A4-R, LDR, LTR-R W/binding: 1 sheet (including single cover page) Capacity W/out binding: 2 to 15 sheets Copy Weight 17 - 21 in (64 - 80 g/m2) (cover page up to 35.5 in (133 g/m2))*1 Stacking 10 sets (stack of 11 to 15 sheets) Capacity 15 sets (stack of 6 to 10 sheets) 25 sets (stack of 5 sheets or less) Stapling position 2 points (Center distribution; fixed interval) Staple 2000 staples accommodation Staple supply Special cartridge Stapling Staples Special staples (FQ-SS50) Staple detection Provided Manual stapling Not available Folding method Roller contact Folding mode Double folding Folding Folding position Paper center Position Provided adjustment Power Supply Supplied by the finisher unit (24V line x 2) Power 160 W or less Consumption Note: *1:Special paper, transparencies, masters, label paper and hole-punched paper cannot be handled.

Ver. 5.1

474

MAR 2005

Staple and Folding Position (Saddle Finisher Unit)

A3 B4

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

A4-R

Staple Position 148.51.0 mm

2101.0 mm

Center of Staple

Center of Staple

1821.0 mm

88.52.0 mm 208.52.0 mm Stack Front Edge

68.52.0 mm 188.52.0 mm

452.0 mm 1652.0 mm

LDR

LTR-R

79.72.0 mm 199.72.0 mm

139.71.0 mm

2161.0 mm

482.0 mm 1682.0 mm

Fig. 1-002

Ver. 5.1

475

MAR 2005

3. Punch Unit (Optional) Item Punching Method Paper Size Paper Weight Punched Hole Diameter

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Description Sequential punching 2 holes: 2 or 3 holes: 4 holes: 64 to 133 g/m2 *1 2 holes: 2 or 3 holes: 4 holes: 2 holes: A3, A4, B4, A4-R, B5, B5-R 2 holes/LGL, LTR-R 3 holes/LTR, LDR A3, A4 6.5 mm 2 holes / 8.0 mm 3 holes / 8.0 mm 6.5 mm

Punch Trash Capacity

Power Supply Power Consumption

10,000 sheets or more (21 in (80 g/m2) or equivalent) 2 holes / 3,000 sheets or more 2 or 3 holes: 3 holes / 3,000 sheets or more 4 holes: 5,000 sheets or more Supplied by the Finisher Unit (24 VDC, 5 VDC) 120 W or less

Note: *1:Transparencies, masters, label paper, postcards and hole-punched paper cannot be handled. Hole Position (Punch Unit)

801 mm

x1 123 mm

2 holes A3 / A4 B5 / B4 A4-R B5-R 2 or 3 holes x1 LGL / LTR-R

108.5 3 mm 88.5 3 mm 65 3 mm 51 3 mm

73 3 mm

701 mm

x1 123 mm

x1 LDR / LTR
1081 mm 1081 mm x1 123 mm

31.5 3 mm

801 mm 801 mm 801 mm x 1 123 mm

4 holes x1 A3 / A4

28.5 3 mm

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Ver. 5.1

476

MAR 2005

11.1.1.2.1. Cross Section

1. Finisher Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[8] [9] [10]

[11]

[17] [16]

[15]

[14] [13]

[12]

[1] Tray 1 / 2 [3] Delivery Roller [5] Feed Roller 2 [7] Wrap Flapper [9] Buffer Inlet Flapper [11] Inlet Feed Roller [13] Vertical Path [15] Knurled Belt [17] Saddle Stitch Unit

[2] Shutter [4] Swing Guide [6] Height Sensor [8] Buffer Roller [10] Saddle Stitch Flapper [12] Feed Roller 1 [14] Stapler [16] Tray Lift Motor

Fig. 1-003

Ver. 5.1

477

MAR 2005

2. Saddle Stitch Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[6]

[7] [8]

[5] [9] [4] [3] [2] [11] [12] [1]

[10]

[1] Guide Plate [3] Delivery Guide Plate [5] Stitcher (Front, Rear) [7] No. 1 Flapper [9] Stitcher Mount [11] Crescent Roller

[2] Paper Folding Roller [4] Holding Roller [6] Inlet Roller [8] No. 2 Flapper [10] Butting Plate [12] Paper Positioning Plate Fig. 1-004

Ver. 5.1

478

MAR 2005

3. Punch Unit (Optional)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]

[1] Punch Motor [3] Hole Puncher (Punch Blade) [5] Photosensor PCB [7] Horizontal Registration Motor [9] Punch Trash Container

[2] Cam [4] Die [6] LED PCB [8] Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit

Fig. 1-005

Ver. 5.1

479

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3. Using the Machine

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.1.3.1. Removing Paper Jams from the Finisher Unit

If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam. (1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, move it to detach it from the Copier.

Fig. 1-006 (2) Remove any jam visible from the outside.

Fig. 1-007 (3) Open the Upper Cover, and check the inside of the Finisher.

Fig. 1-008

Ver. 5.1

480

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Lift the Buffer Roller Cover, and remove the jam.

Fig. 1-009 (5) Lift the Buffer Roller, and remove the jam.

Fig. 1-010 (6) Return the Buffer Roller and the Buffer Roller Cover to their original positions, and close the Upper Cover.

Fig. 1-011 (7) Connect the Finisher to the Copier Machine. (8) Operate as instructed on the Display.

Fig. 1-012

Ver. 5.1

481

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.2. Supplying the Finisher Unit with Staples

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the Copier's message indicates that the staples ran out in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to supply it with staples. (1) Open the Front Cover.

Fig. 1-013 (2) Turn the Green Lever to the down.

Fig. 1-014 (3) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of the arrow as illustrated.

Fig. 1-015 (4) Slide the empty Staple Case out.

Fig. 1-016

Ver. 5.1

482

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Set a new Staple Case (FQ-SS66). Reference: You may set no more than one Staple Cartridge at a time. Make sure that the new Cartridge is one specifically designed for the Finisher Unit. Note: Do not remove the Tape used to hold the Staples in place before installing the Staple Cartridge. Fig. 1-017 (6) Pull the length of Tape (used to hold the Staples in place) straight out.

Fig. 1-018 (7) Push the Stapler Unit until it stops and turn the Green Lever to the right to lock.

Fig. 1-019 (8) Close the Front Cover.

Fig. 1-020

Ver. 5.1

483

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.3. Removing Staple Jams from the Finisher Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Finisher Unit, perform the following to remove the jam. (1) Remove the Stack waiting to be stapled from the Delivery Tray.

Fig. 1-021 (2) Open the Front Cover.

Fig. 1-022 (3) Turn the Green Lever to the down.

Fig. 1-023 (4) Pull out the Staple Cartridge in the direction of the arrow as illustrated.

Fig. 1-024

Ver. 5.1

484

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Push down Staple Cartridge Tab.

Fig. 1-025 (6) Remove all Slid Staple.

Fig. 1-026 (7) Push up the Staple Cartridge Tab until it stops. (8) Turn the Green Lever to the right to lock. Close the Front Cover. Note: After a Staple Cartridge has been reinstalled, the first few sets may not staple. This is due to the Staples need to be pre-fed to the stapling position.

Fig. 1-027

Ver. 5.1

485

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.4. Removing Paper Jams from the Saddle Stitch Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the Copier's message indicates a paper jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the jam. (1) Holding the Finisher Unit as shown, move it to detach it from the Copier.

Fig. 1-028 (2) Open the Front Lower Cover.

Fig. 1-029 (3) Turn the right Green Knob.

Fig. 1-030 (4) Turn the left Green Knob while pushing it in.

Fig. 1-031

Ver. 5.1

486

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(5) Open the Saddle Exit Cover. (6) Remove jammed paper. (7) Close the Saddle Exit Cover.

Fig. 1-032 (8) Open the Inlet Cover, and remove the jam.

Fig. 1-033 (9) Close the Front Lower Cover. (10) Connect the Finisher Unit.

Fig. 1-034

Ver. 5.1

487

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.5. Supplying the Saddle Stitch Unit with Staples

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the Copier's message indicates the Saddle Stitch Unit ran out of staples, perform the following to supply it with staples. (1) Open the Front Lower Cover.

Fig. 1-035 (2) Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit.

Fig. 1-036 (3) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it upward.

Fig. 1-037

Ver. 5.1

488

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Hold the empty Cartridge by its sides, and remove it.

Fig. 1-038 (5) Insert the new Cartridge (FQ-SS50). Note: You must always replace both Cartridges at the same time.

Fig. 1-039 (6) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it downward, to return it to its original position.

Fig. 1-040 (7) Push in the Stitcher Unit, and close the Front Cover.

Fig. 1-041

Ver. 5.1

489

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.6. Removing Staple Jams from the Saddle Stitch

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the Copier's message indicates a staple jam in the Saddle Stitch Unit, perform the following to remove the jam. (1) Open the Front Lower Cover.

Fig. 1-042 (2) Slide out the Saddle Stitch Unit.

Fig. 1-043 (3) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it upward.

Fig. 1-044

Ver. 5.1

490

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Hold the Cartridge by its sides, and remove it.

Fig. 1-045 (5) Push down on the area identified as (A), and pull up the Tab identified as (B).

(B)

(A)

Fig. 1-046
(B)

(6) Remove the jammed staple, and return the Tab (B) to its original position.

Fig. 1-047 (7) Reinstall the Cartridge to its original position.

Fig. 1-048

Ver. 5.1

491

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) While pulling the Stitcher Unit towards you swing it downward, to return it to its original position.

Fig. 1-049 (9) Push the Saddle Stitch Unit back to its original position, and close the Front Lower Cover. Note: Whenever you remove a jammed Staple, be sure to execute staple edging.

Fig. 1-050

Ver. 5.1

492

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.7. Removing Paper Jams from the Punch Unit (Optional)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the display indicates a paper jam in the Punch Unit, perform the following to remove the jam. (1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.

Fig. 1-051 (2) Align the triangle mark on the knob within the range marked by .

Fig. 1-052 (3) Close the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.

Fig. 1-053

Ver. 5.1

493

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Open the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.

Fig. 1-054 (5) Remove the jam.

Fig. 1-055 (6) Close the Top Cover of the Punch Unit.

Fig. 1-056

Ver. 5.1

494

MAR 2005

11.1.1.3.8. Removing Punch Hole Scrap from the Punch Trash Box (Optional)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

If the display indicates to empty the Punch Trash Box, perform the following to remove the punch trash: (1) Open the Front Cover of the Punch Unit.

Fig. 1-057 (2) Pull out the Punch Trash Box.

Fig. 1-058 (3) Discard the Punch Scrap.

Fig. 1-059

Ver. 5.1

495

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Return the Punch Trash Box to its original position.

Fig. 1-060

11.1.1.4. Maintenance by the User

No. Item Timing 1 Replacing the Staple Cartridge (Finisher Unit) When the appropriate 2 Replacing the Staple Cartridge (Saddle Stitch Unit) indication is made on the copier's display. Caution: The Finisher Unit and the Saddle Stitch Unit use different cartridge types. Be sure that the appropriate type is used for each. Table. 1-004

Ver. 5.1

496

MAR 2005

11.1.2.

Finisher Unit Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.2.1. Basic Operation

This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the Finisher's functions, and the principles of operation used for the Finisher mechanical and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which these systems are operated. The symbol in the drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by together with the signal name indicates the flow of electrical signals. In descriptions of digital circuits of the Finisher, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0" indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to the circuit. A microprocessor is used in the Finisher to control all the finishing functions. Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites. For this reason, descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams. Two types of block diagrams are provided for separate functions: diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs, and diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up to the components.

Ver. 5.1

497

MAR 2005

11.1.2.1.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher is designed to deliver copies arriving from its Copier, and its modes of delivery include simple stacking, job offset*1, and staple. All operations involved in these modes are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, according to the appropriate commands from the Copier. Copies from the Copier may be routed to the Saddle Stitch Unit.

Swing guide drive system Alignment drive system Stapler drive system Delivery drive system Feeder drive system Shutter drive system Tray drive system

Control system

Saddle stitch unit control system

Fig. 2-001 Notes: *1:The term job offset refers to shifting each sorting job, separating a single stack into several stacks.

Ver. 5.1

498

MAR 2005

11.1.2.1.2. Outline of Electrical Circuitry

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher's sequence of operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is used for communication with the Copier (serial) in addition to controlling the finisher's sequence of operations. The Finisher Controller PCB responds to the various commands coming from the Copier through a serial communications line to drive solenoids, motors, and other components. In addition, it communicates the Finisher's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier through a serial communications circuit. The Finisher Controller PCB not only communicates with the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB but also communicates the Saddle Stitch Unit's various states (information on sensors and switches) to the Copier. The ICS used on the Finisher Controller PCB are designed for the following: Q1 (CPU) Controls sequence of operations. Q2 (EP-ROM) Backs up adjustment values. Q7 Contains sequence programs. Q8 / Q89 (RAM) Backs up initial setting data. Q4 (communications IC) Communicates with the copier and the saddle stitch unit. Q14 (regulator IC) Generates 5V. Flow of signals between the finisher and the options controller:
Finisher Controller PCB communication Q1 CPU Q2 EEP-ROM Q4 IC Q7 EP-ROM Q8/Q89 RAM Q14 Regulator IC Motor Solenoid Switch Sensor

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Punch Driver PCB (Punch Unit (optional))

Copier (DC Controller PCB PCU)

Fig. 2-002

Ver. 5.1

499

MAR 2005

11.1.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB

PI1

Inlet Sensor
PI3

Delivery Sensor Stapling Tray Sensor Shutter Open Sensor Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor Stapler Shift Home sensor Tray Home Position Sensor
PI4

J134-1 -2 -3

-3 -2 -1

J202

J106-3 -1 -2

-7 -9 -8

-3 -1 -2

J17-7 +5V -9 PENT -8

When the sensor detects paper, 1.

-5 -6 -7

J11-3 +5V -2 PDEL -1

When the sensor detects paper, 1. When the sensor detects paper, 1.

PI5

J118-3 -1 -2

-1 -3 -2

J207A

J122-3 -1 -2

-1 -3 -2

J208

-11 -9 -10

J9A-1 +5V -3 STPTY -2

-3 -1 -2

J12B-4 +5V -6 STOPN -5

When the shutter opens, 1.

PI6

PI7

J129-3 -1 -2

-1 -3 -2

J207A

J121-3 -1 -2

-4 -6 -5

J205

-8 -6 -7

J9A-4 +5V -6 JOGHP -5

When the alignment plate is at the home position, 1. When the stapler is at the home position, 1. When the tray is at the home position, 1.

-3 -1 -2

J12A-7 +5V -9 STPHP -8

PI8

J130-3 -1 -2

J210

J12A-4 +5V -6 TRYHP -5

Fig. 2-003

Ver. 5.1

500

MAR 2005

2. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB

Delivery Motor Clock Tray 1 Paper Sensor Tray 2 Paper Sensor Buffer Path Paper Sensor Joint Sensor

PI10

PI11

J1010

J101-3 -1 -2 J102-3 -1 -2

-1 -3 -2 -1 -3 -2

-3 -1 -2 -3 -1 -2

J207A

J120-1 -2 -3

-9 -8 -7

-3 -4 -5

J9A-9 -8 -7

+5V DELCLK

While the delivery motor is rotating, oscillates between 0 and 1. When paper is present on tray 1, 0. When paper is present on tray 2, 0. When paper is in the buffer path, 1.

-1 -3 -2 -4 -6 -5

-6 -4 -5 -3 -1 -2

J14-1 -3 -2 J14-4 -6 -5

PI12

J201

+5V FSTTRAY*

J1020

PI14

J110-3 -1 -2

J201

+5V SNDTRAY*

J24-4 -6 -5

+5V BUFPASS

PI15

J117-3 -1 -2

J12A-1 -3 -2

+5V JOINT

When the finisher is joined with the copier, 1. When the front door is open, 0.

Door Open Sensor Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor

PI16

J113-3 -1 -2

J12B-1 -3 -2

+5V DROPN

PI17

J105-3 -1 -2

J24-1 -3 -2

+5V BUFENTR

When paper is present at the buffer path inlet, 1. When the swing guide is open, 1.

PI18

Swing Guide Open Sensor Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1

PI19

J127-3 -1 -2

J204

-1 -3 -2

-3 -1 -2

J11-8 -10 -9

+5V SWGOPN

J400-3 -1 -2

J14-10 -12 -11

+5V SPTCLK1

When the tray lift motor is rotating, oscillates between 1 and 0. When the tray lift motor is rotating, oscillates between 1 and 0.

PI9 J400-6 Tray Lift -4 Motor -5 Clock Sensor 2 Sensor PCB

J14-7 -9 -8

+5V SFTCLK2

Fig. 2-004

Ver. 5.1

501

MAR 2005

3. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB Swing Motor Clock Sensor

J207B PI20 J125-1 -2 -3 -5 -4 -3 -7 -8 -9 J9B-5 +5V -4 SWGCLK -3

When the swing motor is rotating, oscillates between 0 and 1.

PS1

Height Sensor

J114-3 -4 -2 -1

-2 -1 -3 -4

-3 -4 -2 -1

J6-2 +5V -1 V0 -3 Vin -4

Measures the distance between the sensor and the top of the stack on the tray.

Door Switch
N.O. J112 MS1 +24V -1 -2 J5-1 +24VMOVE -3 DRSW

J212

Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch 1

N.O. MS2 J209 -1 -2 J5-9 -10

When the front door and the upper cover are closed, 1.

Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch 2

N.O. MS6 J209 -3 -4 J5-11 -12 +24VSTPL SWGGCLD

When the swing guide is closed, 1.

Safety Zone Switch

C. N.O. N.C. MS3 J131-3 -2 -1 J5-4 -5 -6 +24VHIFT TRAYSAF

When the tray is at the delivery, 1.

Shutter Closed Detect Switch

N.C. N.O. C. MS4 J140-1 -2 -3 -3 -2 -1 J7-3 -2 -1 J206 SHUTCLD

When the shutter is closed, 1.

Tray Upper Limit Detect Switch

N.C. MS5 JI32 -1 -2 J5-7 -8 +24VSHIFT TRYLMT

When the tray is at the upper limit, 0.

Fig. 2-005

Ver. 5.1

502

MAR 2005

4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

Stapler Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB

PI22

+5V J8-8 STPDRHP*

Staple Home Position Sensor

When a stapler is at the home position, 0.

+5V

Staple Switch

MS8

J8-10

HOOKEMP* +5V

+5V

When staple are present in the cartridge, 1.

J8-11 J8-12 J8-7

STPCON*

When the stapler is connected, 0.

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

J131-8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3

J400-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

J3-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

Communication line
+24V

+24V J132-1 -2 J500-1 -2 J19-1 -2

Copier

J2-2 -3 -4 -5 -7

Communication line

+24V J1-1 -2

Fig. 2-006

Ver. 5.1

503

MAR 2005

5. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

Flapper Solenoid
-1 SL1 J107 -2 -2 -1 J12A-10 -11

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB

+24V

When 0, the solenoid turns On.

FLPSL*

Buffer Inlet Solenoid

-1 SL2 J108 -2 -3 -2 J12B-9 -10

+24V

ENTSL*

When 0, the solenoid turns On.

Buffer Outlet Solenoid

-1 SL3 J109 -2 -2 -1 J24-7 -8

+24V

EXITSL*

When 0, the solenoid turns On.

Paddle Solenoid
SL5 J207B -1 J128 -2 -2 -1 -1 -2 -11 -10 J9B-1 -2

+24V

PDLSL*

When 0, the solenoid turns On.

Escape Solenoid
SL6 J207A -1 J123 -2 -3 -2 -10 -11 -2 -1 J9A-10 -11

+24V

When 0, the solenoid turns On.

ESCPSL*

Belt Escape Solenoid

-1 SL7 J500 -2 -2 -1 J12B-7 -8

+24V

BESCPSL* +24V

When 0, the solenoid turns On.

First Feed Motor

M1

J10-1 -2 -3 B* -4 A* -5 B -6 A

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and - in sequence.

Fig. 2-007

Ver. 5.1

504

MAR 2005

6. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

Delivery Motor
J119-2 M2 -1 -2 -1 -4 -5 J208 -4 -3

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

J11-4 -5

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and -.

+24V

Alignment Motor

M3

J124 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1

-6 -7 -8 -9 -10

-6 -5 -4 -3 -2

J9B-6 -7 B* -8 A* -9 B -10 A

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and - in sequence.

+24V

Stapler Shift Motor

J306 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1 J304-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 J302-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 J301-14 -15 -16 -17 -18 J8-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 B* A* B A

J207B

M4

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and - in sequence.

Staple Motor
M6 J307 1 1 2 2 3 3 J305-1 -2 -3 J302-6 -5 -4 J301-6 J8-13 -5 -14 -4 -15

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and -. According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and -.

Tray Lift Motor

J115-2 M5 -3 -2 -1 J7-4 -5

Swing Motor
J501-1 M7 -2 -1 -2 -7 -6 J208 -1 -2 J11-7 -6

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and -.

+24V

Second Feed Motor

J16-1 -2 -3 B* -4 A* -5 B -6 A

M8

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and - .

+24V

Inlet Feed Motor

J502-1 -2 -3

-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

-6 -5 J202 -4 -3 -2 -1

-4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9

J17-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

A B A B

M9

-4 -5 -6

According to rotation direction/speed, changes between + and - in sequence.

Fig. 2-008

Ver. 5.1

505

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2. Feed / Drive System 11.1.2.2.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher is designed to operate according to the commands from its Copier to deliver arriving copies to trays in the appropriate mode: simple stacking, job offset, stapling. See Fig. 2-009 for a diagram of the 4 delivery modes.
Method of delivery Normal delivery Simple stacking Job offset Staple Front diagonal Rear 1-point Rear diagonal 2-point

Saddle stitch delivery

Fig. 2-009

Normal Delivery Tray

Normal Delivery Tray

To Saddle Stitch Unit

Fig.2-010

Ver. 5.1

506

MAR 2005

1. Normal Delivery a. Simple Stacking The Finisher delivers copies directly to the Tray.
Tray
A B C

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Tray
A B C

Copies

Copies

Feed Roller 1 Feed Roller 2 Delivery Roller

Fig. 2-011 b. Job Offset The Finisher forwards all copies of each sort job to the Stapling Tray. The first sort job on the Stapling Tray is delivered with a shift to the front of about 30 mm, and the second sort job is delivered without being shifted. Whether the first copy or the last copy of a sort job should be shifted is determined by the Copier.
Tray Each sort job is stacked alternately.

Fig. 2-012
Swing Guide

Stapling Tray

Stopper Delivery Roller Feed Roller 1

Fig. 2-013
Results of Delivering 4 Sets Copies handled by job offset Direction of delivery

Fig. 2-014

Ver. 5.1

507

MAR 2005

c. Stapling The Finisher stacks copies on the Stapling Tray, then it staples and delivers the copies to the appropriate tray.
Tray Copies Staple

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Swing Guide

Stapling tray

Stopper Feed Roller 1

Delivery Roller

Fig. 2-015

A B C

Front diagonal stapling

Rear diagonal stapling

Fig. 2-016 2. Saddle Stitch Delivery A copy arriving in the Finisher from the Copier is routed to the Saddle Stitch by the Paper Deflecting Plate. The Saddle Stitch executes stitching and saddling operations on the copy and then delivers it to the Saddle Stitch Tray. For discussions of stacks in the Saddle Stitch, see 11.3.4.

A B C A B C A B C

Paper width/2

2-point stapling

Rear 1-point stapling

To Saddle Stitch

Fig.2-017

Ver. 5.1

508

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.2. Delivery Paths

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This Finisher has three different paper paths for delivery, each selected to suit paper size and delivery mode. 1. Straight Path When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-001, the copies pass under the Buffer Roller. Copy size Typical copy examples Length or width 182 mm or less A5-R, INV-R, thick stock Table. 2-001
Delivery Roller Buffer Roller

Fig. 2-018 2. Buffer Paper Path 1 When stacking copies shown in Table. 2-002, the copies pass over the Buffer Roller, increasing the distance between copies. Copy size Typical copy examples Length and width 182 mm or more A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, Transparencies (excluding thick stock) Table. 2-002
Buffer Roller

Feed Roller 2 Delivery Roller

Fig. 2-019

Ver. 5.1

509

MAR 2005

3. Buffer Paper Path 2 This is the paper path when copy sizes shown in Table. 2-003 are stacked. A maximum of two copies (two originals or more in the staple mode) are wrapped round the Buffer Roller, during which job offset and stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray. Copy size Typical copy examples Length 182 to 232 mm, and width 182 to 297 mm A4, B5, LTR, (excluding transparencies and thick stock) Table. 2-003 The following shows paper delivery operation in the case of two originals in the staple mode. a. The first copy is moved in the direction of the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Roller

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1st Copy

Fig. 2-020 b. The first copy wraps around the Buffer Roller and, at the same time, the second copy arrives from the Copier.

1st Copy

2nd Copy

Fig. 2-021 c. The second copy is laid over the first copy.
1st Copy 2nd Copy

Fig. 2-022

Ver. 5.1

510

MAR 2005

d. The first and second copies are simultaneously pulled into the Stapling Tray.
2nd Copy

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1st Copy

Fig. 2-023 Caution: The second copy as explained here is moved through buffer paper path 1. This fact is omitted from the discussion to avoid interrupting the sequence of operations.

Ver. 5.1

511

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.3. Feeding and Delivering

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The Finisher moves copies arriving from the Copier to the Delivery Tray, Stapling Tray, or the Saddle Stitch Unit according to the mode of delivery. On the Stapling Tray, the copies are subjected to job offset or stapling as instructed by the Copier. The First Feed Motor (M1), Second Feed Motor (M8) and Inlet Feed Motor (M9) are stepping motors, and Delivery motor (M2) is a DC motor. These motors are controlled by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB, and rotate either clockwise or counter-clockwise. The paper paths are equipped with the following four sensors for detection of paper (arrival, passage): Inlet Sensor (PI1) Delivery Sensor (PI3) Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4) Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14) In addition, each delivery tray is equipped with a sensor designed to detect the presence/absence of paper on it. No. 1 Tray Paper Sensor (PI11) No. 2 Tray Paper Sensor (PI12) If a copy fails to reach or move past each sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher Controller PCB identifies the condition as a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and at the same time informs the Copier of the condition. When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17) checks whether or not copies are being detected. In addition to the above four sensors, the Inlet Sensor, Delivery sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor are also checked for the presence of paper. If the sensors detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not completely been removed, and sends the paper jam removal signal to the Copier again.

Ver. 5.1

512

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
Escape solenoid drive signal ESCPSL Alignment motor drive signal Delivery motor drive signal Delivery motor clock signal DELCLK Swing motor drive signal Swing motor clock signal SWGCLK PI20 Shift motor clock detection signal 1 SFTCLK1 Shift motor clock detection signal 2 SFTCLK2 M7 PI9 PI19 PI10 M2 M3 M5 Tray lift motor drive signal Paddle solenoid drive signal PDLSL SL6 SL5 M8 Second feed motor drive signal M1 M4

Finisher Controller PCB

Fig. 2-024

513
SL7 M6 SL1 SL2 SL3

First feed motor drive signal M9 Inlet feed motor drive signal Buffer outlet solenoid drive signal EXITSL Buffer inlet solenoid drive signal EXTSL Flapper solenoid drive signal FLPSL Belt escape solenoid drive signal BESCPSL Stapler motor drive signal Stapler shift motor drive signal

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
No.2 tray paper detection signal SNDTRAY No.1 tray paper detection signal FSTTRAY PI11 PI12 PI4 PI3 Stapling tray paper detection signal STPTY Buffer path paper detection signal BUFPASS Delivery detection signal PDEL

Finisher Controller PCB

Fig. 2-025

514

PI14 PI7 Buffer path inlet paper detection signal BUFENTR PI1 Inlet paper detection signal PENT

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.4. Job Offset

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline In the job offset mode, sort jobs and entire copy groups are shifted to the front for delivery to the tray, and other copies are delivered to the tray without a shift. The copies are shifted by the alignment plate. The alignment plate is checked by the Alignment Home Position Sensor (PI6) to find out whether it is at the home position. The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Motor (M3) at power-on to return the Alignment Plate to its home position. The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) when the trailing edge of the copy has moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Delivery Motor counterclockwise, and drives the Swing Motor (M7). As a result, the drive of the Delivery Motor is transmitted to the Swing Guide to move up the guide. When the Swing Guide Open Detection Sensor (PI18) detects the Swing Guide, the Delivery Motor stops, and the Swing Guide is held at the up position. When the Swing Guide has moved up, the Feed Belts attached to the Feed Roller 2 move the copy to the Stapling Tray. The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is monitored by the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (PI4). (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.) The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Motor (M3) in advance, and keeps the Alignment Plate poised 10mm behind the trailing edge of a sheet. Whenever one sheet is moved to the Stapling Tray, each sheet is aligned, and when the fifth or last sheet in a sort job/group is fed to the Stapling Tray, the Guide Plate Retaining Solenoid (SL6) moves the Guide Plate away and under the Stapling Tray. From then on, the Alignment Motor shifts the sheets to the front by 30 mm. When the copy has been shifted, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor counterclockwise to move the Alignment Plate to a point 10 mm behind the trailing edge of the sheet. This alignment operation is repeated until alignment of the fifth or last sheet in a sort job is completed. At this time, the Swing Guide is moved down and is closed, and the Delivery Motor rotates clockwise to deliver the sheet.

Alignment Plate

Guide Plate Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI6) Paper Escape Solenoid (SL6) Alignment Motor (M3)

Fig. 2-026

Ver. 5.1

515

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Sequence of Operation (Job Offset)

Delivery Motor (M2)

First Feed Motor (M1) Second Feed Motor (M8) Alignment Plate Motor (M8) Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI6) Swing Guide Open Detection Switch (PI8) Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch (SW2)

Swing Motor (M7) Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (PI4) Guide Plate Escape Solenoid (SL6) : Motor CW rotation : Motor CCW rotation

Fig. 2-027 2. Flow of Job Offset Operations a. The Swing Guide moves up and, at the same time, the Feed Belts move the sheet to the Stapling Tray.
Swing Guide Offset Sheet Feed Roller 2 Tray 1/2 Delivery Roller Stapling Tray Stopper Feed Belts

Fig. 2-028 b. The Alignment Plate shifts the sheet to the front.
Existing Stack Alignment Plate

Offset Sheet

Fig. 2-029

Ver. 5.1

516

MAR 2005

c. The Swing Guide moves down and, at the same time, the Delivery Roller delivers the sheet.
Offset Sheet Swing Guide

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Feed Roller 2 Feed Belts Tray 1/2 Delivery Roller Stapling Tray Stopper

Fig. 2-030

Ver. 5.1

517

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.5. Staple Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The Stapler Unit staples a stack of as many sheets as specified. The stapling position differs according to the selected staple mode and paper size. The Stapler Unit is checked by the Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7) to find out whether it is at the home position. When starting operation after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Stapler Shift Motor (M4) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. If the Stapler is already at the home position, then (M4) is not turned on.

Stapler Shift Motor (M4)

Sheets

Stapler

Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7)

Fig. 2-031

Paper width/2 Front diagonal stapling 2-point stapling

Rear 1-point stapling Rear diagonal stapling

Fig. 2-032

Ver. 5.1

518

MAR 2005

2. First Sheet The Finisher Controller PCB stops the Delivery Motor (M2) as soon as the trailing edge of the first sheet has moved past the Feed Roller 2. Then, it rotates the Delivery Motor clockwise to switch the gear drive to the Swing Motor (M7), causing the Swing Guide to move up. When the Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI18) finds the Swing Guide at the up position, the Swing Motor stops, maintaining the Swing Guide at the up position. When the Swing Guide has moved up, the feed belts of the Feed Roller 2 move the sheet to the Stapling Tray. (The first sheet is fed to the Stapling Tray while the Swing Guide is moving up.) The presence of paper on the Stapling Tray is detected by the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (PI4).

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Alignment Plate Shift Motor (M3) when the Stapling Tray Paper Sensor has detected paper to put sheets in order. The Alignment Plate is kept poised 10 mm behind the trailing edge of the paper. The Swing Guide is kept in wait at the up position until the last sheet is output onto the Stapling Tray.
Swing Guide 1st Sheet Feed Roller 2 Tray 1/2 Feed Belts Delivery Roller Stapling Tray Stapler

Fig. 2-033

Swing Guide Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI18) Swing Guide Closed Detect Switches (MS2/MS6)

Delivery Roller

Swing Motor Clock Sensor (PI20) Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PI10)

Swing Motor (M7)

Delivery Motor (M2)

Fig. 2-034

Ver. 5.1

519

MAR 2005

3. 2nd and Subsequent Sheets The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Belt Escape Solenoid (SL7) before the trailing edge of the second and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2 to make the Feed Belt escape. This operation is performed to reduce the time it takes for the trailing edge of the paper to fall on the Stapling Tray, and to improve the duty cycle.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Paddle Solenoid (SL5) as soon as the trailing edge of the second and subsequent sheets have moved past the Feed Roller 2, causing the drive of the Second Feed Motor (M8) to rotate the Paddle. The sheets are pushed by the Paddle and moved to the Stapling Tray. Almost simultaneously with the trailing edge of the sheet falling into the Stapling Tray, the Belt Escape Solenoid turns off to return the Feed Belts that were in the escape position to its original position, and feed the sheet onto the Stapling Tray. When the sheet has been output onto the Stapling Tray, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Alignment Motor (M3) to put the sheets in order.
Swing Guide 2nd and Subsequent Sheets Feed Roller 2 Feed Belts Tray 1/2 SL7 Delivery Roller Stapling Tray Stapler Belt Escape Solenoid

Fig. 2-035

Feed Belts

Escape Direction

Belt Escape Solenoid (SL7)

Fig. 2-036

Ver. 5.1

520

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paddles

Paddle Solenoid (SL5)

Paddles 2nd and Subsequent Sheets 1st Sheet

Stapler
M8

2nd Feed Motor

Stopper

Fig. 2-037 4. Last sheet When the last sheet has been put in order, the Finisher Controller PCB turns on the Alignment Motor (M3) to move the Alignment Plate to the alignment position (to butt the plate against the stack). Then, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Swing Motor (M7) counter-clockwise to move down the Swing Guide. The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler according to the staple mode for stapling. From then on, it rotates the Delivery Motor (M2) clockwise to delivery the stack to the tray.
Swing Guide Sheets Feed Roller 2 Feed Belts Tray 1/2 Delivery Roller Stapling Tray Stapler

Fig. 2-038

Ver. 5.1

521

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Swing Guide

Delivery Roller

Swing Motor (M7) Delivery Motor (M2)

Fig. 2-039

11.1.2.2.6. Staple Unit

Stapling is executed by the Stapler Motor (M6). A signal rotation of the cam by the motor results in one stapling operation. The cam is checked by the Stapling Home Position Sensor (PI22) to find out whether it is at the home position. The Stapler Motor is controlled by the Microprocessor (Q1) on the Finisher Controller so that it is rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise. When the Stapling Home Position Sensor is off, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Stapler Motor clockwise until the sensor turns on so as to return the Stapling Cam to its initial state. The presence/absence of staples inside the Staple Cartridge is detected by the Staple Detecting Switch (MS9). The Finisher Controller PCB does not drive the Stapler Motor (M6) unless the Swing Guide Closed Detecting Switch 2 (MS6) is on (i.e., the swing guide is closed). This is to protect against injuries that could occur when a finger is stuck inside the Stapler.

Fig. 2-041

Ver. 5.1

522

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Staple edge detection signal

Cartridge detection signal

Stapling home position detection signal

Finisher Controller PCB

Fig. 2-042
Start signal Mode selected Stacking Delivery Motor (M2) First Feed Motor (M1) Alignment Plate Motor (M3) Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI6) Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI8) Stapling Tray Paper Sensor (PI4) Swing Guide Open/Closed Detecting Switch (MS2) Stapler Home Position sensor (PI7) Paddle Solenoid (SL5) Stapler Shift Motor (M4) Stapler Motor (M4) : Motor CW rotation : Motor CCW rotation 1st sheet 2nd sheet

Staple detection signal

Staple motor drive signal

Stapling Delivery

Fig. 2-043

Ver. 5.1

523

MAR 2005

1. Shifting the Staple Unit The Stapler Unit is moved by the Stapler Shift Motor (M4). Its home position is detected by the Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor (PI7). When the start signal arrives from the Copier, the Stapler moves to the center of its movement range. This movement occurs regardless of the selected mode of delivery, as no specific mode is recognized at this point in time. When the command for stapling arrives from the Copier after the first sheet has reached the Copier Pre-registration Sensor, the Stapler moves to the staple wait position to suit the appropriate stapling position and paper size. See Fig. 2-044 and later for an idea of the wait position according to the stapling mode. a. Front Diagonal Stapling The position is the same as the stapling position.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Stopper

Stapling Tray Delivery Direction

Stopper

Guide Plate Stapler

Fig. 2-044 b. Rear 1-point Stapling The Stapler is kept in wait at the center position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling position for each stapling operation.
Stopper Stapling Position Wait Position Stapling Tray Delivery Direction Stapler

Stopper Guide Plate

Fig. 2-045

Ver. 5.1

524

MAR 2005

c. Rear Diagonal Stapling For A4, B5 and LTR sizes, the Stapler is kept in wait toward the rear away from the stapling position. The Stapler is moved to and from the stapling position for each stapling operation.
Stapler Wait Position Stapling Position Stopper Stapling Tray Delivery Direction Stopper Guide Plate

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 2-046 d. 2-Point Stapling The Stapler is kept in wait at the center of paper. Stapling occurs at two points, first at the rear and then at the front.
Stopper Stapling position Wait position Stapler Stapling Tray delivery direction

Stapling position Stopper Guide Plate

Fig. 2-047

Ver. 5.1

525

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.7. Tray Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher has two delivery trays for normal delivery, each accepting sheets. Each tray is moved up and down by the Tray Lift Motor (M5). The position of tray is identified with reference to the number of clock pulses of the Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9/PI19) coming from the Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8). The Finisher Controller PCB finds out in which direction (up or down) the tray is moving based on combinations of pulses from the two clock sensors. The Finisher Controller PCB drives the Tray Lift Motor (M5) to return the tray to the home position at poweron. If the tray is already at the home position, then (M5) is not turned on. The Finisher Controller PCB moves up and down the tray selected by the Copier so that it is positioned at the delivery slot. The upper limit of the tray is detected by the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch (MS5). The Finisher Controller PCB stops the drive (up) of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch turns on. The height of the stack on the tray is identified by the Height Sensor (PS1), which measures its distance from the top of the stack. The tray is moved down when the distance between the top of the stack and the Delivery Assembly drops to a specific measurement. The Finisher Controller PCB cuts off the +24V power of the Tray Lift Motor (M5) as soon as the Safety Zone Detecting Switch (MS3) turns on while the Shutter and the Swing Guide are open, stopping the operation of the Finisher.

Tray 1

Tray Guide

Tray 2

Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch (MS5)

Encoder Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 2 (PI9)

Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1 (PI19) Safety Zone Switch (MS3) Tray Lift Motor (M5) Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8)

Fig. 2-048

Ver. 5.1

526

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.8. Detecting the Height of Output on the Tray

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The number of sheets delivered to the tray and the number of sets (number of stapling operations) are stored in memory by the Finisher Controller PCB. The height of the paper checked by the Height Sensor (PS1). See Table. 2-004 for the maximum loading capacity of each tray. The Finisher Controller PCB stops operation when the conditions in Table. 2-004 occur, informing the Copier that the tray is full. Stacking mode Tray 5.79 in (147 mm) Tray 1 high (1000 sheets) 5.79 in (147 mm) Tray 2 high (1000 sheets) Non-staple sort Small-size Large-size 1.73 in (44 mm) high (500 sheets) 2.91 in (74 mm) high (500 sheets) Mixed sizes 1.73 in (44 mm) high (300 sheets) 1.73 in (44 mm) high (300 sheets) Staple sort Mixed sizes 4.33 in 2.91 in 0.87 in (110 mm) (74 mm) (22 mm) high high high (750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets / 30 sets) / 30 sets) /30 sets) 4.33 in 2.91 in 0.87 in (110 mm) (74 mm) (22 mm) high high high (750 sheets (500 sheets (150 sheets / 30 sets) / 30 sets) / 30 sets) Small-size Large-size

Notes: 1. The capacity for the non-staple sort mode is approximate and computed based on 21 lbs (80g/m2) paper. 2. Alignment for stacks containing 750 sheets or more is not guaranteed. 3. Stacking height specification is 7 mm. Caution: 1. The term small-size stands for A4, A5-R, B5, LTR, and INV-R. 2. The term large-size Stands for A3, A4-R, B4, B5-R, LGL, LDR, LTR-R, and FLS. Table. 2-004

Height Sensor (PS1) Paper

Fig. 2-049 527

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.9. Shutter Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When the Top Output Tray reaches capacity, the output is then switched to another tray. Using the Tray Lift Motor (M5) the Finisher Controller PCB closes the shutter mounted on the delivery slot before moving the tray. This prevents the existing stack on the tray from interfering with the delivery slot, and prevents any access by hand while the trays are moving. The shutter moves up (to close) when the Second Feed Motor (M8) rotates counter-clockwise, and is held in position when the motor stops. When the Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise once again, it moves down (to open) to enable delivery. When the shutter is held at the up position, claws slide out of the Swing Guide to engage the back of the shutter. This way, the existing stack and the Swing Guide engage while the tray is moved, preventing the guide from opening. The claws slide in when the shutter is moved down to release the engagement. The upward movement of the shutter is monitored by the Shutter Closed Detecting Switch (MS4), and the downward movement is monitored by the Shutter Open Sensor (PI5). See the following diagrams for how these operations take place. 1. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise to move the shutter up.

M8

Second Feed Motor

Fig. 2-050 2. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the new tray moves to the stacking lower limit. The distance of movement is detected by the Tray Shift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9/19).

M5

Tray Lift Motor

Fig. 2-051

Ver. 5.1

528

MAR 2005

3. The Second Feed Motor rotates counter-clockwise, and the shutter moves down.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M8

Second Feed Motor

Fig. 2-052 4. The Tray Lift Motor rotates, and the tray moves to suit the height of the stack. The appropriate height in relation to the existing stack is checked by the Height Sensor (PS1).

Height Sensor (S1)

M5

Tray Lift Motor

Fig. 2-053

Claw Shutter Claw Shutter Closed Detecting Switch (MS4) Shutter Open Sensor (PI5)

Second Feed Motor

M8

One-Way Cam

Fig. 2-054

Ver. 5.1

529

MAR 2005

Sequence Operations (shutter drive) Move from Tray 1 to Tray 2

Shutter closed Second Feed Motor (M8) Tray moved Shutter opened

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Tray moved

Tray Lift Motor (M5) Shutter Closed Detecting Switch (MS4) Shutter Open Sensor (PI5) Correct height detected Height Sensor (PS1) : Motor CW rotation : Motor CCW rotation

Fig. 2-055

Ver. 5.1

530

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.10. Buffer Path Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This machine is provided with a buffer paper path for continuously receiving paper from the Copier during stapling and stack job offset operation on the Stapling Tray. A maximum of three copies (three originals or more in the staple mode) are wrapped around the Buffer Roller. During this time, stack job offset and stapling are performed on the Stapling Tray. The following shows operation on the buffer paper path. 1. When the first sheet arrives, the Buffer Inlet Solenoid (SL2) remains off. The first sheet enters the buffer path.

OFF

1st Sheet Buffer Inlet Solenoid

Fig. 2-056 2. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17), the Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns on so as to cause the sheet to wrap around the Buffer Roller.
Buffer Outlet Solenoid
SL3 ON

SL2

Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17)

Fig. 2-057 3. When the leading edge of the sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the Buffer Roller stops and waits for the second sheet.
1st Sheet

2nd Sheet Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)

Fig. 2-058

Ver. 5.1

531

MAR 2005

4. When the second sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller starts to operate once again.
1st Sheet

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2nd Sheet Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Fig. 2-059 5. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and the 2nd sheet stacks on the 1st sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet Sheet

Fig. 2-060 6. When the leading edge of the 2nd sheet has moved past the Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14), the Buffer Roller stops and waits for the 3rd sheet.
1st 2nd Sheet Sheet

3rd Sheet Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14)

Fig. 2-061

Ver. 5.1

532

MAR 2005

7. When the 3rd sheet arrives and its leading edge reaches the Inlet Sensor (PI1), the Buffer Roller starts to operate once again.
1st 2nd Sheet Sheet

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3rd Sheet Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Fig. 2-062 8. When the Buffer Roller starts to operate, the Buffer Outlet Solenoid (SL3) turns off so that the path is directed in the direction of delivery. (The actual switch-over will occur after the trail edge of the first sheet has moved past the flapper.)
Buffer Outlet Solenoid
SL3 OFF

1st Sheet

3rd Sheet Inlet Sensor (PI1)

Fig. 2-063 9. The Buffer Roller continues to rotate, and all the sheets are fed together towards the Delivery Roller.

Fig. 2-064

Ver. 5.1

533

MAR 2005

11.1.2.2.11. Detecting Jams

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The following sensors are used to detect the presence/absence of paper and to make sure that sheets are moved properly: Inlet Sensor (PI1) Delivery Sensor (PI3) Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4) Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14) A jam is identified with reference to the presence/absence of paper at each specific sensor at the times programmed in the memory of the Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB. When the CPU identifies a jam, it suspends the Finisher's delivery operation and informs the Copiers DC controller of the presence of a jam. When all doors are closed after the paper jam is removed, the Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17) checks whether or not paper is being detected in addition to the above four sensors (Inlet Sensor, Delivery Sensor, Stapling Tray Sensor and Buffer Path Paper Sensor). If the sensors detect paper, the Finisher Unit judges that paper jams have not completely been removed, and sends the paper jam removal signal to the Copier again. The Tray 1 Paper Sensor (PI11) and Tray 2 Paper Sensor (PI12) are not used to detect jams.

PI3

PI14 PI1 PI4

Fig. 2-065

No. PI1 PI3 PI4 PI14

Sensor Names Inlet Sensor Delivery Sensor Stapler Tray Sensor Buffer Path Paper Sensor Table. 2-005

Ver. 5.1

534

MAR 2005

1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (11H) The Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when feeding an equivalent of 400 mm from when the copier delivery signal has been issued.
Copier delivery signal Copier delivery signal

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Equivalent of 400 mm Jam check Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Inlet Feed Motor (M9) Inlet Sensor (PI1) Inlet Feed Motor (M9) Jam check

Equivalent of 400 mm

Jam

Fig. 2-066 2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (21H) The sheet does not move past the Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of the sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.

Equivalent of size x2 Jam check Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Inlet Feed Motor (M9) Jam check

Equivalent of size x2 Jam Inlet Sensor (PI1) Inlet Feed Motor (M9)

Fig. 2-067 3. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Delay Jam (13H) The Buffer Inlet Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 540 mm has been fed after the Inlet Sensor turned on.

Equivalent of 540 mm Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14) First Feed Motor (M1) Normal Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14) First Feed Motor (M1)

Equivalent of 540 mm

Jam

Fig. 2-068

Ver. 5.1

535

MAR 2005

4. Buffer Path Paper Sensor Stationary Jam (23H) The sheet does not move past the Buffer Inlet Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of the sheet has been fed after the sensor turned on.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Equivalent of Size x2 Jam check Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14) First Feed Motor (M1) Jam check Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI14) First Feed Motor (M1)

Equivalent of Size x2

Normal

Jam

Fig. 2-069 5. Delivery Sensor Delay Jam (14H) a. Straight Path The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 285 mm has been fed after the Inlet Sensor turned on.

Equivalent of 285 mm Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Delivery Sensor (PI3) First Feed Motor (M1) Second Feed Motor (M8) Normal Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Delivery Sensor (PI3) First Feed Motor (M1) Second Feed Motor (M8)

Equivalent of 285 mm Jam

Fig. 2-070 b. Buffer Path The Delivery Sensor does not detect paper when an equivalent of 480 mm has been fed after the Inlet Sensor turned on.

Equivalent of 480 mm Jam check Normal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Delivery Sensor (PI3) First Feed Motor (M1) Second Feed Motor (M8) Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Delivery Sensor (PI3) First Feed Motor (M1) Second Feed Motor (M8)

Equivalent of 480 mm Jam

Fig. 2-071

Ver. 5.1

536

MAR 2005

6. Delivery Sensor Stationary Jam (24H) The sheet does not move past the Delivery Sensor when an equivalent of twice the feeding length of the sheet has been fed after the Delivery Sensor turned on.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Equivalent of size x2 Jam check Delivery Sensor (PI3) Second Feed Motor (M8) Delivery Motor (M2) Normal Jam check

Equivalent of size x2 Jam Delivery Sensor (PI3) Second Feed Motor (M8) Delivery Motor (M2)

Fig. 2-072 7. Stapling Tray Sensor Stationary Jam (25H) The sheet does not move past the Stapling Tray Sensor 1 sec after the Delivery Motor (M2) turned on.

1 sec Jam check Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4) Delivery Motor (M2) Normal Jam check Stapling Tray Sensor (PI4) Delivery Motor (M2)

1 sec Jam

Fig. 2-073 8. Timing Jam (05H) The Inlet Sensor (PI1) detects a sheet before the delivery signal is received from the Copier. 9. Staple Jam (05H) When the Staple Motor (M6) is rotating clockwise, the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI22) does not turn on within 0.5 sec. after it has turned off. However, the sensor turns on within 0.5 sec. after the motor has been rotated counter-clockwise. 10. Power-On Jam (07H) The Inlet Sensor (PI1), Delivery Sensor (PI3), Buffer Path Paper Sensor (PI4) and/or Buffer Path Inlet Paper Sensor (PI17) detects paper at power-on. 11. Door Open Jam (08H) The Joint Sensor (PI15), Door Open Sensor (PI16) or Door Switch (MS1) detects the cover open during operation (including the Upper Door Switch (MS1P) and Front Door Switch (MS2P) when the optional punch unit is mounted). 12. Punch Jam (0AH) The Punch Home Sensor (PI3P) does not turn on again within 200 misc. after turning off.

Ver. 5.1

537

MAR 2005

11.1.2.3. Power Supply System 11.1.2.3.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Finisher Controller PCB is supplied with 24 VDC power when the Copier is turned on. The 24 VDC power line is used to drive the motor and solenoids. It also serves for sensors and ICs on PCBs after being converted to 5 VDC by the Regulator IC(Q14) on the Finisher Controller PCB. The 24 VDC power is also used to feed power from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. The power is also supplied to the Punch Driver PCB when the optional Punch Unit is mounted. Some of the 24 VDC power used to drive motors is cut off when the Door Switch (MS1) is open. The power to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB and the Punch Driver PCB, however, will not be cut off. Fig. 2-074 is a block diagram showing the power supply system.
Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Door Switch (MS1) 24V Motor

24V 24V Circuit Breaker (CB1) 24V Motor

Solenoid

Copier

Finisher Controller PCB 5V Sensors

(Q14) Regular IC 5V Logic

Punch Driver PCB (Punch Unit (optional))

Fig. 2-074

11.1.2.3.2. Protection Functions

The 24 VDC power line used to drive motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1) for protection against overcurrent. The 24V line used to drive the First Feed Motor (M1), Alignment Motor (M3), and Stapler Shift Motor (M4) are equipped with a fuse, which is designed to blow when an overcurrent occurs.

Ver. 5.1

538

MAR 2005

11.1.3.

Saddle Stitch Unit Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.3.1. Basic Operation

This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the saddle stitch functions, and the principles of operation used for the saddle stitch mechanical and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which these systems are operated. The symbol in drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by together with the signal name indicates the flow of electrical signals. In descriptions of digital circuits on the Saddle Stitch, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0" indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to circuit. A microprocessor is used in the Saddle Stitch to control all finishing functions. Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites. For this reason, descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams. Two types of block diagrams are provided for separate functions: diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs, and diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components.

11.1.3.1.1. Outline
The unit stitches (2 points) a stack of sheets delivered by the Finisher Unit and folds it in two for delivery. All these operations are controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB in response to commands from the Copier via the Finisher Unit.
Finisher Unit Control System

Guide Plate Drive System Paper Positioning Plate Drive System Control System Alignment Drive System Saddle Stitch Drive System Delivery Drive System Feed Drive System Paper Pushing Plate Drive System Paper Folding Roller Drive System

Fig. 3-001

Ver. 5.1

539

MAR 2005

11.1.3.1.2. Electrical Circuitry

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The sequence of operations used for the Saddle Stitch is controlled by the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB has a microprocessor. This microprocessor is used to control the sequence of operations and to handle serial communications with the Finisher Controller PCB, driving solenoids and motors in response to the various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB. The Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is also used to communicate the state of various sensors and switches to the Finisher Controller PCB in serial. The functions of the major ICs mounted on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB are as follows: Q1 Controls the sequence of operations. Q2 Contains sequence programs. Q3 Controls the sequence of operations. Q4 Handles IPC communications. Electrical Circuitry Block Diagram
Sensor Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Q1 CPU Switch Motor Solenoid

Q2 ROM Q3 RAM Q4 Communications IC

Finisher Controller PCB

Copier

Fig. 3-002

Ver. 5.1

540

MAR 2005

11.1.3.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB When the Paper pushing plate motor is rotating, it pulsates between 1 and 0. When the front door is open, 0. When the delivery cover is open, 0. When the Paper folding motor is rotating, it pulsates between 1 and 0. When the alignment plate is at home position, 1. When paper is present on the tray, 1. When the Paper positioning plate is at the home position sensor, 1.

Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor Front Door Open/Closed Sensor Delivery Cover Sensor Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor

PI1S

J107-1 -2 -3 J104-3 -1 -2 J103-3 -1 -2 J303-1 -3 -2 J203-3 -1 -2

J11-15 +5V -14 LUNGECLK -13 J11-10 +5V -12 FDR -11 J11-7 +5V -9 EJCVR -8

PI2S

PI3S

PI4S

J102-1 -3 -2

J11-6 +5V -5 FLDCLK -4

PI5S

J101-3 -1 -2

J309-1 -3 -2

J209-3 -1 -2

J11-1 +5V -3 JOGHP -2

PI6S

Paper Tray Sensor Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor

PI7S

J502 J209A J402

J100-3 -1 -1 -3 -2 -2

-3 -4 -1 -6 -2 -5 J302 J202A J202

-3 -1 -2

J6-7 +5V -9 TRYPAR -8

J106-3 -1 -2

-1 -3 -2

-6 -4 -5

J6-4 -6 +5V -5 PAPPOS

Fig. 3-003

Ver. 5.1

541

MAR 2005

2. Inputs to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor Inlet Cover Sensor

PI8S

PI9S

J124-3 -1 -2 J525-3 -1 -2 -2 -4 -3 -3 -1 -2 -2 -4 -3 -3 -1 -2

J301 J201A J201

J105-3 -1 -3

-1 -3 -2

-3 -1 -2

J6-1 +5V -3 PPOSPAR -2

When paper is present at the paper positioning plate, 1. When the inlet cover is closed, 1. When paper is present in the delivery sensor unit, 1. When the flag of the crescent roller is at the sensor, 1. When the guide is at home position, 1.

J10-6 +5V -8 INLTCVR -7 J9-1 +5V -3 DELV -2

PI11S

Delivery Sensor Crescent Roller Phase Sensor Guide Home Position Sensor
PI12S

J425 J325

J126-3 -1 -2

J225 J125

J9-4 +5V -6 FDRLHP -5

PI13S

J117-3 -1 -2

J9-7 +5V -9 GIDHP -8

PI14S Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor PI15S Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor PI16S

J128-3 -1 -2

J9-10 +5V -12 LUNGEHP -11

When the paper pushing plate is at home position, 1.

J129-3 -1 -2

J9-13 +5V When the paper -15 LUNGETOP pushing plate is at -14

the

leading edge, 1.

Saddle Stitch Unit IN Sensor

PI17S

J131-3 -1 -2

J13-1 +5V -3 STPLHP* -2

When the saddle stitch unit is properly inserted, 0. When paper is present in the vertical path, 1.

Vertical Path Paper Sensor

PI21S

Paper Folding Home Position Sensor

J130-3 -2 -1

J308 J208A J208

J132-3 -1 -2

-1 -3 -2

-4 -2 -3

J13-4 +5V -6 VPJM -5

J18-1 +5V -3 PAFLDHP* -2

When the paper folding roller is at home position, 0.

Fig. 3-004

Ver. 5.1

542

MAR 2005

3. Inputs to the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Paper Sensor PCB No. 1 Paper Sensor No. 2 Paper Sensor No. 3 Paper Sensor
PI18S J123-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 -1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

PI20S

Saddle Stitch Unit (front) Saddle Stitch Home Position Sensor (front) Staple Sensor (front)
MS7S

J315-3

J304 J204A J204

PI19S

J10-1 -2 -3 -4 -5

+5V 1STPA 2NDPA 3RDPA

When paper is present at the No.1 paper sensor, 1. When paper is present at the No.2 paper sensor, 1. When paper is present at the No.3 paper sensor, 1.

-5 J305 J120

-5

J8-3 STCHHP1*

MS6S

-1 -2

-7 -6

-7 -6

-1 HKEMP1 -2

When the saddle stitch unit is at the home position for stitching, 0. When no staple is present 0.

Saddle Stitch Unit (rear) Saddle Stitch Home Position MS5S Sensor (rear) J316-3 Staple Sensor (rear)
MS4S -1 -2

JD2 JD1

-5 J306 J121

-5

J8-10

STCHHP2*

-7 -6

-7 -6

-8 HKEMP2 -9

When the saddle stitch unit is at the home position for stitching, 0. When no staple is present, 0.

Inlet Door Switch

N.O. MS1S J4-1 -2

+24V

INLTCVRMS

Front Door Switch

N.O. MS2S J4-3 -4 FDROPN

When the inlet door is closed, 1. When the front door is closed, 1. When the delivery door is closed, 1.

Delivery Door Switch

N.O. MS3S J305 J205 J4-5 -6

DELVMS

Fig. 3-005

Ver. 5.1

543

MAR 2005

4. Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

No. 1 Paper Deflect Solenoid
-1 SL1S -2 J118 -2 -1 J15-1 -2

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

+24V

When 0, the solenoid turns ON.

FLPSL1*

No. 2 Paper Deflect Solenoid

-1 SL2S -2 J117 -2 -1 J15-3 -4

+24V

When 0, the solenoid turns ON.

FLPSL2* +24V

Feed Plate Contact

-1 SL4S -2 J116 -2 -1 J15-5 -6

When 0, the solenoid turns ON.

RLNIPSL*

Feed Motor
-1 J115A -2 M1S -3 -4 -4 -3 -2 -1 J5-1 -2 -3 -4 A A* B B*

The pulse signals change according to the rotation of the motor.

Paper Folding Motor

J112-2 M2S -1 -7 J4-8

The state (+ and -) changes according to the rotation of the motor.

+24V

Guide Motor
J119-5 -4 M3S -3 -2 -1 J12-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 J7-6 -7 -8 -9 -10 J7-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 B* A* B A B* A* B A B* A* B A

The pulse signals change according to the rotation of the motor.

+24V

Paper Positioning Plate Motor

J114-5 -4 -3 -2 -1

M4S

The pulse signals change according to the rotation of the motor.

+24V

Alignment Motor

J113-5 -4 -3 -2 -1

M5S

The pulse signals change according to the rotation of the motor.

Fig. 3-006

Ver. 5.1

544

MAR 2005

5. Outputs from the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Saddle Stitch Unit (front)
J315-4 J305 M7S J120 -5 -6 -7 Saddle Stitch motor (front) -4 -3 -2 -1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

J8-4 -5 -6 -7

The state (+ and -) changes according to the rotation of the motor.

Saddle Stitch Unit (rear)

J316-4 J306 -6 -7 Saddle Stitch motor (rear) -5

JD2 JD1 -4 J121 -3 -2 -1

J8-11 -12 -13 -14

M6S

The state (+ and -) changes according to the rotation of the motor.

Paper Pushing Plate Motor

J108-1 M8S -2 J4-9 -10

The state (+ and -) changes according to the rotation of the motor.

Finisher Controller PCB

J400-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 J131-8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 J2-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

Communication line
+24V

+24V J500-1 -2 J132-1 -2 J1-1 -2

Fig. 3-007

Ver. 5.1

545

MAR 2005

11.1.3.2. Feeding / Drive System 11.1.3.2.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Saddle Stitch Unit aligns the sheets coming from the Finisher unit and stitches the resulting stack for delivery to the Delivery Tray according to the commands coming from the Finisher Controller PCB. The machine's operation consists of the following: 1. Receives the sheets 2. Aligns the sheets 3. Stitches the stack 4. Feeds the stack 5. Folds and delivers the stack

1. Receives the sheets

3. Stitches the stack

2. Align the sheets

5. Folds and delivers the stack

4. Feeds the stack

Fig. 3-008

Ver. 5.1

546

MAR 2005

1. Receiving Sheets The Saddle Stitch Unit receives the sheets from the Finisher unit and sends them to the vertical path in a vertical orientation. The vertical path assembly uses two deflecting plates and a paper positioning plate to position the center of the stack so it matches the stapling / folding requirements. Sheets coming later are output closer to the delivery slot, and the volume of paper that may be output is as follows: 15 sheets (maximum of 14 sheets of 80g/m2 + 1 sheet of 133g/m2)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Direction of delivery

2nd Sheet 1st Sheet Paper Positioning Plate

Fig. 3-009 2. Aligning the Sheets The Alignment Plates operate to set the sheets in order each time a sheet of paper is sent to the vertical path assembly. The Alignment Plates are mounted at the edge of the vertical path assembly. The Alignment Plates also operate after stapling to prepare the stack for delivery.
Sheets

Alignment Plate

Alignment Plate

Paper Positioning Plate

Fig. 3-010

Ver. 5.1

547

MAR 2005

3. Stitching When all the sheets are properly set in the vertical path assembly, the two stitchers, stitch the stack. The Stitchers are positioned so that they face the center of a stack.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The two Stitchers are not operated simultaneously so as to prevent the paper from wrinkling between the two staples and to limit the load on the power supply. If only one sheet of paper arrives from the Copier, stitching does not take place and the sequence goes to the next operation (stack feeding).

Stitcher

Staple

Fig. 3-011

Ver. 5.1

548

MAR 2005

4. Feeding the Stack The unit folds the stitched stack of sheets, and then feeds them to the point of delivery. This point is where the center of the stack (i.e., stapling position), matches the height of the Paper Pushing Plate and the Paper Folding Roller nip. The stack is moved forward by operating the Paper Positioning Plate. When the plate is operated, the Guide Plate which has been covering the Paper Folding Rollers, also moves down so that the Paper Folding Rollers directly face the stack.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paper Folding Roller Paper Pushing Guide

Paper Positioning Plate Guide Plate

Fig. 3-012 5. Folding / Delivering the Stack The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the center of the stack again to move it in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers. In response, the Paper Folding Rollers pick the stack along its center and folds it in two. The Paper Folding Rollers together with the Delivery Roller then move the stack along to output it on the Delivery Tray.

Paper Folding Roller Delivery Roller

Fig. 3-013

Ver. 5.1

549

MAR 2005

11.1.3.3. Paper Output Mechanism 11.1.3.3.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The paper output mechanism serves to keep a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher in place for the next operation (stapling, folding). The paper inlet is equipped with the No. 1 Flapper and the No. 2 Flapper, which operate to configure the paper path to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is kept poised at a predetermined location to suit the paper size. The Paper Positioning Plate is driven by the Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S), and the position of the plate is identified in reference to the number of motor pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7S). A sheet moved by the Inlet Roller is handled by the Feed Rollers and the Crescent Roller and held in a predetermined position. The Feed Plate moves the sheets by coming into contact with or moving away from the sheets as needed. The Alignment Plates sets the stack in order each time a sheet is ejected. The Alignment Plates are driven by the Alignment Motor (M5S), whose position is identified in reference to the number of motor pulses coming from the Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S). To prevent interference between paper and the Paper Folding Rollers when the paper is being ejected, the Folding Rollers are designed to be covered by a Guide Plate. The Guide Plate moves down before paper is folded so as to expose the Paper Folding Rollers. The Inlet is equipped with the No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3 Paper Sensors (PI18S, PI19S, PI20S) each suited for a specific paper size, and the Paper Positioning Plate is equipped with a Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor (PI8S).

Ver. 5.1

550

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
Feed motor drive signal Guide motor drive signal M3S M1S Stitcher motor drive signal (front/rear) Alignment motor drive signal M5S M6S/ M7S

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB (2/2)

Fig. 3-014

551
Paper pushing motor drive signal Paper folding motor drive signal Paper positioning plate motor drive signal M4S PI4S M2S PI1S Paper folding motor clock signal FLDCLK Paper pushing motor clock signal LUNGECLK

No. 1 paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal FLPSL1 SL1S M8S SL4S SL2S No. 2 paper deflecting plate solenoid drive signal FLPSL2

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB (1/2)

Feed plate contact solenoid drive signal RLNIPSL

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
Paper positioning plate home position detection signal PAPPOS Paper positioning plate paper detection signal PPOSPAR Paper tray detection signal TRYPAR PI6S PI11S Guide plate home position detection signal GIDHP Crescent roller position detection signal FDRLHP Delivery detection signal DEIV Paper folding home position detection signal PAFLDHP PI21S PI12S PI7S PI8S PI13S

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB (1/2)

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB (2/2)

Fig. 3-015

552
Paper pushing plate leading edge position detection signal LUNGETOP Paper pushing plate home position detection signal LUNGEHP PI14S No. 3 paper detection signal 3RDPA No. 2 paper detection signal 2NDPA No. 1 paper detection signal 1STPA

PI17S

Vertical path paper detection signal VPJM

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

PI15S PI20S

PI19S PI18S

MAR 2005

11.1.3.3.2. Controlling the Inlet Flappers

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The two Flappers mounted at the Paper Inlet are operated to configure the feed path according to the paper size. The Flappers are used to enable the following: a) To detect the passage of the trailing edge of the paper being detected by an appropriate Sensor. b) To prevent the following sheet from butting against the top of the existing stack Table. 3-001 shows the relationship between Sensors and paper sizes. Sensor No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S) No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm) Used Not Used Not Used B4 Used Used Not Used Table. 3-001 Each Flapper is driven by its own solenoid. Table. 3-002 shows the relationship between solenoids and paper sizes. Solenoid No. 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid (SL1S) No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid (SL2S) Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm) OFF OFF Table. 3-002 B4 ON OFF A4-R/LTR-R ON ON LTR-R/A4-R Used Used Used

Ver. 5.1

553

MAR 2005

2. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. 1 Paper Sensor PI18S Passage of paper No. 1 Paper Deflecting SL1 Plate Solenoid
OFF No passage of paper

No. 2 paper Sensor PI19S SL2 OFF No. 2 Paper Deflecting No passage of paper Plate Solenoid No. 3 Paper Sensor PI20S

Top edge

PI18S PI19S

PI20S

PI18S PI19S

PI20S

Entry of 2nd sheet

Entry of 3rd sheet

Fig. 3-016

Ver. 5.1

554

MAR 2005

3. B4 Paper Path (3 sheets)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. 1 Paper Sensor PI18S SL1 No. 2 Paper Sensor PI19S SL2 No. 3 Paper Sensor PI20S

Passage of paper
ON Passage of paper

OFF No passage of paper

PI18S PI19S Top edge PI20S

PI18S PI19S

PI20S Entry of 1st sheet

Entry of 2nd sheet

Entry of 3rd sheet

Fig. 3-017

Ver. 5.1

555

MAR 2005

4. A4-R / LTR-R Paper Path (3 sheets)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No.1 Paper Sensor PI18S No.2 Paper Sensor PI19S

Passage of paper

SL1

ON Passage of paper

SL2 No.3 Paper Sensor PI20S

ON Passage of paper

PI18S PI19S Top edge PI20S

PI18S PI19S

PI20S Enty of 1st sheet

Enty of 2nd sheet

Enty of 3rd sheet

Fig. 3-018

Ver. 5.1

556

MAR 2005

11.1.3.3.3. Controlling the Movement of Sheets

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When the leading edge of a sheet has moved past the Inlet Flapper, the Intermediate Feed Roller and the crescent Roller start to move the sheet forward. The Intermediate Feed Roller is normally not in contact with the Path Bed. When the leading edge of a sheet reaches the Intermediate Feed Roller contact section, the Feed Plate contact Solenoid (SL4S) causes the roller to come into contact with the Path Bed so as to move the sheet. The contact is broken as soon as the leading edge of the sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate. This series of operations is executed each time a sheet arrives. When the leading edge of the first sheet reaches the Paper Positioning Plate, the Paper Positioning Plate Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The arrival of the second and subsequent sheets will not be checked since the first sheet will still be over the sensor. The Crescent Roller keeps rotating while the sheets are being output, butting the leading edge of each sheet against the Paper Positioning Plate, and ultimately, keeping the leading edge of the stack in order. The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates for each sheet so as to set both left and right edges of the sheet in proper alignment. 1. The Solenoid turns ON while the paper is being moved so that the Feed Plate comes into contact.
Intermediate Feed Roller Feed Roller M1S SL4S Feed Plate Contact Solenoid ON

Fig. 3-019 2. The Solenoid turns OFF when the paper butts against the Paper Positioning Plate. The Feed Motor continues to rotate.

M1S OFF SL4S

Fig. 3-020

Ver. 5.1

557

MAR 2005

3. The Solenoid turns ON when the next sheet arrives, and the Feed Plate comes into contact.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M1S ON SL4S

Fig. 3-021

11.1.3.3.4. Aligning the Sheets

The Alignment Plate Motor (M5S) drives the Alignment Plates each time a sheet is ejected, setting both left and right edges of the sheet in proper alignment. The Alignment Plate Motor is a 4-phase stepping motor. The position of Alignment Plate is identified in reference to the number of motor pulses from the Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S). The following briefly describes what takes place when the saddle stitching mechanism operates on two sheets. 1. When the first sheet has been ejected, the Alignment Plates butts against the left and right edges of the stack (first alignment). The Alignment Plates leave the home position in advance and remain separated by 10 mm from the edges of the stack.
Sheets Alignment Plate Alignment Plate

Alignment Plate Home Paper Position Sensor (PI5) Positioning Plate

Fig. 3-022 2. The Alignment Plates move away from the edges of the stack over a short distance and then butt against the edges once again (2nd alignment).

Fig. 3-023

Ver. 5.1

558

MAR 2005

3. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 3-024 4. When the following stack arrives, steps 1 through 3 above are repeated. 5. The Alignment Plates butt against the stack once again, during which, stitching takes place.

Fig. 3-025 6. The Alignment Plates separate by 10 mm from the edges of the stack, after which, folding and delivery take place.

Fig. 3-026 7. When the first sheet of the following stack reaches the No. 1 Paper Sensor, the Guide moves to a position 10 mm from the edge of the stack and prepares for the next alignment operation.

Fig. 3-027

Ver. 5.1

559

MAR 2005

In case of 2 sheets:
Entry of Entry of 1st sheet 2nd sheet

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
1st sheet of following stack entry

[1]
Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S)

[2] [3]

[4]

Alignment Motor (M5S) Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) : Alignment : Escape

[1] : [2] : [3] : [4] :

Move to poised position Stapling period Paper folding/delivery period Move to following stack size poised position Fig. 3-028

Alignment Plate Alignment Motor

M5S

Alignment Plate

Stack Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S)

Paper Positioning Plate

Fig. 3-029

Ver. 5.1

560

MAR 2005

11.1.3.3.5. Controlling the Phase of the Crescent Roller

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline If alignment was executed with the Crescent Roller in contact with the stack of sheets, the resulting friction against the roller causes the stack to move inappropriately (fig. 3-030). To prevent this problem, the phase of the roller is identified and used to determine the timing of alignment. The phase of the Crescent Roller is identified by the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S). The flag for the Crescent Roller Phase Sensor is mounted to the Crescent Roller Shaft. The flag will leave the Sensor while the Roller Shaft rotates, turning the Sensor ON or OFF, enabling the assumption that the Crescent Roller is positioned at the opposite side of the stack (fig. 3-032). The Alignment Plates are operated to correspond with this change in the state of the Sensor.
Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S) Flag Alignment Plates

Crescent Roller
M1S

Feed Motor Stack

Fig. 3-030
Alignment Plates

Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S) Sensor Flag Crescent Roller If the crescent roller was in contact with the stack, alignment operation could be obstructed.

Fig. 3-031

Ver. 5.1

561

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Alignment operation is started when the flag has covered the sensor and the crescent roller is away from the stack.

Fig. 3-032
1st sheet 3rd sheet 2nd sheet 4th sheet Crescent Roller Phase Sensor (PI12S)

Feed motor stops

Alignment operation Feed Motor (M1)

Fig. 3-033

Ver. 5.1

562

MAR 2005

11.1.3.4. Stitching System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The stitching system stitches the center of an output stack with Staples. To enable stitching at two locations on a stack, two Stitcher Units (front, rear) are used. Each Stitcher Unit is equipped with a Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S) for drive, a Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S, MS5S) for detection of position and a Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S) for detection of the presence/ absence of staples. The Stitcher Base is designed so that it may be drawn out to the front from the Saddle Stitch for replacement of the Staple Cartridge or removal of a staple jam. The Stitcher Unit in Sensor (PI16S) is used to make sure that the Stitcher Base is properly fitted to the Saddle Stitcher. Safety Switches are not mounted for the Saddle Stitch Unit (front, rear), as the location does not allow access by the user.
Stitcher (rear)

Stitcher (front)

Stack

Fig. 3-034

Ver. 5.1

563

MAR 2005

2. Saddle Stitch Unit Operation The Saddle Stitch Base Unit consists of two Stitchers and Stitcher Bases. The Stitchers are fixed in position, and are not designed to slide or swing. Stitching is executed by driving the Rotary Cam by the Stitcher Motor (M7S, M6S). The Front and Rear Stitcher Units are operated with a time delay so as to prevent wrinkling of paper and to limit the load applied to the Power Supply. (A time delay for initiating the Stitcher Motor startup current helps decrease the load on the Power Supply.) The Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S, MS5S) is used to monitor the movement of the Rotary Cam, enabling identification of individual stitcher operations. The presence/absence of staples inside the Staple Cartridge fitted to the Stitcher is detected by the Staple Sensor (MS6S, MS4S). The Alignment Plates keep both edges of the stack in place while stitching takes place.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 3-035
Stitcher Home Position Sensor (front) (MS7S) Stitcher Motor (front) (MS7) Stitcher Home Position Sensor (rear) (MS5S) Stitcher Motor (rear) (M6S) No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) Alignment Motor (M5S) : Alignment : Escape

Fig. 3-036
Cam

Mount

Fig. 3-037

Ver. 5.1

564

MAR 2005

11.1.3.5. Folding / Delivery System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The paper folding mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Folding Rollers, Paper Pushing Plate, and Paper Positioning Plate. The Guide Plate is used to cover the Folding Rollers while sheets are output as to prevent sheets from coming into contact with the Folding Rollers during output. Before the stack is folded, the Guide Plate moves down to enable the Folding Rollers to operate. The Folding Rollers are driven by the Paper Folding Motor (M2S), and the drive of the motor is monitored by the Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI4S). The mechanism is also equipped with a Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI12S) for detecting the position of the Paper Folding Rollers. The Paper Pushing Plate is driven by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S), and the drive of the Paper Pushing Plate Motor is monitored by the Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1S). The Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) and the Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) are used to detect the position of the Paper Pushing Plate. After being folded in half by the Paper Folding Rollers, the stack is moved ahead by the Delivery Roller for delivery. The Delivery Roller is driven by the Paper Folding Motor. The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) is mounted to the Delivery Assembly to detect delivery of paper. The Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S) is used to detect the presence/absence of paper on the tray, but does not detect jams. The Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) serves to detect the presence of paper after jam removal. 2. Controlling the Movement of Stacks When a stack has been stitched (2 points), the Paper Positioning Plate lowers so that the stack will move to where the Paper Folding Rollers come into contact with the stack and where the Paper Pushing Plate is located. The position of the Paper Positioning Plate is controlled in reference to the number of motor pulses coming from the Paper Positioning Home Position Sensor (PI7S). At the same time as the Paper Positioning Plate operates, the Guide Plate lowers so that folding may take place.
Stitcher ends Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) Equivalent of specific number of pulses

Guide Motor (M3S) Guide Plate Home Position Sensor (PI13S)

Fig. 3-038

Ver. 5.1

565

MAR 2005

3. Folding a Stack A stack is folded by the action of the Paper Folding Rollers and the Paper Pushing Plate. The Paper Pushing Plate pushes against the center of a stack toward the roller contact section. The Paper Pushing Plate starts at its home position and waits at the leading edge position until the stack has been drawn to the Paper Folding Roller and is gripped for a length of 10 mm. When the Paper Folding Roller has gripped the stack for a length about 10 mm, the Paper Pushing Plate Motor starts to rotate once again, and the Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position. The stack gripped in this way by the Paper Folding Roller is drawn further by the Paper Folding Roller and then is moved by the Delivery Roller to the Paper Tray. Half of the peripheral area of the Paper Folding Rollers excluding the center part is punched out. This punched out area only feeds the paper as the Paper Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper Feeding Roller (upper) only at the center of the roller to prevent the paper from wrinkling. As the Paper Feeding Roller (lower) contacts the Paper Feeding Roller (upper) at their entire surfaces on the remaining half of the peripheral area, paper folding starts from this half of the peripheral area, and paper is fed while it is being folded. The stop position of the Paper Folding Rollers is in this half of the peripheral area. The paper folding start and stop positions on the Paper Folding Rollers is controlled according to the motor lock signals from the Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S).
Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Paper Folding Roller (upper) Sensor Flag Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) Paper Folding Roller (lower) Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paper Pushing Plate

M8S

Paper Pushing M2S Plate Motor Stack of Sheets Paper Folding Motor

Fig. 3-039
Paper Pushing Plate Top Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI15S) Position Sensor (PI14S)

Sensor Flag Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) Paper Pushing Plate

M8S M2S

Paper Folding Motor

Paper Pushing Plate Motor

Fig. 3-040

Ver. 5.1

566

MAR 2005

[Paper folding start position]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Stack of Sheets

Paper Pushing Plate Delivery Outlet Paper Feed Inlet

Sensor Flag Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) Paper folding/feeding is performed. Paper feeding is performed.

Fig. 3-041 [Paper folding roller stop position]

Delivery outlet

Paper feed inlet

Sensor flag Paper folding home position sensor (PI21S) Paper folding/feeding is performed. Paper feeding is performed.

Fig. 3-042

Ver. 5.1

567

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Paper Folding Motor (M2S)

Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) Equivalent of 10mm by paper folding motor Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S)

Delivery Sensor (PI11S)

Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S) Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) : Motor CW : Motor CCW

Fig. 3-043 4. Double Folding a Stack To fold a stack consisting of 10 or more A4-R or LTR-R sheets, folding is executed twice for the same sheet. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse for an equivalent of 20 mm after gripping the stack for a length of 20mm, enabling the Paper Folding Rollers to apply an increased degree of pressure along the crease on the stack. Then, the Paper Folding Rollers rotate normally, and the Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position while the stack is being delivered. This way, a stack requiring a large force may properly be folded with less pressure. a. The Paper Pushing Plate pushes the stack in the direction of the Paper Folding Rollers.

Paper Pushing Plate

M2S M8S

Paper Folding Motor Paper Folding Roller

Paper Pushing Plate Motor

Fig. 3-044

Ver. 5.1

568

MAR 2005

b. The Paper Folding Rollers grip the stack for a length of about 20 mm.
20mm (appro x

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

.)

M2S

Paper Folding Motor

Fig. 3-045 c. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate in reverse, pushing back the stack for a length of about 20 mm (reverse feeding).
20mm (appro x

.)

M2S

Paper Folding Motor

Fig. 3-046

Ver. 5.1

569

MAR 2005

d. The Paper Folding Rollers rotate again, feeding out the stack. The Paper Pushing Plate returns to its home position.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M2S

Paper Folding Motor

M8S

Paper Pushing Plate Motor

Fig. 3-047
Gripping of paper stack Equivalent of 20mm Paper Folding Motor (M2S) Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Tray Paper Sensor (PI6S) Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) : Motor CW : Motor CCW Equivalent of 20mm (reverse feeding)

Fig. 3-048

Ver. 5.1

570

MAR 2005

11.1.3.6. Checking for a Jam

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Checking for a Jam The Saddle Stitch Unit identifies any of the following conditions as a jam, and sends the jam signal to the Copier. In response, the Copier may stop copying operation and indicate the presence of a jam on the Control Panel.

PI18S PI19S PI20S

PI11S

PI17S

PI15S PI14S

Fig. 3-049

No. PI11S PI14S PI15S PI17S PI18S PI19S PI20S

Sensor Delivery Sensor Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor Vertical Path Paper Sensor No. 1 Paper Sensor No. 2 Paper Sensor No. 3 Paper Sensor Table. 3-003

Ver. 5.1

571

MAR 2005

2. Inlet Delay Jam (91H) The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) on the Paper Sensor PCB does not turn ON for a specific period of time after the Inlet Sensor (PI1) of the Finisher turned ON.
T Inlet Sensor (PI1) No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) Feed Motor (M1S) T: 100 (mm) Delivery speed (mm/sec) Inlet Sensor (PI1) No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) Feed Motor (M1S) T: Jam Load stops T

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

100 (mm) Delivery speed (mm/sec)

Fig. 3-050 3. Inlet Stationary Jam (A1H) The No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), and No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) on the Paper Sensor PCB do not turn OFF when the stack has been fed for a specific period after the No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) turns ON. The Paper Sensor used varies according to the paper size. a. Ledger / 11 x 17 in (A3 / 279 x 432 mm) Stack
No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) Feed Motor (M1S) T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm T Normal No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) Feed Motor (M1S) T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm Load stops T Jam

Fig. 3-051

Ver. 5.1

572

MAR 2005

b. B4 Stack
T No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S) Feed Motor (M1S) T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm T Normal Normal

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
T No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S) Feed Motor (M1S) T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm Load stops T Jam Jam

Note: The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one sensor. Fig. 3-052 c. LTR-R / A4-R Stack
T No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S) No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) Feed Motor (M1S) T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm T T Normal Normal Normal No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S) No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S) No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S) Feed Motor (M1S) T : feeding of (paper length x 1.5) mm Load stops T T T Jam Jam Jam

Note: The illustration shows two Sensors checking for jams. Single detection, however, uses only one sensor. Fig. 3-053 4. Delivery Delay Jam (92H) a. By Delivery Sensor The Delivery Sensor (PI11S) does not turn ON within a specific period of time after the Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor has turned ON.
T Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) T : Equivalent of 180 mm Normal Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) Load stops T : Equivalent of 180 mm T Jam

Fig. 3-054

Ver. 5.1

573

MAR 2005

5. Delivery Stationary Jam (A2H) a. By Vertical Path Paper Sensor The Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) does not turn OFF within a specific period of time (feeding) after the Delivery Sensor (PI11S) has turned ON, i.e., the trailing edge of the stack does not leave the Vertical Path Paper Sensor.
T Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) T : Feeding of Normal Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) T Jam

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paper length 130 +50 mm 2

T : Feeding of

Paper length 130 +50 mm 2

Note: The length 130 mm is the length of the feeding path from the Vertical Path Paper Sensor to the Delivery Paper Sensor, while the length 50 mm is a margin. Fig. 3-055 b. By Delivery Sensor
T Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) T : Feeding of Normal Delivery Sensor (PI11S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) T Jam Load stops

Paper length x 1.5 mm 2

T : Feeding of

Paper length x 1.5 mm 2

Fig. 3-056 6. Power-ON Jam (87H) Any of the No. 1 Paper Sensor (PI18S), No. 2 Paper Sensor (PI19S), No. 3 Paper Sensor (PI20S), Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) and Delivery Sensor (PI11S) on the Paper Sensor PCB detects paper at power-ON. 7. Door Open Jam (88H / 89H) The Front Door Open/Closed Sensor (PI2S), Outlet Cover Sensor (PI3S), or Inlet Cover Sensor (PI9S) finds that the Respective Cover is open during operation. 8. Stitcher Staple Jam (86H) When the Stitcher Motor (M7S/M6S) is rotating clockwise, the Stitcher Home Position Sensor (MS7S/ MS5S) does not turn ON within 0.5 sec. after it has turned OFF. In addition, the sensor turns ON within 0.5 sec after the motor has been rotated counter-clockwise. Reference: When all doors are closed after the user has removed the jam, the Saddle Stitch Unit checks whether the Vertical Path Paper Sensor (PI17S) has detected the presence of paper. If the sensor has detected paper, the unit will identify the condition as being faulty jam removal and send the jam signal to the Copier once again.

Ver. 5.1

574

MAR 2005

11.1.3.7. Power Supply

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline When the Copier Power Switch is turned ON, two 24V Power Lines are supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB. Of the two 24V Lines, one is used to Drive Solenoids. The 24V Power from the Finisher Controller PCB to solenoids does not pass through any interlocks. The 24V Power to motors, on the other hand, will not be supplied if any of the three door Switches is open. The 24V line is used for the generation of 5V power intended for sensors.
Inlet Door Front Door Delivery Switch Switch Door Switch (MS1S) (MS2S) (MS3S)

24V Circuit Breaker (CB1)

24V

Motor systems

24V

Solenoids

Finisher Controller PCB

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

5V

Sensors

(Q6) 24VR Regulator IC 5V Logic

Fig. 3-057 2. Protective Mechanisms The 24VDC Power Supply used for motors and solenoids is equipped with a Circuit Breaker (CB1). The 24V Power Supply used to drive the Feed Motor (M1S), Alignment Motor (M5S), and the Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) is equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.

Ver. 5.1

575

MAR 2005

11.1.4.

Punch Unit (Option) Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.4.1. Basic Operation

This chapter discusses the purpose and role of each of the Punch Unit's functions, and the principles of operation used for the Punch Unit mechanical and electrical systems. It also explains the timing at which these systems are operated. The symbol in drawings indicates transmission of mechanical drive, and signals marked by together with the signal name indicates the flow of electrical signals. In descriptions of digital circuits on the Punch Unit, "1" indicates a high signal voltage level, while "0" indicates a low signal voltage level. Voltage values differ according to the circuits. Descriptions in this chapter also assume that PCBs will not be repaired at user sites. For this reason, descriptions of circuits on PCBs is limited to block diagrams. Two types of block diagrams are provided for separate functions: diagrams indicating details from sensors up to input sections of major PCBs, and diagrams indicating details from the output sections of major PCBs up the components.

11.1.4.1.1. Outline
The Punch Unit (option) is attached on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher. The Punch Unit does not have a paper feed mechanism. Paper from the Copier is fed by feed drive from the Finisher via the Punch Unit. When the trailing edge of the paper from the Copier reaches the Punch Unit, the paper stops temporarily, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch the trailing edge of the paper. This operation is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB, and each of the parts on the Finisher is driven by the Punch Driver PCB.

Punch drive system Finisher unit control system

Punch Driver PCB

Horizontal registration drive system

Fig. 4-001

Ver. 5.1

576

MAR 2005

11.1.4.1.2. Inputs to and Outputs from Punch Driver PCB

1. Inputs to Punch Driver PCB (1/3)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Driver PCB

Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor Punch Motor Clock Sensor Punch Home Position System Upper Door Switch
PI1P J102-3 -2 -1 J1A-1 +5V -2 SREGHP -3

When the punch slide unit is at the home position, 1. When the punch motor is rotating oscillates between 1 and 0. When the hole puncher is at the home position, 0.

PI2P

J105-1 -2 -3

J1B-6 +5V -5 PUNCHCLK -4

PI3P

J104-2 -3 -1

J1B-2 +5V -3 PUNCHHP* -1

N.O. MS1P

+24V J5-1 -2

When the upper door is closed, 1.

UDROPN

Front Door Switch

N.O. MS2P

J5-3 -4

When the front door is closed, 1.

FDROPN

Photosensor PCB
+5V PTR1 PTR2 PTR3 PTR4 PTR5 J115-2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 J7-12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 +5V SREG1* SREG2* SREG3* SREG4* PAEND*

When a paper is detected, 0.

-1

-13

Fig. 4-002

Ver. 5.1

577

MAR 2005

2. Outputs from Punch Driver PCB (2/3)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Driver PCB

LED PCB
LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 J116-6 -5 -4 -3 -2 J7-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 LEDON5 LEDON4 LEDON3 LEDON2 LEDON1

When 1, LED is ON.

-1

-6

Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB

LED6 PTR6 J1B-8 7

+5V LEDON*

When light is blocked, 0.

9 10 DFULL

Punch Motor
J114-1 M1P -2 -2 J2-1

According to direcrtion of motor rotation, changes between + and -.

Horizontal Registration Motor

M2P

+24V J114-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 J1A-7 -8 B* -9 A* -10 B -11 A

The pulse signal is switched according to motor rotation.

Fig. 4-003

Ver. 5.1

578

MAR 2005

3. Outputs from Punch Driver PCB (3/3)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Driver PCB Finisher Controller PCB

J21A-14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 J3A-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14

J21B-13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1

J3B-2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 +24V J4-4 -3 -2 -1

Fig. 4-004

Ver. 5.1

579

MAR 2005

11.1.4.2. Punch Operation 11.1.4.2.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Punch Unit is located on the feed path between the Copier and the Finisher, and successively punches holes when the paper stops temporarily. When the trailing edge of the paper reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Unit temporarily stops the paper and holes are punched on the trailing edge of the paper. The Punch Unit consists of a die and hole puncher (punch blade). The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The Hole Puncher is attached to the eccentric cam of the Punch Shaft, and rotary action of the Punch Shaft is converted to reciprocal motion to perform punching. Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC Motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P). To stop the DC Punch Motor accurately at its home position, the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI2P) counts a predetermined number of clock pulses to stop the Punch Motor. A single punch operation is performed by rotating the Punch Shaft 180 from its home position. Five Light Sensors (Photosensor PCB) are located at the upper side of the inlet paper feed path of the Punch Unit and a set of five LEDs (LED PCB) are located at the lower side. These Sensors and LEDs function as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PTR5) are the Trailing Edge Sensor and are used for detecting the trailing edge of the paper. The remaining Sensor (LED1 to LED4, PTR1 to PTR4) are Horizontal Registration Sensors, and are used for detecting the inner position of the paper for determining the hole punching position. The Punch Motor, Punch Unit and above Sensors comprise the Punch Slide Unit. This Unit moves backwards and forwards according to the size of the paper. Backward and forward movement is driven by the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P). The Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a 2phase stepping motor. The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor is driven by the Punch Driver PCB according to control signals from the Finisher Controller PCB. Punch scraps caused by punching are stored in the Punch Trash Box. Detection of the paper scraps in the Punch Trash Box is performed by a deflective sensor (LED6 and PTR6 on the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB unit).

Ver. 5.1

580

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
Trailing edge detection signal PAEND Scrap full detection signal (LED6, PTR6) DFULL Horizontal registration detection signal (LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) SREG1 to 4 5 5

Punch Driver PCB (2/2)

Punch Driver PCB (1/2)

Fig. 4-005

581
Horizontal registration home position (PI1P) detection signal SREGHP Horizontal registration motor (M2P) drive signal

4 3 2
LED1

4 3 2
PTR1

Punch motor (M1P) drive signal Punch motor clock (PI2P) detection signal PUNCHCLK Punch home position (PI3P) detection signal PUNCHHP

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

11.1.4.2.2. Punch Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The hole puncher home position is detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P). In all there are four types of Punch Unit depending on the destination: 2- hole type (Punch Unit A1), 2-/3hole Dual Use (Punch Unit B1), and two 4-hole types (Punch Unit C1 and Punch Unit D1). With the 2-hole and 4-hole types, the Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft rotating 180 from its home position. With the 2-/3-hole dual use type, too, the Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally and punching is performed by the Punch Shaft rotating 180 from its home position. However, half of the peripheral area of the Punch Shaft can be used as a 2-hole type while the other half can be as a 3-hole type. Whether the Punch Shaft is used as a 2-hole punch or a 3-hole punch depends on the instructions from the Copier. 1. 2- / 4-hole Type At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. Punching of the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated in the forward direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. Punching of the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated in the reverse direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. The following illustrates when two sheets are punched. a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P) Sensor Flag

Punch Shaft

Eccentric Cam Die Die

Hole Puncher Sheet Punch Trash [punch shaft is rotated 90 in the forward direction/ hole punched] [punch shaft is rotated 180 in the forward direction/punch operation completed]

[punch shaft stopped/home position]

Fig. 4-006

Ver. 5.1

582

MAR 2005

b. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[punch shaft stopped/home position]

[punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction/ hole punched]

[punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction/punch operation completed]

Fig. 4-007

Ver. 5.1

583

MAR 2005

2. 2- / 3-hole Dual Use Type At the home position, the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To punch two holes, punching of the first sheet ends when the punch shaft half peripheral area has rotated in the forward direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. At this time, the 3-hole puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction) on the remaining half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft. Punching of the second sheet ends when the punch shaft half peripheral area has rotated in the reverse direction 180, and the state of the Punch Home Position Sensor has changed from OFF to ON. Also at this time, the 3-hole puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction) on the remaining half peripheral area on the Punch Shaft. To punch three holes, the 2Hole Puncher is moved reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction). The following illustrates punching when two sheets are punched with two holes. a. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the first sheet.
Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P) Sensor Flag

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Shaft

Eccentric Cam Die Die

Hole Puncher Sheet Punch Trash [punch shaft is rotated 90 in the forward direction/ hole punched] [punch shaft is rotated 180 in the forward direction/punch operation completed]

[punch shaft stopped/home position]

Fig. 4-008 When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction) as shown below.

[punch shaft stopped/home position]

[punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction/ hole puncher rises to topmost position]

[punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction/hole puncher returns to original position]

Fig. 4-009

Ver. 5.1

584

MAR 2005

b. A hole is punched in the trailing edge of the second sheet.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[punch shaft stopped/home position]

[punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction/ hole punched]

[punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction/punch operation completed]

Fig. 4-010 When two holes are punched, the 3-Hole Puncher is fed reciprocally in the escape direction (hole puncher rise direction) as shown below.

[punch shaft stopped/home position]

[punch shaft is rotated 90 in the reverse direction/ hole puncher rises to topmost position]

[punch shaft is rotated 180 in the reverse direction/hole puncher returns to original position]

Fig. 4-011

Ver. 5.1

585

MAR 2005

11.1.4.2.3. Horizontal Registration Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Horizontal registration drive of the Punch Slide Unit is performed by the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of the paper by the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PTR5) and Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, SREG1 to 4) and is moved to the trailing edge position matched to the paper size. The following shows horizontal registration operation. 1. When the leading edge of the paper from the Copier is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PTR5) on the Punch Unit, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit towards the front.

Punch Slide Unit Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) Trailing Edge Detection Sensor (LED5, PTR5)

Sheet Delivery Direction

Sheet

Fig. 4-012 2. After the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) detect the edge of the paper at its inner side in keeping with the paper size signals arriving from the Copier, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) drives the Punch Slide Unit to a predetermined position further towards the front, and stops the Unit at this position.

Horizontal Registration Sensor 1 (LED1, PTR1): detects the edge of A3, A4, LTR and 279mm x 432mm (11" x 17") papers Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PTR2): detects the edge of B4, B5, LTR-R, and LGL papers. Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 (LED3, PTR3): detects the edge of A4-R paper Horizontal Registration Sensor 4(LED4, PTR4): detects the edge of B5-R paper

Fig. 4-013 586

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

3. When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PTR5) detects the trailing edge of the paper, drive of the Inlet Feed Motor (M9) and First Feed Motor (M1) on the Finisher is stopped to stop paper feed. Next, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to punch the holes.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch

Fig. 4-014 4. When the punching operation ends, drive of the Inlet Feed Motor (M9) and First Motor (M1) on the Finisher is started, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is operated in the reverse direction, and the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position where it comes to a stop. 5. Even if paper to be punched continues to arrive, the Punch Slide Unit returns to its home position for each arriving sheet, and steps 1 to 4 are repeated.
Inlet Feed Motor (M9) First Feed Motor (M1) Trailing Edge Detection Sensor (LED5, PTR5) Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 to 4, PTR1 to 4) Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P) Punch Motor (M1P) Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P)

: Motor CW

: Motor CCW

Fig. 4-015

Ver. 5.1

587

MAR 2005

11.1.4.3. Power Supply System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline 24V power and 5V power are supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB when the Power Switch on the Copier is turned ON. 24V power is used for driving Motors, while 5V power is used for driving Sensors and the ICs on the Punch Driver PCB. 24V power to the Motors is not supplied when either of the two Door Switches on the Punch Unit is open.
Upper Door Switch (MS1P) Front Door Switch (MS2P)

24V

24V

Motor System

Finisher Controller PCB

Punch Driver PCB 5V Sensor

5V

5V

Logic

Fig. 4-016 2. Protection Function The 24V power supplies for the Punch Motor (M1P) and Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) are equipped with a fuse designed to blow when an overcurrent flows.

Ver. 5.1

588

MAR 2005

11.1.5.

Mechanical Construction

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.5.1. Finisher Unit

This chapter describes the mechanical features, operations, disassembly and reassembly procedures. Be sure to observe the following points when disassembling and reassembling the Machine: 1. Before disassembling or reassembling, be sure to unplug the Power Plug from the wall outlet. 2. Reassemble parts in reverse order, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Reassemble Screws to their original locations, ensuring their correct length and diameter. 4. As a rule, do not operate the Machine with any parts removed.

11.1.5.1.1. External Components

Tray [1] [4] Upper Door Assembly [2] Rear Cover (3)

Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate the number of mounting Screws.

[3] Front Door

Fig. 5-001 1. Removing of the Front Door Assembly.

[5] [4]

(1) Open the Front Door Assembly [1]. (2) Remove the Screw [2], and remove the Bushing [3] (center). (3) Remove the Screw [4], and remove the Bushing (top) [5]. Then, remove the Front Door Assembly.

[1] [3] [2]

Fig. 5-002

Ver. 5.1

589

MAR 2005

2. Removing the Rear Cover.

[1] Upper Door Assembly

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Upper Door Assembly [1]. (2) Remove the 3 Screws [2], and lift the Rear Cover [3] to remove.

[3] Rear Cover

[2] Screws

Fig. 5-003 3. Removing the Upper Door Assembly.

[1]

(1) Open the Upper Door Assembly [1]. (2) Remove the 2 Claws [2], and remove the Upper Door Assembly.

[2]

Fig. 5-004 4. Removing the Front Cover.

[1]

(1) Open the Front Door Assembly [1]. (2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Front Cover [3].

[2]

[3]

Fig. 5-005

Ver. 5.1

590

MAR 2005

5. Removing the Tray Rack Assembly.

[2]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.) (2) Remove the Rear Lower Cover also. (See Fig. 5-031.) (3) Disconnect the J201 [1] Connector, Ground Wire [2], and release the Harness Stop [3].

[1]

[3]

Fig. 5-006
[6] [4] [5]

(4) Remove the Slide Guide [4]. (5) Remove the End Cap (F) [5] and End Cap (R) [6]. (6) Carefully lift the Tray Rack Assembly [7] to remove.

[7]

Fig. 5-007
[1]

Caution: When reinstalling the Tray Rack Assembly back into the Finisher Assembly, before inserting it, be sure to release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch [1] with a Screwdriver or a similar object. Take extra care during this operation.

Fig. 5-008

Ver. 5.1

591

MAR 2005

6. Removing the Grate-Sharped Upper Guide.

[4] [1]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[2] [2]

[3]

(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.) (2) Release the Tray Lift Motor Gear Clutch with a Screwdriver or a similar object while supporting the Tray Rack Assembly, to its lowest position. (See Fig. 5-008.) (3) Remove the Slide Guide [1]. (4) Remove 5 Screws [2] (M4). (5) Remove 1 Screw [3] (M3), and remove the Grate-Shaped Upper Guide [4].

Fig. 5-009 7. Removing the Grate-Sharped Lower Guide. (1) Remove the Tray Rack Assembly. (See Fig. 5-006.) (2) Remove 3 Screws [1] (M4). (3) Remove 3 Screws [2] (M3), and open the GrateShaped Lower Guide [3] to the front.

[1] [2]

[3]

Fig. 5-010
[6]

[4]

(4) Free the Harness [5] from the Harness Stop [4]. (5) Disconnect 2 Connectors [6], and remove the Grate-Sharped Lower Guide [3].

[5] [3]

Fig. 5-011

Ver. 5.1

592

MAR 2005

8. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[3] [2]

(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.) (2) Open the Front Door Assembly [1]. (3) Remove 5 Screws [2], and remove the Right Guide Assembly [3].

[2]

Fig. 5-012

11.1.5.1.2. Feeding System

1. Removing the Swing Unit.
[1] [4]

[3] [2]

(1) Remove the Tray Rack Assembly. (See Fig. 5-006.) (2) Remove the Grate-Shaped Upper Guide. (See Fig. 5-009.) (3) Remove the Grate-Shaped Lower Guide. (See Fig. 5-010.) (4) Remove the Harness from the 2 Harness Stops [1], and disconnect the 4 Connectors [2]. (5) Remove 1 Screw [3], and remove the Stapler Stay Holder [4].

Fig. 5-013
[5] [6]

(6) Open the Front Cover [5] and push the Stapler Unit [6] backward as illustrated.

Fig. 5-014

Ver. 5.1

593

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7) Remove the RB Link Spring [7].

[7]

Fig. 5-015
[8] [9]

(8) Remove 3 Screws [8], and draw out the Swing Unit [9] towards you.

[8]

[8]

Fig. 5-016

Ver. 5.1

594

MAR 2005

2. Removing the Feed Drive Unit.

[1] [2] [1]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB. (See Fig. 5-028.) (2) Remove the Harness Leads [2] from 2 Harness Stops [1] at the PCB Base, and disconnect 2 Connectors [3].

[3]

Fig. 5-017
[6] [5] [5]

(3) Remove the Ground Lead [4] and 3 Screws [5], and pull down the PCB [6] towards you.

[4]

Fig. 5-018 (4) Remove the Harness Leads [8] from 2 Edge Saddles [7], and remove the PCB Base.

[8] [7] [7]

Fig. 5-019
[10] [9]

(5) Remove 3 Screws [9], and remove the Feed Drive Unit [10].

[9]

[9]

Fig. 5-020 595

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Caution: Before re-attaching the Feed Drive Unit back on the Finisher Unit, loosen the Move Gear Stop Screw [11] to relieve the tension, and then fasten the Screw after attaching the Feed Drive Unit. The Move Gear Attachment must be adjusted when removing and attaching the Swing Unit. If you forget to fasten the Screw, the Gear Teeth may disengage, resulting in defective feed.
[11]

Fig. 5-021

Ver. 5.1

596

MAR 2005

3. Removing the Buffer Roller Assembly.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[3]

[2]

(1) Remove the Finisher Controller PCB. (See Fig. 5-027.) (2) Remove the Feed Drive Unit. (See Fig. 5-021.) (3) Remove 1 Screw [1], and remove the Guide Support Plate Assembly [2] to draw out the Harness Leads [3] towards the Buffer Roller Assembly side.

Fig. 5-022
[5] [4]

(4) Remove the Front Cover. (See Fig. 5-005.) (5) Remove 1 Screw [4], and remove the Guide Support Plate Assembly [5]. Then remove the Buffer Roller Assembly [6].

[5]

Fig. 5-023 4. Removing the Stapler.

[2]

(1) Open the Front Cover, and move the Stapler Assembly to the front. (2) Remove 1 Screw. (3) Turn the Green Tab to the left, pull out the Stapler Assembly [2] forward and lift it up by rotating upwards.

Fig. 5-024

Ver. 5.1

597

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Disconnect 1 Connector [4] of the Stapler Assembly [3] and remove the Earth Ground.

[4]

[3]

Fig. 5-025
[5]

(5) Remove 2 Screws (M4) used to hold the Stapler Cover.

Stapler Cover

Fig. 5-026

11.1.5.1.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB.
[2]

(1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.) (2) Disconnect 16 Connectors [1]. (3) Remove 4 Screws [2], and remove the Finisher Controller PCB [3].
[3]

[2] [2] [1]

Fig. 5-027

Ver. 5.1

598

MAR 2005

11.1.5.2. Saddle Stitch Unit 11.1.5.2.1. External Components

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Figures in parentheses ( ) indicates the number of mounting Screws

Front Lower Door [2]

[1] Rear Lower Cover (4)

Fig. 5-028 1. Removing the Front Lower Door Assembly. (1) Open the Lower Door Assembly [1]. (2) Remove 1 Screw [2] and remove the Bushing [3], and then remove the Front Lower Door Assembly.

[3] [1]

[2]

Fig. 5-029 2. Removing the Rear Lower Cover. (1) Remove 4 Screws [1], and remove the Rear Lower Cover [2].

[1] [1]

[2]

Fig. 5-030

Ver. 5.1

599

MAR 2005

3. Removing Front Inside Cover.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[4]

(1) Open the Front Lower Door Assembly [1]. (2) Remove 1 Screw [2], and remove the Folding Roller Knob [3]. (3) Remove 5 Screws [4], and remove the Front Inside Cover [5].

[1] [5] [4] [4]

[2]

[3]

Fig. 5-031 4. Removing the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.

[1] [2]

(1) Lift up the Open / Close Lever [2] of the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [1], and open the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly.

Fig. 5-032 (2) Remove the Door Shaft [3] in the direction of the arrow, and draw out towards the front of the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [4].
[4]

[3]

Fig. 5-033

Ver. 5.1

600

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[5]

[7]

(3) Remove the Harness Leads from the Harness Stop [5] and Edge Saddle [6]. (4) Disconnect 2 Connectors [7], and remove the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [8].

[6]

[8]

Fig. 5-034 5. Removing Upper Delivery Guide Assembly.

[2]

(1) Remove the Grate-Shaped Lower Guide. (See Fig. 5-010.) (2) Remove 2 Screws [1] and Ground Lead [2], and remove the Upper Delivery Guide Assembly [3].
[1] [3]

[1]

Fig. 5-035 6. Removing the PCB Cover.

[1]

(1) Remove 4 Screws [4], and remove the PCB Cover [2].

[2] [1]

Fig. 5-036

Ver. 5.1

601

MAR 2005

11.1.5.2.2. Saddle Unit

1. Removing the Saddle Unit.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1] [2]

(1) Remove the Grate-Shaped Lower Guide. (See Fig. 5-010.) (2) Remove the Right Guide Assembly. (See Fig. 5-012.) (3) Remove the Front Lower Door Assembly. (See Fig. 5-030.) (4) Remove the Rear Lower Cover. (See Fig. 5-031.) (5) Remove the Front Inside Cover. (See Fig. 5-032.) (6) Remove the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly. (See Fig. 5-033.) (7) Remove the Upper Delivery Guide. (See Fig. 5-036.) (8) Remove the PCB Cover. (See Fig. 5-037.) (9) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1] and remove 2 Screws [2]. (10) Remove Harness Stop [3] and Harness Lead [4].

Fig. 5-037

[4] [3]

Fig. 5-038 (11) Remove 1 Screw [5].

[5]

Fig. 5-039

Ver. 5.1

602

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[6]

[6]

(12) Remove 2 Screws [6], and remove the Saddle Stitch Unit [7] by moving it in the upward direction.

[7]

Fig. 5-040 Caution: When removing the Saddle Unit from the Finisher Unit Body, prevent the Timing Belt [8] from catching on the Communications Cable Bracket [9].

[8] [9]

Fig. 5-041

Ver. 5.1

603

MAR 2005

2. Removing the Paper Folding Roller.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove theFront Lower Door Assembly. (See Fig. 5-030.) (2) Remove the Front Inside Cover. (See Fig. 5-032.) (3) Remove the Upper Delivery Guide. (See Fig. 5-036.) (4) Remove the PCB Cover. (See Fig. 5-037.) (5) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1].
[1]

Fig. 5-042
[4]

(6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [2], remove 3 Screws [3], and remove the Paper Pushing Motor Mount [4].

[2]

[3]

[2]

Fig. 5-043 (7) Remove the Tension Springs (front [5], rear [6]).

[5]

Fig. 5-044

[6]

Fig. 5-045 604

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8) Remove 2 C-Rings [7], and remove the Sensor Flag [8] and 2 Bearings [9] on the rear.

[9] [7] [8]

Fig. 5-046 (9) Remove 2 C-Rings [10], and remove the 2 Gears [11] on the front.

[10]

[11]

Fig. 5-047 (10) Remove 2 Bearings [12].

[12]

Fig. 5-048
[16]

(11) Open the Saddle Delivery Tray Assembly [13]. (12) Remove 2 Screws [14], and remove the 2 Alignment Plates [15]. (13) Slide the Paper Folding Roller [16] to the front, and pull it out in the delivery direction.

[14] [15] [13]

[14]

Fig. 5-049

Ver. 5.1

605

MAR 2005

3. Installing the Paper Folding Roller.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Attach the Gear [2] so that the grooved section [1] on the Gear is facing the grooved section [1] on the Paper Folding Roller to align the phases.

[1]

Fig. 5-050 4. Removing the Stitcher Mount Unit. (1) Remove the Front Inside Cover. (See Fig. 5-032.) (2) Remove 1 E-Ring [1], Roller [2], and Shaft [3].

[2] [1]

[3]

Fig. 5-051 (3) Pull out the Stitcher Mount Unit [4] to the front.
[4]

Fig. 5-052

Ver. 5.1

606

MAR 2005

5. Adjusting the Stitcher Position.

[1]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Front Lower Door. (See Fig. 5-030.) (2) Remove the Front Inside Cover. (See Fig. 5-032.) (3) Open the Front Door Assembly. (4) Pull out the Saddle Stitch Mount Unit to the front, then pull out the Saddle Stitch towards you and then pull the Saddle Stitch down. (5) Remove 3 Screws [1], and remove the Saddle Stitch Mount Unit Cover [2].

[2]

Fig. 5-053
[3]

(6) Remove the Saddle Stitch Positioning Tool [3] from the back of the Cover.

Fig. 5-054 (7) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch, remove the Center Guide Plate [5] and Front Guide Plate [4] (one screw each). If you must adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch, remove the Center Guide Plate [5] and the Rear Guide Plate [6] (one screw each).

[6]

[5]

[4]

Fig. 5-055
[9] [8]

(8) If you must adjust the Front Saddle Stitch, loosen 2 Screws [8] on the Saddle Stitch Mount [7]. If you must adjust the Rear Saddle Stitch, loosen 2 Screws [9].

[7]

Fig. 5-056 607

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(9) Insert the Tool [10] into the Staple Slot of the Saddle Stitch [9].

[10]

[9]

Fig. 5-057 (10) Shift down the Saddle Stitch, and turn the Saddle Stitch Gear so that the boss on the Tool [11] and the recess of the Mount Match. Then, tighten the Screws [12] on the Mount to fix them in place.

[11] [12]

Fig. 5-058

Ver. 5.1

608

MAR 2005

6. Removing the Positioning Plate Unit.

[2]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[3]

[6] [1]

(1) Remove the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. (See Fig. 5-063.) (2) Disconnect 2 Connectors [1], remove 3 Harness Stops [2], and remove the Harness Leads [3] from the 2 Edge Saddles [4]. (3) Remove 2 Screws [5], slide the Positioning Plate Unit [6] once towards the front and remove from the rear side.

[5]

[4]

Fig. 5-059 7. Removing the No. 1 and No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plates. (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-003.) (2) Remove the Lower Rear Cover. (See Fig. 5-031.) (3) Remove the Claw [1] of the No. 1 Deflect Plate Bushing, and pull out the No. 1 Deflect Plate Shaft [2] toward the rear. (The procedure is the same for the No. 2 Paper Deflect Plate.)

[1]

[2]

Fig. 5-060
[3]

(4) After detaching the Front Shaft of the No. 1 Paper Deflect Plate [3] from the Front Side Plate, remove the No. 1 Paper Deflect Plate.

Fig. 5-061

Ver. 5.1

609

MAR 2005

11.1.5.2.3. PCBs
1. Removing the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB
[2] [3] [2] [2]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[1]

(1) Remove the PCB Cover. (See Fig. 5-037.) (2) Remove 4 Screws [1] and 14 Connectors [2], and remove the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB [3].

[1]

[2]

[1]

Fig. 5-062

11.1.5.3. Punch Unit (Optional) 11.1.5.3.1. External Components

Upper Cover (3) [1]

[2] Upper Cover 2

Figures in parentheses ( ) indicate the number of mounting Screws.

Front Door [3]

[4] Right Guide Assembly (5)

Fig. 5-063 1. Removing the Right Guide Assembly.

[2]

(1) Remove 5 Screws [1], and remove the Right Guide Assembly [2].

[1] [1]

Fig. 5-064

Ver. 5.1

610

MAR 2005

2. Removing the Upper Cover.

[4]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Open the Front Door [1], remove 3 Screws [2], and slacken the inner side of the Right Cover [3] to remove the Upper Cover [4] from the hook.
[4]

[2] [1] [5] [2] [3]

Fig. 5-065

11.1.5.3.2. Puncher Driver System

1. Removing the Punch Motor.
[1]

[3]

[2]

(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See Fig. 5-066.) (2) Disconnect 1 Connector [1]. (3) Remove 2 Screws [2], and remove the Punch Motor [3].

Fig. 5-066 2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor.

[2]

(1) Remove the Right Guide Assembly. (See Fig. 5-065.) (2) Disconnect 1 Connector [1]. (3) Remove 2 Screws [2], and slide the Horizontal Registration Motor [3] in the direction of the arrow.

[1]

[3]

Fig. 5-067

Ver. 5.1

611

MAR 2005

3. Removing the Punch Slide Unit.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[2] [2] [3] [3] [1] [4] [3] [1]

Fig. 5-068

Caution: Exercise care as the Punch Slide Unit opens when it is removed. If necessary, perform operations with the Punch Slide unit open. (1) Remove the Right Guide Assembly. (See Fig. 5-065.) (2) Remove the Upper Cover. (See Fig. 5-066.) (3) Remove the Photosensor PCB. (See Fig. 5-078.) (4) Hold the 2 Lock-type Tie Wraps [1] between your fingers to remove. (Exercise care not to cut the Tie Wraps when removing.) (5) Disconnect 3 Connectors [2]. (6) Remove Harness Lead [4] from the 3 Harness Stops [3]. (7) Remove the E-Ring [5], and Puncher Spring [6].

[6]

[5]

Fig. 5-069

Ver. 5.1

612

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[8]

(8) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow, and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8] to the front.

[7]

Fig. 5-070
[11]

(9) Disconnect the Connector [9], and remove 1 Screw [10] and Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor [11].

[10]

[9]

Fig. 5-071
[12]

(10) Remove 2 Screws [12] and Sensor Base [13].

[13] [12]

Fig. 5-072

Ver. 5.1

613

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(11) Disconnect the Connector [14].

[14]

Fig. 5-073 (12) Rotate the Gear [7] in the direction of the arrow, and slide the Punch Slide Unit Assembly [8] away from you.

[8]

[7]

Fig. 5-074 (13) Lift up the front side of the Punch Slide Unit Assembly, and then slide the Unit in the direction of the arrow to remove.

Fig. 5-075

Ver. 5.1

614

MAR 2005

11.1.5.3.3. PCBs
1. Removing the LED PCB.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Punch Slide Unit Assembly. (See Fig. 5-069.) (2) Remove 1 Screw [1] and the LED PCB [2].

[2] [1]

Fig. 5-076 2. Removing the Photosensor PCB.

[4]

[3]

(1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See Fig. 5-066.) (2) Remove 2 Screws [1], and remove the Sensor Plate [2]. (3) Disconnect the Connector [2], and remove the Photosensor PCB [4].

[2] [1]

Fig. 5-077 3. Removing the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit.
[3]

[2]

(1) Remove the Right Guide Assembly. (See Fig. 5-065.) (2) Remove 1 Screw [1], disconnect the Connector [2], and remove the Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Unit [3].

[1]

Fig. 5-078

Ver. 5.1

615

MAR 2005

4. Removing the Punch Driver PCB.

[3] [1]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(1) Remove the Punch Unit from the Finisher. (2) Remove 4 Screws [1], disconnect 4 Connectors [2], and remove the Punch Driver PCB [3].
[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

Fig. 5-079

Ver. 5.1

616

MAR 2005

11.1.6.

Preventive Maintenance

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.6.1. Unit Breakdown 11.1.6.1.1. Finisher Unit

The Finisher Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a fixed schedule. Please refer to the section noted for its estimated parts replacement.

11.1.6.1.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

The Saddle Stitch Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.

11.1.6.1.3. Punch Unit (option)

The Punch Unit does not have parts that must be replaced on a periodical basis.

11.1.6.2. PM Items
Some of the parts of the Machine may need to be replaced once or more times because of wear or tear during the machines warranty period. Replace them as necessary.

11.1.6.2.1. Finisher Unit

No. 1 2 3 Name Stapler Feed belt Paddle Parts No. FB2-9999-000 FB4-6656-000 FG5-8178-000 FB4-5825-000 Qty. 1 2 2 4 Estimated Life 500,000 operations 1,000,000 copies 1,000,000 copies Paddle unit Paddle rubber only Remarks 5,000 operations / cartridge

11.1.6.2.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

No. 1 Name Stitch Parts No. FB3-7860-000 Qty. 2 Estimated Life 200,000 operations Remarks 2,000 operations / cartridge

11.1.6.2.3. Punch Unit (option)

No. 1 Parts No. FG6-6156-000 Punch Slide Unit FG6-6157-000 FG6-6158-000 Name Qty. 1 Remarks 2-hole (Punch Unit) 1,000,000 operations 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit) 4-hole (Punch Unit) Estimated Life

Ver. 5.1

617

MAR 2005

11.1.6.3. PM Interval
Item Interval Feed Belt When preventive Paddle maintenance is performed Transmission Sensor on the copier. (Punch Unit) (option)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Work Cleaning

Remarks Use moist cloth Use dry cloth

Ver. 5.1

618

MAR 2005

11.1.7.

Troubleshooting

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.7.1. Adjustments 11.1.7.1.1. Electrical System (finisher unit)

1. Adjusting the Height Sensor (PS1) Perform the following adjustments whenever you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or the Height Sensor (PS1). a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-001 b. Make sure that there is no unwanted paper on the Trays. c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. This causes the Finisher to execute automatic adjustment, in which the Tray Unit will shift Tray 1, and Tray 2 in sequence. At the end of adjustment, Trays will return to their home positions. During adjustment, LED1 flashes. At the end of adjustment, LED1 turns and remains ON. If automatic adjustment fails, the mechanism stops while the Tray in question is being adjusted. (At the same time, LED1 turns OFF.) d. Shift all bits on SW3 to OFF, and turn OFF the Copier once. 2. Adjusting the Alignment Position If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB or if an alignment fault occurs, adjust as follows. Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes. a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit. b. Set SW3 of the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-002 c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper, press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the Alignment Plate to move to A4/LTR positions. d. Place 10 sheets of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment Plate and the Guide Plate, butting them against the stoppers. e. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB, and butt the Alignment Plate against the sheets. Pressing SW1 will shift the Alignment Plate to the front in 0.35 mm increments. Pressing SW2 will shift the Alignment Plate to the rear in 0.35 mm increments.

Ver. 5.1

619

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Alignment Plate Shift by SW2 A4/LTR Paper Shift by SW1

Stopper

Stopper

Guide Plate

Fig. 7-003 f. Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously to store the adjustment value. (This will lower the Swinging Guide.) g. Shift all bits of SW3 to OFF, and install the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit. 3. Adjusting the Staple Position (stapler movement range) Adjust as follows if you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB. Performing the steps will affect all paper sizes and all stapling positions. a. Remove the Rear Cover from the Finisher Unit. b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-004 c. If you are using A4 paper, press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. If you are using LTR paper, press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Pressing SW1 or 2 will open the Swing Guide and cause the feed belt to rotate. d. Within 5 sec. after pressing the Switch, place one sheet of A4/LTR paper between the Alignment Plate and the Guide Plate, butting it against the stoppers. When the Finisher detects the paper, it will lower the Swing Guide and execute stapling (rear, 1position). Take out the stapled paper manually as delivery will not be executed.

Ver. 5.1

620

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Alignment Stapler Plate

Stopper

Stopper

Guide Plate

Fig. 7-005 e. If the stapling position is correct, set all bits on SW3 to OFF to end the adjustments. If you need to change the stapling position, on the other hand, go to the next step. f. To suit the position of the staple on the paper, press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as many times as necessary. Pressing SW1 will shift the stapling position to the front in 0.3 mm increments. Pressing SW2 will shift the stapling position to the rear in 0.3 mm increments.
2902mm (A4)/ 2732mm (LTR)

Staple Paper

Shift by SW2

Shift by SW1 Feeding direction

Fig. 7-006 g. Press SW1 and SW2 simultaneously. This will open the Swing Guide, and cause the feed belt to rotate. Placement of one sheet of A4/ LTR paper will cause the Finisher to start stapling. h. Check the stapling position. If good, set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If re-adjustments are necessary, go back to step f). Caution: The settings held by the Finisher Controller PCB are changed as soon as SW1 or SW2 is pressed. As such, to recover the previous settings after the press, you must press the other of the two Switches as many times as you pressed previously.

Ver. 5.1

621

MAR 2005

4. Adjusting the Buffer Roller Winding Amount Perform this adjustment in the following instances: (1) When the Finisher Controller PCB or the EEPROM (Q2) on the Finisher Controller PCB has been replaced. (2) When something causes the winding amount to fluctuate The winding amount is the amount of difference between the 1st and 2nd sheets wound onto the Buffer Roller Device in the freed direction.
2nd sheet Paper exit direction 3rd sheet

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Winding amount

1st sheet

Fig. 7-007 a. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.

ON

Fig. 7-008 b. Turn the Copier OFF then back ON again. c. Set the mode setting on the Copier to 1 and the number of originals (A4 or LTR) to 3 in the staple mode. d. Press the copy start key. Copying starts, three sheets for the first copy are output as a stack on the Staple Tray, and copying stops with the copies held at the Exit Roller. e. Remove the stack of sheets from the Finisher exit taking care to prevent the offset of the output sheets from changing.

Ver. 5.1

622

MAR 2005

f. Measure the winding amount (shift) of the stack of sheets, and compare this amount with the standard amounts. This amount should be measured at the center of the paper leading edge.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1st sheet and 2nd sheet: 0 1mm 1st sheet and 3rd sheet: 4mm or less 2nd sheet and 3rd sheet: 4mm or less

Paper exit direction

3rd sheet 2nd sheet 1st sheet

Fig. 7-009 g. If the amount is within the standard, turn the Copier OFF, and then set all bits of SW3 to OFF. If the amount is outside the standard, perform the following. h. Turn the Copier OFF, and set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated. If EEPROM (Q2) on the Finisher Controller PCB has been replaced, proceed to step j).
ON

Fig. 7-010 i. Turn the Copier ON, and then press SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB. The current setting values are displayed at LED1. Adjustment value 0 Adjustment value +N Adjustment value N Lights for 1 second (once) Blinks (lights for 0.2 second) for N times. Lights for 1 second (once), and blinks (lights for 0.2 second) for N times.

The adjustment width is 0.72 mm for each N=1. Table 7-001 j. Turn the Copier OFF, and then set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-011

Ver. 5.1

623

MAR 2005

k. Press SW1 or SW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB as necessary. Each press of SW1 increments the winding amount in 0.72 mm increments. Each press of SW2 decrements the winding amount in 0.72 mm increments.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paper exit direction

3rd sheet 2nd sheet 1st sheet

Movement of direction of 1st sheet by SW2

Movement of direction of 1st sheet by SW1

Fig. 7-012 l. Repeat steps a. though f. twice. Check that the winding amount is within the standard in both times. m. Turn the Copier OFF, and set all bits of SW3 to OFF. This completes the adjustment. 5. Setting the Upward Curling Sheet Mode (1) Outline Upward curling of sheets stacked on the Tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the copy paper. If this happens, the stacked sheets are pushed out by subsequent output sheets. This sometimes increases the alignment deviation. See the stacking example below.
Subsequent output sheets contact stacked sheets Subsequent output sheets contact stacked sheets.

Fig. 7-013 If this happens: a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again. If upward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the Paper Tray to its original orientation. From here on, too, if upward curling is excessive, resulting in stacked sheets being pushed out by subsequent output sheets, try setting the upward curling sheet mode as indicated.

Ver. 5.1

624

MAR 2005

(2) Setting the upward curling sheet mode a. Turn the Copier OFF. b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 7-014 c. Turn the copier ON. When the Machine enters the upward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking Tray is lowered by about 15 mm when stack sheets are output to prevent subsequent output sheets from catching on the sheets on the Stacking Tray. After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or downward curling sheets are output and stacked, the Stacking Tray is lowered too far. For this reason, sheets are sometimes stacked away from the stacking wall. (Fig 7-015). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper used by the customer.

Fig. 7-015 6. Setting the Downward Curling Sheet Mode (1) Outline Downward curling of sheets stacked on the tray sometimes increases depending on the state of the copy paper, If this happens, the sheets are sometimes stacked away from the stacking wall when they are output and stacked on the Stacking Tray. See the stacking example below.

Fig. 7-016

Ver. 5.1

625

MAR 2005

If this happens: a. Turn over the paper in the Paper Tray and load the paper again. If downward curling is larger than before the paper was loaded again, return the paper in the Paper Tray to its original orientation. From here on, too, if downward curling is excessive, resulting in output sheets being stacked incorrectly, try setting the downward curling sheet mode as indicated. (2) Setting the downward curling sheet mode a. Turn the Copier OFF. b. Set SW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 7-017 c. Turn the Copier ON. When the Machine enters the downward curling sheet mode, the stop position of the Stacking Tray is raised by about 10mm when stack sheets are output so that output sheets are stacked without being away from the stacking wall. After setting this mode, if sheets with little curling or upward curling sheets are output and stacked, the stacking tray is raised too far. For this reason, sheets are stacked pressed out by subsequent output sheets. (Fig. 7-018). Set this mode after carefully checking the type of paper used by the customer.

Fig. 7-018

Ver. 5.1

626

MAR 2005

11.1.7.1.2. Electrical System (Saddle Stitch Unit)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Adjusting the Folding Position The folding position is adjusted by changing the settings of bits 6 through 8 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB to match the stitching position (i.e., adjusting the distance over which the Paper Positioning Plate is moved to the folding position from the stitching position.) If you have replaced the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB, be sure to set the new DIPSW1 so that the settings will be the same as those on the old DIPSW1. If, for any reason, you must change the following position, perform the following steps: a. Remove the PCB cover, and set bits 1 through 4 of DIPSW1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Do not change bits 5 through 8.

Fig. 7-019 b. Remove the Rear Cover of the Saddle Stitch Unit, and tape the actuator of the Inlet Cover Open Sensor (PI9S) and the Inlet Cover Open Detection Switch (MS1S) of the Saddle Stitch Unit in place. c. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB so that the Feed Motor (M1S) starts to rotate. d. Open the Inlet Cover, and insert two sheets of A3 or LDR paper. (Push them in by hand until the leading edge of the sheets butts against the Paper Positioning Plate.)

Ledger / A3 Paper

Insert direction

Fig. 7-020

Ver. 5.1

627

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Sheets

Mark

Fig. 7-021 e. Close the Inlet Door while holding it down with your hand. f. Press SW2 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. The Saddle Stitch Unit will stitch the sheets, and fold and deliver the stack automatically. g. Measure the distance (L) between the stitching position and the folding position. Then, perform positive width adjustment or negative width adjustment to suit the relationship between the stitching position and the folding position. If the stitching position is below the folding position, perform positive width adjustment. If the stitching position is above the folding position, perform negative width adjustment.
Positive Width Adjustment Negative Width Adjustment

Folding position Stitching position

Stitching position Folding position

Unit: mm Example: If L is 1 mm, provide +1 mm.

Unit: mm Example: If L is 0.5 mm, provide -0.5 mm.

Fig. 7-022 h. Change the settings of bits 6 through 8 on DIPSW1 referring to Table 7-001 below. If the width adjustment is 0, The stitching position and the folding position match, requiring no change. If for positive width adjustment, Set DIPSW1 so that the difference resulting from subtraction of the interval from the appropriate setting in Table 7-001 is provided. For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to +2 and the interval is +1 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect 2. If for negative width adjustment Set DIPSW1 so that the sum resulting from addition of the interval from the appropriate setting is provided. For instance, if the DIPSW1 is currently set to 1 and the interval is +0.5 mm, set DIPSW1 to reflect +1.

Ver. 5.1

628

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DIPSW1 Bit Settings Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON Do not touch the following: Bit 6 ON Bit 7 OFF Bit 8 OFF Table 7-002 i. Set bits 1 through 4 on DIPSW1 to OFF.

Settings (in units of 0.5 mm) +3 +2 +1 0 -1 -2 -3

11.1.7.1.3. Electrical System (Punch Unit (option))

1. Sensor Output Adjustment Perform this adjustment when the Punch Driver PCB, Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB / LED PCB) or Reflection Sensor (Punch Trash Box Full Detection PCB unit) has been replaced. a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit. b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-024 c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Pressing this Switch automatically adjusts sensor output. d. Set all bits on DIPSW2 to OFF. 2. Registering the Number of Punch Holes This operation registers which Punch Unit is attached to the IC on the Punch Driver PCB so that the Punch Unit can be identified by the Finisher. For this reason, this operation must be performed when the Punch Driver PCB has been replaced. This operation, however, is not necessary on the Japanese market as the 2-Hole Puncher is already registered as the default for new service parts. The following describes a reference example of how to register the number of punch holes. a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit. b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-025 c. Set bits 7 and 8 on DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB to match the number of punch holes of

Ver. 5.1

629

MAR 2005

the attached punch unit according to Table 7-002. Number of Punch Holes 2-hole (punch Unit) 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit) 4-hole (punch Unit)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

DIPSW3 bit settings Bit 7 Bit 8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

Table 7-003 As the number of punch holes on domestic models is two, bits 7 and 8 of DIPSW3 are both OFF. Settings for overseas models are provided for reference. d. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Press SW2 when setting a 2-/3- hole model (Punch Unit-B1). Pressing this switch registers the number of punch holes to the Punch Driver PCB. e. Set all bits on DIPSW3 to OFF. 3. Checking the Sensitivity Level of the Transmission Sensor How dirty the Transmission Sensor (Photosensor PCB/LED PCB) can be checked by the number of times that LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB lights. For this reason, how dirty the Transmission Sensor is serves as a guide for when to perform cleaning during periodic maintenance. a. Remove the Rear Cover of the Finisher Unit. b. Set bits 1 through 6 of DIPSW3 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated.
ON

Fig. 7-026 c. Press SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Pressing this Switch lights LED1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as indicated in Table 7-003 so that you can check the sensitivity level of the Transmission Sensor. Sensitivity Level Sensor not dirty Sensor slightly dirty Sensor dirty Number of LED Lightings Lit 1X Lit 2X Lit 3X

Table 7-004 d. Set all bits of DIPSW3 of OFF.

Ver. 5.1

630

MAR 2005

11.1.7.2. Component Location 11.1.7.2.1. Finisher Unit

1. Sensors

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

PI18 PI17 PS1 PI10 PI14 PI6 PI3 PI16 PI11 PI1 PI9 PI12 PI5 PI21 PI22 PI15 PI4 PI8 PI19

PI20

PI7

Fig. 7-027

Ver. 5.1

631

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Name Photo-interrupter

Height Sensor

Notation PI1 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8 PI10 PI11 PI12 PI14 PI15 PI16 PI17 PI18 PI19 PI9 PI20 PI21 PI22 PS1

Function Detects paper in the inlet area Detects paper in the delivery area Detects paper on the Stapling Tray Detects the state (open) of the Shutter Detects alignment plate at home position Detects the stapler at home position Detects the tray at home position Detects delivery motor clock pulses Detects paper on Tray 1 Detects paper on Tray 2 Detects paper in the buffer path Detects the finisher joint Detects the state (open) of the Door Detects paper at the inlet to the buffer path Detects the state (open) of the Swing Guide Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 1 (on sensor PCB) Detects tray lift motor clock pulses 2 (on sensor PCB) Detects swing guide clock Detects edging of staples (inside stapler) Detects staple drive home position (inside stapler) Detects the height of the stack on the tray Table. 7-005

Ver. 5.1

632

MAR 2005

2. Micro Switches

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MS5

MS2 MS6 MS3

MS1

MS4 MS8

Fig. 7-028

Name Micro Switches

Notation Function MS1 Detects the state (open) of the front door and the upper door MS2 Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 1 MS3 Detects the safety range MS4 Detects the state (closed) of the shutter MS5 Detects the tray at the upper limit MS6 Detects the state (closed) of the swing guide 2 MS8 Detects the presence/absence of staples (inside stapler) Table 7-006

Ver. 5.1

633

MAR 2005

3. Motors

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M8 M7 M1 M9

M2 M3 M5 M4

M6

Fig. 7-029

Name Motor

Notation M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9

Function First Feed motor Delivery motor Alignment motor Stapler shift motor Tray lift motor Staple motor Swing motor Second feed motor Inlet feed motor Table 7-007

Ver. 5.1

634

MAR 2005

4. Solenoids

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

SL5 SL3

SL2 SL1

SL7

SL6

Fig. 7-030

Name Solenoid

Notation SL1 SL2 SL3 SL5 SL6 SL7

Function Flapper solenoid Buffer inlet solenoid Buffer outlet solenoid Paddle solenoid Escape solenoid Belt escape solenoid Table 7-008

Ver. 5.1

635

MAR 2005

5. PCBs

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1] [3]

[4]

[2]

Fig. 7-031

Reference [1] [2] [3] [4]

Name Finisher Controller PCB Relay PCB 4 Relay PCB 3 Sensor PCB Tabl3 7-009

Ver. 5.1

636

MAR 2005

11.1.7.2.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

1. Photo-interrupters

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

PI18S PI19S PI20S PI16S PI9S

PI21S PI2S PI11S PI6S PI5S PI3S PI7S PI4S PI1S

PI14S

PI15S PI17S PI12S PI13S PI8S

Fig. 7-032

Ver. 5.1

637

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Name Photo-interrupter

Notation PI1S PI2S PI3S PI4S PI5S PI6S PI7S PI8S PI9S PI11S PI12S PI13S PI14S PI15S PI16S PI17S PI18S PI19S PI20S PI21S

Function Detects clock pulses from the paper pushing plate motor Detects the state (open) of the front door Detects the state (open) of the delivery cover Detects clock pulses from the paper folding motor Detects the alignment plates at home position Detects paper on the tray Detects paper positioning plate at home position Detects paper on the paper positioning plate Detects the state (open) of the inlet cover Detects paper in the delivery area Detects the phase of the crescent roller Detects the guide at home position Detects the paper pushing plate at home position Detects the paper pushing plate at top position Detects the state (in) of the stitcher unit Detects paper in the vertical path Detects paper (No.1; on paper sensor PCB) Detects paper (No. 2; on paper sensor PCB) Detects paper (No. 3; on paper sensor PCB) Detects the paper folding at home position Table 7-010

Ver. 5.1

638

MAR 2005

2. Micro Switches

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MS1S MS4,5S MS6,7S MS2S

MS3S

Fig. 7-033

Name Micro Switches

Notation MS1S MS2S MS3S MS4S MS5S MS6S MS7S

Function Detects the state (open) of the inlet door Detects the state (open) of the front door Detects the state (open) of the delivery door Detects the presence of staples (rear) Detects stitching home position (rear) Detects the presence of staples (front) Detects stitching home position (front) Table 7-011

Ver. 5.1

639

MAR 2005

3. Motors

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M6S M7S

M4S

M3S M1S M5S

M2S

M8S

Fig. 7-034

Name Motor

Notation M1S M2S M3S M4S M5S M6S M7S M8S

Function Feed Motor Paper Folding Motor Guide Motor Paper Positioning Plate Motor Alignment Motor Stitcher Motor (rear) Stitcher Motor (front) Paper Pushing Plate Motor Table 7-012

Ver. 5.1

640

MAR 2005

4. Solenoids

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

SL1S

SL2S

SL4S

Fig. 7-035

Name Solenoid

Notation Function SL1S No. 1 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid SL2S No. 2 Paper Deflecting Plate Solenoid SL4S Feed Plate Contact Solenoid Table 7-013

Ver. 5.1

641

MAR 2005

5. PCBs

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[2]

[1]

Fig. 7-036

Reference [1] Saddle Stitch Controller PCB [2] Paper Sensor PCB

Name

Table 7-014

Ver. 5.1

642

MAR 2005

11.1.7.2.3. Punch Unit (option)

1. Photo-interrupters

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

PI2P PI3P

PI1P

Fig. 7-037

Name Photo-interrupter

Notation Function PI1P Horizontal registration home position detection PI2P Punch motor clock detection PI3P Punch home position detection Table 7-015

Ver. 5.1

643

MAR 2005

2. Micro Switches

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MS1P MS2P

Fig. 7-038

Name Micro Switches

Notation Function MS1P Upper door open detection MS2P Front door open detection Table 7-016

Ver. 5.1

644

MAR 2005

3. Motors

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M1P

M2P

Fig. 7-039

Name Motor

Notation Function M1P Punch Motor M2P Horizontal Registration Motor Table 7-017

Ver. 5.1

645

MAR 2005

4. PCBs

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[3] [2]

[4]

Fig. 7-040

Reference [1] [2] [3] [4]

Name Punch Driver PCB Photosensor PCB LED PCB Punch Trash Box Full Detector PCB Fig. 7-018

Ver. 5.1

646

MAR 2005

11.1.7.2.4. Light-Emitting Diodes (LED) and Check Pins by PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

This section discusses the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine that are needed in the field. Caution: The VRs and check pins not discussed in this section are for factory use only. Making adjustments and checks using these will require special tools and instruments and adjustments must be to high accuracy. Do not touch them in the field. 1. Finisher Controller PCB
11 1 9 J17 1 LED1 LED2 1 14 J21 14 1 4 J25 1 SW3 1 J11 10 1 CB1 J7 5 1 15 J5 6 1 J1 1 2 1 J19 15 J10 1 2 J19 J27 8 1 11 J3 J12 11 SW1 SW2 8 1 J2 7 1 J14 1 12 11 11 J6 J9 11 41 J16 6

Fig. 7-041

Switch SW1 SW2 SW3

Function Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position / stapling position and move the trays up, etc. Adjust the alignment plate position / staple position and move the trays down, etc. Adjust the height sensor / alignment plate position and stapling position, etc. Table 7-019

Ver. 5.1

647

MAR 2005

2. Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

SW1 15 J11 1 10 J7 1 J18 1 3 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

J13 7 1

J2 6

1 J10 8 1

10 J9 J4 1 15 CB1 1 J6 2 1 J1 14 J8 1 8 J15 1 4 J5 1 5 J12 1 9

Fig. 7-042

Switch DIPSW1 (bits 1-2) DIPSW1 (bits 6-8) SW2

Function Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position. Stores corrected settings for stapling position and folding position. Starts correction of discrepancy between stitching position and folding position. Table 7-020

Ver. 5.1

648

MAR 2005

11.1.7.3. Troubleshooting 11.1.7.3.1. Finisher Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. E7-40 (Fault in communication with Saddle Stitch Unit) Cause Finisher Controller PCB, Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Wiring Step 1 Checks Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is the problem corrected? Yes / No Yes End. Action

Power Supply Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Is the wiring between the Finisher No Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB normal? Measure the voltage between J3- No 2(+) and J3-1(-) on the Finisher Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC? Yes

Correct it.

Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

2. E7-25 (Faulty height sensor) Cause Finisher Controller PCB Wiring Checks Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is the problem corrected? Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensors normal? Measure the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller PCB. Is it 5 VDC? Is J6 on the Finisher Controller PCB, J114 on the height sensor, or the relay connector J212 disconnected? Measure the voltage between J6-2(+) and J6-4(-) on the Finisher Controller PCB. Is it 5 VDC? Yes / No Yes End. Action

No Correct the wiring.

Power Supply

No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Yes Connect the connector.

Connector

Height Sensor (PS1)

Adjustment

Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensors normal? Try making adjustments using the DIP switch once again. Is the problem corrected?

Yes Adjust the height sensor once again. If an error occurs again, replace the height sensor. No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Yes Replace the height sensor. No Correct the wiring. Yes End.

Ver. 5.1

649

MAR 2005

3. E7-26 (Faulty Back-up RAM) Cause Finisher Controller PCB, Punch Drive PCB Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Turn the Copier OFF then ON. Is the problem corrected? Replace the Finisher Controller PCB and punch driver PCB. Is the problem corrected?

Yes / No Yes End. Yes End.

Action

4. E7-21 (Faulty Delivery Motor) Cause Deliver Roller Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PI10) Finisher Controller PCB Yes Action / No Turn the delivery roller by hand. Does it No Correct mechanical turn smoothly? operation. Check the delivery clock sensor. Is the No Replace the sensor. sensor normal? Does the voltage between J11-4 and No Replace the Finisher J11-5 on the Finisher Controller PCB Controller PCB. change to 24 VDC as soon as the Yes Check the wiring from the delivery motor starts to rotate? motor to the controller PCB. If normal, replace the motor. Checks

5. E7-22 (Faulty Alignment Motor) Cause Checks Yes Action / No No Replace the sensor.

Alignment Plate Home Check the alignment plate home Position Sensor (PI6) position sensor. Is it normal? Wiring Is the wiring between the Finisher No Correct the wiring. Controller PCB and the alignment plate motor normal? Alignment Plate Is there any mechanical obstacle in the Yes Remove the mechanical path of the alignment plate? obstacle. Alignment Motor (M3) Replace the alignment motor. Is the Yes End. problem corrected? Finisher Controller No Replace the Finisher PCB Controller PCB. 6. E7-23 (Faulty Staple Motor) Cause Wiring Stapler Finisher Controller PCB Checks Is the wiring between the stapler and the Finisher Controller PCB normal? Replace the stapler. Is the problem corrected? Yes Action / No No Correct the wiring. Yes End. No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Ver. 5.1

650

MAR 2005

7. E7-24 (Faulty Stapler Shift Motor) Cause Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Stapler Shift Home Check the stapler shift home position Position Sensor (PI7) sensor. Is the sensor normal? Wiring Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the stapler shift motor normal? Stapler Shift Base Is there any mechanical obstacle in the path of the stapler shift base? Stapler Shift Motor Replace the stapler motor. Is the (M4) problem corrected? Finisher Controller PCB 8. E7-48 (Faulty Swing Motor) Cause Checks

Yes Action / No No Replace the sensor. No Correct the wiring.

Yes Remove the mechanical obstacles. Yes End. No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Swinging Mechanism Turn the Swing Motor in reverse by hand. Does the swing guide move up and down? Swing Guide Closed Is the swing guide closed detection switch 2 normal? Detection Switch 2 (MS6) Is the swing guide closed detection switch 2 pressed correctly?

Yes Action / No No Correct the swing mechanism. No Replace the microswitch.

Swing Motor (M7) Finisher Controller PCB Swing Guide Open Sensor (PI18) Safety Range Switch (MS3)

No Correct mechanical operation. Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Does the swing motor rotate in reverse No Replace the motor. at a specific timing? Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Is the swing guide open sensor normal? No Replace the sensor. Check the safety range switch. Is the No Replace the switch. switch normal? Is the safety range detection switch No Correct mechanical pressed correctly? operation. Check the swing guide clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor. the sensor normal? Does the voltage of the swing motor No Replace the Finisher between J11-6 and -7 on the Finisher Controller PCB. Controller PCB reach 24 V at a specific Yes Check the wiring from the rotation timing? motor to the Finisher Controller PCB. If normal, replace the motor.

Swing Guide Clock Sensor (PI20) Finisher Controller PCB

Ver. 5.1

651

MAR 2005

9. E7-27 (Faulty Tray Lift Motor) Cause Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8) Tray Lift Mechanism Finisher Controller PCB Wiring Tray Lift Motor (M5) Tray Position Tray Upper Limit Switch (MS5) Wiring Finisher Controller PCB Finisher Controller PCB Tray Lift Mechanism Tray Lift Motor (M5) Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / 19) Finisher Controller PCB Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Yes Action / No Check the tray home position sensor. Is No Replace the sensor. it normal? Check the tray lift mechanism. Is the No Correct the mechanism. mechanism normal? Is the tray lift motor supplied with 24 No Replace the Finisher VDC by the Finisher Controller PCB as Controller PCB. soon as the tray is driven? Check the wiring from the finisher No Correct the wiring. controller PCB to the tray lift motor. Is Yes Replace the tray lift motor. the wiring normal? Is the tray at the tray upper limit switch? Yes Lower the tray. Check the tray upper limit switch. Is the No Replace the switch. switch normal? Check the wiring from the Finisher No Correct the wiring. Controller PCB to the tray upper limit Yes Replace the Finisher switch. Is the wiring normal? Controller PCB. Does the tray move up / down? No Go to a. on the left. Yes Go to c. on the left. a. Is the motor supplied with power by Yes Go to b. on the left. the Finisher Controller PCB as soon No Replace the Finisher as the tray moves up / down? Controller PCB. b. Is there a fault in the tray lift Yes Correct the tray lift mechanism? mechanism. No Replace the tray lift motor. c. Is the tray lift motor clock sensor 1/2 No Replace the sensor PCB. normal? Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Ver. 5.1

652

MAR 2005

10. E7-20 (Faulty Second Feed Motor) Cause Second Feed Motor (M8) Shutter Mechanism Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Shutter Open Detection Sensor (PI5) Finisher Controller PCB Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4) Safety Range Switch (MS3)

Yes Action / No Does the second feed motor in reverse No Replace the second feed at a specific timing? motor or the Finisher Controller PCB. Are the shutter and the shutter upper / No Engage them correctly. lower bar engaged correctly? Turn the feed roller 2 in reverse by No Correct mechanism from hand. Does the shutter upper / lower the shutter upper/lower bar bar move up / down? to the gear of the feed roller 2. Is the shutter open detection sensor No Replace the sensor. normal? Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. No Replace the switch.

Finisher Controller PCB

Is the shutter closed detection switch normal? Check the safety range switch. Is the switch normal? Is the safety range detection switch passed correctly? Is the shutter closed detection switch pressed correctly?

No Replace the switch. No Correct mechanical operation. No Correct the mechanism. Yes Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Ver. 5.1

653

MAR 2005

11.1.7.3.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

1. E7-41 (Faulty Paper Positioning Plate) Cause Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Yes Action / No Check the paper positioning plate home No Replace the sensor. position sensor. Is the sensor normal? Checks Do the paper positioning plates operate Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch at a specific timing? Controller PCB. No Check the positioning plate drive mechanism. If a fault is found, correct it. Otherwise, go to step 3. Replace the paper positioning plate Yes End. motor. Is the problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

2. E7-42 (Faulty Paper Folding Motor) Cause Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI4S) Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Paper Folding Motor (M2S) Checks Check the paper folding motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal? Check the paper folding home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? Yes Action / No No Replace the sensor. No Replace the sensor.

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Does the paper folding motor operate at Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch a specific timing? Controller PCB. No Check the paper folding roller drive mechanism. If a fault is found, correct it. Otherwise, go to step 4. Replace the paper folding motor. Is the Yes End. problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

Ver. 5.1

654

MAR 2005

3. E7-43 (Faulty Guide Motor) Cause Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Yes Action / No Guide Home Position Check the guide home position sensor. No Replace the sensor. Sensor (PI13S) Is the sensor normal? Saddle Stitch Does the guide motor operate at a Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB specific timing? Controller PCB. Guide Motor (M3S) No Check the guide plate drive mechanism. If a fault is found, correct it. Otherwise, go to step 3. Replace the guide motor. Is the problem Yes End. Saddle Stitch Controller PCB corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. 4. E7-44 (Faulty Alignment Motor) Cause Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Checks Check the alignment plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? Does the alignment motor operate at a specific timing? Yes Action / No No Replace the sensor.

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB

Replace the alignment motor. Is the problem corrected?

Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. No Check the alignment plate drive mechanism. If a fault is found, correct it. Otherwise, go to step 3. Yes End. No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

5. E7-45 / 46 (Faulty Stitcher) Cause Stitcher (installation) Stitching Home Position Switch (MS7S / MS5S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Checks Are the front (E7-46) and rear (E7-45) stitchers and bases installed correctly? Is the stitching home position switch of the front and the rear stitchers normal? Do the front and the rear stitchers operate at a specific timing? Yes Action / No No Install them correctly. No Replace the front or rear stitcher. Yes Check the wiring between the stitcher and the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. If normal, replace the controller PCB. No Replace the front or the rear stitcher.

Stitcher Motor (M7S / M6S)

Ver. 5.1

655

MAR 2005

6. E7-47 (Faulty Paper Pushing Plate Motor) Cause Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Check the paper pushing plate home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? Does the paper pushing plate motor operate at a specific timing?

Yes Action / No No Replace the sensor.

Saddle Stitch Controller PCB Paper Pushing Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1S)

Yes Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. No Check the paper pushing plate drive mechanisms. If a fault is found, correct it. Otherwise, go to step 3. Replace the paper pushing plate motor. Yes End. Is the problem corrected? No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. Check the paper pushing plate top No Replace the sensor. position sensor. Is the sensor normal? Check the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal? No Replace the sensor.

7. E7-49 (Disconnected Sensor Connector) Cause Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S; disconnected) Wiring Checks Yes Action / No No Connect the connectors.

Are the connectors of the guide home position sensor and the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB connected correctly? Is the wiring between the sensor and Yes Correct the wiring. the Saddle Stitch broken? Power Supply Is 5 VDC present at J9-7 on the Saddle No Replace the Saddle Stitch Stitch Controller PCB? Controller PCB. Is 5 VDC present at J9-10 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB? Is 5 VDC present at J9-13 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB? Ground Is J9-8 on the Saddle Stitch Controller No PCB grounded correctly? Is J9-11 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB grounded correctly? Is J9-14 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB grounded correctly? Paper Pushing Plate Are the connectors of the paper pushing No Connect the connectors. Home Position Top plate top position sensor and the Position Sensor Saddle Stitch Controller PCB connected (PI14S; disconnected) correctly? Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Top Position Sensor (PI15S; disconnected) 656

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

8. E7-50 (Faulty Microswitch) Cause Switch Actuator Checks

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Check the switch actuator of the inlet door. Do the switch and the sensor operate correctly? Check the switch actuator of the front door. Do the switch and the sensor operate correctly? Check the delivery door switch actuator. Do the switch and the sensor operate correctly? Inlet Door Switch Check the inlet door switch. Is the No Replace the switch. (MS1S) switch normal? Inlet Cover Sensor Measure the voltage at J10-8 on the Yes The sensor is faulty. (PI9S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the Replace the sensor. inlet cover open. Is it 5V? Power Supply, Wiring Measure the voltage between J19-1 (+) No Replace the Saddle Stitch and J19-2 () on the Finisher Controller Controller PCB. PCB. Is it 24V? Yes Check the wiring between J19 on the Finisher Controller PCB and J1 on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. If a fault is found, correct it. Otherwise, replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. Front Door Switch Check the front door switch. Is the No Replace the switch. (MS2S) switch normal? Front Door Open / Measure the voltage at J11-12 on the Yes The sensor is faulty. Closed Sensor Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the Replace the sensor. (PI12S) front door open. Is it 5V? No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB. Delivery Switch Check the delivery door switch. Is the No Replace the switch. (MS3S) switch normal? Delivery Cover Measure the voltage at J11-9 on the Yes The sensor is faulty. Sensor (PI3S) Saddle Stitch Controller PCB with the Replace the sensor. delivery door open. Is it 5V? No Replace the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB.

Yes Action / No No Correct the mechanism.

Ver. 5.1

657

MAR 2005

11.1.7.3.3. Puncher Unit (option)

1. E7-28 (Faulty Punch Motor)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Yes Action / No Punch Motor Clock Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is No Replace the sensor. Sensor (PI2P) the sensor normal? Punch Home Position Check the punch home position sensor. No Replace the sensor. Sensor (PI3P) Is the sensor normal? Wiring Is the wiring between the punch home No Correct the wiring. position sensor and the Finisher Controller PCB normal? Punch Mechanism Is there any trouble with the punch Yes Correct the punch mechanism? mechanism. Punch Motor (M1P) No Replace the punch motor. Punch Driver PCB Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the No Replace the Finisher problem corrected? Controller PCB. Yes End. Cause Checks 2. E7-29 (Faulty Horizontal Registration Motor) Cause Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P) Wiring Checks Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? Yes Action / No No Replace the sensor.

Horizontal Registration Mechanism Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) Punch Driver PCB

Is the wiring between the horizontal No Correct the wiring. registration home position sensor and the Finisher Controller PCB normal? Is there any problem with the horizontal Yes Correct the horizontal registration mechanism? registration mechanism. No Replace the horizontal registration motor. Replace the punch driver PCB. Is the problem corrected? No Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Yes End.

Ver. 5.1

658

MAR 2005

11.1.7.4. Self Diagnosis

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The CPU (Q1) on the machines Finisher Controller PCB or on the Saddle Stitch Controller PCB is equipped with a self diagnosis function. This function runs a check at programmed times and sends an error code to the copier upon detection of any detected abnormalities.

11.1.7.4.1. Finisher Unit

Error Code E7-40 E7-25 Error Type Communication Error Description

E7-26

E7-21

E7-22

E7-23

E7-24

Communications with the saddle stitch unit is disrupted. Height Sensor (PS1) Communications is not possible between the height sensor and the Finisher Controller PCB. Or, there is a fault in communication data. Communications between the sensor and the Finisher Controller is not possible for a specific period of time. The sensor is identified as being disconnected at power-ON. Sensor adjustment using a DIP switch has a fault. Back-up RAM There is a fault in the checksum value of the Finisher Controller PCB at power-ON. There is a fault in the checksum value of the punch driver PCB at power-ON. Delivery Motor (M2) A specific number of clock pulses have not been Delivery Motor Clock Sensor (PI10) obtained from the delivery motor clock sensor at the beginning of operation. Clock pulses in numbers equivalent to a feed length of 200 mm are not obtained while paper is being fed. Alignment Motor (M3) The alignment plate does not leave the alignment Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor home position sensor even after the alignment motor has operated for 2 sec. The alignment plate does not return to the alignment plate home position sensor even after the alignment motor has operated for 2 sec. Staple Motor (M6) The stapler does not leave the stapling home Staple Home Position Detection Switch position even after the stapler motor has operated (MS7) for 0.5 sec. The stapler does not return to the stapling home position even after the stapler motor has operated for 0.5 sec. Stapler Shift Motor (M4) The stapler shift home position sensor does not turn Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor OFF even after the stapler shift motor has operated (PI7) for 4 sec. The stapler shift home position cannot be detected even after the stapler shift motor has operated for 4 sec.

Ver. 5.1

659

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Error Code E7-48

Error Type Swing Motor (M7) Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch 2 (MS6) Swing Motor (M7) Swing Guide Open Detecting Sensor (PI18) Safety Range Switch (MS3) Swing Guide Closed Detection Switch 2 (MS6) Swing Motor (M7) Swing Motor Clock Sensor (PI20) Tray Lift Motor (M5) Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / PI19) Tray Home Position Sensor (PI8) Tray Upper Limit Detection Switch (MS5) Tray Lift Motor (M5) Tray Lift Motor Clock Sensor 1/2 (PI9 / PI19) Second Feed Motor (M8) Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4)

Description

E7-27

E7-20

The swing guide closed detection switch does not turn ON even after the swing motor has rotated counter-clockwise for 1 sec. The swing guide open detection sensor does not turn ON even after the swing motor has rotated clockwise for 1 sec. The swing guide closed detection switch is OFF when the tray 1/2 is at the safety range switch OFF position. The clock pulse is discontinued for 200 ms during swing operation. The movement does not end within 15 sec after the tray lift motor is driven. The tray home position can not be detected after the tray lift motor has been driven for 15 sec. The tray upper limit detection switch is ON while the tray is moving up. Clock pulses from the clock sensor 1/2 are not obtained for 200 ms after the tray lift motor has been driven. The shutter closed detection switch does not turn ON after the second feed motor has rotated counterclockwise for 1 sec or more. Second Feed Motor (M8) The shutter open sensor does not turn ON after the Shutter Open Sensor (PI5) second feed motor has rotated counter-clockwise for 1 sec or more. Safety Range Detection Switch (MS3) The shutter closed detection switch is OFF when the Shutter Closed Detection Switch (MS4) tray 1/2 is at the safety range switch OFF position during operation of the tray lift motor.

Ver. 5.1

660

MAR 2005

11.1.7.4.2. Saddle Stitch Unit

Error Code E7-41 Error Type Paper Positioning Plate Motor (M4S) Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor (PI7S)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Description The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn ON even after the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1.33 sec or more. The paper positioning plate home position sensor does not turn OFF even after the paper positioning plate motor has been driven for 1 sec or more. The number of detecting pulses from the paper folding motor clock sensor drops below a specific value. The state of the paper folding home position sensor does not change even after the paper folding motor has driven for 3 sec. The guide home position sensor does not turn ON even after the guide motor has been driven for 0.455 sec or more. The guide home position sensor does not turn OFF even after the guide motor has been driven for 1 sec or more. The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn ON even when the alignment motor has been driven for 0.5 sec or more. (During initial operation, the motor is driven for 1.67 sec.) The alignment plate home position sensor does not turn OFF even when the alignment motor has been driven for 1 sec or more. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF even when the stitcher motor (rear) has been rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec or more. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON even when the stitcher motor (rear) has been rotated counter-clockwise for 0.5 sec or more. The stitching home position sensor does not turn OFF even when the stitcher motor (front) has been rotated clockwise for 0.5 sec or more. The stitching home position sensor does not turn ON even when the stitcher motor (front) has been rotated counter-clockwise for 0.5 sec or more.

E7-42

E7-43

Paper Folding Motor (M2S) Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor (PI4S) Paper Folding Motor (M2S) Paper Folding Home Position Sensor (PI21S) Guide Motor (M3S) Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S)

E7-44

Alignment Motor (M5S) Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor (PI5S)

E7-45

Stitcher Motor (rear, M6S) Stitching Home Position Sensor (rear, MS5S)

E7-46

Stitcher Motor (front, M7S) Stitching Home Position Sensor (front, MS7S)

Ver. 5.1

661

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Error Code E7-47

Error Type Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI4S)

Description The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn ON even when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more. The paper pushing plate home position sensor does not turn OFF even when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more. The paper pushing plate top position sensor does not turn OFF even after the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 80 msec or more. The number of clock pulses for the paper pushing plate motor clock sensor drops below a specific value. The paper pushing plate top position sensor does not turn ON when the paper pushing plate motor has been driven for 0.3 sec or more. The connector of the guide home position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the paper pushing plate home position sensor is identified as being disconnected. The connector of the paper pushing plate top position sensor is identified as being disconnected. After any of the following three photo-interrupters used for the covers has found that its respective door is closed, the inlet door switch is identified as being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or more after the start of the copier initial rotation. Inlet cover sensor (PI9S) Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S) Delivery cover sensor (PI3S) (The front door switch (MS2S) or the delivery door switch (MS3S) may be also open.) After any of the following three photo-interrupters used for the covers has found that its respective door is closed, the front door switch is identified as being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or more after the start of the copier initial rotation. Inlet cover sensor (PI9S) Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S) Delivery cover sensor (PI3S) (The delivery door switch (MS3S) may be also open.) After any of the following three photo-interrupters used for the covers has found that its respective door is closed, the delivery door switch is identified as being open as soon as copying status or 1 sec or more after the start of the copier initial rotation. Inlet cover sensor (PI9S) Front door open / closed sensor (PI2S) Delivery cover sensor (PI3S)

E7-49

E7-50

Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor (PI1S) Paper Pushing Plate Motor (M8S) Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI5S) Guide Home Position Sensor (PI13S) Connector Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor (PI14S) Connector Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor (PI15S) Connector Inlet Door Switch (MS1S) Front Door Switch (MS2S) Delivery Door Switch (MS3S)

Front Door Switch (MS2S) Delivery Door Switch (MS3S)

Delivery Door Switch (MS3S)

Ver. 5.1

662

MAR 2005

11.1.7.4.3. Punch Unit (Optional)

Error Code E7-28 Error Type Punch Motor (M1P) Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI2P) Punch Home Position Sensor (PI3P)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Description The punch motor clock sensor cannot detect the clock pulse within 100 ms. The puncher does not leave the punch home position sensor even after the punch motor has operated for 200 ms. The puncher does not return to the punch home position sensor even after the punch motor has operated for 200 ms. The target number of clock pulses cannot be obtained from the punch motor clock sensor at start of operation. The puncher does not leave the horizontal registration home position even after the horizontal registration motor has operated for 4 sec. The puncher does not return to the horizontal registration home position even after the horizontal registration motor has operated for 4 sec.

E7-29

Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI1P)

Ver. 5.1

663

MAR 2005

11.1.7.4.4. Finisher User error

Note: UXX will appear in the message display. Code U4 U11 U12 U30 U31 U32 U33 U34 U35 oF

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Item Finisher / Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift Tray (option) open Finisher Copy Paper removal Staple Cover / Top Door open (option) Finisher Punch Cover open Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not installed Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover open Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit Cover open Finisher overflow

See Page

1. User Error Code Item U4 Finisher Inverting Unit / Inverting Shift Tray (option) Check Points 1) Are the exit options installed correctly? 2) Exit options connector is shorted or broken. 3) Exit options connector is defective. 4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 6) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 7) LVPS is defective. 8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 9) CPU PCB is defective. 1) Copy paper is already in at least one bin. 2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size for stapler use is in the bin. 3) There is a double feed from the duplex unit in the bin. 4) Finisher paper detecting sensor connector is shorted or broken. 5) Finisher paper detecting sensor is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 11) CPU PCB is defective.

U11

Finisher copy paper removal Note: When clearing U11, all paper must be removed from bins.

Ver. 5.1

664

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code Item U12 Staple Door / Top Door open

U30

Finisher Punch Cover open

U31

Finisher Saddle Unit paper removal

U32

Finisher Saddle Unit Feed Cover open

Check Points 1) Is the stapler door or top door closed correctly? 2) Stapler door or top door open/close sensor connector is shorted or broken. 3) Stapler door or top door open close sensor is defective. 4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 6) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 7) LVPS is defective. 8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 9) CPU PCB is defective. 1) Is the punch cover closed correctly? 2) Punch cover open/close sensor connector is shorted or broken. 3) Punch cover open/close sensor is defective. 4) Punch unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Punch unit CPU PCB is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 11) CPU PCB is defective. 1) Copy paper is already in finisher saddle unit. 2) Copy paper which is unsuitable size is in saddle unit. 3) Too many copy paper in saddle unit. 4) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor connector is shorted or broken. 5) Finisher saddle unit paper detecting sensor is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 1) Is the saddle unit feed cover closed correctly? 2) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor connector is shorted or broken. 3) Saddle unit feed cover open / close sensor is defective. 4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 11) CPU PCB is defective. 665
MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Code Item U33 Finisher Saddle Staple Unit is not installed

U34

U35

oF

Check Points 1) Is the saddle staple unit installed properly? 2) Saddle staple unit storage sensor connector is shorted or broken. 3) Saddle staple unit storage sensor is defective. 4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Front Cover 1) Is the saddle front cover closed correctly? open 2) Saddle front cover open / close sensor connector is shorted or broken. 3) Saddle front cover open / close sensor is defective. 4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. Finisher Saddle Unit Saddle Paper Exit 1) Is the saddle paper exit cover closed correctly? Cover open 2) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor connector is shorted or broken. 3) Saddle paper exit cover open/close sensor is defective. 4) Saddle unit CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 5) Saddle unit CPU PCB is defective. 6) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or broken. 7) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 8) LVPS connector is shorted or broken. 9) LVPS is defective. 10) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or broken. 11) CPU PCB is defective. Finisher over flow Too many copies in the finisher bin. The paper must be removed and press the finisher mode key.

Ver. 5.1

666

MAR 2005

11.1.8.

Appendix

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.1.8.1. Signal Names and Abbreviations

Provided below are the abbreviations and signal names used in this manual and in drawings for all the Finisher and punch functions. Note: Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals. However, the state 1 or 0 of these analog signals cannot be indicated, Otherwise, the state of digital signals 1 or 0 can be indicated. Finisher Unit BESCPSL BUFENTR BUFPASS CRTSET DELCLK DROPN DRSW ENTSL ESCPSL EXITSL FLPSL FSTTRAY HOOKEMP HOOKTOP JOGHP JOINT PDEL PDLSL PENT SFTCLK1 SFTCLK2 SHUTCLD SNDTRAY STOPN STPCON STPDRHP STPHP STPTY SWGCLK SWGGCLD SWGOPN TRAYSAF TRAYHP TRYLIM Belt Escape Solenoid Drive Signal Buffer Path Inlet Paper Detect Signal Buffer Path Paper Detect Signal Cartridge Detect Signal Delivery Motor Clock Detect Signal Door Open Detect Signal Door Switch Signal Buffer Inlet Solenoid Drive Signal Escape Solenoid Drive Signal Buffer Outlet Solenoid Drive Signal Flapper Solenoid Drive Signal Tray 1 Paper Detect Signal Hook Empty Detect Signal Hook Stop Position Detect Signal Alignment Plate HP Detect Signal Joint Detect Signal Delivery Detect Signal Paddle Solenoid Drive Signal Inlet Paper Detect Signal Shift Motor Clock Detect Signal 1 Shift Motor Clock Detect Signal 2 Shutter Closed Detect Switch Signal Tray 2 Paper Detect Signal Shutter Open Detect Signal Stapler Connect Detect Signal Stapler Drive HP Detect Signal Stapler HP Detect Signal Staple Tray Paper Detect Signal Swing Guide Clock Detect Signal Swing Guide Closed Detect Switch Signal Swing Guide Open Detect Signal Tray Safety Switch Signal Tray Home Position Detect Signal Tray Upper Limit Detecting Switch Signal

Ver. 5.1

667

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Saddle Stitch Unit 1STPA 2NDPA 3RDDPA DELV DELVMS EJCVR FDR FDRLHP FDROPN FLDCLK FLPSL1 FSPSL2 GIDHP HKEMP1 HKEMP2 INLTCVR INLTCVRMS JOGHP LUNGECLK LUNGEHP LUNGETOP PAFLDHP PAPPOS PPOSPAR RLNIPSL STCHHP1 STCHHP2 STPLHP TRAYPAR VPJM No. 1 Paper Sensor Detect Signal No. 2 Paper Sensor Detect Signal No. 3 Paper Sensor Detect Signal Delivery Detect Signal Delivery Door Open Detect Switch Signal Delivery Door Open Detect Signal Front Door Open Detect Signal Crescent Roller Phase Detect Signal Front Door Open Detect Switch Signal Fold Motor Clock Signal Flapper Drive Signal 1 Flapper Drive Signal 2 Paper Guide Home Position Detect Signal Hook Empty Detect Signal 1 Hook Empty Detect Signal 2 Inlet Cover Open Detect Signal Inlet Cover Open Switch Signal Alignment HP Detect Signal Lunge Motor Clock Signal Lunge Home Position Detect Signal Lunge Top Position Detect Signal Paper Fold Home Position Detect Signal Paper Position Plate HP Detect Signal Paper Positioning Guide Paper Detect Signal Feed Plate Contact Solenoid Drive Signal Stitching HP Detect Signal 1 Stitching HP Detect Signal 2 Stitcher IN Detect Signal Tray Paper Detect Signal Vertical Path Paper Detect Signal

Ver. 5.1

668

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Puncher Unit (Option) DFULL FDROPN LEDON LEDON1 LEDON2 LEDON3 LEDON4 LEDON5 PAEND PUNCHHP PUNCHCLK SREG1 SREG2 SREG3 SREG4 SREGHP UDROPN Dust Full Detect Signal Front Door Open Detect Switch Signal LED ON Signal LED1 ON Signal LED2 ON Signal LED3 ON Signal LED4 ON Signal LED5 ON Signal Paper End Detect Signal Punch Home Position Detect Signal Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal Side Registration Detect Signal 1 Side Registration Detect Signal 2 Side Registration Detect Signal 3 Side Registration Detect Signal 4 Side Registration Home Position Detect Signal Upper Door Open Detect Switch Signal

Ver. 5.1

669

MAR 2005

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J1 G 2 +24V 1 J2 J2 JS1-1A JS1-2A JS1-3A JS1-4A J209-3 C N0 J209 J209-4 JS1-5A JS1-7A J1 J305

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1
JS1-C2 JS1-C3

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7
G 6 +24V 5 J302

M8 Second Feed Motor

A B A B +24V +24V J209-2 J204 J204 J127-1 J127-2 J127-3 J204-1 J204-2 J204-3 J127 N0 M

6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1
J125 J208 J208 J14 J14

6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 3
J11-10 J11-9 J11-8

J101 M M9 J5 SWGGCLD +24VMOVE (TRYLMT) +24VSHIFT J5

J1010

J201

Inlet Feed Motor

Height Sensor

4 3 2 1
C NC N0 J112-1 +24V J12B J12B

4 3 2 1
MS5 J131 C NC N0

J6-1 J6-2 J6-3 J6-4 Tray Upper Limit Detect Switch

Safety Range Switch

3 2 1

J5-6 J5-5 J5-4

ENTSL +24V

A B A B +24V +5V SWGCLK G PDLSL +5V

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J207B-1 J207B-2 J207B-3 J207B-4 J207B-5 J207B-6 J207B-7 J207B-8 J207B-9 J207B-10 J207B-11

FG4

B
J5-1 J5-3 J400 PI19

J112

J112

Door Switch

C N0 NC

1 2

1 2

1 2

1 2

J108-1 J108-2 J500-1 J500-2 J205-3 J205-1 J205-2 J205-3 J113-1 J113-2 J113-3

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BESCPSL +24V STOPN G +5V DROPN G +5V J12A J12A

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J9A J9A

M2 Delivery Motor

Tray Shift Motor Clock Sensor 2

J113 J12B-1 J12B-2 J12B-3 PI9 Tray Shift Motor Clock Sensor 1

J113

Sensor PCB

Door Open Sensor

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

J14-12 J14-11 J14-10 J14-9 J14-8 J14-7

J107 J12A-11 J12A-10 PI8 Tray Home Position Sensor J130

Flapper Solenoid

PI5 Shutter Closed Sensor

1 2 3 2 1 3 2 1

1 2

J12A-4 J12A-5 J12A-6

J107-1 J107-2 J210-1 J210-2 J210-3 J130-1 J130-2 J130-3 J117-1 J117-2 J117-3

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

FLPSL +24V STPHP G +5V TRYHP G +5V JOINT G +5V

ESCPSL +24V +5V DELCLK +5V JOGHP G +5V STPTY G +5V

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J207A-1 J207A-2 J207A-3 J207A-4 J207A-5 J207A-6 J207A-7 J207A-8 J207A-9 J207A-10 J207A-11

J128-6 J128-5 J128-4

J205

J205

1 2 3

J109 J117 PI15 J206 J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J206 J140 MS4 Shutter Closed Detect Switch J12B-10 J12B-9 Joint Sensor

A
3 2 1 3 2 1
J12A-1 J12A-2 J12A-3

Shutter Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3 2 1

1 2 3

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

No. 1 Tray Paper Sensor

PI4 Stapling Tray Sensor

C
J106 PI1

3 2 1

3 2 1

V V V

1 2 3

3 2 1

J102

J1020

1 2 3 4 5 6
Inlet Sensor

6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
J9B J9B

J14-1 J14-2 J14-3 J14-4 J14-5 J14-6

6 5 4 3 2 1
J202 +24VMOVE

6 5 4 3 2 1

No. 2 Tray Paper Sensor

PI6 Alignment Guide Home Position Sensor

3 2 1
J132 TRYLIM +24VSHIFT TRAYSAFE +24VSHIFT +24VMOVE DRSW

3 2 1

V V V

1 2 3

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J17-1 J17-2 J17-3 J17-4 J17-5 J17-6 J17-7 J17-8 J17-9

J114

J209-4 J209-3 J209-2 J209-1 J132-2 J132-1 J131-1 J131-2 J131-1 J112-2

1 2

2 1

J5-7 J5-8

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5

Ver. 5.1

11.1.9.

1
JS1-C1 M JS1 M1 First Feed Motor J306 J304 J10-6 J10-5 J10-4 J10-3 J10-2 J10-1 J10 1 2 3 4 5 6 J6 J10 J6 J1-1 FG-1 J1-2 J2-1 7A C4 C3 C1 C2

10

11

12

M4 Stapler Shift Motor

Schematic Diagram

Stapler Unit
1 2 3 4 5 6
A B A B +24V +24V

F
J301 G +5V HOOKEMP CRTSET STPDRHP STPCON HOOKTOP +24V B A B A

1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1
Host Machine

1 2 3 4 5 5 4 3 2 1

J307

Relay PCB 3

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2-2 J2-4 J2-5 J2-6 J2-7 6A 5A 4A 3A 2A 1A

Relay PCB 4

M6 Staple Motor J210 J16 J16 C J210 J5-12 J5-11 J5-10 J5-9

J129

4 3 2 1
J209-2

4 3 2 1

MS6-N0 MS6-C MS2-N0 MS2-C

PI7

Stapler Shift Home Position Sensor

E
J24 J24

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1

3 2 1

J12-7 J12-8 J12-9

J16-6 J16-5 J16-4 J16-3 J16-2 J16-1

J109

J109-1 J109-2 J110-1 J110-2 J110-3 J105-1 J105-2 J105-3

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
EXITSL +24V BUFPASS G +5V BUFENTR G +5V J207B-3 J207B-4 J207B-5 SFTCLK1 G +5V SFTCLK2 G +5V SNDTRAY G +5V FSTTRAY G +5V J11-7 J11-6 J11-5 J11-4 J11-3 J11-2 J11-1 J501-1 J501-2 J119-1 J119-2 J134-1 J134-2 J134-3 J206-8 J206-7

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 1

MS6 MS2 PI18 PI20 Swing Guide Swing Guide Swing Guide Swing Guide Closed Detect Closed Detect Closed Sensor Clock Sensor Switch 2 Switch 1

11.1.9.1. Finisher Unit Circuit Diagram

Buffer Outlet Solenoid J17 J17

2 1

1 2

3 2 1

SL

SL3

J110

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J501 M

M7 Swing Motor

1 2 3

1 2 3

2 1
J128

SL5 Paddle Solenoid

D
J11 J11 SWGOPN 10 10 G 9 9 +5V 8 8 J207B J207B J6 J6

J105

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J400-1 J400-2 J400-3 J400-4 J400-5 J400-6 J201-1 J201-2 J201-3 J201-4 J201-5 J201-6

1 2

PI14 J114-1 J114-2 J114-3 J114-4

Buffer Path Paper Sensor J24-8 J24-7 J24-6 J24-5 J24-4 J24-3 J24-2 J24-1

SL

J207B-2 J207B-2

2 1
J124

1 2

PI17

Finisher Controller PCB

Buffer Path Inlet Sensor

1 2 3

1 2 3

J202-2 J202-3 J202-4 J202-5 J202-6 J202-1 J202-2 J202-3 J202-4

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
PENT G +5V +24V +24V B A B A

M3 Alignment Motor

J600 J12-8 J12-7 J115 J7 J7 M J7-5 J7-4 J115-1 J115-2 J206-3 J206-2 J206-1 SHUTCLD

J500

670
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
G Vin +5V V0 M5 Tray Lift Motor

J207B-6 J207B-7 J207B-8 J207B-9 J207B-10

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

SL

SL7

Belt Escape Solenoid

2 1 1 2 1 2

1 2

2 1

1 2

7 6 5 4 +5V 3 PDEL 2 G 1

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J204-1 J204-2 J204-3 J206-1 J206-2 J206-3 J206-4 J206-5 J206-6 J206-7 J9B-11 J9B-10 J9B-9 J9B-8 J9B-7 J9B-6 J9B-5 J9B-4 J9B-3 J9B-2 J9B-1

J123

SL

SL6 Escape Solenoid

J502

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J124-1 J124-2 J124-3 J124-4 J124-5 J125-1 J125-2 J125-3 J126-1 J126-2

Swing Guide

J207A-11 J207A-10

1 2 3

3 2 1

J122 J207A-1 J207A-2 J207A-3 J207A J207A

PI11 MS3

3 2 1

3 2 1

J207A-4 J207A-5 J207A-6

J121

PI12

3 2 1

3 2 1

J9A-11 J9A-10 J9A-9 J9A-8 J9A-7 J9A-6 J9A-5 J9A-4 J9A-3 J9A-2 J9A-1

J123-2 J123-3 J120-1 J120-2 J120-3 J121-1 J121-2 J121-3 J122-1 J122-2 J122-3

J134 J206-1 J206-2 J206-3

PS1

3 2 1

3 2 1

PI3 Delivery Sensor

J207A-7 J207A-8 J207A-9

J120

3 2 1

3 2 1

PI10 Delivery Motor Clock Sensor

MS1

J119 M J206-4 J206-5

2 1

2 1

PI16

FG5

3 2 1

J118-1 J118-2 J118-3

J205-1 J205-2 J205-3

J118

SL1

3 2 1

3 2 1

SL

SL2

Buffer Inlet Solenoid

1 2 3

MS4-C MS4-N0 MS4-NC

J206-1 J206-2 J206-3

3 2 1

C N0 NC

MAR 2005

J126 J18-3 J18-2 J18-1

PI20S PI19S PI18S No. 3 Paper No. 2 Paper No. 1 Paper Sensor Sensor Sensor

PI21S Paper folding home position sensor

J131-6 J131-5 J131-4 J131-3 J131-2 J131-1

J131-3 J131-2 J131-1 J208-4 J208-3 J208-2

PI2S Front Door Open/Closed Sensor

J425

J325

J225

J125

3 2 1
J124

3 2 1

1 2 3 4
J9-1 J9-2 J9-3

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

4 3 2 1

PI1S Paper Pushing Plate Motor Clock Sensor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

J10-8 J10-7 J10-6

PI9S Inlet cover sensor

1 2 3

1 2 3

J525

J107

PI12S Crescrent Roller Phase Sensor

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3

1 2 3

J9-4 J9-5 J9-6

J10-1 J10-2 J10-3 J10-4 J10-5

+5V G STPLHP +5V G VPJM

1 2 3 4 +24V 5 G 6

PI3S Delivery Cover Sensor

J204

5 4 3 2 1

J304

1 2 3 4 5

J123

5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5

Ver. 5.1
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J32 J32 J19 J1-2 J1-1 J113 J4-2 J4-1

F
2 1
J109 N0

2 1 3 2 1

2 1

MS1S Inlet Door Switch

J115 M

M5S Alignment Motor

Finisher Unit

M1S Feed Motor J3 J31 J4-4 J4-3 J31 J110

1 2 3 4 3 2 1
N0

4 3 2 1

J5-1 J5-2 J5-3 J5-4

5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1

J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5

MS2S Front Door Switch

J116a

J116

J2-1 J2-2 J2-3 J2-4 J2-5 J2-6

SL4S Feed Plate Contact Solenoid J114 J4-6 J4-5

2 1

1 2

J5-6 J5-5

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J111 J205 J305

SL M M4S Paper Positioning Plate Motor J7-6 J7-7 J7-8 J7-9 J7-10 J4-7 J4-8 J115-1 J115-2 J115-3 J115-4 J116-1 J113-2 J117-1 J117-2 J118-1 J118-2 J121-1 J121-2 J121-3 J121-4 J121-5 J121-6 J121-7 J120-1 J120-2 J120-3 J120-4 J120-5 J120-6 J120-7 J119-1 J119-2 J119-3 J119-4 J119-5

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 1 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MS3S Delivery Door Switch

1 2 3

N0

J117a

J117

5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1

J112

M2S Paper Folding Motor

SL J120 J5 J8

2 1

1 2

J5-4 J5-3

1 2 3

1 2 3

J118a

J118

2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J15 J12

1 2 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J5-2 J5-1

J108 J4-9 J4-10

SL J5 J8

SL2S SL1S No. 2 Deflecting No. 1 Deflecting Plate Solenoid Plate Solenoid

1 2

1 2

M8S Paper Pushing Plate Motor

5 4 3 2 1

4 3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J15

J12

M3S Guide Motor B B A A A B A B +24V RLNPSL +24V FSPSL2 +24V FLPSL1 +24V STDHP1 G HKEMP1 STDHP2 G HKEMP2 J6 +24V 1 G 2 J6 J1 J1

5 4 3 2 1 1 2
J132-1 J132-2

5 4 3 2 1

J12-1 J12-2 J12-3 J12-4 J12-5

J208 J13-4 J13-5 J13-6

J308

J132 PI7S Vertical Path Sensor

4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4

3 2 1

3 2 1

J315 J305 J120

J131 J13-1 J13-2 J13-3

MS7S Stitcher Home Position Switch (Front) J4 +24V 1 INLTCVRMS 2 J4

MS6S Staple Sensor (Front)

11.1.9.2. Saddle Stitch Unit Circuit Diagram

Stitcher Unit (Front) J9 J9

PI16S Stitcher Unit Home Position Sensor

J202-1 J202-2 J202-3 J202-4 J202-5 J202-6 J201-1 J201-2 J201-3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 FDROPN 4 5 DELVMS 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J8-1 J8-2 J8-3 J8-4 J8-5 J8-6 J8-7

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
TRYPAR G +5V PAPPOS G +5V PPOSPAR G +5V

9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

3 2 1

3 2 1

M7S Stitcher Motor (Front)

J109-1 J109-2 J110-1 J110-2 J205-1 J205-2 J112-1 J112-2 J108-1 J108-2

PI8S Paper Positioning Plate Sensor

671
J306 J121

J6-1 J6-2 J6-3

J201

J301

J105

3 2 1

1 2 3

3 2 1

3 2 1

J316

MS5S Stitcher Home Position Swtich (Rear)

J7 +24V 1

MS4S Staple Sensor (Rear)

PI7S Paper Positioning Plate Home Position Sensor

Stitcher Unit (Rear)

J7

J106

J202

J302

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J8-8 J8-9 J8-10 J8-11 J8-12 J8-13 J8-14

M6S Stitcher Motor

B A B A +24V

J502

J100

Saddle Sticher Controller PCB

PI6S Tray Paper Sensor

J129

J129-1 J129-2 J129-3 J128-1 J128-2 J128-3 J127-1 J127-2 J127-3 J126-1 J126-2 J126-3 J125-1 J125-2 J125-3

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
LUNGETOP G +5V LUNGEHP G +5V GIDHP G +5V FDRLHP G +5V DELV G +5V

PI15S Paper Pushing Plate Top Position Sensor J10 J10 J124-1 J124-2 J124-3 J204-1 J204-2 J204-3 J204-4 J204-5

3 2 1

3 2 1

J9-13 J9-14 J9-15

B A B A

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

J113-5 J113-4 J113-3 J113-2 J113-1 J114-5 J114-4 J114-3 J114-2 J114-1

J6-4 J6-5 J6-6 J6-7 J6-8 J6-9

6 5 4 3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

3 2 1
J402

1 2 3

3 2 1

3 2 1

J11

J11

J209 J11-1 J11-2 J11-3

J309

J101

PI5S Alignment Plate Home Position Sensor

J128

PI14S Paper Pushing Plate Home Position Sensor J18 J18

3 2 1

3 2 1

J9-10 J9-11 J9-12

3 2 1

1 2 3

3 2 1

3 2 1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
INLTCVR G +5V G 3RDPA 2NDPA 1STPA +5V

J11-4 J11-5 J11-6

J102

PI4S Paper Folding Motor Clock Sensor

J127 J130-1 J130-2 J130-3

3 2 1

3 2 1

PI13S Guide Home Position Sensor

B
J2 J2

3 2 1 3 2 1 3 G 2 1PAFDJP 1 +5V

3 2 1

J9-7 J9-8 J9-9

J17

J14

+5V G JOGHP G FLDCLK +5V +5V G EJCVR +5V G FDR G LUNGECLK +5V

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
J13 J16

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

J209-3 J209-2 J209-1 J102-3 J102-2 J102-1 J203-3 J203-2 J203-1 J104-3 J104-2 J104-1 J107-3 J107-2 J107-1

J11-7 J11-8 J11-9

J203

J303

J103

3 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
J13

1 2 3

3 2 1

3 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6

J11-10 J11-11 J11-12

J104

3 2 1

3 2 1

PI11S Delivery Sensor

J11-13 J11-14 J11-15

J107

3 2 1

3 2 1

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
J2 J113 M J21B J38 J38 J2 J114 J114 M1P Punch Motor

2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1

2 1

J112

J112

Scrap full Detection PCB

E
J10 LED PCB J7-1 J7-2 J7-3 J7-4 J7-5 J7-6 J10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
J1B-7 J1B-8 J1B-9 J1B-10

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J21A J7 J7

J3A J3A

11.1.9.3. Punch Unit Circuit Diagram

Finisher Unit
J11-1 J11-2 J11-3 J11-4 J11-5 J11-6 J11-7 J11 J11 J10-1 J10-2 J10-3 J10-4 J10-5 J10-6 J7-7 J7-8 J7-9 J7-10 J7-11 J7-12 J7-13

Photosensor PCB

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
G +5V SREG1 SREG2 SREG3 SREG4 PAEND G LEDON1 LEDON2 LEDON3 LEDON4 LEDON5

14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Punch Driver PCB

672
J23 J4 J4

J101 J101

M2P Horizontal Registration Motor

4 3 2 1
J1B J1B

4 3 2 1 11
G 10 DFULL 9 J112-1 J112-2 J112-3 J112-4 J105-1 J105-2 J105-3 J104-1 J104-2 J104-3

4 +24V 3 2 1 G

J1A-7 J1A-8 J1A-9 J1A-10

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

C
LEDON +5V +5V PUNCHCLK G

PI3P Punch Home Position Sensor

8 7 6 5 4 PUNCHHP 3 +5V 2 G 1

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J1B-3 J1B-2 J1B-1

J104

3 2 1

3 2 1

J106 NC C N0 J5 J5

PI2P Punch Motor Clock Sensor

MS2P Front Door Switch

3 2 1 4 3 2 1
G SREGHP +5V

J1A J1A A 11 11 B 10 10 9 A 9 8 B 8 7 +24V 7

J101-1 J101-2 J101-3 J101-4

J1B-4 J1B-5 J1B-6

J105

3 2 1

3 2 1

B
J106 NC C N0

4 FDROPN 3 2 UDROPN 1 +24V

PI1P Punch Home Position Sensor

MS1P Upper Door Switch

3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

6 5 4 3 2 1

J102-1 J102-2 J102-3

J1A-1 J1A-2 J1A-3

J102

3 2 1

3 2 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

11.2. DA-FS330
11.2.1. Introduction 11.2.1.1. DA-FS330 Specifications
Applicable Models : DP-3510/3520/3530 Series Item Ambient Conditions Relative Humidity Installation Condition Loading Style

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Description 50 - 95 F / 10 - 35 C 15 - 80% RH Horizontal Lower Bin Lift Upper Bin: Lower Bin: LDR/A3, LGL/B4 LTR/A4, LTR-R/A4-R INV-R/A5-R B5, B5-R Post card LTR/A4 only

Copy Paper Size

Copy Paper Weight 16 - 34 lb / 60 - 133 g/m2 (Non-Finishing) 16 - 28 lb / 64 - 105 g/m2 (Punching, Stapling) Number of Bins 2 Sort Mode, Hole Punch Mode, Modes Staple Mode (Lower Bin only), Shift Mode (Lower Bin only) Upper Bin: 100 sheets Non-Staple Sort Lower Bin: 1,000 sheets Loading Capacity Lower Bin: 30 sets Staple Sort (regardless the number of sheets, max. 30 sheets/set) Shift Operation Shift 23 mm (Lower Bin only, LTR/A4 only) 15.9 x 20.5 x 17.2 in / 420 x 520 x 430 mm Size (W) (D) (H) (not including the Finisher Stand) Weight Approx. 36 lb / 16 kg Power Source +24 VDC supplied from Copier Power 60 W Consumption Rear Diagonal Stapling Stapling Position Refer to the illustration as follows. Stapled Number of Max. 30 sheets/set Copies Replacement FQ-SS32 Staples 3 Holes (North America) Hole Punch 4 Holes (Europe / others) Position Refer to the illustration as follows.

Ver. 5.1

673

MAR 2005

Stapling Position:
62.5 mm

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
60 62.5 mm

ABCDE FGHIJK ABCDE FGHIJK

B B A A C2 A A C1 A C1 C2

62 mm

62 mm

Hole Punch Position:

<North America>
D

<Europe / Others>
D

A B l C1 - C2 l D
Function

106 0.5 mm 8 0.5 mm Less than 2 mm 9.5 1.0 mm

80 0.5 mm 6 0.5 mm Less than 2 mm 10.5 1.0 mm

Upper Bin Lower Bin (LTR/A4 only)

Shift Mode No Yes

Staple Mode No Yes

Hole Punch Mode Yes Yes

Ver. 5.1

674

MAR 2005

11.2.1.2. Features

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Small-size 2-bin finisher with a stapling and hole punch function The Finisher is equipped with a stapling function as well as a hole punch function. 2. Large Capacity A maximum of 1,100 sheets can be stacked in 2 bins. (20 lbs/80g/m2 small size paper, not stapled). 3. Improved Paper Transport Performance Copy paper 16-34lbs/60 - 133g/m2 can be used. (Max 28 lbs/105g/m2 for staple and punch mode) 4. Shift Copies of each job can be discharged to the foreground position, so that copies in a bin can be sorted. (A4, LTR Only)

11.2.1.3. External Parts

Front Cover Paper Exit (Face Up) Top Cover Rear Cover Upper Tray Paper Exit (Face Down) Lower Tray Guide Plate Assembly Lower Left Cover I/F Cable Stapler Cover Assembly

Ver. 5.1

675

MAR 2005

11.2.1.4. Component Location

1. Mechanical Parts

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Face Up Exit Roller Bearing Face Up Exit Roller Paddle Roller Face Down Exit Roller Bearing Face Down Exit Roller Upper Tray

Paper Path Select Gate Registration Roller Bearing

Paper Feed Guide

Registration Roller Lower Tray Inverting Roller Interstage Stack

Stapler Unit
2. Electrical Parts

Punch Clutch (CL2)

Punch Registration Clutch (CL1) Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor (PC10) Exit Sensor (Face Up) (PC2) Paper Feed Sensor (PC1) Jogging Home Position Sensor (PC6) Jogging Motor (M2) Punch Box Detecting Sensor (PC12) Gate Solenoid (SL1) Elevation Ceiling Sensor (PC5) Belt Motor (M3) Elevating Motor (M4) Elevating Bottom Sensor (PC11) Paper Pass Sensor (PC8) Set Switch (SW1) Belt Home Positon Sensor (PC4)

CPU PCB Transport Motor (M1) Paper Full Detecting Sensor (PC9) Sheet Detecting Sensor (PC7) Cartridge Sensor (SW2) Staple Home Position Sensor (PC13) Staple Sensor (SW3) Staple Motor (M5) Exit Sensor (Face Down) (PC3)

Ver. 5.1

676

MAR 2005

11.2.2.

Mechanism and Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.2.2.1. Outline of Operation

DA-DS330 and Host Machine exchange signals through serial communication and carry out the following 8 modes of operations.

11.2.2.1.1. Upper Bin Exit

Discharge the paper into upper bin.

11.2.2.1.2. Upper Bin Punch Exit

Punch the end of paper and discharge into upper bin.

11.2.2.1.3. Lower Bin Exit

Discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack.

11.2.2.1.4. Lower Bin Punch Exit

Punch the end of paper and discharge the paper into lower bin from interstage stack.

11.2.2.1.5. Lower Bin Staple Exit

Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, then staple when they reach specified number, and discharge into lower bin.

11.2.2.1.6. Punch Staple Exit

Punch the end of paper, jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, staple when they reach specified number, and discharge into lower bin.

11.2.2.1.7. Shift Exit

Jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, carry out shift operation, and discharge into lower bin.

11.2.2.1.8. Punch Shift Exit

Punch the end of paper, jog the paper one by one at interstage stack, carry out shift operation and discharge into lower bin.

Ver. 5.1

677

MAR 2005

11.2.2.2. Paper Transport Mechanism

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When the Punch Registration Sensor detects the paper, the Transport Motor (M1) and Belt Motor (M3) are driven, driving gears and belts, which revolve rollers. 1. Upper Tray paper path (Discharged into Upper Tray) The Paper Transport Sensor detects the paper when the Transport Motor (M1) is driven and each roller is rotated. Then the Path Select Gate is switched to the direction of [A] by Gate Solenoid, and the paper is discharged into the Upper Tray by the Exit Roller.

Upper Tray Face Up Exit Roller Bearing

[A]

Exit Sensor (Straight) Registration Roller Bearing Punch Registration Sensor

Registration Roller Face Up Exit Roller

(Transport Switching Mechanism)

Path Select Gate

Path Select Gate Gate Solenoid

Ver. 5.1

678

MAR 2005

11.2.2.2.1. Paper Transport Mechanism (Interstage Stack)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Lower Tray Paper Path (Discharged into Lower Tray) The rollers are rotated by the Transport Motor (M1). The paper passes through the Registration Roller, Path Gate, Paddle Roller and is received by the stack. After the paper is detected by the Paper Path Sensor and jogged, the Belt Motor is driven and the paper is discharged into the Lower Tray.

Paddle Roller

Path Select Gate Paper Feed Sensor

Lower Tray

Registration Roller Paper Stack Paper Pass Sensor

Belt Motor
Paper Stack

Belt Motor

Paper Pass Sensor Sheet Detecting Sensor

Belt Belt Home Position Sensor

Ver. 5.1

679

MAR 2005

11.2.2.3. Punch Mechanism

Cam Lifter

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Cam Drive Shaft Punch Bar Punch Clutch (CL2) Paper Feed Sensor Registration Roller Bearing
A B

Registration Punch Registration Roller Clutch (CL1)

11.2.2.3.1. Paper Transport Stop Mechanism

Stops the paper momentarily at the punching position. Process The leading edge of the paper being transported into the Finisher passes through the Paper Feed Sensor.

Punch Registration Clutch is turned ON. When the normally closed type CL1 is turned ON, the driving force to the Registration Roller is cut off, stopping the paper at the Registration Roller. Papers are transported from the printer continuously. The leading edge of the paper is pressed against the nip of the Registration Roller, which allows positioning of each paper. The Guide Plate, equipped with a spring moves downward to compensate for the paper loop created during this process. The leading edge of the paper is punched by the Punch Unit.

CL1 is turned OFF, the driving force is transmitted to the Registration Roller, and the paper is transported.

11.2.2.3.2. Punch Unit Drive Mechanism

Punch Unit is composed of Guide A, B, Punch Bar, Cam, Cam Lifter, Drive Shaft, and Single Punch Clutch (CL2).

11.2.2.3.3. Punch Unit Drive

When the Transport Motor is driven, the Punch Units drive gear rotates the Punch Units clutch gear. But the driving force is not transmitted to Drive Shaft because the Punch Clutch (CL2) is normally OFF and locked. When CL2 is turned ON and the lock is released, the clutch gears rotation is transmitted to the drive and the drive shaft is rotated. (CL2 is turned ON momentarily, and locks after one rotation, stopping the movement of the shaft) A rotation of the Drive Shaft causes a single vertical movement of the Punch Bar which is supported by the Cam, thus punching the paper.

Ver. 5.1

680

MAR 2005

11.2.2.4. Jogging/Shift Mechanism

Holding Spring Shift Bar (Rack A) Reference Plate Pinion Gear
B

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Jogging Home Position Sensor Jogging Motor

Jogging Bar (Rack B) Sheet Detecting Sensor

<Jogging Operation> The Jogging Bar moves the papers stacked in interstage stack to the Reference Plate, and jogs the papers toward the STS. The papers are detected by the Sheet Detecting Sensor when they are in the position where stapling is possible. This procedure ensures stapling of the arranged papers. The Reference Plate also ensures the discharge into a fixed position. <Shift Operation> Papers jogged to the direction of the STS go through a shift operation. Therefore, single paper shifts by the Shift Bar are sorted when discharged. (There is no shift operation for the stapled paper.) <Jogging/Shift Mechanism> Jogging and shift operations are carried out by the Jogging Bar and Shift Bar which are moved by the pinion, which is driven by the A and B movement of the Jogging Motor (M2) Gear. The Holding Spring pushes the rack toward the pinion to ensure proper engagement of the Rack and Pinion. The Jogging Bars range of movement differs depending on the paper size (A4, LTR only). <Home Position Detection> The Jogging Bars home position is decided by the light blocking plate integrated into the Pinion and the Home Position Sensor. The Jogging Bars home position is the point where the sensors light starts being blocked by the Blocking Plate. The Jogging Bar and Shift Bars range of movement, which differs depending on paper size, is calculated based on this position.

Ver. 5.1

681

MAR 2005

11.2.2.5. Stapling Mechanism

Stapling Mechanism 1.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Staple Cartridge

FQ-SS32 Staple Motor Cam Staple Sensor

Cartridge Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Staple Table

The Staple Motors rotation drives the stapler by rotating the cam via a gear. The link is in contact with the Cam. When the Cam revolves, the link moves around its supporting point. Stapling Mechanism 2.

Cam

Staple Plate

Staple Table

Ver. 5.1

682

MAR 2005

11.2.2.6. Elevating Mechanism

Belt

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paper Full Detecting Sensor Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor

Wire Hook Plate Elevation Ceiling Sensor Belt Motor

Elevating Bottom Sensor

Elevating Motor (M4)

When the Elevating Motor rotates the wire drum, the Wire is wound and the Hook Plate moves up and down, vertical movement of Lower Tray.

11.2.2.6.1. Lower Tray Up/Down Movement Control

1. The Lower Tray is elevated by the Elevating Motor (M4) to the point where the Elevation Ceiling or Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is activated. If paper is not in the Tray, the elevation is stopped when the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated. If paper is in the Tray, elevation is stopped when the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is activated. When the Elevation Ceiling Sensor is activated, a signal indicating that the Tray is empty is transmitted to the Host. 2. When the Paper Full Detecting Sensor is activated after papers are discharged, the Lower Tray moves until the Paper Full Sensor is deactivated. 3. When the Lower Tray is fully loaded and both, the Elevation Bottom Sensor and Paper Full Detecting Sensor are activated, the Printer stops discharging papers. 4. When papers are removed from the Lower Tray and the Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor is deactivated, the Lower Tray is elevated.

Ver. 5.1

683

MAR 2005

11.2.3.

Preventive Maintenance

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.2.3.1. General
1. A Preventive maintenance inspection should be performed on the Finisher at a regular basis. If the preventive maintenance inspection is correctly performed, the Finisher can be maintained for a long period of time, machine down time and the number of service calls can be minimized. 2. Refer to the attached chart for parts replacement schedule. 3. A high voltage hazard remains even when the machine is not operating. Always disconnect the Copier System from its power source (wall outlet) before servicing or disassembly.

11.2.3.2. Recommended Tools

1. The following items are necessary to perform an effective, time efficient P.M. a. Vacuum cleaner b. Blower brush c. Isopropyl alcohol d. Cleaning cotton e. Lint free wiper (Kim wipes) f. Cotton swabs

11.2.3.3. Cleaning Recommendations

1. Refer to the appropriate PM cycle on the maintenance chart, where the cleaning cycles is broken down by Finisher. Note: Use of Isopropyl Alcohol (IPA) is strongly suggested, and only to be used when dry cleaning is ineffective. Excessive use of IPA can decrease the operating life of rubber components. 2. IPA should be used sparingly to clean the transport roller (only when required).

11.2.3.4. Maintenance Chart

Parts Name Stapler Unit Hole Punch Unit Paddle Roller Discharge Brush Registration Clutch Parts Number GH03 - 7811 GH03 - 7801 (North America) GH03 - 7802 (Except North America) GH03 - 3504 GH03 - 4601 GH03 - 4602 GH03 - 6204 Qty per Maintenance Cycle Unit 1 200,000 copies 1 1 2 2 1 500,000 copies (including electro-magnetic clutch) 500,000 copies 500,000 copies 500,000 copies

Ver. 5.1

684

MAR 2005

11.2.3.5. Disassembly and Assembly

Upper Tray

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Removal of the External Covers (1) Remove the Finisher Tray (x2). (2) Remove the Front Cover (2 Screws). (3) Remove the Rear Cover (2 Screws). (4) Remove the Top Cover (2 Shoulder Screws).

Lower Tray

2. Removal of the Hole Punch Unit (1) Remove the External Covers. (2) Remove the Hole Punch Unit Harness (x2). (3) Remove the Tension Spring. (4) Remove the Tension Bracket (1 Screw, 1 E ring). Note: When the tension bracket is reinstalled, use the left side screw hole for the 3 Hole Punch Unit and the right side screw hole for the 4 Hole Punch Unit.

(5) Remove the Hole Punch Unit (2 Screws).

(5)

Ver. 5.1

685

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3. Removal of the Hole Punch Unit Roller

(2) (2)

(2)

(2)

(1) Remove the Hole Punch Unit. (2) Remove the Hole Punch Unit Roller Assembly (x4, 1 Screw each).

4. Removal of the CPU PCB (1) Remove the External Covers. (2) Disconnect all the Connectors. (3) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Screws (4 Screws).

(3)

(3)

5. Removal of the Registration Roller Clutch

(2) (2)

(1) Remove the Harness from the Harness Clamp (9 positions). (2) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket (3 Screws).

(2)

(3)

(3) Remove the Registration Clutch Mounting Screw (1 Set Screw). (4) Remove the Registration Clutch Connector (x1). (5) Remove the Registration Clutch.

(5)

Ver. 5.1

686

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

6. Removal of the Registration Roller (1) Remove the Hole Punch Unit. (2) Remove the Registration Roller Clutch. (3) Remove the Registration Roller Bushing. (Front/Rear, 1 E-Ring each) (4) Remove the Registration Roller.

7. Removal of the Transfer Motor

(2)

(1) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket. (2) Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw. (3) Disconnect the Transfer Motor Connector. (4) Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket (3 Screws, 1 Connector).

(6)

(5) Remove the Transfer Motor Knob (1 Screw). (6) Remove the Transfer Motor Belt.

(5)

(7) Remove the Transfer Motor from the Bracket (3 Screws).

Ver. 5.1

687

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(8)

(8) Remove the Transfer Motor Pulley (1 E-Ring). (9) Remove the Transfer Motor.

8 Removal of the Timing Belt 1 and 2 (1) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket. (2) Remove the Transfer Motor Mounting Bracket. (3) Remove the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw. (4) Remove the Tension Spring. (5) Remove Timing Belt 1. (6) Loosen the Tension Bracket Mounting Screw of Timing Belt 2. (7) Remove Timing Belt 2.

(6) (7)

9. Removal of the Paddle Roller (1) Remove the Front and Rear Cover. (2) Remove the CPU PCB Mounting Bracket. (3) Remove the Upper Left Panel (2 Screws. Shoulder Screw on the front side).

(3)

(3)

Ver. 5.1

688

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(6)

(4) Disconnect the Sensor Connector. (5) Remove the Sensor Harness from the Harness Clamp. (6) Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Inverting Paper Exit (4 Screws).

(5)

(6)

(4)

(7) (8) (7) (8)

(7) Remove the Inverting Guide Plate (4 Screws). (8) Remove the Tension Spring. (2 positions, Front/Rear). Note: Use the upper hole when the Spring is reinstalled.

(9) Remove the Gear and Bushing (Front/Rear, 1 E-Ring each).

(9)

(10) Remove the Paddle Roller.

(10)

Ver. 5.1

689

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

10. Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Roller (1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear). (2) Remove the Lower Left Panel (4 Screws, Shoulder Screws on the front side). (3) Disconnect the Harness Connector of the Left Panel.

(2)

(4) Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller Bushing (Rear) (1 E-Ring).

(4)

(7)

(5) Remove the Inverting Idle Gear (1 E-Ring). (6) Remove the Inverting Drive Gear and Bushing (Front) (2 E-Rings). (7) Remove the Inverting Paper Exit Roller.

(5)

(6)

11. Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Roller (1) Remove the External Covers (Front and Rear). (2) Remove the CPU PCB. (3) Remove the Upper Left Panel.

(3)

Ver. 5.1

690

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller Bushing (Front) (1 E-Ring).

(4)

(5) Remove the Belt and Pulley (1 E-Ring). (6) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller Bushing (Rear) (1 E-Ring).
(5) (5)

(7) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Roller.

(7)

(5) (5) (3)

12. Removal of the Path Select Gate (1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear). (2) Remove the Top Cover (2 Screws). (3) Remove the Gate Solenoid with Mounting Bracket (2 Screws, 1 Spring, 1 Gate Arm and 1 Connector). (4) Remove the Straight Paper Exit Sensor Connector. (5) Remove the Upper Guide Plate for the Straight Paper Exit (2 Screws and 2 Springs).

Ver. 5.1

691

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4)

(6)

(6) Remove the Path Select Gate (1 E-Ring) (Adjustment of the Gate Solenoid). Adjust the solenoid bracket mounting position so that the Gate Arm is contacting the Solenoid.

13. Removal of the Belt Drive Motor (1) Remove the Outer Covers. (2) Remove the Drive Belt.

(2)

(3) Remove the Belt Drive Motor Unit (3 Screws and 1 Connector).

(3)

(4) Remove the Belt Drive Motor Mounting Bracket 1 (2 Screws). (5) Remove the Pulley (1 E-Ring).
(5)

(4) (4)

Ver. 5.1

692

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(6) Remove the belt Drive Motor Mounting Bracket 2 (3 Screws). (7) Remove the Drive Gear (1 E-Ring). (8) Remove the Motor from the Bracket.
(7) (6) (6) (6)

14. Removal of the Straight Paper Exit Discharge Brush

(4) (3) (3) (4)

(1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear). (2) Remove the Top Cover (2 Screws). (3) Remove the Lever (2 Screws). (4) Remove the Discharge Brush (2 Screws).

15. Removal of the Inverting Paper Exit Discharge Brush (1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear). (2) Remove the CPU PCB. (3) Remove the Upper Left Panel. (4) Remove the Discharge Brush (2 Screws).

(4)

(4)

16. Removal of the Tractor Belt (1) Remove the External Covers (Front/Rear). (2) Remove the Lower Left Panel (Front/Rear). (3) Remove the Harness Connector of the Left Panel. (4) Remove the Belt Motor Unit. (5) Remove the Lower Guide Support Plate for the Inverting Paper Exit (4 Screws).
(5) (5) (5) (5)

Ver. 5.1

693

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(6) Remove the Tension Spring from the Shaft.

(6)

(7) Remove the Knob for paper jam removal (1 Screws).

(7)

(8) Remove the Tractor Belts (x2). Note: When the Belt is reinstalled, install the Belt so that the Belt tooth just under the Plastic Hook is aligned with the slit on the Pulley.
(8) (8)

17. Removal of the Staple Unit (1) Open the Staple Cover. (2) Remove the Staple Connector (x1). (3) Remove the Staple Unit.

(3) (2)

Ver. 5.1

694

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

18. Removal of the Stack Area Discharge Brush (1) Remove the Staple Unit. (2) Remove the Stack Area Discharge Brushes (x2, 1 Screw each).

(2) (2)

19. Removal of the Jogging Motor (1) Remove the Dust Box. (2) Remove the Cover (2 Screws). (3) Disconnect the Jogging Motor Connector. (4) Disconnect the Jogging Home Position Sensor Connector (x1). (5) Remove the Jogging Unit (3 Screws). (6) Remove the Jogging Motor Cover (2 Screws). (7) Remove the Jogging Motor (2 Screws).

(5)

(2) (2)

(4)

(6)

(6)

(3)

(5)

(5)

(5)

Ver. 5.1

695

MAR 2005

11.2.4.

Electrical

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.2.4.1. Electrical Parts (Functions of Switches and Sensors)

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Sensor Set Switch Cartridge Sensor Staple Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Paper Feed Sensor Paper Exit Sensor (Straight) Paper Path Sensor Paper Exit Sensor (Inverting) Belt Home Position Sensor Elevation Ceiling Sensor Jogging Home Position Sensor Sheet Detecting Sensor Paper Full Sensor Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor Elevating Bottom Sensor Symbol (SW1) (SW2) (SW3) (PC13) (PC1) (PC2) (PC8) (PC3) (PC4) (PC5) (PC6) (PC7) (PC9) (PC10) (PC11) Function Detects the setting condition of the Finisher, resets paper jam and resets staple jam. Detects the Staple Cartridge. Detects staples. Detects the home position for stapling. Detects papers taken into paper feeder and paper jam. Detects trigger for punching operation. Detects paper jam and paper exit. (Straight) Detects paper jam and trigger of the Jogging Bar operation. Detects paper jam and paper exit. (Inverting) Detects home position of the belt. Detects ceiling of the Lower Tray. Detects home position of the Jogging Bar. Detects the paper when it is jogged to the position where stapling is possible. Detects papers in the Lower Tray when they reach a specified height. Detects upper surface of the papers in the Lower Tray. Detects when papers in the Lower Tray are removed during the stacking process. Detects the bottom of the Lower Tray.

Ver. 5.1

696

MAR 2005

11.2.4.1.1. Control of Transport Motor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Paper Transport Motor for Finisher is of outer rotor type DC, brushless. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. Pulse signals from P35 of P.C.B. (PWB-A) IC1 controls the speed. Signal L from IC1-P10 starts the motor, while signal H stops the Motor.
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 GND R10 PJ6 6 PJ6 7 2 4 R10 IC7 GND DC24V IC7 1 3 RA1 79 IC1 P10

99

P35

M1

PAPER FEED MOTOR

11.2.4.1.2. Jogging Motor Control

1. Jogging Motor, which jogs papers in stack and carries out offset operation, is a two phase exciting type, 2-phase pulse motor. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. Each pulse signal output from Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, of IC12 in P.C.B. (PWB-A) excites and rotates the coil in each phase. 3. Motor is stopped when Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, of IC12 change to Low signal level, and the power supply to motor coil is cut off.
DC5V DC24V DC24V

15

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

SM

SM

IC15 RA3 2 4 8 3 6 9 5 IC9 1 2 5 6 9 IC12 O1 O2 O3 O4 3 I1 6 I2 11 I3 14 I4

COM O1 O2 O3 O4

A 3 PJ5 A 5 PJ5 B 4 PJ5 B 6 PJ5

2 7 10 15

M2 JOGGING MOTOR

11.2.4.1.3. Belt Motor Control

1. The Motor for discharging papers out of stack is a two phase exciting type, 2-phase pulse motor. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. Each pulse signal output from P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC1 in P.C.B (PWB-A) excites and rotates the coil in each phase. 3. Motor is stopped when P20, P21, P22, P23 of IC1 change to Low signal level, and the power supply to motor coil is cut off.
DC24V
SM 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM

DC5V
A PJ4 3 A PJ4 5 B PJ4 4 B PJ4 6 18 11 8 1 RA1 6 INA 5 INA 17 INB 16 INB 18 20 19 23 IC1 P23 P21 P22 P20 OUTB OUTB OUTA REFA 3 C4 R2 R3 OUTA 9 RSA R7 R6 2 TdA 13 TdB C7 C6

M3 BELT MOTOR

R6

COM

10

C5

R9 R5 R4

GND

Ver. 5.1

697

14

REFB

RSB

MAR 2005

11.2.4.1.4. Elevation Motor Control

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Elevation Motor, which moves the Lower Tray up and down, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P30 and P31 of IC1 in P.C.B. (PWB-A). 3. Lower tray is elevated when H and L are output from P30 and P31 respectively. Lower Tray descends when L and H are output from P30 and P31 respectively. 4. Motor is stopped when L is output from P30 and P31, and brakes when H is output from P30 and P31.
DC5V DC24V
SM 1 2 1 2 SM 7 PJ4 8 PJ4 3 C15 5 C17 OUT1 OUT2 VCC 7 IC16 1 2 RA3 6 IC3 P30

IN1 IN2

4 GND

P31

M4 ELEVATION MOTOR

GND2
C19 C18

GND

11.2.4.1.5. Staple Motor Control

1. Staple Motor, which carries out stapling, is a +24V DC motor. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. It is controlled by the combination of signals from P32 and P33 of IC1 in P.C.B (PWB-A). 3. Stapling is done when H and L are output from P32 and P33 respectively. 4. If an anomaly occurs during stapling, P32 and P33 changes to L and H respectively, inverting the Staple Motor.
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 PLT8 PJ1 PJ1 PJ1 PJ1 GND DC5V DC24V R16 3 4 5 IC8 6 Q6 Q5 Q4 R18 R15 R17 Q3 Q1 Q2 R14 R13 12 R12 RA1 IC8 1 2 13 IC5 2 4 IC5 1 3 4 1 IC1 P32 P33 8 9 11 12 PLT9

M5

STAPLE MOTOR

R15 GND

Ver. 5.1

698

MAR 2005

11.2.4.1.6. Gate Solenoid Control

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Gate Solenoid, which switches between straight discharge and invert discharge, is a +24V DC plunger solenoid. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. Solenoid is turned ON and switched to straight discharge when signal L is transmitted from P25 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A), and invert discharge when the signal H is transmitted.
DC24V DC5V IC1 SM 1 2 1 2 10 PJ4 16 15 14 13 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SM IC14 RA3 13 P25

SL1 PATH SELECT SOLENOID

12 11 10

11.2.4.1.7. Punch Registration Clutch Control

1. Punch Registration Clutch, which stops the movement of Paper Feed Roller at the time of punching, is a +24V electromagnetic clutch. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. Clutch is turned ON when signal L is transmitted from P27 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A).
DC5V DC24V IC14 IC1 SM 1 2 1 2 4 PJ7 SM 16 15 14 13 12 11 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RA3 11 P27

CL1 PAPER STANDSTILL CLUTCH

10

11.2.4.1.8. Punch Clutch Control

1. Punch Clutch, which drives Punch Unit, is a +24V electromagnetic clutch. Its control circuit is shown below. 2. Punching is done when signal L is transmitted from P26 of IC1 in PC Board (PWB-A).
DC5V DC24V IC14 16 2 PJ7 15 14 13 12 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RA3 12 P26 IC1

SM 1 2 1 2

SM

CL2 PUNCH CLUTCH

11 10

Ver. 5.1

699

MAR 2005

11.2.4.2. Connector Signal

PJ1 No. Signal Name 1 5V Connection 12

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Input/Output

Function DC+5V

+5V

2 GND

11

Ground

0V

3 NC

10

Not Used

Staple Home 4 Position Sensor

IC1 P45

5V Home 0V 5V Staple 0V

Stapler Home Position Detecting Signal

5 Staple Sensor

IC1 P46 Stapler

Staple Detecting Sensor

Cartridge Sensor

IC1 P13

5V Cartridge 0V

Staple Cartridge Detecting Signal

7 NC Staple Motor + Staple 9 Motor + 8 10 NC Staple Motor Staple 12 Motor 11

Ground

5 4

Normal Rev.

24V Inverse Rev. 0V

Staple Motor Drive Signal +

Not Used

2 1

Normal Rev.

Inverse 24V Rev. 0V

Staple Motor Drive Signal -

Ver. 5.1

700

MAR 2005

PJ3 No. Signal Name 24V 1 (from Power Outlet) Power PCB CN2B Connection 5

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Input/Output

Function DC+24V

+24V

2 NC

Not Used

GND 3 (from Power Outlet) PJ4 No. Signal Name 1 24V Connection

Ground

0V

Input/Output 1

Function DC+24V

+24V

2 24V Belt Motor 3 Belt Motor A 4 Belt Motor B 5 Belt Motor A 6 Belt Motor B Elevation Motor IC1 P23 IC1 P22 IC1 P21 IC1 P20 IC1 P30 Elevation Motor 8 Elevation Motor IC1 P31

+24V

DC+24V

3 4 5 6

Belt Motor Drive Pulse A Belt Motor Drive Pulse B

Pulse

Belt Motor Drive Pulse A Belt Motor Drive Pulse B

24V CCW CW 0V 24V CCW CW 0V

Elevation Motor Drive Signal +

Elevation Motor Drive Signal -

9 24V

Gate Solenoid

+24V

DC+24V

Gate 10 Solenoid (Signal)

IC1 P25

24V ON 0V

Gate Solenoid Drive Signal

Ver. 5.1

701

MAR 2005

PJ5 No. Signal Name 1 24V Connection 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Input/Output

Function DC+24V

+24V

2 24V Joging Motor A Joging Motor B Joging Motor A Joging Motor B IC12 Q1 IC12 Q3 IC12 Q2 IC12 Q4 Joging Motor

+24V

DC+24V

3 4 5 6 PJ6

6 5 4 3

Joging Motor Drive Pulse A Joging Motor Drive Pulse A

Pulse

Joging Motor Drive Pulse B Joging Motor Drive Pulse B

No. Signal Name 1 24V

Connection 8

Input/Output

Function DC+24V

+24V

2 GND

Ground

0V

3 5V Transport Motor 4 GND

+5V

DC+5V

Ground

0V

5 H/L

Ground

0V
Transport Motor Clock IC1 P10 Transport Motor Drive Speed Pulse Signal

Pulse

Transport 7 Motor ON/ OFF

IC1 P35

24V ON 0V

Transport Motor Drive ON/ OFF Signal

Ver. 5.1

702

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Signal Name 8 Transport Motor LD IC1 P12

Connection 1

Input/Output

Function

24V Normal 0V

Transport Motor Normal Control Drive Detecting Signal

PJ7 No. Signal Name 1 24V Punch Clutch 2 Punch Clutch IC1 (Signal) P26 2 Connection 1 Input/Output Function DC+24V

+24V

24V ON 0V

Punch Clutch Drive Signal

3 24V Punch Registration 4 Clutch (Signal) PJ8 No. Signal Name 1 GND Paper Exit Sensor 2 (Inverting) (Signal) Connection Punch Registration Clutch

+24V

DC+24V

IC1 P27

24V Normal 0V

Punch Registration Clutch Drive Signal

Input/Output 3 Ground

Function

0V
Paper Exit IC1 Sensor P01 (Inverting)

5V No Paper 0V

Invert Exit Paper Detecting Signal

3 5V

+5V

DC+5V

Ver. 5.1

703

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Signal Name 4 GND Paper Exit Sensor 5 (Straight) (Signal)

Connection 3

Input/Output Ground

Function

0V
Paper Exit IC1 Sensor P41 (Straight)

5V No Paper 0V

Straight Exit Paper Detecting Signal

6 5V

+5V

DC+5V

7 GND

Ground

0V
Paper Feed 8 Sensor (Signal) IC1 Paper Feed P40 Sensor

5V No Paper 0V

Paper Feed Detecting Signal

9 5V

+5V

DC+5V

PJ9 No. Signal Name 1 GND Paper Full Detecting 2 Sensor (Signal) Connection 3 Input/Output Ground Function

0V
Paper Full IC1 Detecting P44 Sensor

5V No Paper 0V

Lower Tray Paper Full Detecting Signal

3 5V

+5V

DC+5V

Ver. 5.1

704

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Signal Name 4 GND Paper Upper Surface IC1 5 Detecting P14 Sensor (Signal) 6 5V

Connection 3

Input/Output Ground

Function

0V
Paper Upper Surface Detecting Sensor

5V Not Detected 0V

Lower Tray Paper Upper Surface Detecting Signal

+5V

DC+5V

7 GND

Ground

0V
Paper Path 8 Sensor (Signal) IC1 Paper Path P16 Sensor

5V No Paper 0V

Stacked Paper Detecting Signal

9 5V

+5V

DC+5V

10 GND Belt Home Position 11 Sensor (Signal)

Ground

0V
Belt Home IC1 Position P43 Sensor

5V Home 0V

Tractor Belt Home Position Detecting Signal

12 5V

+5V

DC+5V

13 GND Sheet Detecting 14 Sensor (Signal)

Ground

0V
Sheet IC1 Detecting P42 Sensor

5V No Paper 0V

Stapled Paper Detecting Signal

15 5V

+5V

DC+5V

Ver. 5.1

705

MAR 2005

PJ10 No. Signal Name 1 GND Joging Home Joging Home Position IC1 2 Sensor Position P15 Sensor (Signal) Connection 3

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Input/Output Ground

Function

0V 5V Home 0V
Joging Home Position Detecting Signal

3 5V

+5V

DC+5V

4 GND Elevation Celing 5 Sensor (Signal) 6 5V Elevation Bottom Sensor

Ground

0V
Elevation IC1 Celing P17 Sensor

5V Ceiling 0V

Lower Tray Celing Detecting Signal

+5V

DC+5V

7 GND Elevation Bottom 8 Sensor (Signal)

Ground

0V 5V Bottom 0V
Lower Tray Bottom Detecting Signal

IC1 P03

9 5V Punch Box Detecting Sensor

+5V

DC+5V

10 GND Punch Box Detecting 11 Sensor (Signal)

Ground

0V 5V No box 0V
Punch Dust Box Detecting Signal

IC1 P43

12 5V

+5V

DC+5V

Ver. 5.1

706

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

No. Signal Name 13 NC

Connection

Input/Output Not Used

Function

PJ12 No. Signal Name 1 ISOTRX 2 SOTRX IC13 TZ IC13 1Y I/F Cable IC13 1B IC13 1A Connection 11 12 Input/Output Function Inverse Signal Received by Finisher Signal Received by Finisher

Pulse

3 GND

10

Ground

0V
4 ISOTTX 5 SOTTX PJ13 No. Signal Name 1 Set Switch Set Switch 2 Set Switch 3 Connection 1 Input/Output Function DC+24V 8 9 Inverse Signal Transmitted to Finisher Inverse Signal Transmitted to Finisher

Pulse

+24V

24V Set 0V

Finisher Set Detection Signal

Ver. 5.1

707

MAR 2005

11.2.5.

Section V Troubleshooting

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.2.5.1. Error Detection by Self-Diagnostics

The self-diagnostics function detects troubles in important areas of the Finisher. When any trouble occurs, the Machine stops. The error indication appears in the message display of the Copier and the Alarm indicator on the copier turns ON. 1. User Error Code U4 Problem Finisher Inverting Unit/Inverting Shift Tray (Option) Cause/Check 1) Are the exit options installed correctly? 2) Exit option connector(s) is shorted or loose. 3) Exit option connector(s) is defective. 4) Finisher CPU PCB connector is shorted or loose. 5) Finisher CPU PCB is defective. 6) LVPS connector is shorted or loose. 7) LVPS is defective. 8) CPU PCB connector (CN15) is shorted or loose. 9) CPU PCB is defective. Copies exceeded the maximum capacity of the finisher tray. Remove the copies from the finishers tray and press the Start key. (Face Down only)

oF

Finisher Tray Capacity

2. Paper Jam Code J60 Contents When the finisher is installed. a) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the copier paper exit sensor detected paper. b) The finisher entry paper feed sensor does not turn off within a predetermined time. c) The finisher paper exit sensor does not detect paper within a predetermined time after the finisher entry paper feed sensor detected paper. d) The finisher paper exit sensor (straight) does not turn off within a predetermined time. e) The finisher paper exit sensor (invert) does not turn off within a predetermined time.

Ver. 5.1

708

MAR 2005

11.2.5.2. Service Mode

1. F4 Mode a. Input Check Code No. C15

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Function

Condition

Message Display 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

a) 2 bin finisher paper exit sensor Paper is detected. (inverting exit) b) 2 bin finisher paper Path sensor Paper is detected. c) 2 bin finisher paper exit sensor Paper is detected. (straight exit) d) 2 bin finisher paper feed sensor Paper is detected.

C16

a) 2 bin finisher Punch Waste Case detecting sensor b) 2 bin finisher belt home position sensor c) 2 bin finisher jogging home position sensor d) 2 bin finisher set switch a) 2 bin finisher stapler cartridge detecting sensor b) 2 bin finisher staple detecting sensor c) 2 bin finisher stapler home position sensor d) 2 bin finisher sheet detecting sensor a) 2 bin finisher elevator bin lower limit sensor b) 2 bin finisher paper top detecting sensor c) 2 bin finisher paper full detecting sensor d) 2 bin finisher elevator bin upper limit sensor

Dust box is not detected. Belt in home position. Jogging in home position. 2 bin finisher is pulled out. Cartridge is installed. Staple is detected. Stapler in home position. Paper is detected. Bin is placed beyond the lower limit. Paper is detected. Paper is not detected. Bin is placed beyond the upper limit.

C17

C18

Ver. 5.1

709

MAR 2005

b. Output Check Activate the door switch before executing output check. Press the Start key to start and press the Stop key to reset. Code Item No. c109 Finisher bin movement 1 c110 c111 c113 c114 c116 c117 c118 Finisher bin movement 2 Finisher paper transport motor Finisher tamper drive motor Finisher staple motor Finisher belt motor Finisher gate change solenoid Finisher hole punch Function The bin moves downward for one second, then moves up to the home position. The bin moves downward, then moves up to the home position. Paper transport motor rotates. Tamper drive motor rotates. The stapler operates one time, then resets. Belt motor rotates once. The solenoid turns on/off for one second cycle. The hole punch operates one time, then resets.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Ver. 5.1

710

MAR 2005

11.3. DA-FS355, DA-SP41

11.3.1. General Description 11.3.1.1. Features

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Through-type Stapler Adoption of a through-type stapler allows a stapler to carry out saddle stitching. 2. Three Different Auto Stapling Positions Three different stapling positions (Front 1-point stapling, Rear 1-point stapling, and Middle 2-point stapling) are supported. 3. Saddle Stitching A maximum of ten sheets of paper can be delivered stapled and folded in the middle. 4. Punch Mechanism (Option) Installation of a Punch Unit enables punching holes in sheets before delivery (64 to 133 g/m2 paper; no transparencies).

Ver. 5.1

711

MAR 2005

11.3.1.2. DA-FS355, DA-SP41 Specifications

1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly Item Stacking Description

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Remarks

Feed Reference Stacking Paper Size Paper Weight Mode

Stack Height (Note 1)

Mixed Stack Paper Detection Control Panel Display Size (W x D x H) Weight Power Supply Maximum Power Consumption Stapling Stapling Position Stapling Thickness

Staple Supply Replacement Staples Staple Detection

2 locations (1) Delivery Tray (descending type; 1 tray) Face-down (2) Bind Tray (fixed type) Center reference A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR-R, INV-R, FLS Finisher assembly: 64 to 90 g/ m2 Saddle Assembly : 64 to 90 g/ m2 Non-Sort stack Sort stack Staple stack Bind stack Non-Sort Staple Large-size : 500 sheets Small-size : 1000 sheets (Note 2) Staple Sort Large-size : 30 sets or 500 sheets Small-size : 30 sets or 1000 sheets Folded stack Stack of 6 to 10 sheets : 10 sets Stack of 1 to 5 sheets : 20 sheets Size mix : 500 sheets (Note 3) Staple mix: 30 sheets (same paper configuration) Delivery tray : Yes Bind tray : Yes No No 26.18 x 24.21 x 21.85 in (665 x 615 x 555 mm) 59.40 lb (27 kg) 24 VDC from host machine At standby : 13 W In operation : 84 W (staple sort) Rotary cam type See Fig. 1-001. Finisher Large-size : 25 sheets Small-size : 50 sheets Saddle : 10 sheets Cartridge of special staples (5000 Staples) DQ-SS35 Yes (nearly empty : 40 remaining staples)

Large-size: A3, B4, LDR, LGL, FLS

(excl. installing kit)

(80 g/m2 paper) (80 g/m2 paper) (80 g/m2 paper)

Ver. 5.1

712

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Item Stapling Size

Manual Stapling Folding Method Folding Mode Folding Position

Saddling Size

Description Remarks Front 1-Point Stapling : A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LGL, LTR-R Rear 1-Point stapling : A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTRR Middle 2-Point Stapling : A3, A4, A4-R, B4, B5, LDR, LGL, LTR, LTR- With the saddle in use. R Middle 2-Point Stapling : A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R None Roller contact Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available) Center of sheet Requires a margin of 0.2 in ( 5 mm) in the center of the sheet for a middle margin. A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R No special paper.

Note 1 : The number of sheets is computed based on 80 g/m2 paper. Note 2 : Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of 750 sheets or more. Note 3 : Alignment is not guaranteed if the stack consists of sheets of different sizes.

Ver. 5.1

713

MAR 2005

Staple Position
Front 1-point stapling

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Rear 1-point stapling 0.20.08 in (52 mm) 0.20.08 in (52 mm)
0.180.08 in (4.52 mm) 0.180.08 in (4.52 mm) 0.20.08 in (52 mm)

Middle 2-point stapling

0.20.08 in (52 mm)

A3 or A4

0.20.08 in (52 mm)

A4-R

B4 or B5

3.270.16 in (834 mm) 7.990.16 in (2034 mm)

0.20.08 in (52 mm)

1.560.16 in (39.54 mm) 6.280.16 in (159.54 mm)

0.20.08 in (52 mm)

2.480.16 in (634 mm) 7.20.16 in (1834 mm)

LDR or LTR

LGL or LTR-R 8.5 FLS

2.920.16 in (74.24 mm) 7.650.16 in (194.24 mm)

1.670.16 in (42.54 mm) 6.40.16 in (162.54 mm)

Middle 2-point stapling (w/ saddle in use)

Transfer direction

Folding position

3.270.16 in (834 mm) 1.560.16 in (39.54 mm) 2.480.16 in (634 mm) 1 1.5 mm 1 1.5 mm 1 1.5 mm 2 2102.0 mm 7.990.16 in (2034 mm) 2 148.52.0 mm 6.286.16 in (159.54 mm) 2 1822.0 mm 7.20.16 in (1834 mm)

2.920.16 in (74.24 mm) 1.670.16 in (42.54 mm) 1 1.5 mm 1 1.5 mm 2 2162.0 mm 7.650.16 in (194.24 mm) 2 139.72.0 mm 6.40.16 in (162.54 mm)

LDR

LTR-R

Fig. 1-001 Stacked Paper Alignment

1.57 in max.(40 mm)

Delivery Direction

0.79 in max.(20 mm)

Fig. 1-002

Ver. 5.1

714

A3

A4-R

B4

MAR 2005

2. Punch Unit (Option) Item Punching Method Paper Size

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Description Reciprocating method (sequential processing method) 2- / 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) : 2-hole / LGL, LTR-R 3-hole / LDR, LTR 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) : A3, A4 64 g/m2~ 133 g/m2 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) : 2-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm 3-hole 0.31 in / 8.0 mm 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) : 0.26 in / 6.5 mm 2-/3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) : 2-hole / 1500 sheets 3-hole / 1500 sheets 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) : 1500 sheets 3.54 x 22.05 x 6.69 in (90 x 560 x 170 mm) 5.5 lb (2.5 kg) (approx.) 24 VDC / 5 VDC supplied by the Finisher Unit. Standby : 2 W max. Operating : 21 W max. (punching) None Roller contact Double-folding (single-sheet non-stapling available) Center of sheet

Remarks

For USA and Canada

Paper Weight Punch Hole Diameter

For EU and Other Destinations No transparencies. For USA and Canada

Punch Waste

For EU and Other Destinations For USA and Canada

For EU and Other Destinations

Size (W x D x H) Weight Power Supply Maximum Power Consumption Manual Stapling Folding Method Folding Mode Folding Position

Saddling Size

A3, A4-R, B4, LDR, LTR-R Table 1-002

Requires a margin of 0.2 1n ( 5 mm) in the center of the sheet for a middle margin. No special paper.

Ver. 5.1

715

MAR 2005

Hole Position
[1] 2-Holes (Puncher Unit-J1) 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

3.150.04 in (801 mm) 0.470.12 in (123 mm)

A3/A4 B5/B4 A4-R B5-R

4.270.12 in (108.53 mm) 3.480.12 in (88.53 mm) 2.560.12 in (653 mm) 2.010.12 in (513 mm)

[2] 2-/3-Holes (Puncher Unit-K1) 1 LGL/LTR-R 2.760.04 in (701 mm) 0.470.12 in (123 mm) 1 LDR/LTR 4.250.04 in 4.250.04 in (1081 mm) (1081 mm) 0.470.12 in (123 mm) 1.240.12 in (31.53 mm) 2.870.12 in (733 mm)

[3] 4-Holes (Puncher Unit-G1) 1 A3/A4 3.150.04 in 3.150.04 in 3.150.04 in (801 mm) (801 mm) (801 mm) 0.470.12 in (123 mm) 1.120.12 in (28.53 mm)

Fig. 1-003

Ver. 5.1

716

MAR 2005

11.3.1.3. Names of Parts 11.3.1.3.1. Cross Section

1. Finisher Unit
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[1] Delivery Tray [3] Paddle [5] Processing Tray Stopper [7] Punch Unit (Option) [9] Stack Delivery Roller [11] Saddle Unit

[2] Aligning Plate (Front, Rear) [4] Delivery Roller [6] Feed Roller [8] Delivery Belt [10] Stapler

Fig. 1-004

Ver. 5.1

717

MAR 2005

2. Saddle Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[1] Bind Stopper [3] Stack Feed Roller [5] Paper Fold Roller 3. Punch Unit (Option)
[1] [2]

[2] Bind Tray [4] Bind Delivery Roller [6] Paper Pushing Plate Fig. 1-005
[3] [4]

(1) Die (3) Hole Puncher (Punch Blade)

(2) Cam (4) Punch Waste Case Fig. 1-006

11.3.1.4. Routine Maintenance by the User

No. Item 1 Staple Cartridge (Replacement) 2 Punch Waste Removal (Optional) Timing When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel) When prompted (indicator on host machine control panel) Table 1-003

Ver. 5.1

718

MAR 2005

11.3.2.

Outline of Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.3.2.1. Basic Operations 11.3.2.1.1. Specifications

The Finisher serves to deliver sheets coming from its host machine. The mode of delivery may be non-sort stack, job offset*, or staple delivery. The Saddle Unit build into the Finisher is used to fold a stack of sheets coming from the Finisher Unit in half for delivery. All these operations are controlled by various commands sent by the Host Machine in addition to the commands from the Finisher Controller PCB. The Punch Unit (option) is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets coming from the Host Machine. The above operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.

Puncher Unit Drive System (Puncher Unit; Option) Control System Alignment Drive System Stapler Drive System Delivery Drive System Feed Drive System Tray Drive System Saddle Unit Drive System

Fig. 2-001 Caution: The position of delivery is shifted to the Front/Rear for each stack to assist sorting.

Ver. 5.1

719

MAR 2005

11.3.2.1.2. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The sequence of finisher operations is controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller PCB is a 16-bit microprocessor (CPU), and is also used for combination with the Host Machine (serial). The Finisher Controller PCB Drive Motors and other loads in response to the various commands from the Host Machine. It also communicates such data as on the states of various sensors and switches to the Host Machine by way of the serial communication line. The ICs mounted to the Finisher Controller PCB have the following functions: IC13 (CPU) Controls sequence of operations. IC12 (EEP-ROM) Backs up adjustment settings. IC6 (EP-ROM) Stores sequence programs. IC11 (communication IC) Communicates with the host machine. IC1 (regulator IC) Generates 5 V. Fig. 2-001 shows the flow of signals between finisher and options controller.
Finisher Unit Finisher Controller PCB IC13 CPU IC12 EEP-ROM IC11 Communication IC IC6 EP-ROM IC1 Regulator IC Motor Host Machine DC Controller PCB PCU Motor Clutch Switch Sensor Punch Unit (Option) Sensor Punch Controller PCB

Fig. 2-002

Ver. 5.1

720

MAR 2005

11.3.2.1.3. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB

1. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB

PI1 CN44-3 -1 -2 PI2 CN51-1 -3 -2 PI3 CN55-3 -1 -2 CN54-1 -3 -2 CN53-3 -1 -2 CN43-1 -3 -2 CN42-3 -1 -2 CN16-10 +5V -12 ENT_S -11

Inlet Sensor

When the sensor detects paper, 1.

Paddle Home Position Sensor

CN9-1

+5V -3 PDL_HP -2

When the paddle is at home position, 1.

Swing Guide Home Position Sensor

CN9-7

+5V -9 BDL_ROL_HP -8

When the swing guide is at home position, 1.

Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (Front)

PI4

CN23-3 -1 -2

CN4

+5V -3 F JOG_HP -2

When the aligning plate (Front) is at home position, 1. When the aligning plate (Rear) is at home position, 1.

Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (Rear)

PI5

CN36-3 -1 -2

CN5-13

+5V -15 R JOG_HP -14

PI6

CN30-3 -1 -2

CN29-1 -3 -2

CN28-9 -7 -8

CN5-1

Processing Tray Sensor

PI7

+5V -3 ADJ_TRAY_S -2

When the sensor detects paper, 1.

Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor

CN31-3 -1 -2

-4 -6 -5

-6 -4 -5

-4

+5V -6 EJCT_BLT_HP When the delivery belt is at home position, 1. -5

PI8

CN32-3 -1 -2

-7 -9 -8

-3 -1 -2

-7

Tray Paper Sensor

+5V -9 TRY_EMPS -8

When paper is present on the tray, 1.

Paper Surface Sensor

PI9

CN35-3 -1 -2

CN34-1 -3 -2

CN33-3 -1 -2

CN5-10

+5V -12 LVL_S -11

When the paper surface is detected, 1.

PI10 CN39-3

CN38-1 -2 -3

CN37-9 -8 -7

CN16-1

Folding Position Sensor

-2 -1

+5V -2 BIND_P -3 BIND_L

When paper is detected, 0. When LED is lit, 1.

Fig. 2-003

Ver. 5.1

721

MAR 2005

2. Inputs to the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Folding Home Position Sensor Stack Feed Roller (Upper) Home Position Sensor Bind Tray Sensor
PI14 PI11 CN40-3 CN38-4 -1 -6 -2 -5 CN41-3 -1 -2 CN47-3 -1 -2 CN52-1 -2 -3 CN50-3 -1 -2 CN49-3 -1 -2 CN48-3 -1 -2 CN25-3 -1 -2 CN24-3 -1 -2 CN73-3 -1 -2 -7 -9 -8

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher Controller PCB

CN37-6 CN16-4 +5V -4 -6 BIND_HP -5 -5 -3 -1 -2 -7 +5V -9 BIND_ROL_HP -8 CN15-1 +5V -3 BIND_EMPS -2 CN9-6 +5V -5 BIND_CLK -4 CN15-10 +5V -12 SIFT_UPLMT -11 CN15-7 +5V -9 SIFT_DNLMT -8 CN15-4 +5V -6 SIFT_CLK -5 CN4-7 +5V -9 FDOOR_S -8 CN4-4 +5V -6 TOPCOV_S -5 CN19-1 +5V -3 PAPER_F -2

When at folding home position, 0.

PI12

When the stack feed roller (Upper) is at home position, 1.

PI13

When the sensor detects paper, 1. When the staple/fold motor is rotating, alternates between 1 and 0. When the tray is at the upper limit, 1. When the tray is at the lower limit, 1. While the shift motor is rotating, alternates between 1 and 0. When the front door is open, 1. When the upper cover is open, 1.

Staple/Fold Motor Clock Sensor

PI15

Shift Upper Limit Sensor

PI16

Shift Lower Limit Sensor

PI17

Shift Motor Clock Sensor

PI22

Front Door Sensor

PI23

Upper Cover Sensor

PI24

Full Stack Sensor

When the paper is full, 1.

Joint Switch

MS2 N.O.

+24VP CN69-2 -1 CN8-6 -5 JOINT SW

Front Door Switch

MS1 N.O.

When connected to the host machine, 1.

CN68-2 -1

CN8-4 -3 FRONT SW

Stapler Safety Switch

MS3 N.O.

When the front door is closed, 1.

CN66-2 -1

CN8-2 -1 STPLSAFE SW

When the swing guide is closed, 1.

Fig. 2-004

Ver. 5.1

722

MAR 2005

3. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

Binding Clutch
CL1 -2 CN72 -1 -2 -1 CN18-1 -2

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher Controller PCB
+24V

B_CLU +24V

When the drive is transmitted, 1.

Feed Motor

-6 -5 CN57 -4

-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

CN10-7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 PDLMTR_A PDLMTR_*A PDLMTR_B PDLMTR_*B +24V

M1

-3 -2 -1

Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation.

Paddle Motor

CN56-2 -5 -3

CN10-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 FEEDMTR_A FEEDMTR_*A FEEDMTR_B FEEDMTR_*B +24V

M2

-1 -4 -6

Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation.

Delivery Motor

-6 -5 CN59 -4

-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6

CN13-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 EJCTMTR_A EJCTMTR_*A EJCTMTR_B EJCTMTR_*B +24V

M3

-3 -2 -1

Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation.

Alignment Motor (Front)

CN63-1 -2 -3 -4 -5

CN62-5 -4 -3 -2 -1

CN3-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 FJOGMTR_A FJOGMTR_*A FJOGMTR_B FJOGMTR_*B +24V

M4

Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation.

Alignment Motor (Rear)

CN65-1 -2 -3 -4 -5

CN64-5 -4 -3 -2 -1

CN3-6 -7 -8 -9 -10 RJOGMTR_A RJOGMTR_*A RJOGMTR_B RJOGMTR_*B

M5

Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation.

Fig. 2-005

Ver. 5.1

723

MAR 2005

4. Outputs from the Finisher Controller PCB (2/2)

Shift Motor
-2 -2 -2 CN70 -1 -2 -1 CN6-1 M6

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher Controller PCB

-1

-1

SIFTMTR_1 -2 SIFTMTR_0

Switches between + and - according to the direction of motor rotation.

Staple/Fold Motor
-2 CN71 M7 -1 -2 -1 CN6-3 BINDMTR_1 -4 BINDMTR_0

CN70

Switches between + and - according to the direction of motor rotation.

Fig. 2-006

Ver. 5.1

724

MAR 2005

5. Inputs to and Outputs from the Finisher Controller

Stapler Unit Slide Home Position Sensor
PI18 +5V CN72-5 CN72A-5

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher Controller PCB

CN72A-5 CN11-3 SLID_HP

When the stapler is at home position, 1.

Staple Home Position Sensor

PI19 +5V CN72-4 CN72A-4 CN72A-4 CN11-4 STPL_HP

When the stapler is at stapling home position, 0.

Staple Empty Sensor

PI20

+5V CN72-3 CN72A-3 CN72A-3 CN11-5 HOOK_S

When the cartridge has staples, 0.

Staple Top Position Sensor

PI21

+5V CN72-2 CN72A-2 CN72A-2 CN11-6 SELF_P

When the staple is at top the stapler, 0.

+5V CN72-6 CN72A-6 CN72-1 CN72A-1 CN72-7 CN72A-7

+5V CN72A-6 CN11-2 CN72A-1 CN11-7 CN72A-7 CN11-1 STPL_CNCT

When the stapler is connected, 0.

Slide Motor
M8

CN72-10 CN72B-5 CN72-11 CN72B-4 CN72-12 CN72B-3 CN72-13 CN72B-2

CN72B-5 CN72B-4 CN72B-3 CN72B-2

CN7-3 SLIDMTR_A CN7-4 SLIDMTR_*A CN7-5 SLIDMTR_B CN7-6 SLIDMTR_*B

Switches between 1 and 0 according to the direction of motor rotation.

+24V CN2-1 -3 -4 -5 -7 -6 GND GND TXD RXD +24V CN1-1 -2

Communication line

Host Machine

Fig. 2-007

Ver. 5.1

725

MAR 2005

11.3.2.1.4. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB (Option)
1. Inputs to and Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB
Punch Controller PCB
PI1P J2008-3 -1 -2 J1006-4

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Home Position Sensor Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor Punch Motor Clock Sensor Waste full LED PCB
LED121 PI2P

+5V -6 -5 PUNCH

When the hole puncher is at home position, 0. When the punch slide unit is at home position, 1. While the punch motor is rotating, alternates between 0 and 1.

J2007-3 -1 -2

J1006-1

+5V -3 -2 SLIDE

PI3P

J2009-3 -1 -2

J1006-7

+5V -9 -8 CLOCK

+5V J1005-1

-2

DUSTLED

Waste Full Photosensor PCB

PT131 J1005-3 DUSTPTR

When the light is blocked, 0.

-4

Photosensor PCB
+5V PT1 PT2 PT3 PT4 PT5 J1007-12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 +5V

SREG1* SREG2* SREG3* SREG4* PAEND*

When paper is detected, 0.

-13

Fig. 2-008

Ver. 5.1

726

MAR 2005

2. Outputs from the Punch Controller PCB

LED PCB
J1007-6 LED5 LED4 LED3 LED2 LED1 -1 -5 -4 -3 -2

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Punch Controller PCB
+5V

LEDON5 LEDON4 LEDON3 LEDON2 LEDON1

When 1, LED goes ON.

Punch Motor
J1002-1 M1P -2

Switches between + and - according to the direction of motor rotation.

Horizontal Registration Motor

M2P

J1001-1 -2 -3 -4

A B A* B*

Switches the pulse signals according to the rotation of the motor.

Fig. 2-009

Ver. 5.1

727

MAR 2005

11.3.2.2. Feed / Drive System 11.3.2.2.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Machine performs the following in response to the commands coming from its host machine on the sheets arriving from the Host Machine for delivery: simple stacking, job offset, and stapling or folding (in two). If a Punch Unit (option) is installed, the sheets are punched and delivered to the Delivery Tray. Sheets may be delivered in either of five ways (including one for the Punch Unit):
Delivery method Normal delivery Punching Simple stacking Job offset Stapling Front 1-point stapling Rear 1-point stapling Middle 2-point stapling Saddle delivery Stitching Middle 2-point stapling

Fig. 2-010 1. Normal Delivery a. Simple Stacking The Machine pulls in the sheet once to the processing tray and then delivers it to the Delivery Tray.

Tray

Paper

Fig. 2-011

Ver. 5.1

728

MAR 2005

b. Job Offset The Machine pulls the sheet once to the Processing Tray. It then moves the sheet to the front or the rear using the Aligning Plate. When it has deposited a specific number of sheets, it delivers them in the form of an aligning plane. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the sheets are delivered in a form of a stack. Even if the specified value is not reached, stacked sheets are temporarily delivered when 10 sheets of large-size paper (300 mm or longer) or 30 sheets of small-size paper (299 mm or shorter) have been stacked. (5- and STMTsizes: 10 sheets)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Results of offset delivery (4 jobs) 4th set 3rd set 1st set (Delivery Direction) 2nd set

Fig. 2-012

Ver. 5.1

729

MAR 2005

c. Stapling The Machine stacks sheets coming from its host machine on the Processing Tray. When the number of sheets stacked on the Processing Tray reaches a specified value, the Finisher staples them, and delivers the stapled stack to the Delivery Tray.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 2-013 d. Saddle Delivery The Machine deposits a stack of sheets on the Processing Tray, staples it (middle 2-point), and then moves it to the Saddle Unit. The Saddle Unit folds the stack in two, and delivers it to the Bind Tray.

Fig. 2-014 730

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

11.3.2.2.2. Feed / Delivery

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The Machine forwards the sheets coming from its host machine to the Delivery Tray, Processing Tray, or Saddle Unit according to the type of delivery used. The sheets forwarded to the processing tray or the Saddle Unit are offset, stapled, or folded. Fig. 2-015 shows the motors that are associated with moving and aligning sheets. These motors are controlled (rotated clockwise or counter-clockwise) by the microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB. The paper path is equipped with the sensors shown in Table 2-002 used to monitor the arrival or passage of sheets. If a sheet fails to arrive at or move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time, the Finisher Controller will assume a jam, and stops the ongoing operation and, at the same time, communicates the presence of a jam to the Host Machine. Notation M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M7 Name Paddle Motor Feed Motor Delivery Motor Alignment Plate Motor (Front) Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Staple / Fold Motor Description Stepping Motor Stepping Motor Stepping Motor Stepping Motor Stepping Motor Brush DC Motor Table 2-001 Connector on Finisher Controller PCB CN10 CN10 CN13 CN3 CN3 CN6

Ver. 5.1

731

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
Shift Motor Drive Signal SIFTMTR M6 Alignment Plate Motor (front) drive signal FJOGMTR M4 Delivery Motor Drive Signal EJCTMTR M3 Slide Motor Drive Signal SLIDMTR M8 Alignment Plate Motor (rear) drive signal RJOGMTR M5 M2 Paddle Motor Drive Signal PDLMTR Finisher Controller PCB (2/2) Finisher Controller PCB (1/2)

Fig. 2-015

732
Staple/Fold Motor Drive Signal BINDMTR Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal BIND_CLK M7 PI14

Bind Clutch Drive Signal B_CLU CL M1 Feed Motor Drive Signal FEEDMTR

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Finisher Controller PCB Fold position paper detect signal BIND_P PI1 PI10 Inlet paper detect signal ENT_P

Fig. 2-016 Notation PI1 PI10 Name Inlet Sensor Fold Position Sensor Description Photo Interrupter Photo Interrupter Table 2-002 Connector on Finisher Controller PCB CN16 CN16

Ver. 5.1

733

MAR 2005

11.3.2.2.3. Job Offset

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline "Job offset" refers to the operation by which the machine delivers a set of sheets with them pulled forward or backward for sorting. Switching between the forward and backward directions is accomplished by using an aligning plate (Front) and an aligning plate (Rear). The sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray and then fed toward the stopper by the Paddle. A swing guide is at the upper position while a sheet is being pulled onto the Processing Tray or during alignment. It is at the lower position during stack feeding, stack delivery, or stapling. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Aligning Plate (Front) Motor (M4) and the Aligning Plate (Rear) Motor (M5) to return the two aligning plates to their home positions. Sensor Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor Aligning Plate (Rear) Home Position Sensor Swing Guide Home Position Sensor Paddle Home Position Sensor Symbol Connector Function PI4 CN4-3 Drives the Aligning Plate (Front) PI5 CN5-15 Drives the Aligning Plate (Rear) PI3 CN9-9 Drives the Swing Guide Drive PI2 CN9-3 Drives the Paddle (feeds paper) Table 2-003
Aligning plate (Rear) Aligning plate (Rear) home position sensor (PI5)

Motor Aligning Plate (Front) Motor Aligning Plate (Rear) Motor Paddle Motor Paddle Motor

Symbol M4 M5 M2 M2

Light-shielding plate

Alignment Plate (Front) Motor (M4)

Aligning plate (Rear) motor (M5)

Aligning Plate (Front)

Light-Shielding Plate (Front) Aligning Plate (Front) Home Position Sensor (PI4)

Paper

Fig. 2-017

Ver. 5.1

734

MAR 2005

2. Processing Tray Paper Stacking Operation A sheet coming between the Delivery Rollers is fed onto the Processing Tray. Then, the Paddle Taps on the sheet surface twice (once for the second and subsequent sheets) to position the sheet against the Processing Tray Stopper.
Paper Aligning Plate Paddle Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Swing Guide

Delivery Belt

Processing Tray Stopper Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Fig.2-018 3. Offset Operation Each sheet is pulled forward or backward using the Aligning Plate (Front) and the Aligning Plate (Rear). The offset operation is performed each time a sheet is pulled onto the Processing Tray.
Aligning Plate (Rear)

Sheet to be offset

Tray Aligning Plate (Front)

Fig. 2-019 Offsetting in the forward direction

Aligning Plate (Rear)

Sheet to be offset

Tray Aligning Plate (Front)

Fig. 2-020 Offsetting in the backward direction

Ver. 5.1

735

MAR 2005

4. Stack Delivery Operation Stack delivery takes place when 10 sheets of large-size paper or 30 sheets of small-size paper (A5and STMT-sizes: 10 sheets) have been stacked on the Processing Tray with them offset in either direction.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Paddle Motor rotates and the Swing Guide descends to hold the paper stack between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor rotates in the forward direction to rotate the Delivery Rollers, feeding the paper stack in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. Next, the Paper Delivery Motor is driven. Next, the Delivery Motor is driven to deliver the paper stack with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.

Swing Guide

Fig. 2-021 Job offset sequence

Start signal Host machine delivery signal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Processing Tray Sensor (PI6) Feed Motor (M1) Delivery Motor (M3) Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7) Paddle Motor (M2) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3) Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) Alignment Motor (Front) (M4) Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (Front) (PI4) Alignment Motor (Rear) (M5) Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (Rear) (PI5) 360msec 360msec 360msec 360msec

60msec

30msec

220msec

CW rotation

CCW rotation

Fig. 2-022

Ver. 5.1

736

MAR 2005

11.3.2.3. Stapling Operation 11.3.2.3.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Staple operation is performed to staple specified sheets of paper using a stapler unit. The stapling position depends on the staple mode and paper size. When the Machine starts immediately after power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Slide Motor (M8) to return the Stapler Unit to the home position. The Stapler Unit starts moving toward the front of the Stapler Frame. It stops when the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) on the Slide PCB located under the Stapler Unit. Next, the Slide Motor is driven a specified number of pulses. The Stapler Unit moves to rear standby position at the back of the Machine, entering the standby state. Sensor Slide Home Position Sensor Staple Home Position Sensor Staple Empty Sensor Staple Top Position Sensor Symbol PI18 PI19 PI20 PI21 Connector Function CN11-3 Detects the home position for the stapler moving back and forth CN11-4 Detects the home position for the stapling operation CN11-5 Detects presence or absence of staples in the cartridge CN11-6 Detects the staple top position Remarks In the stapler In the stapler In the stapler

Function Moves the Stapler. Performs Stapling Operation.

Motor Slide Motor Staple/Fold Motor

Symbol M8 M7 Table 2-004

Stapler

Remarks

(Deliver Direction) Paper Stack

Light-Shielding Plate Slide Motor (M8) Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18)

Fig. 2-023

Ver. 5.1

737

MAR 2005

11.3.2.3.2. Stapling Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When stacking and alignment of paper on the Processing Tray are complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Paddle Motor (M2) in the reverse direction and lowers the Swing Guide. When the Swing Guide descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Finisher Controller PCB moves the stapler for stapling according to the specified stapling position (when rear 1-point stapling is specified, the stapler does not move but it staples at the standby position). As a stapler moves forward, the Processing Tray Stopper is folded forward.
Paper Stack Swing Guide Stack Delivery Roller (Upper) Processing Tray Stopper

Stapler Delivery Tray Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Fig. 2-024
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3) Paddle Motor (M2) Light-Shielding Plate

Staple Safety Switch (MS3)

Swing Guide Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

123 mm

Fig. 2-025

Ver. 5.1

738

MAR 2005

11.3.2.3.3. Delivery Operation after Stapling

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

When stapling is complete, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Deliver Motor in the forward direction to feed the paper stack (sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers) in the delivery direction. The Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor is turned OFF. The Delivery Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Swing Guide to ascend. At the same time, the Slide Motor is driven to return the stapler back to the standby position, followed by driving of the Delivery Motor. Then, the paper stack is delivered with the nails of the Delivery Belt that rotates in sync with the Stack Delivery Rollers.
Paper Stack

Swing Guide

Delivery Tray

Stapler

Delivery Belt Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Fig. 2-026
Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3) Paddle Motor (M2) Light-Shielding Plate

Staple Safety Switch (MS3)

Swing Guide

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

Fig. 2-027

Ver. 5.1

739

MAR 2005

11.3.2.3.4. Stapler Unit

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Staple/Fold Motor (M7) is used to perform stapling operation. This motor rotates the Cam one turn for stapling. The home position of this cam is detected by the Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19). The Staple/Fold Motor is rotated in the forward or reverse direction under the control of the Micro Computer (IC13) on the Finisher Controller PCB. When the Staple Home Position Sensor is OFF, the Finisher Controller PCB rotates the Staple/Fold Motor in the forward direction until the sensor turns ON, allowing the Staple Cam to the original position. The Staple Empty Sensor (PI20) is used to detect presence/absence of a staple cartridge in the Machine and presence/absence of staples in the Cartridge. The Staple Top Position Sensor (PI21) is used to determine whether staples are pushed up to the top of the Staple Cartridge. The Finisher Controller circuit does not drive the Staple/Fold Motor (M7) unless the staple safety switch (MS3) is ON (the Swing Guide is closed). This assures safety in case where you happen to put your finger in the stapler.

Fig. 2-028

M7

Staple home position detect signal

Staple top position detect signal

Finisher Controller PCB

Fig. 2-029 740

Ver. 5.1

Staple/hold motor drive signal

Staple empty detect signal

MAR 2005

1. Stapler Movement Controller The Stapler Unit is moved by the Slide Motor (M8). Its home position is detected by the Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18). The Stapler waits at the back irrespective of the staple mode and paper size. After paper has been stacked on the Processing Tray, the Stapler is moved to the specified stapling position in response to the stapling command from the Host Machine.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 2-030 shows the standby position of the Stapler and the stapling position depending on the staple mode. a. Front 1-Point Stapling The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation.

Standby position

Stapler

Feed direction

Stopper

Stapling position

Fig. 2-030 b. Rear 1-Point Stapling The Stapler waits at the back. The stapling position is the same as the standby position.
Standby position Stapling position

Stapler

Feed direction

Stopper

Fig. 2-031

Ver. 5.1

741

MAR 2005

c. Middle 2-Point Stapling The Stapler waits at the back. The Stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation. The Stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then staples it at the front stapling position.
Standby position

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Stapler Stapling position

Stopper Feed direction Stapling position

Fig. 2-032 d. Middle 2-Point Stapling (Bind Mode) The Stapler waits at the back. The stapler moves to and returns from the stapling position for each stapling operation. The stapler first staples a paper stack at the rear stapling position and then staples it at the front stapling position.

Standby position Stapler Stapling position

Stopper Feed direction Stapling position

Fig. 2-033

Ver. 5.1

742

MAR 2005

Stapling Operation Sequence Rear 1-Point Stapling of 2 Sheets

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Start Signal Host Machine Delivery Signal Inlet Sensor (PI1) Processing Tray Sensor (PI6) Feed Motor (M1) Delivery Motor (M3) Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7) 360msec Paddle Motor (M2) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3) Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) Alignment Motor (front) (M4) Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (front) (PI4) 20msec Staple/Fold Motor (M7) Staple Home Position Sensor (PI9) CW rotation CCW rotation 360msec 10msec Staple ???

Fig. 2-034

Ver. 5.1

743

MAR 2005

11.3.2.4. Delivery Tray Operation 11.3.2.4.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Machine has a delivery tray in the Finisher Unit and a bind tray in the Saddle Unit. The Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit is of the fixed type and all the folded paper stacks are delivered to this tray. This tray has a bind tray sensor (PI13) to detect presence/absence of paper. The Delivery Tray in the Finisher Unit is moved up and down using a shift motor (M6). The Finisher has a tray paper sensor (PI8) to detect presence/absence of paper on the Stack Tray. The Home Position Sensor of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Paper Surface Sensor (PI19). When paper has already been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is on the top surface of the stacked paper. When paper has not yet been stacked on the Delivery Tray, the home position is at the position where the edge of the Delivery Tray is detected. At power-on, the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Shift Motor (M6) to return the Delivery Tray to the home position. When the paper coming from the Processing Tray is stacked on the Delivery Tray, the Shift Motor is driven a specified number of pulses, causing the Delivery Tray to descend. Clock pulses are detected by the Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17). Then, the Delivery Tray returns to the home position for the next stacking operation. The upper limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15). When the Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is ascending. The lower limit of the Delivery Tray is detected by the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16). When the Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16) is turned ON, the Finisher Controller PCB stops the Shift Motor (M6) that is descending. The Finisher Unit has a full stack sensor (PI24) to detect overstacking of large-size or mixed paper according to the stack height.

Shift Upper Limit Sensor (PI15)

Tray Paper Sensor (PI8) Shift Lower Limit Sensor (PI16) Paper Surface Sensor (PI9) Edge Delivery Tray

Shift Motor Clock Sensor (PI17)

Full Stack Sensor (PI24)

Shift Motor (M6)

Fig. 2-035

Ver. 5.1

744

MAR 2005

11.3.2.5. Saddle Unit 11.3.2.5.1. Basic Operations

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The Machine stitches a stack of sheets (middle 2-point), then folds the stack in two in the Finisher. These operations are controlled by the Finisher Controller PCB. The Finisher Controller PCB is controlled by the commands from the Host Machine.

11.3.2.5.2. Feed / Drive System

1. Outline This machine stitches the paper stack coming from the Finisher, folds it, and delivers it to the Bind Tray in the Saddle Unit in response to the commands from the Host Machine. That is, the machine performans the following operations : 1) Paper Feed-in 2) Stitching 3) Stack Feed 4) Folding / Delivery

1) Paper feed-in

2) Stitching

3) Stack feed

4) Folding/delivery

Fig. 2-036

Ver. 5.1

745

MAR 2005

a. Paper Feed-in After being aligned on the Processing Tray, a stack of sheets is sandwiched between the Stack Delivery Rollers. As the Stack Delivery Rollers rotate, the stack is fed toward the Saddle Unit.
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Paper Stack

Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Fig. 2-037 b. Stitching When the center of the paper stack (stitching position) reaches the stapler's staple position, the Stapler stitches the paper stack. When only one sheet is fed from the Host Machine, the next step (stack feed) is performed without performing the stitching operation.
Staple Stapler (Upper)

Stapler (Lower)

Fig. 2-038

Ver. 5.1

746

MAR 2005

c. Stack Feed The Stack Feed Rollers feed the paper stack to the stack folding/delivery position where the center of the stack (stitched position) is level with the Paper Pushing Plate and Paper Folding Roller's nip part.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Stack Feed Roller (Upper)

Paper Pushing Plate

Stack Feed Roller (Lower) Paper Fold Roller

Fig. 2-039 d. Folding / Delivery The Paper Pushing Plate pushes in the center of the paper stack to feed it toward the Paper Fold Rollers. Then, the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers deliver the paper stack to the Bind Tray.

Bind Delivery Rollers Paper Fold Rollers

Fig. 2-040 747

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

11.3.2.5.3. Paper Feed System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The paper feed system feeds a stack of sheets (coming from the Finisher) to the position where the center of the paper stack (stitching position) is aligned to the stapler's staple, allowing the next step (stitching and folding) to be performed. When sheets of paper have been stacked and aligned on the Processing Tray, the Paddle Motor (M2) rotates in the reverse direction, causing the Swing Guide to descend. As the Swing Guide descends, the paper stack is sandwiched between the Upper and Lower Stack Delivery Rollers. The Delivery Motor (M3) rotates in the reverse direction, feeding the paper stack toward the Saddle Unit. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the Folding Position Sensor (PI10), the Finisher Controller PCB drives the Delivery Motor a specified number of motor pulses to stop the center of the paper stack (stitching position) at the stapler's staple position. Before the paper stack passes through the Stack Feed Rollers, the Feed Motor (M1) is driven to rotate the Stack Feed Roller (lower) so that the leading edge of the paper stack is not bent.
Stack Delivery Roller (Upper) Paper stack

Fold Position Sensor Stack Delivery Roller (Lower)

Stack Feed Roller (Lower)

Fig. 2-041

Ver. 5.1

748

MAR 2005

11.3.2.5.4. Stack Feed System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The stack feed system feeds the stitched paper stack to the folding position. When stitching is complete, the Feed Motor (M2) rotates, causing the Stack Feed Roller (upper) to descend. The paper stack is sandwiched between the Stack Feed Rollers. Then, the Bind Clutch (CL1) is turned ON to rotate the Feed Motor (M2) in the forward direction, thus feeding the paper stack to the folding position. The feed amount is equivalent to the number of pulses used to drive the Feed Motor (M2) unit the paper stack reaches the folding position.

Stack Feed Roller (Upper)

Fe e

dA

mo

un

Stack Feed Roller (Lower)

Fig. 2-042

Ver. 5.1

749

MAR 2005

11.3.2.5.5. Fold / Delivery System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The paper fold mechanism consists of a Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and a Paper Pushing Plate. The Guide Plate, Paper Fold Rollers, and Paper Pushing Plate are driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7). The drive force is transferred with a combination of gears and cams. Motor operation is monitored by the Staple/Fold Motor Lock Sensor (PI14). Until the paper stack reaches the folding position, the Guide Plate covers the Paper Fold Rollers to act as a paper path through which a paper stack is fed to the Saddle Unit and to prevent a paper stack from touching the rollers. A Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) is provided to detect the positions of the Paper Fold Rollers and Paper Pushing Plate. The paper stack folded in two by the Paper Fold Rollers is delivered by Bind Delivery Rollers. The Bind Delivery Rollers are also driven by the Staple/Fold Motor (M7). A Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) is provided on the Bind Tray to detect presence/absence of a paper stack; however, it is not used to detect a jam. 2. Paper Folding Paper is folded using paper fold rollers and a paper pushing plate. Almost concurrently with the start of roller rotation, the Paper Pushing Plate starts operating to push the paper stack into the gap between the Paper Fold Rollers. When the paper stack is fed about 10 mm with the rotation of the Paper Fold Rollers, the Paper Pushing Plate returns to the home position. Then, the paper stack is delivered to the Bind Tray using the Paper Fold Rollers and Bind Delivery Rollers. Half the entire surface of each paper fold roller is uncovered excluding the central area and the area at the left and right ends. The uncovered surface of the Upper Paper Fold Roller comes in touch with the uncovered surface of the Lower Paper Fold Roller only at the center and left and right ends, allowing a paper stack to be fed without causing creases. The other half of the Upper Paper Fold Roller that is covered comes in touch with the other half of the Lower Paper Fold Roller that is also covered, allowing a paper stack to be folded while being fed.
Sensor Flag Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11)

Cam Paper Pushing Plate

Paper stack

Paper Fold Roller (Upper)

Staple/Fold Motor

M7

Paper Fold Roller (Lower)

Fig. 2-043

Ver. 5.1

750

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) Paper Pushing Plate

Paper Fold Roller (Upper)

Staple/Fold M7 Motor

Paper Fold Roller (Lower)

Paper stack

Fig. 2-044 [Paper Folding Start Position]

Paper Stack

Inlet

Paper Push Plate Outlet

Folds/feeds a paper stack. Feeds a paper stack.

Fig. 2-045

Ver. 5.1

751

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030
Staple

Feed Motor (M2) Delivery Motor (M3) Paddle Motor (M1) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2) Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3) Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) Slide Motor (M8) Staple/Fold Motor (M7) Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) Folding Position Sensor (PI10) Stack Feed Roller (Upper) Home Position Sensor (PI12) Binding Clutch (CL1) Folding Home Position Sensor (PI11) Bind Tray Sensor (PI13) 50msec

?????

13571msec

CW rotation

CCW rotation

Fig. 2-046

Ver. 5.1

752

MAR 2005

11.3.2.6. Punch Unit (Option) 11.3.2.6.1. Basic Operations

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The Punch Unit is an option and is designed for installation to the Pickup Assembly of the Finisher. The Punch Unit is not equipped with a paper feeding mechanism, and the sheets from the Host Machine move through the Punch Unit and then the feed system of the Finisher. When the trailing edge of a sheet from the Host Machine reaches the Punch Unit, the sheet is stopped once, and the Punch Shaft is rotated to punch a hole along the trailing edge. These operations are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB.
Punch Drive System Horizontal Registration Drive System Finisher Unit Control System

Punch Controller PCB

Fig. 2-047

Ver. 5.1

753

MAR 2005

11.3.2.6.2. Punching Operation

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline The Punch Unit is located in the pickup assembly of the Finisher, and is used to punch holes in sheets that have been sent from the Host Machine and stopped inside it. When the trailing edge of a sheet reaches the Punch Unit, the Inlet Roller of the Finisher Assembly stops the sheet to punch a hole along the trailing edge of the sheet. The Punch Unit consists of a Die and Hole Puncher (Punch Blade). The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). It is attached to the Eccentric Cam of the Punch Shaft, and the rotation of the Punch Shaft is converted into reciprocating motion for punching operation. The Punch Motor (M1P) is a DC motor. The home position of the Punch Shaft is detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P). To make sure that the Punch Motor, which is a DC motor, stops exactly at its home position, the Punch Motor is stopped in relation to the count of the clock pulses kept by the Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P). A single punching operation is executed by rotating punch shaft 180 from its home position. As many as five light-receiving transistors (Photo Sensor PCB) are mounted over the inlet paper path of the Punch Unit; on the other hand, as many as five LEDs (LED PCB) are mounted under the path, together serving as five Sensors. The Frontmost Sensor (LED5, PT5) is used to detect the training edge of sheets, and the remaining four (LED1 through LED4, PT1 through PTR4) are used as Horizontal Registration Sensors to detect the rear position of sheets when punching holes. The Punch Motor, Punch Unit, and Sensors make up the Punch Slide Unit, which moves to the Front/ Rear to suit the selected paper size. The movement to the Front/Rear is driven by the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P), and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is a Stepping Motor. The Punch Motor and Horizontal Registration Motor are controlled with various commands from the Finisher Controller PCB as well as the commands from the Punch Controller PCB. The waste paper occurring as the result of punching is collected in the Waste Paper Case. The case is monitored by the LED121 on the Waste Full LED PCB and PT131 on the Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB.

Ver. 5.1

754

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
LED121

Trailing Edge Detection Signal (LED5, PT5) PAEND

Horizontal Registration Detection Signal (LED1~4, PT1~4) SREG1~4

Punch Controller PCB (2/2)

Punch Controller PCB (1/2)

Fig. 2-048

755
Punch Motor Clock (PI3P) Detection Signal PUNCHCLK Waste Full Detection Signal (LED121, PT131) DFULL Horizontal Registration Home Position (PI2P) Detection Signal SREGHP Punch Home Position (PI1P) Detection Signal PUNCHHP
PT131

5 4 3 2

5 4 3 2 PT1

Punch Motor (M1P) Drive Signal

LED1

Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) Drive Signal

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MAR 2005

2. Punching Operation The Hole Puncher is driven by the Punch Motor (M1P). The home position for the Hole Puncher is detected by the Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P).

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Punch Unit comes in three types, selected to suit the country of installation: 2-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ), 2- and 3-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU), or 4-hole (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB). The 2-hole and 4-hole types punch a hole when the Punch Shaft is rotated 180 from the home position, causing the punch to make a single round trip. The 2-/3-hole type punches a hole, but the circumference of the Punch Shaft is divided into two (half for 2-hole and the other half for 3-hole). a. 2-Hole, 4-Hole Type The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position is ON. The punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON; the punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 in reverse and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. The punching operation takes place as follows when making a hole in two sheets of paper. 1) A hole is punched along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P) Punch Shaft

Eccentric Cam Die

Hole Puncher Paper

Die (Punch Shaft at Rest/Home Position)

Waste Paper (Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 / Punching operation Ends) by 90 /Hole Made)

Fig. 2-049 2) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.

(Punch Shaft at Rest/ Home Position)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 90 /Hole Made)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 /End of Punching Operation)

Fig. 2-050

Ver. 5.1

756

MAR 2005

b. 2-/3-Hole Type The home position is identified when the Punch Home Position Sensor is ON. To make two holes, the punching operation for the first sheet ends when the Punch Shaft rotates 180 (half circumference) and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON. At this time, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on a half circumference of the Punch Shaft. The punching operation for the second sheet ends when the Punch Shaft has rotated 180 counterclockwise and the Punch Home Position Sensor goes ON (half circumference). At this time, the 3Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher) on the other half circumference of the Punch Shaft. The punching operation takes place as follows when making two holes in two sheets of paper: 1) A hole is made along the trailing edge of the 1st sheet.
Sensor Flag Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P) Punch Shaft

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Eccentric Cam Die

Hole Puncher Paper

Die (Punch Shaft at Rest/ Home Position)

Waste Paper (Punch Shaft CW Rotation (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 / End of Punching Operation) by 90 /Hole Made)

Fig. 2-051 While two holes are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction.

(Punch Shaft at Rest/ Home Position)

(Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 90 / (Punch Shaft CW Rotation by 180 / Punch Back to Limit Position) Punch at Upper Limit)

Fig. 2-052 2) Holes are made along the trailing edge of the 2nd sheet.

(Punch Shaft at Rest/ Home Position)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 90 /Hole Made)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 180 / End of Punching Operation)

Fig. 2-053
Ver. 5.1

757

MAR 2005

While two hole are being made, the 3-Hole Puncher makes a single round trip in escape direction (moving up the Hole Puncher).

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(Punch Shaft at Rest/ Home Position)

(Punch Shaft CCW Rotation by 90 /Punch at Upper Limit)

(Punch CCW Rotation by 180 / Punch Back at Initial Position)

Fig. 2-054 3. Horizontal Registration Operation The horizontal registration drive for the Punch Slide Unit is provided by the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P). The home position of the Punch Slide Unit is detected by the Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P). The Punch Slide Unit detects the trailing edge of sheets using the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) and the Horizontal Registration Sensors (LED1 through 4, SREG1 through 4), and causes a move to a specific position matching the trailing edge of each sheet (in relation to the size of the sheet). The horizontal registration operation takes place as follows: 1) When the leading edge of a sheet from the Host Machine is detected by the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5), the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) starts to move the Punch Slide Unit toward the front.

Punch Slide Unit Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P)

Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5)

(Direction of Paper Delivery)

Paper

Fig. 2-055

Ver. 5.1

758

MAR 2005

2) When the Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1 though 4, PT1 through) suited to the paper size signal from the Host Machine detects the rear edge of the sheet, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) causes a farther move to a specific position, and stops the Punch Slide Unit.
Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1, PT1); used to detect the edge of sheets of A3, A4, LTR, 279x432 (11"x17"). Horizontal Registration Sensor 2 (LED2, PT2); used to detect the edge of sheets of B4, B5, LTR-R, LGL. Horizontal Registration Sensor 3 (LED3, PT3); used to detect the edge of sheets of A4-R. Horizontal Registration Sensor 4 (LED4, PT4); used to detect the edge of sheets of B5-R.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 2-056 3) When the Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) detects the trailing edge of the sheet, the drive of the Feed Motor (M2) is stopped, thereby stopping the sheet. Then, the Punch Motor (M1P) is driven to punch holes in the sheet.

Punch

Fig. 2-057 4) When the punching operation ends, the Feed Motor (M2) of the Fisher Unit is driven and, at the same time, the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is rotated in reverse to return the Punch Slide Unit to its home position. 5) For each sheet that arrives in succession, the Punch Slide Unit is returned to its home position, and is caused to repeat steps 1 through 4.
Trailing Edge Sensor (LED5, PT5) Horizontal Registration Sensor (LED1~4, PT1~4) Punch Home Position Sensor (PI1P) Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P) Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) Punch Motor (M1P) Feed Motor (M2) CW Rotation CCW Rotation

Fig. 2-058
Ver. 5.1

759

MAR 2005

11.3.2.7. Detecting Jams 11.3.2.7.1. Outline

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

The Microprocessor (CPU) on the Finisher Controller PCB is programmed to check for jams in the Finisher/ Saddle/Puncher (option) at such times as set in advance. It identifies a jam in reference to the presence/ absence of paper at a specific sensor. If a jam is found, the Finisher Controller PCB communicates the nature of the jam to the Host Machine in the form of a code (which may be checked in service mode of the Host Machine).

PI1

PI10

PI1 : Inlet Sensor PI10 : Folding Position Sensor

Fig. 2-059 1. Inlet Sensor Delay Jam (1011) If the Inlet Sensor does not detect the paper 3 times the specified period of time after the paper out signal was sent from the hooked-up machine.
Host machine delivery signal Host machine delivery signal

approx. 1.5sec. Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Feed Motor (M1) Normal Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Feed Motor (M1)

approx. 1.5sec. Jam

Fig. 2-060 2. Inlet Sensor Stationary Jam (1021) If the paper does not pass the Inlet Sensor 3 times the specified period of time after the Inlet Sensor detected the paper's front edge.
approx. 2sec. Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Feed Motor (M1) Normal Jam check Inlet Sensor (PI1) Feed Motor (M1) Jam approx. 2sec.

Fig. 2-061

Ver. 5.1

760

MAR 2005

3. Folding Position Sensor Delay Jam (1012) In bind mode, the Folding Position Sensor does not detect paper 1200 msec after the Intermediate Processing Tray starts to send paper to the stapling position.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1200 ms Jam Check Folding Position Sensor (PI10) Delivery Motor (M3) Normal Jam Check Folding Position Sensor (PI10) Delivery Motor (M3)

1200 ms Jam

Fig. 2-062 4. Folding Position Sensor Stationary Jam (1022) In bind mode, paper does not leave the Holding Position Sensor approximately 10.5 sec after the Staple/Fold Motor is driven.
Approx. 10.5sec. Jam Check Folding Position Sensor (PI10) Staple/Fold Motor (M7) Normal Jam Check Folding Position Sensor (PI10) Staple/Fold Motor (M7) Jam Approx. 10.5sec.

Fig. 2-063 5. Door Open Jam (paper present)(1008) The Finisher is disconnected from its host machine or the Front Door, or the Upper Cover is opened while the system is in operation (paper on the move). 6. Staple Jam (1006) The Staple Home Position Sensor (PI19) does not go OFF 600 msec after the Stapler is driven. Or, it does not return to its home position (where the sensor goes ON). 7. Punch Jam Paper stuck at punch stapler Punching not ended 1 second after the punching request signal.

Ver. 5.1

761

MAR 2005

11.3.2.8. Power Supply System 11.3.2.8.1. Finisher / Saddle Assembly

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Outline When the Host Machine is turned on, it supplies the Finisher Controller PCB with two channels of 24 VDC; one is for the motors and clutches, and the other is turned into 5 VDC by the Regulator IC (IC1) of the Finisher Controller PCB for use by the sensors and ICs on PCBs. If a punch unit (option) is installed, power is also supplied to the Punch Controller PCB. Some of 24 VDC used to drive motors is cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2), Front Door Switch (MS1), or Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) is open. Fig. 2-061 is a block diagram of the power supply system :
Joint Switch (MS2) Front Door Switch (MS1) Stapler Safety Switch (MS3) 24V Motor

24V 24VP Circuit Breaker (CB1) 24V

Motor

Clutch

Host Machine

Finisher Controller PCB 5V Sensor

(IC1) 24VL Regulator IC 5V Logic System

Punch Controller PCB (Puncher Unit; Option)

Fig. 2-064 2. Protective Mechanism A circuit breaker (CB1) is monitored to protect the 24 VDC system sued to drive the motors against overcurrent. The 24-V system used to drive the Feed Motor (M1), paddle motor (M2), and delivery motor (M3) is equipped with a fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.

11.3.2.8.2. Punch Unit (Option)

1. Outline When the Host Machine is turned on, the Punch Unit is supplied by the Finisher Controller PCB with 24-V and 5-V power. The 24-V power is used to drive the motors, while the 5-V power is used by sensors and the ICs on the Punch Controller PCB. The 24-V power to the motors will be cut off when the Joint Switch (MS2) or the Front Door Switch (MS1) of the Finisher Unit is open.

Ver. 5.1

762

MAR 2005

Fig. 2-062 is a block diagram for the power supply system :

24V

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

24V

Motors

Finisher Controller PCB

Punch Controller PCB 5V Sensors

5V

5V

Logic System

Fig. 2-065 2. Protective Mechanisms The 24-V system used to drive the Punch Motor (M1P) and the Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) is equipped with a built-in fuse that melts in the presence of overcurrent.

Ver. 5.1

763

MAR 2005

11.3.3.

Mechanical Systems

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.3.3.1. Finisher Saddle Unit 11.3.3.1.1. External Components

[1] [5] [6] [2]

[7] [4] [3]

[1] Tray (4) [2] Rear Cover (3) [3] Front Cover (5) [4] Front Door [5] Upper Door [6] Upper Right Cover Assembly (4) [7] Jam Removal Cover The number in parentheses indicates the number of Mounting Screws used.

Fig. 3-001
[2]

1-1. Removing the Delivery Tray (1) Remove the four Screws [1], and detach the Delivery Tray [2].

[1]

Fig. 3-002
[1] [4]

1-2. Removing the Front Cover (1) Open the Front Door [1]. (2) While picking the Claw [2], detach the Fold Jam Releasing Dial [3]. (3) Remove 2 Screws [4].
[3]

[2] [4]

Fig. 3-003

Ver. 5.1

764

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[6]

(4) Remove 3 Screws [5], and detach the Front Cover [6].

[5]

[5]

Fig. 3-004 1-3. Removing the Rear Cover (1) Remove 2 Screws [1] on the pickup side, and remove 1 Screw [2] on the delivery side; then, detach the Rear Cover [3].

[3]

[1]

Fig. 3-005

[3]

[2]

Fig. 3-006

Ver. 5.1

765

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

1-4. Removing the Upper Cover (1) Open the Upper Cover [1], and turn the Cover Band Retainer [2] to the left to remove it. (2) Remove the Cover Band [3].

[3]

[2]

Fig. 3-007
[6]

(3) Remove 1 Screw [4], and detach the Processing Tray Rear Cover [5]; then, detach the Upper Cover [6].

[5] [4]

Fig. 3-008

Ver. 5.1

766

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1-5. Removing the Processing Tray Upper Cover (1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.) (2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.) (3) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.) (4) Disconnect the Connector [1], and remove the Screw [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 3-009
[3]

(5) While lifting the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3], disconnect the Connector [4]; then, detach the Processing Tray Upper Cover [3].

[4]

Fig. 3-010

Ver. 5.1

767

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[3]

1-6. Removing the Upper Right Cover Assembly (1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.) (2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.) (3) Remove 2 Screws [1] at the front and the two Screws [2] at the rear; then, detach the Upper Right Cover Assembly [3].

[1]

Fig. 3-011

[3]

[2]

Fig. 3-012 1-7. Removing the Saddle Guide (1) Remove the Delivery Tray. (See 1.) (2) Remove the Front Cover. (See 2.) (3) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 3.) (4) Free the Delivery Tray Support Plate (front) [1] and the Delivery Tray Support Plate (rear) [2] to the outside from the rail grooves. (5) Remove 4 Screws [3].

[3] [2]

[3] [1]

[3]

[3]

Fig. 3-013
[5]

(6) Shift the Side Guide [4] lightly to the front, and free the engagement of the Paper surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5]; then, detach the Side Guide [4].

[4]

Fig. 3-014

Ver. 5.1

768

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[5]

[6]

Caution: Be sure to mount the Side Guide after securely fitting the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (rear) [5] in the groove of the Paper Surface Detecting Lever (middle) [6]. After mounting, push the Paper Surface Detecting Lever several times to make sure that Side Guide is mounted securely.

[5]

[6]

Fig. 3-015

Ver. 5.1

769

MAR 2005

11.3.3.1.2. Feeding System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2-1. Removing the Stapler Unit

[1]

(1) Open the Front Door [1]. (2) Slide out the Stapler Unit [3] while pressing the Stopper Lever [2].

[3]

[2]

Fig. 3-016
[5]

[4]

Caution: Do not remove the stapler from the Stapler Frame Shaft. If removed, the position where the Staple Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) [4] shoots staples will shift from the position where the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler) [5] receives Staples.

Fig. 3-017 2-2. Adjusting the Stapler Phase When the Gears or Timing Belt at the front of the Stapler is replaced or removed for some reason, the staple shooting timing of the Staple Driver (Lower Unit of the Stapler) does not match the staple bending timing of the Staple Clincher (Upper Unit of the Stapler). Adjust the Stapler phase following the procedure described below.

Gear

Timing Belt

Gear

Fig. 3-18

Ver. 5.1

770

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[4]

(1) Detach the Gear Cover [2] from the Staple Driver [1]. (2) Remove the E-Ring [3] to detach the Side Cover [5] of the Stapler Clincher [4].

[3] [5] [2] [1]

Fig. 3-019
[7] [8] [6] [11] [9] [10] [12]

(3) Remove 2 E-Rings [6] to remove the Staple Jam Releasing Gear [7], Timing Belt [8], and Relay Gear 1 [9]. Remove the Spacer and Spring at the back of the Staple Jam Releasing Gear. (4) Remove 1 Screw [10] and Spring [11] to remove the Belt Tentioner [12].

Fig. 3-020
[15] [14]

(5) Remove the Timing Belt [13]. (6) Remove 1 E-Ring [14] to remove the Staple Position Check Gear [15].

[13]

Fig. 3-021

Ver. 5.1

771

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7) Turn the Gear [16] to align the round hole in the Staple Driver Gear with the Round Hole [17] at the back.

[16]

[17]

Fig. 3-022 (8) Insert a Pin [18] with a diameter of approximately 2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the Gear.

[18]

Fig. 3-023 (9) Turn the Gear [19] to align the Round Hole in the Staple Clincher Cam with the Round Hole [20] at the back.

[19]

[20]

Fig. 3-024

Ver. 5.1

772

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(10) Insert a Pin [21] with a diameter of approximately 2 mm (use of a 2 mm Allen wrench is recommended) in the Round Hole to secure the Gear.

[21]

Fig. 3-025 (11) With the Gears and Cam fixed, install the Timing Belt [22] on Gears [23] and [24].
[23]

[22] [24]

Fig. 3-026 (12) Mount the Staple Position Check Gear [27] so that the Blue Mark [25] on the Staple Position Check Gear is aligned with the Round Hole [26] in the frame. Caution: The position where the Blue Mark is aligned with the Round Hole is the home position for stapling. If the Staple Jam Cancel Dial is turned for some reason, the home position deviates, making it impossible to remove the Stapler Cartridge. If such a case, the Gear can be returned to the home position by checking Blue Mark position. Therefore, it is necessary to mount the Gear at the correct position. (13) Remove the Pin securing the Gear to the Cam. (14) Assemble the Spring [28], Spacer [29], Staple Jam Releasing Gear [30], Timing Belt [31], and Relay Gear [32] and secure them with 1 E-Ring [33].

[26] [25] [27]

Fig. 3-027
[28] [31]

[29]

[32] [30] [33]

Fig. 3-028

Ver. 5.1

773

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[2]

2-3. Adjusting the Phase of the Gear in the Saddle Unit If the Gears at the front of the Saddle Unit or the Paper Fold Rollers in the Sale Unit are replaced or removed for some reason, adjust the Gear phase following the procedure described below. (1) The Paper Fold Rollers [1] and Saddle Cam [2] must be positioned as shown below.
[1]

Fig. 3-029 (2) With the Paper Fold Rollers and Saddle Cam positioned as shown in Fig. 3-029, mount Gears as shown in Fig. 3-030. Align the mark (either of two marks) on the saddle cam drive gear [3] with the mark on the relay gear [4] (on the half of the periphery where gears with a smaller face width are arranged). With the mark on the Saddle Cam Drive Gear [3] aligned with the mark on the Relay Gear [4], align the other mark on the relay gear with the rib of the Paper Folding Roller Drive Gear [5].

[3]

[4]

[5]

Fig. 3-030
[3] [2]

2-4. Removing the Saddle Unit (1) Remove the Front Cover. (See 1-2.) (2) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.) (3) Open the Jam Removal Cover [1]; then, remove 2 Screws [2] and the Right Stay [3].

[2] [1]

Fig. 3-031 774

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[5]

(4) Turn the Fold Jam Releasing Dial Assembly [4] to move the Paper Retaining Plate Assembly [5] to the inside.

[4]

Fig. 3-032
[6]

(5) Remove the Stop Ring [6], and detach the Timing Belt [7]. (6) Disconnect 2 Connectors [8].

[7]

[8]

Fig. 3-033
[10] [9]

(7) Remove 3 Screws [9], and slide out the Stapler Unit [10] slightly to the front. (8) Slide out the Saddle Unit [11] to the front.

[9]

[11]

Fig. 3-034
[1]

[2]

2-5. Removing the Processing Tray Assembly (1) Remove the processing Tray Upper Cover. (See 1-5.) (2) Remove the Side Guide. (See 1-7.) (3) Remove 2 Screws [1], and disconnect 5 Connectors [2].

[2]

[1]

[2]

Fig. 3-035

Ver. 5.1

775

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Pull the processing Stopper Base [3] to the front, and free the Claw [5] at the front and the Claw [6] at the rear of the Processing Stopper [4].
[6] [5] [4] [4]

[3]

Fig. 3-036 (5) Disconnect 3 Connectors [7]. (6) Release 2 Claws [8] of the harness retainer, and detach the Motor Harness [9].

[9]

[8]

[7]

Fig. 3-037

Ver. 5.1

776

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(7) Remove the Stop Ring [10], the flange [15], and detach the Timing Belt [11]. (8) Disconnect the Connector [12], and free the Harness [14] from the Edge Saddle [13].

[12] [11] [15] [10] [13] [14]

Fig. 3-038 (9) Remove 2 Screws [15], and slide the Processing Tray Assembly [16] to the rear; then, lift it to detach.

[16]

[15]

Fig. 3-039

Ver. 5.1

777

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

2-6. Removing the Paddle Assembly (1) Remove the Processing Tray Assembly. (See 2-3.) (2) Place the Processing Tray Assembly [1] as shown. Caution: Be sure to take care not to damage the Aligning Plate [2].

[2]

Fig. 3-040 (3) Detach the Timing Belt [3], and remove 2 Screws [4].
[4]

[3]

[4]

Fig. 3-041 (4) Separate the Processing Tray Assembly [5] and the Paddle Assembly [6] as shown.
[6]

[5]

Fig. 3-042

Ver. 5.1

778

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[2] [1]

2-7. Removing the Staple/Fold Drive Unit (1) Open the Front Door [1], and slide out the Stapler Unit [2] slightly to the front.

Fig. 3-043 (2) Remove 1 screw [3], and detach the Interface Retainer [4]. (3) Free the six Harness Retainers [5], and disconnect the Connector [6]. (4) Free the Harness [7] from the Harness Retainer [5]. (5) Free the Harness [7] from the Edge Saddle [8]; then, disconnect the two Connectors [9].

[9]

[7]

[8]

[5] [6] [7] [3]

[7]

[5]

[5] [4] [5] [7]

Fig. 3-044
[14] [11]

[12] [10]

(6) Release the Harness Retainer [10], and disconnect the Connector [11]. (7) Free the Harness [12] from the Harness Retainer [10]. (8) Free the Harness [12] for the Edge Saddle [13]; and disconnect the two Connectors [14].

[13]

Fig. 3-045

Ver. 5.1

779

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[15]

(9) Remove 1 Screw [15], and free the Claw [17] of the Harness Guide from the Long Angle [16] of the Base Plate.

[16]

[17]

Fig. 3-046 (10) Disconnect 2 Connectors [18], and free the Harness [20] from the Edge Saddle [19].

[18]

[20] [18] [19]

Fig. 3-047
[21]

(11) Remove 3 Screws [21].

[21]

[21]

Fig. 3-048

Ver. 5.1

780

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(12) Remove 1 Screw [22], and detach the Staple/ Fold Drive Unit [23].

[22] [23]

Fig. 3-049
[3]

[3] [1] [7]

2-8. Removing the Feed Motor Unit (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.) (2) Release the Harness Retainer [5], and disconnect the Connector [6]. (3) Disconnect the Connector [7]. (4) Remove 1 Screw [1], and detach the Harness Guide [2]. (5) Remove 3 Screws [3], and detach the Feed Motor Unit [4].

[2] [4]

[6] [5]

Fig. 3-050

Ver. 5.1

781

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2-9. Removing the Feed Roller (1) Remove the Upper Cover. (See 1-4.) (2) Remove the Upper Right Cover Assembly. (See 1-6.) (3) Remove the Feed Motor Unit. (See 2-6.) (4) Remove 1 Screw [1]. (5) Remove the Stop Ring [2], and detach the Bushing [3].

[1] [3] [2]

Fig. 3-051 (6) Remove 3 Screws [4].

[4]

Fig. 3-052

Ver. 5.1

782

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[8] [9]

[5]

(7) Remove the Gear [5], and detach the Gear [6] while spreading the Claw. (8) Remove the Stop Ring [7], and detach the Bushing [8]. (9) Remove 1 Screws [9], and detach the Inlet Sensor [10]. (10) Remove the Lower Paper Guide [11].
[6]

[10] [7] [11]

Fig. 3-053 (11) Remove the Feed Roller [12].

[12]

Fig. 3-054 2-10. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) (1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.) (2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.

[1]

Fig. 3-055

Ver. 5.1

783

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[3]

(3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly (upper) [3].

[2]

Fig. 3-056 (4) Push up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4] from below to free the Stack Deliver Roller (upper) [4] from the Shaft [5].

[4] [5]

Fig. 3-057
[6] [4]

(5) Shift up the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [4], and then push it down to detach the Stack Deliver Roller (upper) [4]. (6) Likewise, remove the Stack Delivery Roller (upper) [6] at the front.

Fig. 3-058 784

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

2-11. Removing the Paddle (1) Remove the Paddle Assembly. (See 2-4.) (2) Place the Paddle Assembly [1] as shown.

Fig. 3-059 (3) Turn the Gear [2] in the direction of the arrow to move up the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly (upper) [3].

[3]

[2]

Fig. 3-060 (4) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free one side of the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].

[5] [4]

Fig. 3-061

Ver. 5.1

785

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[4]

(5) Push up the Safety Guide [4] from below to free the Safety Guide [4] from the Shaft [5].

[5]

Fig. 3-062
[1]

(6) Remove the Paddle [6] in the direction of the arrow. (7) Likewise, remove the other Paddle.

Fig. 3-063 2-12. Removing the Stack Delivery Roller (lower)/ Delivery Belt (1) Remove the Paddle Assembly, and separate it from the Processing Tray Assembly. (See 2-4.) (2) Slide the Aligning Plate (front) [2] and the Aligning Plate (rear) [3] of the Processing Tray Assembly [1] by sliding them to the outside.

[1]

[3]

[2]

Fig. 3-064 (3) Remove the Processing Tray Stopper [4].

[4]

Fig. 3-065

Ver. 5.1

786

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[5] [7]

(4) Remove the Screw [5], and detach the Paper Guide (front) [7] while freeing 2 Claws [6].

[6]

Fig. 3-066
[8]

(5) Remove 1 Screw [8]; then, while freeing the Claw [9], detach the Paper Guide (rear) [10].

[10] [9]

Fig. 3-067 (6) Remove 2 Stop Rings [11]; then, move 2 Bushings [12] to the inside.

[12]

[11]

[11] [12]

Fig. 3-068 (7) Remove 4 Screws [13]; then, lift the Stack Delivery Roller Assembly (lower) [14] to detach.

[13]

[14]

[13]

Fig. 3-069

Ver. 5.1

787

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[16]

(8) Remove the Stack Delivery Roller (lower) [15] and 2 Delivery Belts [16].

[15]

Fig. 3-070 Caution: Be sure to mount them so that the Edges [17] of the Claws of the Delivery Belts are flush.
[17]

Fig. 3-071

11.3.3.1.3. PCBs
3-1. Removing the Finisher Controller PCB (1) Remove the Rear Cover. (See 1-3.) (2) Disconnect 17 Connectors [1], and remove 1 Screw [2]. (3) Free the PCB Retainer [3], and detach the Finisher Controller PCB [4].

[2]

[3] [1]

[1] [1]

[4]

Fig. 3-072
[1]

3-2. Removing the Slide Home Position PCB (1) Open the Front Door [1], and turn the Tab [2] on the stapler slide in the direction of the arrow to slide the Stapler to the frontmost point. (2) Remove the Stapler Unit. (See 2-1.)

[2]

Fig. 3-073

Ver. 5.1

788

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(3) Place the Stapler Unit [3] as shown. (4) Remove 2 Screws [4], and detach the Guide [5].
[3]

[4] [5] [4]

Fig. 3-074
[2]

(5) Turn the Tab [2] on the Stapler side in the direction of the arrow so that the Fixing Screw [7] of the Slide Home Position PCB [6] is in view through the round hole. (6) Remove the Fixing Screw [7].

[6]

[7]

Fig. 3-075 (7) Disconnect the Connector [8]. (8) Remove the Flexible Cable Retainer [9]. (9) Free the Lock [10] of the Connector in the direction of the arrow; then, detach the Flexible Cable [11], and then detach the Slide Home Position PCB [12].

[8]

[10] [11]

[12] [9]

Fig. 3-076

Ver. 5.1

789

MAR 2005

11.3.3.2. Punch Unit (Option) 11.3.3.2.1. Puncher Driving System

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[2]

1-1. Removing the Punch Motor (1) Remove 2 Screws [1]. (2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the Punch Motor [3].

[1]

[3]

Fig. 3-077
[4] [3]

1-2. Removing the Horizontal Registration Motor (1) Disconnect Connector J1001 [1]. (2) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide [2]. (3) Remove 2 Screws [4] to remove the Horizontal Registration Motor [5].

[1] [5] [2]

Fig. 3-078
[1]

[2]

1-3. Removing the Punch Unit (1) Remove the Waste Case. (2) Remove 1 Screw [1] to detach the Jam Processing Cover [2].

Fig. 3-079 (3) Disconnect the Connector J1005 [3]. (4) Remove the Harness [5] from the Harness Guide [4].

[3]

[5] [4]

Fig. 3-080 790

Ver. 5.1

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[6]

(5) Disconnect the Connector [6]. (6) Remove 1 Screw [7] and Sensor Support Plate [8].

[8]

[7]

Fig. 3-081 (7) Remove 1 Screw [9] and Washer [10]. (8) Disconnect the Connector [11]. (9) Remove 2 Screws [12] to detach the Base Cover [13].
[9]

[10]

[13]

[11]

[12]

Fig. 3-082

Ver. 5.1

791

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[15]

(10) Remove 4 Screws [14] to remove the Upper Transmission Sensor Unit [15] and Lower Transmission Sensor [16].

[14]

[14]

[16]

[14]

Fig. 3-083
[17] [18]

(11) Remove the Punch Unit [18] from the Horizontal Registration Motor Assembly [17].

Fig. 3-084

11.3.3.2.2. PCBs
[2] [3]

[2]

2-1. Removing the Punch Controller PCB (1) Remove 2 Screws [1]. (2) Disconnect 5 Connectors [2] to remove the Punch Controller PCB [3].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 3-085

Ver. 5.1

792

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[4]

[1]

2-2. Removing the Photo Sensor PCB (1) Remove the Punch Motor. (See 1-1.) (2) Remove 1 Screw [1]. (3) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide [2] on the PCB, then detach the PCB Cover [4].

[3] [2]

Fig. 3-086
[6]

(4) Disconnect the Connector [5] to remove the Photosensor PCB [6].

[5]

Fig. 3-087 2-3. Removing the LED PCB (1) Remove the Waste Case. (2) Disconnect Connector J1005 [1]. (3) Remove the Harness [3] from the Harness Guide [2].

[1]

[3] [2]

Fig. 3-088

Ver. 5.1

793

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

(4) Remove the Screw [4] and Washer [5]. (5) Disconnect the Connector [6]. (6) Remove 1 Screw [7] to detach the Base Cover [8].
[4]

[5]

[8]

[6]

[7]

Fig. 3-089
[10]

[9]

(7) Remove 1 Screw [9]. (8) Disconnect the Connector [10] to remove the LED PCB [11].

[11]

Fig. 3-090

Ver. 5.1

794

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

2-4. Removing the Waste-Full Photo Sensor PCB (1) Remove the Punch Controller PCB. (See 2-1.) (2) Remove 2 Screws [1] to remove the PCB Film [2].
[2]

[1]

Fig. 3-091 (3) Disconnect the Connector [3] to remove the Waste-full Photosensor PCB [4].

[3]

[4]

Fig. 3-092 2-5. Removing the Waste Full LED PCB (1) Remove 1 Screw [1]. (2) Disconnect the Connector [2] to remove the Waste-full LED PCB [3].
[2]

[1]

[3]

Fig. 3-093

Ver. 5.1

795

MAR 2005

11.3.4.

Maintenance and Inspection

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.3.4.1. Periodically Replaced Parts 11.3.4.1.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit

The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.3.4.1.2. Punch Unit (Option)

The unit does not have components that require periodical replacement.

11.3.4.2. Consumables and Durables

Some components of the Machine may require replacement once or more over the period of machine warranty because of deterioration or damage. Replace them as needed.

11.3.4.2.1. Saddle / Finisher Unit

No. 1 Part Name Stapler Part No. 4G1-4268-000 Qty 1 Expected Life 300,000 operations Remarks A single cartridge is good for about 5,000 operations.

Table. 4-001

11.3.4.3. Scheduled Maintenance

Item Interval Feeding Assembly Roller Feeding Assembly Member Minimum maintenance intervals Paper Path Guide of host machine Transmission Type Sensor (Optional Punch Unit) Table. 4-002 Description Remarks Wiping with water. Cleaning Dry wiping.

Ver. 5.1

796

MAR 2005

11.3.5.

Troubleshooting

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.3.5.1. Standards and Adjustments 11.3.5.1.1. Electrical System (Finisher / Saddle Unit)
1. Adjusting the Folding Position The folding position is adjusted by matching it with the stapling position. IF you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new PCB. Perform the following if the folding position must be adjusted for some reason. Caution: Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper. In such a case, change the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine. 1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :
ON

Fig. 5-001 2) Adjust the folding position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the folding position about 0.16mm. To move the folding position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1. To move the folding position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2. Turn on Points 1, 4 and 8 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press PSW1 and PWS2 at once, and settings can be cleared.
- direction + direction

Fig. 5-002 3) When adjustment of the folding position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB to OFF. 4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the folding position is adjusted properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the folding position again (Adjustable range 5 mm).

Ver. 5.1

797

MAR 2005

2. Adjusting the Middle 2-Point Stapling Position (Adjustment area : 5 mm) The stapling position is adjusted by matching it with the folding position. If you have replaced the Finisher Controller PCB, you must transfer the existing settings to the new PCB. Perform the following if the stapling position must be adjusted for some reason. Caution: Both the folding and stapling positions may deviate for some type of paper. In such a case, change the "middle stapling position" in the User Mode of the Host Machine. 1) Set SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB as follows :
ON

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Fig. 5-003 2) Adjust the stapling position by pressing the PSW1 or PSW2 on the Finisher Controller PCB a required number of times. Pressing the switch once moves the stapling position about 0.14mm. To move the stapling position in the "-" direction, press the PSW1. To move the stapling position in the "+" direction, press the PSW2. Turn on Points 1, 4 of SW1 on the circuit board first and then press the PSW1 and PSW2 at the same time clears the adjustment value.

- direction

+ direction

Fig. 5-004 3) When adjustment of the stapling position is complete, set all bits of the SW1 on the Finisher Controller PCB to OFF. 4) Enter the bind mode of the Host Machine and check whether the stapling position is adjusted properly. If adjusted improperly, adjust the stapling position again.

Ver. 5.1

798

MAR 2005

11.3.5.1.2. Electrical System (Punch Unit; Option)

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

1. Adjusting the Punch Hole Position This mode requires operation in service mode. The range of hole displacement is between 3 and -3 in 1-mm increments. A higher setting will move the hole toward the leading edge of sheet. (See the Service Manual of the Host Machine.) 2. Adjusting the Sensor Output Perform the following when the Punch Controller PCB, Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photosensor PCB/LED PCB), or Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photosensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB) has been replaced. 1) Shift bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON

Fig. 5-005 2) Press SW1002 or SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB. A press will automatically adjust the sensor output. The adjustment is over when all LEDs on the Punch Controller PCB are ON: LED1001, LED1002, LED1003. 3) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF. 3. Registering the Number of Punch Hole Perform the following to register the type of punch unit (number of holes) used to the IC on the Punch Controller PCB for identification by the Finisher. Be sure to register the type whenever you have replaced the Punch Controller PCB. 1) Set bits 1 through 4 on the DIPSW1001 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON

Fig. 5-006 2) Press SW1002 on the Punch Controller PCB to select the appropriate number of punch holes. Each press on SW1002 moves the selection through the following (repeatedly from top to bottom). Number of Punch Hole 2 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-AZ) 2 / 3 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PU) 4 holes (Punch Unit DA-SP41-PB) LED1001 ON ON OFF Table 5-001 3) Press SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB twice. The presses will store the selected number of punch holes on the Punch Controller PCB. A single press on SW1003 will cause the LED indication to flash; another press on SW1003 will cause the indication to remain ON to indicate the end of registration. 4) Shift all bits of DIPSW1001 to OFF.
Ver. 5.1

LED1002 OFF ON ON

LED1003 OFF OFF OFF

799

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

4. After Replacing the EEP-ROM (IC1002) 1) Turn off the Host Machine. 2) Set bits 1 through 4 on the Punch Controller PCB as follows :
ON

Fig. 5-007 3) Press SW1002 and SW1003 on the Punch Controller PCB at the same time. The presses will initialize the EEP-ROM. At the end, all LEDs (LED1001, LED1002, LED1003) will go ON. 4) Adjust the sensor output, and store the number of punch holes.

Ver. 5.1

800

MAR 2005

11.3.5.2. Arrangement of Electric Components 11.3.5.2.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit

1. Sensors, Microswitches, and Clutch

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

MS3 PI14 PI16 PI24 PI4 PI23 PI22 PI17

MS1

PI19 PI20 PI21

PI13

MS2

PI18

PI15 PI5 PI3 PI2 PI1

PI7 PI9 PI6

PI12

CL1

PI8

PI11 PI10

Fig. 5-008

Ver. 5.1

801

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Name Photo-interrupters

Micro Switch

Clutch

Notation PI1 PI2 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8 PI9 PI10 PI11 PI12 PI13 PI14 PI15 PI16 PI17 PI18 PI19 PI20 PI21 PI22 PI23 PI24 MS1 MS2 MS3 CL1

Description Inlet paper detection Paddle home position detection Stack roller home position detection Aligning plate home position (front) detection Aligning plate home position (rear) detection Processing tray paper detection Delivery belt home position detection Tray paper detection Paper surface detection Folding position detection Folding home position detection Folding roller home position detection Bind tray paper detection Stapler / fold motor clock detection Shift upper limit detection Shift lower limit detection Shift motor clock detection Slide home position detection (inside stapler) Stapler drive home position detection (inside stapler) Staple detection (inside stapler) Staple top position detection (in stapler) Front door open detection Upper cover open detection Paper full detection Front door open detection Joint open detection Staple safety detection Bind clutch Table 5-002

Ver. 5.1

802

MAR 2005

2. Motor PCBs

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M1 M2

M8

M3

M7

M5

M4

[1]

M6

Fig. 5-009

Ver. 5.1

803

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Name Motor

Finisher Controller PCB

Notation M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 [1]

Description Paddle Motor Feed Motor Delivery Motor Alignment Motor (front) Alignment Motor (rear) Shift Motor Staple / Fold Motor Slide Motor Finisher Control Table 5-003

Ver. 5.1

804

MAR 2005

11.3.5.2.2. Punch Unit (Option)

1. Sensors

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

PI3P PI1P PI2P

Fig. 5-010 Name Photo-interrupters Notation PI1P PI2P PI3P Description Puncher home position detection Horizontal registration home position detection Punch motor clock detection Table 5-004

Ver. 5.1

805

MAR 2005

2. Motors

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

M1

M2

Fig. 5-011 Name Motor Notation M1P M2P Description Punch Motor Horizontal Registration Motor Table 5-005

Ver. 5.1

806

MAR 2005

3. PCBs

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

Fig. 5-012 Ref. [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Punch Controller PCB Photosensor PCB LED PCB Waste Full Photosensor PCB Waste Full LED PCB Table 5-006 Name

Ver. 5.1

807

MAR 2005

11.3.5.3. LEDs and Check Pins by PCB

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Of the LEDs and check pins used in the Machine, those needed during servicing in the field are discussed. Caution: Do not touch the check pins not found in the list herein. They are exclusively for factory use, and require special tools and a high degree of accuracy.

11.3.5.3.1. Finisher Controller PCB

6 CN8 1 4 CN6 1 2 1 CN18 1 1 CN10 12 1 CN3 10 CN13 1 CN7 CN19 3 LED3 LED2 LED1 CN16 1 PSW3 PSW2 PSW1 CN9 1 SW1 1 9 7 CN11 1 1 CN17 6 6

CN1

CB1

1 1 5 CN14

CN2

CN12

1 5

12

Fig. 5-013 Switch SW1 PSW1 PSW2 PSW3 Description Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc. Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc. Folding position adjustment, middle 2-point stapling adjustment etc. Factory mode Table 5-007

Ver. 5.1

808

CN15

12

CN5

15

CN4

MAR 2005

11.3.5.3.2. Punch Controller PCB

13 J1007 1

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

SW1001

SW1002 SW1003 LED1001 LED1002 LED1003

J1003 1 10 1

J1004 5

Fig. 5-014 Switch SW1001 SW1002 SW1003 Description Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc. Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc. Punch hole count registration / sensor output adjustment, etc. Table 5-008

Ver. 5.1

809

J1002 J1001 51 2 1 1

J1006

J1005 4 91

MAR 2005

11.3.5.4. Troubleshooting 11.3.5.4.1. Troubleshooting (Finisher / Saddle Unit)

1. E7-26, Finisher Unit Back-Up Memory Fault

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB 1)Turn off and then on the Host Machine. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-010 2. E7-21, Feed Motor Fault Stack Feed Roller (upper) Home Position Sensor (PI12) 1) Check the stack feed roller (upper) home position sensor. Is it normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the finisher controller PCB and the feed motor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Feed Roller 3) Try turning the stack feed roller (upper) shaft by hand. Does the stack feed roller (upper) move up/down normally? NO : Correct the mechanical system. Feed Motor (M1), Finisher Controller PCB 4) Try replacing the feed motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-011 3. E7-51, Delivery Motor Fault Delivery Belt Home Position Sensor (PI7) 1) Check the delivery belt home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the delivery motor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Stack Delivery Roller 3) Try turning the stack delivery roller by hand. Is the rotation smooth? NO : Correct the mechanical system. Delivery Motor (M3), Finisher Controller PCB 4) Try replacing the delivery motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-012

Ver. 5.1

810

MAR 2005

4. E7-22, Alignment Plate Motor (Rear) Fault

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (rear; PI5) 1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (rear). Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the rear alignment motor (rear) normal? NO : Correct the wring. Aligning Plate (rear) 3) Is there mechanical trapping in the path of the aligning plate? YES: Correct the mechanical mechanism. Alignment Motor (rear; M5), Finisher Controller PCB 4) Try replacing the alignment motor (rear). Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-013 5. E7-23, Staple / Fold Motor Fault Wiring 1) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Staple/Fold Motor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Stapler Unit 2) Try turning the staple jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping? YES : Correct the mechanical system. Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB 3) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-014 Finisher Controller PCB, Stapler Unit 1) Does the stapler / fold motor operate at the appropriate timing? YES: Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. NO : Check the stapler unit drive mechanism: if faulty, correct it; if normal. Staple / Fold Motor (M7), Finisher Controller PCB 2) Try replacing the staple / fold motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-015 Saddle Unit 3) Try turning the fold jam releasing dial. Is there mechanical trapping? YES: Correct the mechanical mechanism. Table 5-016

Ver. 5.1

811

MAR 2005

6. E7-24, Slide Motor Fault

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Slide Home Position Sensor (PI18) 1) Check the slide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor PCB. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the slide motor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Stapler Unit 3) Is there mechanical trapping in the stapler path? YES : Correct the mechanical system. Slide Motor (M8), Finisher Controller PCB 4) Try replacing the slide motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-018 7. E7-22, Alignment Motor (front) Fault Aligning Plate Home Position Sensor (front; PI4) 1) Check the aligning plate home position sensor (front). Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the front aligning plate motor (front) normal? NO : Correct the wring. Aligning Plate (front) 3) Is there mechanical trapping in the aligning plate path? YES : Correct the mechanical system. Alignment Motor (front; M4), Finisher Controller PCB 4) Try replacing the Alignment motor (front). Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-019 8. E7-27, Shift Motor Fault Paper Surface Sensor (PI9) 1) Check the paper surface sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Tray Up / Down Mechanism 2) Check the tray up/down mechanism. Is the mechanism normal? NO : Correct the mechanism. Finisher Controller PCB 3) Is 24 VDC supplied from the Finisher Controller PCB to the shift motor as soon as the tray is driven? NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB.

Ver. 5.1

812

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Shift Motor (M6), Wiring 4) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the shift motor normal? YES: Replace the shift motor. NO : Correct the wring. Table 5-020 9. E7-52, Paddle Motor Fault (For DA-FS355 only) Paddle Home Position Sensor (PI2) 1) Check the paddle home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Swing Guide Home Position Sensor (PI3) 2) Check the swing guide home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the paddle motor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Paddle, Swing Guide Assembly 4) Try turning the paddle motor clockwise and counter-clockwise by hands. Is there mechanical tapping in the rotation of the paddle or the up/down movement of the swing guide? YES: Correct the mechanical mechanism. Paddle Motor (M2), Finisher Controller PCB 5) Try replacing the paddle motor. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-024

Ver. 5.1

813

MAR 2005

11.3.5.4.2. Troubleshooting (Punch Unit, Option)

1. E7-54, Communication Faulty

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Controller PCB, Punch Controller PCB 1) Turn off and then on the host machine. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB normal? NO : Correct the wring. Power Supply 3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN14-3 (-) on the Finisher Controller PCB. Is it 24VDC? YES: Replace the punch controller PCB. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-025 2. E7-55, Punch Unit Power Supply Fault Finisher Controller PCB, Host Machine DC Controller PCB 1) Turn off and then off the host machine. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the punch controller PCB normal? NO : Correct the wring. Power Supply 3) Measure the voltage between CN14-5 (+) and CN4-3 (-) on the Finisher Controller PCB. Is it 24 VDC? YES: Replace the punch controller PCB. NO :Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-027

Ver. 5.1

814

MAR 2005

3. E7-28, Punch Motor Fault

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Motor Home Position Sensor (PI1P) 1) Check the punch home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Punch Motor Clock Sensor (PI3P) 2) Check the punch motor clock sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 3) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the sensor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Punch Mechanism, Punch Motor (M1P) 4) Is there a fault in the punch mechanism? YES: Correct the punch mechanism. NO : Replace the punch motor. Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB 5) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-028 4. E7-57, Punch Sensor (Horizontal Registration) Fault Horizontal Registration Sensor (Photo Sensor PCB / LED PCB) 1) Check the horizontal registration sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the horizontal registration sensor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB 3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem correct? YES: End. NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-029

Ver. 5.1

815

MAR 2005

5. E7-58, Punch Sensor (Waste Full) Fault

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Waste Full Sensor (Waste Full Photo Sensor PCB / Waste Full LED PCB) 1) Check the waste full sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the punch controller PCB and the waste full sensor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB 3) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-030 6. E7-29, Horizontal Registration Motor Fault Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor (PI2P) 1) Check the horizontal registration home position sensor. Is the sensor normal? NO : Replace the sensor. Wiring 2) Is the wiring between the Finisher Controller PCB and the horizontal registration home position sensor normal? NO : Correct the wring. Horizontal Registration Mechanism, Horizontal Registration Motor (M2P) 3) Is there a fault in the horizontal registration mechanism? YES: Correct the horizontal registration mechanism. NO : Replace the horizontal registration motor. Punch Controller PCB, Finisher Controller PCB 4) Try replacing the punch controller PCB. Is the problem corrected? YES: End. NO : Replace the Finisher Controller PCB. Table 5-031

Ver. 5.1

816

MAR 2005

11.3.5.5. Self Diagnosis 11.3.5.5.1. Alarm

1. Finisher / Saddle Unit Timing of Detection Monitored at all times

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Error

Condition

Operation

Resetting Set the stapler.

The staple / fold motor (M7) and the slide motor (M8) will stop. Stapler Absent The staple Monitored at all Normal operation cartridge has run times will continue; out of staples. however, operation is subject to instructions from the host machine. Mixed Sheets Sheets of different When a sheet of a The sheet will be sizes are deposited different size is aligned based on in the placed. maximum size compartment. width and delivered as a stack. Overstacking The number of When an extra The sheets will be for Stapling sheets in the sheet is placed. delivered with compartment has stapling. exceeded the limit imposed on stapling. Stack Tray The number of When an extra Normal operation Overstacking sheets deposited sheet is placed. will continue. on the delivery tray has exceeded the limit imposed on the tray. (sheets, sets) Saddle Remove the stack When an extra Normal operation Overstacking from the bind tray. sheet is placed. will continue. More than 10 stacks are deposited on the folded stack tray. Table 5-034

Stapler Absent The stapler is not set.

Replace the staple cartridge; or, set it correctly.

Remove the sheets from the delivery tray.

Remove the stack from the bind tray.

Ver. 5.1

817

MAR 2005

2. Punch Unit (Option) Timing of Detection During punching.

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Error Punch Waste Paper Full

Condition

Operation Normal operation will continue.

Resetting Remove the waste paper from the waste case. Remove the waste paper from the water case.

Punch Waste Paper Excess (Overflow)

The amount of waste paper in the waste case has reached the limit. The amount of During punching. waste paper in the waste case has exceeded the limit.

Punching will be disabled.

Table 5-035

Ver. 5.1

818

MAR 2005

11.3.6.

Appendix

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

11.3.6.1. Signals and Abbreviations

The following presents the abbreviations of signals used in this manual and in drawings, and the meaning of each signal. Reference: Signals enclosed by brackets [ ] are electrical signals. Finisher / Saddle-Stitch Unit ADJ_TRAY_S Jog Tray Paper Detect Signal B_CLU Bind Clutch Drive Signal BDL_ROL_HP Swing Guide HP Detect Signal BIND_CLK Staple/Fold Motor Clock Detect Signal BIND_EMPS Bind Tray Paper Detect Signal BIND_HP Folding HP Detect Signal BIND_L Fold Position LED ON Signal BINDMTR Staple/Fold Motor Drive Signal BIND_P Fold Position Paper Detect Signal BIND_ROL_HP Bundle Feed Roller HP Detect Signal EJCT_BLT_HP Eject Belt HP Detect Signal EJCTMTR Eject Motor Drive Signal ENT_S Inlet Paper Detect Signal FDOOR_S Front Door Open Detect Signal FEEDMTR Feed Motor Drive Signal FJOG_HP Front Jog Plate HP Detect Signal FJOGMTR Front Jog Motor Drive Signal FRONT_SW Front Door Switch Signal HOOK_S Hook Empty Detect Signal JOINT_SW Joint Switch Signal LVL_S Paper Surface Detect Signal PAPER_F Paper Full Detect Signal PDL_HP Paddle HP Detect Signal PDLMTR Paddle Motor Drive Signal RJOG_HP Rear Jog Plate HP Detect Signal RJOGMTR Rear Jog Motor Drive Signal SELF_P Hook Top Position Detect Signal SIFT_CLK Sift Motor Clock Detect Signal SIFT_DNLMT Sift Down Limit Detect Signal SIFTMTR Sift Motor Drive Signal SIFT_UPLMT Sift Upper Limit Detect Signal SLID_HP Slide HP Detect Signal SLIDMTR Slide Motor Drive Signal STPL_CNCT Stapler Connect Detect Signal STPL_HP Staple HP Detect Signal STPLSAFE_SW Staple Safety Switch Signal TOPCOV_S Top Cover Open Detect Signal TRY_EMPS Tray Paper Detect Signal

Ver. 5.1

819

MAR 2005

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Punch Unit (Option) CLOCK DUSTLED DUSTPTR PAEND PUNCH SLIDE SREG1 SREG2 SREG3 REG4 LEDON1 LEDON2 LEDON3 LEDON4 LEDON5

Punch Motor Clock Detect Signal Dust LED ON Signal Dust Full Detect Signal Paper End Detect Signal Punch HP Detect Signal Side Registration HP Detect Signal Side Registration Detect Signal 1 Side Registration Detect Signal 2 Side Registration Detect Signal 3 Side Registration Detect Signal 4 LED1 ON Signal LED2 ON Signal LED3 ON Signal LED4 ON Signal LED5 ON Signal

Ver. 5.1

820

MAR 2005

Ver. 5.1
9
1 2
DC+24V N.C. PGND MOT Feed Motor CN1-1 CN1-2 CN1-3

11.3.7.

12

11

10

CN20-1 CN20-2 CN20-3 CN20-4

FGND PGND DC+24VP N.C.

CN20-1 CN20-2 CN20-3 CN20-4

9 2 1

1 2 3 4 5 6
CN56-1 CN56-2 CN56-3 CN56-4 CN56-5 CN56-6 +12V +12V FEEDMTR_A FEEDMTR_*A FEEDMTR_B FEEDMTR_*B CN56-6 CN56-5 CN56-4 CN56-3 CN56-2 CN56-1

1 2 3 4 5 6 M1

4 3 5 6 8 3 7
MOT

CN23-3 CN23-2 CN23-1

DC+5V SGND FJOG_HP

1 2 3

To Host Machine

CN20A-1 CN20A-2 CN20A-3 CN20A-4 CN20A-5 CN20A-6 CN20A-7

SGND DC+24VP RXD TXD SGND N.C. SGND

CN20A-1 CN20A-2 CN20A-3 CN20A-4 CN20A-5 CN20A-6 CN20A-7

F
Paddle Motor

4 5 6 7 8 7 8 9 10 11 12
CN57-1 CN57-2 CN57-3 CN57-4 CN57-5 CN57-6 +24V +24V PDLMTR_A PDLMTR_*A PDLMTR_B PDLMTR_*B CN57-6 CN57-5 CN57-4 CN57-3 CN57-2 CN57-1

DC+24VL N.C. SGND SGND TXD SGND RXD

CN2-1 CN2-2 CN2-3 CN2-4 CN2-5 CN2-6 CN2-7

CN10-1 CN10-2 CN10-3 CN10-4 CN10-5 CN10-6 CN10-7 CN10-8 CN10-9 CN10-10 CN10-11 CN10-12

+12V +12V FEEDMTR_A FEEDMTR_*A FEEDMTR_B FEEDMTR_*B +24V +24V PDLMTR_A PDLMTR_*A PDLMTR_B PDLMTR_*B

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6

M2

PI4
CN20B-1 CN20B-2 CN20B-3 CN20B-4 CN20B-5 CN20B-6 CN20B-7 CN20B-8 N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. CN13-1 CN13-2 CN13-3 CN13-4 CN13-5 CN13-6 +24V +24V EJCTMTR_A EJCTMTR_*A EJCTMTR_B EJCTMTR_*B

PI23

Schematic Diagram

Aligning Plate Upper Cover Home Position Sensor Sensor (Front)

CN24-3 CN24-2 CN24-1

DC+5V SGND TOPCOV_S

4 5 6

PI22
CN28-9 CN28-8 CN28-7 CN28-6 CN28-5 CN28-4 CN28-3 CN28-2 CN28-1

Front Door Sensor

CN25-3 CN25-2 CN25-1

DC+5V SGND FDOOR_S

7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6
CN59-1 CN59-2 CN59-3 CN59-4 CN59-5 CN59-6 +24V +24V EJCTMTR_A EJCTMTR_*A EJCTMTR_B EJCTMTR_*B CN59-6 CN59-5 CN59-4 CN59-3 CN59-2 CN59-1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6

MOT

Delivery Motor

M3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
DC+5V SGND FJOG_HP DC+5V SGND TOPCOV_S DC+5V SGND FDOOR_S CN4-1 CN4-2 CN4-3 CN4-4 CN4-5 CN4-6 CN4-7 CN4-8 CN4-9

E
1 2 3 4 5
CN62-5 CN62-4 CN62-3 CN62-2 CN62-1 +24V FJOGMTR_A FJOGMTR_*A FJOGMTR_B FJOGMTR_*B CN63-1 CN63-2 CN63-3 CN63-4 CN63-5

PI6

CN30-3 CN30-2 CN30-1

DC+5V SGND ADJ_TRAY_S

1 2 3

CN31-3 CN31-2 CN31-1

DC+5V SGND EJCT_BLT_HP

4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

CN29-1 CN29-2 CN29-3 CN29-4 CN29-5 CN29-6 CN29-7 CN29-8 CN29-9

DC+5V SGND ADJ_TRAY_S DC+5V SGND EJCT_BLT_HP DC+5V SGND TRY_EMPS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5

MOT

Alignment Motor (Front)

M4

PI7
CN33-3 CN33-2 CN33-1

PI8

Processing Delivery Belt Tray Paper Tray Home Position Sensor Sensor Sensor

CN32-3 CN32-2 CN32-1

DC+5V SGND TRY_EMPS

7 8 9

CN3-1 CN3-2 CN3-3 CN3-4 CN3-5 CN3-6 CN3-7 CN3-8 CN3-9 CN3-10

+24V FJOGMTR_A FJOGMTR_*A FJOGMTR_B FJOGMTR_*B +24V RJOGMTR_A RJOGMTR_*A RJOGMTR_B RJOGMTR_*B

6 7 8 9 10

CN64-5 CN64-4 CN64-3 CN64-2 CN64-1

+24V RJOGMTR_A RJOGMTR_*A RJOGMTR_B RJOGMTR_*B

CN65-1 CN65-2 CN65-3 CN65-4 CN65-5

1 2 3 4 5

MOT

Alignment Motor (Rear)

M5

PI9
CN8-1 CN8-2 CN8-3 CN8-4 CN8-5 CN8-6 STPLSAFE_SW FRONT_SW FRONT_SW JOINT_SW JOINT_SW DC+24VP

CN35-3 CN35-2 CN35-1

DC+5V SGND LVL_S

1 2 3 10 11 12

1 2 3

CN34-1 CN34-2 CN34-3

DC+5V SGND LVL_S

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
DC+5V SGND ADJ_TRAY_S DC+5V SGND EJCT_BLT_HP DC+5V SGND TRY_EMPS DC+5V SGND LVL_S DC+5V SGND RJOG_HP CN5-1 CN5-2 CN5-3 CN5-4 CN5-5 CN5-6 CN5-7 CN5-8 CN5-9 CN5-10 CN5-11 CN5-12 CN5-13 CN5-14 CN5-15

2 1

CN66-2 CN66-1

STPLSAFE_SH NO FDOOR_SH COM

Stapler Safety Switch

MS3

PI5

Paper Surface Aligning Plate Sensor Home Position Sensor (Rear)

CN36-3 CN36-2 CN36-1

DC+5V SGND RJOG_HP

13 14 15

Finisher Controller PCB

11.3.7.1. Finisher / Saddle Unit General Circuit Diagram

Front Door Switch

821
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CN6-1 CN6-2 CN6-3 CN6-4 SIFTMTR_1 SIFTMTR_0 BINDMTR_1 BINDMTR_0

CN39-3 CN39-2 CN39-1

DC+5V BIND_P BIND_L

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6

4 3

CN68-2 CN68-1

FDOOR_SH JOINT_SH

NO COM

MS1

PI10

Folding Position Sensor

6 5

CN69-2 CN69-1

JOINT_SH DC+24VP

NO COM

Joint Switch

MS2

PI11

CN40-3 CN40-2 CN40-1

DC+5V SGND BIND_HP

4 5 6

Folding Stack Feed Home Position Roller (Upper) Sensor Home Position Sensor

CN41-3 CN41-2 CN41-1

DC+5V 8 SGND 9 BIND_ROL_HP

7 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

CN38-1 CN38-2 CN38-3 CN38-4 CN38-5 CN38-6 CN38-7 CN38-8 CN38-9

DC+5V CN37-9 BIND_P CN37-8 BIND_L CN37-7 DC+5V CN37-6 SGND CN37-5 BIND_HP CN37-4 DC+5V CN37-3 SGND CN37-2 BIND_ROL_HP CN37-1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DC+5V CN16-1 BIND_P CN16-2 BIND_L CN16-3 DC+5V CN16-4 SGND CN16-5 BIND_HP CN16-6 DC+5V CN16-7 SGND CN16-8 BIND_ROL_HP CN16-9 DC+5V CN16-10 SGND CN16-11 ENT_S CN16-12

1 2

CN70-2 CN70-1

SIFTMTR_1 SIFTMTR_0

CN70-2 CN70-1

1 2

1 2

CN70-2 CN70-1

SIFTMTR_1 SIFTMTR_0

CN70-2 CN70-1

MOT

Shift Motor

M6

PI12
CN42-3 CN42-2 CN42-1 CN18-1 CN18-2

C
3 4
CN71-2 CN71-1 BINDMTR_1 BINDMTR_0 CN71-2 CN71-1

1 2

MOT

Staple/Fold Motor

M7

PI1

CN44-3 CN44-2 CN44-1

DC+5V SGND ENT_S

1 2 3 10 11 12
+24V B_CLU

1 2 3

Inlet Sensor

CN43-1 CN43-2 CN43-3

DC+5V SGND ELT_S

1 2

1 2

CN72-2 CN72-1

+24V B_CLU

CN72-1 CN72-2

1 2

CLU

Slide Motor

CL1

PI13

Bind Tray Sensor

CN47-3 CN47-2 CN47-1

DC+5V SGND BIND_EMPS

1 2 3

Shift Motor Clock Sensor

CN48-3 CN48-2 CN48-1

DC+5V SGND SIFT_CLK

4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
DC+5V SGND BIND_EMPS DC+5V SGND SIFT_CLK DC+5V SGND SIFT_DNLMT DC+5V SGND SIFT_UPLMT CN11-1 CN11-2 CN11-3 CN11-4 CN11-5 CN11-6 CN11-7 CN15-1 CN15-2 CN15-3 CN15-4 CN15-5 CN15-6 CN15-7 CN15-8 CN15-9 CN15-10 CN15-11 CN15-12

Stapler Unit
P118 P119 P120 8 9 10 11 12 13 P121

PI17

STPL_CNCT DC+5V SLID_HP STPL_HP HOOK_S SELF_P SGND

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

CN49-3 CN49-2 CN49-1

DC+5V SGND SIFT_DNLMT

7 8 9

7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Shift Upper Limit Sensor

CN50-3 CN50-2 CN50-1

DC+5V SGND SIFT_UPLMT

10 11 12

STPL_HP Stapler Home Position Sensor SLIP HP Stapler Slide Home Position Sensor HOOK S Hook Sensor SLIDMTR Slide Motor (M8)

PI16

Shift Limit Sensor

PI15

Paddle Home Position Sensor

CN51-3 CN51-2 CN51-1

DC+5V SGND PDL_HP

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3

DC+5V SGND PDL_HP SGND BIND_CLK DC+5V DC+5V SGND BDL_ROL_HP

CN9-1 CN9-2 CN9-3 CN9-4 CN9-5 CN9-6 CN9-7 CN9-8 CN9-9

CN7-1 CN7-2 CN7-3 CN7-4 CN7-5 CN7-6 CN7-7

+24V +24V SLIDMTR_A SLIDMTR_*A SLIDMTR_B SLIDMTR_*B N.C.

8 9 10 11 12 13

14

CN72A-1 CN72A-2 CN72A-3 CN72A-4 CN72A-5 CN72A-6 CN72A-7 CN72A-8 CN72B-7 CN72B-6 CN72B-5 CN72B-4 CN72B-3 CN72B-2 CN72B-1 CN72C-1

SGND SELF_P HOOK_S STPL_HP SLID_HP DC+5V STPL_CNCT N.C. +24V +24V SLIDMTR_A SLIDMTR_*A SLIDMTR_B SLIDMTR_*B N.C. FG

CN72-1 CN72-2 CN72-3 CN72-4 CN72-5 CN72-6 CN72-7 N.C. CN72-8 CN72-9 CN72-10 CN72-11 CN72-12 CN72-13 CN72-14 CN72-15

M8

PI2

CN52-3 CN52-2 CN52-1

DC+5V BIND_CLK DC+5V

4 5 6

DC+5V SGND PAPER_F

CN19-1 CN19-2 CN19-3

PI14

CN12-1 CN12-2 CN12-3 CN12-4 CN12-5

PNCH_TXD SGND PNCH_RXD PNCH_CNCT PNCH_TM_S

1 2 3 4 5

To Punch Unit (Option)

7 8 9 9 10 11
CN14-1 CN14-2 CN14-3 CN14-4 CN14-5 PNCH_+5V PNCH_SGND PNCH_PGND N.C. PNCH_+24V

Staple/Fold Swing Guide Clock Home Position Sensor Sensor

CN55-3 CN55-2 CN55-1

DC+5V SGND BDL_ROL_HP

1 2 3

1 2 3

CN54-1 CN54-2 CN54-3

DC+5V CN53-3 SGND CN53-2 BDL_ROL_HP CN53-1

PI3

Full Stack Sensor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

CN73-3 CN73-2 CN73-1

DC+5V SGND PAPER_F

1 2 3

SGND TXD2 RXD2 DSR DTR RESET

CN17-1 CN17-2 CN17-3 CN17-4 CN17-5 CN17-6

12

PI24

MAR 2005

J2011-1 J2011-2 J2011-3 J2011-4 J2011-5 J2011-6 J2011-7 J2010-1 J2010-2 J2010-3 J2010-4 J2010-5 J2010-6

J1007 J1007

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

5 4 3 2 1 J1003 J2003 J1004 J2004

5 4 3 2 1

1 2

1 2

J2002 1 2

5 4 3 2 1

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10

5 4 3 2 1

Ver. 5.1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 F
J1007-13 J1007-12 J1007-11 J1007-10 J1007-9 J1007-8 J1007-7 J2011 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J2011 1 2 Photo-sensor 3 PCB 4 5 6 7 J1007-6 J1007-5 J1007-4 J1007-3 J1007-2 J1007-1 LED PCB J2010 1 2 3 4 5 6 J2010 1 2 3 4 5 6

12

11

10

J1005 4 3 2 1

J1005 4 3 2 1

J2006 J2006 Waste Bottle Full Photo-sensor 1 1 PCB 2 2

J2005 J2005 Waste Bottle Full LED PCB 1 1 2 2

D
J2009 1 2 3 1 2 3 PI3P Punch Motor Clock Sensor

11.3.7.2. Punch Unit General Circuit Diagram

822
Punch Controller PCB
J1001 5 4 3 2 1 J1002 J1001 5 4 3 2 1 J1002

J1006 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J1006 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

J2008 1 2 3

1 2 3

PI1P Punch Home Position Sensor

CN12 CN12 10 10 9 9 8 8 7 7 6 6 5 5 4 4 3 3 2 2 1 1

J2007 1 2 3

1 2 3

PI2P Horizontal Registration Home Position Sensor

DP-3510/3520/3530/4510/4520/4530/6010/6020/6030

Finisher Unit

CN14 CN14

J2001 1 2 3 4

M2P Horizontal Registration Motor

M1P Punch Motor

MAR 2005

88

Panasonic

Software

Operating Instructions
Network Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3

DZSD001829-9

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

Table of Contents
1.
1.1 1.2

General

Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2.
2.1 2.2 2.3

Installation

Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 4 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool ........................................................................................ 4 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool...................................................................................... 5

3.

Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 6 3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) 6 3.1.2 For other models 6 3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 6

4.

Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1st Edition : 2nd Edition : 3rd Edition : 4th Edition : 5th Edition : 6th Edition : 7th Edition : 8th Edition : 9th Edition :

2002 March 20 2002 August 1 2002 December 5 2003 April 10 2003 April 22 2003 December 18 2004 April 7 2004 August 3 2004 August 20

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright 1999 - 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

Page 2

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

1. General
The Network Firmware Update Tool allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine connected via LAN (TCP/IP) to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the LAN.

1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS Windows 98 / Me Windows NT 4.0 Windows 2000 Windows XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below: DP-180 / 190 DP-2310 / 3010 DP-2330 / 3030 DP-1520 / 1820 DP-3510 / 4510 / 6010 DP-3520 / 4520 / 6020 DP-3530 / 4530 / 6030 DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) UF-7100 / 8000 / 8100 UF-9000
Note: 1. Depending on the country, some Panasonic models may not be available. 2. The DX-800 works only when it's firmware is Version 1.31 or higher. .

Page 3

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator). Run \xFirmware\Tools\NwFirmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the setup disk or folder.

Enter the installation password. Please ask your Sales Company to obtain the password. Follow the instruction on your screen to install the program.

The completion message is displayed when install is completed. Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.2 Setting up the Network Firmware Update Tool

1. 2.

Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Network Firmware Update then click Network Firmware Update Configuration. The Configuration dialog box appears. General Tab Please change the settings if necessary.

File Selection Tab Auto-Select Update Mode When you select this mode, the tool acquires the type of firmware and version from the device(s) of the specified address, and updates the device to the latest version from the Local Firmware Folder. However, this mode cannot change the type of firmware, so you must use the manual mode when changing from the standard firmware to the option firmware.

3.

Click [OK] to finish the setup.

Page 4

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

2.3 Uninstalling the Network Firmware Update Tool
The Network Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program. Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator). Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Network Firmware Update Tool. Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.

Page 5

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
3.1.1 For DX-600 / DX-800 (v1.31 or higher) If the device password is changed (Remote Password) from the default value (blank = 0000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device. For other models If the device password is changed (Key Operator Password) from the default value (0000 or 000), it is not possible to program the firmware code. In this case, enter the password in advance to the Default Password in the Configuration dialog box or enter the password at each communication. As for three-digit Key Operator Password device, only 000 of the default value is judged 0000 in the value. Make sure the device is not in an operating condition (copying or printing etc...). Note: It is recommended to update the firmware at night due to lower activity of the device.

1.

2.
3.1.2

1.

2.

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder. C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder. (ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)

Page 6

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

4. Using the Network Firmware Update Tool

1.
Please close the all applications that are currently running. Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.

2.

From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Network Firmware Update shortcut icon to start the Network Firmware Update Tool. Click [Next>].

Note: 1) Make sure the Key Operator Password on the remote unit and FTP Password on this application are set correctly. 2) Make sure the remote unit is not in an operating condition (Copying or Printing etc...). 3) Do not run other applications on this PC while it is transferring the firmware data to the remote unit, or a communication error may occur. 4) Do not operate or reset the power of the device while it is updating the firmware code, or the firmware update isnt done properly and the device will not boot up again. 5) If the Network Firmware Update fails and the unit does not reboot automatically for more than 20 minutes, you may need to recover the firmware update again via a Parallel/USB port using the Local Firmware Update Tool or with the FROM card.

3.

Click [Device Address List].

Page 7

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN) 4.

Enter the destination device(s) by using Manual Input or Device Address List. Click [OK].

5.

Confirm the destination device(s). Click [Next>].

Page 8

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

Specify the Firmware Code File using the following methods. Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 6a1 You can select the Firmware Code Archive File directly here. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary. Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 6b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary. Select Independent File Folders --> Step 6c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select independent file folders here. Note: Files are chosen automatically in the automatic mode, so the screen of step 6 isnt indicated.

6a1

Select an Archive File (Complete Set) Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

Page 9

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6a2 Select the Firmware Archive file and click [Open]. ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030228.exe

6a3

Extracting...

6a4

Select the Firmware Type window appears. Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

6a5

Firmware Code File selection is completed. Click [Next>].

Page 10

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

6b2

Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK]. ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030228

6b3

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

Page 11

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed. Click [Next>].

6c1

Select Independent File Folders Select "Select Independent File Folders" and click [Browse...] button.

6c2

Select the Firmware Code File Folder and click [OK]. ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

Page 12

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN)

6c3 Select the other Firmware Code File Folder and click [OK].

6c4

Firmware Code File selection is completed. Click [Next>].

7.

The version check for the specified devices starts. Click [Next>].

Page 13

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN) 8.

Verify that the information you want to update is correct. Then click [Next>]. Note: The firmware of PNL, SC and SPC are transmitted separately and each time the unit erases, writes and reboots in the normal mode. If you check "Send at once", all firmware will be sent at once and then erase, write and reboot. This "Send at once", function cannot be used if the firmware type is PCL or PS and the unit SC version is V1.xxxx (DP-3510/4510/6010).

9.

Confirm the destination device(s) again. Set timer communication if necessary. Then click [Next>].

10. Data is transferred to the Spooler and the

update is started. The Spooler screen appears automatically showing the progress of the data transfer. The spooler will take time to open depending on the number of addresses to update.

Page 14

Network Firmware Update Tool (LAN) 11. When the transfers are completed, all jobs in
Click [Finish] to close the tool. After each firmware code is successfully programmed to the Firmware Flash Memory in the unit, the unit reboots and restarts again automatically. the spooler disappear and the communication log is displayed.

Page 15

memo

Panasonic
Software

Operating Instructions
Local Firmware Update Tool
(Service Tool)
Version 3

DZSD000965-14

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

Table of Contents
1.
1.1 1.2

General

Supporting OS.......................................................................................................................................... 3 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models............................................................................................... 3

2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4

Installation

Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine ................................................................ 4 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool............................................................................................... 4 Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only) ................................................. 5 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool .......................................................................................... 6

3.
3.1 3.2

Preparing the Firmware Update

Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code..................................................................................... 7 Preparing the Firmware Code .................................................................................................................. 7

4.

Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

1st Edition : 2nd Edition : 3rd Edition : 4th Edition : 5th Edition : 6th Edition : 7th Edition : 8th Edition : 9th Edition : 10th Edition : 11th Edition : 12th Edition : 13th Edition : 14th Edition :

1999 February 10 1999 September 30 2000 September 8 2000 November 28 2001 June 20 2001 September 7 2003 April 10 2003 April 22 2003 December 18 2004 January 19 2004 February 10 2004 April 20 2004 August 3 2004 August 20

Windows and Windows NT are registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Copyright 1999 - 2004 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. The contents of this Operating Instructions are subject to change without notice.

Page 2

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

1. General
The Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB) allows a Panasonic Fax/Copy machine to emulate a Flash Memory Card Writer and create a Master Firmware Card, or to program the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit directly. Using a PC, the firmware code is transferred to the Flash Memory Card or the Firmware Code Memory of the Unit through the Parallel/USB Port on the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine. The installation and operation are very similar to the Printer Interface.

1.1 Supporting OS
This application software operation has been confirmed under the following OS Windows 98 / Me Windows NT 4.0 (Parallel Port only) Windows 2000 / XP

1.2 Supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier Models

A list of the compatible Panasonic Fax/Copy machines are shown below: Parallel Port Models Programming a Flash Memory Card DP-130/135/150 DP-1510/1810/2010 DP-2000/2500/3000 DP-3510/4510/6010, DP-3520/4520/6020, DP-3530/4530/6030 UF-585/595/590/790/885/895/890/990, DX-2000 Direct Firmware Update DP-1510/1810/2010 DP-3510/4510/6010, DP-3520/4520/6020, DP-3530/4530/6030 UF-E1 UF-490/525/UF-590/790 USB Port Models Programming a Flash Memory Card DP-180/190, UF-9000 DP-1520/1820 DP-2310/3010, DP-2330/3030 Direct Firmware Update DP-180/190, UF-9000 DP-1520/1820 DP-2310 / 3010, DP-2330/3030 UF-7100/8000/8100
Note: 1. Depending on the destination, some Panasonic models may not be available. 2. Some UF-E1 models with the earlier versions of firmware will not support Parallel Firmware Update. Please confirm whether your machines firmware version supports Parallel Firmware Update with your service provider.

Page 3

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

2. Installation
2.1 Installing the Hardware on the Panasonic Fax/Copy Machine

1 2

Depending on the model, a Parallel Port or USB Port is installed.

Please install the Parallel Port/USB Port Assembly into one of the supporting Panasonic Fax/Copier models by following the appropriate option installation instructions for that model. Prepare the Parallel cable or USB cable for connecting the Panasonic Fax/Copy machine and your PC.

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.
2.2 Installing the Local Firmware Update Tool

Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT4.0 / 2000 / XP, log onto the computer/network with an account that can add or change printer configurations (i.e. Administrator).

Important: For the USB port models, do not connect the USB cable yet.

2 3

Run \xFirmware\Tools\Firmup\Setup\Setup.exe from the install disk. Installation Destination Folder Click [Next] button.

Program Folder Click [Next] button.

Page 4

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Copying...

The installation is completed. Check Yes, I want to and click [Finish] to restart your PC.

2.3

Installing USB Firmware Update Driver (For the USB Port Model Only)

After installation of the Local Firmware Update Tool, if you need to install the USB Firmware Update Driver, please set the unit to "Update from USB/* IN PROGRESS *" in the Service Mode first, and then connect the USB Cable. The required Driver will then be installed automatically. Note: For instructions of how to get into the Service Mode, refer to your machine's Service Manual.

Searching...

Installing driver...

3
Note:

When the install screen disappears, the installation of the Firmware Update (USB) Driver is completed.

1. The installation screens will vary, and are dependant on the OS. 2. For Windows 2000 or XP, through the "Digital Signature Not Found" or "Software Installation" window will be displayed during the installation and indicate "Unknown software package" or "not passed Windows Logo testing", please click [YES] or [Continue Anyway] button to continue the installation 3. If you are asked for the Inf file location, please specify the following folder. C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\UsbDrv1 4. After the USB Firmware Update Driver is installed, and you are not updating the machine's firmware at this time, turn the Power Switch OFF and ON again to return your machine to the Standby mode.

Page 5

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

2.4 Uninstalling the Local Firmware Update Tool
The Local Firmware Update Tool can be uninstalled by using its uninstall program. Note: Do not delete the installed program folder from Windows Explorer directly, due to possible registry setting problems.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Start Microsoft Windows. For Windows NT 4.0 / 2000 / XP, logon to the computer/network with an account that can add or change configurations (i.e. Administrator). Click the Start button on the Taskbar, point to Programs, Panasonic, Panasonic Firmware Update then click Uninstall Local Firmware Update Tool. Follow the instructions on your screen to uninstall (Remove) the program.

The completion message is displayed when uninstall is completed.

Note: The Firmware Update Driver is not deleted by the Uninstaller. Please delete it from the Control Panel\Printers folder by manually. When you delete USB Firmware Update Driver, please delete it after you connect the PC to the unit with the USB cable and driver enabled, or it cannot be deleted properly.

Page 6

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

3. Preparing the Firmware Update

3.1 Preparing the Unit to Accept the Firmware Code
Please refer to the Service Manual to set the unit to Firmware Update Mode (Service Mode).

3.2 Preparing the Firmware Code

Copy the firmware Code file(s) to the following folder. C:\Panasonic\Panasonic-FUP\Data Note: The Archive File extracts the Firmware Code Files automatically into the designated folder. (ex. DP-2310_PU_030327.exe)

Page 7

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

4. Using the Local Firmware Update Tool

Set the machine to the Firmware Update Mode and then connect the unit and PC with a Parallel cable or USB cable. Note: For the USB Port Models, the Plug & Play of the Printer mode is activated when the USB cable is connected without the unit set in the USB Firmware Update Mode. If this happens, please click the [Cancel] button for the Plug and Play Driver installation.

Please close the all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End. Note: About Windows 2000/XP, using Network Firmware Update Tool, the authority more than a Power User is required.

Status Monitor

Port Controller

From the Windows Desktop, double-click on the Local Firmware Update Tool shortcut icon to start the Panasonic Firmware Programming Wizard. Click [Next>]. Note: Please close all applications that are currently running. Also ensure that the Status Monitor and/or Port Controller are closed. If they are running, right click on the icons in the system tray and select Exit/End.

Select the Firmware Update Driver USB or Parallel. Click [Next>]. Note: The Firmware Update Driver (USB) is only displayed if you installed it with the unit Plug and Play.

Page 8

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Specify the Firmware Code File by the following methods. Select an Archive File (Complete Set) --> Step 5a1 You can select the Firmware Code Archive File directly here. The selected archive file will be extracted into the local \Data folder automatically and it is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary. Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) --> Step 5b1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select the Parent File Folder directly here. It is chosen as a set when the update of multiple firmware code files are necessary. Select an Independent File --> Step 5c1 If the archive file is already extracted into the local \Data folder, you can select an independent file here. When updating multiple firmware files, you must repeat the file selection operation.

5a1

Select an Archive File (Complete Set) Select "Select an Archive File (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5a2

Select the Firmware Archive file and click [Open]. ex. DP-2310_3010_PU_030227.exe

5a3

Extracting...

Page 9

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

5a4 Select the Firmware Type window appears. Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

5a5

Firmware Code File selection is completed. Click [Next>].

Page 10

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

5b1 Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set) Select "Select a Parent File Folder (Complete Set)" and click [Browse...] button.

5b2

Select the Parent File Folder and Click [OK]. ex. \DP-2310_3010_PU_030327

5b3

Select the Firmware Type and click [OK].

Page 11

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

5b4 Firmware Code File selection is completed. Click [Next>].

Page 12

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

5c1 Select an Independent File Select "Select an Independent File" and click [Browse...] button.

5c2

Select the Firmware Code File and click [Open]. ex. SFDL2PNLAAV100000_PU.BIN

5c3

Firmware Code File selection is completed. Click [Next>].

Page 13

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel /USB Port)

The selected Firmware Code File(s) are indicated. Uncheck the box if you do not need to transfer a file.

On the unit side: Set the unit to the Firmware Update Mode. Click [Next>].

The Firmware Code File starts transferring. When there is more than one file to be updated, the operation will be the following; For USB connected unit: they are transferred in turn automatically if the unit is ready to receive the next firmware code file. Note: If you are updating the DP-2310/3010, the sending of sequential multiple files to the unit isn't done automatically. The "Waiting..." display on the PC will not advance to "Executing..." until you set the unit back to USB Firmware Update on the machine to start receiving the next file. See Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode on the next page. For Parallel connected unit: the confirmation screen is displayed when the current firmware code file transfer is finished and there are remaining firmware code files. Click [OK] when the machine is ready to receive the next file.

Page 14

Local Firmware Update Tool (Parallel/USB Port)

Unit information of the Firmware Update Mode: For USB Connected Unit (DP-2310/3010): Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to Service Mode again. Set the unit back to USB Firmware Update after the machine returns to Service Mode and continue the firmware update. When the last firmware code file (PNL) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't re-boot automatically when you select an independent file and the PNL firmware wasn't transferred. Cycle the power Off-On and reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the unit has returned to the Service Mode. For USB Connected Unit (Other models): Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete and rewrite of the firmware code and will return to USB Firmware Update and continue the firmware update automatically. When the last firmware code file (AutoBoot) is received, the unit will re-boot automatically and return to standby. The unit doesn't boot automatically when you select an independent file. (The display returns to Update in Progress) Cycle the power Off-On to reset the unit if the firmware code file transfer is finished and the display shows Completed. For Parallel Connected Unit: Every time the machine finishes receiving a firmware code file, the unit does the delete, rewrite of the firmware code and then boot. Set the unit back to Parallel Firmware Update in Service Mode after boot up, to continue the firmware update.

When the transfers of all the firmware files are finished, click [Finish] to close the tool.

Note: For USB Connected Unit only. When the unit returns to standby, Plug and Play of the printer will popup. Click [Cancel] to close the Printer Plug and Play window.

Page 15

DZZSM00272